+89

Pairk er

9°@ 4 4 Gee

Phat

=o ga =A

“

retkt kes

ee ee

a eee ey

@ tan

i Us @.6)

3. 4-

ree ya err et er)

)e teaee

aS aei

. war Bo!

LéYoheqe

5 8.656

and

ab bes

Pot Heed aed

Ce errs

Ce ee ee

e-F-1-%

erg e

oe "yr cert kt et By

A= ea

WeGennte

ae te

hae

ar bikes

<eca.8

o> 82 gee

Peper ares

us LA

ee eo

eR 5 beG ed Bag.G20

One He bw eee pote

rt rial oe

Lae

=} i"5- a et}

»-

ry ee -@e t3%s.

SP ed ee ey !

¥y Le Pa be 4 } - *

45 8-e% Sete 5

obs t) Pst

hey * tealh= e

r - rer be »e

ie Pyaar M4

« .

tatigedeas

1°

»,

Sag) esate

NeW Bahama.

Gas ee ee

Gahed 4

open ta

We i304

q “ q *

S25 sexe * rite hee

eO3O-G-e0 dois ‘

oo hee

to @

° «ie ¥- Ge

Hiei: enti izagusees:

Petpet eer th tly hee

sintrd-@oushedsdebsece-

~ Qsfa Gea

~t= 4-9

ie Kepetega

S44 Be ¥-@

4 bhi tal “ta

Sarde s-c.ea8-tes

ss pe 4

ft PLE y bs G—% ot Boneh

7 > B~ O= O—O~ o>:

t= 0-4-8

Shinde b-Sahs iF? ye Gln i

pent Bee ied Lar

-§-e-h 4.2

w-* oe Redd del

erry Peo

<8 <

teka@ 4

ahi ge tay >] be -

phe er Prey be tree et =

CEaGad I 5orGre

5 a= ham

yori

21420-*

hse tyebe te

ee pa ht Pi bk tbo

2B Pee Gagoas

seat Etats? 040 ie=8

mos N80, Gn ey -b-8 ee

ae hows 6-4 45455 y :

errs

: ate ra~ de ee

wed= f<deGrhs ge

4 . ene

ont

co]

P ae ae Fe

306 ty he Soy~ly

& esd ye

i- a

3 ae

Si d-4> d29ehea ed:

<3 i Ow * ale

jae

=e en

*o-@-4>4:a-

eb ink eke

owe he Be p= Bag ®

28. e-0

mb B20 We 4 > < §ge

9°93 92 Hebe 6 a> yee ¥ 04

PRR. iit a tae

Ere reeset

“eae

esq ++-6-0

ohee ed

Stel asitetn

ar4aeh

= 436) = 4-8)

8-4 ~\-4

gate

62 4e>k=4—

nae os

Ph} + .]

ee Sree

my om >") =

= Am Ren by hw

wt Poo Pe PS,

S= O<e- pr

9: 9243824

PLIST RD

boi at

tease

PET ht th

sacar

Sh iencsans

by Tasee. sats: —-

new @.4° Ep ihe Boe «

beep hh) re Hoge +a brpnh rarbige eh sitet

5S SeGenawe td "@

ry + myn ee en toe

“+

Per prey peter tr beth yr aee rier at ot Pre er bs

OO ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ty

(20 4s Bee Om Ge nerd :

F984 OO Rw Esl eieG seed ew

« 4% pear eos oer

oer St ee hr ts

Pe or eo eee

eee eee ot ee oe eae

hhh pate ar eB. Dus ar@

“So ee bee a

te ot

ie p =m

wh: nn Ot

1-4 et B41-@

a Yow

Ro 6 ad tm ee

Cw ee

SC ire pe

—.

— oe -%

i inn

ends G2:

y 1 one

reps ie er eer er tf et er ren

a ate 242!

Veteaes

Por er heer er et or

ane 22 S= Sag in@ziaged

cola ae brid

Leb 152

ane

bees

a-6

6 Os OG dw

109th Fo woh acm we!

C ‘9:

o=63 ln IrBa eae

“3

rrr

ret

m a“?

see 2;?

ot br beet Pte hed pel

Sh belebel |

ht ltr

LF -4 eee

Bee so58

Street ls

+e he teas ig 424

mre dere *

as ae

Pale

SB ees,

tae

ou? Be

ret

sats

bSG2 Y

{

soaait

erie brats

oie

detew

asa.

4 2! ae

pr ht et gs eH

le- cht

Cheerer :

‘9- tee Gee

le +4 eae

weaete

Woteeskes 4

Crean

Pytar

Regs at

Siete

€. ~

twste

wv he

eee ee ste se

o.<—<—

rr ors

rerertr ri

S f

Saaiecegss meee

;

be AatUi4s8 ee pe

3335 wte r

ox wet

oh gee

eG r-9 @e

a=a

ree

it So tk

att ek be bea |

B-U-PS as erweas

2e4

Satsy.

> o>

ze ti—4

Rove

*: 9= ry .

éegct-asuees

rete te

eee

26" 32>

Sis a

oo =3 i= Ge

$920 oe

le oe}

rephipder tee

nezegtoni age

Tae Shee!

Me em he

ee hb ae

Se 9+ OS 2 0svEF

sac 6): ORAS al

VE a be -

wy eye i

jute

aire at

ane

LAA

i ane : “a4

oy a ; pee te

: ’ : f ¥: iy hy he

vo . e Ye ry . co oy

i'l oa g F 4 :

be 7 ix i '

‘ . _

eer b ri f

We ee

. a —— a .

2 7 ny ee

Ayala) it | f

‘ , Ay mys A 5H :

. a i

i" are Ie hex: i bin’ {o> :

A ) ‘

- Fi - hy \

. . ;

4 3% ee ,

- . 5 hit

e > 2 ul

‘ £ " Ps i

/ “a “a *

ry “SS . f . A

7 ‘ i y

S - ’ = . bh > a

( = ~ ‘ ’ *.

* re ¥ . \y * J a" ie VS <

Peles, = on Agta aw! Ps 4

7 A foie 4 oe *) 4 ;

A. ry ». Be . ue 3

- 7 h r ee

{

: a a] i

of ; te

z po - |

d bio 5 ¥

' / Fi fi

+ 2 ‘ '

P x i ae

7 q ———

» ies Bulk —a r * '

he =e a ef rs i ‘ «

——— ‘ . ’ g

¢ eae inp yes oh ie

. foe .

= x

~ 7 y Je 3 f

+ , } . .

A .% Te j = '

. Lan 2 oi ; 7 /

4 * .

: y Aa : \

r yair as yy iy —_ “ 4 ~

' j ' 4

; f

. ‘

hl et ‘

5 oot 5

wrt Oe. Wu, yee! Lee | 5

’ ~ e

a J - Fy i -

P. .

, eres ie

’ . J

a ,

i P

5 -

~ a

' 7 Zl iy o .

A é .

* bad ‘ i ;

7 " { aii — *

a y , “ is

ae f nethe ¢ a“ al * me AE 6 ifs - [

' " t=

eS gel ee) OU Dy Dae ae \ é

7 bay hate hes Mes a ane hes baie , ne 7) ‘

"een ; as Ke . ; ; ~ i

’ Fi py a A

“4 y 4 by a

eth f l ;

ey ‘

i vt ; a Ns » ‘ zt - J

Ayn j : A fink

c ’

} ’ ~% x ) . ‘ re - ey

5 wy Way Mase Ge per Ney ous = Pod ed ne

‘ ee i f A

' . - “1 he sé

i 4 = i

Bee BE pi wes ie eee vi vi ah al asl ae ent ee eer Pe ers

la ’ Ss A : 4 — } . ; , :

is: aha yi; SiG ) | ie it as - iv A all ' AB iad A ‘i ys y a he ut a

Vik a i ij aon " , ' i i els,

a he 22 wis: ha i wy Why Tee, Sake aa , ‘ ae Wa? ie tet

3. ae a Te ah ' ee bi oh eee se ea AE Aa ow ett “pl

—s

ay ag

hh) ns

a, ,

COMET Ce vi ar

j ‘ b ’ io

f Va ae i

. hy *

’

' M4 \ ce aa

4 bt ad

‘ Ly

ees ir i

ha a" "ir afi

ies Sh o _

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

VOL. XXXVIII.

PART I.

(Nos. I ro IV,—1869,

With four plates.)

EDITED BY

THE HONORARY SECRETARIES.

* Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men

of science in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing,

and send them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such

communications shall be long intermitted; and it will die away, if they shall

entirely cease.”

Sir Wm. JONES,

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.

1869.

CONTENTS.

—=a FS

No. I.

Page

Further Notes on the Prithirajréyasa.—By F. 8. Growss,

errant etn by AOE i, Sastoe a oc decteias suistoe cwaleacecouel - vases 1

A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects.—By Lieute-

nant W. J. WiItiamson, Assistant Commissioner, Garo

BME ence eta ne Coreen os cemeneled tas dvecaeruscaeccaeelend (sat 14

Text and Translation of a Balandshahr iettotion (with plate |

—By Babu Pratapacuanpra Guoswa, B. A.,..........0 21.

No. I.

On the History of the Burma Race.—By Colonel Sir Arrnur

Puaryrr, K. C. 8. L, C. B., Bengal Staff Corps, ...... 29

The District of Lidiana.—By T. W. H. Toxzort, Hsq., B.C. S. 83

No. III.

Baddéoni and his Works.—By H. Biocumann, Hsq., M. A.,,

Assistant Professor, Calcutta Madrasah, ......... 105

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiraj, ie ‘Chand

Bardai, entitled ‘‘the Marriage with Padmawati,’’ literally

translated from the old Hindi.—By Joun Buames, Hsq,,

15 Le = Pree sateen cath emia da 6 stele Peer a eet ote aing 145

No. IV.

Translations from Chand.—By F. 8. Growsz, Hsq., M. A.,

Nae awe ath selate wise Waal hu cte Milne SecGaiowateiga bys fed svina s.-+ 04. 161

iv Contents.

Beply to. Mr. Growse, y-casdeeesraneseesccdvasandvnro me sa cbewnah ote 170

Some Observations on the Temples of ‘ Razdan” or ‘ Raz-

doing” in the “ Lar’ Pergunnah, Cashmere, (with three

plates).—By Lieut.-Col. D. F. Newaun, R. A.,............ 177

Translations from the Tarikh i Firiz Shahi.—By the late

Masor A. R. Furter, Director of Public Instruction,

Punjab. Communicated by T. W. H. Torsort, Hsq.,

OLLEOLOLOPL IL LL LLP DPPC www"

ERRATA.

Page 88, line 1 for 7. W. Tollort, read T. W. H. Tolbort.

90, ,, 28 for Pdk Pallan, read Pdk Patan.

— 94, ,, 7 from below, for Maland, read Malaud.

—— 100, ,, 5 from below, for dhet chandas, read Chet Chaudas.

—— 103, ,, 6 for north, read month.

—— 104, ,, 11 for Harishta; read Firishtah.

ERRATA IN PART I. 1868.

Page 8, 1. 16, for 1428 to 1445, read 1457 to 1474.

52, 1. 12, for dried, read dried, white.

— |. 13, for dried, read dried, black.

120, last line, for Batesvi, read Bateswar.

121, 3rd line, for Gandhan read Gandharv:

121, Ath line, for Kalysur read Kalyesur.

121, 5th line, for xzst read niot.

121, 8th line, for Paninko read Raninko.

121, 18th line, for Chanhdn read Chauhan.

122, 9th line et passim for Kharginpur read Kharjirpur.

126, 14th line, for Karuchandra read Karnchandra.

133, 3rd line, for chhand read chhona.

133, 5th line, for Sandha read Saudha.

133, 6th line, for chhanhani read chhauhani.

133, 7th line, for Varamchi read Vararuchi.

133, 16th line, for Rawran read Raura.

133, last line, for Sangins read Sanguis.

2 Nes _ ‘ A. Foy

. \ are ae Py. ds

wats 4% 47, at

‘ Sean cant

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

—o—

Part L—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &.

No. I.—1869.

Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa.—By F.S. Growsz, Esq., JL, A.

(Continued from Vol. XXXVII, page 134.)

[Received 17th February, 1869. ]

My former paper on the poems of Chand Barday was little more

than a bare literal translation, which necessarily repeated the involved

style of the original, and left the real points of interest anything but

obvious to the casual reader. To remedy this defect, I now propose

before proceeding any further in the MS., to indicate some of

those features in the first Canto which appear to me most worthy of

attention. |

The shape into which the poem is thrown, is curious. The whole

of it, with the exception of the first 120 introductory lines, is sup-

posed to be a prophecy declared in the remote past by the great sage

Vyasa to King Anangpdl, who solicits further information whenever

there occurs a pause in the narrative. The clumsiness of this device,

might be considered an indication of antiquity; but in my opinion

it is rather due to an affected imitation of the style of the Puranas,

which are invariably cast in the form of a dialogue.

The bard begins by announcing his intention to compose a work

equal in extent to the Mahabharat, and which he trusts will soon

become equally renowned, and make the name of Chand as glorious

y4 Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa, [No. 1,

as that of Vyasa, since Prithiraj, the hero to be celebrated, Was no

whit inferior to Duryodhan. He then relates how Anangpal, guided

by a happy omen, founded the citadel of Dilli, and sunk an iron

column so deeply in the ground, that its point entered into the fore-

head of Seshnag. Upon the stability of this pillar depended the

permanence of the Tomar dynasty; yet the king, impressed by the

pretended ineredulity of Takshak, Seshnag’s brother, who came to him

in the disguise of a Brahman, allows the pillar to be moved. Terri-

fied at the portents of an impending catastrophe which follow upon

his rash act, Anangpal seeks consolation from Vyasa, who thereupon

discloses to him the whole future course of events, saying :

The Tomar dynasty shall eventually be succeeded by the Chauhans,

the latter -by the Muhammadans. The last and greatest king of

the Chauhans shall be Prithiréj. He shall wage many glorious wars ;

in particular, one with the Chandel king of Mahoba. Now the

origin of the Chandels shall be on this wise: The Gaur line of

kings at Kasi is succeeded by the Gaharwars, Karnchandra, Ran-

sifih, Jagannath, Ransiih I1., Surasifh and Indrajit. In the court of

this last monarch isa Brahman, Hemraj. (In another passage this

name is written Hansraéj.) The moon-god becomes enamoured of

his daughter Hemavati. The offspring of this guilty union, Chandta-

brahma, becomes the special favourite of heaven, and to console the

mother for her disgrace, Brahma promises that her sons from gener-

ation to generation shall sit upon the throne so long as they retain the

word Brahma as an affix to their name. Chandra-brahma subdues the

territory of Kasi, founds Kalinjar and Mahoba, and is warned in a vision

that his family shall reign at Mahoba for 20 generations. He is suc-

eeeded by Bar-brahma, and he again by Par-brahma and so on for 19

generations, till Parmal the 20th in descent from the moon-god, being

ashamed of his family origin, drops the name of Brahma. In conse-

quence, he is deserted by the favour of heaven, and in the »war with

Prithiraj is worsted by that monarch. The particulars of this war

form the subject of the Mahoba-Khand.

T have given the above argument of the poem in order to shew

that, however abrupt in execution, it has been deliberately planned,

and is built upon a wide and definite basis. I also observe that

Babu Rajendra Lal Mittra, the learned Philological Secretary, who

1869.] Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. 8

was kind enough to write a brief abstract of my translation when he

_ laid it before the meeting in October, (see Proceedings for that month,

page 246) has failed to catch the thread of the narrative. He evi-

dently considers the legend of Hemavati and the moon as a subor-

dinate incident ; whereas it is in fact the real opening of the drama,

to which the story of Anangpal and the iron column is only the

prologue. I notice this in no spirit of hyper-criticism, but only as

my excuse for now repeating in brief what my translation had already

shewn in extenso.

The legend with regard to the origin of the Chandels is curious,

as explaining the derivation of the word. Chandel, or Chander, the

moon-born, is a patronymic precisely similar in form to chachera,

the son of a chacha, 7. e. acousin. (This latter word is now almost

banished from polite language, in order to make room for the vile

mongrel, chacha-zad.) It also explains a genealogical difficulty men-

tioned by Sir H. Elliot, in his Glossary, who says: ‘‘ Though the

Chandels are styled Sombansi, they are not considered to be of pure

descent, and their sons are carefully excluded from marriages with

the higher classes.” The legend makes it clear, how that in one

sense they are truly sombansi, that word being absolutely identical

in meaning with chandel, while at the same time their descent is

impure.

As Chandra- biel, the great founder of the race, had a

Brahmani for his mother, while his reputed father was the moon,

a god more closely connected with Brahmans than Kcshatriyas, it

does not appear, on the face of the legend, how the Chandels can claim

to be Thakurs at all. Buta near though unexplained relationship,

is always implied to exist between the Chandels and the Gaharwar

Thakurs; and as Chandra-brahma’s putative father is clearly mythical,

while it is known that he was born ina Gaharwér court, it may be

presumed that his real father wasa Gaharwar. Thus too, his first

act on acquiring power, was to avenge his mother’s fall by expelling

the Gaharwars from Kasi.

The particulars with regard to the succession of dynasties and

individual kings at Kasi are, I believe, novel, and may be of some

historical value. Only one dynasty of Kasi kings is specified in the

Puranas.

4 Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. [No. 1,

In connection with Kalinjar, mention is made of a famous tirtha,

called in the Benares MS. Mrigadhdra (Vol. XXXVII. page 180).

This I imagine must be a clerical error for Wrigd-dava, the deer-forest,

the legend regarding which place is given in an Appendix to Sher-

ring’s Sacred City of the Hindus.

I have lately received two MS. fragments of the Prithiraj-rayasa,

which have been hunted up for me by Raja Lakshman Sith (a Rahtor

Thakur) of this district. The one consists of 55 folio pages and is

entitled ‘‘ Sri Kabi Chand virachite Prathiraj-réisai ke bari beri raja

grahano nama kahao.” The date is Sambat 1856. It refers to

évents in the Muhammadan war, and I have not yet discovered any

corresponding section in the Benares text. The second MS. consists

of 110 octavo pages, and is headed simply ‘‘Samao Mahobe ko.”

The title is given more fully at the end thus “ Sri Mahobe juddh

r4jé Parimél Prithiraéj Mahobe-Khand varnanam Alha-Khand Chand

Kabi virachitam.’’ The date of the copy is 1881, Sambat.

It omits the introductory legend of Anangpal and the Iron Pillar,

with the genealogies of the Chandels and Banaphars, which constitute

the two first cantos of the Benares MS., and relates instead how

Prithiraj carried off Padmavati, the daughter of Prince Padma-sen,

from Samud-Sikhari, a strong fort in the east.* On his way back

to Dilli, he falls in with the Pathan forces under Sahab-ud-din and

Momrez Khan of Khurasény and defeats them with great loss. He

is obliged however to leave 50 of his own wounded on the field,

who with a few other Rajputs under Gun-manjari, Kanak Sith

and Sardar lose their way and wander off to Mahoba, where they

proceed to encamp in one of king Parmal’s gardens. All this is omit-

ted from the Benares MS., the third canto of which begins in a very

confused way with the arrival of the 50 wounded men at Mahoba.

The rape of Padmavati and the engagement with the Muhammadans

receive only such casual mention as would be quite unintelligible, if

the other MS. had not supplied the missing details.

From the 8rd to the 13th canto, the two narratives may be said

to coincide, since with the exception of a very few occasional lines,

* The date is given as 1180 Saka—Gyara Saidas bis Sakha Sambat pari-

manam—this must be an error, unless some local era is intended,

+ In describing the Muhammadan army, occurs the following line, Panch

sahas aswar, agenti golam, 7. e. 5000 horse and artillery innumerable.

-1869.] Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. 5

the Mainpuri MS. contains nothing which is not also to be found in

the Benares MS. It omits, however, a great deal; yet the excision

is generally so cleverly made, that the loss would not be noticed, were

there no other copy at hand for collation. Take the following pas-

sage as a specimen (Mainpuri MS. page 29).

“‘The army of the Chauhéns has come ready for battle; prepare

ye to meet them. Leave untried neither charm nor spell, nor aught

else that may avail.” Spoke Queen Malhan and said: ‘“ Delay the

battle, O king, for two months ; send Jaganak to summon Alhan, and

collect the materials of war.’”’ All accepted the Queen’s advice, say-

ing, “ Make proffers of friendship to Prithiraj, send Jalhan to present

him with a nazr, and invite him to an interview.” So they sent

5000 leaves of betel, &c., &c.* These ten lines are coherent enough,

but in the Benares MS., canto 8, they are widely scattered ; 20 addi-

tional lines occur after the word ‘avail ;’ 70 after ‘ war,’ and 8 after

‘interview.’

The way in which these two MSS. mutually supply each othev’s

deficiencies, while at first sight they appear altogether dissimilar, is

highly interesting ; since it affords a complete refutation to a theory

which has prevailed in some quarters, wz. that such fragmentary

pieces form the genuine Chand ballads, and that the complete poem

is a much later and comparatively worthless compilation. The com-

parison now made, shews in the clearest light that the two MSS. under

consideration, and it may be presumed their fellows also, have been

extracted from some one large and ancient original; and that the

great epic, in some such form as we see it in the Agra copy, is not

an accretion of ballads, but the genuine production ofa single poet,

which all later generations of bards have freely plundered.

Wherever the two MSS. coincide, the verbal differences of reading

are found to be very numerous; as will appear from inspection of the

following parallel passages, wherein is described the commencement

of Parmal’s attack on the 50 wounded Chauhans, who had encamped

in one of the royal gardens.

* In the list of offerings occur the words ‘badhtikh, barakshi:’ the latter

no doubt is for barchhi, a spear ; the former perhaps a corruption of badhaka,

destructive, and the origin of the modern bandiék, a gun, the derivation of

which word has never before been ascertained. In the Benares MS. the

corresponding word is mahoksh, an ox,

Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. [No. 1,

Extract from page 14 of Raja Lakshman Sidh’s MS.

genic faaufcamsgayeta ©

wWaaqciqasiagiattst

PAFTAMALAS ATL

FAG PRTG TIAST

PUHCAACIATS ASX

QANCAE AACA STE

fasifaaqaatasga

PAGBATAS IR SHA

Wa eeciaqaagqTas

VALaLalY Sulegq FS

eatcauatraaqgua

quanta Wey Say BT

RACHA MaATAe

gaufcarsaeitafaae

GATS UMASS leas

atiata HaUSeT SUIS

HIS IAa as aAS

yotatasaaeatsae

Talafaarifacaaag

AGlUACSACHaA

Maa Aas TAA

fuicaqaadaetis

favisaciedi efeaee

fascaqaqAaeaTe

fasay BxaelTasaa

SHlea Blac aaa

VUALaTAgl Ws Hz

faaifaa arelaaretaue

USBI RlTaAtlaas

RLS SALAS tatyaa

1869. ] Further Notes on the Prithidg-rayasa, 7

acqe xTEem aati]

qomae afasgafaciy

izaflatautufaatwaefe

POMATIEA Ce TAle

Here follows the corresponding passage from canto III. of the

Benares MS.

Stadteia faducawsqadics

qTaaTTaasaAalst

Ge Aa ACAD IGL

qYITS MITA SNSe

WABCAINCTA TS AaIE

BARA CIHCAGE

faarsiaaancasgqa

GaqeaRgaAIHKA

TAlelCelaAIIIES

gufcaaly Sufcaesy

SACHA aA gaAKsE

Sa TRA GUIRY BE

GACH TAGAMAIVEe

qarmearaacifaage

$9 afaauaereuera

HAlCApAAsT AGATA

PAWS AAAS Steer

alata qIWSasIra

mat UfuTITatAS ats

qawuaqanecaada

AGIHBACSACSaA

ate fants naalaaele

UZ ARAMIETTTIGASTE

The present disjointed state of these poems, affords a very striking

parallel to the supposed condition of the Homeric ballads, before they

were reduced to a definite canon by Pisistratus; and the Homer of

8 Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. [No. 1,

Rajputana is a title most applicable to Chand, in a sense beyond that

which was originally intended. On comparing the above extracts,

it will be seen, that each is largely explanatory of the other. The

short Mainpuri MS., in several places, presents the preferable reading,

and besides supplying the missing half of one couplet, gives ten addi-

tional lines which obviate an awkward break in the narrative. There

can be little doubt that every district in the North-West, if carefully

searched, would yield some three or four similar fragments; and it is

obviously desirable that as many of these as possible should be collated,

before the Society commits itself to the adoption of a standard text.

In all cases, the actual transcript will be of modern date, but it may

often have been taken from an older original than that which is re-

presented ‘by the complete copies of the poem. ‘The settlement officer

of an adjoining district has been, I believe, engaged for some time

past in collecting such fragments of the Alha-Khand, as are popularly

current amongst the people in that neighbourhood, and proposes to

give an English abstract of their contents. His main object is to

illustrate the tone of local traditions; but there can be little doubt that

the result of his enquiries will have large philological interest as well.

A variety of causes combine to render it likely that many years

will elapse before a satisfactory edition of the Prithitraj-rayasa can be

prepared, Meanwhile, I propose to forward from time to time for

insertion’in the Society’s Journal, translations of such portions of the

poem as seem to possess most intrinsic interest, That such a course

will not be unacceptable to the small world of Oriental scholars,

IT infer from the remarks made by the learned and most observant

censor of Indian literary progress, M. Garcin de Tassy, who in his

interesting and exhaustive review for 1868, speaks of the Prithiréj-

rayasa, In connexion with my proposal for its publication, as ‘ ouvrage

d’une inestimable valeur, non seulement pour l’histoire, mais pour la

philologie,’ and concludes by expressing a hope ‘ que ce poéme sera

enfin edite, et qu’on songera aussi & en donner une traduction com-

pléte accompagnée d’éclaircissements satisfaisants.’ The completion

of such a translation may be facilitated by my series of selections.

As Alha and Udal are far the most famous characters in the Mahoba

war, I proceed to translate the close af the second canto wherein they

are first brought upon the stage.

1869.] Further Notes on the Prithiraj-rdyasa. 9

Translation of the latter part of Canto II.

‘Thus has been told the full genealogy of the Chandels and Gahar-

wars till the incarnation of Valla and Salla in the Kali Yug of crea-

tion.” Then the stout-hearted king listens while Vyasa declares

their pedigree. ‘The two heroes Salla and Valla are manifested

in the Banaphar line. Chinté-mani in the hope of a son became

absorbed in divine contemplation, and having with his own hands

clean severed his head from his body, laid it at Bhava’s feet.* For

the space of 12 years Chinté-mani had served S’iva: K4li’s lord

was gratified at his devotion and taking the head in his hands re-

united it to the body. Chintaé-mani sprung to life again; S’ambhu

called him to his feet: ‘I am well pleased with thee for ever, ask

of me three boons.” Said Chinta-mani, ‘“ The first boon, an army ;

the second, gallant leaders; and third, may the sovereignty remain

for ever in the house of the Chandels.” “In thy family, Chinté-mani,

brave heroes are born, such as never have been, nor yet shall be.

The boon that thou hast desired, I have granted ;” and with a smile,

the lord of the five elementst+ vanished. 3

In the palace of Chandra-brahma} flourished Chinté-mani, a second

Agastya, and by the grace of Siva began the series of the incarnations

of Valla. After Chandra-brahma arose other glorious kings, and

gallant heroes of the Banaphar line ever commanded their armies.§

Chinté-mani and Sasipal served King Chandra-brahma: when Jagat-

brahma reigned, Makarand was his trusty counsellor. In the time

* The original stands thus: Apno sir chhin app kar kal bhi 4g4 ai. Here

app may be for apne, in which case kar will mean hands; or it may stand for

arp, when app kar will be equivalent to arpan kurke. The four words at the

end of the line are at first sight very perplexing; but kal is little more than

an expletive signifying well or clean, and bh% should be written bhava, the vowel

having heen substituted for the cognate consonant.

+ Bhitpati, lord of the 5 elements. It might also also be rendered ‘lord of

departed spirits ;’ but the former sense appears to me preferable ; compare the

opening lines of the Sakuntala.

{ In the original, Chandra-brahma is here called Sasi-brahma, and further

on, Vidhu-brahma; Chandra, Sasi and Vidhu being synonymous terms,

The text runs thus: Chinté-mani Sasi-brahma ghar bhaye pragati parwan:

but this does not give a very satisfactory meaning, and therefore for pragati

I have substituted agati (Prakrit for Agastya as shewn by the name of a village,

Agati-sarde on the borders of this district). The difference between yuyfe

and watz is almost imperceptible. Parwdn stands of course for praman.

§ ‘Commanders of armies’ balddhiksh, for balddhyaksh, rather an unusual

word,

10 Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. [No. 1,

of Bér-brahma Ankur* was minister; the adviser of Satya-brahma

was the bold Sad4-Chandra.t The generous knight Alha was ennobled

by the son of Kirat. From Chandra-brahma to Parmél, there was

always a Banaphar in the king’s palace. Chinté-mani was famous on

earth ; his son was the bold Sasipaél; then came Kripa-chand and

Sabha-chand ; Sabhé-chand’s son was the fierce Makarand. After

him, the world-renowned Akrir. He begat the heroic Abhayraj,

whose son was the valiant Makarand, spoiling the enemy in the crush

Of DAtheie ern sas ety s faithful servant of the Chandel king. His son was

Dipchand, perfect in mind and body, a fountain of joy. He begat

Santhira, the best of sons, of incomparable prowess on earth. His son

was Baghel, winner of many spoils, and his son the famous Jasrath.§

To him were born the twin heroes, Alha and Udal, who, terrible

in their wrath, subdued the whole world. In Dasahar’s house were

manifested the heroic pair Alha and Udal; in their persons Salla and

Valla became incarnate in the Bandphar line. Heaven was gracious

to the land, gave them the arrow of Garur, and for a second boon

an army too vast to be numbered. Finding them ever wakeful to serve

him with body and soul, Gorakhnath bestowed upon them weapons

of offence and defence, and made them immortal upon earth. The

sons of Suddh-Karan and Jam-Karan were Budhjan and Janpal, to

whom were born in the world Mahipal and Bhuvapal.|| They had

only to shew themselves to secure submission, and kings obedient

to their orders loved them as the apple of their eye.

He who with attentive ears hears the origin of the family of

Chandra-brahma, shall receive of Sri Padmavati fortune and success.

He who thrice hears with attention the genealogy of Chandra-brahma,

shall obtain whatever blessings are within the reach of humanity,

shall have wife and children and all good things on earth, and no

J * ¢ Ankur,’ This no doubt should be Akrié,a name which oecurs lower

"+ € Sadé chandra” This and Sabhd-chand, which occurs below, evidently

denote the same individual: without reference to another MS. it is impossible

to say which is the correct form. Sy

t Here I have omitted one line which defies all interpretation: farqaiaa-

SaTIsIStIH, It is probably corrupt.

§ ‘ Jasrath.’ Called below Dasahar.

|| This couplet is obscure, and the words given as proper names may be

only epithets , but Mahipal and Bhuvap4al are mentioned in a later canto as

relations of Alha and Udal.

1869. | Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. 1L

sickness shall ever approach his immaculate body. Knowing this

to be the reward, repeat the legend of the moon-god; in no other

way can such a result be obtained. Wealth shall abound, your house

shall stand fast, and your’s shall be the victory in the battle. Who-

ever shall thrice hear the legend of Chandra-brahma, though childless,

he shall have a son with abundance of wealth in a strong house

What Vyasa declared to Anangpal, that Chand repeats to the king’s

family.* Now the bard} relates in lengthened strain the war between

the Chandels and Chauhans.

The subject of the third canto has been already indicated. Par-

mal assembles a force of Chandels, Solankhis, Jadavs, Gaharwars,

Gahlots, Bais Thakurs, Jhangras and Baghels against the 50 wound-

ed Chauhans, and at length succeeds in cutting them to pieces, but

not until his army has sustained a loss of 4000 men! The canto

concludes as follows :

Translation of the latter part of Canto ITT.

Alhan went home and there in the presence of Udal declared his

secret thoughts to his mother: ‘ The king is dull of soul; this land,

nay, the whole world knows it; his judgment is gone, he listens only

to Mahil.”” Divalde, on hearing the sound speech of her son Alhan,

said “‘ Regard not the errors of the king, but do your duty to your

lord. Hanuman did his master faithful service; the whole world

reverences Rama’s messenger. Though the king has lost his senses, do

not you break his orders.” Alhan having heard his mother’s advice

went to the Court. The king rose trembling, all the Chandel princes

made obeisance. Alhan enters the council-chamber and addresses

Parmal: ‘ The wounded have been wantonly slain, and their goods

plundered. Cursed, cursed be the slaughter of the wounded, and the

death of men whose lives should have been held sacred. Hear my

warning, the name of Kshatriya has been disgraced.” All good

men rejoiced as they heard Alhan’s stern speech, but it fell as a

thunder-bolt on the heart of the king. Says the king Mahil in a rage :

“Hear, son of Dasarath, you have spoken bitter words to a king, in

* ‘The king’s family. This I take to be meaning of the word rdwal,

Prakrit for rdjakula. Or it may be simply ‘ you,’ as rawrauw.

+ ©The bard.’ In the original rdy, a word which most bhdats at the present

day take as an affix to their name.

12 Further Notes on the Prithiraj-rdyasa. [No. 1,

whose power are all things.” Alhan turned upon the king Mahil

with an angry glare in hig eyes; king Parmal smiled, while his

nobles grasped their bows. Not without calculation did Alhan re-

prove the king: fate has had its course, who now can undo it?

The only two Persian words in this passage are darbdr and kamdn.

They are rather frequent in the earlier part of the canto, which

contains the following: hukm, farmdan, tegh, bagh, mudf, arz,

tamdsha.

I cannot conclude this paper without one remark on a subject

which I have handled so often, that I fear it has become tedious.

I mean the comparative claims of Hindi and Urdu to be considered

the vernacular of modern India. When I wrote the above trans-

lations, I was in camp at a small town, or rather village, in the Main-

puri district. Finding my way through the text by no means clear,

I enquired if there was any Pandit in the place. It appeared that

there was none. But in the course of the morning, four shop-keepers

from the bazar came in to see me, who said they had a taste for

books. The passage was read aloud by one of the number, and

I found that all were able to follow the general meaning and, when

any difficulty occurred, could offer some suggestion, which, however

defective in accuracy of scholarship, was often conducive to the true

interpretation. Ihave thus been enabled to present the translation.

in a more complete form than would, I believe, have been possible for

any single unaided European scholar. Not one of my four friends was

a professional Pandit, nor claimed acquaintance with any language

beyond his own mother-tongue ; and it must further be remembered,

that the Prithiraj-rayasa is a work of very considerable antiquity.

This little incident shews in the very strongest light, that Hindi is

still to the present day, and always has been, the real vernacular of

modern India, that is to say, the lahguage ordinarily used by the

middle classes and best understood by them. Urdu, no doubt, is

largely spoken in the North-West Provinces, and has enriched collo-

quial speech with many words which it would now be pedantry to

condemn ; but precisely in the same way, English is largely spoken

in the neighbourhood of Calcutta, and has had a deep influence in the

formation of the modern Bengali idiom. Yet English still remains

a foreign language and so does Urdu. I confidently challenge my

1869.] Further Notes on the Prithirdj-rdyasa. 13

kindly critic M. Garein de Tassy to produce a parallel instance on

his side of the question, and shew how, on finding some obscure Per-

sian or Urdu book more than he could manage, he called in two or

three chance baniyas from the bazar, and received from them a satis-

factory solution of his difficulties. Till this has been done, I must

hold to my old convictions, and base thereupon a practical theory,

viz. that popular education should be imparted through the medium

of the vernacular Hindi; and, if it is, as I believe it to be, desir-

able to teach a second language, this foreign language should benot

Urdu, the memorial of an obsolete dynasty, but, in accordance with

immemorial Indian usage, the language of the dominant power, that

is to say at the present time, English.

14 A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects. No. 1,

A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects, by Lieutenant

W. J. Wititamson, Assistant Commissioner, Garo Hills.

Hye.

English. Garo. Konch.

One. Sa. Gasak.

Two, Ginni. Dii.

Three. Githam. Tin,

Four. Bri. Char.

Five. Bana. Panch.

Six. Dok. Choy.

Seven. Chhinni. Sat.

Hight. Chet. At.

Nine. Siku. Nau.

Ten. Chikii. Das.

Twenty. Khol. Kori.

Fifty. Kholchaii ginnichhi. Panchas.

Hundred, Richesa. Ek Sau.

I, Ana. An.

We. China. Nin,

Thou. Na. Ni.

He. Bi. V4.

They. Bisai. Ujarun.

Of me. Anni. Ani.

Of us. Chinn. Nini.

Of thine. Naini. Nini.

Of you. Nashafini. Niruiini.

Of him. Bini. Vani.

Of them, Bishoini. Ujurufini.

Mine. Anni. Ani.

Our. Chinnf. Nunni.

Thine. Nanni. Nini.

Your. Naonni. Nirdnni.

His. Bint. Uni.

Theirs. Bishonni. rarunni.

Hand. Jak. Chak.

Foot. J achok. Jatén.

Nose. Gin. Nakina.

Mukrun. Makin.

1869.

English.

Mouth.

Tooth.

Far,

Hair.

Head.

Tongue.

Belly.

Back.

Tron,

Gold.

Silver.

Go.

Eat.

Sit.

Father.

Mother.

Brother.

Sister.

Man.

Woman.

Wife.

Child.

Daughter.

Slave.

Cultivator.

Shepherd.

God.

Devil.

Come.

Best.

Stand.

Sun.

Moon.

Fire.

Water.

House.

Garo.

Kushik.

Wa.

Nachil.

Khinni.

S’khu.

Sri.

Bikma.

Janil.

Sil

Sona.

Rupa.

Rian.

Chha.

Asun.

Aja.

Ama.

Ada.

Ano.

Mande.

Mechiksa.

Jik.

Pisa.

Denichikpisa.

Nokhol.

Gémnimande.

Menda Rakwél.

Saljon.

Mutti.

Riba.

Nambatta.

Chaden.

Sal.

Jajun.

Wal.

Chhi.

Nok.

A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects. 15

Konch.

Kakham.

Pha.

Nakal.

Khau.

Dhakam.

Thelai.

Ok.

Kanju.

Loa.

Sona.

Rupa.

Lei.

Sa.

Mostn.

Awa.

Ame.

Bhai.

Janau.

Marok.

Magju.

Jugyu.

Sasa.

M4gyu sasa.

Ghulam.

Grihastimurg.

Bhera RakwéAl.

Tshwor.

Why.

Phay.

Sabse Penim.

Kharatun.

Rashan.

Narek.

War.

Ti.

Nok.

16 A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects. — [No. 1,

English. Garo. Konch.

Horse. Ghora. Ghora.

Cow. Machi. Machi.

Dog. Achak. Kwai.

Cat. Menun. Meyan.

Cock. Dho. Thak.

Duck. Dhoraja. Hansak.

Ass. . Unknown. Same as Bengali.

Camel. Ditto. Ditto.

Bird. Dho. Thak.

To die. Sina. Thina.

To give. Rona. Lakhau.

Run. _ Thenri. Thalak.

Up. Sakha. Kara.

Near. Shefan. Dakan.

Who Sa. Chan.

And. Ara. Ara.

Yes. Hoe. Han.

Down. Khama, Kama.

Far. Chela. Janau.

What. Tnhau. Atawa.

But

No. Danja. Era.

Before. Skun. Age.

Behind. Jaman. Pase.

Why. Mauna. Atani.

ait: Ba. Jadi.

Alas. Achai. Hai.

A father. Afasa. Awagusuk.

Two fathers. Afaginni. Awaduita.

Of a father. Afani. Awani. ;

Fathers. Afadhran. Awabren.

Of fathers. Afadhranni. Awabrénni.

To a father. Afakho. Awani.

To fathers. Afadhraikho. Awabrénnf,

From a father. Afanikho. Awajikin.

From fathers. Aiadhrdikho. Awabréinijikia.

1869.] A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects. 17

English.

One daughter.

Two daughters.

Daughters.

Of a daughter.

Of daughters.

To a daughter.

To daughters.

From a daughter.

From daughters.

A good man.

Two good men.

Good men.

Of a good man.

Of good men.

To a good man.

To good men.

From a good man. —

From good men.

A good woman.

Good women.

A bad boy.

A bad gil.

Good.

Better.

Best.

Garo. Konch.

Demichikpisa. Magj4 sas.

Demichikakginni. Magji s4sa ddijun.

Demichikdraa, Magjtt sasa gata,

Demichikni, Magjtt sdsani

Demichikdréini. Magji s4sé gatani.

Demichikkho. Magy sdsant.

Demichikdrénkho. Magy sas4 gdtani

Demichiknikho. Magjt sdsant jikii.

Demichikdrafinikho. Magji s4sa gatanijikin.

Mande nama. Murg penim.

Mande akguini nama. Murg didi jun penim.

Mandenama dhran. Murg penim gata.

Nama mandeni. Murg penim ni.

Nama mande dhraéfini.- Mure penim gatani.

Nama mandekho. [kho. Murg penim ni.

Nama mande dhranni- Murg penim gatani.

Nama mandenikho. Murg penim nijikin.

Nama mandedrannikho. Murg penim nijikin,

Nama michiksa. Magji penim.

Nama michikdran. Magy penim gata.

Pisa aksa namja. Sasa gusuk négta,

Michikpisa aksa namja. Magyii s4s4 cusuk nagta

Nama. Penim.

or) Pr)

oP) 7

Comparison formed thus,—

A good man.

A better man.

The best man.

High.

Higher.

Highest.

A horse.

One bull.

A dog.

Nama mande. Murg penim.

Yndibé nama mande. Tyanif chay {@ penim

murg.

Tndibé némbatta mande. Sab se {4 penim murg.

Chua. Chia,

Tndibaé chia. Tyaénti chay {4 chia.

Indiba chibata. Sab se 14 chia.

Ghora mansa. Ghora gusuk,

Machubija mansa. Damra gusuk.

Achak mansa. Kwai gusuk.

18 A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects.

English,

One male goat.

A male deer.

A mare.

A cow.

A bitch.

A she-goat.

A female deer.

Horses.

Bulls.

Dogs.

Bitches. .

Goats.

Deer.

T am.

Thou art.

He is.

We are.

You are.

They are.

I was.

Thou wast.

He was.

We were.

You were.

They were.

Be.

To be.

Being.

Having been.

I may be.

I shall be.

Beat.

To beat.

Beating.

Having beaten.

Garo.

Dobok bijé mansa.

Machuk bija.

Ghora bima.

Macht bima.

Achak bima.

Dobok bima.

Machuk bima.

Ghora dhran.

Machubija dhran.

Achak dhran.

Achak bimé dhran.

Dobok dhran.

Machuk dhran.

Ana hon.

Na hon.

Biya hon.

China hon.

Nashon hon.

Bishon hoi.

Ana duhd mui.

Na dunaé mun.

Biyé duié mun.

Chihé duhé mun.

Nashon dunia mun.

Bishoh duna mun.

Hona.

Hone.

Honimiii.

And honda manua.

Ané hofua.

Dok.

Dokna.

Doke.

Doke mun.

Konch.

Purdn panta gusuk.

Machuk panta.

Ghord magju.

Machu gai.

Kwai magji, or kwai

jubura.

Purrdin panti.

Machuk panti.

Ghora gata.

Machu bullud gata.

Kwai gata.

Kwai magji gata,

Purdn gata.

Machuk gata.

An donna,

Ni don.

U4 don.

Nin donna.

Niriin don.

Ujarun don.

An tonba.

Ni tonba.

U4 tonba.

Nui tonba.

Nirun tonba.

Jirun tonba.

Dona.

Done.

Donimon. =;

An don mana.

An dona.

Tok.

T okni.

Toke.

Tokemun.

[No. 1,

1839.] A Vocabulary of the Garo and Koneh Dialects. 19

} English. Garo. Konch.

I am beating. Afia doktiia. An toktu.

Thou beatest. Na dokuna. Ni toktd.

He beats. Biya dokuna. U4 toktu.

We are beating. Chiné dokuna. Nin toktt.

You are beating. Nashon doktfa. Nirtin toktu.

They are beating. Bishon dokina. "arun toktu.

I beat. Ana dokna. An tokna.

I was beating. And dokifamin. An tokunba.

I had beaten. Ana dokémuf. An tokbémun.

I may beat. Ana doknabaduna. An toknibatoa.

T shall beat. Ana doknta. An tokné.

I should beat. Ana doknémui. An toknémunh.

I am beaten. Afié dok& mafichéjok. An tok mAsasi.

I was beaten. And dok manchébajok. An tok masapaisi.

T shall be beaten. And dok manchéntié An tok masana.

I go. Ania ridfina. An laina.

Thou goest. Na riiia. Ni laitu.

He goes, Biya rivna. U4 laita.

I went. Ana ridiijok. An laisi.

Thou wentest. Na ridfijok. Ni laisi.

He went. Biya rianjok. U4 laisi.

Go. Rian. Lai.

Going. Riana. Lainiyai.

Gone. Riane. Laimin.

What is yourname? Naff mai Bimtn? Nini 4ta min?

How old is the horse? Y4 ghora basik bilsi IT ghora koy bossorni.

sani ?

How far is it from here Kashmir basik shel4? Kashmir bisin janu?

to Cashmir ?

How many sons are Nanféii nokobdsikpisa Nini awani nokai koy

there inyourfather’s méande 4ksa? jon sdsa murg?

house ?

I have walked a long Dal 4n4 cheldsdni ra4- Tini 4n panai durni ji-

way to-day. mi ribajok. kin lajum paisi.

The son of my uncle Ani 4inni pis4 44 mi- Ani tdntini sdsdwa i

is married to her chiksini 4nékho jik méagjani janau joni

sister. donjok. biya raksi.

20 A Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects. [No. 1,

English. Garo. Konch.

In the house is the Noknina ghoré gupuk- Nok bhiture ghure bok-

saddle of the white ni jai dina. niyani jin toa.

horse.

Put the saddle on his Bini janilé jin gatbo. Uaéni kinjdai jin lakha.

back.

T have beaten his son Bina pisdko 4né bane Uni sdsAwau an panai

with many stripes. doketa. toka suksi.

He is grazing the cat- Haden sdékau machi Hakau kéraéway machu

tle on thetop of the moga tuna. datauti.

hill.

He issitting onahorse Ua bol Jafén ghorau U4 pénchiifiai ghorau-

under that tree. asane dina. wai masunaéy tanta.

His brother is taller Bini ada bini 4bi gipa- U’ani bhai aani jhanow-

than his sister. naba dhala. niba mata.

The price of that is Vani dam gonsa ddulli. Vani dam di taka ek

two rupees and a adulli.

half.

My father lives in that Hai Ua nok chonau U4 nok pulawe ani awa

small house. anni 4f4 duna. tona.

Give this rupee to him. I’ daié biko ron. I taka Gani lakha.

Take those rupees from Y dana bicha rabha. I taka tani la.

hin.

Beat him well and Biko name dokbo aralyani khub tok ara kht-

bind him withropes. bagacha kha donbo. —rugati khaitan.

Draw water from the Khia nikho chi khobo. Khuani tika khon.

well.

Walk before me. Anniskun ri. Ani age le.

Whose boy comes be- Sani pis ndnni jamani Chani sasa nini pase

hind you? ribauna? ° paitu ?

From whom did you Udko sanikho brira? Uau chani gatai purla-

buy that ? tané ?

From a shop-keeper Shonni dékandér st bri- Ganwni dukandar niyai

of the village. ra. purlatanai.

RRP ARRAY nnn

see,

oe.

eo te

te:

aan ee

- — vA i “

sn ‘

LE aka bel lane eh ‘NOLLGINOSNI “UVHVHSANV IVE

‘900 S,[BteMeN 1OAAAING 9G} 4 ‘OOUTZO40Tg

TraD agus ygehs BEE a

é mah ery fey eyes phe ee aa, hag Siti TaN

Gare ERAN Bie y eo ccnepy aS mp Koh |

: Visteon Bara Wee S BY) Pee DAB) UE ACSA apr eo By Sh. 4

| Sanat AY O}6) DIB LS UES evel: |

spe gly BiCby SLES ey gun es ES, SDawwwrse |

MOL S):-repicd nels Lyth man ate SSRN | ‘a

p pS ob riebek ete o: PDS EI bP IS |

Degas Mets Dos PER Ls Baal AS

Fre 3 \& 0} a Ship) pic

Cactreme ener ‘VPI BS EDN eee Dill Lebel Ae

| iin ePovLay | Sinnbek 9s as Sif epee wis) BATS

TBD Dy Lees) [ele hex

ee ran Payp ee ve Se

pe.

: ‘

ae ae

‘T 9d ‘TIAXXX “I0A ‘Tesusg ‘90g “‘guIsy [eumor

1869.] Zeat and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. 21

Text and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. By

Prata'PACHANDRA GuosHa, B. A.

[Received 13th March, 1869. ]

The copper-plate inscription, a translation of which is hereto ap-

pended, was presented to the Society in February, 1867 by Mr.

Webster, Collector of Balandshahar. He says, it was found in a

ruined gurhee situated in mouzah Manpur, pergunna Agoutha. The

inscription records the grant of a village named Gandavd, made by

one Ananga to a brahman of the Vatsa Gotra. The grant was made

in the vernal equinox of Samvat 1233. The engravers were

kayasthas.

The plate is in tolerable preservation, and measures 1 foot 9 inches

by 1 foot 1 inch. It would have been a useful link in the chain of

Indian history of the time of the first Mahomedan invasion, if some

coins or other inscriptions were forthcoming as corroborations of the

dates and the names of kings immortalized in this plate. But as it

is, the plate is a solitary landmark in the history of Kalinga, a name

that conveys to the mind of the reader a vague notion of the sea-coast

on the south of Bengal. The most inexplicable fact connected with

this plate is, that it was found so high up near Balandshahar.

Kalinga has no representative in the coin cabinet, unless under

some other name; and the names of the kings Govinda, Chandraka,

Bhojadeva, Vikramaditya and Ananga,though occurring in many dynas-

ties, are never coupled with the Kalinga country or the Rodra family, a

family quite unknown in the history of the Deccan. Kalinga extend-

ed over a large tract of country from Orissa to the Nilgiris, It was

never owned by a single sovereign. Different parts of it were at the

same time owned by several potentates, and the Rodra dynasty was

one of those petty chiefs. The kings of Orissa, for a long time in

the tenth, eleventh, twelfth, and thirteenth centuries, called them-

selves sovereigns of Kalinga and Karnata (Kalinga nava koti Karnate-

svara), though it is known, they had little to do with Karnaéta, which

had its own kings. Such assumptions of sovereignty over dominions

which kings do not possess, are not rare. Rodras probably owning a

small part of Kalinga, assumed the whole.

This race of kings is quite unknown, unless the reading of the

name is found fault with; and I admit, it may be read otherwise.

22 Teat and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. [No. 1,

The reading of the letters af#8t is very dubious, and it is painful

to observe that the two principal names (of the place and of the

family) which make the record important, are uncertain ; so is also

the date, the plate at that part being partly destroyed by time, and two

letters are missing. The name of the family which was at first read

as Rodra, on second thought appears to be something different. It is

most like Yodw; but the final ¢ (@) of the previous verb Irate being

combined with it, as it is in the inscription, would not appear so.

It is spelt as if it were djo (4), the final ¢ (@ )being changed into d (@),

and 7 (SI), as a matter of course, goes under it. The simple rules of

Sandhi must, however, change the final ¢ (q) into 7 (@), and not into

d (€) as it appears. On the other hand again, the word Yodu does not

begin with a (st) 7, but a(q) y. The reading then is evidently some-

thing else. Does the word $T¥ stand for the Rahtor dynasty, a family

that ruled at Kanouj, and one of whose princes Govindachandra

reigned at about the time of the inscription, and whose name appears

in the Fyzabad inscription (J. A. S. B., vol X. p. 98) and also on

coins ?

The letters which were construed to be the name of the country

Kalinga are very ambiguous and illegible. But considering the

rude stage of the art of engraving, the much ruder instruments

then in use, and the ignorance of the engravers, it may be safely

assumed that the @ there stands for @ and as the compound letters are

not distinctly written, the t may be said to represent #1. Thus we

have the name of Kalinga. With the other reading of Kanishtha

( afagt ) however the passage explains itself equally well. The

passage translated reads thus with Kalinga.

*Then from the sacrifices of the virtuous king of Kalinga, was

born Ananga, the chief of kings, full of prowess, and splendour.”

With Kanishtha, however, it reads as follows :— :

‘Then from him was born Ananga, the chief of kings, full of

prowess and splendour, (as well becomes) the younger brother of

(Yudishthira) Dharmardaja.’

In the former reading, we have to supply an @ t to yrea, while for

the second we have to assume a comparison. In either case, however,

to give sense, the @ 1 after ST@ must be changed to 1.

The grant records the names of princes of two distinct families,

1869.] eet and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. 23

though they are all grouped under the same family name. The record

goes backwards to the fourteenth crowned head from the donor. It

begins with Chandraka who, it appears, must have been either the

founder of the family, or was distinguished for some meritorious act.

If the family name be Rahtor, Chandraka must have transferred the

seat of government from Kanouj, and established himself in the new

city. The seventh linear descendant from Chandraka is Haradatta,

whose brother Bhogdditya or Homaditya succeeded him. The name

of this prince again is not clear, it may be read Bhogaditya or Homéa-

ditya. His nephew Sri-kuladitya followed him to the throne. After

him, came Vikramaditya, the son of Haradatta. The last named

prince was dethroned, it appears by his brahman minister, Vuhupati

who, on ascending the throne assumed the more royal name of Padma-

ditya. Padmaditya is the founder of a line, and the fourth from him

is Ananga, the donor of the village.

The names stand thus:

. Chandraka.

. Dharanivaraha.

. Prabhasa.

. Bhairava.

. Rudra.

. Govindardja (surnamed Yasorapa.)

CO” en o> © br =

| | |

7. Haradatta. 8. Bhogaditya.

| |

10. Vikramaditya. 9. Srikuldditya.

Brahman Minister.

11. Vuhupati (Padmaditya)

12, Bhojadeva.

13. Sahajaditya.

14, Ananga.

The inscription is in modern Sanserit, and the characters belong

o the period immediately succeeding that of the Kutila inscriptions

24 Leat and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. [No. 1,

of the tenth century, The date assigned to the inscription is conjec-

tural, as the plate at that part is defaced by rust. The words clearly

recognizable are zafametam...... Watt, the space intervening is just

sufficient for three letters.

The faint impression of the first is something like 1, but the last

traceable is a @. The intermediate has evidently a repha on it. The

combination would evidently be Slew, which may be interpreted as

a misspelling of g@tex. The interchange of W and © is not un-

precedented with the scribes and engravers of this plate. The very

first couplet of the inscription has a similar error, @¢wTa is spelt

with a dental s @ at the end. There are many such errors ; in some

passages the final d has taken the place of a visarga, the two dots

of which when joined, resemble the d1. The inscription uses three

different forms of the palatal s, and the distinction of the dental

2 @ and dental ¢ @ is not at all preserved. The Kutila forms

of bha, ha, dha, ga, and cerebral na, are perfectly preserved in the

characters of the inscription, though the compound of the cerebral

m W with y @ is like that of the modern Nagri w. The form @,

however, appears once for nya. At some places, the dental s © is

of the modern form, and at others as old as that of the Vallabhi

plate of Gujrat. Bhais of the Allahabad Gupta form. The initial

2 and e are of avery old type, and it is curious to observe how

characters of very different antiquity are promiscuously used.

The language of the inscription is not at all pure and chaste.

Grammatical errors, especially misapplications of case-terminations, are

common. It is interesting to note that the inscription begins with a

descriptive character, the personages are described in the third person ;

but as it comes to the close, the method of reported speech is dis-

continued. The writer confounds the sayings of the kings with

his own, and it is very difficult to render the passages. This is

mainly due to the want of the signs of quotation in Sanscrit

Grammar. The language is very like that of many other grants by

similar petty chiefs. The last five lines are identical with those of

Valavarma Deva, Virasningha Deva and Pratapadhavata Deva.

(Compare A, R. vol. IX. p. 402, J. Am. O. Soc., vol. VI. pp.

588-548.)

1869.] Teat and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. 25

TRANSLATION.

1. Om. Salutation to Kasivisvesvara, Salutation be to the God

of gods (Siva), to the donor of all that is desirable, to him, by whose

eight forms the three worlds are enveloped.

2. Praise be to moon-like Sarasvati, the fountain of nectar and

the destroyer of darkness of previous (life), beautifier (as a lotus)

of the ocean of eloquence.

3. Those brahmans bless, from whom, even earth (land) given with

devotion waits on the donor in the forms of gold and jewels,

4, Donations destroy sin and afford victory in this world. The

donor is sufficiently blessed by gifts and donations to them (brahmans),

Vipras purify the sin of their donor and the good solely engaged in

their (brahmans’) worship are blessed.

5. There was a king named Chandraka, renowned chief of the

Rodra family. His son was Dharanivardha and his (son) was named

Prabhasa.

6. From him was a king named Bhazrava, and from him again, was

king Rudra, fierce as the Rudra. Next, his son Govindara (surnamed)

the Yasorapa of irresistible will, became king.

7. His son named Haradatta became king. Then was born

Tribhuvandditya by whose own mountain-like body the immersed

earth was recovered.

8. His younger brother Sriman Bhogddtya succeeded him a king,

seeing whom men believed the day was two sighted. Srikulddityadeva

powerful as night, son of his younger brother came on next.

9, Haradatta’s son on coming to age assumed the name of Vekrama-

ditya, He was unequally virtuous. His brahman minister Sriman

Vuhupati more wonderful than he, ascended the throne, under the

name of Padmaditya, the celebrated lord of the world and kalpatree

of allriches, The irregular and formidable will of time was gained,

and before illness (death) came on, his unblemished glory, more illus-

trious than the autumnal moon, the jasmine and the lily, was published.

10. From him was born the ruler of the earth named Bhojadeva,

profound in war and the most valorous of heroes in the field of

battle. After him reigned Sahajaditya the king of kings, whose go-

vernor of the liquor of riches was Ranavir as wise as Kesava; by whom

(Sahajaditya) the sunken earth was rescued from the ocean and

26 Text and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. [No. 1,

cherished, as it was raised by the tortoise (incarnation) and scorched

by whose power (his) enemies could not prosper.

11, From him was Ananga, the chief of kings, full of prowess and

splendour, (as well becomes) the younger brother of (Yudishtira

Dharmardaja.) He Jearnt from great rishis (that) the presentation of

land is the best of all gifts. Having been convinced that this gift is

the best of all, he searched for a proper donee.

12. There is Palhala, a brahmana of the Gouda family, son of

Vishnu and grandson of Sadhala, of Vatsa gotra and of five pravaras,

kulin, the foremost of the meritorious. Being acquainted with this

donee, the lotus-eyed monarch granted the village of Gandva to him

at the time of the equinox and at a fortunate moment seated with

his face towards the east. This village, properly hedged by long

prescription, is to be enjoyed by him as long as the moon, the stars

and the sun shine.

13. To the future kings of this family, having made my palms

folded under my forehead, and having placed the two hands together, I

say, do not reverse this Sdsana.

14. Many lands were given by Sagara and other kings, but his is

the plough who owns the lands. He who encroaches the land given by

himself or others, becomes a beast so long as unnatural events do not

happen.

15. He who receives lands and he who gives them away, both

performers of pious deeds, always go to paradise.

Written by Gadejaka, grandson of Bijana, a kayastha of the

Mathura family, and Videsvara, son of Sridhara of the Jagar family.

Tuscribed by our graver in Samvat 1238, Vaisdkha.

Transcription of the Inscription in Devanagri.

@ aIAaCle aa: | THA Gea aaarayertaa |

aaz frsngmazifafaaatafe: | Weta ata.

aw foarte | saaRaee frame fa: acadt | wafaa

festa <u eee ufaa | eucaifeeta crarcaufas-

a caf aaavcte safe aa | Barf crave sata

wala | ATE away safe fameqaaticare W4-

fa aa) MAS aRITAIUAIATHAAAL TIAMAT F-

1869.] eat and Translation of Balandshahar Inscription. 27

WUFaTs BeuAY sararfay: | aHIgta cayacufaa-

Wily USVAT| Vat ata Acifuare waar Tifseersits va-

AU aARUe ATA fHecatarnagarfynfa: | ELRUAAGT

ay WaT RAAT | aafayaatcat aafae ABTTET |

Hay BRA Tq FCLISCITAL GA | Aa AeA Blarerar

featasacifaath: |\a ext feaqaaa aac ‘Afae Sra: N

eq TAIT ST cia wa! aanazaiia: saaifca-

Za: | aa ufa wecIMIMAsa waayqufacqaua fa-

satfeaatar | aaifeaadta fayefaa: stare usuts |

yafea zfs fadtufaan: aa fenasa: l ATMALTACTT-

aifrafraaragaeeaa sta MLTAHFRFAT aata-

<Ida TL | Tae a Aaa Haneda fa fase: | GaAyUaTE-

zw fame aaa | au staesafeacsersifa wea: |

eA qe FAA NI RU: i) aera aagat Ta ay a-

MARISA | ASAT TET Tal RAWITS A aut | We vary.

faerat a sere fea Waa: | TAS AMSA AT Bast SqAla-

a) Sadiamd ama alas vague: | a qara avfuq-

wager aAys | at wsefafa wrat oat asafaaaa ||

af ateraa fat faq usife wae: | Tal aipafanw

FQUAY TAA: || UY wacazar gatas cama} | ca

arafata SET TTT Trsas aT: I aay VRTAa UWA AA

dfaai \ dara fays ars qua nia fea fea: | DATS OT-

PaHAaU Haas aaa’ | SraRacaaagifeatat Gal At

7g: || fas Sha aifsar wfaurea: | wat araragts sfas

ae | darescuaty waa a afanda) asfuagur cut

tis: aaciehe: | we ae at wal aw ae ares | G-

Zul uteni at Gt ees aqui | a fawaaaaiatta BIaRTRA-

aaa UI afta a stazetta aa ata saseta | Bat at 7Tw-

ALA faaat qauatfaat | fatwa: RIT aTQRTAa SAT

UEHARA TY BAL Blyciasia fagagea | Braga afa-

wi afcfuafaca | daa sala neta sien Watfa | SUI a)

Ba!

As Aba i oe

uF PZ Sala POU A whee

vy %, eee rer s ners

iste 5 Bay“ oe hf yin isc

Pere ¢ Rar +0 * ‘ : . J

; a ai ees oF, P

\ P f 2 ;

; A fre iki nh oma ee ia tn Geel o aae

ald pia oF rere hh ee ee ay Sy!

ue i aw, ‘ ’ y a t a PWS i,

> ee 1 — ig - oi, | _ 4 cy is “3 a : vied

eRe lee PS ee | eee heats scabs

; tv Tike, yf 4 Sas

aoe : as wi rs ey rigs ier Te wo

+ =" > en i ~~ .

: Pe PAR Fe eee Pecan pr

e ~if fi i a | 2 at te + 7 --~

' - as = - —

- oe y * eh i =

ey ths atria tne

eee fo a

\ a 3 PE ' Tis me j

— = 4 . Me a ws

- Sy Pitas ory:

i © : ae ’ :

Sigs i f 4 ea i. Oi y > ta igs

; a roy oe ¥ ; mo i

ba ms Tis et ery 7 a

. R ' hy is wn, ae) a { it

: c & a 7. f bs -

ie yy ry = ta P > a= ae

af 4 P ‘7 e Whe lip > wate © Fe (cvs

: \ - - d

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

——-—-

Parr L—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &e.

SIV LVI SII PSS SALINAS SPNINI NA ININININININS INI IN INS SII I II SNI ISILON

No. IJ.—1869.

Nae es

On the History of the Burma race. By Colonel Sin Anruur Puayre,

K.C.-8. 1. 0. B., Bengal Staff Corps.

[Received 2nd April, 1869. |

In a former paper on the history of the Burma race, it has been

stated that the Maha-Ra-dza-weng relates that king Kyau-tswa,

youngest son of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-té who reigned at Pu-gdn, was

dethroned and eventually murdered by three brothers of Shan race

in the year 660, being 1268 A. D.*

The story of these three brothers is thus related: In the reign

of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa té, surnamed Ta-ruk-pyé-meng, the Tsau-bwa or

Chief of Bhein-na-kha, a small Shan state, died, leaving two sons,

They quarrelled regarding their inheritance, and the younger, named

Theing-kha-bo fled into Burma, where he settled at Myin-tsaing,

some thirty miles south of the present city of Ava. For many years

an immigration of the Shan or T’hai race had been going on into

the valley of the Ivawati. They had established an independent

kingdom in the upper portion of the country, and about the begin-

ning of the thirteenth century of the Christian era, had poured into

* There is, as has before been mentioned, a discrepancy of seven years

between this date, and that obtained by the total number of years of

the reigns of the kings of Pugdn, ending with that of Kyau-tswa. I have,

however, considered it better to accept the year given in the text of the Maha-

Ra-dza-weng, namely 660 of the Burmese era (= 1298 A. D.) as the year

when the three Shan brothers commenced to reign,

30 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

Assam. During that period also, they had, by their numbers and

their superior energy, gradually acquired considerable influence

within the kingdom of Burma. The young Shan Prince, therefore, in

coming to Burma, probably settled where a colony of his own race

already existed. He married, and had three sons and a daughter.

The sons were named A-theng-kha-y4, Ra-dz4-theng-gyan, and Thi-

ha-thi. His daughter’s name is not mentioned. Theing-kha-bo so

managed that his three sons were taken into the royal service, and

they became great favourites with the king. After the death of

Ta-ruk-pyé-meng, his son and successor Kyau-tswa also favoured the

Shan youths. The eldest A-theng-kha-y4 received the district of

Myin-tsaing as governor thereof; Ré-dza-theng-gyan received

Mek-kha-14; and Thi-ha-thu received Peng-lay. The three brothers

became rich and powerful. Their sister, whose name is not given,

was married to Prince Thi-ha-thi, the second son of Ta-ruk-pyé-meng,

who was accidentally killed in Pegu.

The three Shan brothers after having deposed and murdered king

Kyau-tswa, lived at Myin-tsaing in royal state, and governed each

his own province. The elder alone had a royal palace denoting his

superior position. Queen Tsau, the widow of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-té,

who had suggested the conspiracy against Kyau-tswa, her step-son,

retired to Pu-gén. The eldest son of Kyau-tsw4, named Tsau-nhit

was allowed to live in the ancient palace at Pu-gan, with the title of

king. A younger son, Meng-Sheng-tsau, was made governor of the

district of Tha-ret.*

At this time the whole of the Shan states, east of the Irawati,

were independent, as also were Mogoung, Mo-nhyin, Ka-lé, and other

states, west of the river. The three brothers who now represented

the ancient Burmese monarchy, had authority along the course of

the river Irawati as far south as Tha-ret. It is doubtful whether

they held authority in Toungt. The descendant of the ancient

kings, Tsau-nhit, was allowed to live quietly at Pugan, where he

died in the year 687. And it may be mentioned here, that his son

Tsau-mwonnit was also allowed to live quietly at Pugan. He died

in the year 730 (A. D. 1868) being the last of the Pugdn dynasty.

In the meantime the three Shan brothers with their capital at

* This statement will be noticed subsequently.

1869.) On the History of the Burma race. 31

Myin-tsaing ruled over what territory remained of the Burmese

‘kingdom. The youngest brother Thi-ha-thi, surnamed Ta-tsi-sheng,

who was destined to transmit the throne to his posterity, at least

during half a century, married a queen of the deceased Kyau-tswa,

named Meng-tsau-t, and called in history Bwa-Tsau. Five years after

the brothers had established their power, the second brother Raé-dza-

theng-gyan died. Some years later or in 672, Thi-ha-thi poisoned

his elder brother A-theng-kha-ya, and then succeeded to the sole

power.

In the year 671, Thi-ha-thti had searched for a suitable position

on which to build a new city. He selected that upon which the

city of A-wa or Ava, was afterwards built. But supernatural

obstacles prevented the work from being accomplished. Being then

guided towards the south, in digging for the foundation of a pagoda,

a golden plant in flower was discovered. The king was then con-

vinced that this was a fortunate spot whereon to build acity. The

city was therefore built in the year 674 (A. D. 1812), and called Pan-ya

from the golden flower having been there obtained. The name was

gradually changed into Peng-ya. The city was also called Wi-za-

ya-pu-ra.

King Thi-ha-thi Ta-tsi-sheng was now publicly married to

Queen Bwa-tsau, widow of king Kyau-tswa4. She was a daughter of

Ta-ruk-pyé-meng by one of the inferior Queens, and consequently

half sister to Kyau-tsw4. She resided at Pugan. On her arrival at

Pan-ya, she performed with the king the usual royal ceremonies of

formal entrance into the palace, enthronement beneath the umbrella,

and solemn pouring out of water. The palace life was now ordered

in every thing according to the ancient customs of the kings of Pugan.

The son of the Queen by the late king Kyau-tswa, named U-za-na,

was adopted by Thi-ha-thi, and declared Hin-shé-meng or Crown-

Prince. The sons born to Thi-ha-thi by Queen Bwé Tsau were

Kyau-tswa and Nau-ra-hta. To complete the king’s happiness and

confirm his royal title, if that were necessary, a white elephant

was captured in the forests and brought to the city. From this

event the king assumed the title of Ta-tsi-sheng. He married a

second Queen, or now gave high rank to his previous wife. She was

of Shan race. She had given birth toa son, A-theng-kha-ya (so

32 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

called after his paternal uncle) and named also Nga-ywom-ngai and

Tsau-ywon; also to a daughter Tsau-pti-lai. This daughter was

married to Pweng-hla-t, who was made governor of Toung-dweng,

and who probably belonged to the ancient royal race.

The king notwithstanding the precautions he had taken, became

alarmed at the supposed designs of his sons by his two chief

Queens. The two elder princes, the Crown Prince and A-theng-

kha-yd, kept large bodies of armed men in the provinces they

governed. A-theng-kha-ya at length received, either apparently or

really, against the wish of his father,the province of Tsa-gaing.

Immediately after taking possession, he declared himself indepen-

dent, with a large tract of country under him to the northward.

This is said to have been accomplished about the year 677 (A. D.

1315). King Thi-ha-thui Ta-tsi-sheng reigned altogether fourteen

years, ten of which were passed at his own city Pan-ya. The histo-

rian thus sums up the character of this king: “He was very

sagacious. He loved his sons, and behaved so as not to offend any of

them. Towards other countries he behaved as one would, if placed

over a hot fire. To his own subjects as to a cool jar of water placed

in one’s embrace.”’ He died in the year 684.

Thi-ha-thtii Ta-tsi-sheng was succeeded by his adopted son U-za-na,

son, as has already been stated, to the deposed king Kyau-tswé. U-za-

na’s half brother Kyau-tswa, offspring of the marriage of his mother

Bwa-Tsau with king Thi-ha-tha, after a time began to intrigue

against him, and acquired great influence. He is said to have possessed

five white elephants, which is considered a sure sign of rightful

kingly power. U-za-na, however, reigned for twenty years and then

announced his wish to devote himself to religion. He abdicated the

throne by going out fromthe palace by the western gate, while his

half brother Kyau-tswa entered by the eastern gate. U-za-na retired

to a monastery, and afterwards became a hermit ina forest of the

province of Mek-kha-ra.

Kyau-tswa who took the name of Ng4-tsi-sheng, from the five

white elephants he owned, ascended the throne in the year 704.

Jealous of the independent kingdom established by his half brother

A-theng-kha-yé Tsau-ywon at Tsa-gaing, he, before coming to the

throne, had tried to have him assassinated, The plan, however, failed,

1869.) On the History of the Burma race. 33

and during his reign, he does not appear to have been strong enough

to interfere with the dynasty of lis relations at Tsa-gaing. This

king reigned only eight years.

He was succeeded by his son, also named Kyau-tswé, who ascended

the throne in the year 712. This king married a daughter of the

governor of Tha-ret, called. Tha-ret-meng-sheng-tsau, who was said

to be ason of the deposed king of Pu-gan, Kyau-tswa. This king

desired to be on terms of friendship with bis cousin the king who

reigned at Tsa-gaing. He married a daughter of that king. . He

reigned nine years. His brother Na-ra-thui then ascended the throne.

After he had reigned five years, Pan-ya was attacked by the Man

Shans, and the king was taken prisoner. By this name is meant the

g, in

the valley of the upper Irawati, was the capital. This city was

Shans of the kingdom of Pong, of which the city of Mo-goun

called by the Shans Mong-mao-rong. King Na-ra-thi, from having

been captured, is called Mau-pa Na-ra-tha. The Shans appear at once

to have retreated with their prisoner, and with three white elephants,

which probably formed the great object of their expedition. After

his capture, an elder brother, probably a half brother by a concubine,

was placed on the throne with the title of Uzana Byoung. But after

three months the city of Pan-ya was taken by a Prince called Tha-

do-meng-bya, who became supreme and founded the city of Ava.

These events have brought the history of the kings of Myin-

tsaing and Pén-ya down to the year 726 of the Burmese era. The

Ma-ha-Ré-dzé-weng then relates the history of the line of Princes

who reigned at Tsa-gaing, and who were contemporary with those

who reigned at the other two cities. It was this branch which brought

about a new revolution.

It has already been seen that a son of king Thi-ha-thi Ta-tsi-

sheng by a Shan mother, made himself independent, and reigned at

Tsa-gaing under the title A-theng-kha-ya Tsau-ywon. This was

in the year 677 = A. D. 1315. He died after a reign of seven years,

and though he left three sons and a daughter, he was succeeded by

his half brother Ta-ra-bya-gyi. After Ta-ra-bya-gyi had been four-

teen years on the throne, his son Shivé-doung-tet rebelled, and in

the year 698, dethroned his father. On this, the widow of king A-

theng-kha-yaé Tsau-ywon fled with her children. The family con-

34 Eo. On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

sisted of three sons, and a danghter named Tso-meng, who was

married to a young man of uncertain lineage, called Tha-do-tsheng-

htien. ‘The family concealed themselves for some time in the hills

of Meng-dun. They were, however, captured and brought to the

city. Buta party was raised against the usurper, and he was killed

by a Shan attendant, aftera reign of three years. The nobles were un-

willing to restore Ta-ra-bya-gyi, and he was put to death. This opened

the way to the family of A-theng-kha-ya Tsau-ywon. The eldest son

named Kya-tsw4 was raised to the throne in the year 701. He reigned

ten years, and was succeeded by his brother Nau-ra-hta Meng-rai.

This king reigned only seven months. The youngest brother Ta-ra-

bya-ngai then became king, but died after a reign of three years.

The sister of these three brothers, now entitled ''so-meng-ko-dau-

gyi, still remained. She had formerly, as already mentioned, been

married to Tha-do tsheng-htien, now for the first time declared to

be of the race of the ancient kings of Ta-goung. He had died, but

by that marriage Tso-meng-ko-dau-gyi had a son named Kaéa-hi-la,

and two daughters, Sheng-tsau-gyi, and Tsau-tim-md4. The mother

now married Meng-byouk. He was not of royal race, but in right of

his wife he was raised to the throne, and took the title of Thi-ha-

pa-té, As the young Prince Ra-hi-la was, (believed to be) through

his father, descended from the ancient Burmese royal race of Ta-

goung, he was sent to govern that province, which was subject to

Tsa-gaing. He was then sixteen years of age, and assumed the

name of Tha-do-meng-bya. After some years, he was attacked in his

government by a Shan force from Mogoung under a chief, called Tho-

khyin-bwa. This attack was made at the instigation of Na-ra-tha,

the king of Pan-ya. Tagoung was taken, and Tha-do-meng-bya with

difficulty escaped, and fled to Tsa-gaing. There his step-father

Meng-byouk Thi-ha-pa-té, enraged at the loss of Tagoung, put him

in irons. The Mogoung Shans advanced in great force and attacked

Tsa-gaing. The king was obliged to abandon the city, and retired

by boat to Kya-khat-wa-ra on the Irawati. The Shan general saying

that king Na-ra-thd had given him no assistance in the war, now

attacked and took the city of Pan-ya, which he plundered. He also

took Na-ra-tht prisoner. The Shans then retreated.

When Meng-byouk, king of Tsa-gaing, abandoned that city, and

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 35

fled to Kya-khat-wa-ra, the people who accompanied him, were much

discontented. Tha-do-meng-bya found many adherents, and put his

step-father to death. He then determined to take possession of the

cities, which had been plundered and abandoned by the Mogoung

Shans. He first advanced to Pan-ya. There he found U-za-na Byoung

raised to the vacant throne; but he put him to death, and declared

himself king of Pan-ya and Tsa-gaing. He, following the custom

of the ancient race, married his sister Tsau-im-ma, who had been

Queen to Kyau-tswa, Na-ra-thu, and U-za-na Byoung, the three last

kings of Paén-ya. This event. occurred in the year 726 = A. D.

1364.

Tha-do-meng-bya had now no rival to oppose him. He deter-

mined to build a newcity, and in the same year, that Pan-ya and

Tsagaing were destroyed, the city of Awa, Eng-wa, or A-va, was

built. The Pali, or sacred name, of it was Ra-ta-na-pt-ra (city of

gems). The position on the left bank of the I-ra-wa-ti, a little below

the mouth of the stream, called Myit-ngé, had_ long before been

predicted by Gau-da-ma as destined to be the site of a great city,

Dreams and omens now confirmed the ancient prediction. The

work of founding the city was carried on with a degree of energy,

prompted by the conviction of the great destinies which were thereby

to be accomplished. Lakes and swamps were dammed and drained.

Pagodas were built, and the city wall marked out. The king’s palace

was raised in the centre, and was the citadel of the whole work.

Tha-do-meng-bya now ruled over the country all round Ava, Tsa-

- gaing, and Pan-ya. Toung-ti also is said to have been subject to

him. The cities of Nga-nway-gin, Toung-dweng-gyi, and Tsa-gu,

were independent. The king first proceeded to reduce Tsa-gu.

On the way, he stopped at Pu-gan, and there received the homage

of Tsau-mwon-nit, the iast nominal king of the Pu-gan dynasty.

He was unable to reduce Tsa-gu, which held out under the governor

-Thein-ga-thi. In the following year, he took Toung-dweng-gyi; and

in the year 729, he again marched against Tsa-gu. The chief made

an obstinate resistance, and during the siege, Tha-do-meng-bya

caught the small-pox. He set out to return to Ava, but feeling that

he must die, sent on a confidential servant or minister, named Nga-

nu, with orders to put his queen Tsau-um-ma to death, so that she

36 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

might not fall to his successor in the throne. He died soon after,

having reigned seven months in Pan-ya and three years in Ava.

The history denounces him as a man of savage and cruel disposition,

who altogether disregarded religion. He left no children,

The servant of Tha-do-meng-bya having reached the palace, told

queen T'sau-im-ma the order he had received. She turned him from

his purpose, and offered him the government of T’sa-gaing. This he

accepted, and after a time crossed the river to take possession.

There being no direct heir to the throne, the nobles offered it to

Thi-la-wa4, the governor of Ra-mai-then. But he refused, and at

length they chose his brother-in-law, Ta-ra-bya Tsau-kai, governor of

the district of A-myin. He was chosen king near the close of the

year 729; but by the advice of the astrologers, he did not ascend the

palace until the beginning of the year 730. He took the title of

Meng-kyi-tswa-tsau-kai. This king was already married to a grand-

daughter of A-theng-kha-ya Tsau-ywon, the first king of Tsa-gaing.

Her name was also T'sau-tim-ma, with the prefix Tsa-gaing, to dis-

tinguish her. The descent of Meng-kyi-tsw4, both from the old

race of the Pugdén kings, and from the family of the three Shan

brothers, is then carefully traced in the Ma-ha-Ra-dza-weng. It is

shown in the following table.

Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-té, king of Pugan.

Kyau-tswa, A daughter of————Pyi Meng Thi-ha-thu.

succeeded his father as Thin-ga-bo,name not

king. Deposed and _ given, sister of the

murdered by the three three Shan brothers.

Shan brothers.

Tharet Myo tsa A daughter named

Meng Sheng 0 Sheng myat hla. f

| *

| vd bie te

Eldest son Second son Third son Tsau-pu-lai Tsau-myat,

Myin tsaing Pyi Meng Ta-ra-byaTsau- adaughter, adaughter, mar-

Shwé nan Tsau kan kai. Became married to riedto Thein-ga-

Sheng. noune. king with the Thi-wa-la, thi-tsau-noung,

title of Meng governor of governor of

kyi-tswa Tsau- Ra-mai-then. Tsa-gu.

kai.

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 37

_ By this pedigree Meng-kyi-tswa was only on his mother’s side

descended from the family of the famous three Shan brothers. His

father Meng Sheng Tsau, was the son of the deposed king of Pugan,

the last of the ancient race who held sovereign authority. From the

internal evidence of the history, this appears very doubtful, as the

chief influence in the government is evidently among those of Shan

race. It is probable that this pedigree has been arranged in later

times.

Of the early history of Meng-kyi-tswa and his father, it is stated,

that during the disturbances after the second invasion by the Chinese,

and the murder of king Kyau-tswa by the three Shan brothers, the

king of Arakan invaded the province of Tharet-myo, where Meng-

Sheng-Tsau, a son of king Kyau-tswa, was governor. He and his

family were all taken prisoners and carried to Arakan. After a

time they were released, and Meng-Sheng-Tsau brought his family

to Pan-ya. His youngest son was sent to Tsa-gaing, where Ta-ra-bya-

ngai was then king. The son became a favourite with that king,

and his former name was then changed to Ta-ra-bya. He received an

appointment, and gradually acquiring much influence, was at length

made governor of the province of Amyin. The year after Meng-

kyi-tswa obtained the throne, he went out with a large retinue to

repair the great tank of Meit-hti-la, which had burst its banks. While

digging there, they found several golden images with inscriptions,

which showed, they represented the sons and daughters of the race

of the Leng-dzeng kings of Siam. The king on inquiring from an

old man of the place, was told there was a tradition that these had

been buried by king Aloung-tsi-tha (who died A. D. 1160), who

originally dug or embanked the tank; and it was said the images

were those of the rulers who should come hereafter. In the year

732, Tsheng-phyt-Sheng-Bingyat, king of Hanthéwa-ti, sent am-

bassadors with a letter and presents to Meng-kyi-tswa. The two

kings agreed to have a friendly meeting on the border of the two

countries. This was done. They gave mutual pledges of friendship,

exchanged presents, feasted together, and then separated. The same

year the chiefs of Ka-lé and Mo-nhyin fought together. Each ap-

plied to the king of Ava for aid, and tendered his allegiance. But

38 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

the king, by the advice of his wily minister Tsin-ta-pyit-gyi, let them

fight until they were exhausted and then dominated both.

In the year 735, Meng-Bhi-li the king of Arakan died. There

being no direct heir, the nobles of the country offered the throne to

Meng-kyi-tsw4. By the advice of Tsin-ta-pyit, he would not keep

that country as a part of his dominion, on account of the difficulty of

controlling it; but he appointed his uncle Tsau-mwun-gyi as a tribu-

tary king. That prince proceeded with a force, and established

himself in that country. In the following year, messengers with

presents arrived from the chief of Zimmay. At this time, the king’s

elder brother Tsau-ran-noung was governor of the province of

Prome. In the year 738, he with much apparent cordiality invited

the chief of Toungti, Pyan-khyi-gyi, to a friendly interview and then

murdered him. The king derived great satisfaction from this event,

and in his joy sent his brother a royal robe and regalia. In the year

742, the king of Arakan Tsau-mwun-gyi died. By the advice of

Tsin-ta-pyit, the governor of the province of Ta-ltip, named Tsau-

mi, was selected to succeed him. But he grievously oppressed the

people, so that they rebelled. He was obliged to fly, aud crossed the

mountains to Tsa-gi. The Arakanese then placed on the throne

Kyau-tsw4, the grandson of Nan-kya-gyi, and remained independent.

In the year 745, Tsheng-phyt-Sheng-Bingyau, king of Pegu, died.

He was succeeded by his son Bingya-nwé, styled Ra-dzé-di-rit. At

that time, Louk-bya was chief, or king, of Myoung-mya in the province

of Pu-thein or Bassein. Mut-ta-ma (Martaban) was subject to king

Byat-ta-ba. In 748, the chief of Myoung-mya proposed to the king

of Ava a combined attack on Han-tha-wa-ti (Pegu), begging him as

superior to take the kernel of what was acquired, and leave to

Myoung-mya the husk only. The king consulted with his great men,

and it was determined to invade Pegu. The king’s eldest son, the

crown prince, led a force down towards Pegu by the Toungi route,

through the valley of the Poung-loung river. A second column

under the king’s second son, Meng-Tshwé, marched by the Irawati

route, through the province of Tha-ré-wa-ti. The left column ad-

vanced, and took the city of Pan-gyau. The right column took the

city of Hlaing. But the two princes were not able to combine their —

forces, and though in some actions they were successful, yet the

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 39

younger prince suffered a severe defeat from the king of Pegu. The

two princes then consulted, and as the rains were near at hand, when

military operations by land in Pegu are impracticable, and as Louk-

bya did not appear to render assistance, they retreated. The king

of Pegu, fearing another attack, sent presents and a letter to Meng-

kyi-tswa. These were well received. But the Myoung-mya chief

also sent to make excuses for his failure to co-operate, and urged

another invasion of Pegu. In the following year, therefore, the king

sent another army. ‘The advance was made only by the line of the

Trawati. The force consisted of a large army, and a considerable

flotilla, which the king accompanied in person. The king’s son Pyin-

tsin-meng with a force was left to guard the capital. In passing

down the Irawati, the Mgoung-mya chief joined the king at the

entrance to the Pu-thein river. The Burmese force again marched to

Hlaing and the town of Mau-bi. The Talaings there had strong

stockades, which the king of Avacould not take. His army suffered

much from sickness, and he was obliged to retreat. without effecting

anything.

In the year 751, the king married his son Meng-Tshwé to the

daughter of Tho-ngan-bwa, the Shan chief of Mau. The same year

the king’s ally, Louk-bya, the chief of Myoung-mya, was attacked by

Ra-dza-di-rit, king of Pegu. Louk-bya was taken prisoner. His son

Phya-kwan, and his son-in-law Phya-kyin fled, and took refuge with

Meng-kyi-tswé. The former received the district of Tsd-leng, and the

latter that of Prome, each for his support. In the same year the

king of Pegu, suspecting the loyalty of his son Pau-lau-kyan-dau,

determined to put him to death. The prince went to the great

pagoda at the city of Pegu, with those who had been sent to kill

him, made offerings, and thus prayed: ‘If I have imagined the least

‘evil against my royal father, may this body when it dies, suffer in the

“eight great hells, and in the hundred and eighty-eight small hells;

“and may I never meet the future Phra. But if I have not imagined

‘any evil against my royal father, then when this body dies, may it

“be conceived in the womb of aroyal Mran-ma, and be born; and

‘when of age, may I conquer and oppress the Talaing country.”

Having uttered this imprecation, the prince drank the water of

truth, and was forthwith killed by the executioners, Ail this was

40 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

told to the king his father. Prince Pau-lau-kyan-dau trans-

migrating, was conceived in the womb of Sheng-mi-nouk, the consort

of Meng-Tshwé, son of king Meng-kyi Tswé. When she became

pregnant, the princess desired to eat a mango from a tree at the city

of Da-la, in the Talaing country, and to have other dainties therefrom.

Her husband, the Pyin-tsing Prince Meng Tshwé sent a messenger

with a letter and presents to the king of Pegu, asking for his request

to be complied with. The king of Pegu returned presents of fruit,

which the princess ate of, and in due time, in the year 752, gave

birth to a son who was named Meng-rai-kyau-tswa.

No event of great consequence occurred during the rest of the

reign of Meng-kyi-tswa-Tsaukai. He reigned thirty-three years.

His son Tsheng-phyt-Sheng succeeded him, but reigned only seven

months, when he was murdered by Nga-nouk-tsan, the governor of

Tagoung. The next brother, Pyin-tsing-Meng-Tshwé, was then placed

on the throne in the year 763 (A. D. 1401). He is also called

Meng Khoung. In the year 765, the king of Arakan, named Htau-

ra-gyi made an incursion into the provinces of Yau and Loung-Shé,

The king determined to send an army into Arakan, in order to punish

the perpetrator of this insult. His son Meng-rai-kyau-tswa, though

only thirteen years of age, was sent with the force. The army of

the king of Arakan was defeated, and he himself was slain. The

Burmese then occupied Arakan, and the governor of Ka-lé, a son-in-

law to king Meng Khoung, was made king of that country with the

title of A-nau-ra-hta. Prince Meng-rai-kyau-tswa then returned home.

In the year 766, the king of Han-thd4-wa-ti, Ré-ma-ngya or Pegu,

styled Raé-dza-di-rit, collected a great fleet of boats and a large army,

and advanced up the river Iva-wa-ti. King Meng Khoung collected a

force to oppose him. But the Talaing king was ail powerful on the

river. He reached Prome, but did not “dare to land and attagk it, as

it was defended with cannons and muskets.* His fleet then went on

to Myé-dai, which also could not be taken. But he captured all boats

upon the river, and steadily proceeded up the stream. He reached

Ava, but not entering that city, remained at Tsagaing on the opposite

* As the year 766 of the Burmese Era would correspond to A. D. 1404, the

allusion to guns and muskets in Burmah, is rather remarkable. The earliest,

though doubtful, allusion in Indian History to guns and gun-carriages refers

to the year 1368. Vide Hlliott’s Historians, p. 353. TH Hpivor.

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 41.

bank. King Meng Khoung was much alarmed, but a religious man

of Pan-ya, a man of great learning, styled Tsa-gyo-thi-myat, under-

took to make the king of Pegu, by the mere force of knowledge and

eloquence, abandon his enterprize and return to his own country.

The king of Ava wrote a letter to the king of Pegu, and Tsa-gyo-thi-

myat was admitted to an interview with the latter on board the

royal state boat. A long conversation on religion and the duties of

kings ensued. The result was, that king Ra-dza-di-rit, persuaded by

the eloquence of the religious man, that peace was good for all

people, and the only consistent course for a pious king, determined to

return to his own country. Before leaving, he took to pieces his own

golden boat, to build a monastery at Shwé-kyet-yet, near Tsa-gaing.

But notwithstanding this abandonment of his expedition, he again

invaded Burma in the following year. He, as before, advanced up to

Prome with a vast flotilla, The king of Ava came with an army to

defend that city. The king of Pegu divided his forces to blockade

the city, and placed a strong body of men on the northern side of it.

But before this could be accomplished, a quantity of rice laden on

horses was thrown into the city, which thereby was saved from

famine. The king of Pegu now established himself on the west

bank of the river. His flotilla kept the stream in his power, but

three of his regiments, left isolated on the land tothe north of the

city, were attacked and cut to pieces. Though not able to take

Prome, the king of Pegu was still master on the river. He sent

three hundred boats up the stream, which burnt Mye-dai, Tha-ret

and other cities to the north, and ravaged the country, from whence

the Burmese army drew their supplies. This forced king Meng-

Khoung to sue for peace. At first, Ra-dza-di-rit sent an unfavourable

reply. He referred to the reception given by the king of Burma to

his rebellious subject, the chief of Myoung-mya, and returned the

presents offered him. The king of Burma had taken prisoner a

Talaing nobleman, styled Tha-mein-dzeip-byai, who had two daughters

in the palace of the king of Pegu, aud both of whom had accompanied

him in his expedition. The king of Burma now offered this noble-

| man his liberty, if he influenced his daughters to persuade Ra-dza-

| di-rit to make peace. The king of Pegu, through their entreaties,

_ and against the advice of his nobles, again entered into negociations.

42 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

The two kings exchanged presents and, on an appointed day,

proceeded together on foot, and hand in hand, to the great pagoda

which crowns a hill overlooking the Irawati. There they solemnly

promised to observe their engagements to each other. The boun-

daries of their kingdoms were marked out, the city of Prome being

allowed to belong to Burma, and the kings then separated. After-

wards the king of Pegu married the sister of king Meng Khoung,

the princess being sent by land from Ava by the Poung-loung route.

The marriage was celebrated on the frontier in a pavilion or temporary

palace, ‘“‘whereby,”’ says the history, ‘‘the two kings were united as

one piece of gold, and their friendship was warm as living fire, and

clean as pure water.”

But this good understanding was of short duration. In 768, king

Meng-Khoung made Meng-rai-kyau-tswa, his son, EHin-Shé-meng or

crown prince, and married him to the daughter of Ta-ra-phy4-gyi, the

governor of Pu-khan. The king’s brother Thi-ri-dze-ya-thi-ra, go-

vernor of Tsagaing, was offended at the young prince being raised to

this distinction. He raised a rebellion, but was defeated and made

prisoner. The king pardoned and released him; but he fled and took

refuge with the king of Pegu, whose sister he had married. He was

received with distinction, and from that time the king of Pegu no

longer sent presents or tribute which, since the last arrangement, he

had been accustomed to do.

In Arakan, after A-nau-ra-hta had been placed on the throne, the son

of the deposed king Htau-ra-gyi, named Na-ra-meit-hla, fled and took

refuge with king Ra-dza-di-rit. When the brother of the king of

Ava arrived in Pegu, at his suggestion, an army was sent by the king

of Pegu to Arakan to support the cause of Na-ra-meit-hla. This army,

under the command of Tha-mein-phyat-sa was successful. The king

of Ava’s son-in-law, Anau-ra-hta, and his wife, the king’s daughter,

were taken prisoners, and sent to Pegu; while N a-ra-meit-hla was

placed on the throne of Arakan. The king of Pegu put A-nau-ra-

hta to death, and his wife he made one of his principal queens. At

this cruel and treacherous conduct king Meng-Khoung was much

enraged. But as he and his enemy were nearly matched, he deter-

mined, before going to war, to form alliances, so as to be able to crush

his foe at once. He addressed the king of Zimmay, informing him

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 43

of the bad faith of the king of Pegu after he had sworn friendshp at

the pagoda of Prome, and invited him to join in an invasion of Pegu.

The letter was intercepted, and the messengers were seized. But Meng

Khoung in his anger determined at once to go to war. In vain his

faithful ministers represented to him the great difficulty of pene-

trating into a country like Pegu at the season of the year when the

rains were nigh at hand. The king would brook no delay. A large

force under his own command, marched from Ava by the Toungi

route, in the month of Katshun 769. <A force was left at the capital

to preserve order, and several regiments were posted at Prome to

guard that frontier, and collect and forward provisions for the army

by the Irawati river. The king of Pegu made great preparations,

to meet this attack. “His army marched from the city of Han-tha-

wa-ti, and took post at the city of Tha-kyin. His advanced guard

under La-gwun-ein met with a repulse, and the Talaing army

retreated to Pan-gyau, to await reinforcements soon expected from

Pu-thein and Mut-ta-ma. The Burmese now burnt all the towns

and villages of the country they occupied. But the rainy season

having set in, it was found difficult to supply provisions, and the

Peguan army being reinforced, was enabled seriously to interrupt the

communications of the Burmese. The latter now began to suffer

from hunger, and king Meng Khoung was advised by his ministers to

negociate. But the wily king of Pegu wished to take him prisoner,

and invited him toa meeting at the Kyaik-go Pagoda. This was

: agreed to; but, at the last moment, the king of Ava, suspicious of

treachery, would not keep his engagement. The Talaing officer

_La-gwun-ein then undertook to seize king Meng Khoung by a

sudden night attack. In this he was accompanied by the refugee

prince, the former governor of Tsagaing, who was to recognize his

‘brother king Meng Khoung. lLa-gwun-ein penetrated into the

Burmese entrenched camp, and even into the king’s ¢az, or booth, but

failed to capture him. Ré-dzd-di-rit suspecting that the prince had

| not given hearty assistance, put him to death. This desperate night

| attack, which had well nigh succeeded, deeply alarmed king Meng

| Khoung. He now determined to retreat, himself leading, while the

| rear guard was commanded by an officer, styled Ra-may-then-tsi. The

‘king of Pegu despatched La-gwun-ein in pursuit. He, marching

44 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

rapidly by jungle paths, fell on the Burmese and killed many. The

retreating army became utterly scattered, and the king mounted

on aswift female elephant to escape. The army now flying helter-

skelter, became like a bale of cotton unloosed to the wind. The

queen Sheng-mi-nouk was taken prisoner, and being carried to

king Ra-dza-di-rit was taken into his harem. The chief queen, the

howdah of whose elephant became loose and swung round, with

difficulty escaped on another elephant. The rear guard alone pre-

served discipline, and the Talaings seeing them stand like a stockade

of iron dared not attack them. The king on reaching his capital

was in deep distress. His minister consoled him by relating

many instances, where weak and insignificant creatures had been

successful over those far their superiors, because those superiors could

not overcome the obstacles of nature. Hearing these words, ‘ the

burning distress of king Meng Khoung was assuaged, as fire is

quenched by water.’’

But the king could not forget the insults and injuries he had

received from the king of Pegu. In the year 771, he again invaded

that country. The expedition was unsuccessful, but from the cautious

manner of proceeding, was not so disastrous as before. The Burmese,

the history states, had guns and muskets at this time.

As all the direct attacks on Pegu had failed, another plan and

another point of attack were now adopted. The king’s eldest son

Meng-rai-kyau-tswa, the strange story of whose birth in the year

752 has been related, now besought his father to appoint him to lead

an army, to rescue his mother and sister from captivity. A large

army was collected, and marched in the year 772 (A. D. 1410), by

the Trawati route. A large fleet was in company. The force

proceeded down and entered into the province of Pu-thein (Bassein).

The prince first attacked the town of Myoung-mya, but failing to take

it, proceeded to Pu-thein. Finding that there were many guns

mounted there, he blockaded the city, but could effect nothing. It

was now suggested by one of the generals, that they should proceed

into Arakan, the king of which country had been supported by their

enemy, the king of Pegu. This advice was adopted. The Prince

returned to Prome and from thence crossed the mountains into

Arakan. The king Na-ra-meit-hla was defeated, and fled into the

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 45

Ku-lé country. The Prince appointed Let-ya-gyi governor. The

southern part of Arakan, the province of ‘Than-dwai (Sandoway), was

placed under Tsuk-ka-té. The prince then returned to Ava where he

was received by his father with great distinction.

The Arakanese nobles now applied for assistance to king Ra-dz4-

di-rit. He sent an army in the following year, 773, which took

possession of Sandoway. Prince Meng-rai-kyau-tswa was again

sent to take it. He failed in an attack, but blockaded the town, and

reduced the garrison to great distress. The soldiers were obliged to

eat their very shields. ‘lhe Talaing commander now had recourse to

a cunning artifice. He caused a false despatch to be sent addressed

to himself, announcing the advance of a large force coming to relieve

him, and managed to have this intercepted by the Burmese. The

Prince called a council of war, and they considered it best to retreat,

He returned with his army to Ava. The Talaing army then marched

on to the capital, Arakan city. As the Arakanese and the king of

Pegu were closely allied, the governor Let-ya-gyi who had been put

in by the Burmese, retired.

In the year 774, the Tsau-bwa of the large Shan state of Thein-ni

was preparing to attack Ava, Information of his preparations was

given by the Tsau-bwa of Un-boung, and Prince Meng-rai-kyau-tswa

was sent against him. The Tsau-bwa of Thein-ni engaged the prince’s

army, but was defeated and slain. The sons and son-in-law of the

Tsau-bwa shut themselves up in their fortified city, and called in the

Chinese to help them. The prince, hearing of the advance of the

Chinese army, proceeded by night with a part of his army, and lay in

wait ina thick wood. Suddenly attacked they were utterly defeated.

The prince then returned, and re-invested Thein-ni. In the mean

time Ré-dzé-di-rit, king of Pegu, hearing that the Burmese were oc-

cupied with Thein-ni, determined to attack Prome. On account of

the guns, he was forced to keep at a distance, but hoped to starve out

the garrison. While thus employed, hearing that a Siamese army

was attacking Mut-ta-ma, he left his son Bi-ngya-Pu-thein in com-

mand, and returned himself to Pegu. The prince Meng-rai-kyau-

tswa having settled affairs at Thein-ni, arrived at Prome. The king

of Peeu also returned there from the lower country. After many

skirmishes, the Talaing force was finally defeated, and compelled to

46 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

retire down the river. The Burmese pursued as far as the entrance

to the Bassein river. The Prince determined to follow up the fugi-

tives. He took possession of Da-la, of Da-gun and Than-lyeng

(Syriam). Pu-thein and the whole of the western portion of the

Delta of the Irawati submitted to him. Seeing such great success,

king Meng Khoung himself arrived. Numerous partial actions took

place in the difficult country of the Irawati delta, but nothing

decisive was accomplished. The king of Pegu stirred up the Shan

chief of Nga-thai-wi to attack the towns and villages in the Ava

territory. This he did, and prince Thi-ha-thi, who remained at

home at the head of affairs, reporting the threatening state of affairs,

the Burmese army was withdrawn.

But the prince, considering that he had almost been able to take

the capital of Pegu, and was only prevented by accident, determined

to try his fortune once more. In 776, the army went down the river,

and advanced towards Pu-thein. After some difficulty, the stockade

of Khai-boung was taken. The prince, however, could not take Pu-

thein, and determined to return himself to Ava apparently to obtain

reinforcements. He took with him several prisoners of high rank,

but remained there only seven days, and then returned to Pegu,

bringing his wife with him. He established himself in the province

of Da-la, but the city of that name appears to have been held by a

son of the king of Pegu, styled Bi-ngya- Da-la. Meng-rai-kyau-tswa

built several large boats, and having made himself liked by the men

in command under the king of Pegu, the cities of Pu-thein and

Myoung-mya submitted to him.

At this time a serious difficulty threatened the king of Ava.

Two Shan chiefs of the states of Mau-dun and Mau-kay had attacked

Myé-du which was subject to Ava. The king had therefore punished

them, and they took refuge in the Chinese territory. They petitioned

the Emperor of China that their wives and children were held in

captivity by the Burmese, and asked for justice. A Chinese army

therefore marched into the Burmese territory, and came down to Ava.

After about a month, they became straitened for provisions, and sent a

message to this effect: ‘‘ You neither give up the wives and children

“‘of the chiefs of Mau-dun and Mau-kay, nor do you come out to

“fight. We will remain thus for three years. Or, if you will not

1869. ] On the History of the Burma race. 47

““negociate let a horse soldier from each army engage in single combat ;

“if our horse soldier loses, we will retire ; but if yours is defeated give

“us up the wives and children of the chiefs.” On hearing this, king

Meng Khoung was much disturbed, as his best soldiers were all in

Pegu. But one of the prisoners, brought to the capital by the

prince, named Tha-mein-pa-ran, an officer of high rank and son-in-

law to the king of Pegu, agreed to fight the Chinese champion.

The duel was fought on horseback, and though the Chinese, or Tartar,

was clad in armour, the Pegu chief came off victorious. The Chinese,

true to their word, then withdrew to their own country,

In Pegu, the Burmese Prince Meng-rai-kyau-tswa was closely

besieging the city of Da-la, which was held by By-ngya-Da-la, one

of the sons of the king of Pegu. Ra-dza-di-rit was anxious to com-

municate with his son, but was unable to do so. One of his nobles,

Ai-mwun-ta-ra planned to enter the place himself by pretending to

desert to the Burmese. This was approved by the king. He was

received with great joy by the Burmese prince, was entrusted with a

command, and during a skirmish managed to enter the city of Da-la. |

The Burmese now considered they had him safe. But after a few

days, he let himself be launched on a raft bound up as a corpse upon

the tidal stream, and so passed unmolested, floated by the tide,

through the Burmese camp and war-boats. When passed danger,

he rose up and proceeded at once to his master at the city of Pegu.

Having reported all he had seen, king Ra-dzé-di-rit determined to

relieve Da-la. He therefore marched with a considerable force, and

Prince Meng-rai-kyau-tswa was obliged to retire. He entrenched

himself at a distance. The city of Da-la was thus relieved. Ra-dzé-

di-rit now, after much manceuvring provoked the Burmese Prince to

leave his stockade and come out to fight. The prince was confident

and boastful. He had dosed his elephant with spirits, and had drank

some himself. He pushed forward with a small force in front of the

main body of his army. With a few horsemen he made great

slaughter among the Talaing army, but his elephant became blown,

and the Talaing ‘chiefs seeing he had no support at hand, surrounded

him with thirty elephants. His elephant was wounded by a hundred

darts and disabled. The Prince dismounted and received a severe

wound in the thigh, either froma spear or an elephant’s tusk. He

48 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

was borne to the bank of a tank and laid down. Here he was taken

prisoner and carried before the king. Ré-dzaé-di-rit addressed him

kindly, but he replied that he desired only to die, as he was unable

to fulfil his oath to reach the city of Han-tha-w4-ti. He died the

next morning, being the fourth of the waxing moon Ta-gt in the

year 778 (April 1416). His funeral obsequies were honorably per-

formed by the king. The morning of his death a palm leaf with the

news written thereon was tied round the neck of a tame vulture

belonging to the chief Theng-ga-ra-dz4. The bird was let loose, and

the same afternoon at the striking of the third watch reached Ava,

and flew to the chief Phun-gyi, who presented the writing to king

Meng Khoung.

After the death of the prince, the Burmese commanders in Pegu,

though successfully resisting attack, were forced to retire. The |

princess lamenting the death of her husband retired also, and on

reaching Ava, was married to Thi-ha-thi, her first husband’s brother.

But before the whole army had left the Pegu territory, king Meng-

Khoung appeared, as he determined to visit the grave of his son.

The bones as buried by king Ra-dza-di-rit were dug up, and placed

ina golden vase, which under cover of a white umbrella, was borne

in a state boat to Ava.

In the year 779, another expedition was sent against Pegu under

the command of prince Thi-ha-thi, who now had been made Crown-

Prince. He captured the stockade at Da-gun, and took prisoner

Bi-ngya-tsek, one of the sons of the king of Pegu. The Prince

could not take Than-lyeng (Syriam), but captured Mau-bi, and re-

mained there entrenched for the rainy season. King Ra-dzé-di-rit

who much feared an attack upon his capital, went for safety to Mut-

ta-ma (Martaban). After this, the Burmese Prince returned to Ava

taking his prisoner with him. ; 4

King. Meng Khoung undertook no more wars. He sought

only to treasure up merit by the performance of good works. The

internal affairs of the country were wisely administered. The king

dreaded lest he should be ill-spoken of. In the year 784, his destiny

was fulfilled, and he died after a reign of twenty-one years.

King Ra-dza-di-rit also heard with grief the death of his former

enemy, and now only thought of religious duties. After one year,

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 49

while hunting a wild elephant to capture it with a noose, he received

a wound of which he died. |

Prince Thi-ha-thii succeeded his father. He also took the title of

Tsheng-phyt-sheng. In Pegu, Bi-ngya~-Dham-ma-Ra-dza succeeded

his father Ra-dz4-di-rit. This king’s two younger brothers Bi-ngya-

ran and Bi-ngya-kyan rebelled, and occupied the cities of Da-gun

and Than-lyeng. But the first soon submitted; the other brother

sent messengers to king Thi-ha-thi for assistance, That king at

once sent a force which joining the rebel prince took possession of

Dala. The Burmese commander made the Talaing inhabitants

prisoners of war, which provoked the resentment of the prince, and

a quarrel arose. The result was, that the Burmese force retired.

But the two brothers of the king of Pegu were now once more in

rebellion. Bi-ngya-kyan retired to Mut-ta-ma, while Bi-ngya-ran

| occupied Da-gun. King Thi-ha-tbii now sent a larger force to Pegu,

| which marched in the month Nat-dau 784. They proceeded by the

Pu-thein (Bassein) route, which the Burmese had always found the

easiest, and took Dala once more. Prince Bi-ngya-ran entered into

negociations with them, anda marriage between his sister and king

| Thi-ha-thé was arranged. But this was the immediate cause of his

‘destruction. For his chief queen Tsau-pho-may, who had been one

of his father’s queens, offended at his neglect of her, called in a Shan

chief Un-boung-lay, who came with an army to attack the city. The

king met him, but was wounded, and fled to Mo-nhyin, where he died

| soon after, having reigned four years.

_ The nobles now joined and attacked the Shan army, which retired.

| An infant gon of Thi-ha-thi, named Meng-hla-ngay, was raised to the

} throne. But the queen Tsau-pho-may, who had long been too inti-

|mate with the chief of Ka-lé, Kyé-toung-ngyo, called him in. He

} came with an army, killed the infant king, and seized the palace.

| This usurper’s reign was short. The governor of Mo-nhyin,

named Meng-nan-tsi, was a man of much influence. He was of Shan

| descent, but claimed also to be descended from the ancient kings of

Pu-gan; his paternal grandmother was a daughter of Nga-tsi-sheng

Kyau-tswa, one of the kings of Shan race who reigned at Pan-ya,

}and who diedin 712. In the present state of affairs, he determined

| to assert his claims. He came with a large force and invested Ava.

50 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

Ka-lé-kyé-toung-ngyo being deserted by most of his supporters, fled,

together with the queen Sheng-pho-may. Meng-nan-tsi therefore

now took possession of the palace in the year 788 (A. D. 1426).

The usurper who had fled, died in the jungles on the way to Arakan.

Queen Tsau-pho-may who had been consecrated queen in the time

of Meng Khoung returned, and was received back into the palace

with her former rank.

The king assumed the title of Mo-nhyin-meng-ta-ra. He was

forty-seven years of age, when he came to the throne. Many of the

provinces gave him trouble by rising in rebellion, but he gradually

reduced them. The ruler of Toun-gi was Tsau-li-theng-kha-ya,

Being invited by the king, he came to Ava with a large escort. The

king received him with great distinction, and they sat on one couch.

From this time the ruler of Toungt acted as if he were independent.

His younger brother was the governor of Poungday. He became

subordinate to the king of Pegu, and by that means was made go-

vernor of the province of Tha-ra-wa-ti.

In the year 792, the ruler of Toungt and his brother of Poung-

day, induced the king of Pegu to undertake an expedition against

Prome. An army and fleet were sent under the command of Tha-

mein-pa-rén, who formerly, when a prisoner at Ava, fought and killed

the Chinese champion, King Mo-nhyin-meng-ta-ra desired to tem-

porize, and by the advice of his ministers sent a friendly message

to the king of Pegu with presents, and went down to Prome to meet

him. The two kings remained at some distance from Prome carrying

on negociations. In the mean time, the commander-in-chief, Tha-

mein-pa-ran, who had formerly known one of the Burmese chiefs,

Ra-dza-theng-gyan, used to goand see him. On one of these occa-

sions, Mo-nhyin-meng-ta-ra ordered him to be detained as a prisoner,

until the traitor governor of Poungday was delivered up. ,. This was

at length agreed to, and the two kings concluded their negociation by

an agreement of friendship. A niece of the king of Ava also was

married to the king of Pegu. These events occupied several years.

King Mo-nhyin-meng, on his return to Ava in 799, attended to the

internal affairs of his kingdom. The reckoning of time was found to

be much deranged, and great affliction for the people of the country

was anticipated, unless the calender was reformed. The king knew

1869.) On the History of the Burma race. 51

that his royal predecessors who had altered the style in their days,

never survived long; but for the benefit of his people, he did not

hesitate to do what was required for their welfare. He felt confident

also, from. predictive signs, that his posterity for seven generations

would fillthe throne. To adjust the era, the year 800 was counted as

798, two years being struck out. The king died in the following

year after a reign of thirteen years.

He was succeeded by his son Meng-rai-kyau-tswa in in the year 801

(A. D. 1439). This king turned his attention to the affairs of

Toungi. The king of that country had died in the year 798, and

was succeeded by his son-in-law U-za-na. The following year, the

king of Pegu, Bi-ngya-ran deposed U-za-na, and placed on the throne

Meng-tsau-u, son of Tsau-li-theng-kha-ré. After that ruler had

reigned five years, the king of Ava sent a force which dethroned

him, and Ta-ra-by4, a Shan chief, was made governor or tributary

king. The chief of Mo-goung was at this time independent, but the

king coerced him through the Tsau-bwas of Mo-nhyin and Ka-lé.

Meng-rai-kyau-tswa died after a reign of three years. He left a

daughter; and his youngest brother, Thi-ha-thi, governed at Prome.

At first, the nobles thought it better to offer the throne to Thi-ha-pa-

té, the son-in-law of the late king. But he refused to be king, so the

nobles went down to Prome, and brought up the prince in great

state to Ava. He assumed the title of Bhu-reng Na-ra-pa-ti.

The northern Tsau-bwas submitted to this king, and he reduced

to obedience the governor of Ra-may-then, who had rebelled. But

suddenly a great danger threatened the king. His son, the crown-

prince had been sent with a force to reduce the Shan chief of Peng-

lay. While the army was there, a large Chinese army under four

generals appeared. The king hastily recalled his son to Ava; left

him there in command, and himself proceeded out with his army and

took post at the Mandalé hill, a few miles to the north of the city.

The Chinese commander remaining at Maing-mau on the Shwé-lé

river, sent a message by a party of three hundred horsemen saying,

“ Will you, as in the time of the Pugdn kings, present vessels of gold

“and silver, or will you make war?” King Na-ra-pa-ti replied, that

since the city of Ava had been built, no such demand had been made,

and that he would give nothing. On receipt of this message, the

52 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

Chinese generals marched to Ba-mau, and began to construct a bridge

of boats to cross the river Irawati. This was in the year 806, and

the king now advanced up the river with a large number of armed

boats besides his land force, as far as Ta-goung, having his army

partly on some islands on the river in that neighbourhood. The

Chinese commanders now demanded that the Mau chief, Tho-ngan-

bwa, Tsau-bwa of Mo-goung, should be delivered up to them. The

king refused to do so, and the Chinese brought their army to Koung-

dun. There a great battle was fought. The Chinese were defeated,

two of their generals were killed, and besides as they suffered from

want of food, they retreated towards their own country, and took post

at Mo-wun ona tributary of the Shwé-lé river. The chiefs of Mo-

goung and Mo-nhyin watched them with an army at Ba-mau, and

the king returned to Ava.

In the year 807, the ruler of Toungi, Ta-ra-by4 died, and the king

now appointed his younger brother Meng Khoung-ngai, who was

T'a-ra-bya’s son, according to some authorities, to succeed him. The

same year, the Chinese returned with a still larger army than

before. The king was recommended by his ministers to comply with

their demand. He remained in camp near Ava, and awaited their

arrival. The Chinese generals on their arrival demanded the chief

Tho-ngan-bwa as their subject. The king replied, he was his

subject, but still if they would do him a service, he would comply with

their demand. The service was to attack the chief of Ra-may-then,

named Meng-ngay-kyau-hteng, who was in rebellion. The Chinese

generals agreed, and performed the service required. They then

returned to Ava. But the chief Tho-ngan-bwa took poison, and died.

The king delivered the dead body to the Chinese, They took out

the bowels; run a spit through it and dried it with fire, and then

carried it away. The reason why the Chinese demanded Tho-ngan-

bwa was, that his grandfather Tho-khyi-bwa had formerly been in

rebellion against the Emperor of China, and had fought against him.

This quarrel had never been satisfied, and so the grandson was

demanded.

In the year 808, the son of Bi-ngya-Dham-ma-Ra-dza, late king

of Pegu, named Bi-ngya-kyan, having quarrelled with his uncle

Bi-ngya-ran-Khaik then on the throne fled, and came to Pu-gan

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 53

where king Na-ra-pa-ti then was. The same year the king of Pegu

died, and was succeeded by Bi-ngya-pa-ri, nephew to Bi-ngya-ran.

In 811, a Chinese army again invaded Burma, marched down to

Bamau, and crossed the [vawati by a bridge of boats. Their object

was to attack the Tsau-bwas of Mo-nhyin and Mo-goung. Mo-

goung was now under two ‘Tsau-bwas who were brothers, named

Tho-kyin-bw& and Tho-thut-bwa. They, with the Tsau-bwa of

Mo-nhyin, bravely met and defeated the Chinese, who then retreated.

King Na-ra-pa-ti was very glad ofthis, and made them a large present

in silver.

In the following year, the king of Pegu being killed, the

Talaing nobles begged that Bi-ngya-kyan should be made king, Na-

ra-pa-ti therefore sent an army which placed him on the throne. But

he died in the year 814, and then Leit-mwut htau, son of Bi-ngya-

Kkhaik by his queen, the niece of king Mo-nhyin-meng-ta-ra, was placed

on the throne. He at once sent presents to the king of Burma,

calling him royal uncle. But he died the following year. Then

Sheng-tsau-pti was raised to the throne with the title of Bi-ngya-

kyan. She was the daughter of king Ra-dza-di-rit, first married to

her cousin Tha-mein-tsi, and after his death to king Thi-ha-thd of Ava.

But aiter his death, she left Ava, and returned to her own country. Now

at the age of fiity-nine years, she was placed on the throne of Pegu.

In 816, King Na-ra-pa-ti had a friendly meeting on the border of

the two countries with Ali kheng, king of Arakan.

In 820, the king invaded Tounga, but could not retain his authority

there. He also had much trouble with several of the Shan states,

His death was caused from a wound received in a struggle with his

son, who had raised a rebellion. The king fled with a few followers

from the city, and went down to Prome, where his second son was the

governor. There he died from the effects of his wonnd in the year

$30, after a reign of twenty-six years. His eldest son succeeded him,

and took the title of Bhu-reng Ma-ha-thi-ha-thi-ra, In this king’s

reign, the principal events recorded are his endeavours to retain

Toungii under his immediate government. He was troubled with

wars between the different Shan states; and his brother in the

province of Prome was disobedient. He died after a reign of twelve

| years. His son, styled Du-ti-ya Meng Khoung, next came to the throne,

54 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2;

and assumed the title of Thi-ri-thu-dham-mé Ra-dz4. In his reign

the troubles of the Burmese monarchy increased. His younger

brother, who governed Ra-may-then, rebelled, as did another brother

in the province of Tsa-leng. To the north, the Tsau-bwa of Myé-di

declared himself independent ; and the king’s uncle, Tha-do-meng-tsan,

who held the province of Tha-ra-wa-ti, succeeded to Prome, and pro-

claimed himself king. He then advanced up the river Irawati as

far as Ma-gwé. King Du-ti-ya Meng Khoung went down with a

force to meet him. After a negociation for about a month, they ex-

changed presents and separated, without any distinct arrangement

having been made. Soon after, the prince at T'sa-leng died, and that

province then returned to its allegiance. In the year 847, the king,

with the view apparently of preserving the loyalty of his eldest son,

gave him authority equal to his own. He received the title of Ma-

ha Thi-ha-thi-ra. He lived in the same palace with his father, and

each had a white umbrella as the symbol of sovereignty. This

measure probably had the effect of preserving the king from being

dethroned, but the prince died before his father, after having been

associated with him in the kingdom for fifteen years. |

The events in Toungt at this time were destined to have over-

whelming effect on the Ava monarchy more than half a century

later. They will now be glanced at as being connected with the

history of Du-ti-ya Meng Khoung. The ruler of Toungti, when this

king came to the throne, was T'si-thu-kyau-hteng who, like the royal

family, was probably of Shan descent. He maintained a position ~

almost equal to an independent prince. He died in the year 843, and

was succeeded by his son Tsi-thu-ngai, who as the history states, was

appointed by the king. Inthe year 847, this prince was put to death —

by his nephew Meng-kyi-ngyo, who assumed the title of Ma-ha-thi- 1

ri-dze-ya-thi-ra. The history states that he sent presents to the

king of Ava, who replied, that he did not wish to interfere with

Toungé, and sent the chief a white umbrella, thereby acknowledging

his independence.

In Pegu, Dham-ma Dzé-di had become king in succession to Sheng-

tsau-pi. He died in 854, and his son Bi-ngya-ran succeeded him.

He andthe chief of Tounga were suspicious of each other, anda

border warfare was maintained. The Toungt chief had built a new

1869. ] On the History of the Burma race. 55

fort, called Dwa-ra-wa-ti, which the king of Pegu came and attacked

with a large army. The chief of Toungi applied to the chief of

Tha-ra-wa-ti and also to Du-ti-ya Meng Khoung for assistance. But

before the aid could arrive, the Pegu army had been attacked and

defeated. The king of Ava now sent the Toungt chief all the

regalia in addition to the white umbrella before conferred upon him.

The king having bent to the circumstances of the time, preserved his

authority in a comparatively small extent of country round Ava, and

died after a reign of twenty-one years in 863.

His second son now ascended the throne with the title of Ma-ha-

Ra-dza-dhi-pa-ti and also Shwé-nan-sheng Na-ra-pa-ti. The state

of the kingdom is now admitted in the Ma-ha Ra-dzd-weng to have

been desperate. The Tsau-bwa of Mo-nhyin attacked and took

possession of Myé-du. The king’s brother-in-law, the governor of

Tsa-leng, having died, his widow married the son of the ruler of

Prome, who had taken the title of king, and they declared themselves

independent. The king, however, was able to re-establish his authority

there for atime. But he was now at open enmity with the chiefs or

kings of Prome and Toungi, and in the year 867, invited by two

inferior chiefs who were in rebellion, they sent forces to attack the

city of Tsa-lé. The king quite helpless called in the Tsau-bwa of

Un-boung to his assistance. ‘The king also marched with the army,

and the rebel force with their allies was defeated. In the north, the

Tsau-bwa of Mo-nhyin took possession of the province of Ta-ba-yin,

but the king was able to recover it. In 869, three of the king’s

brothers raised a rebellion at Pa-khan-gyi; but they were defeated and

put to death. The Tsau-bwaof Mon-hyin, named Tsa-lun, had now

become very powerful. In the year 873, he attacked the Tsau-bwa

of Un-boung, because he was friendly to the king. The place he

attacked was Ba-mau, which belonged to Un-boung. The Tsau-bwa

requested the king to attack Myé-du, which had a garrison of soldiers

in the service of the Mo-nhyin chief. But the fort was well defended

with muskets and jinjals, and the king could only blockade it at a

distance. While doing so, his troops were attacked by the chiefg of

Ka-lé, Toung-dweng-kyoung and Meng-kheng, who had become

tributary to Mo-nhyin. The king’s troops were entirely driven

away. For several years, king Na-ra-pa-ti was compelled to endure

56 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

rebellions ; and in the year 885, the chief of Mo-nhyin, marched with

an army of Shans down to 'sa-gaing, clearing the country of such

troops as remained under the king of Ava. From thence the chief

marched along the right bank of the river Ir4wati, and went as

far south as the city of Tha-ret, all the cities, towns, and districts

submitting to him. While he was at that place, the king of Prome,

Tha-do-meng-tsau, a near relation to king Na-ra-pa-ti, now sent

presents to Tsa-lun, the Mo-nhyin chief, offering if he would place

him on the throne of Ava, to be friendly and subservient. This was

agreed to. The Shan army then crossed to the east side of the Ira-

wati at Mye-dai. The army of the king of Prome advanced up the

river in boats. The Shan army marched by land. King Na-ra-

pa-ti had no army of his own left to oppose this force, but the

Un-boung Tsau-bwa, Khun Mhaing, marched to Ava to assist his

friend. Some fighting occurred near the city, in which the Burmese

foree was defeated, and king Na-ra-pa-ti fled together with Khun

Mhaing towards the north-east. When the king of Prome came up,

the Mo-nhyin Tsau-bwa, according to his promise, put him on the

throne. But after three days that chief retired, and crossing the

Tr4wati, returned to his own country. The king of Prome could

not retain his position, and retired also, taking with him a little

daughter of king Na-ra-pa-ti’s of eight years old. The king then

returned to Ava, together with the Un-boung Tsau-bw4, and once

more entered the palace. Khun Mhaing then returned to his own

country. The king gratefully offered him valuable presents, which he

would not accept. For two more years the king endured his fortune,

which was now near its end. Inthe year 888, the Tsau-bwé of

Mo-nhyin again put his troops in motiong and now was accompanied

by his son Tho-han-bwa4. They marched to Tsagaing, and after

defeating such Burmese troops as opposed them, crossed the river,

and besieged Ava. Aiter eight days the city was taken by storm.

King Na-ra-pa-ti attempting to escape on an elephant, was killed by

the hand of Tho-han-bwa. Most of his relations and nobles fled,

some to Prome, and some to Toungti. Thus died king Na-ra-pa-ti,

alter a reign of twenty-five years.

The Mo-nhyin chief was now master of what remained of the

kingdom of Ava. He stated that he did not wish to reign himself,

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 57

and retired to his own state. His son Tho-han-bwa now assumed

the title of king of Ava. His father persuaded Ran-noung, a nephew

of the late king’s, and a Burmese noble of much experience and

ability, to become chief minister. The various provinces which still

remained, were placed under Burmese and Shan governors. Tho-

han-bw4, against the advice of his minister, desired to attack both

Toungii and Prome. The king of Prome, Tha-do-meng-tsau, had

died, and was succeeded by his son Bhu-reng Htwé. In the same

year also died Bi-ngya-ran, king of Pegu, and was succeeded by his

son, Thu-sheng-ta-ga-rwut-pi. |

In the year 892 died Meng-kyi-ngyo, king of Toung-d, who had

reigned there for forty-five years. He was succeeded by his son

Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti, whose fortunes will hereafter be connected with

the Ava kingdom.

In 894, Tsa-lun of Mo-nhyin, father to the king of Ava, marched

down with an army, and he and his son proceeded to Prome. Bhu-

reng Htwé, the king of that city, sent his family away towards Arakan,

and shut himself up in the city. He was unable to resist the large

force brought against him, and was taken prisoner and carried to

Ava, Tsalun carried him away towards Mo-nhyin; but on the road,

he himself fell a victim to a conspiracy of the chiefs under him, and

Bhureng Htwé escaped. He returned to Prome. But there his son

had become king with the title of Na-ra-pa-ti ; and shut the gates

against him. He died in the adjoining forests of Na-weng. This

Na-ra-pa-ti of Prome had married a daughter of Shwé-nan-sheng

Na-ra-pa-ti of Ava. From this time until the year 900 (A. D. 1538),

Tho-han-bw& appears to have maintained himself without any

material alteration.

In that year, the king of Toung-t, Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti, attacked

the king of Peeu, who fled and took refuge with his brother-in-law,

the king of Prome. From this time the fortunes of the kings of

Ava, of Prome, and Pegu were inseparably connected, until they

were entirely overborne by the power of the king of Toung-t.

The Ma-ha-Ra-dzi-weng now proceeds to trace the history of that

hitherto obscure state. Toung-i is the name given to a district

lying about the middle of the course of the Poung-loung, a small

river, the basin of which lies between the Irawati and the Sal-win.

58 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

The extent of this district was originally not greater than from

seventy to eighty miles from north to south, with a breadth of about

half that distance. On the east of the valley are high mountains,

where the wild Karen tribes are still numerous, and probably from

a very remote period held independent sway. The mountains on the

west barely exceed one thousand feet elevation, and the Karen tribes

are now scarcely to be found there. Gradually Talaing colonists

from the south, and Burmese from the north, appear to have occupied

the valley of the middle Poung-loung, leaving the hills to the Karens.

But for safety, these colonists appear to have had strongholds in the

lower hills on the western side of the valley. One of these, which

was occupied on the Ka-boung stream, a tributary of the Poung-loung,

was called in the Burmese language, Toung-ngi, from its position on a

projecting mountain point, and this name has been transferred to the

city, afterwards built in the plain, and to the whole district. As

long as the seat of the Burmese monarchy was at Pu-gin, Toungu

was not much interfered with, but when the capital had been trans-

ferred to Pan-ya, the Shan dynasty appear to have been more

attracted to it. In the year 679, Thi-ha-thi Ta-tsi-sheng sent his

son U-za-na Kyau-tswa to this district ; he occupied the then existing

city, and probably brought Burmese or Shan settlers with him. Later

a chief from Pegu, but probably of Shan descent, Pyan-kyi-gyi

became king. But after this, a Burmese adventurer Moung-phau-ka

was raised to power, and from this time the kings of Ava looked upon

the country as part of their dominion. But the governors were

frequently independent, and by allying themselves alternately with

the Burmese or the Talaings, managed to maintain a position, which

the natural strength or wealth of the country could not otherwise

have sustained.

It has already been mentioned that when Du-ti-ya | Meng

Khoung, king of Ava, came to the throne, in the year 842

(A. D. 1480), the ruler of Toung-i was Tsi-tha-kyau-hteng. He

had a brother, the governor of Ra-mai-then, who had married

a grand niece of Mo-nhyin Meng-ta-ré, the Shan chief, who had

seized the throne of Ava in the year 788. The family also claimed

to be descended from U-za-na, the son of Kyau-tswa, the deposed

king of Pugan, who had reigned at Pan-ya after the death of his

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 59

adopted father Thi-ha-tha Ta-tsi-sheng; and also from the half

brother of that king, Nga-tsi-sheng. The family may be considered

as originally Shan, which now had almost become Burman. ‘The

governor of Ra-mai-then had a son Meng-kyi-ngyo, who was sent to

Toung- to be under his uncle T'si-thu-kyau-hteng. The uncle is

described as a man of a more savage disposition than even at that

time was usual. He decided to break off connection with the king

of Ava, and entered into friendship with the king of Pegu. His

nephew Meng-kyi-ngyo conspired against him, and put him to death.

He then succeeded him in the government of Toungu, and at once

proclaimed himself king in the year 847, being A. D. 1485, He now

assumed the title of Ma-ha-thi-ri-dze-ya-thi-ra. He soon became so

powerful, that his alliance was sought by the kings of Pegu and Siam.

In the year 853, he built a new city or fort in a secure position, which

he called Dwa-ra-wa-ti. He became involved in a quarrel with the

king of Pegu consequent on border disputes, and his city was attack-

ec, but he defeated the assailants. Inthe year 863, some nobles who

had been in rebellion against the king of Ava, fled and took refuge

in Toung-i. This produced a war, in which the army of Ava was

defeated. In 866, as already mentioned, the king of Toung-t made a

league with the king of Prome, Tha-do-meng-tsau, against Ava, in

‘support of two rebel chiefs. In the following year their forces

advanced up the Irawati, to support the rebellion of the king of

Ava’s brothers at Pa-khan-gyi. But the rebellion had been crushed

before his troops reached the scene of operations. The king of

Toung- now felt strong enough to build a new city in a more con-

venient place than that hitherto occupied. The new city of Toung-u

was therefore built in the year 872 (A. D. 1510) on the west bank

of the Poung-loung, and in the midst of the most extensive and

most fertile plain of the whole territory. The city was called in

Pa-li, Ke-tu-ma-ti. It is the custom of the Burmese, Shans, and

Talaings, to have a Pali as well as a vernacular name for their cities

and districts, which is used in all official documents. A more ancient

name for the territory of Toung-t was Dzé-yé-wa-ta-na.

The king of Toung-ti appears to have extended his influence and

territory towards the north, as the power of the king of Ava declined.

In the year 888, when the Mo-nhyin Tsau-bwa conquered Ava, many

- 60 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

of the Burmese nobles fled to Toung-u, and the king of that territory

may now be said to have become the representative of the ancient

Burmese monarchy. King Ma-ha-thi-ri-dze-ya-thu-ra died in the

year 892 (A. D. 1530).

The son who succeeded him was Ta-beng Shwé-hti, then only six-

teen years of age. He is called in the history Meng-ta-raé Shwé-hti.

From his birth many prodigies had announced his great destiny. In

the history, in accordance with the strange application of the doctrine

of transmigration to account for the actions of great conquerors,

which has been noticed before, this prince is represented as the

transmigrated prince of Pegu, Meng-rai-kyau-tsw4, son of Dham-mé-

tsé-di, king of that country, who was unjustly put to death by his

father. When dying, he exclaimed, “‘ If innocent, may I be born as a

‘Burmese prince, and subdue, rule over, and oppress the three

“'Talaing provinces.” And so it came to pass. The young king

from an irresistible internal influence, determined to invade and

conquer Pegu.

At this time, the capital of that kingdom was at Mut-ta-ma (Mar-

taban). That city was occupied as the seat of power, about the year

713 (A. D. 1351), by a Shan chief, styled Tsheng-phyt-sheng Bi-

ngya-u. The ancient Talaing kingdom, which had its capital at the

city of Pegu, was overthrown, and the seat of government removed ’

to Mut-ta-ma. In the year 888, Thu-sheng-ta-24-rwut-bi ascended

the throne. In 896 (A. D. 1534), the young king of Toung-« first

marched against Pegu. ‘The city was defended by two Shan nobles. »

Bi-ngya-lau, and Bi-ngya-kyan. They held it so obstinately that

Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti was forced to retreat. Inthe following year, he

again invested it. But from the walls of the city, the foreigners and

Muhammadans, called ‘“‘ Kula Pan-thé,” fired so incessantly with jinjals

and blunderbusses, and wounded and killed so many, that the king was

again obliged to retire, especially as the rainy season was nigh. In

898, he again invaded Pegu. The king of Pegu now met him in the

plain of Kau-la-ya to the north of the city, but was defeated. The

city, however, could not be taken. The king of Toung-i_ therefore

passed it by, and marched to Da-gun, the modern Rangoon, and from

thence, sent detachments, which took possession of Pu-thein, Myoung-

mya, and other cities in the delta of the Irawati. Still he could not

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 61

retain his position, and as the rainy season approached, he once more

returned to Toung-d,

The following year the king of Pegu sent a humble letter to Meng-

ta-r4 Shwé-hti, proposing peace and friendship. The bearers of this

letter were the two Shan nobles, Bi-ngya-lau, and Bi-ngya-kyau, who

had defended the city of Pegu. The king received them kindly, but

would give no reply. As they could obtain no reply, they returned

to their own master. ‘heir king became suspicious of them, and

Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti now had recourse to a deep artifice. He caused

a letter to be inscribed on a scroll of gold as follows: ‘‘ The king of

‘‘ Dzé-yé-wa-ta-na Ké tu-ma-ti informs his uncles Bi-ngya-lau and

“ Bi-ngya-ran that, when the affair as before agreed is settled, Bi-

“‘noya-lau shall be appointed govornor of Han-tha-wa-ti (Pegu), and

‘**Bi-ngya-kyan of Mut-ta-ma (Martaban), and so be ye diligent in

“my royal service.” This scroll being enclosed in a cloth bag and

placed in a basket, was entrusted to two bold and clever messengers

with several followers. They proceeded into the Pegu territory, and

at one of the border villages, having entered in a friendly manner,

they after a time managed to get into a dispute with the head of the

village regarding the provisions brought them. This gradually led

to a serious quarrel, and the messengers, as a large number of the

Talaing villagers assumed, fled, leaving behind them their baggage and

the basket which contained the king’s letter. The villagers took

everything to their headman, and all was brought to the king of

Pegu. The letter was now discovered and without any inquiry, the

two noblemen were put to death. The king of Toung-t now again

attacked the city of Pegu, and took it after a slight resistance. . The

king of Pegu determined to retire to his brother-in-law, the king of

_ Prome, and proceeded up the river. The king of Toung-t now con-

sulted with his nobles, as to whether it would be better to follow on

to Prome or to march against Mut-ta-ma. It was decided to do the

former. The king’s principal general was Kyau-hteng Nau-ra-hté,

| who was also his brother-in-law. He was distantly connected by

| blood with Meng-ta-ré Shwe-hti, and was said to be descended from

one of the former kings, or governors, of Toung-t. This general led

| the forces of the king to Noung-ro, where the king of Pegu had

collected an army. Kyau-hteng attacked and utterly defeated that

| ‘ 9

62 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

army. The king of Pegu then fled with his whole family to Prome,

where he was received by the king Na-ra-pa-ti.

King Meng-ta-ra Shwe-hti was profuse in his acknowledgments to

his general, and bestowed upon him the title of Bhu-reng Noung,

intimating that he would be king hereafter. It was now determined

to pursue the king of Pegu to Prome, and here the history once

more is linked with the fortunes of the king of Ava, Tho-lan-bwa,

which for a time were dropped, in order to trace the events which

brought the king of Toungu from Pegu up the Irawati to Prome.

The king of Prome hearing that he was to be attacked, had per-

suaded Tho-han-bwa, king of Ava, to support him, That-king came

down the river with a large army of Shans. They and the fugitive

king of Pegu met at Prome, and took an oath of fidelity to each

other. Near Prome, the flotillas of the contending powers had an

engagement, in which the allies were defeated, and some of their

principal officers were taken prisoners. Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti either

did not then feel himself strong enough to retain Prome, or more

urgent affairs called him to Pegu ; for he now led his army back to

that country. . The king of Pegu, Thi-sheng-ta-g4-rwut-bi now desired

his allies to invade Pegu. But they were unwilling to do so. He

therefore proceeded himself with a small force, but lost his life in the

jungal. King Tho-han-bwa returned to Ava, taking with him the

children of the king of Pegu. Soon after, the king of Prome, Na-ra-

pa-ti died, and was succeeded by his younger brother Sheng Tha-ret,

who took the title of Meng Khoung. His sister, the widow of the

king of Pegu, was sent to Arakan, where she married the king of that

country.

After the death of Thu-sheng-ta-ga-rwut-bi, all the Talaing nobles

in Pegu submitted to Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti. He provided for the

most worthy by appointing them tothe different districts. But

Mut-ta-ma (Martaban) still held out. The brother-in-law of the late

king, Tsau-bi-ngya, governed that province, and refused to submit to

the conqueror. The king therefore marched with a large army to |

take the city. On arrival, he found the difficulties enormous. Situ-

ated near the mouth of a great river, or an arm of the sea, it was

defended with numerous guns; and the Ku-la Pan-thé (Foreigners

and Muhammadans), some on the city walls, and some on board seven

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 63

ships, heavily armed, anchored before the city, were ready to defend

it. It was in the year 902 (A. D. 1540) that the king besieged

Mut-ta-ma. Bhureng Noung commanded all the forces under the

immediate orders of the king. The boats brought from Pegu were

useless; they could effect nothing against the ships. And provisions

could not be kept from entering the city, so that the garrison could

not be starved. The king of Mut-ta-ma being encouraged by the

foreigners would not submit, Meng-ta-ra Shwe-hti, however, suc-

ceeded in drawing to his side the governor of Maulamyaing (Maul-

main), and through his assistance he had several large rafts of timber

constructed, which were piled high with dry bamboos. These were

made ready up the river and set afloat to drift down with the tide.

When completely on fire, they were directed to where the ships lay,

and amidst the great confusion which ensued, three large and four

small vessels were burnt. While this was going on, the land army

assaulted and took the city. Immense plunder was taken, which the

soldiers were allowed to keep, the king only reserving for himself

munitions of war. All who resisted or had arms, were killed, but the

king by proclamation forbade the soldiers to kill the men of rank.

The governor Tsau-bi-ngya, was taken prisoner, and appointed to be

governor of Myoung-mya; and the other nobles of the city received

what was appropriate. The governor of Maulamyaing was liberally

rewarded. He swore allegiance to Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti, and was

confirmed in his previous government of the country, east of the

Salwin river. Care was taken to have guards placed on the frontier,

to watch Zim-may and Siam.

Having made these arrangements, the king returned to Han-tha-

wa-ti (Pegu), where he was solemnly consecrated king of his new

dominions. Thecity now received some additions to make the forti-

fications more complete.

When Meng-ta-r4 Shwé-hti left Toung-u, Meng-rai-thing-ga-thu,

the father of Bhureng Noung, had been appointed governor. The

king regarding him as his own father, gave him the title of king,

with regalia and a palace. He was thenceforth known as Meng-rai

Thi-ha-thi, tributary king of Ke-tu-ma-ti.

In the year 903, Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti proceeded with a great

retinue to Da-gun, made rich offerings, and crowned the building with

64 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

a kingly crown. Having feasted the clergy and laity, he returned to

Han-thaé-wa-ti, and informed Bhureng Noung that he would march

to Prome after the month Tha-den-gwyut (October), and charged

him to make all the necessary preparations. A large army and fleet

of boats were prepared, including some boats armed with guns. The

city of Pegu was left in charge of Tha-do-dham-ma Ra-dz4, brother

of Bhureng Noung, and Thet-shé-kyau-hteng. The whole of the

war arrangements were under the direction of Bhureng Noung, and

the army moved by land and water from the city of Pegu in the

month Ta-tsoung-mun (November).

In the meantime, Meng Khoung, king of Prome, was exerting

himself to resist the formidable force which had been gathered

against him. Tho-han-bwa, king of Ava, felt that his own safety

depended upon supporting Prome. He collected an army, and sup-

ported by the Tsau-bwas of Un-boung, Mo-meit, and Mo-nhyin,

marched down to Prome. The king of Arakan also having been

applied to for help, sent a land column across the hills from Than-

dwai (Sandoway) under his brother; while another force was sent by

sea, round Cape Negrais to penetrate up the Bassein river, and so

cause a diversion.

Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti having reached Prome with his fleet and

army, remained at a little distance to avoid loss from the guns.

Hearing that the king of Ava, with the northern Shans, was moving

down, he sent half of his army to the northern side of the city under

Bhureng Noung, who suddenly attacked them about one march

distant from the city. They were completely routed, the guns of

Bhureng Noung doing great execution. The Shan army fled to Ava,

and there the Tsau-bwas proposed making an attack on Toung-t,

but nothing was done, and they returned to their own countries.

The city of Prome was closely invested, but was too strong to be

taken quickly. A letter was now intercepted from the brother of the

king of Arakan to the king of Prome announcing his arrival, and

that he was about five marches distant. A feigned reply was once —

sent together with guides, and Bhureng Noung was despatched with

a force to attack the Arakanese army. Taken by surprise, they were

defeated and utterly dispersed, being only saved from destruction by

the hilly country, which favoured their flight. The son of the king

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 65

of Arakan who had come with the boats by sea, hearing of the

defeat of his uncle, returned home. The king of Prome being thus

left entirely to his own resources, and the citizens and soldiers suf-

fering from want of food, at length surrendered in the month Na-gun

904 (June 1542, A. D.). King Meng Khoung with his queen and

concubines were sent to Toung-t. Tha-do-dham-ma Ra-dza, one of

the brothers of Bhureng Noung, was made tributary king of Prome,

being invested with the usual regalia. Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti having

made arrangements for the government of the country, placed garri-

sons in such places as required protection, and returned to Han-tha-

-wa-ti. A number of the nobles, officers and soldiers of Prome, were

brought away. :

At Ava, the defeat of king Tho-han-bwa had increased his diffi-

culties. His Shan followers had always been hated by the Burmese,

whom they cruelly oppressed. In the palace there were both Shan

and Burmese guards. The Shan officers had long wished to clear

the palace of all Burmese. The latter depended upon Meng-gyi

Rau-noung, who supported their interests. The wicked character of

| Tho-han-bwa caused him to be hated, and facilitated a conspiracy

against his life. While he was living at a summer palace, the Burmese

nobles and guards were suddenly set upon and killed, and the king

| himself was seen no more. This occurred the month before Prome

| was surrendered. This king’s character is thus drawn in the Ma-ha

| Ra-dz4-weng: “He was of a cruel and savage disposition. He

*‘spared not men’s lives. He respected not the three treasures.

.“ Pagudas, he used to say, are not the Phra, but merely fictitious

| “‘ vaults in which the Burmese deposit gold, silver, and jewels; so he

'“dug into and rifled those shrines of their treasures. The Phun-

|“gyis too, he used to say, having no wives and children, under

“pretence of gathering disciples, collect guards round them, ready

“to rise in rebellion. So he built a number of sheds on the plain of

|“ Toung-ba-li, and pretending to do honour to the Phun-gyis, invited

“all those round Ava, Tsagaing, and Pan-ya to a feast, Then sur-

6 rounding them with an army, he had them all slaughtered. He then

“seized all the books in their monasteries, and had them burnt. But

‘some of the Shans had pity on the Phun-gyfs, and many thus

“escaped to Prome and Toung-u. More than three hundred and

| “sixty were killed, but more than a thousand escaped.”

66 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

On the death 6 Tho-han-bwa, the Burmese wished Meng-gyi Ran-

noung to become king. But he refused, and recommended them to

choose the Tsau-bwa of Un-boung, named Khun-mhaing-ngai, who

was a relation to the late king Shwé-nan-sheng Na-ra-pa-ti. The

Tsau-bwa accepted the invitation,and came to Ava. He ascended

the palace in the year 904. Ran-noung became chief minister, but

after about a year, wearied with worldly affairs, he became a Ra-han

in the province of Mek-kha-ré. Khun-mhaing-ngai determined to

attack the new king of Prome. He was supported by seven powerful

Tsau-bwds, and in the month Nat-dau 905 (November 1543), they

proceeded by land and water against that city. The tributary king

of Prome, Tha-do-dham-ma Ra-dz4, had no force sufficient to meet

them in the field, so he shut himself up in Prome, which was well de-

fended with guns. As soon as Meng-ta-raé Shwé-hti heard of this

attack, he came to the rescue with a large army. The Shans

were defeated near Prome, and Bhureng Noung followed them up

the river IrawAti, as far as the city of Pu-gan, which was captured.

Governors were appointed to all the provinces which were occupied

above Prome, and having made such arrangements for future security

as seemed advisable, Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti returned to Pegu, which he

reached in the month Wa-goung 906 (August 1544, A. D.)

The governors who had been appointed to Tsa-leng and other

districts, had desultory fighting with the officers of the king of Ava.

But the confusion among the northern Tsau-bwas became daily worse.

The son of the Tsau-bwé of Mo-nhyin, named T’sa-lun-ngai, leagued

with Kyau-hten, who had been governor of Tsa-leng, and enabled

him to take possession of Tsa-gaing, where he set himself up as king

in the year 907. In the same year died Khun-mhaing-ngai after a

reign of three years. He was succeeded by his son, who had been

Tsau-bwé of Mo-byé. He took the title of Na-ra-pa-ti. This king

did not join with his kinsmen, the Shan chiefs, but entered into

friendly relations with Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti. He strove also to con-

ciliate the ruler of Tsa-gaing, Kyau-hteng. This ruler urged on by

the Tsau-bwa of Mo-nhyin, named Tsa-lun, gradually collected forces

with the view of attacking Ava, His measures were complete by

the year 913 (A, D. 1551), when he had a large force and a fleet, to

cross the river and attack Ava. The king Mo-byé-meng, however,

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 67

would not wait an attack. He fled from his palace, and took refuge

with Bhureng Noung, who then had succeeded Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti.

The Tsa-gaing chief Kyau-hteng now took undisputed possession of

Ava, and ascended the throne in the year 913.

We must now relate the events which had occurred in the kingdom

of Pegu since Meng-ta-r4 Shwé-hti returned there from Prome in the

year 906. That king now turned his attention to settling the in-

ternal affairs of his kingdom. He beautified the capital, and built

monasteries and other religious works. He adopted several of the

customs and the dress of the former Talaing royal family. In the

year 907, he was solemnly consecrated as king, having a crown like

that used by the Talaing kings, but with all other paraphernalia like

those formerly used by the Burmese and Talaing kings. Meng-rai-

Thi-ha-thi, the king of Toung-u, was present at this ceremony ; and

his son Bhureng Noung appeared as Hin-shé-meng or Crown-Prince.

All the nobles received magnificent presents from the bounty of the

king, and the whole kingdom was full of joy.

About this time the king of Arakan died, and his son U-ba-Ra-dza

succeeded him. His brother, who was governor of Than-dwai

(Sandoway), was discontented. He came with presents to the king of

Han-tha-wa-ti, and asked for assistance to gain the kingdom of

Arakan. Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti promised bimself to go with an army.

Both a land force and a fleet were put in motion in the month Ta-

tshoung-mon 908 (November 1546, A. D.). The town of Than-

dwai was occupied. The Arakanese retreated, and the Burmese army

marched on to the capital city, Arakan. The king found the city too

strong to be taken, but he entered into a negociation with Ma-ha

Dham-ma-rit, the king of Arakan, by which the king’s uncle was

recognized as .governor of Sandoway. The king of Pegu then

returned to his own country.

While he was in Arakan, the king of Siam had marched an army

and taken possession of Dha-way (Tavoy). The king of Pegu

ordered his officers to drive them out, and this having been done, he

seriously meditated a march on Siam. Having assembled his army

and made all preparations, he left the city of Pegu in the month of

Ta-tshoung-mon 910 (November 1548, A. D.), and proceeded to Mut-

ta-ma. All the arrangements as usual were under the direction

68 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

of Bhureng Noung. The army advanced with great difficulties

and much fighting to the capital of Siam. The general, Bhureng

Noung, was indefatigable in his exertions, and his son, a boy of thirteen

years, greatly distinguished himself. But the capital city was most

difficult to operate against, on account of the streams and water

channels round it. The Kula Pan-thé people also were there with

ships and guns. Seeing that great delay would occur, and fearing a

want of provisions, the king determined to retreat. Much fighting —

took place in effecting this. The son-in-law of the king of Siam had

been taken prisoner ina skirmish. This led to negociations, and

according to the history, the king of Siam agreed to pay tribute.

Two of his brothers were sent to the camp of Meng-ta ra Shweé-hti

to enter into arrangements. The Siamese prisoners were released,

and the Burmo-Talaing army retired. This expedition occupied

five months.

The history now relates a curious incident in the life of Meng-ta-ra

Shwé-hti, which appears to have had an evil influence upon him, and

eventually led to his death. It is told as follows: “ This powerful

‘‘and wise king, by associating with a false heretical Kula Ba-reng-gyi

“‘(Foreigner-Feringi) deviated from the virtuous conduct becoming

“aking. This Ku-la Ba-reng-gyi was the nephew of Peits-tsa-rit

‘‘Meng, and had been sent with seven ships and one hundred larger

‘‘ vessels to attack Acheen. He took in guns, powder, and balls, at

“‘ Ma-li-ka (Malacca), but was defeated by the Acheen chief and

“forced to retreat. He came to Muttama with a few vessels, and

“was made prisoner by the governor, who sent him to Meng-ta-ré

“ Shwé-hti. The king soon became familiar with the youth, gave

‘‘ him a house to live in, and bestowed upon him in marriage one of

“the female attendants of the palate. This young woman, after

“‘ having learnt how to prepare dishes, according to the Kula method,

“‘ was accustomed to present such eatables to the king. Not only that,

‘“‘ but wine and sweet intoxicating drinks, were also presented, of

‘‘ which the king became very fond. At last the Kula was wished to

“live in the palace. From constantly drinking these liquors the

‘“‘ disposition of the king became changed from good to bad. He

‘¢ vave contradictory and absurd orders. He attributed wrong motives

“to innocent men, and ordered them to be put to death. At length

1869. ] On the History of the Burma race. 69

‘“‘ Bhu-reng Noung with the concurrence of all the nobles, Shan,

‘Burman, and Talaing, took the guidance of affairs into his, own

“hands, and putting the nephew of Peits-tsa-rit into a ship, with his

“‘ property, and giving him gold and silver, sent him away to the

“Kula country.” From this time Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti had little

more than nominal authority.

In the year 910, the father of Bhureng Noung who was king of Toung-

tidied. His title was Meng-rai Thi-ha-thu. He was succeeded by one of

his younger sons, and there was bestowed on him the title of Thi-ha-tha.

He is also called Meng Khoung. Bhureng Noung having now become

the virtual ruler, his descent is carefully traced in the history. On

the father’s side he was descended from Meng-khoung-ngai, who was

governor of Toung-i, and was killed in the year 813. This Meng-

khoung-ngai was the son, or younger brother, of 'Ta-ra-bya who had also

been governor of Toungi and who was of Shan descent. Bhureng

Noung’s mother was said to be descended from a half brother of

Nga-tsi-sheng Kyau-tswa, king of Pén-ya. Bhureng Noung had

two brothers, Meng-rai-tsi-thvi, who afterwards became king of Mut-

ta-ma; and Tha-do-dham-ma, who became king of Prome. There

were also two sisters. After their mother’s death, their father had

married her younger sister, and had two sons by that marriage,

Bhureng Meng Khoung, who became king of Toungt, and Meng-rai

Kyau-hteng, called Tha-do-meng-tsau, who became king of Ava.

The family was originally of Shan descent. Having been settled for

three or four generations at nis ai it had become Burmese in

national feeling.

In the year 911, a son of Bi-ngya-ran, the deposed king of Pegu

by an inferior wife, rebelled, and took the title of Tha-mein-htau-

ra-ma. He got together a force, and took possession of the fort of

Ma-kau. Bhureng-noung-dau without delay took measures against

him. He was defeated and fled, but managed to gain possession of

the fort of Than-lyeng (Syriam), and remained there secure. But he

was soon obliged to abandon the place, when a force was brought

against it, and fled to the westward. Bhureng Noung followed him

up, and fixed his head quarters at Da-la. At this time the tributary

king of Toung-t, Thi-ha-thi was in charge of the city of Pegu.

A Talaing nobleman, Tha-mein-tsau-dwut had been appointed go-

70 On the History of the Burma race. | [No. 2,

vernor of Tsit-toung (Sit-tang), but was now in charge of the

palace and the royal person. The king Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti wa

staying at a country palace, at a place called Pan-ta-rau. A report

was spread of a white elephant having appeared, and the king was

induced to go out into the jungal. Tha-mein-tsau-dwut now ma-

naged to send away those about the king on whom he could not

depend, and at night in the month Ka-tshun 912 (May 1550, A. D.),

he killed Meng-ta-ré Shwé-hti. He had reigned twenty years and

was thirty-six years old. The chief Ra-han performed his funeral

rites, and collecting the bones, placed them ina golden vase, which

he buried in an undefiled spot.

In the mean time, Tha-mein-tsau-dwut killed some of the nobles

about the king; drew others to his side, and then withdrew to Tsit-

toung, where he assumed the title of king. He took the title of

Tha-mein-tsek-ka-wau. Bhureng Noung was at Da-la hunting

down the followers of Tha-mein-htau-ré-ma in the difficult country

of the delta. His younger half brother Thi-ha-thi called round him

his followers, and marched from Pegu city to Toung-t. Tha-mein-

tsau-dwut at once occupied the city of Pegu. Tha-do-dham-ma

Ra-dza, tributary king of Prome, changing his title to Tha-do-tha,

declared himself independent. All the cities and districts at the

Tréwati river beyond Prome as far as Pu-gén remained under their

own governors, Bhureng Noung now consulted all the Shan, Talaing, ©

and Burmese nobles who remained faithful to him. It was determined

to march to Toung-ti as the place where Bhureng Noung could best

collect his forces, and where he possessed most strength and influence.

Whereas ‘“ Da-lain the midst of the Talaing country, was like a

‘“‘wasp’s nest, into which the hand had better not be put.” He im-

mediately put himself in motion. His wife who was in the city of Pegu,

managed to escape and joined him. When he arrived near Toung-i,

his brother Thi-ha-thi made no advances to him, but remained

sullenly within the city. Bhureng Noung patiently waited in his

camp watching events. At Pegu, the usurper Tha-mein-tsau-dwut

did not long give satisfaction to the Talaing nobles. They therefore

deposed him, and called in Tha-mein-htau-ra-ma who, by this time,

had set himself up at Mut-ta-ma. These events induced several Shan

chiefs, who did not wish to serve a Talaing king, to come with their

1869. ] On the History of the Burma race. i

followers and join Bhureng Noung. Some chiefs also came to him

from Toung-u. At length he found himself strong enough to attack

that city. But he was obliged to proceed to reduce it by starvation.

At the end of four months, the city was surrendered; no plundering

was allowed; his brother was pardoned, and Bhureng Noung was

consecrated as king, with the title of Tsheng-phyti-mydé-sheng Meng-

ta-ra-gyi. His former title of Bhureng Noung will, however, be

retained in this narrative.

The king now considered that his best plan was to make himself

master of Prome, where another of his brothers was king. He

marched his army across the hills from Toungt; but arrived on the

banks of the Irawati, he found himself at a loss for boats, while

Tha-do-thu had a large fleet. The city was too strong to be attacked.

The king therefore leaving it marched on to Mye-dai, which submitted,

as did Ma-lwun and other cities higher up the river. There he

gained a large addition to his army and a fleet of boats. He there-

fore returned to Prome, and re-invested the city. Some of the officers

in command were now in communication with Bhureng Noung, and

the city gates were opened to him. The king pardoned his brother

Tha-do-dham-ma-Ré-dza, and he was reinstated as tributary king of

Prome.* The whole country on the Irawati, as far down as Dha-

nu-byti (Downebew), submitted to Bhureng Noung. It was now

the year 913, and from the events which were occurring at Ava, the

king of that city, Mo-byé-meng, had fled to take refuge. The king

marched up the country, and penetrated nearly to Ava, which he

intended to attack. But news reached him that preparations were

being made to attack Toungi from Pegu. He lost not a moment,

but marched back as far as Mye-dai. From thence he despatched his

brother Meng-rai-kyau-hteng with a force across the hills, and himself

proceeded down to Prome. There he collected an army to invade

Pegu, of which his brother Tha-do-dham-maé Ré-dz4 was made com-

mander-in-chief. He, however, marched to Toung-t, taking Mo-byé-

meng with him.

* The Ma-ha-Ra-dza-weng wishes to make it appear that Tha-do-thi who

held out Prome against Bhureng Noung, was not his brother, but some one else

who assumed the name. I have considered it most consistent with the whole

narrative to assume that Tha-do-thi was the brother, and that like the other

brother at Toungt, his rebellion was pardoned.

72 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

At Toung-u, he made all arrangements to march against Pegu, and

left in the month Ta-gi 9138 (April 1551). His brothers Meng

Khoung and Meng-rai-kyau-hteng accompanied him. He defeated

the Talaing usurper, Tha-mein-htau-ra-ma, entered the city of Pegu,

and the Talaing nobles submitted to him. The Talaing usurper, after

taking refuge at Pu-thein, fled from that place to Mut-ta-ma, and

became a Ra-hén. Bhureng Noung who had followed him to Pu-

thein, then returned to Pegu city, where he built a house on the site

where he had formerly lived. He now took measures for settling the

country, and called his brothers around him, These were Meng

Khoung, Tha-do-dham-ma Ré-dza, Meng-rai-kyau-hteng, and Meng-

rai Tsi-thu. He repaired all the pagodas and monasteries which had

been injured during the troubles, and made suitable offerings at the

grave of Meng-ta-ra-Shwé-hti. His brother; Meng-rai Tsf-thi, was

now made tributary king of Mut-ta-ma, and received the regalia. Tha-

do-dham-ma Ra-dza received regalia as tributary king of Prome.

Meng Khoung received regalia as tributary king of Toungi. He

rewarded munificently all his officers, Burman, Talaing, and Shan,

and the country and the people began to be quiet and satisfied. In —

Mut-ta-ma, however, though the Talaing usurper had become a Ra-han,

and fled tothe border of Siam, he again appeared, collected a few

followers, and proclaimed himself king. He was again defeated, and

after wandering about in the jungles, was taken in the month Ta-gt

914 (April 1552). He was put to death.

Bhureng Noung now called a council to consider and decide upon

his future measures. He was careful to assemble round him his

brothers and principal officers, Burmese, Talaing, and Shan. The

council was in favour of a march upon Ava, to establish there the

government of Bhureng Noung. An army and flotilla were collected,

which moved by water from. Pegu in the month of Wa-tsho 915

(July 1553). The command of this force was given to Ma-ha U-ba-

Ra-dzé, the king’s son, but on account of his youth an officer of

experience was sent, who was really responsible. This expedition would

appear to have been intended rather to reconnoitre than to attack. |

The king of Ava, styled Tsa-gaing Tsi-thi Kyau hteng, had made

great preparations to defend his capital. An army of Shans, chiefly

from the country to the east of the upper Irawati, was stationed

1869.] On the History of the Burma race. 78

close to the city. Another army composed of the contingents of the

western Shans and other troops, was encamped at Ta-ruk-myo on the

bank of the Irawati, about fifty miles below the capital. The

invading army on reaching Pu-gan heard such reports of the de-

fensive measures that had been adopted, that the commanders

considered it prudent to report to the king the state of affairs, and

await further orders. The result was, that the army under Ma-ha

U-ba-Ra-dza retired.

Bhureng Noung now made more strenuous exertions. He collected

men and provisions from all parts of the wide territory subject to

him. In Pegu and Martaban a vast number of war-boats, and vessels

of every description as transports, were constructed and collected.

While this work went on, the city of Pegu was improved and a

palace built. In the month Wa-tsho of the year 916, the son and

nephew of the king of Arakan came, and took refuge with Bhureng

Noung. He received them with great favour. The former he

married to the daughter of his brother Meng-rai-tsi-thti, king of Mut-

ta-ma, and gave him the title of Thi-ri-dham-ma-thau-ka. The

latter, named Sheng-rai-myo, he married to one of his own daughters,

and gave him the city of T'a-mau for his support.

The whole of the arrangements for the invasion of Ava were now

complete. The strength of the army and flotilla is stated to have

been as follows: The flotilla was to proceed up the river Irawati.

Tt consisted of six hundred large boats and war-boats ; three hundred

lighter row boats ; and of five hundred provision boats; one hundred and

twenty thousand soldiers accompanied the flotilla, of whom a portion

was distributed on board the boats ; while the rest apparently marched

from point to point to keep company with the flotilla. The water

force was under the command of the tributary king ot Prome, Tha-

do-dham-ma Ra-dza.

The land column of the army of invasion is stated to have con-

sisted of one hundred and eighty thousand soldiers, with eight

hundred elephants, and nine thousand horses. This included a corps

of four hundred Ku-la soldiers, wearing caps, uniforms, and trowsers,

and armed with muskets. Their place in the line of march was in

front and rear of the royal elephant. This army, under the imme-

diate command of Bhureng Noung marched from the city of Pegu in

74 On the History of the Burma race. [ No. 2,

the month Nat-dau 916 (November 1554). The flotilla had been

despatched much earlier.

The following arrangements were made for the government during

the king’s absence. His son Ma-ha U-ba-Ra-dz4 was left in charge

at the capital city of Pegu, with a faithful officer as his adviser. At

Mut-ta-ma (Martaban), king Meng-rai-tsi-thu remained with a large

force, on account of the neighbouring kings of Zimmay and Siam,

The governor of Mau-la-myaing, Bi-ngya-u, and other trustworthy

officers were under this tributary king. Arrangements were also

made towards the Pu-thein (Bassein) side to guard against any danger

from Arakan.

Having thus provided for the safety of his southern kingdom,

Bhureng Noung proceeded to carry out his plan for the subjugation

of Ava. The whole army, other than that which accompanied the

flotilla, marched direct north up the valley of the Poung-loung river

to Toung-t. The main body under command of Bhureng Noung

marching as far as Ra-may-then, directed its march in a north-

westerly direction, through Kyouk-pan-doung, until it debouched

upon the Irawati at Pu-gan. The rest of his army continued its

march northerly for some distance. A corps was then detached to

the left under the command of the king’s brother Meng-rai-kyau-hten,

which went to attack the fortified post of Peng-ta-lai. The re-

mainder under the command of the tributary king of Toung-%,

Meng Khoung, continued its march direct towards Ava. After taking

Peng-ta-lai, which made no resistance, Meng-rai-kyau-hten joined his

brother, and they marched to a position somewhere in the neigh-

bourhood of Myin-tsaing or Pan-ya, where they entrenched them-

selves, to await news of Bhureng Noung.

The king had so regulated his movements, that by the time he

reached: Pu-gién, the flotilla and army which accompanied it, were ~

not far off. He now crossed his whole army to the west banks of the

Irawati, landing at Kwom in the district of Pa-khén-gyi. The

army then marched up the western bank of the river and up the

course of the Khyen-dweng to A-myin. A portion of the flotilla

was also sent there, by which the army crossed that river. The

governors of provinces everywhere submitted, and the king now

marched to Tsa-gaing. The governor of that city had fled to Mo-

1869. | On the History of the Burma race. 75

nhyin. The king here disposed his whole army and flotilla, and

sent scouts across the river to communicate with his brothers Meng-

rai-kyau-hten and Meng Khoung, and to fix a day for a combined

assault upon the city of Ava.

These arrangements having been agreed upon, the two brothers

advanced from their entrenchments towards the city. The king of

Ava, Tsi-thu-kyau-hteng, came out to oppose them at the head of

a Shan army. A battle ensued, in which the Ava Shans were worsted,

and forced back into the city. The two brothers then entrenched

themselves on the ground they had won. In the mean time Bhureng

Noung was crossing the Irawati to the Ava side. Arrived there

with his whole army, and in communication with his brothers, the

city of Ava, the people, and the garrison were enclosed like fish in a

trap. A general assault was made. The soldiers by attacking the

gates, by digging and by scaling the walls, at length took the city

in the month Ta-bu-dwai 916 (March 1555). The king of Ava,

T'si-thu-kyau-hteng, had escaped from the city, hoping to join the

Un-boung Tsau-bwa, who was marching down with a force to support

him. But he was taken prisoner and brought before Bhureng Noung.

That great king having pity on him, at once provided for him a place

where he might remain with his family and attendants. Afterwards

he was sent to Pegu, and a handsome house suitable to his rank,

with a pleasant garden, was provided for him at the city of Han-tha-

wa-ti.

Bhureng Noung intending to remain fora time at Ava, built for

himself a temporary house at Toung-ba-la. His brother, Meng-rai-

kyau-hten was made tributary king of Ava with the title of Tha-do-

meng-tsau. He received the usual regalia. Bhureng Noung with

the dignity of Emperor in the wide dominions over which he ruled,

began such measures as were necessary to secure his victory.

——-

Observations.—The dynasties which reigned at Pu-gan throughout

the long period of fourteen hundred years, had gradually declined

from the powerful position which the monarchy held, during the reign

of A-nau-ra-htd-tsau, in the eleventh century of the Christian era.

The invasion by the Chinese, or Tartars, during the reign of Kublai

Khan towards the end of the thirteenth century; the capture of the

76 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

capital, and the flight of the king to the southern provinces, completed

the ruin of the kingdom. An immigration of Shans had long been

going on—independently of the earlier arrival of people of that race

in the upper Irawati—into the country of the middle Irawati.

They had gradually acquired the influence due to their superior

energy and intelligence. In the confusion which resulted from the ©

destruction of the ancient monarchy, tkree brothers, leading men of

Shan race, born in the country, who had risen to power under the

native kings, gradually acquired independent authority. This au-

thority probably did not extend in any direction over one hundred

miles from Myin-tsaing as a centre. Before long, this Shan kingdom

was separated into two states, one being established at Sagaing and

one at Pan-ya, About fifty years later, these two states were absorbed,

and a new dynasty was established at Ava in a position not far from

the two former cities, by Meng-kyi-tswa, who professed to unite in

his person, the claims of the three Shan brothers, and also of the

ancient race of kings of Pu-gan. Ava indeed had been built in the

year 1864 A. D. by Tha-do-meng-byé, who claimed to be descended

from the ancient kings of Ta-goung; but he died without issue, and

Meng-kyi-tswa was then called to the throne, as one who could rule

in troublous times, and possessed what were acknowledged to be

hereditary claims. While there seems to be no reason for doubting

his descent from the sister of the three Shan brothers, his alleged

direct descent from Kyau-tswa, the deposed king of Pu-gan, is pro-

bably an invention of aftertimes. However this may be, it is

evident from the history that the whole power in the country which

constituted the kingdom of Ava from A. D. 1864 until A. D. 1554,

was held by Shans, or persons of Shan descent. The story of the

finding of golden images by Meng-kyi-tswa at Meit-hti-lau, ,said to

represent those who should reign in Burma of the race of the “ Leng-

dzeng kings of Siam,”

shows that that king desired to be considered

of Thai, rather than of Mran-ma or Burma race. The length of the

reign of Meng-kyi-tswa, thirty-three years, enabled him to consoli-

date his power to some extént; to place a relative on the throne of

Arakan, and to seek to extend his dominions by the conquest of Han-

tha-wa-ti or Pegu. The same object was striven after in the reign —

of his son Meng-khoung, and Pegu was invaded year after year, but

1869. | On the History of the Burma race. 17

without success. The kings of Pegu at this time were no longer the

old dynasty of Talaing race. The Shans from Zimmay and the

adjoining states had occupied Martaban, and eventually succeeded to

the throne of Pegu. ‘These tribes of the Thai branch of the Indo-

Chinese family, had been pouring down from their highlands by

various routes through a long period of time. They gradually

accomplished in the countries watered by the Irawati and the lower

Salwin, a plantation and revolution similar to what had been worked

out by the north men, in the British islands, and on the coasts

of Western Europe in the eighth and ninth centuries. Had it not

been for the Muhammadan occupation of Bengal in the thirteenth

century, itis probable that they would have penetrated into that

country through Assam or Cachar.

The continued attacks made by the kings of Ava on Pegu, pro-

duced a counter invasion by Ra-dza-di-rit, who nearly conquered Ava

in the year 766, A. D. 1404. The possession of guns or jinjals at

this time, with which Prome was defended, is mentioned; but it

seems doubtful whether they can have been known in Burma at this

period.

The successful attack on Ava inthe year 788, A. D. 1426, by the

Shan chief of Mo-nhyin, renewed the Shan race and spirit in the

kings of Ava. But the monarchy was weakened. From this time

for more than acentury, the kings of Ava were rather the heads

of a loose confederation of Shan chiefs, whose states lay to the north

of Ava on either side of the Irawati, than sovereigns of a Burmese

kingdom. One curious result of this state of affairs was, that the

rulers of the petty state of Toung-u, originally Shan by race, gra-

dually became identified with the national or Burmese party. This

afterwards led to important results. The rulers of Toungu, more

isolated from Shan influence than the Tsau-bwas to the north, became

in fact Burmese. The character and couduct of the Shan chiefs, as

disclosed in this history, entirely corresponds with the Tsau-bwas of

the Shan country, of the present day. Hach chief in his own state,

which, in some instances, is but a few square miles in extent, is jealous

of the least interference; and they have not yet learnt to combine for

their general safety, except on sudden emergencies, when they rise in

rebellion against the Burmese.

78 On the History of the Burma race. [No. 2,

In the country of Toungt we have seen that the ruler Meng-kyi-

ngyo, who died in the year A, D. 1530, had reigned for forty-five

years. During that. period, while Ava was a prey to disorder, he had

maintained his independence, and gradually increased his power:

His son Meng-ta-ra Shwé-hti commenced his persevering attacks upon

Pegu, overthrew that kingdom, and after a surprising career was

assassinated at the early age of thirty-six years. It might have been

anticipated, that here would have ended the fortune of the rulers of

Toungi. But Bhureng Noung, the general of Shwé-hti, with won-

derful enterprise, crushed all opponents, and combining the power of

Toung-u, of Pegu and of Prome, accomplished the designs of Shwé-

hti by conquering Ava and the north. This he effected with a mixed

army of Talaings, Burmese, and Shans; and though subduing the

country where the Burmese people were probably more numerous than

elsewhere, he claimed to represent the Burma race.

A future chapter will describe the remarkable career of this ruler ;

and the empire which he founded, extending from near the Burham-

putra river to the Mekhong, or great river of Cambodia. The

dealings both of Meng-ta-ra Shweé-hti and of Bhureng Noung with .

the Portuguese, who, with their Muhammadan followers, are styled —

Ba-reng-gyi and Pan-thé, the latter word apparently a corruption of ©

Farsi, may also be illustrated from European sources.

Memorandum.—The accompanying lists, Nos. 1 and 2, contain

the names of the kings of Burma, who reigned contemporaneously

at Myintsaing, Pan-ya, and Tsagaing, The list No. 3 contains the

names of the kings of Burma who reigned at Ava from the foundation of

that city, until it was conquered by Bhureng Noung in the year 1555 __

A.D. The whole period of the reigns contained in the three lists,

amounts to 257 years, or from A. D. 1298 to A. D. 1555. By the

Burmese reckoning, as Ava was captured by Bhureng Noung in the >

month of March, before the current year 916 had been completed, —

there will appear by that reckoning one year less for the whole period

than is shown according to the European Calendar. =

VIS) UX

‘eXq-suoul-op-veyy, Aq pouoiyjog |*1oyjo1g | ‘weg FORT OG), ae pe ‘sunofq eu-vz-9 | 9

“1OYJOIT G 2s 1eL, eee eee eee ‘nYy-V1-@ Ny G

u0g 6 see SLL eee eee Comsa-ned yy $

: “Lay JOG

8 “‘BUOYG-19}-Vy, NYI-vYy-1y, JO uog | IyeRT Q ae: FOL as ‘BMs}-NVAY] SUOYS-18}-VSN |

2 ‘T ‘on Aq poydope ‘ues-ng yo

s Surly pesodep oy} ‘emsz-nety jo uog Mes 0G nog F389 ne so z* “eu-eZ-) | &

S ‘ef-ueg 38 .

ce ouoTe pouoter “oyJoIq ysa.cunod oy, it OL va F19 ae ‘SUYS-18}-BT, NYI-Cy-MY, | T

rs ‘romod yenbe yA

Ss, pouloaos pue ‘Aqt10yyne pedinsn ‘SUOYS-18}-V J, NY}-VY-TY,

= oy ‘aovl UBYG JO SAay}OIG do1'LT, on al BEL 099 cue ‘uv dS-sudly-ezp-Bry

Ss ‘eA-Byy-ouoy-V

inet ess Pane Wao pence eee, ces | Peer Seen es

z ‘SIeOR | “CW

cs) “SOULS osouL.Ing

8 d oe ee

“SuUVNGY Noi ‘SONIM JO SUNVN ‘ON

eg NOIGY LO ‘NOIG

-U01}R OY a

HLDNaT | 40 LNANAONGWWOD

‘oh-upg pun bunsy-mhpg yo paubras pun shuryy upb-ng ay) papasoons oym aone unyg fo nuing fo shury fo ysvT

‘LT ‘ON

Ne)

- 200

[No. 2,

On the History of the Burma race.

‘Poe a '¥

= ‘9z) anak oy} ut vdq-Suow-op

-eyy, wosdoqys stq Aq yyeop 07 4ynd

pur suvyg w1oyy.ou jo Aue uv Aq

SUIVSVST, WOlJ UALIp svar oouLd sry J,

‘SuoYs-18}-VT, NGI-ey-1yJ, Jo uosdaqg

‘eA-uvg puv Sures}-uApy

qv pousiot oya ‘Suoys-1sz-vy, nqy

“vY-IYy, Jo wos oy} svar oound siyy,

‘SUUVWAY

*MR]-UT

-10yjO1g | ZT

‘royoig |

‘1oyjorg |‘syjuour J

‘T ‘ON

yO" UOp | scOL

‘u0g g

fen FL

eee i}.

Bury "S180 1

Surpooaid

ioe ‘NOTAY do

-MOTL]OY a

AON

FIL

ITL

TOL

$69

v89

LLO

“C10

osoULINng

‘NOIGY

HLONGY | dO LNAWAONAWWOD

‘oy vd-ey-1yy, ynokq Susp

a ‘reou-viq-Bi-8 J,

*** “TeI-SUdT BIY-BA-Ne NV

sik Ss ‘omsy-eh yy

mse *40}-SUNOp-gMYG

ay *1A3-ehq-vi-® J,

‘uoMX nesy, ek-eyy-Su0yI-V

‘SONIM JO SANVN

‘wh-ung fo shury ayy ypun hysnoauvsodwazuos huwhosy, yo paubias oya aons unyy fo shucy fo svt

1G ON

N oO <H ud CO re

‘ON

ee eee

‘s1oyJOIg URYG

9014} OY} Jo ATrurey oy} Jo puv ‘ues

ig JO ssury oy} Jo yuepuoosop v

Sv “ouo1y} oy} 04 WIRD SITY poo10f

“ua OY “juedsep uvyg jo yoyo V EU eT oes gg) ase be owe "194

-uvu-Suopy 10 vi-vy-Suopy urAqu-oyy | g

‘rods sceaee 5 | SU] ODM) ene vet “ee =o {Su-sunoy-9h¥ [-By | J

. 0g | syauouee) | **: ree pate 8 ‘TeSU-e[Y-SUoTY | 9

S "m0g 5 er FSL ‘Suoyg-nAyd-suoysy, Qed G

= : Goc eee eee oO UUOU

ae ae Ee - IOYIOIG | [ZZ 691 terre Sao Sits ee

S DE go eh Suspy 10 ‘gais}-Suew-sursz-udg | PF

S 94} Jo pue ‘uvs-ng jo sSu1y oy} 30 OG "Sig UOUl pga, < ray) “+ ‘vkgevi-vy, ‘Sueyg nAyd-sueysy, | §

RQ yUepuddsep v sv ou0IT} oY) 04 pepo rie eg oe 6G2, vee Boe ses ene

rs ‘SUIvS-BSy, JO Sury uvyg -vy, 10 Tey-nesy, vasy, TAY Susp | G

~ ey “‘uomd-nesy, ef-eyy-Suoyyy

=, 0 UospueIs opis sreyJOW sty UO

S sea ‘sunosey, jossury quorour oy} .

i= UWO1f paepusdsep oq 07 pres ‘surly

S SIU “vay jo Az 04} Jo Jopunog AG e FOST 9G), ae esis ‘efq suow-op-eyy, | T

S . ate "e9

“SULY pee av 9soULIng

8 d :

‘SMUV INA nee ‘SONIN HO SUWVN ON

UONepYy ‘NDI TO ‘NDIA

HLONAT | dO LINANTONAWWOS)

a a a IE eS One ee ee YOEe I Lape EN ern ee NEN ents oot Ber ee ee See eS

LA.

eee ‘map fo hjig ay) fo uoynpunof ay) wouf nung fo shury ayy fo isvT

—

On the History of the Burma race.

*Sunoyy Suor-nygq Aq posod

-op puv poronbuog ‘ouoiyy elf}

pozies oy ‘yudosop UvYg Jo Jory V

Porserpay

‘Suoyg uvu-9gMyYo

0} popvpoI sv OFT “OUTY poze]e

SUM OYA ‘ounog-uy) Jo joryo uvyg

‘vay poronbuoos oym “urdyu-op

Jo Joryo uvyg oy} ‘UNT-wsy, Jo Uog

“auoIy} OY} OF popodd

“ons oy yarq-uvy-oyL Aq pel! ST

———— Teel

"SMUVNGLY,

"0g

"u0g

"m0g

“LOYIOL,

"u0g

———_—_—_——— LL

‘SULyy

Sutpodeid

0} diyqs

-WOT}LOY

§ ISST

9 we

e pie

oT =

67 26h

ic a

GL tl

9G i :

° hs

‘svax | ‘A'V

‘NDIGY LO ND

HLONAT

S16

406

888

698

GV8

0&8

708

108 ,

“B19

asouLIng

Id]

1O LNINGONGWIOD

“14-0 -v1

-CNy Suoqy-neky-ny-]sJ, Surws-vsy,

‘1y-vd-vi-v Ny Suow-aAq-O]V]

‘TeSu-SurIvyW-UNY yy

“eq -Uvy-OUL],

+ 1-ed-vieyy ‘Suoys-uvu-omyg

10 ‘Iyed-yq = “vzp-ey BYP

‘sunoyyy Suey vA-1ynq_ «10 ‘ty-vd

iat clad a a tee he Chal

ies Sean} BY-Tyy-ey-e I]

14-vd-vi-vNy SUOINY 10 ny4-vy-1y,

oe ‘es}-nedY-1v1-9U9

‘SONIM HO SAWVN

‘ON

Neeeeee eee eae

ST, EE ET EE BS

(panwjwogi—"

‘ON

1869.] The District of Ludiana, 83

The District of Lidiana.— By T. W. Totsort, Esg., C. S.

[Received 17th May, 1869. ]

The following articleis one of a series which the contributor

has written, or purposes to write, descriptive of different districts in the

Panjib. Most of the information it contains, has been derived from

local sources. Much is legendary or trivial ; but the writer in pursuing

his own studies, has found the want in each district of a basis on which

to commence historical or scientific inquiries; and it is to supply such

a basis, however meagre or deficient in scholarship, that he proposes

to publish the series of papers referred to.

Excluding topics of purely official or administrative interest, we

shall find it convenient to arrange our account of the Lididna district

under two headings. 1, Natural Features. 2, History and kindred

topics.

1.—NartvuraL Features.

The Liudidna district is the most westerly of the three which

form the Cis-Sutlej or Ambala division.

It is bounded by Ambala on the east, by Firozpur on the

west, by Patiala and other native territories on the south, and

by the district of Jalandhar, from which it is separated by the

river Satlaj on the north. The soil is sandy, yielding a rich crop of

cereals and of grain, but is not so fertile for sugar cane and fruit

trees, as in the neighbouring district of Jalandhar. The aspect and

area of the district, have been much modified by a change in the

course of the river Satlaj, which formerly flowed by the Ludiana fort,

but is now six miles to the westward. The old bank of the river

forms a ridge the whole length of the district, and a small offshoot of

the river called the Biddha Naélah still flows in the deserted bed.

The Liidiana district does not produce either mangoes or dates, but

there is much to interest in its flora, and the writer regrets that

he is not competent to give a detailed and accurate account of its

botanical features. Some information on the subject may be found

in a paper by Mr. Edgeworth, Vol. VII. of the Asiatic Society’s Jour-

nal, page 751, and a short subsequent paper in Vol. XI., page 26.

The Lidiadna district appears nearly to coincide with what Mr.

Edgeworth in the papers referred to, terms the “ phalahi” tract. The

84 The District of Ludidna. [No. 2,

principal trees are the kikar, pipal, jand, sissi, sirras, mulberry, bher

phalahi, tamarisk, baklair (bakain, Melia sempervirens ).

There are a few fine banyans scattered at intervals. There are a

few jaémans (syzygium jambolanum) at Lididna itself, but I have not

seen any elsewhere in the district, At Machiwd4ra and at Bhilolpur,

in the north-east of the district, are a few impoverished mangoe trees,

and there are some at Lididna itself, but they bear no fruit ; in the

neighbouring zillahs Jalandhar, Hoshidrpir, and Ambala, they

come to perfection. One of the most common trees in the belt or low

land along the river, is called the pilkhan. Near Pakhowél is a

remarkable grove of keham trees, respecting which the tradition is

current that they can never be counted, no two visitors giving the

same tale, although apparently the number is small. The bakain is a

well known tree of ready growth, but of no great ability for timber,

It is a species of Melia (sempervirens), and consequently akin to

the Nim, possessing some of the medical virtues for which the latter

is so famed. Its leaves are long and pointed, like those of the Nim,

and its fruits are about the size and shape of marbles. Akin to the

bakain, with similar fruit but with leaves somewhat broader, is the

Dek, which I find in Forbes Watson under the botanical name of the

Nim, though it appears to be a different species from the well known ~

tree of Hindustan. Next to the irrepressible kikar, the most charac-

teristic tree in this district is the “ rerd,’’ which I cannot find in Forbes

Watson, but which Edgeworth describes hesitatingly as Acacia leu-

cophlea. Its foliage is darker then the common kikar. It iscommon

on the western, or Firozptir, side of the district, and is rare on the

eastern side. ;

With regard to smaller shrubs and herbs, some make their

appearance with the Kharif after the autumn rains, and others with the

Rabi’, in spring, while many remain during the whole year, In the

neighbourhood of Khanah, a nettle-like plant with large bright green

leaves and white flowers, which covers all the lower hills, is common,

but it is not found in those parts of the district from the Himalayas,

It is called by the natives “ bastta”; but this is a word used very

generally and vaguely. While this plant is found only in the west

of the district, the “ karil” (capparis decidua ? ), so characteristic of the

Multan desert, is confined to the eastern half, becoming more com-

1869.] The District of Lidiina. 85

mon as the Firozptir boundary is approached, but nowhere so abun-

dant as in the Multan division. In the neighbourhood of Machiwara,

I have noticed numerous clusters of a shrub 5 or 6 feet high, called

“ Samali.” It seems always to grow in such clusters, forming a

natural kind of hedge or coppice; I have not seen detached shrubs.

The leaves are in triplets with two smaller below. They are long

and narrow at both ends, darker above and whitish beneath. I believe,

this is the Vilex trifolia.

But the three shrubs abovenamed, are not in any sense character-

istic of the district. Much more common are the following. The

bher, a species of Zizyphus or jujube, is almost as general as the

kikar tree. Many parts of the country are covered with a smaller shrub

like the bher, and I presume also a species of Zizyphus. This is called

“ hari.” Its small leaves, mixed with white bhisa, are given as

food to oxen. Of course the omnipresent ‘‘ak’’ or ‘‘ madar’’ is found

in abundance here as everywhere else. Royle has devoted two or

three pages of his book on the fibrous plants of India to the economi-

cal uses of this plant, Calotropis gigantea and Hamilton. So far

as this district is concerned, I believe the only use made of it is

to apply the milky juice externally to stings or parts suffering from

rheumatism. Its soft but pungent down makes an admirable stuff-

ing for pillow-cases.

Besides the Ak, there are three weeds, which deserve separate men-

tion from their abundance. First the “churis roz.” This shoots up

during the autumn rains in every field. In the winter, the stalk

becomes dry, contrasting in colour with the small tuft of canes at its

base. At this time, the flower spike, when rubbed, gives out a

very pleasing cinnamon-like scent. ‘This, no doubt, is a species of

Andropogon. Another troublesome weed goes by the name of

on account of its resemblance to the onion. The leaves

“ piyazi,”’

and stalk are like those of an onion, but it has no smell, nor does

it seem to produce a bulb. The flowers which grow ina spike,

are small and pretty, bell-shaped, white in colour with light brown

stripes. This weed is a constant intruder in the corn fields,

There is a third very common leguminous weed, which seems

to bear several names, among which are “maha” and ‘‘malula.” It

looks like a wild vetch. Between Samrala and Machiwara, and

86 The District of Ludidna. [No. 2

alsoin many other parts of the district, the ground is covered with it.

Tt is used as fuel by the gram roasters. The ‘alas bel” or dodder,

cuscula refleca, which is common on the Jdlandhar side of the

river, looking very pretty as it covers the hedge-rows with a yellow,

silk-like net, is also found here, but is not socommon. The cactus

which makes the favourite hedgerow in the Jalandhar Dudb, does

not come to perfection here. ‘Aliya’ and “henna” succeed

better.

I may add to my list of common weeds easy of identification,

the ‘‘itsit” (¢rianthema pentandra), a creeping plant which spreads

over the ground; the “ bhakhra”’ or “gokrt”’ ( pedalium muwrex)

also recumbent, the fruit of which is used by the natives for gonor-

rheea, the “hulhul’ (cleome vicsosa?) of which the seeds possess

anthelmintic and other virtues, and the “ papra” or “‘ shaéhbra,” which

is used for cutaneous diseases and is, I believe, the “ Hwmaria

officinalis,” or fumitory.

‘Of course this is by no means an exhaustive list of the Lididna

flora. There are many plants that I know by their native, but not

by their scientific names ; and doubtless there are many more which

have not come under my observation at all. The garden plants are the

same as those cultivated elsewhere in the Panjab and N orth-West.

2.—HistTory.

Doubtless the province of Sarhind, through which the classical

Saraswati flowed, and which was the scene of so many struggles for

empire in Muhammadan times, possessed historical interest from the

very dawn of Brahmanical religion; yet the traces of ante-Musal-

man civilization are few. There are extensive ruins of undoubted

antiquity at a small village called Sunet, about four miles from

Lidiéna on the Firozpir road. The settlement report speaks of

it as an old Réjptit city, said to have been renowned throughout

Hindustan for its size and splendour. Coins and large old bricks with

figures on them, are constantly dug up from its remains.

The most common impression on the bricks is that of three or four

fingers ofthe human hand. Thereare no standing ruins ; but broken |

bricks are found on the surface for a great distance, and excavations

beneath what are now corn fields, uncover walls and floors of brick

1869.] The District of Lidiana., 87

so extensive, that for centuries past they have supplied Ludiéna

with much of its building material. People say, that the masonry

work is mostly upside down, the smooth and marked side ot

the bricks which one would expect to find uppermost, being on

the contrary downwards. This may perhaps indicate that Sunet

was overthrown by some sudden convulsion of nature, perchance

an earthquake, and the popular traditions are in accordance

with this supposition. I have been unable to trace the authentic

history of Sunet, but the story of its fall, a mixture of Hindd and

Muhammadan fable is as follows: There was once a king at Sunet,

named Rajé Mauj Gend or Panwar, who treated his subjects with

great violence and cruelty. This king was afflicted with an ulcer,

and was told that human flesh would do it good. So an order went

forth to bring him a human being, as occasion required, from each

household.

One day it so happened, that it}was the turn of a brahman widow,

who had an only child, ten years of age. The myrmidons of the

tyrant came to carry off the child, when its mother’s tears moved

the sympathy of a holy man, Shah Qutb, by name. He, after a vain

attempt to turn away the soldiers, swore that they should never see

their homes again, and so it happened. They turned towards Sunet,

but both Sunet and its raja had disappeared from the face of the

earth.

Next to Sunet, the town of most undoubted antiquity is Machi-

| wara. There is a local tradition that a woman named Machodri, the

| grandmother of the Pandavas, founded it. Ido not find any mention

| of Machodsi in Talboys Wheeler’s book. The paternal grandmother

| of the Pandavas was a daughter of the Raja of Kasi. Of the mater-

| nal grandmother nothing is said. The mother bore the name of

| Madri. Of her, Talboys Whecler writes—

‘‘Madra is the ancient name for Bhootan, and there seems some

| reason for believing that Madri belonged to one of the mountain

| tribes occupying the southern slopes of the Himalayas, but probably

| much further to the westward than the country of Bhootan.’ This

| is not inconsistent with the story that Machiwéra may have been

| founded by some ancestor of the Pandavas; but these myths are too

| vague and various to be of any historical use.

88 The District of Lididna. [No. 2,

Another tradition connects the name Machiwara with that of

some Rajé Machhandar. It is much more probable that the word

simply means “the fisherman’s village,’ mdchhi being the word for

fish. There are several other villages on the Satlaj and on other

rivers, bearing names either identical or nearly so. Whether we adopt

a simple ora far-fetched etymology, the antiquity of Machiwara is —

undisputed. Besides Sunet and Machiwara, there is reason to believe —

that a third town, Tihara, was of importance in pre-Islamic times.

But if the etymology given by Edgeworth be correct, the name

Tihara will appear comparatively modern, being used to denote the

low land by the river, which paid one-third of the produce as revenue

while the ‘‘ Chauhéra” tract only paid a quarter, and the ‘ Pachdie”

two-fifths.

The settlement report states: ‘“‘ There are traces of the town having —

become a ruin previous to the general Muhammadan invasion of India,

in consequence of the internal feuds either of the Rajputs or of

some other Hindu race with theirs.” :

The settlement report refers to some Raja Biroyt as governor of ©

Tihara about the time of Rai Pithora, when Shihab-uddin Ghori—

invaded India; and to a Raja Shami, a Gaisi Rajpit as ruler of

Bhilolptr; but the dominant tribe of Rajpits in the neighbourhood 3

of Sunet seems to have been the ‘‘ Punwars.”

Alexander never touched the Lidiana district. His encampment

on the Hyphasis or Satlaj was probably below its junction with the

Beyas opposite Firozptir, and as no special mention is made of any

important nation on the left bank of the Satlaj, we may presume that

the Liididna district was included in those vaste solitudines which

arrested the Macedonian’s progress. .

The history of the district in Muhammadan times is, as might have

been expected, much more detailed and authentic. It was a portion

of the province of Sarhind, which was ever the battle ground of |

Muhammadan India. But to give a detailed history of the province is —

not our object, we metely select special allusions to the district itself.

For many years after the invasion of Taimtr, the banks of the

Satlaj appear to have been the scene of a succession of struggles

with various lawless tribes. First, we find mention of Turks under

Malik Toghan, then of an impostor who appeared near Machiwara,

1869.] The District of Liudidna. 89

and falsely gave himself out as Sérang Khan, the deceased viceroy

of Multan, lastly of the Gakkhars under a famous chief named Jasrat.

The city of Lidiana owes its origin and name to the Lodis, and

its early history is thus given in a local account. The country

was overrun by Beloches (?). The cultivators represented the matter

to the emperor Sikandar Lodi, who sent two generals, Yudsuf Khan

and Nihang Khan, also Lodis, to punish the marauders. They encamped

near the site of the present fort where, in those days, there was a

village called Marhoté. Having driven out the Beloches, they heard

that the Gakkhars were plundering on the north side of the river.

So Yusuf Khan crossed the river, subdued the Gakkhars, and founded

the city of Sulténpir (now in Kapurthalla territory), where he

settled. Meanwhile Nihang Khan remained at Marhoté, to which

he gave the name Liidiana. He was followed by his son Mahmud

Khan, and the latter by Jalal Khan, who built the first Lididna fort

with Sunet bricks. Jalal Khan had two sons, Haibat Khan and

Tahir Khan. The latter died without offspring, the former left

two sons Ali Khan and Khidr Khan. It was in their time that

Babar overthrew the Lodi dynasty of Delhi. Members of the Lodf

family continued to reside at Lidiana and Bhilolptir after the down-

fall of their empire ; but there is a tradition that they were massacred

in Akbar’s time; at any rate no descendants of the family are now

to be found. Their tombs and other buildings, which were once a

prominent feature near the fort and perhaps in the direction of the

Huropean residences, are now levelled with the ground.

In the beginning of 1555, a great battle was fought at Machiwara,

doubtless the town so called in the Ludiana district. The battle is

thus described by Farishta.

*‘ Sikandar Shah Sur in the meantime had ordered Tatar Khan and

Habib Khan with an army of thirty or forty thousand horse, from

Dehli against Humaytin. Notwithstanding the great superiority in num-

ber of this force, Bairém Khan Turkman resolved to hazard an action,

and having advanced boldly to meet the Indian army, pitched his camp

on the banks of the Satlaj at the town of Machiwara, It being cold

weather, the Indian Afghans kindled great fires of wood in their

camp at night, of which Bairam Khan took advantage, and crossed the

river with a thousand chosen horse. He now advanced to their

90 , The District of Ludiana. [No. 2,

camp without being discovered, when he began to to gall those who

crowded round the fires with arrows, which threw them into disorder.

The Afghans (notorious for blundering), instead of extinguishing

their fires, which prevented them from seeing their enemies, who had

a fair view of them, threw on more wood; and the whole of Bairém

Khan’s army having crossed the river, fell upon them on all sides, and

routed them. The Afghans, on this occasion, lost all their elephants,

their baggage, and a number of horses. Bairaém Khan sent the elephants

to Humaytin at Lahor, and remaining encamped at Machiwara, he

dispersed detachments in all directions, and occupied all the country

up to the walls of Dihli. The king was greatly rejoiced, when he

heard of this victory, and conferred on Bairém Khan the title of

Khan Khanén.”

In the Ain i Akbari, three mahals are named, which are still included

in the modern district. They are, Ludidna itself with a revenue of

2,294,933 dams; Tihara, 7,850,809 dams; and Machiwara, 653,552

dams. Hach of these is described as having a brick fort. The dam

in Akbar’s time was the fortieth part of a rupee.

During the supremacy of the Moguls, Lidiana is seldom mentioned

in history, but before referring to subsequent events, we will give a

short account of a distinguished Rajput family known as the Rais, —

who have at times been more or less influential in this neighbourhood.

The account is furnished by one of themselves.

About the year 1308, Sumbat, there was a Raja of Jaisalmir and

Bhatnir, named Dulchi Ram or Bersi. His ancestor, Raja Mokal,

had built a fort called after himself, where Faridkot now is, Mokal’s

servants inadvertently seized the famous saint Farid-uddin Shakar-

ganj, whose shrine is still at Pak Pallan, and compelled him to

labour. On discovering the saintly character and miraculous powers

of his workman, Raja Mokal called the city by his name, Faridkot.

Dulchi Ram had a son, Tulsi Das, who came in the direction of the

Panjab, to see Faridkot. At that time Sayyid Makhdtim Jahaéniyéo

resided at Jaisalmir, and through his influence Tulsi Das embraced

Islam, and assumed the name of Shaikh Chachi. So Shaikh Chachi

came as far as Hatttr, and colonised a village in the neighbourhood,

called Chakar. Hattur itself had been founded by a certain Raja,

Jagdeo Sing, and his descendant was at first hostile to the new-

1869. ] The District of Lididna. a

comers, till mollified by Shaikh Chachi, who subsequently took ad-

vantage of his presence at a wedding to murder him. Shaikh Chachi

then took possession of Hattir. He had two sons, Pahri and Nopil.

The former remained in Hatttr, where an ’idgdh, built by him, is

still standing, while Nopal founded the village of Shahjahanpir, near

Raikot. Pahri had two sons Rai Dalla and Rai Jagged. They

rented from ’Ala-uddin Ghori (Khilji?) the perganahs of Tihara, wc.,

and received the title of Rai Raian. At that time, their possession

extended from Firozpir to Machiwara, and, as their descendants are

fond of saying, comprised 1360 villages. They also acquired some

villages on the other side of the Satlaj. Among these was one named

Dalla (after the founder Rai Dalla), near Sultanpar in Kapirthalla.

The village still bears his name. Rai Dalla had a son Rai Kamial-

uddin, who received the title Sultan for his military services in the

south.

To enumerate all the branches of the Rais would be a minute and

profitless task. Many of the towns and villages in the Lidiana district

were founded or re-founded by them; some still bear names of indivi-

dual members of the family ; and others, as for instance Jagréon, Rai-

kot, and Talwandi Rai, have incorporated the word Rai itself. It is

also said that many members of the family settled in other parts of

India, even as far as Patna on the one side and the province of Gujrat

on the other. One Rai Kulla colonised Talwandi Rai in Sambat

1535. About Sambat 1600, another member of the family Fath Khan

_ rebuilt Bassidn, which had been in ruins before, and which went to

| Tuin again after his death. A second Rai Kulla built Raikot in Sambat

1643. Jagraon, at present the second commercial city in the district,

was founded by another member of the family Kamél-uddin 1125, Hijri,

There are different derivations of the name Jagréon; some say that it

means Jagah Raian, the place of the Rais; but the more probable

_ explanation is, that “‘ Jag” was the name of a Rajpit who preceded

| the Rais, and that the two names are united in the word Jagrdon.

Omitting minute and unimportant family details, we come to Rai Kulla

who, in Sambat 1743, threw off his allegiance to the emperor of Dihli. -

| Ali Muhammad Rohila, governor of Sarhind, reduced him to submis-

sion for a time, but was then called off by the inroads of the Sikhs,

| and Rai Kulla established his independence. He died in Sambat 1826.

| 13

92 The District of Ludidna. [No. 2,

His son and successor, Rai Muhammad, died in 8. 1850, leaving the

inheritance in the hands of achild, Rai Ilyas. The Sikhs took advantage

of his tender age, to appropriate Dharmkot and other portions of his

dominions. In S. 1856, Baba Sahib Sing Bedi of Una in the

Hoshyarpur district, and others pressing him hard, Rai Ilyas hired the

assistance of the adventurer George Thomas, then ruler of Hansi, and

known here as “Jaérj Sahib.” Thomas got a lakh of rupees for

his services, and with his assistance the Sikhs were driven across the

Satlaj. Three years after this, young Ily4s was out hunting in the

bir, half way between Jagréon and Sidhtiwan. He was holding a

drawn sword, when suddenly his horse reared with him. He fell and

ran the sword into his thigh, inflicting a mortal wound. His mother

Rani Nur-unnisa then became chief of the Rais; but in S. 1863 and

S. 1864, corresponding to A. D. 1806, and 1807, Ranjit Singh overran.

most of her dominions, leaving her only Raikot itself. In A. D. 1831,

Nir-unnisé died, and was succeeded by another lady, Rani Bagbari,

widow of Ilyas. On her death, Raikot lapsed to the British Govern-

ment.

We now return to the general history of the district. The invad-

ing armies of Nadir Shah, Ahmad Shah Durdani, and the Mahrattas,

must have frequently crossed the district, but have left few traces

behind them. A local history states that Nadir Shah, on some

complaint being made, ordered a general massacre in Lididna. I

am unable to say whether this is true or is merely a local version

of the Delhi massacre. Ahmad Shah Duréni gave Machiwara and

other portions of the district to Bhikam Khan, Nawab of Maler

Kotla. The Maler Kotla family who are still sovereign princes, —

claim descent from a faqir, Hazrat Shaikh Sadr Jahan, disciple of

Baha-ul Haq, and this faqir is said to have been he who sold the ©

empire of Delhi for 2000 dinars to BahTol Lodi.

The struggle for supremacy, between Sikh and Musalmén during —

the letter half of the eighteenth century was much more important.

in its permanent results than these invasions from Kabul, and it is —

much fresher in the memory of the people. This neighbourhood —

is classic ground in Sikh history. Mach{wara and Bhilolptr were

the scene of Guru Govind Singh’s adventures and_ persecutions

(see Macgregor’s History, chapter V., pages 88 and 94), and Sarhind, —

1869. | The District of Ludiina. 93

even in its desolation, is to every Sikh an accursed spot, as the city

where the Guru’s two sons were murdered. In 1762, a great battle

was fought about twenty miles south of Lididna between Ahmad

Shah and the Sikhs, a battle in which the Sikhs were defeated with

great slaughter, and which they still remember by the name of

“ Ghuli Ghara’” (Cunningham’s History of the Sikhs, pages 100-101).

But in the following year the Sikhs gained as great. a victory,

sacked and destroyed Sarhind, and established their supremacy

throughout the province. The Sodhis established themselves at Machi-

wara; the Jagadri, Jhind, Nabah, and Patiala chiefs in the south,

and the Alhuwalia family at Jagréon. Liidiéna itself was occupied

for a time by Hindi Rajptts of the Halwara got. They were ex-

pelled and suceeeded by the Réis under Rai Kulla. During the

rule of his successor, Rai Muhammad, in 8. 1822, Nattu and Chihar,

his representatives in Lididna, repaired the fort, each mahalla of

the city building a portion. J'or some years, they kept off the Sikhs

by payment of black mail, but the neighbourhood was laid waste.

When the plundering expeditions of the Sikhs were announced, a

drum was sounded to give warning, and the people took refuge in

the fort. The city was plundered over and over again, by Bhag

Sing Bheriya, by the sardars of Khanah, by Karm Singh Narmalla

of Shahabad, by Bhanga Sing of Thanesar, and others. On the death of

Rai Muhammad and the accession of the child Rai Ilyas, the en-

croachments of the Sikhs became greater; but the thanahdar of the

Rais at Ludiina, whose name was Husain, defended the city with

great bravery. It was then that Bedi Sahib Sing, already referred

to, invaded the territory of the Rais. He penetrated as far as Malet

Kotla, destroying Maler itself, and profaning the shrine of Shaikh Ji.

Most of the Jat zamindars fraternised with him. At last, one night,

the citizens of Ludiana admitted the Bedi, while the Rais retreated

to the fort. Then it was that the Rais applied to George Thomas,

and by his assistance expelled the Bedi. To oppose Thomas, Lal

Sing of Kaital and Bhag Sing of Jhind applied to Perron, the well

known French general in the Mahratta service. He sent a subordi-

nate, whom the local history calls Loi Sahib (probably Louis Bour-

quin), who defeated Thomas. But the Rais found means to appease

the conqueror, and were allowed to retain their dominions on: pay.

94 The District of Lidiéna. [No. 2,

ment of anazrana. Onthe death of Rai Ilyas, his mother Nur-unnisé

appointed two Gujars, Ahmad and Madahi, as her deputies. They

rebelled, and took possession of Lidiana and Jagraon for themselves.

Nur-unnisé was obliged to re-engage the brave and faithful thanah-

dar Husain. The rebels applied for assistance to Bhanga Sing

of Thanesar, who was glad of the opportunity for interference. There

were numerous battles. Husain valiantly protected his mistress

against the rebels, Ahmad and Madahi, who were shut up in the

fort, on the one hand and against Bhanga Sing on the other. Bhanga

Sing was wounded, and was nearly defeated, when unhappily

Husain was slain. His followers lost heart, the Rani fled to

Raikot, and the people of the city deserted their property and their

homes. Bhanga Sing remained eleven days, plundering and laying

waste the city, burning all that was consumable. This was in

Sambat 1860. So Ahmad and Madahi remained masters of Lididna

and Jagrdon till 1862, when Ranjit Sing overran the country, and

gave the city to Bhag Sing of Jhind. In 8. 1864, or A. D. 1809,

Sir David Ochterlony came here, and repaired and oceupied the fort ;

but the city and cantonment site remained with the Jhind family

till the death of Sangal Sing, when they escheated to the British

Government, in A. D. 1835. While these events were taking place

at Lididna itself, numerous Sikh sardars had established themselves

in various parts of the district, where their descendants still hold

jagirs. The most important of these families is that of Maland, a

branch of the Phulkia clan, and consequently related to the rajas

of Patialé. Their ancestors appear to have lived for some time at

Sahnah, a town in the extreme south of the district which still belongs

to their jégir. In A. D. 1762, Man Sing took possession of Maland,

which has since given its name to the family. His son Dalel Sing

was the most distinguished of the sardars. His tomb is a prominent

building at Maland. The jagir has been since divided into three.

The other Sikh jagirdars in the district all trace their origin to the

general appropriation made by the Sikh army after its great and

final victory over the Musalmans, when Sarhind was destroyed.

We have now brought the history of the district down to the time,

when it merges in that of British India. Some memorable events

have ‘occurred of later years; but it is not our.work to narrate them

1869.] The District of Lidiana. 95

The battle field of Aliwalis in the district, and during the mutiny

a skirmish took place here with the Jalandhar mutineers (see Cave

Browne’s “‘ Panjab and Delhi,” pages 251 to 264.

An account of the Lididna district would not be complete without

reference to the new sect of Sikhs, the Kuikas, who have lately made

some noise inthe Panjab. Their founder, Ram Sing, is the son of a

carpenter, named Jassa Sing, and lives at Bhaini, a small village some

15 miles to the east of Lidiana. He is over 50 years of age, is

married, and has had two daughters married, to one of whom fur-

ther reference will be made. He served in the Khalsa army between

1844 and 1846. There is a story that, in 1850, Ram Sing was engaged

in the shop of one Panjaba, at that time a well known carpenter of

Liudiaéna, and embezzled a large sum of money belonging to his em-

ployer. With the capital so obtained, he started a shop at Bhaini in

partnership with some one else who, alter a time, served Ram Sing

the same trick that the latter had played Panjaba. After this, Ram

Sing left for the Rawal Pindi district, and there became the disciple

of an Udasi faqir, named Balak Sing.

From him Ram Sing received the religious impulse which has

since influenced his career. Balak Sing himself was but little known,

and has been dead for 8 or 9 years. Ram Sing began to proselytize

about 1858, and assumed the title of Bhai in 1860.

Rim Sing, like most other reformers, repudiates the character of

innovater, and professes to be merely a restorer of the old religion.

He is a purist Sikh, acknowledges and reveres the ten gurus, and

the granths, and preaches the unity of God. MHe differs from the

orthodox Sikhs chiefly by a more stringent enforcement of morality,

and by his iconoclastic tendencies, condemning the erection of tombs

and shrines. Notwithstanding these tendencies, he is constantly visiting

the sacred cities of the Sikhs, Amritsar, Mukatsar, and Anandpitr

Makkowél. Like other Sikhs, the Kaikas wear the “ kes” or long hair,

and are initiated by the sacrament ‘“ paul.” Ram Sing condemns ex-

cessive lamentation for the dead as being distrustful of the Deity. He

particularly warns his disciples against foolish extravagance in their mar-

riage expenses. He teaches them to believe in ‘‘ heaven” and “ hell.”

A disciple and namesake of Ram Sing gave me the following list of

virtues especially inculcated by his guru—fear of God, faithfulness,

96 The District of Lidiana. [ No. 2,

purity and cleanliness, truthfulness, benevolence, consciousness of the

Deity’s presence, compassion, abstinence from covetousness, abstinence

from perjury. Particular stress is laid on truthfulness, and it will, I

think, be admitted that as a class, the Ktikas are remarkable in this

respect. On initiation, a sentence or ‘‘ mantra’’ is whispered into the

ear of the convert, which he is told to repeat constantly to himself, but

never to divulge. The Kukas have frequent religious meetings.

They sit round a large fire, one reads the granth, and others repeat

favourite slokas. This continues till many work themselves into a

state of great excitement, and it is, I presume, from the cries they then

utter, that the name Kiikah or “ Howler” has been given. Many of

the common slokas or sayings among the Kiikas have an iconoclastic

purport. Thus—

Pahilé maro Pir Bannoi

Phir maro Sultana

“ First destroy Pir Bannoi

“Then destroy Sultana.”

Pir Bannoi is a saint, whose shrine is in the state of Patiala,

while the Sultan referred to, is the famed Sakki Sarwar, whose

shrine is in the district of Dera Ghazi Khan. Kukas may be recog-

nised by the unusual whiteness and cleanliness of their garments, —

and by a very large and prominent turban. ‘They often carry a small

club or hatchet, and also a small blunt knife. There is a proverb —

applied to Sikhs generally that they have four Ks—Karad, Kes, Kanga, _

Kachh, viz. a knife, long hair, a comb, and short-drawers. The total

number of Kukas has been estimated at 60,000. Converts are chiefly

made among Jats, Tirkhéns, ChumArs and Mazbis, besides a few Mu-—

hammadans. Raém Sing has appointed from twenty to thirty apostles —

under the title of Subahs. Of these, Sahib Sing is the chief, and he,

it is supposed, will succeed Ram Sing. For a time, Rim Sing was

kept under surveillance by Government, and this rather added to his

éclat. For two years past, he has been at liberty to go where he

chooses. He has attended the great Sikh festivals, but has been

rejected by the orthodox guardians of the temple. On the occasion —

of his visit to Anandptr Makkowéal in 1867, a riot was with difficulty —

avoided. During the last twelve months there has been an undoubted

diminution of enthusiasm and deterioration of morals among the new

1869.] The District of Lidiana. 97

sect. Scandals have arisen, culminating in the murder of Ram Sing’s

own daughter by her husband, it is supposed, on suspicion of unchas-

tity. But the sect is still of importance; the disciples regard Ram

Sing as the incarnation of the deity, as the same being who animated

in succession the ten preceding gurus. A very worthy Kika known

to the writer, expressed himself as confident that this was the case

because of the wonderful and ecstatic thrill which pervaded the

disciple, when he heard the. sacred ‘mantra’ from his teacher’s

lips.

We now proceed to give a short account of the prevalent local

castes and a few phrases exemplifying the local dialect.

Out of a total of 879 villages, 532 belong to Hindi Jats; 76 to

Muhammadan Jats, 98 to Muhammadan Raéjpits, 87 to Gujars, and 42

to Raians. The statistics of the more important Gots are as follows :

among Hindu Jats,—Gil 97 villages, Dhalival 95, Sandhi 82, Garewal

50, Punaich 41, Upal 22. Among the Muhammadan Jats—Kiursa 27

villages, Tur 10, Moliwval 9. Among the Rajptits—Manj 52 villages,

Ghorewal 13. Among the Raians—Karu 22 villages, Rahil 12,

Nari 10. These constitute the agricultural population. Here, as

_ to the west of the Satlaj, the Khattris are the great commercial class.

Their principal gots are Chirimunj, Nande Khullar, Jerath at

Ludiana itself; Bahl, Kaptir, Mahre, Seth, Beri, Senchar, and

Dhir at Jagréon; Batte, Sohndi and Karir at Méachiwdra, and

| Bahlolptr ; Sahgal and Thapar at Raikot ; Had and Cham at Khanah.

But the gots of Khattrfs are innumerable. There are a great many

banias of the gots Gar, Goyal, Sital, Mital, Eran, Dheran, Basal, and

| Kasal. The brahmins are mostly engaged in retail trade, and are not

| influential. Leaving out of view a few Roras and other castes, the

| two most important commercial castes remaining to be noted are

| the “Suds” and the ‘ Bhaébras.” As they have not been described

/in Campbell’s ethnological sketch, our réaders may be interested in

| a short account of them.

The caste Bhabra is of the Jain sect, and except a few banias here

| these * Bhabras.”’ The following account is by one of themselves,

About eleven hundred years ago, there was a holy man at Osanag-

| gari in the country of Gujrat. His name was Rattan Deo, He changed

98 The District of Ludidna. [No. 2,

the name of the inhabitants from Rajptit (?) to Oswal. The Bhabras —

were originally Oswals, and the name Bhabra is peculiar to

the Panjab. At Dihli, the Oswals generally go by the name —

Jauhari, because they are generally employed as jewellers. The

name Bhabra was originally Bhao Bhale, or “ good brother.” The

peculiarities of the Jain religion need not be detailed here, Abstin- —

ence from all animal food, and an excessive regard for animal life

are its most remarkable tenets.

The ‘‘Stid” caste is very different from the Bhabra, though both

are money-lending. Sids like the Kaiths of Bengal are lax in matters

of eating and drinking. They are much less religious than Khattris,

and they have a very bad name for dishonesty. Perhaps most —

judicial officers in this neighbourhood will admit that of all classes

the Stids and the Zargars, or goldsmiths, are the most given to cheat-

ing. The chief gots among the Sids are Raski, Mihan, Kulle, Shahi,

Dosahj.

Among the Kashmiri residents of Ludiana, besides ordinary Muham-

madan caste names, there are three principal castes or gots, Bat,

Bande, and Gamani.

In order to exemplify the local dialect, I will first render in it the -

sentences given by Mr. Campbell at the end of his appendix A, and

will then add a list of a few local words which have struck me as

peculiar. |

What is your name?

Tera ki néin hai?

How old is this horse?

Ks ghore di ki ’umr hai ?

The price of that is two rupees and a half,

Ohda mul dhai rupaiya hai.

My father lives in that small house.

Mera pytt os chhote kothe vich rahnda hai.

Give this rupee to him.

Th rupaiya oh nti dih.

Take those rupees from him.

Oh rupaiye oh ton le le.

Beat him well and bind him with ropes.

Oh nti khib mar ate rassi nal ban de.

1869.] The District of Lididéna.

_ Draw water from the well.

Kiuie vichon pani kad le.

Walk before me.

Mere séhmne chalo.

Whose boy comes behind you ?

Kis da munda tere magar aunda hai ?

From whom did you buy that ?

Tain oh nu kithon mul liyd ?

From a shop-keeper of the village.

Pind de hatwania kolon.

How far is it from here to Kashmir ?

E ton Kashmir nui kinni dir hai ?

How many sons are there in your father’s house?

Tere pyt de ghar kinne puttar hain ?

I have walked a long way to-day.

Aj main dir te sail kiti hai.

The son of my uncle is married to her sister.

Mere chache da puttar ohdi bahn nal vyaha hoya hai.

In the house is the saddle of the white horse.

Chitti ghore di kathi ghar vich hai.

Put the saddle upon his back.

‘Kathi ohdi pith utte kas de.

I have beaten his son with many stripes.

Main ohde puttar nu bahut mar mari.

He is grazing cattle on the top of the hill.

Oh pahar utte dangar charanda hai.

He is sitting on a horse under that tree.

Oh os darakht hetan ghore te baitha hai,

His brother is taller than his sister.

Ohda bhara ohdi bahn nélon wadda hai.

Local words and phrases.

mallomalli by violence.

berwa details.

sith dena to throw.

aujar jana to lose one’s way.

tih a mound of ruins.

100 The District of Lidiéna. [No. 2;

kamla blockhead.

aukha difficult.

nivin low, not elevated.

barkha rain.

uprant in future.

urli pasi

parli pasi

aidki this year.

paron last or next year.

parar year before last.

mohandra face, appearance.

kup stack (of bhiusa, &e.).

bata sata exchange, barter.

lahndaé west.

chharda east.

pahar north.

sarmaili south.

chakan to lift up.

gohara heap of manure.

sajja right.

khabba left.

wahra a young bullock.

tagada jewels, Ge.

bidh watercourse of a well.

awah brick kiln.

tair a lean mare.

oathna to mend.

rojh nil géao.

mainh buffalo.

Religious fairs and pilgrimages are of such interest to the people

on this side.

on that side.

of this country, that they call for a description notwithstanding the

absurdities connected with them. There are two great bathing-

fairs held here, the ‘‘ bhet chandas”’ and the “ baisékhi.’”’ And immense

concourse of people meet at Liidiéna on the 11th Rabi’ usséni to.

celebrate a festival called the ‘‘ Roshanf.’’ This is in honour of one

of the greatest saints in Muhammadan tradition, Shaikh ’Abdul Qadir i

Jilani, whois spoken of as Pir Sahib or Piréni pir. MHerklots in

1869.] The District of Lididna. 101

his translation of the Qanun i Islam devotes one chapter to this saint

under the name of Pir i Dastgir (pages 237 to 241). This saint,

who is esteemed by educated Muhammadans the chief among Walis,

was born in the year 471 H. in Jilin (Gilén) During.thirty-three

years, he prepared himself for the dignity of wali. He died in 561

A. H., beitig then 90 years of age, and was buried at Bagdad. In per-

sonal appearance he is described as a handsome man. Among the

greatest and most popular of his miracles are the following. While

he was an infant at the breast, the month of Ramazd4n came round.

The neighbours were prevented by the clouds from seeing the moon, and

| were in doubt whether they should begin the fast or not. On inquiry

|from the parents of ’Abdul Qadir, they found that he had refused

the breast ever since sunrise, and this indication of the precocious

young saint was accepted as conclusive.

Again a mother was travelling with her son to celebrate his marriage

“with the betrothed. As they were crossing the river Indus, a

| storm arose, and upset the boat. The boy was drowned, but the

}old woman escaped to the bank. ‘There she remained for twelve

| years praying to the Pir i Dastgir; at the end of that period the

|saint appeared, and at her request prayed that the drowned boy

}and his comrades might be restored to life. Twice the holy man

| prostrated himself on the ground without result; after the third

|prostration, the boat and its passengers reappeared on the river.

|The cause of the delay was that the bodies of the drowned had been

devoured by fish, and the fish in their turn had become the food

of men, many of whom had died in the interval. It had been

‘necessary to collect the scattered fragments of the drowned before they

_were re-animated. On another occasion the saint converted a thief

| who was in the act of stealing from him, and made this same thief

‘the Qutb or Chief among the darweshes of the city.

| A fourth and equally notorious anecdote refers to the punishment

inflicted on a wali named Shaikh @an’én for disputing the supremacy

of Piran i Pir, The latter had composed a qacida in which the

.. couplet occurred :

cstlas tee cs sles # (gerol ey a= las Ui

e - amt he resident of J ilan, my name is Te ae and my foot

i is on the necks of men.” Shaikh C Van’an denied that "Abdul Qadir’s foot

102 The District of Lididna. [No. 2,

was on fis neck, on which ’Abdul Qadir told him that the foot of

a pig should be placed there. This was brought about by the

charms of a swineherd’s daughter who captivated the frail “ wali,’’

and made him carry a litter of newborn swine. She would more-

over have compelled him to eat pork had not Shaikh ’Abdul Qadir

compassionately saved him from infidelity, and restored him to his

right mind just as his hands were stretched out, to raise the forbidden

food.

The shrine at Lididna was founded according to the tradition

by a disciple of "Abdul Qadir, named Shaikh Mahmid Makki who

had established himself at Ludiana, whence he made frequent pil-

grimages to his teacher’s tomb at Baghdad.

Next in importance to the Roshani fair is that held at the village

of Chapdr about sixteen miles from Ludidna in the direction of

Maler Kotlah. This fair is connected with a most remarkable super-

stition, which I cannot yet unriddle, but which I suspect is derived

from some aboriginal religion. The divinity, or saint, in whose

honour the fair is held, goes by the name of ‘‘ Gugd,” and the shrine

itself is called ‘¢ mari” or ‘‘ marhi.” The original “ marhi”’ is supposed to

be situated at some indefinite locality to the south; but there are

numerous small ‘‘ m4ris’’ in this district besides-the large one at

Chapaér. They are always outside the village; in size and shape

they are not unlike an ordinary Hindi samahd. The worship seems

to consist in burning a *‘ chirégh,” and in salaaming with the forehead

lowered and with hands, palm to palm, ‘‘ matha tekna” as it is called.

The worship is in some way connected with the snake. At Chapar,

though not in the smaller méris, there is a figure of a snake on the

dais inside the shrine. Persons who have been snake-bitten, are

taken to the mari for cure, and there is a special ‘‘ mantra,” called

‘‘jhara,” recited for their recovery. There is also a custom called

‘* til chasli’” of throwing down rice and til seeds in places frequented by

snakes. This Giga worship, though specially favoured by the lower

classes,is not confined to any sect. At Chapar, the guardians of the shrine

are brahmins, and only Hindus of good caste actually cross the threshold,

but while the front of the marhi is allotted to them, the Muhammadans,

Chumars, and Churas have each of the three remaining sides. Many of

the smaller maris are under the guardianship of Muhammadan mirasis,

Pe ee

;

1869.] The District of Lididna. 108

There are a great many wonderful tales chiefly of metamorphosis

connected with Guga, but I have not yet obtained any rational

or satisfactory account of the superstition itself. The inquiry is

interesting, as it may throw light on ethnological questions and on

the old snake-worship of India. The Chapar fair is held in the

north of Bhadon.

Still more numerous than the shrines of Gugaé are those of the

famons Sakhi Sultén or Sakhi Sarwar, the Musalman saint whose

great place of pilgrimage is on the frontier beyond Dera Ghazi Khan.

In almost every village there is one of these shrines spoken of as

the than.” Attached to them is a class of priests or rather mission-

aries called “ bharais.”” These make converts, and collect pilgrims

for the annual caravans to the great shrine. This shrine is spoken

of as Nigaha, and the qéfilas are called “‘sangs.”” Thursday appears

to be the day sacred both to Giga and to Sakhi Sultan.

The great saint or divinity of the Churds, or Panjaéb-sweepers,

goes by the name of ‘ Lal Beg.” They erect a green flag in front

of their houses, place chiraghs by its side, and then pay their

devotions to the flag. They are very exclusive in their religious

dogmas, maintaining that there will be no salvation in a future

life for any but sweepers, though possibly a few Muhammadans may

_ be admitted to heaven by inadvertently taking the name “ LAl,”

_ when they repeat the kalima “La Ilah, &c.

I may conclude this account of the Lididna district with a few

words respecting the old Muhammadan capital Sarhind, which though

in Patiala territory, is very near the Lididna border. Sarhind is

now a city of desolation; not a mere mound of bricks like Sunet,

but a collection of standing ruins imposing from their size and

extent, but entirely desolate. The total area of the ruins is about

ten miles round. The two most prominent ruins are those of the

fort and of the governor’s Palace or’Am Khac. A road of white quartz

connects the two and crosses a substantial Moghul bridge. Near the

"Am Khag is a large bank with a causeway leading to an island.

Sarhind was long the residence of numerous families of Sayyids, and

almost every third building seems to have been a maugoleum. The

streets are crowded with these tombs mostly of one pattern, with

three domes and a double roof. Most of the buildings have under-

104 Lhe District of Lidiina. [No. 2,

ground apartments. There is a large number of wells, and each of

them has a chamber connected with it. The Sikhs have built a

Gurdiwara on the spot where Govind Sing’s two sons were murdered.

These extensive ruins, which bear a melancholy testimony to the

departed grandeur of Muhammadan rule, have been sold by the Raja

of Patiala as “ ballast”? for the use of the Railway. Strange to say

coins or trinkets are seldom found in excavating, nor could I discover

a single inscription on any one of the thousand tombs and houses

which cover the ground,

About 20 miles from Sarhind is another old Muhammadan city call-

ed Pail, ef which also frequent mention is made in Farishta. This

is still an imposing old city, but presents, like Sarhind, the appearance

of desolation, though it is not like Sarhind a ruin.

I send herewith two packets of coins. Those marked A are mis-

cellaneous, but were collected chiefly in the Lididna district ; of

those marked B., one I believe or perhaps more than one was found

at Sunet. [Vede Proceedings, Asiatic Society Bengal, for June, 1869. |

LL OOOO SEO?

JOURNAL

OF THE

mora TLC SOCLETY.

——

Part I—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &c.

SILDLPIPLIP LIPID

SSSI SS SIS

No. III.—1869.

eae

Baddoni and his Works. By H. Buocumann, Esa., MW. A., Assistant

Professor, Calcutta Madrasah.

[Received 1st April, 1869. ]

I.—Inrropvction.

This paper is the first of a series of essays which I intend to write

from copious notes collected by me on the Arabic and Persian editions

of our Bibliotheca Indica. The object of the essays is to supply pre-

faces and introductions to those works of which merely texts have

been printed, to collect whatever biographical information we possess

of the authors of our editions, and to remark on the style of their

productions. Though the subject matter, especially in the case of our

historical publications, has received much attention, the style of the

authors presents many interesting features, inasmuch as we can trace

in their works the growth of the Persian language in India. I also

intend giving translations of new and interesting passages, and thus

prepare the way for systematic translations. The more texts the

Asiatic Society prints, the more necessary will it become to translate

the works. This is of great importance for our historical texts: as

long as we have no translations, the Historians of the Bubliotheca

Indica will be a treasure under lock and seal.

The great difficulty connected with the translation of our works is

this, that in most cases the translations will have to be made in India,

106 Badéoni and his Works. [ No. 3,

where the MSS. which were used by the editors, still exist. In some

works the geographical difficulties are so great, that they could not

be well overcome by a translator in England; in others the allusions

are so pointed that without some familiarity with the people, and some

instruction and assistance from good native teachers, it would be

almost impossible to write a faithful translation. Not all our works

are as easy in style as the Jqbdlndmah, the Pddishdhndmah, or

Sayyid Ahmad’s edition of the Zuzuk-i-Jahangirt, which works any

one who has made fair progress in Persian could translate. The texts

of these works, moreover, are in a satisfactory condition.

It was therefore with much pleasure that the Society lately learned

that two of its members, Mr. T. W. H. Tolbort, and Mr. C. J..

Lyall, are about to entrust to the Society their MS. translations and

abstracts of the Zdrikh-i-Pirdzshahi, and the reign of Akbar by

Nizam-i-Harawi.

For the present paper I have selected the work known as the Turikh-

i-Baddoni, partly because I found a perusal of the work of great assist-

ance for my critical edition of the Ain, partly because of all Indian

Historians Badaoni is the most difficult to be understood ; and I take

this opportunity to acknowledge the obligations under which I lie to

the Joint-Hditor, Maulawi Agha Ahmad ’Ali, for the assistance I

received from him in preparing a MS. translation of Akbar’s Reign (the

second volume of Badaoni), from which some of the extracts below

are taken. Badaoni is the only author among our Historians, to

the peculiarities of whose character and opinions it is possible .

to trace the plan and the execution of his work. The opinion

now current regarding Badaéoni—which opinion is also held by

a recent writer on Indian Historians in the Journal of the

R. A. Society of Great Britain for 1868—is that the value of Ba-

daoni’s work hes in its giving us a view of the character of the great

Emperor from an opposite point; secondly, that he was a bigoted

Moslem ; therdly, that he could not tolerate the extremes of toleration — |

to which Abulfazl and Faizi allowed the Emperor to go; Fourthly, 3

that the bitterness of the author impaired his judgment; fifthly, that —

his work when read by itself does injustice to Akbar; sixthly, that —

he writes “in unmeasured terms” of Akbar; and seventhly, that “his —

work may even give a very erroneous impression of the character, and iy

1869.] Badaoni and his Works. 107

particularly ofthe motives which actuated the greatest sovereign that

has ever ruled the destinies of India, in many of the measures of his

government.’’ It is one of the objects of this paper to vindicate Ba-

daoni, and to shew that with the exception of the third statement,

which is a personal matter, every one of the remaining six points is a

statement capable of being disproved by quoting from his works.

But before proceeding to my task, I shall give a short outline, because

I have chosen a historical writer for my first essay, of the history of

our editions, as I can trace it from the records and journals of our

Society. The following remarks then may serve as an introduction

to the Historians of our New Series.*

Il.— Sir Henry Elliot's Scheme and the Bibliotheca Indica.

It may at first sight seem surprising that before the appearance, in

1849, of Sir H. M. Elliot’s Indew to the Historians of Muhammadan

India, but little was done for determining the sources from which

the history of the Muhammadan period should be compiled. When cir-

cumstances lead men to pay attention to a new branch of knowledge,

it is outlines rather, and comprehensive sketches, which are required,

than critical details. But when, in the course of time, a fair know-

ledge has been gained of the subject and its scopes, men will proceed

to analytical enquiries; and after gaining an insight into the sources,

they will exercise the power of selecting that which is original from

that which is borrowed. ‘The attention which scholars before and at

the time of Elliot paid to Indian History, was, however, by no means

slight. This is shewn by the numerous translations which have been

made by Anderson, Bird, Briggs, Chalmers (MS.), W. Davy, Dorn,

Erskine, Gladwin, W. Hollingbery, C. A. Mackenzie (MS.), Miles, D.

Prize, H. T. Prinsep, J. Reynolds, Rowlandson, 0. Stewart, D. Shea,

A. Troyer, White, J. Wilkins, &c., several of which translations were

printed at the cost of the Oriental Translation Fund.

But it is the works of Sir H. M. Elliot, and his posthumous pa-

pers which, for years to come, will form the sound basis of critical

studies. Sir H. M. Elliot, shortly before 1847, if I am not mistaken,

proposed to the Government of the North West to lithograph a uni-

* Since writing the following remarks, the New Series of our Bibliotheca

Indica was reviewed in the Times of the 26th March, 1869.

108 Badéont and his Works. [No. 3,

form edition of the Historians of India. Though this proposal was

not accepted for want of funds for such an object, Sir H. M. Elliot was

asked to prepare an Index of the Historians, so that the proper MSS.

might be selected and deposited in the College Library of Agra.

The ‘Index’ thus called for by the Government of the N. W. ‘ insen-

sibly expanded into several volumes,’ of which the first and only one

was printed at Calcutta in 1849. The unexpected death of Sir H.

M. Elliot put a temporary end to the completion of his Index.

- In March 18638, Mr. A. Grote proposed to the Philological Committee

of our Society, to carry on the publication of Sir H. M. Elliot’s papers, and

on the 80th April of the same year the Committee [ Messrs. A. Grote

(President), E. C. Bayley, W. N. Lees, Rajendra Lala Mitra, and the

Secretaries, Messrs. W.S. Atkinson and EK. B. Cowell] reported to the

Society as follows :—

‘““ The Committee have under consideration a proposition which has

‘for its object an endeavour to secure the publication, even in an im-

“* perfect form, of the valuable materials which the late Sir H. Elliot

‘had collected for his work on the ‘ Muhammadan Historians.’

“It was the wish of many members of our Society eight years ago

“to offer the Society’s aid to Lady Elliot in carrying out the author’s

* project, but no proposition was made because it was hoped and —

‘‘understood that the more powerful assistance of the Home Govern-

‘ment would be given to that end.”

“The Committee are aware that the late Board of Controul in their

“letter, dated 4th August, 1856, to Professor Wilson, and Messrs.

‘‘ Morley and Bayley, sanctioned the printing of the first three Vols,

* of the Elliot MSS., which had been left ready for press, on the

*‘ understanding that the payment by the Court in respect of the 3 vols, —

“ds to be strictly limited to the sum of £500, excluding the remuner-

*‘ ation to the gentleman who may undertake the superintendence of the

** nublication. It was hoped that the publication of the further

“ volumes might be effected by means of private efforts.” * * *.

‘“‘ Mr, Bayley who had examined all the materials, reported on them

“thus :—Vols. 4 and 5, far advanced; 6 and 7, materials and out-

‘lines only ready ; 8 nearly as far advanced as Vols. 10 and 11, which

1869.] Baddons and his Works. 109

“are about, say, half ready ; Vol. 9 in an equally forward state with

‘‘ the three first vols.*

“The arrangement which was made with Mr. Morley for publish-

“ing the work to the extent of the Board of Controul’s grant

““was terminated by that gentleman’s death, and no similar

‘arrangement has since been found feasible. It seems to the Com-

‘mittee that there is great risk of the late Sir H. Elliot’s labours

“being altogether lost, unless the Society comes forward with an offer

“to undertake the superintendence of the publication, * * * *

“The materials to be placed at the Committee’s disposal by Lady

*¢Hlliot. With Mr. E. Thomas’ cooperation in Hngland, the Com-

“ mittee will be in a condition to determine what they will require

‘to be sent out, and what portion may be left with him, or accessible

“to him, for compliance with references made to lwp from this

** Committee.”

Circumstances, however, to the great regret of the Committee, prevent-

ed the proposal from being carried out ; but Sir H. M. Hlliot’s papers

are now being published in Babland under the able editorship of

Professor J. Dowson.

Though the departure of Sir H. M. Elliot from India, and his

untimely death, had put an end to the immediate completion of his

work, the collection of MSS. detailed in the ‘ Index’ was commenced,

and actively pursued. In 1855, the late Mr. Colvin, then Lieutenant-

Governor of the North West, at the suggestion of Mr. HE. Thomas,

B.C. 8., entrusted to Mr. H. W. Hammond, then Secretary of the

Sudder Board of Revenue, the task of collecting and collating MSS.

of the Muhammadan Historians of India. Mr. Hammond issued the

following notice—

hyphal

“ae ee By) is ® bi if 3 LEQ + 1 hg is Ulsae 96K

Sigil wt sla rls Sines Welk a WS 5 a gadzivo Puls

4551 3)x Ps git fay Ko pas ES Unrma 9% <oh3 IS ee

3 Gs lo Ly crls ‘i of 0) OMe O22 2d ett Gyar UWA Ne

et er phone yal F,2 sls gl = Se 4 dlem barn) Shit

bas o& law Jae OS

* Vide also Dr A. Sprenger’s Manuscripts of the late Sir H. Elliot, J. A. S.

Bengal, Vol XXIII,

110 Baddoni and his Works. [No. 3,

coy eo aclidest> ze yt gd} foe &i3 Be

~ Re i sie pols eslvb cstiez rai 2 4 poe Se)

las) G3) w=? boli 2 er } lyse es Baines Ald jays

S WALES yh elke gl cli *

(ss 2 ele ali oh wpe rial cglyales

Caybelle 5 0 M ities Ue poliiog; garlegys wlesy

Laas} eh Bree ee bab sldoly rer akile

wipalilizne ile SH jal) z2 8 olay a0 Aadays

A Ben yNCEP LET Gale pb gee

Lose Sjy3 Bley

CLASS Shae ptediies | f

“The Government intends to print the undermentioned books, for

which purpose several MSS. are required for each work. Should any

one possess MSS., he is requested to send them bearing by Bangy-

dak to the Secretary of the Gadr Board, Agrah. After printing the

books, the MSS. will be returned, together with a copy of the printed

work gratis. Should any one be willing to part with his MSS., they

will be bought.”

“ Tarikh i Farishtah,* Khulécatuttawaérikh, Chhachhnamah, Térikh

i Sind, Tarfkh i Yamini (in Persian),* Tabaqat i Naciri,* Firazshah i

by Zid i Barani,* Firdzshahi by Shams i Siraj, Extract from the

Zafarnamah,* Makhzan i Afghani,* Muntakhabullubab,* Tarikh

i Chagatdai, Babari,* Humaytni,*” Akbarnémah,* Sawdénih i

Akbarf, Badéoni,* Zubdatuttawérikh, Madsir i Rahimi, Maasir

i’Alamgiri, Jahéngimémah, Paédishdhnémah* with its sequel, HEx-

tract from the Hadiqatugeafa, Ibratnamah, Tarikh i Iraédat Khan,

Tarikh Ndadiruzzamani, Siyarulmutaakhkharin,* Extracts from the

Tarikh i Muzaffari, Extracts from the Muntakhabuttawdrikh, Ex-

tracts from the Hadiqatulaqalim, Waccaf,* Tuzuk i Timitri.*

12th September, 1855.”

* The works marked * have since been either printed or translated,

1869.] Baddons and his Works. 111

The number of MSS. which Mr. Hammond succeeded in purchasing

or borrowing amounted to no less than 67. They were—

Térikh-i-Firdiz-Shahi by Zia i Barani, 6 MSS. ; Térikh-i-Firaz-Shahi

by Shams Siraj ’Afif, 3 ; Iqbalnamah i Jahangiri of Mu’tamid Khan, 6 ;

Tuzuk i Jahangiri, by the Emperor Jahangir, 3; Maasir-i-Jahangiri,

1; Siyar al-Mutaakhkharin, 3; Tarikh-i-Farishtah, 38; Khulagat ut-

Tawarikh, 2; Zubdat ut-Tawaérikh by “Abdul Hag, from Mu’izz ud-

din to Akbar, 1; Zubdat ut-Tawarikh by ’Abd ul-Karim, from

Muhammad Shah to E. I. Company, 1; Akbarnamah, Part I., 4;

Idem, Part II., 1; Sawdnih i Akbari, 3; Shah Jahénndmah, 1;

Tarikh-i-Badaéoni, 2; Madsiri’Alamgiri of Muhammad Séqi,1; ’Alam-

girnémah i Dosdlah, by the same, 1; Maasiri ’Alamgiri, by Munshi

Muhammad Kazim, 1; Térikh-i-’Alamgiri, author unknown, 1; Mun-

takhab ul Lubab, 1; Ibrat-némah, Vol. II., 1; Tarikh i Muzaffari, 3;

Tabaqat i Timtriah (abstract of Vol. I.), 1; Zafarnamah, 1; Tuzuk i

Timuri, by Amir Timur, 2 ; Tarikh-i-Timiuri (by ?),1; Malfazat 1 Amir

Timur, by Muhammad Afzal, 1; Nadir uz Zamani, by Munshi Mahdi,

3; Khulagat ut Tawarikh, 3; Hadiqat ul Aqélim, 1; Idem, abstract of,

1; Makhzani Afghani, 1; Maasir ul Umara, 1; (?? ?) Sikandari, 1;

Térikh Mamalik i Hind, 1.

‘The MSS. of Zia i Barani’s Tarikh-i-Firdz-Shahi,’ says Mr. Hammond,

‘were carefully collated, under my supervision, by Maulvi Faiz Ahmad,

Sarishtahdar of the Board of Revenue at Agra, a man well versed in

Oriental literature, a good Persian and Arabic scholar, and much

employed by the late Sir Henry Elliot. He disappeared during the

mutiny, and I never could ascertain any particulars regarding his fate.

In collating the MSS. he was assisted by two competent Munshis. One

copy of Zia i Barani’s history, belonging to Sayyid Ahmad, was pre-

pared for press, and (IL believe) formed the basis of the text lately

printed in Calcutta. ‘This and one other MS. of Zia i Barani alone

escaped. All the others were placed by me in a strong chest on

leaving India in 1856, and were deposited in the Record Office of the

Board of Revenue at Agra, which edifice was burnt during the

mutiny. There were in the same box some MSS. of Arabic and

Persian Dictionaries.’

‘The MSS. of Shams i Siraj ’Afif’s history were also collated, and

some others commenced upon. I defrayed from my private means

112 Badéoni and his Works. [No. 3,

all expenses of collection or collation of the MSS. herein referred to.

I have no idea whether any grant for purposes of publication was

subsequently made by the Government of India.’*

The year before Mr. Hammond had been commissioned to collect

the Agra Library MSS., Mr. Morley’s Catalogue of the Historical

MSS. of the R, A. S, made its appearance. In the absence of the

completing portion of Sir H. M. Elliot’s Index, the publication of

this catalogue was of the greatest importance, whilst it is still one of

the best indexes to the Historical works of other Muhammadan

countries,

The loss of 67 MSS. of 35 historical works is irreparable. Any one

who has been collecting MSS. in India, knows how difficult it is to

obtain any at all. The paucity of MSS. at the present day, is due to

vermin, the climate, the impoverished status of many Muhammadan

families, but especially to the introduction of printing and litho-

graphing, which has made kdtibs superfluous. The number of pro-

fessional copyists is very small, and daily decreasing. Bearing

moreover in mind that historical works, as also dictionaries, are from

their voluminousness more rarely copied than Diwans and other light

reading, we should not have been surprised, if the loss of the Agra

MSS. had frustrated the last hope of carrying out Sir H. M. Elliot’s

scheme of issuing. in India, editions of Native Historians.

It was therefore fortunate, as it was patriotic, that the Philologi-

cal Committee of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, in 1859, took

up the scheme, and resolved to print in the New Series several works

on the History of Muhammadan India. The minute book of the

Philological Committee shews that it was Mr. A. Grote, its President,

who first advocated the editing of Muhammadan Historians. He says

in his minute of the 26th September, 1859 :—

“T am strongly in favour of publishing the works of some of the

*¢ Persian Historians of Muhammadan India. The N. W. Govern-

“ment had, it will be remembered, a project for bringing out a series of

“such histories. This, Mr. Muir tells me, has, for the present, been

“abandoned, all the materials collected for the publication having

“been destroyed at Agra in 1857. The only MSS. which escaped,

“‘ were those of Zid i Barani, which Mr. Hammond had taken home

* Vide Journal, R. A, 8. 1868, p. 475.

‘

;

——»

1869. ] Baddoni and his Works. 148

“with him ; and which will probably be placed at our disposal, if we

‘‘ decide on undertaking its publication. I will hereafter make some

“suggestions as to the historians to be selected, should the Com-

“mittee concur generally in the propriety of including this class of

“works in the New Series.”

In the minutes of the Committee (26th Sept. 1859) I find the

following entry :—

““Present—The President, Capt. Lees, Rev. J. Long, Babu

‘Rajendra Lala Mitra, and the Secretaries { Messrs. W. S. Atkinson

“and H. B. Cowell]. I. Resolved that a new Series of the Biblio-

“theca Indica be commenced. IV. The President proposed that the

“ Society should undertake to publish some Muhammadan Historians,

“particularly Zia i Barani (vide Minute attached). Approved of,

“Information should be collected respecting MSS. and a competent

“ editor.”

These recommendations were adopted by the Council of the

Society. The Committee soon gave proofs of its continued activity.

At the meeting of the 16th January, 1860, a letter was read from

Sayyid Ahmad Khan of Muradabad, offering to edit Zid i Baran.

It was resolved to accept his offer, and to ask him to send the MS.

to Calcutta.

On the 12th April of the same year, Mr. Grote circulated the

following extract of a letter written by Mr. Morley to My. EK.

Thomas—

““T am much pleased to find that Persian texts are to be printed

in the Bibliotheca Indica, and that Mr. Grote begins promisingly,

[I should not at all object to send my collated transcript of Bachagi to

India, if I were sure that it would be printed, but not else. I wrote

it, in the first place, faithfully from my own MS. which you have,

and in it is noted every variant, without reference to sense, from Sir

H. Elliot’s MS. and the one in the Paris Library. Printing a correct

text from my collated transcript would be an easy task for any

painstaking Persian scholar.

P.S. The Baihagi amounts to 372 pages, small Svo., 19 lines

‘in a page.”

The editing of Baihagi was happily not interfered with by the

death of Mr. Morley. At the meeting of the Committee on the 15th

114 Baddont and his Works. _. PNons,

August 1860, the President announced the decease of Mr. Morley ;

but he added that Mr. HE. Thomas had seen the Executors, and had

secured from them the promise that the MS. of Bazhagt should be

sent out to India. On the receipt of Mr. Morley’s transcript, it was

immediately forwarded, as had been done with Sayyid Ahmad’s

Firdzshahi, to Major Lees’ press.

In their Annual Report for 1861, the Council announced to the Society

that four fasciculi of Zid 2 Barani and two fasc. of Bathagt had been

issued. The completion of both works was announced in the Annual

Report of our Society for 1862. At the annual meeting the President

(Mr. A. Grote) remarked :—

“The series of Persian historians is one, in the progress of which I

take a special interest, an interest borrowed from others, but not the

less genuine for not being original. The late Sir H. Elliot and Mr.

John Colvin were the first movers, as is generally known, on behalf

of the publications in question, which the active co-operation of Mr. EH.

Thomas had just pressed into a project, when the troubles of 1857

caused all idea of it to be dropped. It was resumed some three years

ago by the Philological Committee at the suggestion, I believe, of

myself, since I, as your Secretary, had been all along in close com-

munication with those friends whom I have just named. The first

work, the Tarikh i Firtizshahi of Zia i Barani, which the Committee

undertook to recommend to the Council, was that which was to have

opened the series under the auspices of the North-Western Govern-

ment. I indulge in the hope that much may yet be done towards

carrying out, not only thus partially, but in its entirety, the task to

which Sir H. Elliot had devoted himself, and which was occupying

him when he died. The mass of valuable materials which he had

collected, ought not to be allowed to remain inaccessible to the many —

who desire to consult them and profit by them.”

On the 23rd April, 1862, Mr. E. B. Cowell proposed that the

Tértkh i Badéont by ’Abdul Qadir be undertaken in the Series of

Indian Historians. At the same meeting, Major Lees also, guided

by Morley’s Catalogue, proposed to edit such portions of the Tabagdt

i Ndcirt as had a reference to India. The minute Book contains the

dollowing entry :—

“VI. Read a Memorandum by Capt. Lees connected with the —

1869.] Baddoni and his Works. 115

‘prosecution of. Persian and Arabic publications by the Society, and

resolved that the Committee cordially concur with him in the pro-

priety of publishing the Tabaqat « Ndagirt.” The Memo. alluded to,

I have not been able to trace among the records; but the substance of

it may be embodied in Major Lees’ remarks on p. 465 of our Journal

for 1864. Regarding the Tabaqgat « Ndciri, he says :—

‘* Of the contents of the work, the late Mr. Morley in his Catalogue,

“‘ vave a brief outline ; and from the examination I made of the book,

“his remarks appear to convey an accurate impression of its value:

‘of the propriety then of our publishing the portion mentioned [ Ghori

‘“‘ Dynasty up to Nagiruddin Mahmud], there could not, I think, be a

“ question.”

Mr. Cowell’s proposal to print the Tarikh i Baddoni was accepted

on the 8th April, 1863. The following entry refers to it :—

‘Capt. Lees’ Report on the MSS. of the Tarikh i Badaoni was

read and approved; but his suggestions relative to the Tabagat i

Akbari to be deferred to a future meeting.”’

It is a matter of regret that the printing of the Tabaqaét 1 Niz4m i

Bakhshi* was allowed to be deferred. The three very inferior MSS.

of the TVérikh «1 Baddont were handed over to Maulawi Kabiruddin

Ahmad, who edited the second volume (Akbar’s reign) ; afterwards,

for the first and third volumes, they were given to Maulawi Agha

Ahmad ’Ali of the Calcutta Madrasah.t The completing fasciculus

ofthe whole work, together with ashort biographical notice of Badaoni

in Persian, has just been issued.

The Annual Report for 1864 announced the completion of the

Tabaqdt i Néciri, and the igsue of five fasciculi of Baddoné.

During 1865, the historical editions were vigorously proceeded with.

On the 22nd June, 1864, Major Lees proposed that the Lgbdlndmah t

Jahingirt should be printed. Though it-was of little advantage to

print this work as it is a verbatim extract from the Tuzuk ¢ Jahangiri}

* Called by mistake Nakhsabé on p. 468 of our Journal for 1864.

+ Vide Journal A. 8S. Bengal for 1868, No. I., p. 20.

{ I have collected the places in the Iqbalnamah which contain. either

new items of information, or differences from the Tuzuk, and trust to have

shortly leisure to put them in form of an essay. If one of the two works is to

be translated, it must be the Tuzuk (Sayyid Ahmad’s edition). There are few

works which contain more collateral information than the Tnzuk.,

116 Badiont and his Works. [ No. 3,

which had been printed the year before by Sayyid Ahmad of Alighur

(1864), the Committee and the Council resolved to print it. The

MSS. were handed over to Maulawis ’Abdul Hai and Agha Ahmad

"Ali, whose edition is carefully got up, and generally free from typo-

graphical errors.

On the same day also, the Committee resolved to publish a

revised edition of the Atm i Akbarz, and to apply to Government

for a special grant. Dr. A. Sprenger, to whom Sir H. M. Elliot also

owed so much in his search for rare MSS., had, on several occasions,

even before the Mew Series was commenced with, pointed out to the

Philological Committee the importance of a critical text of the Ain.

On the'12th November, 1865, Major Lees proposed that the Com-

mittee should print the Pddishéhnémah of ’Abdul Hamid i Lahori,

and the ’Alamgirnémah by Muhammad Kazim. The latter was edited

by Maulawis’Abdul Hai and Khadim Husain, the former of whom lately

iavoured the Society with a minute Jndex (now printing) of names, an

Index geographicus, and a List of Errata which, in the absence of a

translation,* will be of great assistance. The MSS. of the Pédishdhndémah

were handed over to Maulawis ’Abdurrahim and Kabiruddin Ahmad of

the Madrasah. The work is rather bulky, and awkward for references

being made to it, especially as there is no index of names, &e. Its —

style, however, is easy, though not half as polished as the elegant |

Alamgirnémah.

In 1866, the Government of India granted Rs. 5000 for a critical

edition of the Ain, which was commenced in March 1867. Up to the

present moment, eight fasciculi of the text, and three of an English —

version have been printed.

On the 2nd March 1868, Major Lees, shortly before his departure ;

for Europe, proposed that the Committee should print eight other

historical works, including the Tubagdt i Akbart ‘t, of which the Council —

selected the voluminous, but valuable, Khdéfé Khén, which is now j

being edited by Maulawi Kabiruddin. The endeavours which have _

been made to collect MSS. for the Madsir 7 ’Alamgtrt have not been

successful. }

* A portion of the ’Alamgtrnémah (passages relati ng to B ; a

has been ee (Library A. S, fay No, 82). ing to Burma and Assam) 4

1869. | Badaont and his Works. 117

IIT.

A Biography of Abdul Qadir.

"Abdul Qadir was born on the 17th Rabi’ussani 947 (21st August,

1540) at Todah,* in the Sirkér of Rantanbhtir, which belonged to the

Cubah of Ajmir. Regarding the year of his birth, he says in his

history—“ In this year Sher Shah gave the order to build from Ban-

gal to Rahtas in the Panjab (a distance of four months’ travel), and

from Agrah to Mandi in Mélwah, at every kos, a house for travellers

with a Masjid and a well. He appointed for each sardi a Muazzin

and an Jmdm (leader of the prayer), and even a Muhammadan and a

Hindu,+ who were to provide travellers with water and theindigent with

food. He also planted, on both sides of the road, trees which formed

an avenue in the shade of which people could travel, Even now-a-

days, though fifty-two years later, the traces of this road are in many

places visible. During the reign of this good king, justice was every-

where so efficiently provided for, that an old man, for example, might

have anywhere lain down to sleep. with a golden plate in his hand, and

yet no thief would have taken it away from him. Thanks be to

God that during the reign of such a king the author of this history

was born! I might apply to my case the words which our blessed

prophet said of the time of his birth, ‘I was born during the reign

of the just king [Naushirwin the Just].”

We know nothing of the circumstances of ’Abdul Qadir’s father,

whose name was Mulik Shah ibn i Hamid.t The family appears to

have chiefly lived at Basdwar, or Bhasdwar, a town of the district of

Bayanah on the route from Agrah to Ajmir, and generally spelt on

our maps Bissower or Busowar. There ’Abdul Qadir spent the first

years of his life (II, 236). His maternal grandfather, Makhddém

Ashraf, took much interest in him, and taught him the elements of

Arabic Grammar (II, 63). It appears that Makhdim Ashraf held a

tmnilitary post ; for “Abdul Qadir states that, in 955, his grandfather

was with the contingent of Hurid Térin, a commander of Five thousand,

) at Bajwarah, near Baydnah (Otibah of Agrah). About that time, his

* I, p. 363; II, p. 236.

_ ¥ Hindds will not drink water from the leather bags of the water-carriers.

_ IU, p. 252, Sir H. Elliot in one of his extracts from Badéoni calls ’Abdul

| Qadir’s grandfather Jah, according to the reading of the MS. belonging to the

Society which he used. All other MSS. have Hémid.

118 Badioni and his Works, [No. 3,

father Mulik Shah, went to Sambhal, where ‘during the reign of

Islem* Shah (952 to 960)’ ’Abdul Qadir learnt to read and chant the

Qorén. At Sambhal also lived Shaikh Panjd, the spiritual guide

(pir i dastgtr) of his father Mulik Shah. The Shaikh who was a

pupil of the famous Shaikh Adhan of Jaunpir, was as distinguished

for his profundity in Ciifism, as for the beauty of his voice, and for his

talents of speech and address; and it is perhaps from him that ’ Abdul

Qadir acquired the fine intonation which subsequently recommended

him to Akbar. In 960, while still at Sambhal, "Abdul Qadir studied

Muhammadan law under Miyan Hatim and Shaikh Abulfath, son of

the renowned Shaikh Jlahdiyaht of Khairébid (II, 286). With the

former Abdul Qadir studied the Kanz 7 figah 1 Hanafz, and became in

time his direct disciple (murid i rashid), when Hatim honoured him

with the cap and the ‘tree’ ofhisown teacher’ Azizullah. Hatim, who died

in 969, must have been a Shaikh of great renown; for not only has

"Abdul Qadir placed him first among his biographies of the learned of

Akbar’s reign (Vol. IIT), but Abulfazl has done so likewise in his list

of the learned (Second book of the Ain).

During ’Abdul Qadir’s stay in Sambhal, Basawar and the surround-

ing districts were plundered by Hemu in his expedition (961) against —

Ibrahim Khan; and the exhausted state of the district was rendered

mere pitiable during the dreadful famine of 962, when ’Abdul Qadir —

witnessed the death from hunger of thousands and the dreadful sight

of man eating man (I, 423). During the sack of Basdwar by Hemi,

the library also of Abdul Qadir’s father perished.

In 966, the third year of Akbar’s reign, Abdul Qadir accompanied

his father to Agrah, where he lived in the house of Mihr ’Ali Beg

Saldoz, who subsequently rose to high dignity. After a journey with —

Mihr ’Ali Beg (related in Elliot’s Index, p. 233) to the fortress of

Chandar, "Abdul Qadir continued his studies in Agrah, under Shaikh

* Islem, with the yd 4 majhdl (e), is the vulgar and Indian pronunciation

for Islém ; hence we also find towns called Islempuir. This change (imdlah) —

of a long d to e has in many words become classical. Another well-known —

Indian example is hawelé, the environs of a town, for hawdli, which has now-a-—

days taken another meaning. But pre, with the imdlah, is never pronounced

ism. Vide Hlliot’s Index, p. 229, note 2.

{ Ildhdiyah is the Hindtstani for the Persian Ildhddd. Another form is

Allah diyah, pr. God has given, Theodore. So also Iléhdbdd and Allahdbdd,

Tlahwirdé Khan and Allahwirdé Khan.

1869. ] Badédont and his Works. 119

Mubarik of Nagor. This Mubdrik is one of the most remarkable men

of Akbar’s reign. He had the good fortune of seeing his eldest son,

Abul Faiz, acquire the renown of being the second greatest poet that

Hindustan has produced; whilst his second son Abulfazl became the

greatest statesman and patriot that Muhammadan India can point

to. Shaikh Mubarik was, moreover, one of the principal causes of

Akbar’s apostacy from the Islam. The heretical influence which he

even exercised on Abdul Qadir, who at that time had commenced rigour-

ously to walk on the path of the law and the commentaries, is clearly

visible in his. belief in the approach of the Millennium, of which I

shall say a few words in connection with ’Abdul Qadir’s character.

The law studies which ’Abdul Qadir continued at Agrah, remained

his favourite occupation to the end of his life. Under Shaikh Mubdarik

he had made friendship with Abul Faiz and Abul Fazl; under Qazi

Abul Ma’Ali, a lawyer who had come to Agrah from Bukhara, he had

Naqib Khan as class fellow (hamdars), who subsequently played an

important part under Akbar and Jahangir.

Thus we see that, as far as education and society were concerned,

’Abdul Qadir enjoyed all those advantages upon which success in after-

life depends. .

In 969, ’Abdul Qadir and Shaikh Muhammad, his younger brother,

had to mourn over the death of their father. His body was carried from

Agrah to Baséwar. In the following year, Makhdam Ashraf also,

’Abdul Qadir’s grandfather, died at Basawar. ‘‘ Thus in the space of

one year,’ says ’Abdul Qadir in chronicling these events, “ nothing

but grief entered my heart, which up to this time had been so thought-

less; and sorrow which I had hitherto avoided, stepped up in all its

ruthlessness and attacked me. The meaning of ‘ Lé has befallen me’

became now clear to me, and I saw the truth of what my father had

; rice told me, ‘‘ that my light-mindedness would last as long as he was

f on earth; but afterwards people would see how I would go on without .

him, and how I would scorn the world and everything connected with

Bit,”

’Abdul Qadir soon after removed to Baddon (wslo!)* where he

* The word Baddon has the accent on the penultima, and a final nasal n ;

hence baddont, with a short o or uw, and the Shakli Hamzah above the wdw,

an inhabitant of Badaon. The transliteration Badddntz, which I have seen in

120 Badaoni and his Works. [No. 3,

stayed till 973. He then removed to Patiyala (Y4%3), and was intro-

duced to Husain Khan, the Jagirdar of the town. This man was at

once the Bayard and the Don Quixote of Akbar’s Court. He belonged

to the chiefs who under Humaytin had re-conquered India; hence he

was in high favor with Akbar, who had raised him to the dignity of a

Commander of Three thousand (Ain Second Book, Ain 30, No. 538).

But he was a pious monomaniac; he thought of nothing else but

treasures and gold bars concealed in the Hindu temples of the Sawalik ~

Range, and he undertook predatory expeditions, from which he re- —

turned poorer than he-had been before. His enthusiasm was ever in

advance of that of his men who, badly equipped as they were, had

not only to suffer hunger and thirst, but never found the gold bars

for which they and their master got their heads broken. When

Governor of Lahor, he used to eat bread made of oatmeal ---‘ his fare

was not to be better than that of his prophet.’ He would not indulge

in the luxury of a chdrpd, or bedstead—‘ had not saints slept on the —

ground ?’ It was known that he had never committed an unchaste deed. —

Property he had none. The contingent which he ought to have kept as

a Commander of Three Thousand was never in proper order ; and though |

Akbar had added the town of Shamsabad to his jagir, his liberality

towards the poor and pious left him no money to get horses for his

men. On one occasion (II, p. 94), he lost for this reason the com-—

mand of an expedition. Sometimes he had not a horse for himself 3

or his servants had to bring him a horse, because he had given away

his last and only horse as a present. ‘“‘ Money kept at home,” said

he, “is a thorn in my side.” A poet said of him—hdn ¢ muflis,

ghulam t béséméan—‘ A poor lord with rich subjects.’ When, in 983,

he died from. a wound which he had received on his last expedition —

in search of Hindi gold bars, he was one lac and a halfin debt; but his

creditors tore up the receipts, partly because he had no assets, partly

some works, is misleading ; for ve Jafd9 has the wazn of erhslao, U—vU— snee

Baddéint would be cylgslQo, U——-—. For wys{o3, we find an old spell-

ing W_[O3, with a nasal » after the Alif. The spelling WeJloy, with a yd after

the alif, is quite modern.

The town was famous as the ‘ abode of saints.’ The ‘ Chronicle of Badéon,

published in Urdt by the Rohilcund Library Society, gives the names of fifty-

one § worthies,’ re

1869. ] Baddont and his Works. 121

because they loved the man. He was tall of stature, and possessed

immense physical strength. He fought like a lion. His war cry was,

“ Death or victory !’?; and when people asked him why he did not

say ‘‘ Victory or death,” inverting the order of his battle call, he said,

“ Oh, I do long to be with the saints that have gone before !”

His piety and reverence for the Sayyids, the learned, and every thing

Islamitic, frequently led him into serious mistakes. Once, at Ldhor,

a Hindi had come to one of his meetings, who wore a long beard as

Muhammadans do. Mistaking him for a co-religionist, the old

warrior shewed him every mark of respect, and even humility. When

people informed him of his mistake, he gave the order that every

Hindu at Lahor should sew a piece (twkra) of cloth over the place

where the sleeve is sewn to the coat; and the rigour with which

he exacted compliance to his order, procured him the nickname of

Tukriyah, the Patcher. Nor would he allow Hindis to use saddles

(zim) when on horseback, because the Muhammadan law denies

infidels this boon; but he only allowed them a wallet (palan/.

Another time, at Lak’hnau, he appointed a man as his Vakil,

because he was a Sayyid, when sometime after his relations, to his

infinite disgust, told him that his Vakil was a She’ah.

The last expedition which Husain Khan led, was as much directed

against the imperial collectors who oppressed the poor, as against

Hindi temples with hidden gold bars; and Akbar had the greatest

difficulty in believing that Husain Khan had not rebelled. ‘‘ People,”

says Abdul Qadir, “think him mad ; but he is wise and lowly in heart.”

His piety was so sincere, that Badaoni thinks that Akbar would never

have renounced Islam, if Husain Khan had remained alive.

This was the man to whom ’Abdul Qadir, in 973, had been intro-

duced, and whose service he entered. He had at that time the

idea of going to Court; but the liberality of Husain Khan and the

regard he shewed to learned men, induced ’Abdul Qadir, for the pre-

sent, to give up all thoughts of applying to Akbar. He preferred the

appointment of Gadr of Husain Khan’s jagir. As such, he had to

look after the poor of the district, and attend on his master for religious

matters, as leading the prayer, We.

During the nine years (973 to 981), which “Abdul Qadir remained

with Husain Khan, he shared the transfers, and the adventures

122 Badéont and his Works. [No. 3,

of this Knight-errant of the Crescent. In 974, when Akbar and

his grandees were engaged in suppressing the rebellion of Khan

Zamin, which ended with the defeat and death of the rebellious chief

at Mungarwal, near Allahabad, ’Abdul Qadir lived for a short time in

Agrah, where he met Mirz4 Niz4m uddin Ahmad (II, p. 99,) who

subsequently wrote the Tabagaét i Akbari, and became his warm

friend.

In 975, ’Abdul Qadir married a second wife at Badaon (II, 105).

Of his first marriage he has left no record. The event was the

occasion of a pretty Turikh,—o% cpp ey) Alo odS, ‘I said, a

moon in conjunction with a sun,’ which gives 975.

Soon after, “Abdul Qadir followed his patron to Lak’hnau, to

which place Husain Khén’s jégir had been transferred by Akbar.

"Abdul Qadir made use of his stayin Audh to visit the principal saints

and the learned men of the time. The sojourn at Lak’hnau was,

however, of short duration ; Husain Khan’s j4gir was again transferred

to Kant o Golah (Shahjahénptr), and mortified at the transfer, the

old hero set out on an expedition against Hindi temples and their

hidden treasures.* ’Abdul Qadir did not accompany him, but asked

for leave to go to Badaon where he got his younger brother, Shaikh

Muhammad, married. The union, says Badaoni, was productive of

mischief, and appears to have led, towards the end of 977, to the

death of Shaikh Muhammad. ’Abdul Qadir’s sorrow at this loss was

increased by the death of his infant son ’Abdullatif. The Zurkzb-

band in which he has expressed his grief (II, pp. 127 to 182,) is very

fine, and shews the powers of his poetical genius.

In the beginning of 979, ’Abdul Qadir rejoined Husain Khén at

Kant o Golah, where he continued his duties as almoner. In the

same year ‘a dreadful event’ befell Badaoni, which is best related in

his own words (II, p. 186). ‘I went to Makkanpfir, which belongs to

the Sirkér of Qannauj, in order to visit the tomb of Shah Madar.f —

* This expedition has been translated in Hlliot’s Index, pp. 235, 236. The

corresponding passage in the Text edition will be found on p. 125, of the second

volume of Badaoni. Lines 6 to 8 are unintelligible ; for a ytdy read updo 2

for bainika read bainaka ; [os has no sense; for polly we expect the name

of a town.

~ Vide Garcin de Tassy, La Religion Musulmane dans I’Inde, p. 52 (second

edition). The word Qannawj is differently pronounced. The spelling Kanaw

1869. | Badéont and his Works. 123

As it is the case with all men that are ‘ brought up on pure milk,’ light-

mindedness—Adam’s legacy, and the source of repentance, cruelty,

ignorance, sorrow, and injury—brought me into a foolish scrape.

This light-mindedness I called love, and after getting entangled in the

net of voluptuousness, [ had to suffer what fate had ordained. An

extraordinary row took place in the vault where the saint lies buried ;

but it was not only God’s anger, but also His mercy, that I was made

to suffer for my crime in this world. Some people belonging to the

family of the beloved got hold of me, and inflicted nine sword

wounds on my head, hands, and shoulders. But the wounds were

only skin wounds, with the exception of the wound on my head; for

my skull sustained a fracture, and the brain was laid bare. Besides, the

vein of my little finger had been cut through. I fell into a swoon,

and thought it was all over with me. But by and by I recovered

and got well. I hope, [ shall likewise get off as easily in the next world.

At Bangarmau,* I fell in with a skilful surgeon, under whose care my

wounds commenced to heal up within the course of aweek. In my pains,

i vowed to perform the rite of pilgrimage to Makkah; but this vow

has up to the present time (1004) not been fulfilled. * * * From

Bangarmau [ returned to Kant o Golah. After the bath of recovery,

however, I was again confined to my bed. May God Almighty

reward Husain Khan with a place in Paradise; for he tended me

with the care of a father and a brother, and did more than man can do.

As the cold of the season made my wound quite numb (gazak), he

prepared for mea salve of Tamarix, and also fed me on Tamarix

sweetmeats. At last I went to Baddon, in order to consult another

physician. He re-opened the wound, which brought me to death’s

door. Once while in a state of torpor, I had a dream. A number of

collectors of taxes had taken me up to heaven, where I saw a daftar,

a Diwan, and clerks. Some mace-bearers, who resembled the mace-

or Qanauj, is very common; but several verses of the Shahnamah and

Nizami’s Sikandarnémah read Qannauj, with a double n, as is proved by the

metre; vide Vullers’ Dict. under a 9S. Dawson’s edition of Elliot’s works (II,

p. 52), quotes a commentator who spells Kinnawj, which is also the spelling

given in the Taqwém ulbuldan. 3

* yh. The Ain spells this name 50,83 Bangarmau. Our maps have

Bingermow ; it lies in Audh (south), and belonged to the district of Unam

{on our maps Ono, on the Lak’hnau railway), There are many towns 1 Audh

and Bareli, the names of which end in mau.

124 Badaoni and his Works. | No. 3,

bearers attending on the kings of the world, with staffs in their hands,

got hold of me, and hurried me about, when one of the writers who

looked over a sheet of paper, said, ‘‘ This is not the one.” Trembling

all over I opened my eyes; but from that moment I felt relieved, and

the story which I had often heard when a child, proved true.’”*

The perusal of this ‘ lovescrape’ makes upon us a different impression

from what it will make upon a Muhammadan. First of all, Abdul

Qadir’s “beloved” was a young boy. But whilst we, in censuring

"Abdul Qadir, would expect that the thought of his family and his

office, his education, and his religious sincerity, should have pro-

tected him against committing or attempting an unnatural crime, a

Muhammadan would rather look upon the whole story as a mere

example of the power of love. In the Hast, it is a recognized fact

that love to a boy renders a man mad, and makes him in the eyes

of his neighbours an object of sympathy rather than of censure.

The element of immorality enters but slightly. Hven now-a-days,

when such cases come to the notice of educational officers, the

excuse constantly brought forward is, that the offender had tem-

porarily become a kafir—a phrase only too frequently borrowed

from the poets,—and that such love scandals are matters of fate as

every thing else, so that the ends of justice are better met with by

watching or locking up the boy than punishing the offender. As

"Abdul Qadir has related the story himself, we might feel inclined to

give him the credit of being an unbiassed historian who will even relate

events to his own disadvantage. He certainly might have suppressed

it ; but the story is related as a ‘ dreadful event,’ and deals more with

the thrashing and the wounds he got than with the crime itself. _

Later, in 989, when he was forty-two years old, “Abdul Qadir once ~

more experienced the power of love (II, p. 297); and though he

wilfully absented himself from Court, in order to be near the beloved

boy, the affair was more platonic, and ended ina few ghazals and an

often repeated desire of dying during a meeting with the beloved.

* [.e., that when a man dreams of death, it signifies life. The study of

dream books is as profitable as the study of the proverbs of a nation. If we

compare the interpretations which different nations attach to one and the same ~

dream, we discover most curious coincidences and contrasts indicating a differ-

ence in national character. Lithographed Khwdbndmahs command a mos

extensive sale in the bazars of India, ~

1869. ] Badaont and his Works. 125

Whilst recovering from his wound, ’Abdul Qadir witnessed the

total conflagration, in 979, of the town of Baddon.

Towards the end of 981, ’Abdul Qadir fell out with his old patron,

Husain Khan, in whose service he had been for nine years (II, 172).

He does not state the cause of the disagreement ; but to judge from

his remarks, he felt himself wronged. Husain Khan in vain asked

Badaoni’s mother to intercede for him: her son had made up his

mind to go to Court, and thus carry out the plan which he had made

before entering Husain Khan’s service.

"Abdul Qadir was introduced to Akbar by Jalaluddin Qirchi, a

commander of Five Hundred, and a personal friend of the emperor, and

by Hakim ’Ain ul mulk, one of the Court Doctors. “ As in those days,”

says Badaoni, “‘ knowledge wasa marketable commodity, my merearrival

at Court procured me His Majesty’s favorable notice. He made me

at once join a disputation which was going on among some learned

men ‘that beat the drum of profundity, and in their pride, care for

no one.’ His Majesty watched me closely. With the help of God,

my force of character, my subtle understanding, and youthful boldness,

gained the victory. The emperor praised me very much, and remarked

that I was the man for Haji Ibrahim of Sarhind. As His Majesty

wished to see the Haji defeated in argument, he appointed me as

opponent. The manner in which I acquitted myself, entirely satisfied

the emperor. But Shaikh ’Abdunnabi, the renowned Cadr of the

realm, disliked me, as I had not consulted him before my presentation

at Court. But when, during the discussion, he saw me placed on the

opposite side, he did according to the proverb, ‘He who has been

bitten by a serpent, will eat opium,’ and gradually allowed his dislike

to change to friendliness.”

Immediately after "Abdul Qadir’s introduction at Court, Abulfazl

was presented to the emperor. ’Abdul Qadir hated and envied

Abulfazl from his first appearance at Court; he must have known

him in the house of his father who was their teacher, and may have

looked upon him asa younger school comrade. The high opinion

which Akbar had formed of ’Abdul Qadir’s learning and disputational

powers, was transferred to Abulfazl, who not only possessed ’Abdul

Qadir’s learning, but the boldness of thought and breadth of opinion

which dazzled the Court, and excited the jealousy and envy of. the

’Uiamas.

126 Baddont and his Works. [ No. 3,

~The mistake which ’Abdul Qadir made in the very beginning, and

which he would not rectify, though even advised by Akbar himself,

consisted in this, that he preferred for his services a grant of land

(madad 1 ma dash) to having his name entered on the list of the army

(ddgh kardan). These were the two roads for young, ambitious men at

the time of Akbar. But ‘joining the army’ had in those days a

different meaning from what it now has. <A civil service did not exist :

every servant of the government, or rather every servant of the king,

was on the rolls of the army, and though perhaps in civil employ,

was liable to field service, and had to keep up a contingent of horses

and beasts of burden, which at stated times were mustered by Akbar.

The custom then obtained to brand the animals (ddgh kardan) at

each muster, after which the troopers got their pay from the

treasury, and the officers received their assignments on the revenue

of the districts where they were stationed. A young man, therefore,

on joining the service of the emperor, got a commission as Dahbashi

(commander of Ten), or as Bésti (commanded of Twenty), to which

offices salaries of Rs. 100 and Rs. 135, respectively, were attached.

Promotion was rapid and depended upon personal exertions. —

"Abul Qadir, however, did not care for the ‘ brand’ of the emperor.

Mir Sayyid Muhammad, the Mr ’ Adi of the empire, strongly advised

"Abdul Qadir to jointhearmy. ‘ Young man,” said he, “ do not run

after a grant of land, and do not submit to the insolence of the Cadrs

(IIL, p. 75). Take the brand of the emperor; see only how grand

and proud His Majesty’s officers are.’’ “‘ As I would not listen,” said

"Abdul Qadir, subsequently, “I had to see what 1 saw and had to —

suffer what I suffered.” . |

Abulfazl at once submitted to the dégh ; and whilst "Abdul Qadir, —

when he wrote his history, had to struggle hard for the retention of

the one thousand bég’hahs of land which Akbar had granted him, his —

younger school comrade was prime minister of India, and was in

receipt of a salary of Rs. 14,000 per mensem.

About a year after his introduction to Akbar, ’Abdul Qadir ‘on

_ account of the beauty of his voice,’ was appointed Court Imam for ~

Wednesdays (II, pp. 206, 226). As such, like the Imams of the ~

other six days, he had to be present at the five daily prayers. The

Eunuch Daulat Hazir, whose duty it was to call Abdul Qadir, when

1869. ] Badéoni and his Works. 129

the people were ready for prayer (igdmat), appears to have given him

much annoyance. ‘ After having been appointed Imam,” he says,

“His Majesty told me to join the army; and giving me an

inconsiderable sum of money for an outfit, he ordered me to take a

Bisté ship, and to bring the regulated number of horses to muster.

Shaikh Abulfazl, who had lately joined Court, and who, to use

Shibli’s phrase with respect to Junaid [two celebrated saints], had

come out of the same oven as I, accepted at once, cunning and time-

serving as he was, the military career. He brought his horses to

muster, and shewed himself so officious, that he ultimately received

an apppointment as Duhazari, and was made minister of the empire.

But inexperienced and simple as I was, I could not bring myself to

join the army, and thought of the verse which a Sayyid of Inja [Mir

Jaméluddin Husain] had said when in similar circumstances, ‘ You

make me join a contingent, and appoint me to a command of Twenty.

Good God, if my mother saw me in this wretched plight !’ My wish

was to be content with a grant of land which the emperor might

bestow upon me as a means of livelihood; I thought of quietly

retiring from the bustle of the Court, and passing my life in study and

independence.* * * But this wish has not been fulfilled. In the

month of Shawwéal 983, I applied for leave, which was not granted.

His Majesty said he would exempt me from military duties, and gave

me about one thousand b¢g’hahs of land. This was at that time the

maximum allowed to such as applied for grants, and corresponded

to the salary of a Commander of Twenty; but on account of the

unwillingness of the Cadr |’Abdunabi] and the wretchedness of the

present hard times I could not get more. Uufortunately the thousand

big’hahs were described in my grant as madad «1 ma@dsh [not as a Jager,

which is given for services at Court |; and as on several occasions I re-

presented that it was impossible, on so small a grant, to live constantly

at Court, His Majesty promised to let me have an increase on the

military list. Shaikh ’Abdunnabi, the Qadr, told me plainly that he

had never seen a man of my class getting so large a grant of land.

The promised assistance from the military list has, however, remained

up tothe present time [1005] buried in the will of God, though

twenty-two years have elapsed. Times have now altered; and

though once or twice[ hada present, His Majesty’s promise was a

128 Badioni and his Works. [No. 3,

beautiful mrage. My attendance at Court has brought me no profit,

and I look forward to an act of God’s mercy, to get rid of the awkward

fetters which have fallen on my neck.”

The part which ’Abdul Qadir took in the religious discussions

held by Akbar at Fathptr Sikri, has been noticed in my translation

of the Aint Akbari, (pp. 171 to 179). Though his argumentative

skill raised him in the eyes of the emperor, Abdul Qadir, in the

pride of his success, forgot that he challenged his own set, and was

actively working against his own advantages; and when after the

downfall of the ’Ulamés in 987 (AZn,. pp. 186, 187), and the res-

umption by Akbar of nearly all grants of madad i ma dsh tenures

throughout the whole empire, Abdul Qadir was allowed to retain his

thousand biy’hahs, he owed his luck more to the generosity of Akbar,

who never forget an old servant, and to the good will of Faizi and

Abulfazl, his old school comrades, than to distinguished services of

his own.

In 983, Abdul Qéadir once more met with old patron, Husain

Khan, who had been brought to Fathptr Sikri dangerously wounded

on one of his customary expeditions. The wound was badly treated,

and would not heal up, dysentery (is-hdl « habid) having acceded, to

which the hero succumbed (II, p. 228). In the beginning of 984,

"Abdul Qadir joined an expedition against Rana Kika, whose strong-

holds, Gogandah and Konbhalner, were to be attacked by Rajah

Man Singh. When the expedition started from Ajmir, where Akbar

had visited the tomb of the Saint Mu’in, “Abdul Qadir accompanied

for a short distance some of the courtiers that took part in the

expedition. ‘As I felt much inclination,’ says he, “to join an

expedition against Infidels, I returned, and reported myself to Shaikh

’Abdunnabi, and asked him to obtain for me the permission of the

emperor to go to the scene of war. Though he had no objection,

he left the matter to his headman, Sayyid ’Abdurrastl; and as he

delayed to accede to my wishes, I applied to Naqib Khan, whom I

looked upon as my brother. At first, he was unwilling, and said,

‘Tf the emperor had not appointed a Hindi* as Commander, I would

* The jealousy of the Muhammadan courtiers was always roused when a —

Hindi was appointed toa high command, Even when Todar Mall, in 971,

was appointed to assist Muzafiar’Ali, then minister of finance, the Muham-

madan_ courtiers, in a body, complained to Akbar, and asked the emperor, to

1869. ] Baddoni and his Works. 129

have been the very first to apply for permission to go.’’ I replied

that I looked upon the emperor as the Commander, and had nothing

to do with Man Singh; but [had resolved to go. One day, when His

Majesty sat ona high dais in the tomb of Mu’in i Chishti,* to

which a ladder was attached, Naqib Khan mentioned my request.

’ asked the emperor. ‘‘ How can he go?’ Na-

“Ts he not an Imém,’

qib Khan replied that I was anxious to join a religious expedition,

whereupon His Majesty called me and asked whether I was in

earnest. I said, I was; and when the emperor enquired after my

reason, I replied, ‘‘ I wish to make my black whiskers red [with the

blood of infidels] in Your Majesty’s service.” ‘‘ You may go,” said

Akbar, ‘and bring me the news of victory.” After this he

fell into a reverie, and then prayed devoutly a Muéchah [the open-

ing chapter of the Qoran]. But when from within the dais I

tried to shew my gratefulness by touching the feet of His Majesty,

he drew them back; but he called me as I returned from the office of

the Diwan, and giving me a handful of Ashrafés (goldmuhurs)—in

all fifty-six,—he bade me adieu. Qn taking leave from Shaikh ’Abdun-

nabi, who in those days had become my well-wisher and had over-

come the dislike which he had formerly taken to me, he exhorted me

not to forget to include him in my prayer before battle ; for accord-

ing to a genuine tradition, the Prophet had said that the battle line

was the place where man had his prayers heard. I also asked the

Shaikh to read a Fatihah for me. I then got my horse ready and

set out with a few friends whose thoughts and plans were similar to

mine.”

‘“‘ The expedition from the first to the last, was successful. I took

the news of victory to Fathptr Sikri, as also the famous elephant of

Rana Kika, which to capture had been one of the objects of the

expedition.” |

Towards the end of 984, ’Abdul Qadir fell ill; but he afterwards

joined Akbar at Dipalpar in Malwah, and accompanied him, in Rajab

remove Todar Mall. ‘“ Have you not each,” said Akbar, “a Hindi manager

on your estates? Why do you complain, if Ido as youdo?’ Bad. II, 96.

In another piace, Baddoni says, “The Hindiis are indeed mighty fellows; the

soil belongs to them, and they have half the army.”

* The great veneration in which Akbar held this saint, explains the inserip-

tion yd mwin, O helper! which we find so often on his coins.

130 Baddont and his Works. [No. 3,

985, to Ajmir (p. 251). The emperor, at that time, allowed several

courtiers to go to Makkah. ’Abdul Qadir also applied ; but Akbar

made his permission dependent upon that of Badaoni’s mother, who

naturally refused to let her only son and supporter go. On returning

to Dihli, "Abdul Qadir heard at Rew4ri that one of his wives had been

delivered of a son, to whom the Emperor gave the curious name of

’Abdul Hadi. The words Ya Hédi, O Guide, were at that time fre-

quently on Akbar’s lips.* But as the child died six months later,

Abdul Qadir took leave and went to Baséwar. Though he overstayed

his leave, he was let off without punishment. On his return to Fath-

pur, in 986, he presented the Emperor a short work entitled K7itib-

ulahddis, on the excellence of expeditions against infidels and the

importance of practising archery. This book was ’Abdul Qadir’s first

work ; for the translation of the At’harban, which, at Akbar’s re-

quest, he had commenced as early as 983, had not been continued.

‘The discussions on religious subjects were in the meantime con- —

tinued at Fathptir Sikri with increasing zeal, and took a heretical

character. In fact from 986 ’Abdul Qadir ceased to look upon Akbar

asa Muslim. He says in a remarkable passage (p. 255)—perhaps the

most ‘hostile’ in his whole history—‘‘ His Majesty till now [986]

‘had shewn every sincerity, and had diligently been searching for

“truth. But his education had been much neglected, and surrounded

‘6 as he was by men of low and heretic principles, he had been forced to

“ doubt the truth of Islam. Fallingfrom one perplexity into the other,

“he lost sight of his real object, the search of truth ; and when the

“strong embankment of our clear law and excellent faith (millat a

‘“daizd) had once been broken through, His Majesty grew colder and

“colder, till after the short space of five or six years not a trace of

‘¢ Muhammadan feeling was left in his heart. Matters then became

“ different.”

’Abdul Qadir from now felt uncomfortable at Court. The ’Ulamas

to whose downfall he had contributed, were gradually banished to

Bengal and Bhakkar; the Court was full of rabid Shi’ahs who

openly in the State hall reviled the companions of the Prophet, and

with heretical sophists who sneered at Muhammad, and turned th

* This passage has been translated by Sir H. Elliot, Indea, p. 247,

+ Vide Xin translation, p, 105, note 1,

1869. | Badioné aad his Works. 131

Emperor’s head with mysticism and pantheism. ’Abdul Qadir there-

fore withdrew to the background, and performed on darbér days the

customary ornish (or salutation) from a distance. He used to take

his place at the door ‘ where the shoes are left,’ apparently an in-

different looker-on, but mourning in his heart for the contempt which

Akbar and many of his grandees evinced for everything Islamitic.

In 987, ’Abdul Qadir had another addition to his family. He

called his son Muhiuddin (reviver of the faith), without consulting

the Emperor. In the same year he nearly lost his thousand big’hahs.

Akbar, as related in the Ain (p. 270) had been busy in resuming the

Sayirghi lands of the ’Ulamas, and had just deposed ’Abdunnabi,

the Cadr of the realm, upon whom we may look as the last Cadr of

tha Moghul Empire in India.* He personally inspected the docu-

ments detailing the grants held by the ’Ulam4s, who had been ordered

to come to Court. ’Abdul Qadir also was examined by the Emperor

at Ajmir (Ramazén, 987). “I think,” said Akbar, “ his grant speci-

fies the condition under which it is held.” Qazi’Ali, by whom

"Abdul Qadir had been taken before His Majesty, replied, the condi-

tion was, that he should attend at Court. ‘‘Then has he been

ailing,” rejoined the emperor, ‘‘ that he has been so often away with-

out leave?” ‘ No,” said Ghazi Khan, one of the courtiers that were

present, ‘‘ but his good luck has been ailing.’ Several others also

interceded for him and desired the Emperor to leave him in possession

of his grant, though the Imamship was abolished ; for at that time the

five daily prayers were no longer openly observed at Court, and

"Abdul QAdir’s services were no longer required. When Shahbaz

Khan observed, “ He is always in attendance on Your Majesty,”

Akbar said, ‘‘ I force no one to serve me ; should he not wish to re-

main in attendance, let half the grant be resumed.” As soon as ’Abdul

Qadir heard this, he made a saldém, as if he was pleased with

the decision ; but the Emperor was vexed and turned away his head.

As the courtiers, however, again advised him not to let him go, Akbar

issued no order, and ’Abdul Qadir retained his thousand big’hahs.

* Historians have hitherto paid no attention to Akbar’s gigantic struggle

with the office of the Cadr. In this point, he resembles such Roman Catholic kings

as successfully interfered with the property of the Church and monasteries. The

Jaunpiy Rebellion of A. H. 987 (Bad. p. 276) arose from Akbar’s interference

with religious matters and the almost ruthless manner with which he cancelled

_ the grants of the Mullas.

132 — Badsoné and his Works. [No. 3,

Dissatisfied as he was with the religious innovations spreading at

Court, poverty compelled him to remain with the emperor. But in

989, he again absented himself ; and if it had not been for Abulfazl

and Khwajah Nizamuddin Ahmad, the historian, he would have been

dismissed. "Abdul Qadir says (p. 296)—“ On the fifth Zi Qa’dah,

989, His Majesty returned from Kabul to Agrah. I had been absent

from Court, and had stayed for a whole year at Basdéwar, fettered by

a deep attachment (ta’allug « khatire ’azim,) a clear dispensation

(mazhare tém) of the Almighty. Little caring for the world, I passed

my time in spiritual independence; but I suffered much grief and

sorrow. [This is the love affair alluded to on p. 124.] At last, on

the sixth of the same month, I went to Fathptr and paid my respects,

when His Majesty asked Abulfazl why I had not accompanied him

to the Panjab.” ‘‘ He belongs,” said Abulfazl, “to the grant-

holders,” and 1 was let off. But before this, when the emperor was

in Kabul, he asked one day Cadr Jahan to present all grantholders

present in the camp, and draw up a list of such as were absent.

When my name was read out among the absentees, Khwajah Niz4m-

addin Ahmad, with whom the year before I had become very intimate,

very kindly reported me sick, which counted as present. And in

reality, attendance on a person, before whom one stands in hope and

fear, is worse than sickness. But the Khwajah wrote me letter after

letter, asking me to go at least as far as Lahor to meet his Majesty,

as Lhad been otherwise neglectful; and he reminded me that it was

important to adhere to the formalities of the world. But an hour

spent with the beloved appeared to me better than eternal life. What

did I care about wisdom of going the ways of the world, and the —

interest and the disadvantage of others? I put my affairs into the —

hands of God; for after all, He does what He wishes.

Leave all thy cares to God, and live happy,

If thy accuser has no mercy, He will have compassion,

* * * And even now [1004], after seventeen years, the remem-

brance of his lovely shape has not vanished from my heart. I cry as

often as I think of him. Would that I had died in the wretchedness of —

my love grief!” , .

In the meantime, Akbar’s Divine Faith’ (dén ¢ iléhé) had made

much progress, and ’Abdul Qadir who had no longer to lead pray-

1869. ] Baddoni and his Works. 133

ersin the Mosque of Fathptir, was commissioned to execute literary

tasks; but inasmuch as these orders were connected with the reli-

gious views of the emperor, they were unwillingly and hesitatingly

performed. The first task which was given him, was to assist in the

composition of a historical work, to which Akbar beforehand had

given the title of Zarikh i Alfi,* or History of the Millennium. The

year 1000 A. H. was near, and Akbar had been flattered into the

belief that he was the QOdhib 4 Zamdn, or Man of the Millennium,

through whose agency Muhammadanism was to be totally changed

[ Ain translation, p. 190]; and the object of the new historical work

was to represent the religion of the Prophet as a thing of the past.

The coins of the realm even were to announce this fact, and their inscrip-

tions exhibited the mysterious word a//, or millennium. But as Akbar

had engaged nearly every literary man at court to take part in the

grand work, the narrative was tinged with the heretical and Shiitic

prejudices of the joint authors; and ’Abdul Qadir, who was a staunch

Sunni, was soon called to account for certain facts which he had re-

presented as having happened during the reigns of the early Caliphs.

The Shi’ah account, it is well-known, of the events of that period

differs remarkably from that of the Sunnis; and Akbar who rejoiced

in any record which reflected discredit on Muhammadanism and the

deeds and lives of the prophet and the apostles of Islam, naturally

preferred Shi’ah accounts, soon relieved ’Abdul Qadir of his portion

of the historical work which was to appear “ By Authority,” and

entrusted the execution of it to Mulla Ahmad of T’hat’hah who,

from all accounts, indulged openly at court in the most vehement

abuse (sabb o tabarré), which Shi’ahs cannot and will not suppress

as often as they hear the names of Omar and Aba Bakr. At a later

period, however, [in 1002] ’Abdul Qadir, after the murder of the

- Mulla,} was ordered to revise the whole work after its completion;

but knowing the propensities of the emperor, he limited his corrections

to style and arrangement, without altering the party-coloured state-

ments of the Shi’ah joint authors.

* Vide Hlliot’s Index, p. 144.

+ A Shiah once told me that ’Omar appeared to them more ridiculous than

Abt Bakr. They often use pkrases which occasion mirth and laughter among

themselves, though a Sunni would not know what they are laughing at,

{ Vide Badaoni, II, p. 392.

134 Badéont and his Works. [No. 8,

Nor was “Abdul Qadir more fortunate in his translation into Persian

of the Mahabharat. Akbar even called him a Hardmkhur (sweeper)

and a Shalghamkhur (turnip-eater), ‘‘ as if that was the share due to

him for his labours,’ (Ain translation, p. 105, note 1.) At the

same time, however, he was engaged in writing a Persian translation

of the Ramayan, which after four years’ labour he finished. In

Jumiada I, 997, he presented his work, after a second revision, to the

emperor. ‘‘I had put,” he says, “‘ at the end of the translation the

following verse by Hafiz—

I have finished my tale, who will take it to the Sultan P

I have worried my soul, who will tell it the Beloved ?

And this-pleased His Majesty very much. He asked me how many

juz [one juz—two sheets of paper] there were? “ At first,” said I,

‘there were about seventy ; but after revising it, 1 got one hundred

and twenty.”* ‘‘ But you must write a preface to it,” replied the

emperor, ‘‘ according to the custom of authors.” But I had no in-

clination (intv’dsh) for it, as prefaces had to be written without the

usual laudation /na’t) of the prophet; so I shut my eyes, and did as if

IT assented. IJ take refuge with God against the consequences of com-

posing this black book [the Ramayan], which, like the book of my life,

is nothing but wretchedness. Relating the words of unbelievers, after

all, is not unbelief, and I earnestly denounce unbelief. * * * A

few days after, His Majesty was reminded that he owed me a present

for my translation. He said to Hakim Abulfath, “Just give him

this shawl here, and let him have a horse, and some money,’ and to

Shah Abulfath he said, ‘“‘I give you the whole of Baséwar as jagér,

and the grantholders there are also yours ;”

and mentioning my

name, he said, ‘“‘This man goes to Bad&éon; and having neither —

seen, nor heard any thing against him, I hereby transfer his grant

from Basdwar to Baddon.” * * * As soon as I received the farmdn

specifying my transfer, I took leave for twelve months, and went to

Badaon (p. 868).

This transfer, in 997, from Basdwar to Baddon is the cause why

"Abdul Qadir has been called Badaont, On his return, in 998, from

Badaon to Court, he met his friend the Historian Nizdmuddin —

* From the number of sheets which Baddoni presented, it may be inferred —

that the translation was an abstract of the contents of the Ramayan, not a

translation.

1869. |] Bad Joni and his Works. 135

Ahmad. During his leave, he intended to visit him in Gujrat,

because as early as 993, he had been invited by Nizdm, though he

was prevented by circumstances from accepting the invitation.

Not long after, Badaoni was again engaged in literary labours. “ The

emperor,’”’ he says, ‘‘had ordered me (p. 384) to re-write the

Persian translation of the History of Kashmir by Mullé Shah Mu-

hammad of Shahabad, a learned man well versed in argumentative

sciences and history. I was to write it in aneasy style. This I did,

and in the space of two months I presented my book, which was put

in His Majesty’s library to await its turn for reading.” This order

was connected, it appears, with Akbar’s stay in Kashmir, from the

2nd Jumada II to 2nd Zi Qa’dah, 997, when he returned by way of

Kabul in the beginning of 998.

After revising the History of Kashmir,* ’Abdul Qadir received a

portion of the Mw’ jam ui Buldan, which Akbar, at the recommenda-

tion of Hakim Humam, had given to ten or twelve people to trans-

late from Arabic into Persian. Besides Baddoni, there were Mulla

Ahmad of T’hat’hah, Qasim Beg, Shaikh Munawwar, &.+ These

translations were made at Fathptr Sikri, “the old Déwankhdinah

having been changed to a Maktabkhinah for the comfort of the trans-

lators” (p. 344). Badaoni finished his portion in a month, and pre-

senting it to the emperor, asked again for leave, which was _ hesitat-

ingly granted, though Nizémuddin represented that the leave was

necessary, as Badaéoni’s mother had just died. But Akbar did not

make him a present, as was usual on departure; ‘‘for Cadr Jahan,

who had been appointed Cadr of the empire, told me to perform

before the emperor the szjdah, or prostration; and when His Majesty

saw that I was unwilling to do so, he told the Cadr{ to let me off.

But he was annoyed, and would not give me anything.”

* No copies have, till now, turned up of either Shah Muhammad’s History

of Kashmir, or Badaoni’s revision. Abulfazl in the Ain (p. 106.) says that

Shah Muhammad translated it from Kashmiri into Persian.

_ + No copies appear to exist of the Persian translation of this valuable Geo.

graphical Dictionary. The Arabic text has lately been published, in eight

volumes, by Wiistenfeld at the cost of the Deutsche Morgenl. Gesellschaft.

This worthy Chief Justice set a bad example in this regard to pious

Muhammadans. Subsequently he became a member of Akbar’s ‘ Divine

Faith.’ He also held office under Jahangir, and was exempted from perform.

ing the prostration, ‘‘ because the Chief Justice of the empire could not well

| be forced to act against the law of the Prophet.” (Tuzuk.)

136 Badéonit and his Works. [No. 3,

"Abdul Qadir accompanied Nizamuddin to his jagir, the town of

Shamsabad, from where ill-health compelled him to go to Badaon.

Whether his ill-health continued or not, "Abdul Qadir again overstayed

his leave. He also appears to have taken away with him from Akbavr’s

library a copy of a book entitled Khzrad-afza, which he lost on

his way to Badéon; and though a collector of Salimah Sultan Begum

(one of Abbar’s wives)* reminded him several times of the book, and

his friends at court sent him several messages to Badéon, he was, as

he says, unable to go (p. 377).

This annoyed Akbar. He cancelled Baddoni’s grant, and ordered

him to repair to court, to answer for his conduct. Nizamuddin and

Abulfazl tried in vain to assuage the just anger of the Emperor.

During the time Badéoni enjoyed, at Court and in Shamsabad,

the company of Nizém, he commenced his polemical work en-

titled Najdturrashid, and his historical work entitled Muntakhab

uttawirtkh. Of the former work, the title of which contains the

Tartkh of its composition (999), I have seen two MSS. One—a bad

one—belongs to the Asiatic Society of Bengal; the other, a very

superior one—I extracted from a heap of ‘rubbish’ in the Delhi col-

lection of MSS. belonging to the Government. The extracts below

taken from this work, will shew that it is a valuable addition to our

knowledge of the religious questions which were discussed during the

tenth century of the Hijrah, and gives a complete account of the rise

of the Mahdawi sect, to which Badaoni, though not perhaps openly,

belonged.

* Vide Proceedings, Asiatic Society, Bengal, for August, 1869, p. 213, 1. 7,

and p. 215, 1, 11. Babar in his Wdqi’dt says that he had three daughters—

Gulrang Begum, Gulchihrah Begum, Gulbadan Begum (married to Khwajah

Khizr Khan, Bad.II, p. 14). The Tuzuwk « Jahdngiré (p. 113) and the Igbdl-

némah (p. 68) say that Salimah Sultan Begum was the daughter of Gulrukh

Begum, who was a daughter of Babar’s. Does this imply that Babar had fowr —

daughters? I consulted the two MSS. of the Madsirul Umaré which are in

the Society’s Library, of which one is so excellent and correct, that it could

be printed off without the assistance of other MSS.—an excellence rarely

found among Indian MSS.; in fact I suspect, the book is an autograph. This —

excellent MS. says that Salimah Sultan Begum was the daughter of Gulbarg ©

Begum, but the inferior MS. reads Gulrang Begum. Perhaps time will clear

up this confusion of names in the MSS. and our printed Historical texts. —

Vide my review of the Tuzuk, Iqgbalnémah, &c., in the Calcutta Review for Octo> —

ber, 1869, entitled ‘Jahangir’s Death.’ Iam convinced that as soon as the

existing MSS. sources of Indian History have been used up, we shall see how

limited and inaccurate our kuowledge of the history of this country really is,

as far as details are concerned,

— 1869.) Baddoni and his Works. 137

_ Deprived as he now was of his income, Baddoni was soon forced

to repent his carelessness and disobedience. He hastened to Akbar’s

camp at Bhambar, near the frontier of Kashmir, which he reached

during the last month of the year 999 (p. 883). “ Hakim Humaém,”’

he relates, ‘reported my arrival to His Majesty, and said, I

was anxious to pay my respects. The Emperor asked, how long I

had overstayed my leave. Humam said, for five months; and when

the Emperor enquired after the reason of my absence, the doctor said

that I had been ill, and that I had brought with me a representation

signed by several nobles of Baddon, and also a certificate by Hakim

’Ain ul Mulk of Dihbli.

His Majesty read through the papers, and said, ‘‘ No, this sickness

does not last five months.’’ He would not allow me to attend the

darbér. So I had to run about in the camp which the Emperor left

at Rahtaés in charge of Prince Danyal, whilst he himself went to

Kashmir. Lonely and sorry, disappointed and aggrieved as I was, I

read through the Hicgn « Hagin [a famous prayer book used all over

the Hast], and fortified myself by repeating daily the Qacidah i

Burdah till, at last, after five months when the Emperor returned

from Kashmir, matters began to look up. He had expressed the wish

to have a Persian translation of the great Historical work by Rashid,

entitled Jémi’, and some true and kindhearted friends, as Nizdmud-

din and others, mentioned privately my name to His Majesty, and I

was, at last, at Lahor allowed to attend at Court (17th Rabi’ I, 1000).”’

The state of Baddoni’s mind whilst ‘running about in Danyal’s

camp’, may be seen from Faizi’s letter of recommendation to Akbar,

which, however, arrived too late. Faizi, in Shawwal 999, had been

sent, ona political mission, to Rajah ’Ali Khan, ruler of Astr and

Burhanpir, and he had afterwards gone to Burhan ul Mulk of Ahmad-

nagar, to which place Badaoni, from Bhambar, had written, requesting

him to intercede in his behalf. Faizi’s reply was dated Jumada

I, 1000, at which time Badaoni was already restored. But ’Abdul

Qadir shewed Faizi’s letter at Lahor to Akbar; for he says that Akbar

ordered Abulfazl to enter the letter, which is a model of a letter of

recommendation, in the Akbarnamah.*

_* Badaoni also gives a copy of the letter under his biographical notice of

Faizi (111, 303). The letter has been (indifferently) translated by Sir H.

138 Badiont and his Works. [ No. 3,

The translation into Persian of the Jdémv’ 7 Rashidz, part of which

was done by Badaoni, was completed by other learned men of Akbar’s

Court under the ‘ superintendence’ (isticwab) of Abulfazl himself; but

unfortunately no copies of it appear to be now extant, which is much

to be regretted considering the comparative scarcity of MSS. of the

Arabic original. [Vide Morley’s Catalogue. ]

Badéoni was thus restored to favour and the possession of his

thousand big’hahs. It seems as if after his restoration, the religious

feeling which his past misfortunes and exclusion from Akbar’s Court

had called forth, had disappeared and given way to levity and spiri-

tual indifference. He may have found it necessary to assume a more

conciliating attitude towards the ‘heretics’ of the Court, and the

members of Akbar’s ‘ Divine Faith,’ who were in office and had partly

brought about his pardon. He may have imitated the example of

his friend NizA4muddin the historian, who, though a pious Muslim,

managed to rise higher and higher in Akbar’s favour by keeping his

religious views to himself. But whatever the real cause of this

inroad of worldliness may have been, Badaoni, towards the end

of 1002, repented and thought it necessary to enter the fact in his

history. ‘‘In this year,” he says (p. 395), “I was punished by suc-

cessive blows of misfortunes and lashes of adversity; but God

created in me a new spirit, and led me to repent of the-several wanton

pastimes in which I had indulged, and the crimes which I had fre-

quently committed against the orders of our Law. I acknowledge the

viciousness of my deeds.

Elliot, Index, p. 256. The words on p. 255, ‘ He (Shaikh Faizi) is commonly

called the “chief of Poets,’ but he was in fact a mere Poetaster’, are not in

Baddoni, neither in the printed edition, nor in the MS. which Elliot used. The

para. on p. 256 commencing, ‘ He had composed poetry for forty years, &c.’

conveys, in Elliot’s version, an impression very different from what Badaoni

intends to convey, and is diametrically opposed to another passage (II, 396)

where ’Abdul Qadir clearly says that ‘ Faizi’s Nal Damanis a Masnawi the like of ©

which, for the last three hundred years, no poet of Hindistan, after Mir Khusrau

of Dihli, has composed.’ Thesentence which Baddoni pronounces on Faizi’s

poetry—and every one who has read even portions of Faizi’s Diwan will

agree With him—is that he is somewhat frigid, and deficient in that soft

and plaintive sentimentalism of modern Persian Literature, compared with ©

which the Byronism of Hngland and the Wertherism of Germany are nothing. —

Faizi’s thoughts are grand and striking, and his language is classical de —

rigewr; but his poetry is so full of Shathiydt, Fakhriydt, and Kufriydt (vide

my ‘ Prosody of the Persians’), that “‘ every one admires but no one remembers

his verses.” The extracts selected by Abulfazl of his brother’s poetry in

the Ain (at the end of second book) fully bear out what Badaoni says, and —

explain why Badaont, though he censures, can yet warmly admire,

1869. | Badiont and his Works. 139

Oh that this frame of mind would last for ever—Alas!

And I saw a good omen in the word ¢stigémat (purity of intentions),

by which I expressed the ¢dérékh (1002) of my repentance. Shaikh

Faizi also [who evidently felt amused at Badaoni’s ‘ confessions’ |

favoured me with the following Arabic verse (metre Mutagdrib)—

Lagad taba Shaikht ’anithaubaté*

Wa tartkhuht sibiquttaubaté |

“My friend, the Shaikh, has now turned from his wickedness.”

‘And the words Sdbiquttaubate (the old repenter) give the térikh.”

Badaoni adds, by way of explanation, (metre Miujtass)—

yeh y bys jtyT ey ble 5 an) (ag AR0 9 us? Kiso} ere jf Ad yy

The love of wine and sweethearts has vanished from my brain.

And songs, and drums, and lyres, ‘‘ enchant my heart no more.”

Faizi in his letter of recommendation states that Badéoni was well

up in the melodies of Hindustan and Persia (naghmah ¢ hind o wilayat)

and knew how to play chess, two-handed and four-handed (Labir

0 gaghtr), occupations which even now-a-days are looked upon as

unlawful by orthodox Muhammadans, and which form the never-

ending theme of discussion at their social meetings. In another

passage also (III, p. 239), alluding to his former habit of composing

love poems, he says that such poetry was current in the days before

the Prophet, and that sincere repentance was better than such oc-

cupations.

Badaoni’s ‘repentance’ was also connected with the loss of two of

his friends. In the beginning of 1002, he buried Khwajah Ibrahim

Husain, an Ahadi, to whom he was much attached (p. 394). The

Khwajah, according to a statement by Bakhtawar Khan,} was a cali-

graphist of great renown, and had been a pupil of Sultan Bayaztd,

poetically styled Mer Dawrt, whom Akbar had honoured with the

title of Katib ul Mulk. Buta heavier blow befell Badaoni in the

death, on the 23rd Cafar 1003, of his friend Nizémuddin, the his-

torian. ‘The fine passage which he devotes to the memory of his

friend and to his own sorrow, has been translated by EHlliot.{ The

* The final § counts as w, 400.

+ In the most interesting chapter of his Mir-dt ul’ A’lam, which contains

biographies of learned men, caligraphists, and poets. A

~ t Index, p.185. In Sir H. Elliot's extract from the Maasir ul Umara

containing the biography of Nizimuddin, p, 181, 1, 11 from below, read, Kart

140 Badéont and his Works. [No. 3,

death of these two friends so affected Badéoni, that he resolved not

to cultivate a new friendship with any other man and to look upon

his bereavement as a warning from God. He says (p. 397, metre

Khafif)—

eel yet gh Belg dilme® So anol Lwg ds, Bey where

Thou art anxious to listen to a good sermon:

The death of thy friend is a sufficient warning.

A few months later, Badéoni again attracted Akbar’s attention.

Two days before the 10th Rajab, when the Emperor celebrated the

fortieth nawriéz since his accession, on which day promotions used to

be made, Akbar “sat at the window (jharokah/ of the State hall, and

called me; and turning to Abulfazl, he said, ‘‘He is a heavenly-

minded, young man, with the air of the Cufi about him; but he is

such a bigoted lawyer, that no sword is powerful enough to cut

through the neck vein of his bigotry.”” Shaikh Abulfazl said, ‘‘ In

which book has he made the remark of which Your Majesty spoke ?”

“Tn this very Razmndmah,’’* replied Akbar; “and last night I asked

Naqib Khan about it.” ‘“‘ Then,”’ said Abulfazl, ‘‘ he must have been

very careless.”” I now thought it necessary to go close up to the —

window, and represented to His Majesty that I had strictly adhered

to the duties of a translator; I had put down without alteration

whatever the Pandits had told me, and I was ready to bear the conse-

quences, should it be proved that I had put in words of my own.

Shaikh Abulfazl took my part, and the Emperor remained silent.”

‘““The passage in my translation of the Mahabharat to which His

Majesty objected, contains the last words of a dying Hindu sage, who

advises all near him to give up carelessness, and only think of God:

men should be wise and should not trust to knowledge acquired, but

to good deeds done by them. Learning by itself was vain; men should

refrain from doing wicked actions, and ought to believe that every deed

would once meet with its reward—after which words I had put the

following hemistich (metre Ramal)—

Od Se BaF 52 9 eeyat Ure _,2

for Kathri, and on p. 1838, 1.2, read Shdham ’Ali for Shaham ’Ali. Niz4mi-

finished his book in 1001, which Badaoni expressed by the word psrles (1001),

—a very happy tdrikh.

* Akbar had often the Mahabharat, or Razmndmah, ashe ealled it read out to

him. From the above passage it seems that Baddoni in the portion which he —

translated, had entered, or was accused to have entered, a remark ——s to.

the religious feelings of the Emperor.

1869. | Baddoné and his Works. 141

Every deed has its reward, every act its recompense.

“These words [in italics] His Majesty thought referred to Islamitic

notions of judgment, the day of resurrection, &c., in which he did not be-

lieve ; for the transmigration of souls was his pet-idea. Hencehe suspect-

ed me of having smuggled into the text something which he called fa-

qahat, ‘ Lawyer’s stuff.’ But I impressed upon some of the Emperor’s

friends that every Hindu believes in rewards and punishments; in fact,

they say that when a man dies, the book in which his deeds have been

entered, is taken by the angel of death to the king of Justice, who

compares his good deeds with his wicked actions, and then says,

“Let this man choose!’ The man is then asked whether he wishes

first to be carried to paradise as a reward for his good actions, and

then to hell for his bad deeds, or reversely. When the period of

requital is over, he is sent back to the world and receives a body in

| accordance with the excellence of his former deeds; and so it goes on

till by and by, he is freed from transmigration.

“In this way I managed to get out of this difficulty.”

“On the day of the Sharaf [nineteen days after the Nawriz}, His

| Majesty said spontaneously to Cadr Jahan, ‘‘ Do you think, I can ap-

| point Badéoni to the Mutawalliship of the tomb of Mu’in i Chishtt

at Ajmir?” The Cadr expressed his approval of this arrangement ; and

for two or three months afterwards, I attended every darbdr in hopes

of getting the appointment, by which I thought I would get rid of the

miseries of Court life. I also wrote a few chapters and presented

| them, but got no answer. Soon after I was obliged to apply for

| leave * *; and when towards the end of Ramazan, (adr Jahan asked

His Majesty for orders regarding my leave, the Emperor said, ‘‘ He

| has lots of work here, and I shall point it out to him from time to

time. You better get another man for the vacancy [in Ajmir.] A

few days later, His Majesty said to Abulfazl, ‘‘ He would do very well

}in Ajmfr, it is true; but his translations give me satisfaction, and

‘I do not like to let him go. Abulfazl and others agreed with the

Emperor. On that very day I was told to complete the Bahrul

: Asmar, a book containing Hindi stories which at the command of

| Zainul ’Abidin,* a former king of Kashmir, had been partly trans-

| ™ No copies of this curious work appear to be now extant. Zainul ’Abidin

+ Was a contemporary of Sultan Buhlol Lodi and Mirza Abi Sa’id. Abulfazl says

142 Badéont and his Works. [No. 8;

lated into Persian. I translated the new portions within the next five

months, all in all about sixty juz. Soon after, the Emperor called —

me once to his sleeping apartment, and asked me the whole night till —

dawn about these stories. He also ordered me to re-write the first

volume of [Zainul ’Abidin’s] Bahrul Asmar, because it was written

in ancient Persian, no longer spoken, and told me to keep the MS.

of the portion which I had made. J performed the Zaminbos, and —

commenced with heart and soul the new work. His Majesty also gave

me ten thousand Muradi tangas [struck when Murad was born] and

a horse as a present.’ (p. 402.)

Thus Badéoni, in all his Muslim pride, had to temporise, and

performed the prostration.

Towards the end of the same year (1003), “Abdul Qadir had to

mourn over the death of two other friends, Shaikh Ya’qub of Kashmir, ©

known as poet under the name of (2,4 QOairafé, and Hakim ’Ain

ul Mulk, his old patron, who died at Hindiah, his jagir. ¢

In the beginning of 1004, on the 10th Cafar, Faizi also died. The —

circumstances attending his death form the conclusion of Badaoni’s

History. |

Our hero soon followed his heretical friend to the grave. Akbar

may have granted him the leave which, in 1003, he was unwilling to

give. He died at Badaon before the end of 1004, at the age of fifty-

seven years.

The following particulars regarding Badaoni’s death are of interest.

The Khizanahi ’Amirah,* a valuable MS. collection of biogra-

in the Ain that he had several works translated from Sanscrit into Persian—

an additional example of attention paid by a Muhammadan ruler to Sanscrit

literature. Vide Hiliot’s Index, p. 259, where on 1,18 we have to read Mullé

Sheri for Mulla Shabsi. Soalso on p. 251, of which the extract relating to the

Mahabharat is so badly translated, that I cannot bring myself to believe that —

it was translated by Sir H. Elliot himself. For a correct translation, vide my

Ain, p. 105, note 1. s

As I mentioned the name of Sultan Buhlol Lodi, I may state that the correct

spelling is Buhlal. But in India, Buhlil is generally pronounced Buhlél, with

an o; in our Histories, the name is generally spelled Behlol. Buhliél is Arabic, —

and means graceful. eS

* MSS. of this work are rare. I possess a very excellent, almost faultless

copy, which I lately bought, together with a copy of tha Sarw 7 Azdd, another —

similar though earlier work by the same author. Besides these two Tadzki-

rahs, there exists another by the same author entitled Lass oy Yadi baiza, which ~

was written before the Swrwi Azdd. The latter work, the Sarw, contains valua-

ble materials for a chronicle of the town of Balgram, and extracts from (an- —

cient) Hindi poetry. *&

1869. | Badéoni and his Works. 143

phical and critical notices on the lives and works of Persian Poets by

Ghulim ’Ali of Balgram, as poet known under the name of A’zdd, has

a short notice on ’Abdul Qadir of Badaon, in which the following

sentence occurs—

gt By lo cunt jolUlous a DSl& 85 (pod! tye} Galo

Abs) It y Qi! Kine

“The author of the book, entitled Samrat ulquds, who was Badaoni’s

pupil, says that “Abdul Qadir died in 1004.”

The following much more valuable passage, translated into Urdti

from the Mukhtacir 2 sairt Hindistin by Hakim Muhammad Wahid-

ullah, was very kindly forwarded to me by Mr. A. S. Harrison, Bareilly

College.

aed Kine ZL shdoly ss5| jes gady csyols als Fae

dat os? use dL ycls BEI yldy gut d="La aly wld, ui usr”

% Abs

are) JIS! See whe wy Nt ted 9 pI, d sol

ope JR 37 csyols sy SEQ Sao} yo 3

% (gd & zl mele ¥9

a ae Kiwo

‘Abdul Qadir of Badaon, poetically styled Qédirt, was the Court Imam

of the Emperor Akbar. He died in 1004, A. H. The poet Sheftah

has expressed the Zdrzkh of his death in the following verse (metre

Khefif)—

He is a poet of fine language and fine thoughts.

When he left this world,

Sheftah said under tears,

* Alas! Qadiri is dead.”

This is an example ofa Tarikh batarig 7 ta’miyah. The third

Micra literally translated is—Sheftah took from the beginning of bay

(tears), i.¢., Sheitah added the letter Alif, with which ashk begins, to

the numerical value of the letters of the last migra’, which gives 1003

+ 1 — 1004, provided we count 487 as 1-+ 5, and not as SII, «4. @.,

14+1-+5.

The Urdu pamphlet, entitled Térikh 1 Badaon, by Rai Bakhta-

war Singh, Sub-Judge of Gorak’hpur (Bareily, 1868,) gives on p. 83

_ the following particulars—

BoA (30 Fol en wy lRadrad os, AS 4S esi oy soars LY,.0

eo olga e9 dao} eu Wai Kish shy0 csigalor es (§) eur

(5? Epderyzlov cls pgpiks

144 Baddont and his Works. [No. 3

“? Abdul Qadir of Badéon, famous for his Tdrikh ¢ Badéont. His

tomb is close to the mangoe garden which lies in the environs of

’Atapur, in the district of Baddon.”’

Mr. Harrison informs me that a gentleman in Badaon has been

at some pains to discover among the numerous and decaying tombs

in ’Atépir the grave which encloses the remains of ’Abdul Qadir.

But though his efforts have not been successful, it would be any thing

but antiquarian sentimentality to continue the search for the resting-

place of a man who has left us, if not exactly the fullest, yet the

most original and independent history of the Great Emperor.

The conclusion of this paper will follow in an early issue. It con-

tains extracts from Badéoni’s Najdturrashid regarding the Mahdawt

Sect, in connection with which I shall make a few remarks on

his character. Then follow extracts from the Wuntakhab. My inten-

tion at first was to give in this paper Badadoni’s remarks on Akbar’s

religion; but as the extracts have since been inserted in my Ain ©

translation, I think it will be more advantageous to collect such

passages as contain historical information not to be found in the

Akbarnamah, the Tabaqat i Niz4mi, and Firishtah. In collecting

the original information from Badaoni’s work, I have been guided

by the excellent work, entitled Sawdnih 7 Akbari, a modern compila-—

tion by Amir Haidar Husain of Balgram, the only critical work

among the native Histories of India. JI cannot in sufficiently strong

terms recommend this book to Historians: it is a work that ought to”

have been long ago printed or translated.

The next article concludes with notes on Badaoni’s style, the text

of the Muntakhab,* and a valuable collection of Lectiones Variantes,

which Mr. J. ©. Lyall, C. 8., Balandshahr, kindly placed at the dis-

posal of the Society. |

Corrections &c. Page 110, 7. 13 from below, and a few other places,

read Mirishtah, for Farishtah.—Page 116, last line. Add, ‘since writing

the above, a copy of the Madsir i ’Alamgiri has been bought by the

Society. —Page 117, 7. 4. I am somewhat doubtful whether Badéoni means”

this Todah, or the Zodah Bhim in the Sirkar of A’grah, and not very far

from Basawar, where B. spent his youth ; wide Ain text, p. 356.—Page 120,

i. 1, read Patiydli.—Page 127, . 3 from below, read [1004,] for [1005. |

* Hspecially the very fair edition printed by Nawalkishor, Lucknow, 1864.

1869.] Zhe Nineteenth Book: of the Gestes of Prithiray. 145

The Nineteenth (1) Book of the Gestes of Prithirdj by Chand

Bardai, entitled “ The Marriage with Padmévati,” literally trans-

lated from the old Hindi by Joun Beames, Hsq., B. C. 8.

I have selected this spirited poem as a first specimen of translation

from the Prithiraja Rasa, and it must be regarded solely as an essay

in translation. Chand’s language is archaic, his dialect is as much

Panjabi as Hindi, dating from a time prior to the definite separation

of the two languages, his poetic licenses are numerous and daring, the

texts of the only two manuscripts I have yet had an opportunity of

thoroughly studying, are very corrupt, and I have no Pandit to help

me. I rely chiefly on my own resources. I have, however, used with

very valuable results, dictionaries of Panjabi, Sindhi and Gujarati, and

a glossary of the Marwari dialect. Still much remains uncertain and

conjectural, and I am open to any criticisms, and ready to admit that

I may have made mistakes where “‘ tantum difficile est non errare.”’

Book the Nineteenth.

Here begins the marriage with Padmavati.

Couplets (S181)

1. In the eastern land there is a fort, lord of forts,

Samud Sikhar, hard of access ;

There lives a victorious hero, lord of kings

Of Jadav race, strong-armed. (2)

2. With retinue, (8) horses, elephants, much land

And dignity of a Padshah (aifaata t ase)

A mighty lord to all his servants

With pomp and standards very splendid.

Poem (atam) -

3. With many (4) standards very splendid,

Song and music playing five times a day,*

Mounting ten thousand horses

With golden hoofs and jewelled trappings

A lord of countless elephants,

A valiant army thirty lakhs strong ;

* At his palace gate, as is the custom with Indian princes.

146

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiray.

A sole ruler wielding Siva’s bow,

Holding the earth in his sway.

Ten sons and daughters all told (5)

Chariots of beautiful colours very many,

Storehouses, countless millions of wealth

Had he, Padam Sen, the virtuous prince.

Padam Sen, the virtuous prince,

In his house was a wellborn dame,

From her breast a daughter sprung

Beauteous as a digit of the moon.

Fair as a digit of the moon,

Fairer than the whole sixteen digits ;

In her childish guise she rivalled the moon

When he has drunk the amrit juice.

No. 3,

Like a lotus expanding through love of the moon-dew (6)

She had stolen from the deer the glance of its eyes.

She had [the beauty of] the diamond, the parrot and the bimb.

A pearl from head to foot, glittering like a serpent.

Her gait [was like] a prince, an elephant, a lion, or a swan (7)

She was endowed with a collection of all sorts of charms;

Padmavati was the highest type of woman (afta)

Like an object of love created by Love himself.

Like an object of love formed by Love,

Formed in the perfection of beauty,

Fascinating beasts, birds, and serpents,

Gods, men, and saints likewise.

She had all the auspicious marks [on her body ]

Well she knew the sixty-four arts, (aT)

She knew the fourteen sciences, (S¥T)

She was like the spring among the six seasons.

Playing about with her companions

In the gardens of the palace

Her eyes lit upon a parrot,

Then her mind was joyful.

Her mind was very joyful,

Expanding like a lotus in the rays of the sun

Her red lips thirstily opening,

1369.]

10.

il.

12,

13.

14.

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithirdy.

Likening the beauty of the parrot to the bimb-fruit.

She strove [to catch it] with eager eyes, (8)

It resisted, fluttering and struggling ;

Avoiding its beak, she seized it,

Then she took it in her own hand.

Rejoicing with joy, pleasure in her mind,

Having taken it inside the palace

In a beautiful cage, inlaid with jewels

She was taking and placing it.

In it she was taking and placing it;

Went to play, forgetting everything,

Her mind slipped away from the parrot

Joyfully calling “ Ram, Ram.”

The parrot seeing the beauty of the princess,

This form from head to foot,

This finished work of the Maker,

This peerless model of a woman.

, Poem afam.

Wavy tresses fair to see,

Rivalling the dawn, with a voice like the Kozt ;

Fragrant as the blowing lotus,

Swan-like her gait, slow-paced.

White-robed, her body shines,

Her nails are drops of Swati [pearls] ;

The bee hums round her, forgetting his nature

In the flavour and fragrance of the god of love.

The parrot looked with his eyes, and was pleased—

[Said] “‘ This beauteously moulded form

“ My Lord Prithiraj shall obtain

“ Forestalling Hara, the joy of Uma.”

Couplets.

Approaching the parrot, the princess

Applied her mind to speak to it.

It was a very accomplished Pandit-parrot

Who spoke words distinctly.

Arill metre.

She asks with soft and gentle voice

147

148

15.

16.

18.

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithirdj.

Saying “ O parrot, tell me true,

‘¢ What is the name of your country ?

‘“¢ What king rules there ?”

Quoth the parrot, hearing the speech,

“ Dilli Garh, the abode of Hindis,

‘< There is the incarnation of Indra, the Chahuwan,

“‘ There is Prithiraj, the mighty hero.’’

Paddhart metre.

To the princess Padmavati

He tells the tale again very clearly,

In the place of the Hindus, the best of lands

There rises the fort of Dilli, fair to see.

The lord of Sambhari, the land of the Chahuwan,

Prithiraj there rules gloriously.

Sixteen years of age, a king,

A long-armed monarch, a lord of the people.

Lord of Sambhari, son of Somesar

God-like in form, a very incarnation.

Nobles and heroes all unequalled

With arms like Bhim, powerful as Yama;

Who took the Pakkari Shah Sahab

Three times they stopped him and turned him back.

[Here a doubtful line. ] (9)

His word never fails, his arrow is piercing,

Mighty his voice, death-dealing his hand.

With seven thousand virtues like Hari Chand,

Brave and strong, a hero like Vikram,

Among the Danavs an incarnation, merciful

[No. 3,

Over the four quarters of the earth a king, skilled in all arts

An incarnation of Kandarpa himself.

Couplets.

An incarnation of Kamdey is he

The king, Somesar’s son;

Scattering a thousand rays on the lotuses

Like the sun, a guardian of mankind.

Hearing the account. of the glory of Prithiraj

Transported with child-like joy,

1869.]

19,

20,

21.

22.

23.

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiray. 149

Body, soul and thought fixed on the Chahuwan,

She remained, blushing red.

All her moon-like appearance passed away, |

Her end approached ;

Mother and father were anxious,

Seeking for the maiden a husband.

Poem.

Seeking for the maiden a husband,

They made enquiry on all sides;

They got Brahmins and Gurus, speaking,

Telling, and explaining that matter,

** A man, a king, a lord of men,

With a large fort, inaccessible, immense,

Accomplished, of pure race,

Give to the princess, O king!

Then send a Brahmin to make the betrothal,

Virtuous, praiseworthy, as thyself;

[ Let there be] joy and gladness in Samud Sikhar,

Singing of songs, flags many.”

| Couplets.

To the North, in’ the Sawalikh hills

In the fort of Kaméin, hard of access

Rules a king, like the jewel in the lotus,

With horses, elephants, wealth endless.

The Brahman prepared the cocoanut fruit

Having filled the chauk with pearls and (other) jewels,

That the hero should pledge himself to the maiden

With great joy making the alliance.

Bhwjangi metre.

Smiling the king took the betrothal offering,

For joy from door to door the drums were beat ;

The lords of forts all speaking, agreed,

All the kings of that family arrived.

Came ten thousand horsemen renowned,

Thirty-three thousand foot soldiers filling the place,

Drunk with the moisture (from their temples) five hundred

elephants

150

24.

25.

26.

at:

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithirtj. [No. 8,

Like black mountains moving on earth, rank on rank.

Came glittering like fire mingled with ice,

Eighty-four horses, powerful and strong.

With incomparable necks and hoofs, prancing and rearing. (10)

Of the five colours, shaking their trappings. |

(There was) playing of instruments in five tunes,

[A doubtful line (11) ]

In Samud Sirsikhé (12) there was shouting for joy

The marriage hall was adorned with garlands.

The noble maiden, Padmavati, seeing the time (approach)

Spoke to the parrot this word, being alone.

“ Quickly go thou, parrot, to the fair land of Dilli,

“ Bring hither the hero, the Chahuwan king.

Couplet.

“ Bring thou the Chahuwan hero,

‘“‘ First tell him this message from me,

‘‘ While the breath remains in my body

*‘ My beloved (shall be) Prithiraj the king.”

Poem.

Beloved Prithiraj the king,

Fitly having written a letter, she gave it,

Arranging all the words of the invitation,

On the twelfth of the moon he took it.

Eleven hundred and thirty

Sakh era truly,

Thus ;—“ Khattri of pure race !

“Hero! save a maiden’s life ;

“On seeing this arise at once, O hero!

‘Delay not for one instant.

In the space of five nights and days

(Come) thou as Krishna came for Rukmini.’

Couplets.

“ As Krishna to Rukmini,

Thus, hero, lord of Sambhari !

On the western side of Siva’s temple

At time of worship, be present.”

Taking the scroll the parrot went,

1869.] Lhe Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithircy. 151

Flew through the air like the wind ;

To where in Dilli, Prithiraj the king ;

* * [defective line.] * ee

28. He gave the paper into the king’s hand

Opening, read it Prithiraj ;

Seeing the parrot, he laughed in his heart,

Made preparation for going.

Poem.

29. That very hour, that very instant,

That very day, that very time, preparing,

All his heroes and nobles

He took, shouting ‘‘ Boli bam.”

Mention also* Chand, the incomparable poet,

The hero perfect in beauty,

And his army, all its cohorts,

A valiant army, thirty lakhs strong.

To Chémand Rai, the land of Dilli

And the fort, the lord of forts having given in charge ;

Away went king Prithiraj then,

Went away to the eastern land.

Couplet.

30. On the day the marriage procession went to Sikhar,

On that day went Prithiréj ;

On that very day to the Padshah

Came at Gajjanain (13) the report.

Poem.

31. Hearing at Gajjanain the report,

Arose the hero Sakabdin,

Of Khurésan, and Multan,

And Kaébul itself the ruler.

A terrible warrior in the clash of battle,

A king with arms heavy as steel

The earth shook (beneath him), Seshnag fled,

In the sky the sun was hidden, it became night.

* Guys evidently an imperative; we must suppose the poet to be ad-

dressing his muse, or to take a lower view of the case, perhaps he wanted a

rhyme for Was in the next line.

152

o2.

33.

Watching for the coming of the Lord of Dilli.

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiréj. [No. 3,

Turning aside streams, like the Sindhu river,

Stopping the way, standing foremost.

At that time to Raja Prithiraj

Chand spoke on this wise.

[ What he said is not recorded. ]

Seeing that the city was close at hand,

The hero advanced without fear.

In Samud Sikhar there was a great noise,

The sound of drums on all sides.

The poet went before as a guide,

Having prepared a horse for the princess (14)

To see them, all the women

Mounted to the windows and balconies gladly.

The princess looked forth from her dwelling,

Looking like the shadow of Rahu, (15)

Peeping out at the window every moment,

Paddhart metre.

Watching the road in the direction of Dill,

Happy was she when the parrot returned.

Hearing the news, glad were her eyes;

The maiden was elated with the tokens of love.

She tore off the dirty clothes from her body,

Purified, and anointed, and adorned herself with robes. (16)

Called for priceless jewels (for her person) from head to foot

Arrayed with the tokens of the king of love.

Filling a golden tray with pearls,

Lighting a lamp she waved it round. (17)

Taking her confidante with her, boldly the maiden

Goes as Rukmini went to meet Murari;

Worshipping Gauri, revering Sankar ;

Circumambulating (18) and touching their feet.

Then on seeing King Prithiraj,

She smiled bashfully, hiding her face through shame.

Seizing her hand, putting her on horseback,

The King the lord of Dilli took her away.

The rumour spread that, outside the city,

1869.]

34.

35.

36.

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithirdy. 153

They are carrying off Padmavati by force.

Drums are beat, there is saddling of horse and elephant,

They ran, armed, in all directions.

*¢ Seize! seize !”? shouted each warrior.

Rage possessed the heroes and their King.

Where King Prithiraj was going in front

With all his army behind him,

There the horsemen advancing arrived ;

King meeting king, the warriors joined battle.

When Prithiraj the King turns rein,

The heavens stand still, the world-serpent shakes.

The chiefs and heroes all look (awful) as death,

Eager for blood on rushes the King.

The bows let fly countless arrows,

The deadly blades draw blood ;

From the sweat of the wounds of the heroes on the field,

A thick stream flows, and dyes the sand.

As the warriors of the bardt smote.

On the field fell heads and headless trunks of the foe.

Couplets. |

The foe fell on the field of battle ;

Turning his face towards Dilli,

Having won the battle, went Prithiraj,

All the chiefs were glad.

He took Padmavati with him.

Rejoicing, King Prithiraj.

Thereupon of the Padshah’s

Avzrival, there came a rumour.

Poem.

Of his arrival there was a rumour;

_ Came Sahabdin, the hero,

** To-day I will seize Prithiraj,”’

Said the Chief, loud shouting.

Countless warriors raged for the combat ;

The army formed in line ;

With arrows, javelins, and spears,

Catapults, (19) all arranged.

154

37.

38.

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiray. [ No. 3,

Throwing as it were mountains of iron.

The strong-armed lords of elephants met.

On they came shouting, ha! ha!

The army of Khurasaén and Multan.

Paddhari metre.

The lord of Khurdsén, Multén and Kandahar,

With powerful sword, and unerring arrows.

Rohillas, Firangis (20) with long beards,

Crowds of Biloches with blazoned shields,

With cat-eyes, and slavering jackal-mouths ;

Thousands on thousands, powerful warriors,

On the backs and flanks of their horses saddles and housings.

* % * % *

* * * 4 * (21)

Dense masses of iron, and waving horse-tails,

Trékis, Arabs, Tazis swift for victory ; (22)

Turkis wielding mighty bows and arrows.

Such sword-handling troopers in crowds.

Though demons opposed them, they would not avail aught. (23)

In their midst, Sultan Sahab himself,

Such was his army as described in song (24)

Him Prithiraj, the King surrounded,

On all sides with standards, and noise of drums,

Verses.

With noise of drums, and with flags,

(Came) the Chauhan Rana on all sides ;

All the chiefs and heroes,

Called to mind their potent spells.

Prithiraj the King set on,

The hero shook his reins with eagerness,

Drawing his sword full switt,

Strokes, quick as lightning, he struck.

The gods stood curious in the sky.

Drowned in blood (24) the earth was (one) stream:

Hara rejoiced at the sacrifice (26) of heroes.

At the shouts of the monarch and his host (27)

1869.]

39.

40).

41.

42,

The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiray. 155

Couplets.

At the shouts of the monarch and his host;

The battle was very fierce,

[An obscure line] (28)

Neither yielded, neither conquered.

Verses.

None gave way, none conquered,

Heroes and warriors stayed or fell,

On the earth they fell in numbers.

Making a very terrible fight.

Here were trunks, there heads;

There hands and feet scattered wide ;

Here shoulders cleft by the sword,

There heads and breasts cut open at a blow. [ hoofs.

Here skulls (with their) teeth and foreheads crushed by horse

Hlephants’ trunks and bodies likewise :

When the Rana of the Hindus, with sun-like face,

The Chauhan, grasped his sword.

Bhujange metre.

The Chahuwan, the Hindu Rana grasped his sword,

Rushed on the troop of elephants like a lion in his wrath,

_ Severing heads and bodies, cleaving brows in twain,

All the chiefs and ‘heroes utter loud shouts.

Shrieking and screaming in confusion they fled,

Abandoning pride and shame, and begging for mercy.

The elephants fled blindly, the Chahuw4n overthrew them.(29)

Surrounding them on all sides he turned them.

The sun went down, (8) around was dark night,

(The army) went searching (for the road) nothing was visible ;

Leaning his head on his bow stood Prithiraj the King,

Then he seized the Shah, who risked death and disgrace,

He took him away quickly having routed his army.

There fell chiefs five hundred there in the field outright. (31)

Rajputs fifty were disabled in the fight,

The song of victory was sung with flags and with beating of

Couplets. [ drums.

Victory was to Prithiraj ;

156 The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiraj. [No. 8,

Taking the captive Shah with him:

Towards Dilli he went,

Crossing the passes, the mountains and the Ganges.

With the fair Padmévati,

And the Ghori Sultan.

Reached the city of Dilli,

The mighty-armed Chauhan.

Verses.

44, The Brahmins spoke and affixed the nuptial mark,

Selecting (32) a fortunate moment,

Made a bower of green bamboos,

Adorned with clusters and garlands (of flowers).

The Brahmins recited the Vedas,

The homa sacrifice [ was performed | on a platform before the hero.

Padmavati was the peerless bride; |

The bridegroom, Prithiraj, king of men.

He fined Shah Shahabdi,

Right thousand pieces of gold,

Having conferred giftsand rewards and dresses of six pieces (33)

The king went up into his fort.

Verses.

45. King Prithvival went up,

Having released the hero Shahabdin :

The King, his chiefs and warriors ;

With banners, and music, and shouting.

[ Moon-faced, deer-eyed women,

Preparing golden dishes many

Binding on pearls, joyously,

Forming in a ring men and women all,

Sang with joyful throats ;

Waving chwmris from hand to hand,

With coronets on their heads. | (35)

Couplets.

46. The King ascended to the royal fort.

The virtuous King, Prithiréj

With very great and exceeding joy.

The crown of the head of the Hindis.

1869.| The Nineteenth Book of the Giestes of Prithiray. 157

Here endeth the nineteenth chapter in the Gestes of Sri Prithiraj,

composed by Sri Kavi Chand Bardai, entitled the seizure of Padma-

vati inthe fort of Samud Sikhar by Sri Prithiraj after a fight, and the

fight between Sri Prithiraj and the Padshah, and the victory of Sri

Prithiraj and the capture and release of the Padshah. 19. Finished.

Notes.

(1) In Tod’s MS. the 20th. In the Agra MS. it is misplaced

and occurs as the 24th, but in this MS. the whole of the Mahoba

Samyo to which it is introductory, is omitted ; as it is also in Caulfield’s

MS.

(2) Tod aga which I have translated ‘strong armed Wa = wa.

Agra has 4a which agrees neither with rhyme or metre. i 3

(3) aa, pHs, retinue, attendants.

(4) Tod ua, Agra uta.

(5) Todazw waw; “Agra faa saa which makes no sense.

(6) Tod faa wax, which is unintelligible; Agra faa wax, ditto, I

read Bwa PAC, t. c. Wea H Par (-Fa) F, conjecturally:

(7) Lvread these lines thus eaufa wi Heit Ve Ifa fawaara

dq aaty ll Tod and the Agra MS. read ayeeft which gives no

sense; fawa I take to be for fay; the substitution off for s isa

Panjabi characteristic frequent in Chand; ata is for atat. The other

reading fae qaty I can make nothing of.

(8) ~qa safsa, with eyes rounded like a disc (qm), 7. e. widely

opened.

(9) Tod and Agra feats g Vea ae wafc | the meaning of

which is not clear to me.

(10) The translation of this and the preceding line is purely con-

jectural the MSS. have entirely different and irreconcileable read-

ings.

(11) asa deata faa aif cre Tod. Agra has aed ay, ete.

(12) In this time the proper name of the place is given for the first

time. The fortress is identified as Sriswagarh on the Pahonj not far

from Kinch “in Hastern Bundelkhand. LElliot’s History of India,

yol. ii. p. 459.

(18) Ghaznin.

(14) Readings vary in the different MSS. That translated above is

the only intelligible one.

158 The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiréj. [No. 3, —

(15) The princess when in health was compared to the moon,

when sick she is likened to the moon under an eclipse, caused as the

Hindus believed by the demon Raha.

(16) Here again I have constructed an intelligible reading out the

varying and obscure versions in the MSS.

(17) This is an allusion to the ceremony called arta or welcoming

the bridegroom.

(18) The ceremony of pradakshinam or walking round an object

to be revered, keeping the rzght side always nearest to it. |

(19) Tod and Agra qua alte ae wayta, I at first translated this |

“muskets and arrows,” but arrows have already been mentioned in ~

the line above (4T#)3 and it is very doubtful if guns and gunpowder

could have been known at that early age, moreover the next line ©

speaks of throwing mountains of iron; I therefore suppose some sort

of heavy machine for throwing stones or darts, such as a catapult or

mangonel, is intended. .

(20) The mention of Feringhees here iscurious. Ifthe blazoned 2

shields in the next line, the heavily caparisoned horses and iron

armour apply to them, we might almost suppose some band of old

crusaders had found their way eastwards! I suspect the whole: pass-

age however to be a modern interpolation. The word translated

“beards” is Watat which is found in no dictionary. I connect it

with the Sanskrit a, Prakrit yact Sindhi we,—It is merely a cong

jecture however. |

(21) These two lines are a puzzle. They stand thus —

PacMag ga aa aTS Il

TRAATTAARLT RIT Il i

gawia is probably Persian L3aus scarlet cloth, and I should

like to read @tqt for @lat, so as to make it descriptive of scarlet caps,

which were distinctive of the Mughal cavalry, as in later times of the

Kizilbash their descendants. The second line I give up entirely, as it

stands at present. b.

(22) Tread wat Ast ATS, (655 533 rad the MSS. both have at.

(23) In both MSS. fax Wa sid © ad Wale, 7. e. aT ya Va =

far a faa age (— fade) 2 Za | ;

(24) sig Beetly, means ‘ muttering prayers,’ but Chand uses sit

este

and sitq for chanting verses, or even for speaking.

1869. | The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithiray. 159

(25) tara ara = CHAT. (26) TI Ti. c. ae

(27) Lread St ACA Wa ICA BT i.e. TH (— AV) Yracti HIT VT

ata a (Sale SA) Gti FX, hero of heroes, monarch, leader.

(28) favargcaafwmaqca the meaning of which is not evident, nor

how the words should be divided.

(29) This line varies in the two MSS. Tod has faear aitca cist

Sg Wit ATT Il Agra Pace IS Wa WSalat Au | 1 adopt the latter with

the change of the last word to Hat No verb @at exists in Hindi, but

in Sindhi there is ACU to overthrow, cause to fall, and #<uT is used

in Panjabi in the sense of scattering.

(30) Both MSS. have sfe which is absurd. I propose to read sfs

which is the earlier form of efa, as the setting of the sun and not its

rising must be meant.

(31) I read with Agra Wt AIT Guy avi ta aa. This last word

only occurs when a rhyme is required for Wile; it would seem to be

connected with Hindi 31st (Sansk. SIa), clean. I look on it as an ex-

pletive and translate it ‘outright.’ Tod’s version of this line ig

unintelligible. The whole of this Bhujangi is very corrupt. The Agra

leaves out three whole lines and patches up a fourth with part of one line

and part of another. It differs also entirely in some lines from Tod,

but oddly has rather the better readings of the two.

(32) The word translated ‘ selecting’ is qxsta, which is for yxfs

participle of a verb qtdai, the last syllable lengthened metri gratid.

It occurs once before in this book at stanza 22, where I have translated

it ‘prepared.’ It is probably the, Sanskrit fyfaeqt, which would

be in Prakrit yfsgi, whence qftet and ye. Chand is not particular

about S$ andt; thus we have qta@ for yea, SIT for sis, etc. The

meaning would be to fix, settle, arrange, place, apply, etc. cf. Benfey

s. v. I, also Bopp. Gloss. Comp. ib.

(33) wea, lit. ‘six dresses.’ I suppose this to mean dresses of

honour, as we should say ‘ khil’ats of six pieces.’

(85) The whole of this passage in brackets is omitted from the

Agra MS., and I think it is an interpolation. The style is different

from the rest, and it is somewhat out of place in the story. Moreover

the last line of 44 is repeated in the first line of 46, as well as in the

beginning of 35, which is unusual. The sixth line is partially unintel-

ligible to me.

160 The Nineteenth Book of the Gestes of Prithirdj. [No. 8,

Persian and Arabic words in this book are hashm, hazér, mahal,

high, zanjtr, dwés, jang, fauj, khds, mir, tir, nishan, saklat, fath, tez,

aswar, bdzt, sultin, tegh; these occur chiefly in the passages relating —

to the Musalman troops.

JOURNAL

OF THE

mer ATIC SOCIETY.

-——<>——-

Parr L—HISTORY, LITERATURE, Ge.

III OLIV IW PIS LIS SII INI NII NII III NI NII I INI NII NII NII III III

No. IV.—1869.

eae

Translations from Chand.—By F. 8. Growsr, Esq., M. A., B. O. S.

The two specimen translations from the Father of Hindi Poetry

which I have submitted to the criticism of the Society, were, I

believe the first that had appeared since the year 1838, when Col.

Tod contributed to the Asiatic Journal a version of the Kanauj

Khand. I have lately had an opportunity of comparing his transla-

tion with the original, and find that notwithstanding its apparent

close adherence to Indian modes of expression, it is in fact extremely

loose and untrustworthy ; though no doubt it contains many sugges-

tions calculated to smooth the path of a future translator. Consider-

ing the novelty of my undertaking, the comparative failure of my

only predecessor, the inherent difficulty of the text, and the imperfect

condition of the MS. in my possession, I felt little confidence in the

result of my labours, and would gladly have welcomed the suggestions

of competent critics. I was also in great hopes that such suggestions

would not be withheld, since it appeared that the poem had recently

excited considerable curiosity among oriental scholars. In these

expectations, I have been completely disappointed, and the accuracy

of my rendering has remained altogether unchallenged, from the

indifference of the public, I fear, rather than from any more flattering

cause.

162 Translations from Chand. [ No. 4,

I learn, however, from the September Proceedings of the Society

that Mr. Beames (to whom the Philological Committee have entrusted

the task of editing the complete poem) has prepared a separate trans-

lation of another canto, and has published a short specimen of it. It

so happens that the portion selected is contained in one of my MSS.

I have referred to it in my second paper, vol. 38, page 4. So far as

I can judge from the English, the text used by Mr. Beames coincides

closely with mine; but our views on the interpretation of many

passages are far from coincident, as I will shortly proceed to shew.

I wish in the first place to reproduce the original text. This will

occupy no great amount of space, since the passage in question consists

only of 40 lines; and so very little of the text has ever yet appeared

in print that many to whom MSS. are inaccessible may be glad to

have a further specimen of it. Mr. Beames too will thus be able to

see at once where difference of rendering is due to difference of

reading. ‘To the text I will append my own translation and subjoin

a few notes, more especially at the points of divergence.

I am aware that it is much easier to detect flaws in another man’s

work, and to avoid them in rebuilding on the same plan than it is to

succeed in constructing on an independent basis; but I cannot be :

justly impugned for essaying only the inferior task, since two of my

own attempts already published are equally open to adverse criticism, —

and I propose to conclude this article by adding a third to the series. —

It will be, I hope, by a stringent examination of them that Mr.

Beames will repay me in kind for my strictures on his performance.

Here follows the text of Mr. Beames’ translation, as it stands in

the Mainpuri MS. |

STST qcafefateforefanfaaqefatetcatagar

aeites qtusertateqgaafearaa

aeaqeanaawafrafraecacse

: yraNTas era arse are

eq = - wafaurrayarequesasicd 5

| SRV yeaeaaasifeaafsaaa

wiygdife<aifeaataayfawae

VHUCHACACH ACH SSCS

UIA CALA LF CAGUIS HTT IT

1869, | Translations from Chand, 163

derarayataaray Ia PAH yCSETT 10

SIS GaN a TAMA SQUAT gESTA

“i fafequaqagataaea aang

Qu wag vera hearra areca cars

area afaqaraaicaracaareay

fanfanaenfasata sista at 15

STAC AAS IATA AA ISITAT

fafafusasaenfeaeqracaaracafay

qeudfagraeieaaaearaarfarachqa

ae waearuarfaraaiamerarate

qeralaTa eat ecrca aracaita 20

Ua lzeaaIvapea gy Asna ass

sq y efefasyaatetiqadaat art

ufaqureufavafaaeufaamafaara

TSAR AIAAAG Ma TAT

wayfavarearutaatesrararatacharcha 25

WRUyWywastasaaasnitatactaafa

qSGMAIS a aaa asggrasirayg et

Paqueaafrermaaraaatesrseyat

| efeasaacafanafecefuasaitacae

fuacaaacaafasfearaeacrataue 30

arr aderafawenaraqerfa

faquea rataemarcrarerafaata

aca featacaae Taaasaas et

RCA AATATHISI A ATT HS

ay Rawqangenpatqayacey 35

quafagediudantageraacaca

qaaaa aa aardfan Paya

ara fax fereureHe aa faaratae

UVa SAEs he iea aes AN CSTS

tfasidegacfgumeeaafanaraT 40

Novss.

Line 1. The second dist may be taken with the preceding words

a a preposition meaning ‘towards ;’ or with the following words as

164 Translations from Chand. [No. 4,

the first number of a compound, disi-garh-nipatt, ‘ lord of all forts on

earth’: the former seems preferable.

2. Byat certainly may mean ‘ victorious,’ but I think it better to

regard it as a proper name. Bhurga is a word I have never met

elsewhere ; it may be for bhigat, ‘spread through the world ;’ but

more likely for the Sanskrit dhrisa, ‘extensive. Mr. Beames may

have Jddav for sihi; but whence he obtains his epithet ‘strong-

armed’ I cannot conceive. Is it intended as a rendering of mahimd

bhurga ?

4. Sevaht, which Mr. Beames takes to be a substantive, is clearly

averb. He also confuses the Hindi nsdn, ‘a kettle drum,’ by no

means ai uncommon word, with the Persian nishdn ‘a standard.’

One would have thought the epithet bahundd, ‘loud sounding’ was a

sufficient guide to the true meaning. To translate bahundd by ‘ very

splendid’ is decidedly original.

5. Here din must stand either for din pratt, ‘ every day,’ or for din

bhar, ‘all day ;’ I can see no reference to ‘ five times a day.’

6. Nor here to ‘golden hoofs ; can Mr. Beames have taken nag

for nakh ?

7. Mr. Beames has entirely omitted the words ‘ hay sankhi.’

8. Apparently Mr. Beames has wrongly divided the words, thus —

getting har at the end of the line, and then seeing the words kar and —

patra, has jumped to the conclusion that some reference is intended

to Har’s, i. e. Siva’s, bow; the real meaning is something quite

different.

9. The text speaks of ten sons only, no daughters: and the

meaning is, not that Padamsen had ten sons, but that he was one of

ten brothers.

12. ‘From her breast a daughter sprung.’ This is rather awk-

ward English, and not at all required by the original, which literally

translated is, ‘she had one fair daughter.’ Nor in the preceding

line is there any mention of ‘house:’ apparently either sughar or

gharnt has been wrongly divided. The word bhdn, ‘the sun’ has

been totally omitted. ‘

14. The words in this line should be divided thus: Bal vas sisutd

samir : evidently Mr. Beames has split them up into Bal vai sasi suta,

but even then they cannot bear the meaning he gives them. © Vais is

for avasthd. |

1869. | Translations from Chand. 165

15,16. These lines are difficult, but not corrupt.. The emendation

suggested by Mr. Beames, in his translation since published is quite

unnecessary. Hven with such emendation, the words could not yield

the sense he gives them.

17-20. The first of the two couplets here omitted by Mr. Beames

is certainly extremely obscure ; the second is simple enough.

22. Mr. Beames’s rendering can scarcely be correct; since the

Hindus reckon not fourteen but only six sciences.

23,24. These lines are somewhat remarkable, as being the only

two out of the forty which Mr. Beames has translated with absolute

accuracy. Certainly they are not very difficult.

26. The comparison is not between the parrot and the dimb, but

between the d¢mb and the girl’s red lips.

27. The words ura) ur are altogether omitted.

28. Nothing in my text about ‘avoiding its beak.’

31, 32. Here Mr. Beames omits much and exactly reverses the

sense of what he retains.

35. Sudes must mean ‘well arranged,’ not ‘fair to see.’ The

latter half of the line has nothing that corresponds in the slightest

with Mr. Beames’s translation.

36. The difficulty here is evaded. The reading of my text ‘ giddh’

must I think be corrected to ‘ biddh.’ Bais-sandht is an uncommon

expression, but is thus explained in the Sringar-saurabh :—

Baélépan jovan duhu milat hoti jo sandhi.

Ja son kabi sab kahat hain Bais-sandhi anubandhi.

37. The nava sapta sobha form one of the standard poetical com-

mon-places, and I am surprised that Mr. Beames is not familiar with

the expression. His translation is quite unwarranted by the original,

and the same remark applies to his version of the next three lines.

In these observations, I have taken for granted that Mr. Beames’s

text is substantially the same as mine, and I have little doubt that

such is really the case. If, however, this supposition is incorrect, and

I have thereby done him an injustice, I feel sure that the Society

| will allow him to vindicate the accuracy of his scholarship by printing

| the forty lines as they stand in his MS. I now proceed to offer a

| translation of my own, which however imperfect, will be found, I am

| confident, rather more faithful to the original.

166 Translations from Chand. [ No. 4,

Translation.

Towards the eastern quarter is a princely fort, Samud-sikhari, the

impregnable; its king the heroic Bijai, of highly exalted descent:

lord of thousand horses, elephants and lands, of imperial dignity ; all

puissant chiefs do him service ’mid the din of deep-sounding kettle-

drums.

"Mid the din of deep-sounding kettle-drnms, there is daily equip-

ment of heroes, mounting ten thousand horses, their bodies gleaming

with gold and jewels. ‘There too innumerable elephants, myriads of

horses, a warrior host with thousands of men, each bearing the royal

umbrella, all of equal dignity. Ten were his sons, all gallant and

fair, comely as the dawn, with countless stores of treasure; but

comeliest of all, Prince Padam-sen.

The comely prince, Padam-sen, had a noble spouse; by her one

daughter, brilliant as the sun, lovely as the new moon.

Lovely as the new moon, did I say ? nay, lovely as the moon in its

fulness; sweet as nectar was the grace of her blooming maidenhood.

As the opening lotus, or the circling bee, or the wanton wagtail, so —

glittered her fawn-like eyes. The pearl, the parrot and the swan lost

all courage in her presence, shimmering as a fish ina stream. The

horse, the elephant, and the car lent her each its own special grace; _

this lotus of Prince Padam-sen must have been fashioned in female

form by Kamadeva himself.

Fashioned by Kamadeva himself, a form of ideal beauty, stealing |

the hearts alike of gods, men, saints, cattle, birds and deer. Her

body had all marks of good fortune; she was familiar with the sixty- —

four arts; and well-formed in all her members; she was graceful as

the Spring. Laughing and playing with her companions in the

garden of the palace, she beheld a parrot ; great delight filled her soul.

Great delight filled her soul as when the swan sees the sun; as she

bit her red lips, they seemed to the flock of parrots like a bimb. The

bird flies round her ; she startled, looks down to her breast ; vehement

desire takes her soul, she catches it in her hands. Gladly she detains ,

the little Love, and goes with it into the palace; there in a cage

studded with many jewels, she takes and places it. |

There she takes and places it, forgetting all her sport, and with irre-

pressible delight begins teaching it to say Ram, Ram. The parrot, see-

1869. | Translations from Chand. 167

ing her face every day, was very happy. ‘ Surely this charming Padmini

is the perfection of the Creator’s work; her wavy hair so trim, her

lips and teeth red with betel juice, her form just budding into woman-

hood as the lotus, stately as the swan, with all the graces of Love

himself, adorned by the sixteen arts of the toilette, and with strings of

pearls; the eyes of all beholders are charmed, and they deem her a

Venus embodied. May Siva and Uma, whom I worship, beholding

my devotion, grant the union of Prithiraj (thus sings the Bard Chand)

with this branch of the tree of Paradise.’

I hope scholars will do me the favour of comparing the above

translation first with the Hindi text and then with Mr. Beames’s

transformation of it. I conclude this article with a short extract

from the Benares MS8., being the third of my original series.

In my former papers I have described the opening of the poem and

shewn how the Mahoba war was provoked by Parmal’s massacre of

the fifty wounded Chauhans who had wandered off from the main body

of Prithiraj’s army after an engagement with the Muhammadans.

From that point I continue the narrative.

When the news reached Prithiraj at Dilli, his indignation was extreme.

Heat once summoned a Council of State, and finding all the chiefs

unanimous for war, commenced immediate preparations for the cam-

paign. An auspicious date was fixed by the priests, after performing

a s’dkal hom, and the army had marched into encampments outside the

city, when— ;

Translation of the latter part of Canto IV.

An envoy from king Mahil meets Prithiraj on the road before

| Dilli* and tenders a letter, saying: ‘ Alha and Udal, the king’s

| servants, are in the battle as the angel of death to the enemy; ad-

| vance no further till you have slain Mallakhén and his puny force.”}

| This is the letter sent by the king to Prithiraj : “‘ First put Mallakhan

_to death, then reconnoitre the city of Mahoba; having well recon-

| noitred, urge on your march thither by night and day. There is but -

| a small force at Sarsa; you are a man of valour, ravage their land ;

| gird on the sword for the fray, if there be any courage in you, O king

of Sambhar. This is the advice I give, writing the letter with my own

* €On the road before Dill’ —Dilli sapathai,

~ ‘ Puny force’-—Chhari-bhir Mallakhan ko,

168 Translations from Chand. [ No. 4,

hand. Mallakhan’s army is contemptible, utterly destroy it. Sarsa

borders on Mahoba, there pass the frontier. The chief of his warriors

have gone indignant to Kanauj: the Chandel has lost his senses, and

stays still at Mahoba. There he stays careless, leaving all to me;

I support his throne, and rule the entire land. Rouse your indigna-

tion, Chauhan, answer me asa king; take Parmal a prisoner, plunder

the city of Mahoba.”

Such was the letter given by the messenger to Prithiraj; the king,

as he read it, was more delighted than words can tell. That instant

he wrote in answer to the prince: “ If the Chandel Raja be conquered,

half the kingdom shall fall to your share.” Again and again he

repeats the same words in writing to the Parihar.* “ If the land be

conquered, I promise you dominion over one half of the whole realm.’’}

Mahil’s envoy Gopal spoke and said to the king: “ Should Alha and

Udal by any chance return from Kanauj all our arrangements} will

come to nought. The king has grievously outraged§ them and banished |

them from the city; still, remembering their duty to their lord, when

they hear of his distress, they will hasten to his side.” Having

uttered this caution, the messenger took the letter and departed. The

Chauhan army started to ravage the country of the Chandels.

In the year 1140, on a Wednesday in the month of Kuar,|| the lord

of Sambhar gathered his army and set forth to wreak vengeance on —

Parmal. When the assembled army broke up and marched from —

Dilli, earth trembled. In the van were 500 elephants, huge as the

* ©The Parihar’—that is, Mahil.

+ The couplet stands thus: wle ufe qa

S ‘ =

Beatin yinwaa Bay cist waa

Here aphiya is said to be a Marwari, word signifying ‘ to give; and

one Pandit to whom I shewed the passage assured me that tabhdis also a

Marwari word used in connection with aphiya to imply a solemn donation. Of

this, however, I feel doubtful and prefer to take tha kahat bha@ as three words,

meaning ‘I tell you.’

{ ‘All our arrangements’—yj @ yi a Ue aq Here raul is apparently

for kaul. |

§ Grievous outrage—ely Sy

|| The word in the text is ikkmds : I am not certain what month is intended. —

| The couplet stands thus—

—~ : ; A, as EN « ti . +

si ce ait teal a afaa Fe at Git (elas, which may also be

translated—When the assembled army marched from Dilli, forest trees were ©

broken, the earth-supporter trembled.

1869. | Translations from Chand. 169

ten guardians of the universe, and 100 exultant champions, each of

whom could turn to flight 10,000 ordinary mortals. The king gave

Kanh command of this advanced guard, and halted at Fort Gopachal.

Here Amarsi sent to his aid* from Chitrakit 20,000 horse and 30

elephants. When Prithiraj fixed his camp at Gopachal, all the people

deserted their homes and fled to hide in the woods and mountain

caves. Then Kaimas gave this wise counsel; ‘‘ Mallakhan is a strong

and haughty chief; get the better of him by a pilgrimage to Batesur:

By the death of Mallakhan your fame will spread though the world.”

As Kaimias advised, so he acted. With clash and clang of soul-stirring

music the army marched; earth quivered and shook; Seshnag’s

thousand hooded heads trembled at the weight. The Chauhan gave

heed to the stratagem Kaimas had devised; no news of the halt at

Gopachal reached the Chandel. The army lingered} on the road to

Batesur ; the king of Sambhar struck off apart from the main body

of the host. With him were 500 elephants, breaking down forts as

huge as mountains, their riders equipped with splendid{ spears.

Under each chieftain were 500,000 men; as the Chauhan army march-

ed, the earth-supporter’s head shook. From Gopachal Prithiraj made

a cross-march to visit the shrine of Mahadeva.

When his camp broke up from Gopachal, the crowd of elephants

spread over the whole face of the earth. Under the tramp of his

horses’ hoofs, mountains were ground into powder as small as mustard

seed. A moving canopy of dust warded off the rays of the sun.

|The Chauhan army with its gallant array of knights made forced

| marches, and with loud strains of martial music all arrived at Batesur.

| Summoning priests and bards to join his warrior train, the king in an

| ecstasy of devotion adored Sankara after bathing at Brahmandl

| Attended by bards and sages to the Batesur temple, he touched the

| feet of the deity and reverently circumambulated the image, After

| bathing, he made an offering of 10 elephants, 100 horses and 2000

| pieces of gold; all these gifts he bestowed upon the Brahmans. Then

| Bx Aid’ —qia gy, for the Persian kwmak.

. ]

| + ‘Lingered.’ The word in the text is fae the precise meaning of which

| was doubtful, till aday or two ago when I heard it used by a rustic in Court to

| express the slow movement of a man whom the Police had apprehended and

| were dragging off to the lock-up. ‘

| ¢{ Splendid wrayer ; probably for Persian asl or astl. ‘ Spears’-— wmqct.

170 Translations from Chand. . [No. 4,

taking in his hand lotus and other flowers with fruits, roots, and incense,

he presented them in the temple. Reclining on a couch of kusa

grass, the king adored with clasped hands: “ Grant me victory,

Ahinéth, then again will I visit thy shrine.”’ The oracular lord of

creation vouchsafed response and said: ‘The Chauhan army shall —

conquer, but perish in the conquest. Many wounded men shall fall

in the battle, bereft of life; you shall be protected by the grace of

Brahma and Gorakhnath.” The king bowed his head on hearing

this, and great joy filled a soul: ‘‘ Come life, come death, be victory

mine, then heaven is won.’

The Chauhan left the temple of the a Siva rejoicing ; the

army patted for the fray, the trumpets gave a dread sound. As they

marched irom Batesur, the elephants led the van; all the Chauhan

forces met at the Charmavati. The trumpets gave a fierce sound;

great was the gathering of kings and nobles: Seshnag was troubled

by the crowd of hosres and elephants, as the army passed on to

Indragarh. The Chauhan princes met at the river Sindh; at dawn

Mallakhaén heard the news from the chief of the spies : “‘ The Chauhéns —

have arrived at Basavgarh.’”* On hearing this, Mallakhén acted —

prudently and summoned his counsellors, and priests, saying: “ Speak,

friends, and advise me; shall I keep my family with me, orsend them ~

to Mahoba? join counsel and declare what seems to you best.” His

kinsmen and counsellors made answer, revealing their thoughts:

“‘ Despatch your family to Mahoba.”’ Thus spoke all the counsellors

and bards: “ Set your mind at ease by sending the women to Mahoba;

then give your whole soul to the battle.”’+ Mallakh4n pondered the —

advice of his kinsmen and counsellors, and went into the seraglio to

speak with the Queen.

So ends the fourth canto, entitled Mallakhan’s Council.

ee eee

Postscript.

While correcting the proof sheets of the above, I received a copy of

the Journal containing Mr. Beames’s complete translation. I have —

* Bdsavgarh—z. e. Indragarh: Vasava being a name of Indra. q

+ The following Persian words occur in the above passage: viz., sardd’,

gacid, réh, kumak, fauj, khabr, astl, ptl, and mahall. 7

1869. | Reply to Mr. Growse. ya

_ read this with great interest, and congratulate the writer on his spiri-

ted reproduction of the general substance and style of the original. I

only demur to its being described as a literal translation, which it

really isnot. However, a little looseness of rendering will make the

work not a whit the less acceptable to the general reader; and any

asperity of verbal criticism, into which I may have been betrayed,

will, I trust, be attributed solely to the fact that I expected a work of

rather severe type from a scholar who has achieved a philological re-

putation. Yet I must express a hope that, if Mr. Beames continues

in his idea not only of translating but also of editing the poem, he will

reproduce the MSS. as closely as possible, and not venture upon hasty

emendations, which in the majority of cases, more mature reflection

would convince him were quite unnecessary. Thus in the forty lines

which we have both translated, I see no occasion to alter more than a

single letter, reading in one place biddh for giddh. Mr. Beames on

the other hand with a better MS. before him, proposes several sweep-

ing alterations, which his brief notes enable me to see are based on

mere misconceptions of the content. F.S. G.

anna

Reply to Mr. Growse.

I wish to be brief, because Mr. Growse has already occupied too much

Space to no purpose, and because my remarks are few and simple.

1, My text differs so widely from Mr. Growse’s, that on reading

_ his, it looks to me like quite a different poem.

2. There are only four MSS. of Chand accessible to European

| scholars. Two of these are in my possession, the third is in the libra-

ry of the Royal Asiatic Society in London, the fourth in the Bodleian

| at Oxford. Mr. Growse possesses no copy of the poem.

3. Having no copy of Chand, but having picked up some old Hin-

di works which contain copious but garbled extracts from Chand

| mixed up with extraneous matter, Mr. Growse condemns my translation

| in no measured terms, because it differs from his own incorrect text !

| Iwill first defend my own translation in those places where Mr.

| Growse attacks it, and then give the correct version of the original from

| the real MSS.

172 Reply to Mr. Growse. [ No. 4,

I do not criticise Mr. Growse’s specimens of translation, as the Hin-

di from which he translates is not traceable in either of my copies of

Chand, and appears not to be written by Chand at all, but by some

modern author who has borrowed the poet’s name.

Lines 1-4. These lines stand as follows :

qa fea ae nea ufa |

waz frat uta x7

azul ofasry Gt cis Ufa |

STFA FS AVTHT |

This shews how erroneous Mr. Growse’s version is. It foists in a

second fef@ in the first line, then writes dwrg for drugg, not knowing

that Chand always throws the r back in such words as these, as srab for

sarb, dhram for dharm, subran for subarn and many others, and then

to eke out the rhyme alters bhug into bhurg a purely imaginary word;

bhug is a common Chand corruption for bhw ‘ arm,’ and the compound ~

mahdbhug means, as I have translated it ‘mighty armed’ like ‘maha

bahw’ a common epithet of kings. Mr. Growse’s notes on these four

lines are simple nonsense ; and his mistake of supposing swvijaya ‘ very

victorious’ to be the name of the king is the more ridiculous because

the real name Padam Sen is given a few lines further on.

4, Sevahi, says Mr. Growse is a verb! Iiso, it would be interesting

to know what part of the verb it is. Mr. Growse is, it would seem,

unaware of the Prakrit form of the dative plural (Lassen Inst. B. p. 311, —

where it is wrongly given as an instrumental) from the Sanskrit from

@aw, which in Prakrit becomes Saf¥ and finally qatz.

As to nisin meaning ‘a kettledrum,’ it may be so, but I do not find :

it in five of the best dictionaries ; and as the real texts read bahusadh

or sddd and not ndd,I prefer to retain the ordinary translation of

‘ standards.’

5. Here again Mr. Growse’s text is absurdly wrong; a reference to”

my text as given below will shew that my rendering is correct. The

‘‘ puissant chiefs” of Mr. Growse’s translation, are evidently a creation —

of his own brain, or of his Pandit’s, for I do not see how he gets it out ;

of his own text even.

7. ‘Mr. B. has entirely omitted the words hay sankhi.” Yes, 1

have, because they are not in the text. ie

8. “Apparently Mr. B. has wrongly divided the words.” Mr. B.

1869. ] Reply to Mr. Growse. 173

has done no suchthing, but has translated his own text literally ; not

having had Mr. Growse’s fancy text to confuse him, for which he is

thankful. The introduction of the words ‘ Siva’s bow’ was caused by

the simple fact that ‘pindaka’ which is the name of that bow, occurs

in my true text, though not in Mr. Growse’s jumble.

9. “The text speaks of ten sons only, no daughters.”’ The text

says ‘das putr putri.’ If this does not mean ‘ten sons and daughters,’

I wish to know what it does mean? As to the suggestion that Padam

Sen was one of these ten sons, it is an unfounded assertion into which

Mr. G. has been betrayed by his faulty text.

12. Ta ur putri pragat says my text. I translate word for word.

‘From her breast a daughter sprung.’ Mr. Growse says, “ this is

awkward English and not required by the original.’”’ The preceding

line is ta ghart nari sujan, which again I have rendered literally,

“Tn his house was a wellborn dame.’

14. Hereagain Mr. Growse is blundering over a bad text. The word

he reads sisw is really sasz the moon; and the word be reads vais and

tell us is for avasthd, (though where he got this idea from is a puzzle),

is simply bhes, ‘dress, appearance, guise’ as I have given it; ‘ samir’ is

an error for ‘samip;’ and Mr. Growse’s text is quite wrong in the

fourth line, which he ignorantly (or rather his Pandit again) mixes up

with the third, for it wants at least a couple of feet to make it scan !

15,16. Your text as it stands is not intelligible, and I should

like to know by what process you get your English out of it. And

dé propos of your English, what do you mean by pearls, parrots and

swans shimmering like fish in a stream? I see nothing about “shim-

mering”’ or ‘streams’ in your text. I am afraid your Pundit, in

whom you trusted, has deceived you; or was it the intelligent bunnias

of that village on the frontier of your district, mentioned in your

former article ?

22. My rendering cannot be correct since the Hindus reckon only

six sciences, says Mr. Growse. To this I reply, that Chand says

chaturdas ; and Mr. Growse is perhaps thinking of the six schools of

Vedic science, to the exclusion of the secular sciences.

23, 24. ‘These lines are remarkable, it appears, as the only two

which I have translated accurately! I might have been spared this

‘sarcasm ; if Mr. Growse’s object had been honest criticism, nothing

174 Reply to Mr, Growse. [ No. 4,

need have been said of these lines. My offence in the eyes of this

gentleman, who is a stranger to me and to most scholars in Europe,

consists in my having dared to meddle with Chand at all, seeing that

he had constituted himself interpreter in chief, and head referee on all

questions connected with this author.

The rest of Mr. Growse’s criticisms are founded on a text so widely

differing from mine, that I cannot even find which of my lines he

refers to.

In conclusion, I can only say that I will take no further notice of

anything Mr. Growse may write. I cannot undertake to teach him

the rudiments of old Hindi in the Society’s Journal, nor can I spare

the time to copy out for him my text. Iam preparing an edition of

the complete text for the Society much of which is ready, and will

appear shortly. Mr. Growse will then know what is really in Chand |

and what isnot. ‘Till then I should recommend him to hold his

peace, or at any rate not to accuse of want of scholarship, a man whom

he does not know, on the strength of a text which he has not seen.

And I would give him a further parting word of advice, namely, not

to rely on his Pandit too entirely, but to try and reason out for him-

self the true meaning of every word, and above all, not to listen too

credulously to village shopkeepers and grainsellers, however interest-—

ing and intelligent they may be !

My text, as it stands in two complete MSS.

wy yeuraniaa fea.

Sur yea fea ae aca ofa |

aye frat wife x7 |

agi ofasrg ot usa |

BTISI FS ALT AAT | & ll

Sua Uy ay eu ofa!

ufaarg taste |

Ite UT Fats aa |

yte frura ss WIE I RI

afaa aa Tana 4s az!

are Ot Oy asta feat i

ZU CAC VE Wea

wa aa afea aa faa |

1869.]

Sel |

ata

Reply to Mr. Growse. 17

AA BAT waa |

Set Fa Alaa GIs

TH ATaH at ure fraras |

Yt UC TH UIs

Sa Ts Tala Ae Tay

CY GI VAS VAS |

WSTC VAlY Batra ea!

aI Wea Ua FIT FAT ll = ki

qa aa HAC TAT

aT att AT Gare |

aT Bt Wat WTS |

: Bas ae ata wea | 2 1

| Was we ate ara

HA Fas VT Tay |

are ay ate ar wala

waa ca frat!

faite wae Wea Var!

aa tsra fan wea |

WIT HIT BWR faa |

arent ay fas aie aera i yn

gata wy aete <a ata |

faea ara dy aaa |

qatanty ST Wearaat |

Hae ae HAac se |

VAS ATA alfafacayg |

Cala SY at Ws |

US dal wa ay atest |

at At TAA Ca tt Sl

MASA GRA THT |

Glas Het Gara |

sft AYICSG YI FS:

Tota saat WATT 1 OI

afyaa da cea fata |

aze faata ferare |

ate sR fewaty Tas |

176

Ts not this enough? If not, Mr. Growse must wait till my com-

Sel

afan |

Reply to Mr. Growse.

TF HA WAT SATS i

aa wife War Tes |

faafa srt ara fact «fa |

BFR Wart aay At

faa we sifa ait ata

ae Visa Vs aia |

ae aa ara wee wat |

Wa eeta waa afta \

Meat aa afer Beg AT I

ea Wee aa ate Cala |

A SN

eat Wee Ware aE

dat wag aa ate sifed |

a fate afe cara we |

fafe ufe a CAA Wea |

Te FS Ts Ue

faa eeat att Fi

Ue Vetad Wel |! Xo 1%

aie Hate ca frcioy fates |

aq fay ei ae eq

ACA ACY FATS H |

ae yafaat TST ag ti

Hiew aa Gea

UTe Utiaaa fra we] |

aaa Tey Taqay I

ea ata Wad We ae |

aa Fa STS FUT!

° Ss

ay aifa ae SAT!

wat wate wate qr |

WACS GTS TA I

plete edition of the text comes out.

* The preferable reading is CTH TTH qsat aa {1 she could not have been

teaching the parrot as she is said in the preceding line to have forgotten all

about him. Ihave altered my first rendering of this line, as I got the Agra

MS., after I had written it.

Joun BEAMEs.

[ No. 4,

1869. ] Some Observations on the Temples of “ Razdan.” 1717

Some Observations on the Temples of ‘ Razdan’ or “ Razdoing” in the

Lar” Pergunnah, Cashmere, By Lreut.-Ool. D. F. Newaut,R. A.

(With 3 Plates.)

- I now proceed to afford as much information as I possess of the

group of temples called ‘ Razdan’ or ‘ Razdoing’ by the inhabitants of

the Lar valley in Cashmere.

These extensive ruins, certainly the next to those of Martund in im-

portance—if not even more extensive in the superficial space occupied

by them,—are the only group not described by Cunningham in his

learned and masterly essay on the Arian order of Architecture,

printed in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for Septem-

ber, 1848. Before proceeding to put on paper my own speculations

| regarding them, I will transcribe verbatem the memorandum I find in

| my journal on the occasion of my visiting and measuring these ruins

| on the 24th, 25th, 26th September, 1852. I must premise, however,

| by stating that they are overgrown with dense underwood and large

forest trees, and it was only after much labour and the employment

of many hands in cutting away the jungle that I was able to collect

the following data. I transcribe from my journal therefore, ‘‘ Descrip-

‘tion of the Razdén or fazdoing ruins under the Boodshere Hill in

the Lar pergunnah of Cashmere.”

_' (1.) They consist of two principal temples connected by the re-

mains of a paved causeway and several connecting buildings, clois-

ters, We.

_ (2.) The Northern temple, of which the roof has fallen in, is

314 feet square and has been surrounded by cloisters 160’ x 120

‘in measurement. The interior chamber is 143’ square. In its front

‘is a stone reservoir 11’ X 63’ feet of a very peculiar construction,

and the use of which is not quite obvious, unless it has served as one

‘of those vats from which charitable brahmins were wont to distribute

‘rice, &c., tothe poor.” (Vide Plate III.)

_ There are several small buildings grouped around it. The one

sketched was probably at the entrance and is about 20 feet wide. At

ithe north-west angle of this temple is the Nara Nag, a small lake or

| 24

178 Some Observations on the Temples of “ Razdan.” [No. 4,

pool, and a place of Sndn or religious ablution in the pilgrimage of

Hurmooktur-gunga. Into this pool, the pilgrims of the present day

use to cast their mountain sticks and phoolas (grass shoes) on their

descent from the mountains whilst on their return from the holy lake

of Gungadul.

(3.) About 80 yards in front due south of this temple are the

remains of a large building formerly supported on pillars, parts of which

still exist in the corners, and that on the pathway, which I at first

mistook for a sort of “‘font,’’ is peculiarly an object of veneration to

the pilgrims who there make their final salaam. This* building

whose exact use I find it difficult to conjecture, measures 110’ x 60’.

The entrance to it has been by a massive flight of steps on the south

side.

(4.) Immediately in front of the above upon the causeway are the

ruins of another small building about 25’ square.

(5.) The Southern temple—by far the most perfect of the group

from having its roof entire—I made by measurement 313' k 302’. It

may perhaps have been 313 feet square like the other. The interior

chamber, 14’ square, with dome entire about 20’ high interiorly, was

surrounded by an enclosure 120’ & 80’. It is situated on higher ground

above the Northern temple ; and, owing to the precipitous nature of

the ground, the dimensions of the North and East faces of the cloisters

have been curtailed. A gateway at the North-West angle of this

enclosure leads out into the causeway.

There are no less than six groups of buildings immediately around

this temple, in the roof of which several large fir trees have taken

root, presenting a singular appearance, their knarled twisted roots

grasping the loose stonework, and their height being about equal to”

* On consideration I am inclined to think that this large building may have ;

been a “ masjid” or perhaps a summer house constructed at the same time

as the terraced garden called the Guldb Bdégh immediately adjacent to

it, in comparatively recent times by some Muhammadan magnate, possibly —

(owing to the occurrence of the name Boodsher or Brod shake as applied to

the place by the inhabitants) by ‘“ Zasm-ul-’ adbidin” to whom that title

was emphatically applied. This same king also built the “ Lank” or island

in the Wulu Lake about the year 1443, A. D., with its mosque and

summer house on the site of an ancient temple, whose summit was at

‘that time visible about the waters of the lake. Vide page 8of my sketch of

Muhammadan History of Cashmere, published in the Asiatic Society’s Journal,

September, 1854. It was a common practice of the Muhammadans thus to

turn to account existing Hindu buildings and sites. pr

1869. ] Some Observations on the Temples of “ Razdan.” 179

that of the temple, which may be 50 or 60 feet. The sketch par-

tially represents this. (Vide Plates II. and IV.)

(6.) The entrance of both temples, and that of the large centre

building are due south. The entrance of the enclosures due west.

The two temples are about 230 yards apart, have been connected by a

stone causeway and a connecting chain of buildings.—Qpposite to the

entrance to the gateway of the southern temple is a raised plateau

of land built up into what has evidently been a garden (now called

the Gulab Bigh).

Thus far my notes conduct me, and I shall now, before closing this

paper, venture to put before the Society some remarks and ideas which

subsequent reading has enabled me to form on this interesting group

oftemples. I would remark, however, that although so extensive, they

do not approach some of the other temples of Cashmere in interest of

architectural detail. The two centre temples, however, are Ariostyle,

and those to which they bear most affinity are those of Puttun,

and I would attribute them to above the same era. I see that Cun-

ningham assigns about the date 883—901 A. D. to the Puttun-

temples which were built by Sankara Verma. With regard, how-

ever, to some of the adjacent buildings and fragments I have spoken

of as surrounding the two groups at Razdoing, I am inclined to attri-

bute to them a very high antiquity of origin ; and I even think it pro-

bable that there may have been more ancient temples than the present

ones standing on the same site; and that these I have described may

_have been repaired or reconstructed (as was usual) in their present

form. I am led to this conclusion by what I find recorded in the

| Raja Tarangini (Persian translation) that in the reign of Jaloka, son

| of Asoka (to whose reign I see the date 250 B. C. assigned), it is re-

lated that this prince (Jaloka) was wont daily by means of a serpent*

to visit daily the temples of Waramool, Bej Biharie, and Zar, and

| * This “ serpent” is frequently mentioned in the ancient chronicles of Cash-

) mere, and appears to have been a mechanical machine, a propeller, or flying

| bridge. Itis related that King Meegwahun having conquered Ceylon, Surat,

| &., returned to Cashmere by way of Scinde, and passed his army over the

| river Indus (A. D. 22) by means of serpent; but the fabulous and the quasi-

| Historic are so blended in the earlier chronicles, that it is impossible to dig-

| sever them, and although the word is the same, the chronicle in the case quoted

| in the text, of Jaloka’s daily visit to the three shrines seems to imply an aero.

‘nautic element as the sloke speaks of a “flying” serpent; but Jaloka ig always

\mentioned as a magician king possessed of supernatural powers.

180 Some observations on the temples of ‘‘ Razdan.” _[No. 4,

I conceive that by this last we may fairly infer that the temples under

consideration are alluded to, as there is no other group one-tenth so

extensive to be found in the Lar or Scinde valley.

Should this conjecture be correct, they would undoubtedly possess a

very high antiquity and in fact must be regarded as the most ancient

temples in the valley of Cashmere (not excepting that on the Takht-

i-Sulaiman or Sandhimana parvat) which is stated to have been built

by this very king Jaloka, but seems to have been repaired and re-

stored to its present form by Gopaditya about A. D. 250, and is

generally considered the most ancient temple extant in Cashmere. I

may remark that a few fragments of temples overwhelmed in the

dense jungles exist to this day near Baramoola, but they have never

been to my knowledge deemed of sufficient importance to merit dis- —

entanglement or description. Nevertheless I believe these, together .

with the group I have taken the liberty of introducing in this paper,

to be the very oldest remnants of the ancient architecture of Cash-

mere ; for as I have stated in a former paper, the temples of Bejbiha-

rie mentioned with those of Lar and Baramoola as already existing

in the time of Jaloka, were overthrown by the Muhammadan fanatic

Shih4buddin about the end of the 14th century, and are out of

contest for the honor, such as it is, of having survived the storms. of

two thousand years, the attacks of Muhammadan fury, and the over-

whelming vegetation of the dense forest.

The dates of other and possibly more attractive temapten such ag

Martund, Pyatch, Pangethur, Puttun, &c., are much more recent, as is _

also that on the Takht-i-Sulaim4n in its present form as stated above.

I have, I hope, said enough to attract attention to this remarkable

group of temples hitherto so strangely overlooked. Situated as they

are, however, in so remote a spot, and overwhelmed as they are in

forest, it were no light task to undertake their entire disentanglement.

I believe I have nearly exhausted this subject, or rather my slender

information on it, but before finally quitting it, I would respectfully

suggest to the Society that further investigation into the primitive

form of worship of the Cashmere valleys and mountains seems desira-

ble, as I have reason to think that relics* of a religion earlier

* Bhadiakal, in the Kamraj, is a sort of small Stonehenge; and elsewhere -

in the deep forests appear isolated monoliths, altars, &c., attesting a certain 4

form of sylvan or Druidical worship.

JOURNAL AS. SOCY. BENGAL, VOL. XXXVIII., PART I, 1263,

Plate II.

Temple in the Lar Parganah, Kashmir,

Photozincographed. at the Surveyor General's Office Calcutta,

—

YAO

Mad

Wah oa

D2 q

. yt e ‘

44, ‘

: t ,. ee ats ;

/ * i

et ae

faa , Be, ta ‘

al a y f

a oes ‘S

a¥ Me

{

: ; p-

*] 7

~ .

“ *

‘

’

aa at

Plate IV.

1869.

PART I

BENGAL, VOL. XXXVIIL,,

SOCY

JOURNAL AS

‘eyy0

OTB) SOTFO sera aokpamng ayy ye poeydeagoonrzoj07,]

‘mIysey ‘ueuesieg sey 344 ur stduray,

1869.] Translations from the Tarikh i Firhaz Shahé. 181

than the Brahminical faith are to be met with in the deep forests of

Cashmere, and which I believe to be perhaps anterior to the great

Aryan invasion, when Cashmere in common with the other provinces

of Hindastin, was colonized by the Hindi race.

Professional occupations have long interfered in my case with the

pursuit of such investigations in which I once felt much interest ; and

I must crave the indulgence of the Society for any crude or ill-studied

points I may have noted for their consideration. I have availed my-

self of the first leisure I have obtained for years for such writing ; and

even now, having no books of reference with me, I possess nothing

but my private MSS. journal, and notes to refer to for dates, &e.

beyond my memory, and this I find, after so long an interval, some-

times fails me. I find myself therefore abruptly forced to bring this

paper to a close.

Translations from the Térikh i Firtz Shih, by the late Mazor

ie A. R. Futur, Director of Public Instruction, Panjab.

(Communicated by T. W. H. Toxrzort, Lsg., C. 8.)

The Reign of’ Alauddin « Khiljt,

In the name of God the most merciful !

Praise* be to God, the cherisher of mankind, and blessings rest upon

his prophet, Muhammad, and all his offspring, as well as perfect peace

_and safety.

Thus says the most devout of Musalmans, Zia of Bar an, when,

i during the year 695, Sultan ’Alduddin ascended the iniperial throne,

| he conferred on his brother the title of Ulugh Khan. on Malik Nucrat

| Jalesari that of Nugrat Khan, on Malik Hizabruddin that of Zafar

| Khan, and on Sanjar, his [Mir Majlis] that of Alap Khén. He

| also raised his intimate friends to the rank of Amirs, and such ag

| were already Amirs. he promoted to the grade of Maliks. He further

| granted every one of his old associates permission to take fresh horse-

‘Men into service, and as a countless hoard of wealth had fallen into

* Ed. Bibl. Indica, by Sayyid Ahmad Khan, p. 243. Vide also Baddont, I,

}p. 182. Words in [ iii and the foot notes, are additions or slight alterations

+ made by the Editor of this Journal.

182 Translations from the Térikh + Firts Shahi. [No. 4,

his hands, and he had been guilty of an act condemned alike by

God and man, either with a view to the expediency of the moment,

or to deceive the public, or else for the purpose of glossing over the

murder of Sultan Jalaluddin, he threw open the door of liberality

and munificence before (high and low, 7. ¢.) all grades. He occupied

himself too in making preparations for his journey (to the capital of

Delhi), but owing to the incessant fall of rain, the copious floods,

and the heaviness of the sands, he continued to delay his departure

and was purposing to proceed to Delhi after the rising of Canopus.

He was under considerable apprehension, however, of Arkali Khan,

the second son of Sultan Jaldluddin, who was one of the Rustams

of the age, and the most valiant man of his day. As soon therefore,

as the news arrived from Delhi, that the latter had not come yet,

Sultan ’Aléuddin conceiving his non-arrival to be favourable to his

own fortunes, and knowing that the throne of Delhi could not be up-

held by Sultan Ruknuddin Ibrahim, and that there was not suf-

ficient coin in the Jalali treasury to raise and enrol fresh levies, he took

advantage of the opportunity, and in the very height of the rainy

season, set out for Dehli. From the excess of rain that year, the

Ganges and Jamna had become vast rivers, and every (paltry) stream

was as a Ganges or a Jamna, and from the depth of mud and mire,

the roads remained (almost impassable). Ata season like this, Sul-

tan ’Alduddin set forth from Karah with his elephants and his

wealth and his army; and he exhorted his Khans and Maliks to use

- their best endeavours towards raising fresh horsemen, (bidding them)

not to be particular or scrupulous in fixing the amount of their

pay, nor to take into account the exact year and mouth (of enlistment,) —

but to scatter about gold without stint, so that vast hosts might be —

collected by such bountiful largess. About the time Sultan ’Alauddin

was proceeding towards Dehli, they had constructed some small light

moveable machines [manjanég ], and at every halting-place where his

pavilion was erected, just at the time of his alighting there, they daily —

placed in front of his portico five maunds of gold coin in one of these —

waggons, and scattered them among the spectators ; whereupon the

soldiery and the neighbouring population used to congregate all

round, and carry off the coin. The concourse in front of the royal

portico thus increased day by day, and by the end of two or three

1869. ] Translations from the Tértkh i Firdz Shahé. 183

weeks the news spread, throughout the whole of the districts [£hitat]

and towns of Hindtstan, that Sultan ’Aléuddin was on his way to

take possession of Delhi, and was scattering gold profusely among the

populace, and was entertaining countless levies of horse and foot. On

this, the population, whether military or non-military, all hurried to-

wards the Sultan’s camp; so that by the time ’Alauddin reached

Badaon, fifty or sixty thousand horse and foot had congregated in this

royal camp during a rainy season like this, and had formed a vast mul-

titude. When Sultan ’ Alauddin arrived at Baran, [in the open space of

the Masjid of the town] Nucrat Khan began taking the inhabitants of

the place into service whether they were nobles, men of note, or com-

mon soldiers, and paid no heed to fixing the amount of their wages,

or taking security from them. In a loud tone he proclaimed: “ If

Delhi fall into my hands, I shall be able to acquire on the first year a

hundred times as much wealth as what I now disburse ; and should

the kingdom not come into my possession, it is better that the wealth

which I have brought away from Deogir with such infinite trouble,

should fall into the hands of the people rather than into those of my

foes and adversaries.

On Sultan ’Alduddin’s arrival at Baran, as he had made over a

force to Zafar Khan, he directed him to proceed by way of Kol, and

march along that road at a rate corresponding to that at which he

himself (the Sultan) marched along the Badaon and Baran roads. The

Maliks and Amirs of Jalaluddin’s party who had been nominated

to oppose the advance of Sultan ’Alauddin and Zafar Khan, such

as Malik Tajuddin Kéuchi, Malik Abaji Akhurbak, Malik Amir

?Ali Diwanah, Malik "Usman Amir Akhur, Malik Amiri Kalan,

Malik ’Umar Sarkhah, and Malik Hiran-mar, all came into Baran,

and joined the Sultan. They each received 20 or 30, and some even

50 maunds of gold ; and to every one of the force which accom-

panied those Maliks and Amirs, a present of 300 tankahs was

distributed. The Jaléli army being thus totally broken up, the

Amirs that had stayed behind at Delhi began to waver in their alle-

giance and the maliks who had gone over to Sultan ’Alauddin used

to say publicly, “‘ The inhabitants of the city certainly find fault with

us, and declare that we have been guilty of base ingratitude in

turning our backs on our master’s son and going over to the

184 Transiations from the Taritkh i Firdz Shéhi. [No. 4,

enemy, but these misguided individuals do not perceive that in

reality the kingdom of Jalaluddin came to an end the day he set

out from the palace of Kilokhari,* and of his own free will went

in hot haste to Karah, and there of his own accord and with hig

eyes open, put his neck and those of his intimate associates in jeo-

pardy. What can we do therefore but join Sultan ’Aléuddin ?”

At this juncture when the Maliks had all gone over to Sultén

*Alauddin, and the Jalali army was completely broken up, Malikah

Jahan, who was one of the most weak-minded of weak minded women,

sent to call Arkali Khan from Multan, writing to this effect : “ I was

wrong in-placing your younger brother on the throne, while you are

still in existence ; for none of the Maliks and Amirs stand in any awe

of him, and most of them have gone over to Sultan ’Alauddin, so that

the sovereignty is passing out of our hands. Make post haste therefore,

if you can, and come to me, and mount the throne of your father, and

redress my wrong. As for the son who now occupies the throne, you |

are his elder brother, and more worthy and better fitted for the

sovereignty ; he shall therefore serve you as an obedient vassal.

As for me, I am a woman, and females are (proverbially) deficient in —

intellect ; (I confess) I have been in error, but pardon the fault of your

mother, and take possession of your father’s kingdom, Should you

give way to your resentment and fail to come, Sultén ’Aléuddin ig

advancing in such strength and grandeur that he will assuredly seize

upon Delhi, and will spare neither me nor you.”’

Arkali Khan would not come at his mother’s bidding, however, but

sent her an excuse (saying): As the nobles and their retainers have

all gone over to the enemy, what would be the good of my coming?

Sultan ’Alauddin no sooner heard that Arkali Khain would not j

comply with his mother’s invitation than he ordered the drum of

rejoicing to be sounded. i.

Some delay occurred to Sultén ’Aléuddin in the Vicinity of the

fords of the Jamnah, owing to the vast volume of water in that river, —

and his having no boat in his possession; but while he tarried at

* Kilok’hari lies about eight miles south of Dibli, on the Jamnah. “ Six

months after his accession, Sultan Mu’izzuddin Kai Qubéd left Dihlf, and founde d

Fort Kilok’ hari, the ruins of which may even now LA. H. 1004] be seen on the

[right] bank of the Jamnah near Khwajah Khizr’s ford.” Baddoni L., p. 137,

where the spelling or has is to be corrected to CORES has ‘ . pa

1869.] Translations from the Parikh a Porte Shiht. 185

various places along its bank, [Canopus rose above the horizon, | the

stream decreased, and he was thus enabled to cross with the whole

of his forces at the ford of Baghpat, after which he encamped in the

plain of Jud.*

Sultan Ruknuddin Ibréhim then issued forth from the city with

the royal insignia, attended by such force as he still had with him,

and pitched his camp opposite to Sultan ’Alauddin’s, with the inten-

tion of bringing on an early engagement. After night had came on,

however, the entire left wing of Sultan Ruknuddin’s army having

mounted their horses about midnight, a tremendous uproar arose, and

they all went bodily over to Sultan ’Aléuddin. Sultan Ruknuddin

was thus rendered utterly powerless, but towards the close of the

night they managed to open the Badaon gate ; and he having taken

some gold tankahs out of the treasury, and a few horses out of the

stable, placed his mother and other females of his household in front,

and issuing forth under cover of the darkness from the Ghaznin gate,

took the road to Multan. Malik Qutbuddin ’Alawi together with his

children and Malik Ahmad Chap also abandoned their homes, and

accompanied Malikah Jahan and Sultén Ruknuddin towards Multan.

Next day Sultan Alauddin set out with regal pomp and _ splen-

dour, and entered the plain of Siri (cos4,) where he alighted, and the

sovereignty was there delivered over to him. He also pitched his camp

at Siri, and the diwans, the custodians of the elephants with the animals

in their charge, the governors (kotwals) with the keys of their

forts, the justices and judges, and all the other persons of note and

respectability in the city waited upon him ; whereupon the earth

assuined a totally different aspect, and a state of affairs altogether

new arose throughout the world. By the immensity of his wealth,

and the vast number of his adherents, no matter whether an indivi-

dual (here and there) took the oath of allegiance to him or not, the

public prayers were offered in his behalf, and the coinage of the mint

was struck in his name.

_-* Baghpat (wach) lies north of Dihli on the Jamnah, Opposite to it on the

right side, our maps give a place Joondhpir, which appears to be the Jaidh

(859>, Or with a nasal n, Ojg>) mentioned by Barani, For Baghpat, the

Society’s Edition, p. 246, 1. 2 has &gilf Kat’h(?). Regarding Siri, vide Journal

A. S. Bengal for 1847, p. 974; but in the whole article Siri is wrongly spelt

Secree, for Seeree ; also J. A. 8. B. 1866, p. 199.

186 Translations from the Térikh 1 Firtz Shahi. [ No. 4,

Towards the end* of the year 695, Sultan ’Alauddin entered into

the city with a most wonderful retinue and a countless multitude, and

took his seat on the throne of Delhi in the Daulat Khanah, after which

he repaired to the Koshak i la’l, (¢.e., crimson palace) and made that

the royal residence. As there was a countless hoard of wealth accu-

mulated in his treasury, and vast sums had been distributed in largess

among the people, whereby their purses and money bags had been

replenished with coin [tankahs and jetals,| they gave themselves up

to gaiety and pleasure, and indulged in wine and all kinds of revelry.

Within the city they erected several wondrous pavilions, where wine,

sherbet, and betel were distributed gratis; and in almost every house

an entertainment was held. The Maliks, Amirs, and all the other

men of note and respectability invited one another to feasts ; and wine

and beauty, music and mirth, became the order of the day.

Sultan ’Al4uddin also, under the excitement of youth and pros-

perity, and the pride of his countless treasures, his servants and

domestics, and his numerous elephants and horses, was immersed in —

festivity and pleasure, and from the extent of his generosity and muni-

ficence, he made the populace ardent supporters of his rule and govern- —

ment. From motives of state expediency moreover, he bestowed

offices and estates [agtd’] upon the Jalali Maliks and Amirs who had

gone over to his side. To Khwajah Khatir who was one of the most

celebrated Wazirs, he gave the dignity of prime minister; to Qazi

Cadr i jahén Cadruddin ’Arif, the father of Dawar Malik, the

Kaza i Mamialik ; and [the offices of] Sayyid Ajall, Shaikh Islam, and —

Khatib he left to the former Sayyid Ajall, Shaikh Isl4m and

Khatib, respectively. The Diwa4niinshé too he conferred on the

former ’Umdatalmulk, father of Malik Hamiduddinf and A’azzud-—

din, and he sent for Malik Hamiduddin and Malik A’azzuddin, —

the sons of ’"Umdatalmulk, who in wisdom, virtue, and a thorough ~

knowledge of mankind, as well as in their high and noble birth, and —

all kinds of excellencies, possessed no equals ; one of whom became a

confidential officer of the royal household, and the other was entrusted —

with the management of the Diw4n i insha.

* The 22nd Zi Hajjah 695, or 20th October 1296.

+ The Bibl. Indica, Edition, p. 248, has Am*ruddin(?), and immediately

after Hamiduddin. For Déiwdn i Inshé we find under the Mughuls the title of

Mir Munshi. 4

1869. ] Translations from the Tarikh i Firiiz Shahi, 187

Although Nucrat Khan was Naib i mulk, during the first year he was

made Kotwal, while Malik Fakhruddin Kichi obtained the post of

Dadbeg i hazrat,* Zafar Khan became the’ Arzimamdlik,+ Malik ’Abaji

Jalali (7. e., who had served under Jalaluddin ] the Akhurbeg, and Malik

Hiranmar, the Naib Barbeg. Such an assemblage of Khans and Maliks

both of the Jalali and ’Alai party was thus congregated at the Sultan’s

Court, as could never have been witnessed in former times.

Malik ’Aléulmulk, the compiler’s uncle, was appointed to Karah

and Audh during the first year of his reign, and Malik Juna

received his old post of Naib Vakildar, while Muayyidulmulk the

compiler’s father, was given the place of Naib and Khwajahship of

Baran. Thus were all the onerous duties and important situations

committed to the charge of able, eminent, and experienced persons,

and Dehli as well as all other parts of the country became a rose

garden and a pasture.

Kstates were then bestowed on each Malik,} grants made to

religious communities, and lands, pensions, and gratuities lavished on

all such as had just claims to them ; while a considerable increase was

added to those already in eel

[To the people he gave new employments.] The people conse-

quently grew so enamoured of gold, that the mention of Sultan

’Alaéuddin’s base deed, and his ungrateful treachery never crossed

any one’s lips, and naught was left to mankind but to revel in gaiety.

In the first year of this reign moreover, the retainers of ’Aléuddin,

both new and old, had reached a vast number, yet all of them received

donations of [twelve and] six months’ salary in hard cash; and

during that year folks of all classes both high and low lived in such

ease and affluence, that I never recollect seeing in any age or period

such perfect happiness and contentment, nor can those who are of much

riper years than I recal such to remembrance,

* JT. ¢., the Dddbeg of the residence of the emperor, as opposed to the office

of qdztilashkar. The office corresponds to that of the Mir ’Adl under the

Mughuls. For Kich¢ the list of grandees (Ed. Bibl. Indica, p. 240) has the

more usual Jind.

+ The ’Arzi Mamdlik corresponds to the Mé ’Arz of the Mughuls, whose

office is defined in the Ain Akbari, p. 257.

{ Perhaps it would be correcter to say—Milks and Wagfs were bestowed on

such as were worthy of waqfs. The word amldk is the pl. of milk, not of malik.

Vide Ain i Akbari, p. 271. Soon after ’Alauddin resumed the milks and wagss, as

Akbar did with the Sayarghals of his times.

188 Translations from the Térikh i Firkaz Shaht. [No. 4,

At the very outset, directly Sult4n ’Aléuddin had settled himself

on the throne of Dehli, he first of all set about the Multén business,

and applied himself to the overthrow of Sultén Jalaluddin’s sons.

He forthwith nominated Ulugh Khan and Zafar Khan with a party of

Maliks and Amirs and [30 or] 40,000 horse to Multén, whither they

proceeded, and at once invested the fortress. After the siege had conti-

nued for a month or two, the Kotwal and inhabitants of Multan

turned away from their allegiance to Sultan Jaldéluddin’s sons, and

some of the nobles came out from the fort to Ulugh Khan and Zafar

Khan.

The Sultaén’s sons then made use of Shaikhul Islam Ruknuddin as

their envoy, and through him asked quarter of Ulugh Khan, and after

entering into a compact and treaty, they took the Shaikh along

with them and accompanied by the Maliks and Amirs who still

adhered to them, repaired to the presence of Ulugh Khan. He treated

them with great respect on that occasion, and gave them quarters

alongside his own pavilion. He then forwarded a despatch announcing

his success to Delhi; whereupon they immediately erected festive

canopies, and sounded the drum of rejoicing, published the news of the

victory | Fathnimah] from the pulpits (of all the mosques), and sent

the good tidings in all directions. Thus the Kingdom of Hindustan

had been fully and completely consigned to the care of Sultan ’Alaud-

din, and no rival or competitor for the Government was now leit.

Ulugh Khan and Zafar Khan taking the captive sons of Sultan

Jalaluddin, both of whom were scions of royalty [ Gahib 7 chatr |, as well

as their Maliks and Amirs, along with them, set out from Multan

towards Dehli, crowned with victory and success. Nucrat Khan being ~

deputed from the latter place, met- Ulugh Khan in the midst of —

his journey, and put out the eyes of Sultén Jalaluddin’s sons,° of his —

son-in-law Ulgha, and of Ahmad Chap Néib Amir Hajib, and then —

separated their families from them. All their goods and chattels too,

provisions,* and slaves, both male and female, together with all that

they had, did Nugrat Khan seize upon. He confined Sultan Jalalud-

* Major Fuller’s MS. appears to have had rozinah. The Hd. Bibl. Indica I

(p. 249) has zarrtnah, gold vessels, which seems preferable. ‘

The place where Nucrat Khan met Ulugh Khan is called in Baddoni (I, 183)

Abhohar, a mauga’ near Hansi,’ and the Lucknow Edition of Badaéoni(p. 47)

has Wahr, neither of which names I can trace on our Trig. Survey maps. :

1869. ] Translations from the Tértkh i Firkz Shahi. 189

din’s younger* son in the stronghold of Hansi, while he put to death

altogether the sons of Arkali Khan. Asfor Malikah Jahdn and the

other ladies of the household, as well as Ahmad Chap, he brought

them all into Delhi, and shut them up in his own mansion.

In the second year of this reign [697, Baddont], Nucrat Khan was

made Wazir. As Sultén ’Alauddin had sent for Malik ’Aléulmulk, the

compiler’s uncle, he came to Court attended by the Maliks and Amirs,

and brought in elephants and treasure that had been left with him

at Karah by the Sultan. In consequence of ’Aldulmalik’s having

grown excessively obese, and incapable of active duty, he gave him

the post of Kotwé4l instead of his former place of Malkulumara,

whereby all the able-bodied convicts [? bandiydn ¢ tazak] were put

under his charge. ‘They also laid hands on the estates [ free-holds,

amlak| and possessions of all the Jalali Maliks and Amirs, Nucrat

Khan himself making extraordinary exertions to get hold of their

property, and so collecting thousands upon thousands. In fact he

brought wealth into the treasury by every means that he could.

In this year moreover, viz. 696, A. H.,f an inroad of the Mughuls

took place, some of them having crossed the river Sind and entered

the country. Ulugh Khan and Zafar Khan with a host of the

’Aldi and Jalali Amirs, and immense forces were nominated to

repel their attack; and on the confines of Jarimanjar the army of

Islam had a severe engagement with the miscreants; in which the

standard of the true faith proved victorious, many of the enemy being

slain or captured, and their heads despatched to Delhi.

After the Multan success, and the capture of Sultan Jalaluddin’s

_ * The Ed. Bibl, Indica and Firishtah have merely son (Arkali?). If Major

Puller’s MS. had younger son [Ruknuddin] what became of Arkalt ? Badaoni

y says, both were handed over to the Kotw4l of Hansi, and ‘ killed together with

the two sons of Arkali. The women of the late emperor, and his remaining

children (farzandan) were imprisoned in Dilhi. Ahmad Chap [the Lucknow

_ Badition of Firishtah reads Habib], and Algh4 Mughul were sent to Gwaliar.’

i + So also the Hd. Bibl. Indica. Badaéoni and Firishtah have 698. The

leader of the Moghuls is called (galix (Badaoni, Hd. B. 1.), cgdle (Lucknow

_ Badéon{), and Dawa Khan, ruler of Mawaralnahr, by Firishtah (Lucknow Ed.)

who adds that he came with nearly 100,000 Mughuls. They were heathens.

‘The place of the battle is called Jarimanjur (Major Fuller), dar hudid + Jdran

Manjhir (both editions of Badaoni), dar hudid 4 Léhtr (Firishtah, Lucknow

‘Ed.), and dar hudid 1 Jélindhar (Kd. Bibl. Indica). pines

Bad4oni seems to have carelessly copied, as a Mughul co ohin. ‘euentioned

below. He has left out the attack on Siwistan.

190 Translations from the Tarikh i Firtz Shahi. [No. 4,

sons, the coinage of the ’Alai government had become (to a certain

degree) established ; but it was now still further confirmed by this

victory over the Mughuls, and the Sultan’s power and authority were

vastly augmented. Proclamations of the victory were published

throughout the city, drums beaten, pavilions erected, rejoicings made,

and festivities celebrated. Now that the ’Aléi Government had been thus

consolidated, the whole of the Jalali Maliks, in each town and through-

out the army, who had turned their backs upon their master, and gone

over to Sultan Alauddin, for which they had received maunds of gold,

and obtained various employments and estates, were seized, and while

some of them were cast into prison, and kept in confinement, others

were | blinded and] executed forthwith. All the wealth that they had

received from Sultan ’Aléuddin was confiscated together with their

household goods, and property ; their dwelling-houses being converted

to the royal use, and their estates annexed to the crown lands, so that

nought was left for their children. Their servants and domestics too

were placed under the control of the ’Aléi Amirs, and their [military ]

establishments were completely subverted.

Out of the whole of the Jalali Maliks and Amirs, three persons

only were spared by Sultan ’Aléuddin, and suffered no hurt from

him until the close of his reign. First, Malik Qutbuddin ’Alawi;

second, Malik Nasiruddin Rénah, custodian of the elephants, and

third, Amir Jamal,* father of Qadr Khan. These three individuals

did not desert Sultan Jalaluddin and his sons, nor would they

take any money from Sultan ’Aléuddin, and they’ alone remained —

safe in consequence, while the rest of the Jalali Amirs were extermi-

nated root and branch.

In the course of this year, Nucrat Khan collected by fines and taxes

a crore (of money), and lodged it in the treasury.

In the third year of his reign, Ulugh Khan and Nucrat Khan

were deputed to Gujrat; whither they accordingly led their army,

accompanied by several Amirs and Maliks, and a host of retainers,

and commenced ravaging and plundering Nahrwalah [ Patan | and the

whole territory of Gujrat. Karan Rai of Gujrat thereupon fled

from Nahrwalah, and repaired to Ram Deo at Deogir, leaving his

wives and daughters} as well as his treasure and elephants to fall into

* Badadoni has Amir Jamali i Khilji.

+ ‘Among them was Dewal Rani, with whom later Khizr Khan, ’Alauddin’s

1869.] Translations from the Tartkh + Firta Shah. 191

the hands of the orthodox army, who now pillaged the entire country.

The idol, which subsequently to Sultan Mahmid’s victory and the

destruction of the Manat, had been named Somnat by the Brahmins,

and had become a popular object of worship among the Hindts, was

also dragged from thence and forwarded to Delhi, where it was

trampled under foot by the populace.

Nucrat Khan next proceeded to Kambait, from the Khwajahs of

which place, who had grown excessively opulent, he exacted bullion,

jewels, and other valuables to a vast extent. He also took Kéafir

; Hazér Dinari, who became Malik Naib, and with whose beauty

Sultan ’Alaéuddin was captivated, forcibly from the Khwajah, his

master, and sent him to the Sultan.

After thoroughly ravaging and plundering Gujrat, Ulugh Khan and

Nucrat Khan set out on their return loaded with immense spoils, and

on the way back, in order to collect their fifth share of the body,

and in searching after and scrutinizing the amount Of the spoils, they

inflicted various penalties and punishments, and carried their investi-

gation to the extreme ; for they placed no credence whatever on what

_ the soldiery put down in writing, but persisted in calling for more.

b By dint of persecution [ banamak-db | they endeavoured to exact the

Fs gold, silver, jewels, and all other valuables and used to put the

_ troops to all kinds of torture, till at last the soldiery were unable to

_ bear such tyranny and ill-usage any longer.

_ The number of newly converted Amfrs and horsemen in the army

Bs very considerable ; so having entered into a combination, some

Biwo or three thousand horsemen assembled together, and mutinied.*

‘They first slew Malik A’azzuddin, the brother of Nucrat Khan, who

was Amir Hajib to Ulugh Khan ; and with a great uproar forced their

_ way into Ulugh Khan’s pavilion ; but the Khan dreading their fury,

escaped out of his tent, and conveyed himself by stratagem to Nucrat

son, fellin love. When the poet Khusrau of Dihli was told by the prince of his

“deep attachment, he composed his ’Ashiqah, (often wrongly spelt ’ishqiyah,)

Which he dedicated to Khizr Khan.’ Baddoni.

_ The Lucknow Edition of Firishtah calls the princess Kanwlé Di. Cowell

"suggests Kamalé Devi.

__ Karan, according to Firishtah, went from Deogir to Bagldnah, ‘ which lies on

the frontier of the Dak’hin, but was then attached to Gujrat.’ For Rdém Deo,

: _the Ed. B. I. of Baddéoni has Biramdeo (?).

__ * Firishtah calls the leader of the rebels Muhammad Shah. He says, the

‘mutiny took place at Jélor (Jodhpur); but the editions of Badéoni have Alwar,

* which lies nearer to Rantanbhir and Jhd4yin to the chief of which place,

Hamir Deo [Hd. Bibl. Indica, Hambar Deo], the mutineers ultimately retreated.

192 Translations from the Tdrikh i Firhz Shahi. [ No. 4,

Khan’s quarters. The nephew (sister’s son) of Sultin ’Aléuddin,

however, happened to be sleeping below Ulugh Khan’s quarters ; and

the mutineers imagining that he might possibly be the Khan, put him

to death under this misapprehension. The mutiny extended at length —

throughout the army, and the camp was very nearly becoming the

scene of indiscrimate riot and pillage ; but as the good fortune of

"Alauddin was in the ascendant, such a tumult as this even was

speedily quelled. The cavalry and infantry of the army formed 3

up in front of Nuerat Khan’s pavilion, and the recently converted

Amirs and horsemen dispersed, such of them as had been the chief

actors and confederates in the mutiny fleeing away and gaining

the disaffected and rebellious Rais. After this, the search after the

booty in the army was abandoned, and Ulugh Khan and Nuerat

Khan reached Delhi with all the wealth, elephants, slaves, and other

spoils they had got possession of from the pillage of Gujrat.

As soon as the news of the mutiny among the new converts reached

Delhi, Sultan ’Alauddin, under the influence of the haughty pride

which had now inflated his brain, directed that the wives and

children of all the mutineers, both high and low, should be seized and

imprisoned. This system of seizing upon the wives and children for

the fault of the men dates its commencement from this period ; for

previous to this at Delhi, they never laid hands on women and

children on account of the crimes of their male relatives, nor used

they to seize and incarcerate the families of any delinquents. |

Besides this tyrannical system of seizing women aud children, a

still more glaring piece of injustice was committed in those days by

Nucrat Khan, who was the originator of numerous acts of oppression

at Delhi; for it was publicly witnessed that in revenge for his

brother’s death, he brought infamy and dishonour on the wives of

those who had pierced his brother with arrows, by delivering them

over to sweepers to be violated like helpless victims, while the infant

children were ordered to be cut in pieces in presence of their mothers.*

* Historians call this wholesale slaughter of women and children ghartb-

khushi, or killing of the poor. Badaoni (p. 190) says that many historians

relate ithe event before mentioning the return of Ulugh Khan from Gujrat,

‘without paying regard to proper chronological order ; but God knows best.’ —

1869. | Translations from the Tartkh « Firiiz Shdhé. 193

he committed, the people of Delhi were the more struck with profound

wonder and amazement [and trembling came over the hearts of the

people }.

In the same year that Ulugh Khan and Nucrat Khan were sent into

Gujrat, Zafar Khan was deputed to Siwistan, which (province) had been

seized upon by Qaldi, and his brother with a party of Mughuls.

Zafar Khan accordingly marched thither with a large force, and

having invested the fort of Siwistan, succeeded in capturing the strong-

hold with the aid only of sword and arrow, and dagger and spear, with-

out having recourse to war engines and projecting machines of a larger

kind. The Mughuls, moreover, from the interior of the fort shot

arrows in every direction, in so much that it was not possible for a bird

ever to approach it; yet in spite of all this Zafar Khén came off vic-

torious by the use of sword and arrow only, and having captured

Caldi and his brother, as well as all the Mughuls with their wives and

children, he sent the whole party bound, collared, and chained into

Delhi.

In consequence of this success, a profound dread of Zafar Khan was

established at Delhi, and Sultan Alauddin began to regard him with

a malignant eye on account of the hardihood, valour, and gallantry

which he had displayed in a manner before unknown in Hindistan.

Ulugh Khan, the Sultan’s brother, also conceived a feeling of malice

and enmity towards him, owing to his consummate generalship, and

bravery, which had quite eclipsed his own.

In that year, he (7. e., Zafar Khan) held the territory of Samanah,

and ashe had become so famous, Sultan ’Alauddin, who was deeply

impregnated with jealousy, was under considerable apprehension

regarding him, and anxiously desired one or other of these two

alternatives, either that the Khan should be in constant attendance upon

‘him, or else that he should give the Khan some thousand horse, and

. despatch him towards Lakhnauti to subdue the country, after which he

‘should stay there, and send off the elephants together with his

‘resignation of office* from thence to Court. Otherwise the Sultan

thought of ridding himself of him by administering poison, or putting

out his eyes somehow or other.

#* Or rather with his tribute, which is the meaning of khidmatt. _ Even in

ater times transfers to Bengal or to Bhakkar were looked upon as punishments,

194 Translations from the Térikh 7 Firiz Shahi, (No. 4,

Towards the close of the aforesaid year, Qutlugh Khwajah, son of

Dadulain,* invaded Hindistan with 20 “ Zumans” of Mughuls.

Starting from Mawaru-n-nahr fully equipped and prepared for a severe

engagement, he crossed the river Sind, and proceeded by regular

stages until he reached the vicinity of Delhi.

As the Mughuls this year had determined to attack Delhi, they

did not plunder and lay waste the provinces bordering on their line of

march, nor do any injury to the strong holds they met with, At the

advance of these Mughuls, therefore, with an army as numerous as a

multitude of ants or locusts, violent apprehensions were felt through-

out Dehli, more especially as the enemy had fixed on that asthe main

object of their attack, and had abstained in consequence from laying

waste the provinces (they passed), and from carrying off plunder. The

people of the adjoining districts all flocked into the fortress of Delhi,

and the old fortifications had not yet been built up, so that such con-

sternation among men has never been witnessed, nor even heard of; for —

all the inhabitants of the city both great and small were completely

overpowered with terror.

At last such a crowd was congregated in the city, that the people

could not find room in the streets, the market places, or the mosques,

liverything became excessively dear within the town, and the approach

of caravans, and merchants being stopped, the people were reduced to —

the most pressing want.

Sultan ’Aléuddin then went from the city with great pomp and_

magnificence, and pitched the imperial Camp at Siri. The Maliks,

Amirs, and other retainers, were next summoned from all quarters to

Delhi. | | F

The compiler’s uncle, Malik ’Aléulmulk, who was one of the Sul-

tan’s confidential advisers, in those days held the office of Kotwal at

the Metropolis of Delhi, and the Sultan had entrusted the town, to-

gether with the ladies of the royal family and the treasure, to his

custody. The Sultan having gone forth from the city with the in-

tention of engaging in a general action, Malik ’Aléulmulk came out

to Siri to bid him farewell, and there, at a private audience, addressed

him thus— |

* So Major Fuller’s MS. The Ed. Bibl. Indica (p. 254) calls him wae O93)

Zoud uw ain (?); Badaoni (Ed. B. I.) Déid; Badaoni (Lucknow Edition), andy

Firishtah p. 103 (Lucknow Ed.) Dozwd, in accordance with the note on p. 189.

A tuman, or tumanis from 10000 to 12000.

1869.) Translations from the Tarikh vt Firts Shahi. 195

“ Ancient Monarchs and former Prime Ministers, who have held

“sway and sovereignty over the world, have invariably abstained and

“refrained altogether from tremendous conflicts, in which it is im-

** possible to decide what may happen at any precise moment, as to

“‘ what side victory is likely to incline ; and with respect to encounters

“between equally powerful chiefs, whereby the state and prosperity

‘of the Sovereign as well as the whole population of the Kingdom

“‘ are placed in jeopardy, they have recommended that they should be

“avoided to the utmost extent of one’s power and ability. It is

“further recorded among the injunctions of ancient Monarchs, that

“a battle resembles the scales of a balance; for by the prevailing force

“of ascanty number of men, one scale becomes heavy, while the

“ other gets light. Thus in an instant the affair slips out of one’s

“‘hand, passing away so entirely that there is no hope left in one’s

“heart of its ultimate return or recovery ; for although in contests be-

“tween the Commanders of an army merely, there is not so much

“danger to be apprehended froma defeat, as the hope of a re-

* trieval is not totally cut off; yet in the case of conflicts between

“equally powerful chiefs, when a kingdom is staked on a single

“throw of the dice, Monarchs have always exercised the utmost dis-

“ cretion, and have warded off the event as long as they could by sound

‘judgment and clever diplomacy. Why does your Majesty then pur-

* nosely and wilfully, and without paying any heed or attention, enter

“into a perilous crisis, that has ever been avoided by other monarchis

_“ as far as possible ; when you can push forward Khal Sitari [? |* who has

-* been authorized to raise a lakh of horse on account of this invasion

“and encamp with your forces (inthe rear)? You may thus delay a

“fow days from engaging these Mughuls, who have poured down

. “upon us like swarms of ants and locusts, and keep procrastinat-

* Here Major Fuller’s MS. seems to be at fault, though otherwise his MS.

would appear to have been as excellent as his translation. The Bibl. Indica

_ edition, p. 256, 1. 3, has—

Khuddwand 1’ dlam mitwwanad kih kohan i shuture (not khal sitarf) az barde

darémnad imughul, kih hukmi yak lak suwdr dérad, dar pish anddgad, ubd

tashkarha fariddyad, ‘ Your Majesty can place the hump ofa camel (kohdy

4 shuture) before yourself on account of the arrival of the Mughuls who muster

a lakh of horse, and you can place your forces into a fortified camp (bd

Tashkarhd fariddmadan),

- ‘ Alauddin’s reply will shew that this reading is the correct one, Of course,

Alaulmulk advised the emperor to act the part of a Cunctator. Placing the

hump of « camel before oneself means to have recourse to a place of safety.

196 Translations from the Tarikh « Firtkaz Shahi. [No. 4,

‘ing, until we discover what they purpose doing, what is going on,

‘‘and how matters are likely to turn out ; when if there appear to be

‘no help for it but fighting, you can do so. As they do not lay their

‘“hands on plunder you might gather together your subjects, and

“‘ place them in security within the fortress. Meanwhile how long

‘* can so vast an army as they possess, continue to exist without forage,

‘ considering that they never detach ten horsemen even away from

“their main body, and how will it be possible for them to stand

“their ground? Or if a few days are passed in sending envoys back-

‘‘ wards and forwards, until we have clearly ascertained their precise

“aim and object, it will be as well; so that they may come to want,

‘Cand set out on their return, and devote themselves to pillage. If at

“that juncture, your Majesty were to march after them a sus stages

“by way of pursuit, how excellent it would be!”

After making this address, ’Alaulmulk went on to say, ‘‘I am an

‘old servant, and have always been in the habit of stating to you

‘‘whatever crosses my mind respecting current events, and I have

‘heretofore ever met with kindness in return. I have therefore,

“in the present emergency also, stated all that has occurred to my

“mind; but that alone is right and proper which may have struck

“your Majesty’s discerning intellect ; for the illustrious sentiments of

*‘ a King are superior to those of all his subjects.

*‘ Several ideas have also passed through my mind, relating to the

* prevention of all invasions of the Mughuls, which I purpose pouring

‘into your auspicious ear at a fitting opportunity. On the present

‘occasion of these miscreants advancing in such formidable array,

“we have, by God’s grace, numerous forces equipped and ready to

‘oppose them. Our army, however; is composed principally of the

“soldiery of Hindustan, who have spent their lives in warfare with

‘‘ Hindus only, and have never yet joined in battle with the Mughuls,

‘and are consequently ignorant of their cunning system of tactics,

‘‘ their sallies, their ambuscades, and other stratagems. If the Mu-

“ ohuls then through good management on our part retire defeated —

“this time, the soldiery of Delhi will be able to pursue and follow |

‘¢ after them, so that (in future) our troops will long with ardour for an

‘‘ engagement with these Mughuls.”

Sultan ’Aléuddin on hearing this address from the faithful Malik —

1869. | Translations from the Térikh ¢ Feriz Shchi. 197

’Aldulmulk praised him highly ; and having summoned all the great

Khans and Maliks into his presence, he made the following speech to

the assembled throng.

* You are all well aware, that ’Alaulmulk is both a ‘wazir’ and

“the son of a ‘wazir’, as well as a true and loyal servant to me,

‘‘and that from the first days of my assuming the government up to

‘‘the present time, he has been in the habit of giving me the benefit

“of his advices; and that it was only his obesity which caused me

“to appoint him Kotwal; for otherwise he was entitled to the office

“ of wazir. At this juncture he has expressed some sound opinions,

“and brought forward arguments to induce me to refrain from

*‘ engaging the Mughuls, and now I[ purpose giving him my reply in

‘the presence of all of you, who are the pillars of my State, so that

‘you may all hear it.”

The Sultan then turned towards ’Aléulmulk alone in that assem-

bly and said :

*O ’Aléulmulk, thou art my confidential servant and ancient sup-

** porter, and hast claims to the office of wazir, and toa large stock

“of wisdom; hear now from me these clear and distinct truths.

Long before both you and I (were born), this proverb was in vogue,

| ** “Tt is nonsense crouching down (to hide yourself from detection) when

* stealing a camel (as the animal’s tall body must necessarily be visible);’

and in like manner to holdthe sovereignty of Delhi and yet hide behind

Khali Sitari’s [a camel’s] back as you suggest ; and to assume a menac-

**ing attitude towards the Mughuls, and yet refrain from an engagement

“with them, is altogether impossible; nor is it feasible to prevent a

“contest with the Mughuls by the vain and idle talking of poltroons.

“Were I to shelter myself in the way you propose, my cotemporaries

- and those men who shall be born after my time will laugh at my beard,

“and will tax me with cowardice ; more especially my foes and advers-

aries, who may have travelled some 2000 kos from their own land, and

“have come under the minarets of Delhi to offer battle. What say you?

“Shall I under these circumstances be guilty of backwardness and co-

wardice,and send Khal Sitari to the front| hide behind the camel’s back ],

“ whilst I remain inert like a goose or a hen seated on her eggs, and en-

“ deavour to repel them by diplomacy and negociation. And if I should

«do as you say, to whom could I shew this countenance, or how could I

198 Translations from the Térikh + Hiriz Shahi. [No. 4, |

“ enter the apartments of my own female relatives? Of what account

“too would my subjects esteem me, and what daring and boldness

“would the rebellious and disaffected see in me to make them pre-

“serve their allegiance to me? Come what may, I am bent upon

“marching to-morrow from Siri into the plain of Kili, where L pur-

‘* pose joining battle with Qutlugh Khwéjah and his army; so that in

“the course of this mighty conflict, it may be proved between him

“and me, to which of us God intends to grant the victory, and to

‘“ which success is to present itself. :

‘“‘Q’Alaulmulk! to thee have I confided the post of Kotwal, and —

‘“‘the charge of my seraglio, and treasures, together with the whole

‘‘town. Whichever of us two, whether he or I, prove the conqueror,

*‘ salute the victor with the keys of the gates, and of the treasures, and

‘“lay them before him, and become his obedient servant and vassal.

*‘ Do not you with all your wisdom and ability know this much,

‘“‘that prudence and judgment can only ward off hostilities so long

“as the enemy be not close at hand. Now that he has come

“up in hot haste however, no mode of thought or action is left ©

‘“‘to me, but to make haste in falling upon him, and to dash out

““the brains of my foes with the stroke of battle-axe, sword, and arrow.

** You propose pacific measures, but pacific measures are incompatible

“with the turmoil of this busy world. The refined and elegant ex-—

‘‘ pressions that you can use (when seated) on the four square yard :

“¢ carpet of your house, are never taken into the wide world, and would

‘C311 become the field of carnage, where streams of blood shall flow

‘‘ from either side. j

‘‘ As for what you say about the ideas you entertain on the subject

“ of preventing these invasions of the Mughuls, as soon asI am at

*‘ leisure from this war, and have fulfilled all the duties attending it,

‘‘T will listen to these ideas of your’s. You are a literary character

“andthe son of a literary man, and doubtless your mind sted-

*¢ fastly contemplates all these matters, of which you speak to me.”

’Aléulmulk humbly submitted that he was indeed an old servant, and

invariably mentioned any suggestion that happened to cross his mind,

The Sultén exclaimed: ‘‘ You are a truly loyal subject, and I have

“¢ always had a high regard for your opinion. Now, however, a crisis”

‘has occurred, in which it is necessary to set wisdom aside, and not

1869. | Translations from the Tértkh « Hiriz Shahi. 199

“a thought or deed is requisite beyond carnage and bloodshed, the

‘* sacrifices of one’s head and life, unsheathing of swords, and the

“ combating with our foes.”’

’Alaulmulk then took leave by kissing the royal hand, and having

returned into the city, secured all the gates, except the Badadon one,

which was left open ; and all the town people, both great and small,

were in great dismay, and lifted up their hands in prayer.

Account of the battle between Sultin ’Alauddin and Qutlugh Khan,

with the (ultimate) defeat of the Mughuls and martyrdom of Zafar

Khén and other Amirs. |

Sultan "Alauddin marched with the army of Islam from Siri to

Kili, and pitched his camp there; while Qutlugh Khwajah encamped

with the Mughul forces right opposite ; and as two such armies had

never been seen in any age or era confronting each other with hostile

intent, the people were struck with wonder and dismay. Both armies

were then drawn up in line, and stood anxious confronting each

other in the coming struggle.

Zafar Khan was in command of the right wing, and he and the

_Amirs belonging to his division having drawn their swords, made a

furious assault on the Mughul force, and fought hand to hand with

‘them. The Mughuls could not withstand the attack, and were im-

‘mediately broken and routed, whereupon the army of Islam set off in

“pursuit of them. Zafar Khan, who was the Rustam of his day, and

‘the [hero] of his age, never ceased from the pursuit, but kept

following close upon them, and driving them before him [eighteen

kos| with the [sword, cutting off their heads]. The Mughuls con-

sequently had no opportunity of rallying, and fled in such consternation

that they scarcely knew their bridles from their cruppers.

Ulugh Khan, who was in command of the left wing of the army

Baca had several great Amirs, and a numerous host of troops in his

‘division, did not stir from his position, on account of the animosity

a entertained towards Zafar Khan, nor would he advance to his sup-

port. The accursed Turghi* meanwhile had laid an ambuscade with

his ¢wman [along the Birdji road?}; and as soon as he saw that

_* He commanded the left wing of the Mughuls. Furishtah.

_ * This is doubtful. The text (p. 260) has bar tartq 7 bardjt, which is opposed

to bar taréq i halqah, a few lines lower down; hence béijt must be the Turkish

name of a stratagem. Firishtah has merely, ‘ he had laid an ambuscade on the

200 Translations from the Tdrtkh « Firtiz Shahi. [No 4,

Zafar Khan had pressed well forward in pursuit, and no force was

coming up behind to his support, he came in rear of him, and the

Khan was surrounded on all sides as if in a ring by the Mughul army.

While thus hemmed in by the enemy, who kept firing showers of

arrows upon him, Zafar Khan fell from his horse, and thus was that

hero of the age, and the Rustam of his time, obliged to fight on

foot. Emptying the arrows out of his quiver before him, he over-

threw one of the Mughul horsemen with every shaft, till at length

in the (middle of the) conflict Qutlugh Khwajah sent him a message

saying : ‘‘ Come over to me, that I may take you to my father, who

will treat you with higher honor than the Emperor of Dihli has done.

Zafar Khan paid no attention to his words however, and the Mughuls

seeing that he could not be captured alive, pressed upon him from all

sides, and caused him to suffer martyrdom ; after which the Amirs of

his division also suffered the like. They then wounded the Khan’s

elephants, and slew the drivers of the animals. |

That day, under cover of night, the Mughuls managed to make a

stand (or recover themselves), but such an astounding dread had been —

imprinted on their breasts from Zafar Khan’s fierce assault, that they

retreated from their position towards the close of the night, and de-

parted toa distance of 30 kos from Dihli, where they encamped. From—

thence they made [daily marches of about] 20 kos, and until they

reached the confines of their own country, they never once halted at

any stage.

The dread of this attack of Zafar Khan’s remained in their hearts

for years; and if a horse of their’s would not drink water at any

time, they used to say: “‘ What, have you seen Zafar Khan that

you will not drink water?” and never again after this did so vast

an army advance to the environs of Dihli with hostile intentions.

Sultan ’Alauddin now returned from Kili, estimating this defeat

of the Mughuls by the peerless Zafar Khan, and such a loyal sacrifice

of life as his, a most glorious triumph.

In the third year of his reign, Sultan "Alauddin did nought but

indulge in pleasure and gaiety, giving full scope to the bent of his

inclinations, and convoking festive assemblies. His national under-

road.’ The position of Kilt is not given on the Maps; it could not have been

far away from modern Dihli,¢.¢., north of Siri. The Society’s Edition of

Badaoni has Giélé (?).

1869 ] Translations from the Tartkh « Firke Shahi. 201

takings all turned out well, one after another, and despatches announ-

cing victories were pouring in from all quarters. Every year two or

three sons were born to him, and pavilions were erected and festivities

held to celebrate the events.

The whole of his state affairs in short were satisfactorily managed

agreeably to the utmost wish of his heart. In his magazines he beheld

vast treasures, and daily did he enjoy the spectacle of his jewels and

pearls, of which he possessed chests and caskets full; while his eye

likewise fell on numerous elephants and 70,000 horses in the sheds

and stables in and around the city. He also found two or three vast

countries firmly bound under his rule, and the idea of any adversary

or rival in the kingdom never crossed his mind.

Intoxicated under all these varied incentives to pride, he began

to brood over in his head the grandest projects and most ex-

traordinary schemes, which were neither suited to his capacity, nor

indeed to the capacity of a hundred thousand like him ; and such ideas

came into his mind, as had never entered the imagination of any other

monarch. From his utter intoxication and senselessness, his supreme

arrogance and self-conceit, his intense ignorance and infatuation, and

his excessive folly and stupidity, he lost all control over himself, and

began to conceive impossibilities and absurdities. He was a man who

had not a smattering even of education, and had never associated with

men of learning; for he neither knew how to read nor write.

In disposition he was ill-natured, and in temper harsh ; and in his

heart was lodged a mass of cruelty. The more frequently the world

went well with him, the oftener his enterprizes were crowned with

success ; and the more fortune favoured him, so much the more sense-

less and intoxicated he became.

The object of my (bringing forward) the above peroration is this,

that Sultan ’Alauddin during these periods of senselessness and

Intoxication used to say in the presence of his assembled guests,

that he had two projects before him, and he used to consult his

friends, boon companions, and associates about the furtherance of these

two projects, and to ask the Maliks he was intimate with, what

he had better do, so as to carry out his plans most effectually.

. One of these two projects, which he was always talking about

€arrying out, was this. He used to say: “‘ God Almighty gave to the

;

202 Translations from the Tarikh ¢ Firta Shaht. [No. 4, |

Prophet, on whom be peace, four companions, by means of whose

power and influence, he originated the orthodox faith, and owing to

the institution of the orthodox faith, the fame of the Prophet has

lasted and will continne to last till the day of judgment; and

since the time of the Prophet, on whom be peace! whosoever has

acknowledged and called himself a Musalman, has considered him-

self belonging to his faith and sect. Now, God Almighty has also

granted to me four companions ; first Ulugh Khan, secondly Zafar

Khan, thirdly Nucrat Khan, and fourthly Alap Khan, who through

my favour have attained to princely power and influence. If I like,

therefore, I can with the aid of these companions institute a new

religious faith, and by the force of my arms and those of my com- —

panions, cause all the people to adopt it as the clear way (to salva- —

tion) ; and thus my fame and that of my companions would continue

to last among the people, just as that of the Prophet and his com-

panions has lasted.”’

Impelled by youthful arrogance, and folly, want of judgment, —

thoughtlessness and audacity, he used to utter the above sentiments

at convivial assemblies openly and without reserve, and consult with —

the chief men of the party regarding the institution of a new and —

separate religion. He would likewise enquire of such as were pre-—

sent, how he should manage matters, so that his name might con-—

tinue for ever, and the people adopt the faith that he originated.

Respecting the second project, he used personally to inform those —

present, that the wealth, elephants, horses, and retainers that he had

gathered together were innumerable; and that he would therefore

make over charge of Dihli to some one, and starting like Alexander —

in quest of territorial aggrandizement, would bring the four quarters 4

of the inhabited globe under his dominion.

Another piece of presumption was this. Some of his enterprizes q

having turned out satisfactorily, he caused himself to be styled :

‘‘ Alexander the Second,”’ in the public prayers and on the coinages, —

In the midst of his wine-bibbing too, he would boastfully exclaim, —

“ Every country that I conquer, I will give in charge to one of my —

‘‘ confidential ministers, and set out myself in pursuit of further ac- .

“ quisitions ; for who is there to stand up against me?” The by- b,

standers although well aware that he was perfectly intoxicated, and |

1869. Translations from the Tartkh + Firdz Shahi. 203

demented from the possession of vast wealth, elephants, horses, fol-

lowers and dependents, as well as from his innate folly, and that he

only discussed both these projects out of arrogance, incapacity, and

stupidity ; yet they were obliged to have a regard for his hasty tem-

per and evil disposition. Through fear of his irascibility therefore,

they commended his sentiments, and bringing forward false dogmas

and similes as true, they made the application of them conformable to

his vile disposition ; so that he fell into the idea at last that these

impossible propositions that had issued from his senseless heart and

tongue, might perhaps be accomplished. The above absurdities, that

escaped from his lips at convivial assemblies, were gradually dissemin-

ated throughout the city ; and while some respectable men laughed,

and attributed them to his folly and ignorance, other intelligent per-

sons were sore afraid and said among themselves, ‘ This fellow has

“the very pride of Pharaoh without possessing a particle of sense ;

“and such immense treasures, as would blind the eye of the wise

“even, not to mention the foolish and unwary, having fallen into

“the hands of this idiot, if Satan instil into his mind a mode of faith

*¢ opposed to true religion, and he, in enforcing its false doctrines, should

“slay sixty or seventy thousand individuals, what would become of

“us Musalmans and our religion.”

The author’s uncle, ’Alaulmulk, the Kotwal of Dihli, on account

of his extreme obesity used to go and pay his respects to the Sultan

’Aléuddin on the first day of every month only. On the first of

one month, when he had come according to his usual custom, and had

joined the Sultan’s wine-party, the latter asked his advice regarding

his two insane projects. ’Alaulmulk had heard from others that the

Sult4n was in the habit of expressing these sentiments in public, and

that the bystanders always corroborated his. opinions, and were unable

to speak the real truth for fear of his violent and hasty temper. On

this occasion however, when ’Alaulmulk heard the Sultan express

these sentiments, and demand his advice on the matter, he replied :

“Ti your Majesty will order the wine to be removed from this assem-

bly, and will permit no one to stay with him, but four Maliks, I will

lay clearly and explicitly before the throne my views and the conclu-

sion that I have arrived at with respect to these two schemes of your

Majesty.”

204 Translations from the Tartkh « Firtz Shahi. [No. 4,

The Sultan accordingly directed the wine to be removed from the

assembly, and no one was permitted to remain in it, but Ulugh Khan,

Zafar Khan, Nucrat Khan and Alap Khan, all the other nobles being

called upon to retire. The Sultén then said to ’Alaulmulk, ‘‘ What-

ever plan or designs has occurred to ygur mind for the execution of

these two projects, do you now in the presence of these my four

companions and of myself explain it, in order that I may proceed to

carry it out.”

’Aldulmulk prefacing his speech with an apology (for his bold-

ness) spoke as follows: “ The subject of religion with its tenets and

‘‘ doctrines should certainly never be discussed and commented on by

“your Majesty ; for that is the duty of the prophets, not of kings.

‘“‘ Religion springs from divine inspiration, and cannot be founded on

‘human intellect and wisdom. From the time of Adam to the pre-

‘‘ sent day, has religion been instituted by the prophets, while kings

‘“ have exercised worldly sway and sovereignty ; and since the world

“ began, is now and ever shall be, the spirit of prophecy has never

“been exercised by kings, although prophets have sometimes held

‘‘ kingly sway. Your humble servant’s petition at the throne there- —

“fore is this: That henceforth your Majesty will never either under

“ the influence of wine or without it, speak a word about founding

‘‘any form of faith or religion, or such matters as are within the

*“ especial province of the prophets, and which have been finally

“‘ determined by our own (last and greatest) Prophet. For, should

‘‘ expressions of this kind reach the ears of the public generally, the

“ whole of them will turn from their allegiance, not a Musalmaén will

‘‘ approach your royal person, tumult and sedition will arise on every

‘* side, and vast dangers assail the "State, arising solely from such

‘‘ sentiments as these. Your Majesty may have heard too, how, not-

‘¢ withstanding the torrents of blood that Changiz Khan caused to flow

‘¢ from all the cities of the Musalmans, he was unable to implant.

‘among them the civil and religious institutions of the Mughals.

‘© Most of the latter in fact turned Musalmans, and professed the

* Muhammadan creed ; while not a single Musalman turned Mughul,

‘* nor adopted their faith. As for myself, I am your loyal servant,

‘and my life and soui is bound up in your Majesty’s existence.

‘Should sedition arise in the royal dominions, I should neither be

1869. ] Translations from the Térikh « Firtz Shahi. 205

“left alive, nor would my wife and children, my followers and

** dependents be allowed to exist on the face of the earth. If then I

“ see a means of averting danger from the royal dominions, and I fail

“to report it explicitly, I should be destitute of feeling for my own

“‘ life as well as that of my children and family retainers. From these

“‘ expressions, that have issued from your Majesty’s tongue, more-

* over, such a tumult is sure to arise, as could not be repressed by the

“ sagacity of a hundred Buzurjmihrs; and those who, professing

‘‘ the utmost loyalty and good will towards your royal person, have

“‘ heard the above sentiments expressed in various assemblies by your

** Majesty, and have both confirmed and commended them, have only

“done so by way of flattery, and have not fulfilled their duty

‘* honestly.” :

On hearing these words of ’Aléulmulk, Sultan ’Alduddin bent

down his head, and became absorbed in reflection. The Sultan’s four

companions too were excessively pleased with ’Aléulmulk’s speech,

and anxiously waited to see what would escape from the Sultan’s lips.

After a minute or two, the Sultan addressed ’Aléulmulk thus:

‘¢ The reason why I have made you my confidential adviser, and shew

“‘ such regard for you is, that I know you to be a truly loyal subject

** of mine, and frequently have I perceived and become fully convinced

“« by experience, that in giving an opinion, you always speak the

** whole truth before me, and never conceal the real state of the case.

“ T have just this minute reflected, and see that everything is as you

“say. I ought not to discuss these subjects, and henceforward no

*‘ one shall hear me utter such expressions in any assembly. A

“ hundred mercies rest on you, and on your father and mother, inas-

“much as you have spoken the truth before me, and have duly ful-

“ filled the rights of loyalty. In respect to the second project, what

“say you ; is that likewise wrong, or is it proper ?”

"Alaulmulk then addressed the Sultan thus on the subject of his

second project, which was that of territorial aggrandizement.

** Your second project is one that high-minded monarchs are often

bent upon ; and it is the custom and habit of these conquerors to desire

that they should subjugate the whole world, and bring it under their

dominion. Your Majesty likewise with all these vast hoards of treasure,

as well as retainers, elephants, and horses, can set forth from your capital

206 Translations from the Tarikh ¢ Fértz Shahi. [ No. 4,

fully equipped and arrayed, and will (doubtless) achieve the greatest

feats of conquest. I do not therefore object to the execution of this de-

sign, and I am well aware that your Majesty possesses sufficient wealth

to enable you to enlist two or three lakhs of horsemen, and conquer the

whole world. It would be right, however, for your Majesty to reflect as

to whom you could consign the charge of Dehli and its empire, which

you have gained at the cost of such vast sums of money, and so much

bloodshed, and what force you would give him; while you yourself

departed in pursuit of territorial aggrandizement, and proceeded like

Alexander to conquer the habitable globe. For, no matter whom

your Majesty might appoint in Dehli or in any other country ; by the

time you thought of returning to your own capital again, how could

those officers, or those countries have secured peace and safety in

these times of sedition and rebellion. The age of Alexander was a

totally different era from the present one ; for it was the established

usage, and settled habit of the men of that period to adhere strictly

and conscientiously to the engagements they entered into, even after

the lapse of many years ; and consequently excuses and frauds, false-

hood and deceit, and the violation of contracts and agreements were

much less frequent in those days. If the nobles and plebeians of any

clime or country therefore entered into any contract or agreement with

Alexander or any other sovereign, they neither, during his presence

nor in his absence, ever swerved from their promise or engagement. —

Where too, could you find a prime minister like Aristotle ? for all

the Greeks, both high and low, notwithstanding their vast amount

of population, immense extent of cavalry, and great wealth and

affluence, were so attached, faithful, and obedient to Aristotle, placed

such confidence in his spoken or written promise, and his strict virtue

and probity, and were so well pleased and contented with his

administration and rule, unaided and unsupported by considerable

forces, that during Alexander’s absence not a soul swerved a needle’s

point from his express order and mandate, nor joined in any revolt or

rebellion. When Alexander therefore ceased from his conquest after

an interval of two and thirty years, and returned again to his pristine

capital, he found the land of Greece tranquil, obedient, and secure ;

nor in the course of a generation (garan/) moreover, had any dis-

turbance occurred within his ancient kingdom. Very different are

1869. ] Translations from the Térikh i Firtz Shahi. 207

the men of the present time and age, more especially the Hinds, in

whom there is not the slightest respect for treaties, and agreements.

If they see not a mighty and successful sovereign at their head, nor

behold crowds of horse and foot with drawn swords and arrows

threatening their lives and property, they fail in their allegiance,

refuse payment of revenue, and excite a hundred tumults and revolts.

Now your Majesty’s territories are the territories of Hindistan ; how

then will your absence, especially an absence that may continue for

years, suit such men as these, who have neither any respect for

treaties and engagements, nor any regard for the due fulfilment of

promises ?”

Sultan ’Alauddin observed: ‘‘ Since so much wealth as well as

elephants and horses has come into my hands, if I make no conquests,

and subdue no new territories, but content myself with the kingdom

of Dihli merely, of what use will it be to me, and how shall I acquire

a reputation for victorious achievements ?”

’Aléulmulk replied : “I am an old servant, and it appears most

expedient to me, that your Majesty should commence upon the two

following undertakings before all others; and subsequently set out

after the rest.”

The Sultin asked, what these two undertakings were, which he

ought to commence upon first ; to which ’Alaulmulk replied: ‘“ One

of them is, the bringing under proper subjection of the entire country

of Hindustan ; so that Rantambhir, Chitor, Chanderi, Malwah, Dhar,

and Ujain, and from the Hast to the banks of the Sarw, and the Sawaliks

_to Jalir, Multan, to Damrilah [?], and from Paélam to Lahaur and

Dipalpur* might all become so tranquil and obedient, that the name of

rebel should never pass from any body’s tongue.

* Sarw (gy sarw, or 5 gy savo) is the name of the Western and Eastern

Surjoo in the N. E. of Oudh. The Hastern Surjoo is often distinguished as

Gb i Bahrdich or Sarw i Bahrdich, the Sarw on which the town of Bahrdich lies.

The Western Surjoo is merely called Sarw ; but the name is also given to the

Ghogra. The Ghogra again is often called db i Narhan (4,23 OT), as it falls

into the Ganges a little below the town and Parganah of Narhan in Saran,

(North Bihar). In the Ain and older books Ghogra is spelt G’hag’har 5h @5 :

5 . “1 f Sig Py a 974729 ,

the modern spelling is 9545 G’hdg’ har, or ty@S QS @hdg’hrd. “The Ghogra

joins the Sarw at a distance of one kos from Awadh (Faizabad) and passes below

the Fort of that town.” Ain. Abulfazl mentions the Saw among the rivers

of the Gubah of Iéhabad, together with the Arand a3, or OT Arand (anglice

208 Translations from the Turikh ¢ Firta Shahi. [No. 4,

‘“‘ The second undertaking, which is far more important, is the pre-

vention of the inroads of the Mughuls by strengthening the strong-

holds in their direction, by the appointment of trustworthy command-

ants, and the repair of the fortifications, and excavation of the ditches

as well as the formation of magazines for arms and depdts for grain

and fodder, and the organization of projectile engines of war, with

skilful and experienced marksmen to serve them. To this end, a

commander should be stationed at Samanah with a large force, another

at Deopalptr, and another at Multan with a body of horse ; for in order

that the Mughals may be entirely restrained from any hostile attempt

on Hindustan, military commanders of loyalty and experience, and a

picked and chosen body of troops well mounted, must be depended on.

‘“ As soon as these two objects, viz. the extinction of the rebellious

spirit of the Hindus from the realms of Hindustan, and the appoint-

ment of famous and illustrious nobles to the quarters, whence the

incursions of the Mughuls take place, have been satisfactorily attain-

ed, your Majesty should stay perfectly at ease in the metropolis of ©

Dihli, which is the centre of the kingdom, and employ yourself with

atranquil mind in state affairs; for the stability of the sovereign

in the centre produces stability in the government of the provinces.

After the establishment of the paramount power in the centre, and

the consolidation of the provinces of the Empire, your Majesty can

proceed to territorial aggrandizement without stirring from your

throne, by deputing your loyal and confidential servants with well

equipped and organized forces, and the faithful nobles of the state, to

Urrunde or Rind), the Ken wad (Cane, a tributary of the Jamnah, left bank),

and the &1,' Barnah (near Banaras).

Lihiir, yy%J, and yg Luhdwar are archaistic forms for ,%Y Léhor,

just as &95) Nidéh for sas Naddid (Nuddeah in Bengal, even now vulgarly

called Noodee) ; yw Gdlewar, yl Galewar, and dyad Gdlewér, for peat, $

Gwaliar.

Dip4lpar lies on the old bed of the Biah, between Lat. 30° and 31°, and must

not be confounded with the Dipalpair in Malwah, 8. W. of Ujain. Dipdlpir

(Deopalpar), Samanah (in Patiala), and Multan lie almost in a straight line;

hence ’Aléulmulk’s advice.

Pdlam lies 8. W. of Dihli, about eleven miles from it. Under Sultan Mahmid

Shah (795 to 815, A. H.), people used to say ironically, Hukm i khuddwand

i’dlam az Dihlt ta Palam.

For Damrilah (2) the Society’s Edition has Martlah (7). Perhaps, Nartlah,

near Dihli. What we call Rintwmbore is spelt in all good MSS. Rantanbhir

y9gphsy, not Rant hanbiir yyasgh). Dhdr is in Malwah.

1869.] Translations from the Tartkh i Firtz Shah. 209

march into distant countries and wage war there; bidding them plun-

der and lay waste all the territories of Hind, and spare neither the

wealth, elephants, nor horses of its kings and princes, but bring them

all under the royal subjection, after which their lands and principali-

ties can be restored to them, on condition that they agree to furnish

an annual tribute to your Majesty in money, horses, and elephants.”

After giving vent to the above opinions, ’Alaulmulk made obei-

sance and continued thus: ‘‘ What your humble servant has recom-

mended can never be brought about, unless your Majesty will refrain

from drinking wine to excess, from holding constant convivial and

festive assemblies, and from indulging both day and night in the plea-

sures of the chase, nor until you take up your permanent residence in

the centre of the kingdom and allow the affairs of the state, and mea-

sures of government to be transacted agreeably to tne advice of your

faithful and sagacious councillors. Your Majesty’s excessive indulgence

in wine occasions delay and detriment to all measures, and nothing

can be effected conformably to the true spirit of good government;

while from your constant pursuit of field sports, there is danger of

treason and sedition from deceitful and treacherous individuals, and the

royal life is in jeopardy. As soon as it becomes well-known among

the populace both high and low, that the Sovereign is absorbed

day and night in the pleasures of wine, and of the chase, the due re-

yerence of royalty will no longer remain implanted in their hearts,

and the gates of sedition will be thrown open to traitors. If you

cannot do without indulging in wine and in the chase altogether, you

should drink only after the hour appointed for the second prayers,

when you are alone without any party of boon companions, nor should

you take so much as to get intoxicated ; and for sport, you ought to

have a villa erected at Siri, on all sides of which spacious and exten-

‘sive plain there should be, where you could take your hawks and fly

them. In this manner you should satisfy your longing for field sports,

‘so that the disaffected and ill-disposed characters in the kingdom

May not have the opportunity for malevolent designs against you.

Your Majesty’s life, and the stability of your government are most

dear to me; for my own life and that of my whole family and house-

hold depends upon the royal existence ; and should this kingdom fall

into the hand of another, which God forbid, myself, my wife and

210 Translations from the Térikh i Btrtz Shahi. [No. 4,

children, and my followers and dependants would never be permitted

to live.”

When Sultén ‘Alauddin had heard ’Aldéulmulk’s opinions, he

was highly pleased with him and said—‘‘ The views that you

have expressed are decidedly correct, and I will do exactly according

to what God has brought forth from your lips.” He then present-

ed ’Aldulmulk with a garment wrought in gold with pictures of tigers,

a woven waist belt, 15,000 tankahs, two caparisoned horses, and a

couple of landed estates. Out of the four Khans too, in whose pre-

sence ’Aléulmulk had continued from early morn till midday ex~

plaining his views, as given above before the throne, every one of them

sent to his house three or four thousand tankahs, and two or three ©

caparisoned horses. As soon as the above opinions reached the ears

of the ministers, officials, and other wise men of the city, they also

highly lauded and commended ’Alaulmulk’s sagacity and good advice.

This event occurred in the days, when Zafar Khan had returned

from the Siwistén expedition, and had not yet suffered martyrdom in

the engagement with the miscreant Qutlugh Khwajah.

Sultan ’Alduddin resolved in the first place to capture the fort of

Rantambhir, as it was not only somewhat near the capital of Dihli, ©

but was already encompassed with a besieging force under Hamir Deo,

the son of Pathoré Rai. He accordingly despatched thither Ulugh -

Khan, who held the Bianah district; and directed Nucrat Khan, who

was then Jagirdar of Karah, to move likewise with the whole forces

of Karah and the troops of the districts on that side of Hindustan, to

Rantambhir, and cooperate with Ulugh Khan in taking the fortress. —

Ulugh Khan and Nugrat Khan having captured Jhayin,* invested the

stronghold of Rantambhur, and exerted themselves to the utmost in the

construction of entrenchments and batteries, while a constant shower

of projectiles was kept up from the fort. One of these missiles hap-

pened to strike Nugrat Khan, whereby he was seriously wounded, and

alter two or three days he expired. :;

As soon as intelligence of this event reached Sultan ’Alaéuddin, he

* Jhdyin («lea) lies near Rantambhir. “It is known under the name of

Naushahr.’ Bad. I, p. 190. The Society’s Editions of Badaoni and Ziai

Barani have invariably, but wrongly, lex Jhabin. Vide Elliot’s Index (First

Edition), p, 193. ;

1869. ] Translations from the Tarikh i Firhz Shah. 211

came out of the city with the imperial forces and marched in the di-

rection of Rantambhivr.

Description of Sultin ’?Aliuddin’s march towards Rantambhir, his

arrival at Tilpat, and [kit Khan’s insurrection at that place.*

When Sultén ’Alduddin set out from Dihli with the view of cap-

turing the fort of Rantambhir, and had arrived at Tilpat,} he halted

there for some time, riding out every day to the chase, and indulging

in field sports. On one occasion having gone out as usual to the chase,

he was benighted, and obliged to take up his quarters in the village

of Badah, where he passed the night. Next day before sunrise he gave

orders for a[manceuvre, nargah], so the officers of the household, and all

the retinue occupied themselves in making the necessary preparations

for it, while the Sultan himself took up a position in the open country,

when he sat dawn upon a cane stool (morah) with only a few attendants

standing round him. The Sultén was thus sitting in expectation of

seeing the arrangements for the battle completed, when meanwhile

Ikit Khan, his nephew (brother’s son), who held the appointment of

Vakilidaré, raised an insurrection, under the idea and impression that

just as Sultan Alauddin had slain his uncle, and seated himself on

his throne, he would likewise be able to slay Alauddin and ascend his

* T have written [kit Khan, instead of Ukat, which Major Fuller’s translation

has. Ikit is Turkish, and means jawdn, young, and Ikit Khdn would thus be the

opposite of Ulugh Khan, as Ulugh means kaldn, old, senior. Khdn i Kaldn also

was a title in use before the times of Akbar. The usual scriptio plena also occurs,

viz., 2S) for aS], est for wT, just as @lis and Eoldys Qutlugh (the same

as Mubdrik), or (3423 and (3eA553 Tughlugh (the same as ’alamddr, standard

bearer), or Ue and J | 4&50 Mughul (a simple hearted man). Having accident-

ally mentioned the word Mubdrik, which occurs so often in names, I may

remark that it should be spelt Mubdrik with an7%, as itis the Part. Active,

asking God to bless some one ; but inasmuch as the Persians change the final 7 of

such Arabic forms to a, we may write Mubdrak. In India the pronunciation

_Mubarik is preferred.

Firishtah calls [kit Khan Sulaimdn Shah. In Briggs and Elphinstone’s History

the name of Ulugh Khan is wrongly given Alaf Khan.

_ + Tilpat formed the South Hastern frontier of the Parganah of Dilhi; vide

Beames’s Edition of Elliot’s Glossary, II. 123. The Nawab Farid Khan mentioned

by Elliot is Farid i Bukhari (Murtaz4 Khan) who defeated Khusrau. Faridabad

in Balabgarh, south of Dibli, is named after him, and formed part of Tilpat.

For Tilpat, the Society’s Hdition of Badéoni has Panhit(?), and in a foot note

Stinpat, which is a town and Parganah forming the northern boundary of the

-Parganah of Dihli ; but Firishtah has likewise T%lpat.

_ The place Bédah mentioned a few lines lower down, may be the Mauza’ of

Badah, 8S. W. of the town of Jharsah. The Parganah of Jharsah forms the

8. W. boundary of the Parganah of Dihli,

212 Translations from the Tarikh i Firtz Shaht. . (No. 4,

throne. With this design, [kit Khan, accompanied by several newly

converted horsemen of great skill, who were old retainers of his, came

headlong upon Sultan ’Aléuddin shouting out, “the tiger,’ ‘‘the

tiger,” and several arrows were fired by those expert marksmen upon

him. It being winter time, the Sultan had on a thick wadded gar-

ment [and a daglah*], and when they began to pour down a shower

of arrows on him, he got off the stool, and made use of it as a

shield to defend himself. Two arrows, however, struck the Sultan,

and wounded him in the arm, but neither of them was fatal. There

was a servant with him called Nanak [Ed. Bibl. Indica, Manik], who

at the time when the new converts were showering arrows on the

Sultan, made a shield of his own body for him, and received three

or four wounds. The Paik soldiery (foot soldiers) who were standing

behind the Sultan also protected him with their bucklers, and when

Tkit Khan came up with his horsemen, and they wished to dismount,

and cut off the Sultan’s head, they perceived that the Paiks had

drawn their swords, and were fully prepared to receive them. Not-

withstanding the vast tumult-and revolt that they had raised, they

were thus unable to dismount and lay hands on the Sultan. At this —

juncture moreover the Paiks called out that the Sultan was dead,

and Ikit Khan, being a stupid, foolish, senseless youth, devoid of all

tact and intelligence, in spite of the great superiority he had gained in

coming upon the Sultan with so many expert horsemen, was unable

to give stability to his revolt by severing the Sultan’s head from his

body, previous to engaging in other affairs; but through his con-

summate fully, he was too premature and contented himself with the

word of the Paiks. { Then he returned and hastened to Tilpat, and rode to

the Imperial pavilion.] He then seated himself on Sultan ’Aléuddin’s

throne, and called out in a loud tone to the royal door-keepers, that

he had slain the Sultén. The people also began to reflect, that if he

had not put the Sultan to death (as he said), how could he have

entered the royal pavilion mounted (¢. e. in state), or by the aid of

what force could he have seated himself on the throne of ’ Alauddin

and given audience there. A great tumult and uproar consequently

* The word daglah is not to be found in native Dictionaries, and is but

rarely used now-a-days. From the words gabé wa daglah dar bar ddésht, we

may infer that daglah is the short ornamented jacket which natives put over

the long qabd. I1t has often short sleeves. ¥

1869.} Translations from the Térikh ¢ Fitz Shahi. 213

arose throughout the camp, and everything began to be turned topsy-

turvy. The elephants were caparisoned with haudahs and brought

before the royal pavilion ; the household servants came out, and every

one stood in waiting at his proper post ; the sentries kept shouting

and bawling out ; the clergy read the Qorén; the minstrels breathed

forth music ; the aristocracy on paying homage offered their congra-

tulations and tendered their services ; and the door-keepers raised the

continual cry of “ Bismillah’’ (in the name of God).

The wretched Ikit Khan then out of intense folly and stupidity,

wished to enter into the interior of the haram among the females,

but Malik Dinar, the custodian of those apartments would not per-

mit him; for arming himself together with his comrades, he took his

stand before the door, and kept it securely, saying to the ill-fated Ikit

Khan, ‘‘ You must shew me the head of Sultén ’Alduddin before I

can let you enter the haram.”’

At the time when the Sultén had been wounded by the arrows, all

the horsemen engaged in the manceuvre dispersed, and a great disturb-

ance arose among them, every one going off in a different direction,

until there were only some sixty or seventy men left with the Sultan.

When he recovered his senses after [kit Khan’s departure, they found

that he had received two wounds in the arm, and had lost a good

deal of blood; so they washed and bound up the wounds, and slung

the arm from his neck in handkerchiefs.

On coming to himself, the Sultén made certain, that the Maliks

and Amirs-and a vast body of the soldiery in the Camp must be in con-

federacy with Ikit Khan, or he would never without their support

have been able to make such an outbreak. |

He accordingly thought of abandoning his Camp and proceeding at

_ once from the spot to gain Ulugh Khan at Jh4yin, purposing to march

night and day until he reached his brother, when he could adopt any

plan that might seem most conducive to the recovery of his kingdom,

or could flee from thence to some distant quarter, which ever plan

i) might prove most expedient hereafter.

With this idea, he was about to start forthwith for Jhayin, had not

‘Malik Hamiduddin, the Vakilidar, son of ’Umdatulmulk, senior,

who was the Aristotle and the Buzurjmihr of the age, dissuaded

him from the measure and said, “ Your Majesty should proceed

214 Translations from the Térikh i Firiz Shaht. [ No. 4,

this instant to the imperial pavilion ; for all the people in the city and

the camp are your loyal slaves and subjects; and no sooner will the

insignia of loyalty come into their view, and the safety of your august

person become known to them, than they will repair to your threshold,

and bring the elephants before you, and in a moment the head of the

traitor, Ikit Khan, will be cut off and fixed on the point of a spear.

Should the night, however, elapse without it being made known to

the people, that your Majesty is safe and sound, it is probable that

some one may join the wretch, and the insurrection become much

more formidable than at present ; and after the people have once made

themselves his confederates, and pledged their allegiance to him, the

dread of your Majesty will compel them to stick to him.”

Sultan ’Aléuddin approved of Hamid’s suggestions, and having

mounted at once he set out for the camp. On the way, such horse-

men as saw that the Sultén was in safety, joined him; so that by the

time he reached the encampment, about 600 horse had collected in

his train. As soon as the Sultan arrived near the camp, he ascended

an eminence, and shewed himself conspicuously, so that the umbrella

of the Sultdn was seen by a considerable number. The concourse

at the royal pavilion immediately broke up, and the household with —

the whole of the elephants repaired to the imperial presence ; where- 4

upon [kit Khan made his escape through an opening in the tent,

and mounting a horse, took the road to Afghanptir. The Sultan then

coming down from the eminence with regal pomp and splendour,

proceeded to his own pavilion, and took his seat upon the throne, and

gave a public audience.

Malik A’azzuddin Yighan Khan and Malik Naciruddin Bar Khan ~

[Ed. B. L., Muir Khan] undertook the pursuit of Ikit Khan, and over-

taking him in the vicinity of Afghanptr,* they cut off his head, and pre-

sented it before the royal pavilion. By the Sultan’s order, the mis-

creant’s head was fastened on a spear, and carried round the whole camp ;

after which it was carried publicly through the city of Dehli, and from —

thence despatched to Ulugh Khan at Jhayin with an announcement of —

* Badaoni (I, p. 193) says: “ [kit Khdn fled towards Afghdnpir, and a detach- —

ment which in forced marches (elghdr) pursued him, caught him, and sent him —

to the Sultan.” Afghanpdér is either the town and Parganah in Sambhal, or —

the mauzw of that name, ‘ which lies three kos from Tughlughabad’ (Baddont —

I, p. 224), where Tughlug Shah died from the fall of the pavilion. Vide also

Mr. Cowell’s paper in J. A. S. B, for 1860, p. 281.

1869. ] Translations from the Tartkh 1 Firtz Shahi. 215

hisvictory. The rebel’s younger brother, whose title was Qutlugh Khan,

was also instantly sacrificed. Sultan ’Alauddin stayed some days at this

encampment, during which he used the utmost rigour and severity in

tracing out and apprehending all the agents and horsemen, and

those who had had any knowledge of, or connection with, Ikit

Khan’s revolt. He put them to death under the torture of the iron

scourge, confiscated their property to the royal use, and sent their

wives and children as captives into various forts.

Aiter having concluded his search after the conspirators engaged

in Ikit Khan’s revolt, Sultin ’Alauddin proceeded by continuous

marches to Rantambhiur, and pitched his camp at Ran,* where he exe-

cuted the surviving portion of the rebels. ‘The siege of the fort had

been going on for some time previous to this, on the Sultan’s arrival

it was prosecuted with still greater vigour. From all quarters of the

country, they collected leather skins and bags, and served them out

among the soldiery, who used to fill the bags with sand, and throw them

into the [ravine] of the Ran. They also made trenches and approach-

es, raised batteries, and kept up a constant fire of projectiles, with

which they harassed and annoyed the garrison, who used to throw

down fire from the top of the fort in return, and thus vast numbers

were slaughtered on both sides. The army moreover had overrun

the district of Jhayin as far as the frontier of Dhar, and brought it all

— under subjection.

Description of the revolt of ’Umar and Mangk Khan, the nephews

(sister's sons) of Sultan ’Alduddin, in Badaon and Audh, and receipt

of the intelligence at Rantambhir.

Just about the time when the Sultan had finished with the conspi-

_ *Or rather, on the Ran. Major Fuller’s MS. has correctly W) Jo, instead of

the absurd yy of the Ed. Bibl. Indica. Akbar also attacked Rantambhir

from the Ran (Bad. II, 107). ‘On Monday, I inspected the Fort of Rautam-

bhir, There are two mountains opposite to each other, one is called Ran, and

the other Tanbhir. Though the Fort is on the latter, people call it ‘Ran-

-tanbhir.’ Itis very strong, and has plenty of water. The Ran also is a

Strong position, in fact the only one from which the Fort can be taken. Hence my

father [Akbar] ordered guns to be carried to the top of the Ran [Rajab, 976 |

and had them pointed to the houses in the Fort. The first shot hit the Chau.

khandi Mahall of Rai Surjun, which made his heart so tremble, that he sur-

rendered, * * * The houses in the Fort are just as Hinds will build them, narrow

and without ventilation ; hence I was not pleased and did not stay.” Tuzuk i

Jahdngtré, p. 256. During the reign of Akbar, Rustam Khan comman ed the

| Port for a long time.

216 Indian Arachnoidea. [No.. 4,

It is difficult to find an appropriate position for the genus, but from

the general appearance of the body and the distribution of the eyes, it

seems to me that Hersilia has a great relation to Linyphia. Its habits

are, however, very similar to those of Philodromus, and the same is

the case as regards the proportionate length of the feet; it may, .

therefore, be also correctly placed near, or in, the family Tmomisipz.

There are several species found all through India, Burma and the

Malacca straits. I have observed them mostly on palm-trees, the bark

of which they much resemble in colouring; they are sometimes also

called mangoe spiders.

Hersilia Calcuttensis, Stol. Pl. XX., Fig. 9.

9. Cephalothorax scarcely broader than long, the ocular region

narrow and strongly elevated, the posterior region with the lateral

margins strongly curved, with one longitudinal central and two

transverse fine grooves; the anterior part is the smaller. The grooves

and the margins are partially dark brownish, the rest is yellowish,

thickly covered with short white hairs.

The eyes are in exactly the same position as in the type species ; the

two anterior on each side form with the posterior laterals an ascending

triangle, and the atiterior laterals are very small, situated in front and

below the posterior laterals; of all the eyes the anterior centrals are

the largest. The immediate region round each eye is dark brown.

The falces are shorter than the sternum, sub-cylindrical, at the base

rather contracted, pale brown with moderate dark brown claws.

The lip is broadly semicircular, short; the maxille semewhat

higher, thick at the base, attenuated towards their ends and strongly

converging. The palpi are thin, more than double the length of the

falces; they are yellowish with black tips; the lip and maxille are a

little darker than the other organs.

The sternum is almost broader than long, flat, greyish brown,

thickly set with hairs, anteriorly emarginated, posteriorly obtuse,

The feet are slender and very long, the first being the longest, then

the second, which is only a little shorter than the fourth, and then comes

the third which is about equal to one-half of one of the second pair.

The colour is pale yellowish with dark terminations to the joint.

No bands are traceable,

1869.] Indian Arachnoidea. 217

The abdomen is oval, posteriorly broader and more inflated,

‘obtusely pointed at the extreme end; the anterior edge slightly covers

the thorax. The general colour is a fawn or pale brown, with

very numerous equally distributed white dots; a dark brown band

extends from the anterior edge to about the middle of the abdomen,

or more than half of its length, and at the end it is provided with

short processes. laterally, from the anterior edge, a thin zigzag

brownish stripe with one blackish dot at each angle runs to the

anus. The lower side is of a uniform greyish fawn colour, and

_ thickly covered with whitish hairs. The epiginium is slightly promi-

nent, brownish, with a thickened white posterior margin. The

outer appendages of the spinners equal in length to the body ; they

consist of three joints, the first being very small, the second about

three times as long as the former and the third somewhat more than

three times as long as the second, gradually attenuating into a point.

The middle pairs of spinners extend only to half the length of the

second joint.

Length of thorax ....3 m.m.; its width in the middle 3 m.m.

=-— abdomen 6°,,,, ; —-~ £0" 3,

of one foot of the first pair, ... Zoe Th. Tir,

———__—_—.——__—._ 2nd baR NE ee

ee One | 5,

Ath bps fe oe

From Blackwall’s H. versicolor this species differs by having the

second pair of feet almost quite as long as the first, by the want

of whitish bands on the feet and the different markings of the

thorax and abdomen, the iatter possessing a number of dark spots

extending from the posterior end of the dark longitudinal band to the

spinners.

Loc. Neighbourhood of Calcutta; apparently very rare, only one

full grown specimen having been met with during a period of two

years collecting of Arachnoidea in this vicinity; it was caught

on the wall of a house. I subsequently observed another young

specimen in my own house; it moved about either forward or

Sideward, flatly pressed to the wall, exactly like a Philodromus, and

appeared to be very shy. Like the young of Philodromus, this young

Hersilia was more hairy than the full grown animals are.

218 Translations from the Térikh i Firtz Shahi. [No. 4,

brought a warrant from the Sultén; come over and hear its con-

tents.”” <A confidential friend of this KotwéAl’s, however, among the

conspirators, gave him warning and informed him of the intended

reachery, so he refused to come, and keeping vigilantly on his guard,

had the gates of the new fort strongly secured.

Haji Maula with the other conspirators then repaired to the palace,

and having seated himself in the raised balcony of state, he released

the whole of the ’Aléi prisoners, some of whom joined his cause. He

also took out bags of money from the treasury, and begun to squander

it among the populace. He likewise presented the rebels with arms

from the magazine, and horses from the stud; and whoever became

his ally, had his lap filled with gold.

There wasa Sayyid, who used to be called the son of Shah

Najaf, and on his mother’s side was descended from Sultén Shams-

uddin. To this poor wretch’s house, Haji Maula proceeded on horseback

with a large retinue, and bringing him by force to the palace, placed

him on the throne. He also compelled all the grandees and nobles ~

to come from their homes, and do homage to their Sayyid, and offer

him their allegiance,

Thus from time to time he kept kindling the flame of turbulence,

and some ill-fated wretches, whose hour of death had arrived near at

hand, used from avaricious motives to come willingly and cheerfully

to him, and he conferred on these rebels all the royal appointments, and —

paid homage himself. From fear of Sultan Alauddin, and their dread

of this miscreant, the people abandoned both sleep and food, and

passed their days and nights in the deepest anxiety.

During the week that Haji Maula excited this revolt, news of it

was several times received by Sultan “Alauddin; but the intelligence —

was never explicitly divulged throughout the camp, and no tumult

arose from it. :

_ On the third or fourth day of the Haji’s insurrection, Malik —

Hamiduddin Amir Koh, attended by his sons and relatives, every one

of whom was a roaring lion, forced open the Ghaznin gate, and entering

the city, made for the Bhandarkal gate, whereupon a distant conflict —

with arrows was commenced between them and the rebels. On such ©

an occasion, the covetous and avaricious naturally set their lives on —

the palms of their hands (7. e., recklessly exposed themselyes to ;

1869. | Translations from the Tirtkh « Firda Shahi. 219

danger), and received large donations of money from the Haji; but

after two or three days Malik Hamiduddin Amir Koh, and his sons,

who were amost loyal, true, and faithful crew, got the better of the

rebels. Some of Zafar Khan’s comrades too, who had come into the

city from Amrohah for the purpose of presenting a petition, joined

the Malik Amir Koh and his sons. The latter then entered from

the Bhandarkal gate, and a close combat ensued between him and

Haji Maul4 in the shoemaker’s quarter.* The Amir koh having

dismounted from his horse, and thrown Haji Maula down, sat himself

on his chest, and notwithstanding all the cuts that the H4ji’s retainers

showered upon this valiant and loyal hero, and the number of places

in which they sorely wounded him, he would not stir from his place

on the Haji’s chest until he had slain him.

After his death, the supporters of ’Alauddin repaired to the Lal

palace, and having severed the head of that senseless Sayyid from his

body, and carried it round the city on the point of a spear, they for-

warded it to the Sultan at Rantambhir with a despatch announcing

the victory and Haji Maula’s demise.

Notwithstanding the many tumults and revolts that were reported

to Sultan ’Aléuddin as having taken place at Delhi, and completely

subverted that city; inasmuch as he had fixed his imperial mind

upon the capture of the fort of Rantambhur, he would not stir from

this place, nor turn his face towards Delhi. Notwithstanding the

large army too, that was engaged in the siege, and reduced to such

distress in every way, not a single horseman or footman through fear

and dread of Sultan ’Aléuddin, dared turn his face towards Delhi, or

_ go elsewhere.

_ Inshort, in the course of five or six days, whosoever in the city had

been a confederate of Haji Maula, and had taken money of him, was

seized and imprisoned; and allthe money that he had taken out of

_ the treasury and distributed among the populace was fully recovered and

replaced in the treasury. At the end of a week, Ulugh Khan arrived by

: express from Rantambhir, and entering Delhi took up his quarter at

the palace of Mu’izzi. They then brought all the rebels before him

and he executed the whole of them, making a torrent of blood to flow.

* The Society’ s text has dar miydn i mozahdozdn o miyan 4% o mydnt

Haji Maulé. Major Fuller’s MS. has no and before the second miyadn,

220 ‘Translations from the Tirikh i Furie Shahi. [No. 4,1869.]

On account of these rebels too, he put mercilessly to the sword, as

a warning to others, the sons and grandsons of Malikulumara, the

former Kotwal, who had no knowledge at all of the insurrection,

together with every surviving member of his family and his atten- —

dants, and would not permit their name even to exist in the world, —

(Hd. Bibl. Ind., p. 242 to p. 282.)*

* The Persian text of this portion of the translation of ’Alauddin’s reign has

four doubtful words, viz., y} ySd| Ed. Bibl. Ind. p. 248, 1. 8 from below ; 4SjU

p. 250,1.3; el p. 252, 1.12 ; cs2)97 P. 260, 1. 9 from below.

Addenda. P. 200, note. Regarding Kilt, vide also Bad. I., p. 233, 1. 7.

P. 187, first note. There is some confusion regarding the word Kiché,

Badaoni (I., p. 180, 1. 3) says that Fakhruddin i Kichi, who was Dadbeg under

Jalal, was killed with Jalél at Karah ; and Jané cannot well be the son of

Ghézi Malik (Tughlug Shah).

The misprints in the Society’s edition of the Térikh i Firfiz Shahi are rather

numerous in the lists of office-bearers prefixed to each reign, though the

edition is on the whole good. Ghazi Malik is especially ill-treated. Thus on

p. 240, 1. 3 from below, the asterisk is to be put after sil, and for

Shaikhtk (?) we have to read Shihnah beg Ehydix® . and on p. 379, 1. 6, the

same correction is to be applied to Shihnak (?). Shitmah Beg + Bargéh is the

same as Bdrbeg S3l, te. the Beg of the Court, That Beg was formerly |

pronounced bak or bik is clear from the names of towns, as Bérbikpir, Barbikdbad —

(cf. Wazirabad, Khaénpir.)

(To be continued.)

INDEX TO PART I. FOR

*Abdul Qadir of Badaon, sae y

"Abdul Qadir Jilani, tes

?Abul Faz,

Afghanptr, name of two places,

Ahmad Shah,

Ain i Micbari, tials |

Akbar employs Hindts, --: ree

| --, his religious views,

--, lowers the dignity of the adh,

Alauddin Khilji, history of, 7

so -cnar acter of,

; religious views of,

, his wine drinking,

Alha Khand,

Amritsar -

Anandpir

Anangpal, -

| Arand river,

’Ashiqah, a ‘poem by Khusr: au,

“Atapur, near Badaon,

Awa, city of, founded,

' Azad, a Persian poet,

Babar, Emperor; ‘his Gere

Beadaon, town of, )

Badaoni,

Baghpat; town of,

Bahrul Asmar,

Bairém- Khan, Hee

‘Balandshahr Inscription,

Bangarmau, town of,

anduk, a gun, etymology of,

Bara Moola, oe

aran, town of, ... one

Ba: Brahma,

Barnah river,

| sacra cities of the Sikhs,

Alexander the Great, character ee ae subjects,

1869.

Page

105

101

126

214:

90, 116, 207

Ssh ATS

130, 138

5s RE

181

. 201, 207, 216

201

202

206

“183, 187

woo Index.

Basawar, town of,

Bassian, rebuilt,

Battle of Aliwal,

Battle of Machiwérah,

Beames, J., Nineteenth Book of Chand Baraai, translated,

—_____-., ’ Reply to Mr. sia i

Bhadiakul, in Kashmir, “

Bhatnir, Rajahs of,

Bhilolptr,

Bhutan, also called Madra,

Bibliotheca Indica, History of,

Biyénah, district of, : ave

Blochmann, H. , Badéoni and his works, ..

Bourquin, Louis,.

Burmah Race, History of,

Cairafi, a Persian poet,

Can’an, a saint, a

Chachera and Chachazad, ave

Chand Bardai, die ee

Chandel Kings, sie

Chandra Brahma,

Chapur, in Ludiana,

Chauhins, eS wii

Chronicle of Badaon, sb

Chiras, or Panjab Sweepers, se

Daglah, meaning of, ie eee

Deogir,

Dialect spoken in the Garo Hills, x7

-——— Ludiana,

Dihli,

Dipdlpuar, towns in Mélwah and Multan,

Dream books, tas

Druidical worship, traces of,

Ailliot, Sir HS =...

Europeans (Eeringhees) mentioned in Chand,

Fairs held in Ludiana,

Faizi, the poet, ow

Faridkot, eee

Fariduddin Shakkarganj, es Bai

Fathpur Sikyi,

107,

~” 137, 188,

Feringhees (Eur opeans) mentioned in Chand’s poem,

Flora of the Ludiana District,

Fuller, A. R., Translations no fe Tarikhi Firtiz Shahi,

Gaharwars,

Galewar, old spelling for Gwaliér,

Garcin de Tassy,

Garo Dialect, Vocabulary of, we

Gaur line of Kings,

108, 138,

158

Index.

Geography of the Ludiana District,

Ghakkar tribe, 2

Ghogra river, ..

Ghulam ’Ali of Baleram, 2

Greeks, their character at the times of Alexander,

Grote, ce recommends to print Indian Historians,

Growse, EF. §.. Notes on Chand, ...

, Reply to, by Mr. Beames,

Guga, Shrine of,

Gujrat, conquest of,

Guns, early use of,

Guru Govind Singh,

Hattur, a place, oe

Hemawati, oe

Hemu, ...

Hicn i Hacin, a prayer book,

Hindi versus Urdt,

Hindus employed by Akbar,

, a faithless set,

Historical MSS., lost during the Mutiny,

History of the Burmah Race, :

—— Kashmir, a Persian work,

—_——— Tandiand,

Husain Khan Tukriyah,

Ikit Khan, meaning of, ..

Inscription found at Balandshahr,.

Islem Shah, for Islam Shah,

J. agréon, town of,

Jain sect,

Jaisalmir, Rajahs of,

Jaloka, son of Asoka,

Jimi ’i Rashid, ..

Jasrat, a Ghakkar Chief,

Jats,

Jaunpur Rebellion,

Jhayin, town of,

Jhind, Rajahs of, .

Jidh, ‘plain of,

Kafur,

Kalinga, ..

Kélinjar founded,..

Kambait, town of,

Kant o Géla,

Karah, town of,

‘Karan Rai of Gujrat,

Karnata,

Kashmir Temples,

994 Index.

Kasi, ea a ae aetiidalt oe

, Rajahs of,

Ken river, 2

Khidmati, meaning of,

Khilok’ hari, near Dihli, :

Khizénah i *Xmirah, a Poerian Tazkirah,

Khusrau, the poet, ...

Kili, plain of,

Kings of Burmah,

Konch Dialect, Y seblacy of,

Kikas, Sect of, ee mee

Tnlchinittid ene

Lal Beg, a saint,

Lar Parganah, Kashmir,

Lodi Dynasty, ati eth

Loi Sahib (Louis Bourquin), ltt ee a

Ludiana, District of, ens

Luihir and Luhawar, old spellings for Lior:

Lyall, J. C., : : <é3 Dad 106, i

Machiwérah, battle: of, it Pn

, founded,

Machodri,

Madra, the same as Bhutan,

Mabbhar at, ;

Mahé Radza Weng, me Fs —

Mahoba, founded, oo .+ 0 eS

Malaud, town of, Re a

Malik Toghan, ae: vo

Mamriz Khan of Khurasdn, Pie te

Manat, idol of, a

Marhot4, subsequently called Lidiand,

Meegwahan, a king

Millennium of the “Tslam,

Mriga-dava, ) | .

Mriga-dhara, \

Mubarik of Nagor, | wore sa pate

Mughuls, invasions of, ee 189, 193,

Mughul troopers wore red caps, id ; .

Muhammadan conquest of Dihli, ... ee Ree:

-- Saints, ee 90, 96, 10T, 10S)

Mu’jamul Buldan, Persian translation of, .

Mw inuddin i Chishti,

Mukatsar, sacred city of the Sikhs, ss

Mukhtacir i i Sair i Hinddstan, a Persian Historical work,

Mulla Shah Muhammad of Shahabad,

Multan, siege of, ae

Muntakhab- uttawarikh, by Badaoni, at sie

Nahrwilah, plundered, ane seek sis ate

Index.

Najaturrushid, a Persian work by Badaoni,...

Nal Daman, by Faizi,

Narhan, a parganah in Sarun,

)

Newall, D. F’., on the temples of Razdén, Kashani,

N paiaddin Ahmad, the Historian,

Notes on Chand Bardai, eh

Nudih, old spelling for N uddea,

Ochterlony, Sir David,

Orissa,

Peis Sen,

Padmawati,

Pail, ruins of,

Pik Patan, leh of,

Paélam, tan of,

Pan br ahma,

Panjab Sweepers called Chinas,

Parmal, xg

Beinn Tazkirahs, fe

- translations om Sanskrit,

- words in Chand,

Phayre, Col. Sir Ar thur, History of the Burmah Race,

106, 134, 13

1, 145, 161

Philological Committee of the As. Soc. of Bengal, labours of, sade

Pratapchandra Ghosha, on.a Balandshahr Inscription,

Prithiraj, the last Chauhan,

Puttun '‘lemples, ...

Qadiri,

Qanauj, spelling of,

Qutlugh Khwajah,

Raikot, Ludiana, . .

Rajahs of Bhatnir and J aisalmir, wae

-- of Jhind, ¥

-- of Patiala,

-- of Kumaon,

Raja Tarangini, quoted, ....

Ramay4na, Persian translation of, .

Ram Deo, of Deogir, a

Ram Singh, founder of the Kiika Beet," jee

Rand Kika,

Rantanbhur, or Rintambore,

Raushani Festival,

Razdan, or Razdoing, Temples of,

Razmnémah, eae

Ruins of Pail, |

— of Sarhind,

—of Sunet, ...

Sacred cities of the Sikhs, .

Sahnah, town of,..

Sakki Sarwar, a saint,

122

ee O4

226 Index.

Salimah Sultan ee

Samanah, District of,..

Samud Sikhari, a fort,

Sanscrit. works ‘téranabated into Persian; ity

Sarang Khan,

Saraswati,

Sarhind,

Sarw, or Saro, river,

Sarw i Azad, a Persian Tazkirah,

Satlaj, river, ae

Sawanih i Akbari,

Sect of the Kukas,

Serpent in Kashmir Chronicles,

Shaikh ’Abdunnabi Cadr,

Shaikh Can’dn, a Saint,

Shaikh Chachi, Do.,

Shaikh Mahmud Makki, Do.,

Shamsabad, town of,

Shan race,

Sheftah, a Persian poet,

Sher Shah,

Sheshnak,

Shi’ahs, ...

Shihabuddin Ghori,

Shrine of Guga,

Sikandar Lodi, .. cial

-- Shéh Sur,

Sikhs, A oe

Siri, near Dihli, ‘i es te

Bintan, ie

Sombansi,

Somnat, idol of,

Sriswagarh, a fort, Sas

Statistics of the Lidiana District,

Stonehenges in Kashmir,

Sulténpur, founded,... one

Sunet, Ruins of, Ses Bik

Surjoo river,

Tabaqat i Akbari,

Takshak,... te

Talwandi Rai (Ludiana),

Tamarix, use of, ae

Térikh i Alfi,

i Badaon, 32

i Badaoni, oe.

i Firtz Shahi,

—-—— i Nizami,

Tazkirahs, Persian,

130, 141, 142 ©

re Lp a

...86, 91, 94, 104

a 80F

4, 88,

".. 106, 122,

185, 194,

a ee

Page

136

See

4, 145, 149

‘83,

120,

148, 151,

. 106, 122, 140°

Index. 227

Page

Temples in Kashmir, oe aa veoh nae

Thomas, George, the adventurer, oa: aw 93

Tihdra, town of, ... a zee 23 SOpno

Tilpat, town of, ee eas 211, 212

Timiur, © ie. fas 88

Todah, town of, a dot 117, 144

-- Bhim, town of, sea ree 2:

Tolbort, T. W. H., on the District of Liidiana, FE 83

proposes to translate the Tarikh i Firdz Shahi, iw 106

Tomar Dynasty, ... F * 2

Translations from Chand, ... ae 1, 145, 161

from Tarikh i Firdz Shahi, or cee LSE

— from Sanskrit into Persian, wae eet LO

Ulugh Khan, meaning of, a be sen! (oe

Urdii versus Hindi, ia sa 12

Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects, a 14

-- of the Lidiana Dialect, Lie set 98

Vyasa, ... sre te ee if

Waramool, in Kashmir, iio

Williamson, Lt. , Vocabulary of the Garo and Konch Dialects, 14

| Yad i Baizé, a Persian Tazkirah, =n re Wen

| Zafar Khan, Ss Wy “#4 18). 189,193, 199

Zain ul’ Abidin, King of Kashmir, REP eae 142, 178

| Zia of Baran, ae sag | USE

= «

Tees, Se

” + OM

a I ‘-—y ia, i vu

4 - aes nes ‘ ; ere

— € te a +

ah pee. Ay Le) “

FOS BC yehon, aye

. ri ‘<¥ q

a oe if Ly . abe «

fon F's he

ill Lig

aur

’ +

, ee

z ee a

Kt aoe ai ck ‘ENE

Cie f

be * sna

4 : ‘or P a

i) 4 i e

ee re, Ga’ oa tee

4 . ’

t Lf 2k en

fear

y Pe pea

a s

‘

““

~~ -

‘

cul ‘a ;

’ i .

fo ; j

= ‘

{ hy

} ‘*

: \

‘ eh

) <yL>

> a ‘

oye

a iy

hae

”

asse

. ©

“

ore

ete

;

‘

£ ;

2 a

-< -

« , e

: ~

oa toe

f i Ros

? ~

’ . ~*~) ah

eo ne y

: ee SO Un fi

| a ee 4

Te 7

} big M Pa

~ ea a) wh, Peet wi

n 2 x y

~ ay a) o

r am, & Pure .ck: ie

es ;

B } ny ite

i : at ae .

Aare j

ee ry hit

rae m <i

>a. . 2 .

ae hd -

“3 hat

gue sre ay! Fe

ae : a

(wie. :

: a+ eas

a POA

“PNW

fnaesy a shy

thas!

i r¢ i ‘3 A as) ing 1d om

ys 7h | S554: i is sis

; an

Thiont iO tall iLnoa

asrites h le

*. 7,

ot eA rr a

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

VOL. XXXVITI,

PART 1,

(Nos. I tro IV,—1869),

EDITED BY

THE HONORARY SECRETARIES.

“ Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men

of science in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing

and send them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such

communications shall be long intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall

entirely cease.’

Sir Wm. JoNEs.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS

1869.

Date of issue of the different numbers of Part II, Vol. XX XVIII.

No. 1, containing pp. 1—63, pl. I—XII, and

Metereol. Observ. for 1868, pp. lxix to lxxxv. 20th Jan., 1869.

No. 2, containing pp. 65—143, pl. XITI—XVI,

and Metereol, Observ., pp. lxxxvi to ci for |

1868,.and pp. 1 to’ xxiv for 1869; ...2.3000<: 3rd June,

No. 8, containing pp. 145—200, two tabular state-

ments, pl. XVII, and Metereol. Observ., pp.

xxv, fe xlee Gor deGGs 7 Bed centres 29th July,

No. 4, containing pp. 201—278, (including index)

pl. XVIIa, XVII—XXII, Meteor. Observ.,

pp. xlix to Ixxxii for 1869,—title, list of con-

tributors, dec., Ge... .casveicassves sees venseensvces) . etna

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS,

0 @@ @teo-

Bat, V., Notes on the Flora. of Manbhiim, ...c......sccssceccesese

Branrorp, W. T.,—Contributions to Indian Malacology,

No. X ;—Descriptions of new species of Cyclophoride, of

Ennea and Streptaxis from the Hills of South and South-

Ceemummatnidia, (yeti pla X VEL Nee fava et des ceeeditas ds worhbes

Ornithological notes chiefly on some birds of Central,

Western and Southern India (with pl. XVII a), .. ......

CaRLLEYLE, A. C. L.,-—Descriptions of two new species

belonging to the genera Varanus (Psammosaurus) and Fe-

MMMMAtre FESNECLIVELY, .a0'd Gapessctelaes sara vaisenelintge see qcedaes

Fryer, G. H.,—A contribution to our knowledge of Pelagic

Mollusca (with chart, p. 269, and pl. XXI-XXII, .........

Gopwin-Avstmen, H. H.,—Notes to accompany a ae

map of a portion of the Khasi Hills, near longitude 91° H

(wath sections and map, pl. I—IX), icc... cecscaresese ences

, Notes on the Geology and eke Seatures

of the Peiitia BEE ier eet aise ioe lstecin nt taldole's yall go Nc ileisaie Op o,¢

GorrenautH Szvn,—Tabular statement ae the ponehtg

rainfall from Jan. 1837 to Nov. 1868, &e. &., and

monthly mean of the principal meteorological elements

and actual rainfall recorded at the Calcutta Observatory

for 10 years, from 1856-67 (two tables after p. 200).

Kurz, 8.—On Pandanophyllum and allied genera, especially

those occurring in the Indian Archipelago,,.........seee ses

Remarks on the species of Pandanus,.......2.cccececeeces

Nevitt, G. and H..—On some new marine Gastropoda from

the Southern Province of Ceylon (with pl. XIII),.........

Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon

MEN LL oy acts iene temeitaaauneain race dad Tec clsia@atesloon ou’

SroticzKa, F.—On the Anatomy of Sagartia Sciathenees and

‘ Membranipora Bengalensis, a new Coral and a Bryozon,

living in brackish water at Port Canning (with pl. X—XII).

125

164

192

151

145

157

StoriczKa, F.—The Malacology of lower Bengal and the adjoin-

ing provinces, No. I;—On the genus Onchediwm, (with pl.

DIV AV) \ sce ccunusesstvescvoncasasnsd <09 <helin ede: enn

, Contribution towards the knowledge of Indian

Arachnoidea (with pl. XVITI—XX), oe eee e ween

Survevor-Gunerat—Abstract of howrly meteorological observa-

tions from September 1861 to October 1869, (added in

form of an appendix to the different numbers, pp. lxix

to ci: for 1868, and pp. i to lxxxii for 1869, ........ UB. Tee

Watprz, D.—Analysis of the Khettree Meteorite,...... ........

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

Plates I—IX,—Sections and map, to accompany Capt. H.

H. Godwin-Austen’s paper on the Khasi hills, vide ...

Plates X—XII, Figures of Sagartia Schilleriana and Mem-

branipora Bengalensis, to accompany Dr. F. Stoliczka’s :

paper, Vide.........,0406. ieee . 62 & 63

Plate XIII aes ec Leper yh = accompany 7

Messrs. G. and H. Nevill’s paper, vide................ ... 65 &e.

Plates XIV-X V,—Figures of species of Onchidiwm, to accom-

pany Dr. F. Stoliczka’s paper, vide .. woest sige 111

Plate XVI,—Figures of Indian inate < accompany

Mr, W...%.. Glantord’s paper, vide.cc.<.-:...s0.ceveuseeeenae 143

Plate XVII,—Figures of Ceylon Marine Sua to ac- q

company Messrs. G. and H. Nevill’s paper vide......... 157 &.

Plate XVII a,—Trochalopteron Fauirbankii, W. T. Blanford,

Vid@. Genicesepetee

Plates XVIII_Xx, Be ore 1 RRR Oe - ata Dr, :

FI. Stoliozkals paper sade 65142 ores paaves sees coseeceeeee 250-251

Plates XXI—XXII,— Figures of three species of Hyalea, 4

and a chart shewing the distribution of Pteropods, to

accompany Capt. G. EH. Fryer’s paper, vide ......, ovees 200 G2 59

JOURNAL AS: $OC: BENGAL VOL: XXXVI. PTH. PLATE I.

SECTION @.NEAR BOCAPANI TO-WARDS LAOKLA.

Stream on reat -

Laokla Village

BOGAPANI!. VALLEY.

5 "

rye

tL Seen?

Nonglowav Village’

‘es Pumsungoot Village’

2 Black: & C* Cad:

SE NW IL, SS.E.NNW.

Level: of Sea’

. ¥ — 4

: ;

Se) 4 ‘ .

fs ‘4M oye :

f be - “ Y gra e®, ix

ans x 4

JOURNAL AS: SOC: BENGAL VOL: XXXVII-PT.1.

TLL ULE

Garse Sandstone

Dip 12° Southerdy

26 ft

3t4 -

376 Ci

Total of Coad 20% &

PLATE QU.

On the highest point of the hill the rock’ was

aw light tine graced saridstone

Another bed of coaly stall must cecur about. thrs pomnt

Rllowiurg up the ravine on the hard surtice of the sand.

Stone traces of pizces of ocad were weer, but the jungle

became so thiele I could not penetrate fierther; thepreces

were Fery witervor tv qualiby.

0 These shales were light: dove coloured very thin beilded,

Speckled and: dotted) throughout with: dark spots of

vegetable matier; the remains so allered as to show no

Structure under a low power

Carbonacous shales same as those’ at Landelar{?]

tv appearance may be Of same age

Very hard compact sandstone like that of Cherra §

holding precisely the same Topographical position

on the surfice of the country.

Phe tall running bucte nea.

Hed anlage

y level thom this point

t coarse sundsiones.

Black Hurthy Shatel?t} Coal Bed N2L

Sundsiones fine white S coarse gritty

Gal Led N°6 upperd inches a band distindly stratitied

bang hard heayy and compact

Opper part tine light piloured sands and soft shales with

simalt Uackpartides of vegdalte mutter:

above the coal was hinches of white and pinkusl shale

then Vsiw band of dark carbonaceous matter

Coal Bed N22 the portions ov surface ive le ghter tre wag

ardently due to xposure-tedding very regudar under ard

upper surtices truce planes Ss 5

Garse white gritty sandstone (qucta)weth ates small dis-

colorations here and there.

\coal Bed NS

Stardstones red ferogencustinted arse sand

Paes

Orne. ORK

cul pees tls A) ADIT O'S

= be widgets ro het =e ee ee hy oe 7 2 ak 9 on we

‘ Pa

oe 4 ah he J. hk >)

HPPA A ee os 0) aD, Ws VSS ae a ae uh ve fie bn

“e eam *

oe ry soon entre

% antel fed = na

ok ye ay aan x

™~ ae ort ba —*

¢ “a

ee ‘

4 - F

15 ' ‘io

oe:

u x

¥ ie

et st ? ~-

ww fog (> as

. =

P Ae AP,

. i le pas

¥. da cd 5

' a 2 :

. ee

a“ iy .

1 bea -

s 4 »

= » - “ss a

f -

; re he

. hl nA

Snets o

io Me rs

* { , af 0 Se {

ee ee

\ é t .

hfe - yt tartg

PLATE. 10

RENGAL. VOL: XXXVILPT AL WE 8ST KHASi HILLS Scale) of Heights ini fe

Seales o7 eughts uv cel

SECTION A.FROM LANDEKAR HS.TO THE PLAINS AT BACHOLI. ere

Scale’ one tach = one/ Mile,

AS* SO

hue

NONGLALAY.

Village

2.390 LANDEKAR:H.S.

Om Blay RE

: ee

—— — Level of Sea/

Sextiow nearly North & South) looking West

¥ HS.

: — z (SSS

See ge sg ee ——— ers

— > a ~ Coal.

LD Granitoid Rocks

Infta Num militio’

(DD Nemmilite Limestone:

(A) Supra’ Norenutitin

ty Tertiary.

NQRTA.

SECTION B.FROM WYYOW RIVER 70 PLAINS AT GHANDADINGA. MYMENSING DISTRICT.

SOUTH

= sS x :

“3 s -S G

3 i ‘ : : BS w

: ‘ S - a S :

> = 8 » < S

3 Shs ae 2

& = SS: 5 3 “8 i

S § a ; —— SS se 2

Fran Grandadinga to Tigas FS. SSH and V.N.E Trgasi to Hiyyow. A ae =

tal,

S opi ne Sd

ee ree ee ae

tog RAT ay i i"

Plate IV.

= Hobklam A,

> Katilao

Photosinco. at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

February 1863.

Journal As. Soc, Bengal, Vol. XXXVIUPt. II. ve

MLE

the Garo Wills,”

Yind kc Hill Pudding — ~ Wanthy faak. =~ Gigasin |

Phototinco. at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutts,

February 1563.

i > a Pie *~

id * a

age |

ee a .

d 4

y! —

a: Ay -

~ ,

’

. .

. 5

— —

Journal As, Soc, Bengal, Vol. XXXVIUPt. Il.

WEST KHASS HILLS.

SECTION iy tae UM-DURLIANG RIVER .(@).

Photozinco. at the Surveyor General's Office, Ceicutts,

March 1868.

Plate V.

s. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXVULPt. IL Plate VI.

AND SECTIONS( a).

BZ Norte

Nummulitic

Limesione

Photoziaco. at the Surveyor General’s Office, Caicutt2,

March 1868,

C2;

—— >

Lor

"Fr

= i

5 Pe Pn a ~~

Saree eet, ogee FUN A Eile re grrr Ree goers ete ST ae at

7 -

dy «+

Plate VI.

ET STT |

CRON a

(ie send

March 1868,

AVP If.

AVG Ca of

PTH NT ne

(ive Ns

Vols. 2%

Photozinco. at the Surveyor General's Oifice, Caleutta,

“ewe ee ee

1 As. Soc. Benga

Piate Vill.

Joarnal As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXVIILPt. II.

Photozinco, at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

March 1868.

ogWannail Ps

Journal As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXVILPt. 11_

pee

Plate IX.

252200 |

R ®

25° Jo’

§ :

8 8 a

“| ‘ PART or mm: WEST KHASI HILLS. x 5

SURVEYED AKD DRAWN BY. Mactan

Veoh thy, oe

Photozinco. st the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

February 1563.

' . “ awed

wv—rZ

é Wit ¥ Ad

Be On a ang PORE EF a ele

' eS

, ao }

‘4 yy

; \ ;

{

‘ *

{

- Pre

_—

}

wae

“) 4

} ———T

™ ys

ro. -

- me “—

. ( s

4 -

4 lee!

es ¥

f ‘

=a s .

} ~~

{

ia :

" > ue 4

Me 7 :

{

JOURNAL

OF THE

molLATIC SOCIETY.

—_—<—.

Part I]—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

LILI PAAOWAAAAABAAAAAAABARAARA

No. I.—1869.

Norms to accompany A Grotogican Map or a portion or THE Kuast

Hits NEAR Lonerrupe 91° L. ;—by Captain H. H. Gopwin- Austen,

PR.GS.

[Received 28th January, 1868,]

In contributing this paper to the Journal of the Asiatic So-

ciety, it will be first necessary, as an introduction to those un-

acquainted with these hills, to commence with a brief account of

the geology already published; this must form the base of all

further inquiry extended into portions hitherto unvisited. I can-

not, therefore, do better than briefly quote from the works of Thomas

Oldham, Hsq., Superintendent of the Geological Survey, and H. B.

Medlicott, Hsq., Deputy Superintendent in the same Department.

These able surveyors, by their researches in the neighbourhood of

Cherra Poonjee, have determined the superposition of the principal

formations as displayed there, and though many minor sub-divisions

have, no doubt, yet to be discovered and worked out, the main divisions

on this longitude will most probably remain as the above geologists

have laid them down. Mr. Medlicott in his report on the Coal of Assam,

&c.* commencing at page 34, after mentioning the trap and metamor-

phic rocks north of Cherra, gives in detail an ascending series ,of

the stratified rocks. These he divides dnto three great Sections, as

follows :

* Mem. Geol, Surv. of India, vol. IV. p. 387 etc.

2 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. 1,

Furst and lowest ; the coarse sands and conglomerates, resting on ~

the trap and metamorphic rocks.

Second ; the rough tabular sandstone of the Cherra plateau, with

all the beds between it and No. 1 ;— Cretaceous.

Third ; the limestone, sand and shale with coal, that rise on the

west of Cherra, forming what is locally known as the coal-mine hills ;—

Nummulitic.

Of the oldest rocks the trap, as one proceeds northwards, is the most

conspicuous, and as shown in Mr. Oldham’s geology of the Khasi

Hills is in great force in the bed of the Kalapani, and Bog Pani rivers.

It is seen for the last time beyond Mofflang on the road to Mairang, —

and in the bed of the stream from Mofflang near Langiong, on the road

to Nongspoong. A rough section as observed ona march from the Boga

Pani, in this latter direction, appears as given in section a, pl. I. The }

unaltered position of the sedimentary sandstones, and grits resting on —

the trap, and the great difference of level and exposed surface of the —

last, with the high dip of associated metamorphic shales and older §

sandstones, show a very decided unconformity and lapse of time

between the two formations, as wellas the prior contortion of the

metamorphic shales on the first upheaval or depression with the trap.

The sudden and final termination of the nearly horizontal strati-—

fied rocks, is nowhere better seen, than on the road between Lookla

and Langiong ; this would strike the most unobservant traveller, more _

particularly if he were coming from the northward. From the great —

northern scarp to the Lookla valley all is metamorphic rock, gneiss or

granitic formation ; giving the usual peculiar features to the country of —

humrocky rounded hills, steep falls encumbered with enormous”

weather-worn masses of granitoid rocks, and many a grassy hill

capped with a dark grey, single or double boss of the same. To the

geologist the only sections exposed shew an interminable succession

of coloured soft-bedded gneiss, always dipping at a very high angle, and |

of a regular strike which has given a like parallelism to the natural

features of the country, its ridges and drainage lines.

On marching from north to south, and arriving at the village of

Pimsingit situated on the ridge, that bounds the valley of the Um

Lookla, the change is most sudden; one walks off the dark grey

granite on to a perfect shingle beach, and topping the ridge at the

1869. | Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 3

same time, the eye looks over a new land of high flat plateaus, show-

ing at once their regular superposition, and notwithstanding the great

elevation, their undisturbed state; even if the lines of bedding that

show in the steep cliffs of the ravines were absent, to strengthen the

impression. To the south-west rises the steep scarped hill of Maosinghi,

‘an outlier of another long high plateau to the south ; this is to a certain

extent evidence of still newer deposits, mostly swept off by theali-power-

ful forces of denudation. The boundary of the beds first seen at Piim-

sungut follows this ridge eastward towards Mofflang, these beds being at

first very thin, from lying and abutting on the denuded southerly slope

of the older rocks. The road towards the Bogapani, descends into the

valley running towards Langiong, and the whole series is here well

displayed, the most striking feature being its exceeding coarseness.

Thick, irregularly bedded conglomerates of metamorphic rocks, are

very equally associated with the very coarsest grits of quartzitic ma-

terial. These are seen (Section A, pl. III. resting, first, on the granitoid

rocks, and then on thin-bedded soft micaceous and pink-tinted schists,

and in the bed of the stream below, on the dark green, or blue colour-

ed trap, the extreme northern limit of a rock of which Mr. Medlicott

in his report says :—‘‘I have never seen, not even in Central India,

such extensive phenomena of trappean intrusion.”

From the great preponderance of shingle and water-worn stones

in the beds around the valley of the Karamjoimai, the cliffs that

were formerly cut away and bounded its sides, are now covered up for

many yards in extent by a shingly gravelly talus; the old scarp only

showing here and there at intervals. The quartzitic nature of

the materials, as before mentioned, gives these slopes a very light

colour, and to the country a very peculiar and uncommon appearance,

the ground being so stony that hardly any grass grows on it.

The level of the opposite plateau, bounding the right bank of the

Bogapani, is very nearly the same as that on the south of the deep

gorge of that river. It is very noticeable, as one proceeds south, that

the sandstones become finer, the bedding more regular, and thicker,

until at last, the conglomerates are replaced by coarse grits, and the

mass of the beds by hard and rather fine sands, some very white; even

beds of a clayey nature are occasionally seen. North of the Boga

Pani, I noticed no trace of any carbonaceous shales, which I had

4 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. 1, ©

at first expected to see, the series appearing so continuous with the

sandstones of Maobelurkur, where coal is found, and even worked, but

I think now there is enough evidence to show that a line can be

drawn between the lower and coarser beds, and the upper finer ones with

coal. The manner in which the general denudation kas acted, in-

directly proves this ; the lower, older and therefore harder beds remain,

withstanding this force, while the higher and softer have disappeared

fast and over a largerarea. Extending through the whole mass of

the beds, there is a very perceptible tendency to thin away at a very

low angle towards the base of the main ranges, 7. e. southward, and

at the same time to thicken, I believe, quite as much in the lower

series as inthe upper. This, with irregular bedding, renders it very

difficult, without the closest scrutiny, to be certain of the exact portions,

as the conglomerates resting on the granite incline to the beds with coal

at Maobelurkur. The coal itself is very local in its distribution. We

see at Cherra how soon it fines out and almost dies away on the road

towards Surarim.

The conglomerates in the valley near Langiong, bear in their com-

position a close resemblance to the great thickness of like rocks seen

below the cretaceous beds above Nongphriam, in the deep valley, east

of Cherra Poonjee; and I think they are, in both these positions, the

lowest in the series. Should this view be correct, the greatly denuded

patch of sandstones that form a higher plateau west of Pumstngut,

together with Mao Shinghi Hill, Ge. are the representatives of the

higher beds, forming a part of the nummultic series, the coarse grit

and conglomerate being the very lowest of the cretaceous rocks ; the

well developed later beds containing fossils only come in with their

increased thickness further south, but on this latitude they are absent.

I have not had the leisure or opportunity of examining any of the

country adjacent to Cherra Poonjee itself. It has been examined by far

abler and professional geologists ; I willtherefore, make no further re-

marks in connection with this area into which I had begun to wander. In

the section through the Bogapani, a series of schistose, yet sandy rocks is

seen in close contiguity to the trap, and it occurs successively in two

valleys. No like formation isto be found among the series of the sedi-

mentary rocks, that have retained their almost normal position ; they

are quite distinct, and seem to form the oldest trace of a much earlier

1869. ] Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 5

_ stratified formation, indurated, altered, and much disturbed by the trap.

Ithink their extension east, and their counterpart is to be found in the

quartzite sandstones of Mofflang and Shillong, associated with gneiss,

and to all appearance merging into this rock, which is in all respects

similar to that seen towards N unklow, Kollong, &c.

_ Having endeavoured to give the reader an insight into the class of

rocks and general characters of the country to the edge of the great

granitoid centre of the Khasi Hills, I will, in proceeding to the

_ portion in which my map (see pl. IX.) and sections were made, sketch

the general topographical features adjacent to the route.

- On this side of the Khasi Hills, the highest and most conspicuous

feature is the Maotherichan ridge, the highest point of which, the

trigonometrical station, is 6,297 feet above the sea. It is in fact the

backbone of the range, throwing off its streams into the Brahmaputra

on the north, and the vast jheels of Mymensing on the south. From the

extreme northern point in section A (pl. III.}, proceeding towards this

central mass, the country is open and bleak, covered with grass, only

some of the northern faces of the hill being sided and sheltered ravines,

with a shrubby jungle. The Khasi Pine must have been once abund-

ant, but has been so indiscriminately felled, that its southern limit is

‘much contracted; it is fast disappearing along this line, and

calls for Government interference and protection. The jungles are

of sufficient extent near Nowgspoong, to supply the large quantity

of charcoal, used by the iron smelters there. The whole process of

extraction of the ore, found in the state of small grains of titanifer-

ous iron, is fully described in Oldham’s geology of the Khasi Hills;

it gives employment toa large number of the inhabitants. The rivers

| Um Laokla and Um Nongspoong, are large broad streams, and shew

that they are heavily swollen during the rainy months. Before reach-

ing the southern foot of the Maotherichan ridge, a much larger

| river, the Um Kainchi is crossed, flowing through a broad flat valley,

| generally well cultivated with rice. These broad flat valleys are a

| very characteristic feature of the drainage lines in this portion of

the hills, and some especially that of Mokasa, give the idea of a

former lake system, before the sluggish rivers that flow through

| them, cut the present deeper channels. Under the ridge of Mao-

therichan, in the last named valley, the very regular strike and high

6§ Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [Nova

dip of the gneiss is very marked, in a white coloured soft band that

crops out at the very base of the hill, and is continued H. §. E. past

the village of Laoburtun.

From all I could see of this formation here, the Mokasa valley,

lies on a very sharp anticlinal bend of those gneisose rocks, the

granite appearing to curve over the Maotherichan ridge.

a The rock near the summit of Maotheric- —

han is very porphyritic, containing large

oblong crystals of felspar. In the valley it

disappears, and coloured gneiss, soft and

friable, comes in, to which is very probably

due the present configuration of the valley.

To the south near Mahaton, the porphyriti¢

granite is again seen, with a corresponding

rise in the hills. The above kind of granite

Maotherichan, G. T. Stat

is very common about here, forming as a

rule the lines of the higher ground and ele-

Mokasa.

vated masses; it is of a very hard nature,

often pink, and is generally used by the

people for the monoliths set up beside the

ashes of their dead.

On and about the summits of the low

hills, south of Maotherichan, that rise some

150 feet above the present level of the rice

cultivation, or what was originally the bed

ofalake, I was surprised to find, scattered

over the surface, a few well water-worn

pebbles, mostly of a hard quartzitic rock.

No beds exist anywhere near from which

such well-rounded pebbles could have been

Ideal Section looking West, near Mokasa.

washed, and I was quite unable to account

for their appearance. ‘They were not nume=-

rous, but sufficiently so to preclude the pos-—

sibility of having been carried there by hu-

man agency, the nearest spot whence they

could have been brought was the bed of the

valley below. No well marked traces of any

1869. | Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 7

thing like glacial action are apparent. Equally puzzling in such

valleys are two or three low mounds, all of transported material, that

are to be seen at the eastern and upper limits of the Mokasa valley. I

may ask, can even these hills have been affected by the glacial period

inthe Himalayas ? On this supposition, long and deep snow beds

extending down the flanks of this ridge, would be quite sufficient

to account for the above appearance, without the intervention of

true ice streams, but cold sufficient, to cover them deeply in snow,

during the winter is by no means an improbable state for them to

have passed through ; and we have no reason to suppose, that their

mean attitude has altered since the time when Himalayan glaciers

extended down to 5,000 feet below their present limits. Such a

physical change in a mountain range so close on the north, must have

wrought a perceptible one on the highest parts of an outlier like the

Khasi Hills.

Fifteen miles to the west of Maotherichan the higher general level

of the hills, some 4,000 feet, comes to a rather sudden termination ;

and the central main water shed takes a bend to the N. W. Rising

again, there in another higher portion called Laobersat 5,400, and

Nongkana 3,726; overlooking the northern slopes that thence fall

very rapidly towards the Assam valley. The watershed is thus

brought very close to the northern face of the hills, almost the whole

drainage being thrown to the south. The great depression west of

Nongkana in the main axis of the range extends quite across them,

the highest part the ridge near Nongkulang rises only 2,000 feet on

the south, forming there a kind of natural wall, between the main

drainage and the plains of India, the Um-Blay cutting through it

hear Pina Tith. The cause of this sudden fall in the levels of the

country, I would suggest, is neither due to subsidence of the meta-

morphic rocks, or to their denudation, -but that this portion has

remained in amore tranquil state, and been less affected by the

changes of level, on the west and east, particularly in the latter side,

Where the intrusion of the trap rocks alone has played so important

a part in the present elevation of the whole series. As we shall see,

this trap rock entirely disappears on this more western longitude, and

in the sections (see pl. III.), I propose to explain, the stratified rocks are

seen but little disturbed; whereas with the proportionate rise in the

8 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [ No. I,

hills, on either side is to be seen an equal bending and displacement of

the strata at their base. ?

Nongstoin, the residence of the Seem, or native chief of that name,

is situated near the edge of the general fall, towards the west and

south. A road leads out into the western part of the Nongstoin state,

vid Nongsingriang. Crossing the Kerkonshiongba river, 400 feet

immediately below, its bed is seen cut through the metamorphic

rocks ; thence ascending to the plateau on the other side, the village of

Nongrompoi is reached. This part loses fast the open bare features of

the Khasi Hills, large timber trees come in, with densely wooded

ravines, principally bamboo, until with the descent to the Umiam river

and the village of the same name, this jungle growth becomes so dense,

that nothing can be seen of the country on either side of the path.

The scenery in the above valley is very lovely near the river, fine

trees on every side overhang the still winding reaches of the

Umiam. To the traveller it is both striking and novel scenery. It

was only in the beds of streams that the rock i situ could be

seen; this still continued to be of azoic age. Turning S. W. up,

over and down low ridges covered with the same monotonous jungle

of bamboo, grasses, and shrubs, Maomarin was reached, and a short

distance to the west is Nongktba built on a clearing at the south side

of a hill, called Lamdekar in the map (properly Luimdellor, Khasi)

conspicuous even at Nongshingring from its sharply cut, though low

scarp. “On this hill is the site of one of the principal trigonometrical

stations of the Khasi Hills Survey, and this led to my obtaining an.

insight into the formation. Nongktba stands on a hard hornblendi¢

gneiss, slightly pink in places, with a certain amount of bedding, the

dip being very high to the north; it was of very compact grain and

different tothe same class of rocks hitherto seen in the East.

On leaving the base of Lamdekar Hill, at the very commencement

of the ascent, is met a dark blue grey, and coarsish grit, having

scattered water-worn pebbles of quartzitic rock in it. Atthe next

portion of the ascent and the main one to the summit, these

pebbles are not seen, but the same coloured grit, very con+

spicuous from its extreme neutral grey colour, occurs as a thick bed

of quite 14 feet. This is succeeded by beds of a lighter colour,

but still coarse texture. Higher again it changes to a bed of

1869. ] Geological Notes on the Khast Hulls. 9

extremely coarse subangular quartzitic grit, set in a white sandy

matrix. The whole thickness would be up to this point about 150

feet of horizontal bedding. Here a very fine grained series of beds

comes in conformably. In this occurs a dark carbonaceous shale from

two to three feet thick, shewing on fracture indistinct traces of

_ carbonized wood and vegetable matter ; it was very fine and soft, with

few mica grains here and there. The colour is of a dark indigo, ap-

_ proaching to black in places; the little carbonized bits of wood still

showed the fibre. The beds above this I could not see in section, but

quite 30 feet or more, cap the hill. A great deal of loose stone lies

about, and also shaly white fine clays and fine sands, more or less

micaceous. ‘The sands are thin-bedded, white and pink, some beds

being composed of a finer material of a light blue colour, and

full of minute bits of blackened vegetable matter. On splitting

| several of the slabs, I disclosed some very perfect impressions of large

well developed leaves. The greater number of these were evidently

| of grasses, as large as bamboo, and interlaced over and under each

| other.

- The Lumdekorh hill has no great area on the top, it is perfectly

isolated, and another small hill of the same formation stands to

| the N, W., about 400 yards off. For 40 feet it falls in a cliff,

| and thence in steep latus the rest of the height; but owing to

the dense jungle, it is almost impossible to examine the cliff. The

| Garrow hills rise rather abruptly on the S.W. into long flat-topped hills,

| having no conspicuous eminences, and are covered with forest ; they so

| their crests, that might serve, when observed from some other station,

vary in height that no particular tree can be selected anywhere on

a8 a point for the detail Surveyor. Deep ravines proceed towards

the plains, cut through horizontally stratified rocks. On the south

vise two eminences of the same type as Lumdekorh, and in one and

the same true line, due N. W.—S. E. It is curious to find these

isolated masses, the last remnants of a higher level of the formation,

still remaining, when all else has been removed. To the east of

Nongktiba village, a hard hornblendic gneiss was seen, and the same

rock extends towards Maomarin. A short distance before reaching

this place, the path towards the south diverges, passing the site of

_|the deserted village of Umlangyem.

10 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. Tf4

Eight minutes walk along the ridge S. W. of this brings one upon

a sheet of the coarse sandstones, resting on and capping the gneiss;

not more than three feet of the sandstone remains visible; it is no

doubt the same as the lowest beds seen at the base of Lumdekorh.

Passing over this little outlier the ridge falls, and the metamorphic —

rocks are again traversed all the way to Nonglalay; the path crosses

one large stream, and on the descent into this valley, much milky

quartz is seen, evidently in thick veins. Close to Nonglalay, rises one of ©

the eminences noticed at Lumdekorh. The lowest beds were precisely

similar to those previously noticed. In the scarp, near the top, a few

very dark beds gave indication of the presence of the carbonaceous and

upper beds, which I have already described. Unfortunately dense jungle

and want of time, prevented my paying a visit to the summit of the

hill. From Nonglalay the country is seen to fall gradually towards a

deep valley on the south. To the south-east again, the second isolated —

mass Katelao was seen, its scarped features are the same as the one we

were under. This last also threw off spurs towards the deep valley

of the Um Blay. Down towards this our path wended, following a long

broad spur. About two miles down, I came on a thin capping of coarse

sandstone, with sub-angular quartz pebbles, the position being due

west of Katelao hill. The sandstone was evidently dipping away

south together with the level surface of the metamorphic rocks. We

thence rather more rapidly descended into a deep valley on the right,

the Teniang, backed by a high wooded scarp, the stream flowing through

beds of coarse sandstones and conglomerates, being nearly horizontally

bedded. The forest is here very fine, the bamboos of enormous length,

the tallest certainly I have ever seen. Crossing the Teniang, the path as- :

cends steeply to the top of the plateau, and descends again a considerable

distance, suddenly opening out of the forest upon the high bank of the

broad fine river, the Um Blay. Sandstone is seen all the way to this.

On both of the intervening ridges, or rather plateaus, one sandstone bed

of a very blue colour was conspicuous, the tint generally was precisely

the same as that of the beds noticed at Lumdekorh, but here the series

had become of very considerable thickness, from 800 to about 1000

feet.

The way looking up and down the Um Blay, was very pretty, as re-

gards its wooded character. The river was nowhere under 100 yards m

1869.) Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 11

breadth, flowing very sluggishly ; in its bed the sandstones had a south-

easterly dip of about 5degrees. A ford was formed about a quarter of a

mile down, it was water knee-deep, but a very small fall of rain would

have rendered it quite impassable. At the junction of a tributary from

the south-west a short distance further down the right bank, the path

leaves the Um Blay, and follows the newstream. In the bed I at once

noticed rolled pieces of coal. Sandstone of the coarse purple kind was

exposed in thick beds on the ravine side, dipping south with 7 degrees ;

and further up, the coal occurred in water-worn lumps quite 2 fbs. in-

weight,its fracture was bright. At halfa mile the path leaves this ravine

on its left bank, continuing steeply through a magnificent forest with

very little undergrowth. As one ascends, the sandstones become finer

and lighter, and at about 400 feet in a side ravine with water coal

again was noticed in its bed, showing that it lay high in the series.

Leaving the path, I struck up the steep ravine, which gave every

promise of a good section being obtained, and it has well repaid the

trouble of the climb, for at 50 feet of vertical height, coal was found.

Tt rested on ferruginous coarse sands, and was overlain by a

coarsish white quartz-grit, with a few little dark discolorations here

and there. I am not over-estimating the thickness of this lowest bed

of coal at six feet, and in places it was more; the bedding was ir-

regular. On a like surface of the strata below it I commenced here to

take in the whole of the measurements with a 10 feet pole, well

knowing how very wild some estimates have been, especially with

regard to coal beds; that at Cherra Poonjee, for instance, having been

put down at as much as 17 feet by one officer. The results are given

| in section b, Plate Il, shewing thus more clearly the succession of

the beds and coal seains, which, good and bad, gave a total of 20 feet.

The similarity of the upper fine beds was remarkable, as being very

like those which were seen capping the Liimdekorh Hill. |

Leaving this section and continuing the march, we ascended along

the face of the hill, the coal showing again on the path itself. On

reaching the compact hard beds of sandstone (vide Section on Plate

Til.) the ascent ended, and the general level of the country dips away

with the even slope of its dark brown weathered surface towards the

south, and in many parts over several acres in extent is entirely bare,

all earthy matter having been washed off it. A quarter of a mile further

7 S.

12 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. 1, —

the village of Maokerasi, inhabited by a people of the Langam tribe, —

is built on a low knoll, rising above the plateau on the edge of the .

steep scarp that marks the sudden commencement of the gorge we

had just come up. No streams find their way over this northern cliff, —

and the slope of the strata being south, the water issues from below

and must have gradually caused the cliff and gorge to eat back far from

the valley of the Um Blay. }

From Maokerasi towards Nongkulang, is at first seen the tabular f

sandstone, which dips at a low angle from the edge of the northern

scarp (see Sec. A, Plate III,) up to the stream that flows along the

base of the Nongkulang ridge. This sheet of rock is so hard, that

denudation appears to have made little or no impress on it, and the

streams which cross its surface have scarcely cut into it at all, in fact,

in many instances they flow irregularly and widely over its surface.

At halfa mile further on we crossed the main stream flowing westwardgy :

full of Welanie and Paludomi ; the forest commenced immediately on

the left bank and, I found, with it we had suddenly entered upon lime: |

stone rocks full of Nwmmulites. This was rather a surprise, as I _

not expected to find them on the northern face of this ridge.* £

We now began to ascend the Nongkulang hill through a very great

thickness of the nummulitic limestone series, certainly 300 feet, if not

more of it; this rock ended rather abruptly, and was succeeded by

sandy ferruginous strata, some of the beds being very nodular, continu:

ing to the crest of the ridge. Near the highest level of the limestone

rocks occurred one very marked bed containing Wummulites (about five

feet thick) of very large diameter and perfect form ; the stratum was

horizontal and curiously weathered by the action of damp and water,

The upper sandstone series was found to be rich in fossils well pree

served; there must be several beds of these parted by non- -fossiliferolll

light falls shales, and by less fossiliferous sandy beds. Durval

Neritina, Cyprea and a Trochus, were common forms, besides a few

Echini and numerous bivalves. I made a good collection of these, a

hazy day intervening when survey ees was stopped; yet owing to

* I may here add, for the information of shell collectors, that this spot is a

most productive one. Landshells were most plentiful, and i in great variety.

I added a large number to my collection in a few minutes, many of which have

since turned out to be new species. It was just their favorite spot, a dense

damp forest, black vegetable mould and limestone rock,

1869. | Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 13

the sandstone being so friable and soft, it was very difficult to obtain

perfect specimens.

From the top of the ridge, looking north and west, the view was a

curious one, and showed the geological features very strikingly.

This was principally due to the hard sandstone of the Maokerasi

plateau which, I believe, to be exactly the same as that on which the

station of Cherra Poonjee is built, and it occurs precisely on the same

horizon as regards the nummulitic hmestone. I give a panoramic

sketch, taken from Nongkulang, which will give, I trust, an idea of

this portion of the Khasi Hills, with those of the Garow hills in the

| extreme distance. (See Plate IV.)*

In such interminable forests, as here cover the country, it is not an

easy task on first coming upon a new series of beds to make them out,

and be quite certain of their relative position. I was inclined to think

the fossils I had found, bore a cretaceous type, and again the perfect

horizontality of the limestone did not appear conformable with the

southerly inclination of the sandstone, which is about 5—7 degrees. We

may account for this by the difference in their mode of deposit. The

Molluscs in the upper beds point to a shallow sea with, in all probability,

a sloping bottom. The limestone partakes in many places of a southerly

| incline, even very perceptible further west. To clear up this point, I

| made several excursions around this ridge, and was successful in

finding several good sections. One of the best of these sections is to

be seen on the path that leads from the old and deserted village of

Nongkulang, to the new site of the same; it was at first a somewhat

puzzling one. Leaving the trigonometrical station for some distance

' west, the main ridge on which it stands, is followed; it soon falls,

| the ferruginous sandy clays and shales continuing all the way to the

first considerable ravine, and on the left bank of this, limestone

comes suddenly in, but does not extend tothe right bank. By

following down this narrow ravine bed, the section d, represented on

plate V1, with plan, in the nummulitic series was displayed. In this

section * represents the hard white coloured limestone; s, where the

path crossed the bed of the ravine, is a blue clay, four feet thick, resting

* There is one error I must point out, 7. e. the peak of Wanrhy is too far to

the north, its true position is immediately over Pudengrii scarp. This mistake

originated by my putting in Waurhy from another sketch, the peak at the

time having been obscured by haze.

14 Geological Notes on the RhavislTils. [No. 1,

on light blue limestone and containing small Nwmmulites ; its thickness

is about 5 feet. This bed was succeeded in descending series, by 10 feet

of sandy beds, w, the lowest being calcareous ; then followed a massive

bed of dark blue clay, w, quite 35 feet thick, in parts very nodular ;

these nodules were large and very hard, inside of a darker colour than

the clay, and were not in the least calcareous. I found no fossil

remains of any kind in this stratum. The lowest rock, wz, seen

at the junction with the last, and in the bed of a larger ravine with

running water, shewed about 12 feet in the section. This limestone —

was full of large-sized Nwmmulites, and the base of the series was still

many feet below. The hard blue clays were a new feature, as also the —

sandy beds ; both were only locally developed. On the ascent to Nong- —

kulang, I did not see them nor again do they appear further west ; for —

proceeding towards new Nongkulang, the white hard nummulitic lime- ;

stone is followed all the way from near section d, and is at last seen torest

on coarse and strong bedded sandstones, of the coal series (cretaceous ?).

Approaching the village, the path ascends a low spur, and with it the

limestone, contrary to expectation, is left, and sandstone is seen. In ~

a cliff section, bordering a clearing here, a good view of these lower

thick-bedded sandstones is to be got, the limestone forming another —

low scarp; on the south of the clearing scattered blocks of the same being

still left on the intervening level ground. This marks the commence-

ment of a great roll in the lower sandstones (coal series), its line of

elevation running from east, and ascending to west, dipping low

to north and south, taking the whole series some 1,000 feet in

height up to the culminating cliff of Pandengroo. The amount of num

mulitic limestone greatly decreases’ towards west ; the thickest section

being that under Nongkulang hill series up i and as far as section

d; and I am even inclined to think that the beds were originally —

deposited on a very irregular surface of these underlying rocks. We

cannot expect so sudden a change mm their mineral composition to

form a very conformable series. py

To return to section A, the lower portion of which I hay

only alluded to. Following up the same ravine from the path, t

highly fossiliferous sandstone of the Nongkulang hill series is.

seen on the left hand, or the east bank, and nummulitic limestone

on the right or west. In the sandstone I found an Ovula with

—_—_

1869.] Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 15

Echini. Keeping to the well defined boundary of the limestone, I

‘met with a well marked unconformity of the two series running in

a line, from south-east to north-west, and at a short distance further

on, from north to south. The limestone terminated in a perfect cliff,

and not a single particle was to be found on the sandstone side

‘of the depression between the two. In these depressions blocks

of the sandstone were found resting on the limestone irregular surface,

and the former also rose in a rounded hill considerably above the

general level of the latter. I give a sketch, (Plate VID) and a section

(Plate VIII) of this upper junction. The local unconformity of the

rocks clearly shews, that the sandstones have been here deposited

around and against an old cliff of the limestone rocks. The section

exposed in the same ravine, showed it was no result of local

displacement.

In some new clearings, close under the trigonometrical station of

Nongkulang, and on the north side some good sections are to be seen

i the relative positions of the limestone and superincumbent sand.

The first and highest bed of the nummulitic limestone series, is a

peculiar dark burnt, umber-coloured calcareous rock, containing scat-

tered very small Nwmmulites. Ina ravine close by the light-coloured

pure limestone was seen to pass horizontally into the hill, Great

—

ee ee ea ens

L hollows occurred in the surface, where the limestone had evidently

fallen in, and the ravine first mentioned entered into one that was

of great depth.

| from Nongkulang south along the path to Shibak, one

passes over asteep scarp of some 50 feet in the upper sandstones (fossils

nu merous), which extend some distance to the bed of the first consider-

able ravine. Nummulitic limestone occurs here again, and following it

i Pp in the section represented on plate VIII, it is seen close to the path,

bs ng ahard blue clay (w); it contains hard nodules of the same material,

its ness varrying from eight to ten feet. This accords, in its charac-

, With Section d, see plate VI; above 7 is a great thickness of white

re nummulitic limestone, aie up the face of the hill. Below

e blue clay, following down the ravine, is a darkish purple earthy

ck (three feet), it effervesces slightly with acid; then follows a bed

q :... brown rock, having minute white Vwmmulites scattered through

mass, and being interstratified with some light-coloured beds, the

16 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. 1,

whole thickness amounting to about ten feet. The darker coloured beds

are seldom more than one foot thick, and the whole rests on a hard

thick bedded and light-coloured limestone (x), the thickness of which

is unknown, although it must be considerable.

In this section again, the unconformity of the upper sandstone

is apparent, masses of it are seen resting on all the above beds, in the

position of outliers, and are the remains of the upper series, deposited —

against a high and irregularly scarped surface of the limestone

series. The dark umber coloured bed, with small Nuwmmulites,

corresponds to the one mentioned, as seen on the north side

of the ridge, being the highest of the limestone resting on the sand,

but I am much inclined to think, that on that side (the north)

much of the limestone was denuded, prior to the deposition of the fos- —

siliferous sandstones and shales.

After leaving this section, one passes (on ascending to the crest ;

of the ridge to the west) on to coarse sandstone of the lower

group, infra-Nummulitic. There is no doubt of this, as on the

south-west face, after crossing the crest, these same rocks dip into the

valley at an angle of 10 degrees S. W. One again encounters the

nummulitic limestone near Purjonkha, clearing the strata, seen ina

ravine close to the field and belonging to the lower sandstones, on which —

the limestone rests horizontally. From the sudden appearance of these -

lower beds on the above ridge, close to the strata showing no sign of

bending or contortion, I am inclined to think that even between these

two last, a considerable unconformity exists, and that separation can be

established. The surface of the lower beds must have been locally

altered in level, before the nummulitic limestone commenced to be

formed. Throughout the great thickness of the lower sandstone with |

coal, I have never found a single Mollusc or any remains, save those of

indistinct vegetable matter. According to the sections, noticed by

Messrs. Oldham and Medlicott, we should find, as at Cherra, the

cretaceous rocks here; whether these sands with coal are their equiva-

lents, or whether they will be eventually found below, or above

them, and adjacent to the nummulitic formation, is an interesting

point, yet to be discovered ;—the probability is, that they are uppe

cretaceous. a

From Nongkulang, direct to Maokerasi, a good section, displaying

1869.) Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 17

_ the conformity of the last named rocks, with the limestone, is met

with. In the bed of the small stream with water, near where the

paths to Maokerasi and old Nongkulang diverge, the sandstones are

_ seen exposed ; the limestone rests horizontally on it, and from this the

; path leads down the easy hill side, through a descending series of

_ the limestone to the level of the main stream, in the valley, in which

it terminates. The way in which the sandstone passed under the

limestone was very striking, the former being the same kind of rock

one had seen higher up on the Nongkulang main ridge, where there

“was apparent unconformity. At one spot where the main stream here

entered the limestone rocks, for a short distance, the scenery was ex-

a raordinary, from the strange and grotesque way these had been erod-

“ed. No water was to be seen, as it soon disappeared among the blocks

and masses of rocks that filled the bed. All the limestone was

perfectly horizontal, the effects of denudation were most extraordi-

“nary and marvellous ; huge masses formed columns and natural arches,

or standing on three or four thin pedestals reared themselves amidst

the forest trees, 15 to 20 feet in height. Sometimes such a mass was

“surmounted by-a tall stately tree, whose roots ramified among the

holes and crevices in the rock; huge cable-like creepers hung sus-

_ pended from, or wound round them, while canes and ferns formed the

- under-wood, and flourished in the dark vegetable mould of this damp

“ving forest.

~ After leaving New Nongkulang less limestone is encountered,

ft] ough it occasionally is seen on the left hand side of the road, but

is nowhere thick, and partakes more of the character of outliers that

have stood out the forces of denudation. In all the numerous ravines

‘that are crossed, up to the steep descent into the Riangwylam, the

Lg sandstone in thick beds is seen with a dip of from 10 to 12 degrees

st bending to south-west, in the direction of the main ridge. The

| descent into the Riangwylam valley was quite 300 feet; on reaching

the river and looking up the gorge, a fine cascade is seen falling over a

steer cliff of horizontal strata, the limestone at the top ; the whole scene

being most lovely and grand. In the bed of this stream, lay masses

of limestone fallen from the cliff above, and a few pieces of coal soon

led to my finding a thin seam of bad quality, and evidently the high-

est in the series. It was about one foot thick associated with coarse

Ma a a - aE wee ge

18 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [ No. 1,

sandstone of light colour. A bed of carbonaceous shale above this

contained a good deal of shining iron pyrites, and was very heavy.

A steep ascent here commences, up a spur, bounded on the north by

a lateral valley of the Riangwylam, we had just crossed. Beds now

were seen, with the rise to have an easterly incline, or the commence-

ment of another great roll in the sandstones. Near the top a trace

of coal was found, but nowhere in the forest could I find a satisfactory

section. The thick debris covered the ground too deeply, the associated

beds being very fine sparkling, lilac coloured sandstones. At the top

of the final ascent, where an open glade in the forest was entered,

the surface sandstones were of a very gritty coarse description, with thin

beds of water-worn quartz pebbles, and had more the look of the

coarse beds seen near Maobelurkur, &c. After crossing a ravine >

where the dip is south, these beds are seen capped by the lowest

strata of the nummulitic rocks, but it is a mere outlier and only some ~

20 feet thick. Several other isolated masses are contiguous. The sand-

stone, beyond this a short distance towards the village of Nongum-

lai, dip with the surface level of the ground, and is evidently of the

same hard durable kind, that occurs near Nongkerasi, but here it- is

thrown up several hundred feet higher, falling towards the south-west

to rise again in a higher roll, in the culminating scarp of Pundengroo, —

The village of Nongumlai is a very good central point, whence

the geology of this neighbourhood can be studied. It stands on an

open bare slope of the hard sandstone that terminate a few hundred

yards below, in the main stream, a source of the Um Durliang flow-_

ing to the south. Immediately beyond this stream a densely forest-

clad hill rises rather abruptly, all of nummulitic limestone, the surface’

of the slope being as usual, most fantastically eaten away. Thence to

the south a very large area covered with forest is also of this rock, im

which all trace of drainage lines ceases, water finding its way down

the innumerable crevices and holes, or rather wells in the rocks, for the

word hole hardly expresses the deeply honey-combed state, it presents.

Land shells literally strewed the ground, principally large Cyclophorida.

The limestone here presents a thickness of some 250 to 300 feet, and.

is very similar in stucture, colour and hardness throughout, none of

the blue and clayey bands being seen. Both in the stream and near

the top of the ridges, transported small lumps of the fossiliferous

1869.] Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills, 19

upper beds were found, but nowhere did Isee it in setu. The large

quantity in the ravine points to its existence higher up the valley, but

_I had no time to penetrate in that direction.

a=.

To give some slight idea of the majesty of these forests, I may

here give the dimensions of a tree on the top of this hill on which a

maichan was erected by one of my assistants, ascended by a rough

ladder lashed on with cane. After sketching the surrounding country

on the plane table from it, on descending, I measured it down 92 feet.

d= a

The upper branches before they were cut away to open out the view

were probably 20 feet higher. The tree was without a branch for 50

feet from the ground, a clean straight trunk, but at that height forked

into two contiguous stems, and continued thus for 30 feet higher. Its

‘girth was small for size, being only some 14 feet near the ground.

“This tree was a very good average, few were shorter, and many

exceeded it. With such associates, those who have never seen such

Siegert

‘tropical scenery, can hardly realize its features, and the feeling

“instilled by the antiquity of such vast growths of vegetable life, when

passing through them for hours of the day. In such a country all its

| foot.

topographical features are lost, and to see them and sketch them in, the

only plan for the surveyor is to erect platforms on trees, selected for

the purpose, that they overtop and command the sea of waving foliage

that stretches for miles around. Jeaching the level of such a platform

and emerging from the gloom and shade of the 80 feet below one

into bright sun, with the far horizon of blue hill and mountain, and

| nearer valleys, is like entering another world. The highest level of

these forests form a densely populated zone of insect life, among which

| the Lepidoptera seem to rule, and many a coveted form have I seen

from these sites, flitting safe beyond the reach of net, much less of

One of the most conspicuous hills in the neighbourhood of Nongumlai

| is Yindku, and as on its flanks some of the best sections are to be

| Obtained forming a passage into still newer strata, I will describe them

as they come in in tur along the ridge. This has a direction almost

due south, to which the road keeps. The sandstone on which the

hummulitic rocks in their outliers are scen, extend for some distance,

the dip about 15° east ; 14 miles from where this path leaves that from

Nongkulang to Nongumlai, at the foot of a rather steep ascent the

20 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hiils. [No. 1,

limestone occurs in great thickness, the total being perhaps 250 feet. On

this ascent I came on detached pieces of the fossiliferous iron-coloured

clays. Next in order came the nodular ferruginous sandstones, noticed

also below Nongkulang on the northern side, and then again some 40 feet

of limestone. The topmost bed of this rock was of a brown umber colour,

the Nwmmulites were small and much reduced in number, with here

and there a faint trace of a shell; shales, and sandstones with precisely

the same fossils as I had found on Nongkulang ridge, then succeeded.

The base of Yindku was quite 1} miles further along the ridge; where

an ascending series of the beds is first noticed, they at once become

much lighter in colour, and coarser in texture. With this change the

fossils become scarce, at last only an occasional bivalve is to be found,

and these soon disappear altogether, thin shalely beds intervene, and

at the top of Yindku itself, the rock was soft, sandy, and friable. The

thickness of these newer deposits is quite 200 feet, the dip now being

very low to N.W. Yindku from its isolated position, and greater

height than any of the hills around, formed an excellent point for

observation, but being covered to the very top with large timber trees,

would be of little use without a maichan. From the one built there,

the view was most commanding, extending to the very foot of the

hills in the Mymensing district.

On the spur thrown off from it, to the east, a like section to that first

described, occurs again, and the best spot whence to visit it is Shibak,

situated on the direct road from Nongumlai to Bagoli in the plains,

After leaving the main ridge of Tigasin near Nongumlai, a quarter of

a mile of descent brings one to the Laokla stream flowing north.

Leaving this a ridge of the fossilferous beds is another stream, the

Umpernon, is crossed where they dip S. W. at a low angle; on the

descent, the unconformity was again noticeable, although the beds still

retained their normal horizontality. After descending over a considerable

thickness of the nummulitic limestone, it suddenly is replaced by the

ochre-coloured sandstones, at the foot of an ascent extending to a height,

considerably above the lowest limestone just left. At halfa mile

limestones again dip north 5°, and at the bottom of the valley all was

of this formation; near a huge overhanging mass of it, used as €

temporary shelter, it was seen to rest on a light coloured fine sandstone

(the cretaceous ?), the same sequence in every respect as is seen neal

1869.] Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 21

New-Nongkulang. The Shibak stream was now quite close, flowing

over the slightly sloping surface of the lower sands, and striking the

‘edges and the termination of the limestone, which also marked that of

the forest. This valley of the Shibak was for a long time a very great

puzzle. In no direction could I see any likely depression in the

forest-clad heights about, where the united streams of Shibak (the

Wakit from under and north of Yindku, and the Umpernon and others)

might find their way to the plains.

The conspicuous cliff of Kuta Bram, was the only open point in

the neighbourhood, and it was by visiting this, I determined the

sxistence of a very anomalous physical feature, on a really grand scale

and one which, though familiar with the like topographical feature on

a small scale, as seen near Cherra Poonjee, fairly surprised me. The

Cause is simple enough, the united streams all meet in the nummulitic

limestone, that here extends quite across the main valley ; the streams

drain away under it, over the surface of the harder sandstone on which

it rests. This water must percolate under the Kita Bram ridge into the

Rugsir, but the greater quantity evidently finds its way into the Gabir,

at Bagholi, there a large stream without an equivalent drainage area.

The ascent to Kita Bram cliff is through a forest of enormous trees in

the bottom of the valley, passing into bamboo near the crest of the

‘Tidge, that rises quite 350 feet on the south. The fossiliferous sands

Bonin limestone as usual, and continued to a short distance within a

few feet of the cliff ; this consisted of fine thin-bedded sands, micaceous,

of light ochre ha gray colours; they dip about 10° south, but no

fossils could I find in any of the ante at its foot, although about 100

feet of the beds were here exposed. ‘This newer series covers all the

spurs south of Yindku, and is exposed again on a direct path leading

from that peak into the Rugsir and on to Gillagora, a village of Habi-

a mg Garos. Some of the beds at this point were of a blue, crumbly

day, and all thin-bedded ; the presence of springs causing land-slips,

have formed this bare open spot, whence a fine view is obtained.

BPassing on down this ridge, nummulitic limestone again makes its

appearance on the right hand or the west, rising in a very steep cliff, the

path is over the red sandy clay (fossils being numerous of Nongkulang

forms) at its base. Descended at last rapidly into the bed of Rungsir,

ere hard massive fine sandstones passed under the limestone, which

22 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. 1,

dipped far higher than yet seen in this area, being evidently on the

south side of an anticlinal fold. The beds where first observed,

dipped 12° south by west, then 15° to the south, increasing to 20° and

25° south. Although a deep gorge existed through the-mass of the

limestone (here very thickly bedded) no water is seen; at about 400

yards through the gorge, it terminated suddenly with its highest dip,

succeeded immediately by highly fossiliferous beds, well developed

under Rongsitilah, (the summit of which is of the higher series, of

coarser sand and thin shales). In the first open clearing on the ~

right bank I found my best specimens of fossils in a bed %n situ, —

most of the Nongkulang forms turning up. These rich deposits of ©

shells are immediately succeeded, as one travels down the bed of the ©

Rugsir, by thin-bedded bluish clays, the sandstone shales becoming —

more sandy and compact, the dip increasing with every few 100 '

yards, until below the village at the debouchement of the stream —

into the plains, at the very last spur and section exposed, they are —

complete sandstones of very lower tertiary Siwalik type; their colour

is brown, and their dip about 50 degrees to the south. |

Emerging into the rice fields of the plains, and looking both to thal

east and west, it is very evident that the last and far newer beds, extend

on both sides along the base of the hills. The dip of the beds is ©

seen on the ridges of the spurs most markedly,—more marked is —

this on the west, at the base of the true Garo hills, and these, by

bending more to the south of the latitude, we are now standing on,

bring in beds of again a later period. Save for the marshy plains,

flat as an ocean and the greater exuberance of the forest on the hill

slopes, one might be looking at an expanse of the Siwaliks of the

Deyrah Dhoon, the same characteristic long slopes towards the plain

terminating in a short steep fall on the north, whence rises another

long slope of rather a less incline to the horizon. .

I followed the foot of the hills, in both directions; Ist, on the east

side to Bogali, where two streams the Gabir and Ronga unite, and

form a large and navigable stream. Nothing new is observable thus

far, the different ‘‘soras”’ or streams take their rise im the tertiary

sandstones; in their beds, the same succession is seen, as in the

Rugsir at Guilla Gora, and the usual fossils are also found as one gets

deeper into the series. Crossing the Gabir into the village of Bagoli,

1869.] Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. 23

the whole eastern side with the hill slopes, are of nummulitic lime-

stone, which here abuts on the plains; the Ronga flows out through

the mass of it, which dips 25° south, in hard thick beds, and is the

first point on this side, where it is worked for the Calcutta lime trade.

_ A limestone quarry, with a shallow canal approach for canoes, occurs

near ima, gle © hee OS LS

about 14 miles to the east of Bagoli, worked I believe by the Manager,

C. K. Hudson, Esq. of the Inglis estates. The Ronga river takes its

rise immediately under, and to the south of the Nongkilang hill series,

~ and has one point of interest, but I was unable, from want of leisure,

_ to follow up and examine it. Much coal is to be seen in the bed of

the stream brought down from above, and can be no other than an

outcrop of that in the infra nummulitic beds seen and described at

Nongkerasi ; what its extent may be here in the Ronga, it is impossi-

ble to say, but it deserves examination. A subsequent attack of fever

prevented my penetrating further to the east of this line, in the most in-

teresting and promising part of this geological district, where the useful

mineral beds approach so near the plains with the magnificent water

carriage which the Um Blay must offer at this very point. I do not

think it likely that the coal will be found again near the base of the

hills, west of the Moishkulla or Rungsiang river, for a very consider-

able distance. The general strike has assumed too strong W. N. W.

direction, towards the culminating point Wanrai, and the tertiary

_ sandstones appear very persistent, and with greater breadth, west of

Chanda Dinga, owing to the slight extension of the hills southward.

Returning to Gilla Gora, I carried my survey along the base of the

hills westward, crossing the Rongsiang, near longitude 91°, and on to

Chanda Dinga, in order to ascend and observe angles at the fine

elevated hill of Marang Thang.

All belongs to the older tertiary series here ; the principal and most

noticeable feature of the rock being, the great increase of dip in this

direction, coming in with the newer beds of the series (this is shown in

Section B, Plate III), until at Chanda Dinga, the beds are almost

perpendicular into the plain, forming here a bare flat rock on the hill

side, marked in the old revenue map, as Chanda Dinga stone. The

beds here had assumed that coarse texture, with light brown, or gray

tint, lithologically so exactly similar to rocks of the Siwaliks,—even

to the scattered strings of water-worn small pebbles, met with in the

a —

24 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills. [No. 1, @

great mass of the lower series, known better as the Nahun group or

Lower Siwalik formation,—that I think they can be well placed on —

that horizon. Whether this will be proved still further west, by :

the presence of the later Mammaliferous sands and gravels of the

higher, and again unconformable series of the Siwalik group, is to

be seen, and it is a most interesting point ; or may not these last beds

still exist under the present plain of Sylhet and Mymensing, undis-

turbed, abutting like the present land surface against the lower series ?

The change is so sudden here, from dry sandy steep slopes to swamps,

that within a few paces of the hill side, the ground is covered with the 4

dead shells of Paludina and Ampullaria ; the sections seen in the beds —

of the streams show an alternation of sands with dark clay, containing

the same shells. I could point out a bed, under and to the south of ~

Nahun, so precisely similar, with the above shells (particularly the more —

lasting opercula of the latter species) that no one who had wandered ~

over both areas, examining them attentively, could fail to be struck with —

the great similarity of their deposition. The only difference rests in —

the present unconformity of the one, due to elevation ; and in the still |

normal position of the other, slowly accumulating bed over bed, and 3

perhaps in some future geological age, to pass through the same mighty _

changes. Medlicott’s explanatory ideal section in the Markunda under ~

Nahun, (where also lies the beds I have just referred to) is nowhere —

brought so forcibly to the imagination, as at the foot of these Hahiang —

Garo Hills. |

that a transition from No. 1 to No. 2 (vide Ideal Sections below) is —

easily wrought, and this is what is actually seen at the junction near —

Nahun, if anything greatly exaggerated in nature, from the lateral —

force that has been introduced. :

ee sah \

1869. ] Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills.. 25

After visiting Marang Thang, whencethe deep gorges with precipitous

sides of a large river, draining from south-west of Pundengroo scarp,

was seen, and presenting a complete section of the whole series I have

been detailing, I retraced my steps into the interior of the hills

once more, wid Jigni, situated about four miles up the Rongsiang

river. I give the reader some idea of this mountain stream, its fea-

tures being so unlike what is generally seen, and nothing like it is met

with at the base of the Himalayas. I proceeded the whole way, without

much obstruction, in a canoe to Jigni, the water being so little deep

in parts that save to a native who easily disencumbers himself of

superfluous clothing, it would have been a most disagreeable route,

It became still more difficult to navigate beyond the above village,

shallows and rapids commencing; yet very deep long reaches still

_ continued right up to the junction with the Sen river, where is a pool

" famous for the immense number of fish killed periodically by poison-

ing the water. With a stream navigable so far into the hills, one

_ would expect the valley on either side to be broad and somewhat

open, the contrary is however the case. For the whole distance the

spurs approach, and end in high sheer cliffs, washed by the excessively

_ deep water of the pools at their base ; opposite Juigni itself these cliffs

"are at least’ 200 feet high.*

__ The whole valley is extremely malarious, close, and shut in from

air, and we all suffered a few days after from passing up it; not

-@ man with me or self escaped fever, the season was advancing,

rain had begun to fall (March 1867), which may account in a measure

for the suddenness of the attack. A short distance above the last

deep pool, the river is seen gushing out, with a considerable body of

water, from a small cavern in the limestone rocks. The valley

still continues over these dipping at about 20° to 25° S. S. W,,

their strike being in the general direction of the valley. At about two

tniles further up the limestone comes to an end, and the lower sandstones

become visible ; they dip at 30 degrees. Pieces of coal had been common

for some distance below, and here it was seen 7n situ, with an increasing

_ * They present excellent sections of the sandstone rocks: these gradually

lower in dip, becoming very Jow and rise again towards the junction with the

Senriver. There is nothing remarkable in their appearance, being thick-bedded,

Sometimes very soft light coloured and micaceous; their dip is always a

_ Southerly one,

26 Geological Notes on the Khasi Hills, [No. I,

dip in the coarse sandstones. About 400 yards on was another bed, of

greater thickness and better quality, the remnants of which we had seen

scattered all the way down the stream bed ; it passed quite across it, from

bank to bank. For a better idea of this most interesting section see that

marked C ; it will be there seen, that the coal is brought to the surface

by the anticlinal in the whole set of these beds, which extend to the

nummulitic limestone, being evidently much disturbed here, and seen to

change suddenly from a dip of 60 degrees N. K. to perfect horizontality,

and continuing thus with the slightest dip, about equal to the fall of the

valley, all the way upto Nongumlai. This line of dislocation, it will

be seen from a glance at the map, is curiously situated, in a direct line,

with another evident great bending of the same strata in the Rugsir,

where the limestone crosses that stream, and would extend to Bagoli,

where the limestone is again seen bending over with an increased dip of

25 degrees to the south. Continued to the N. W. as a due straight line,

it passes through a culminating point of the Garo hills, Wanrai Prak,

which seen from a distance is doubtless of the newer stratified rocks,

having there attained considerable elevation. 3

Not far above the last mentioned section the S4 Hileng tributary —

comes down to the N. West; and from under the eastern scarp of ;

Pundengroo, much coal is washed down; but I had no opportunity A

of visiting the site.* To the north of Tigasin hill-station the —

coal is seen, with a dip north of about 8 degrees and a thickness _

of some 8 to 10 feet, in the infra nummulitic beds; this northerly —

dip brings in the limestone at the bottom of the valley, whence the —

beds rise again with a S. 8. West incline, and a very low angle. Ata

distance of some six miles, the path descends into the Asbik river,

close to which, the same coal is met with again, here almost in a

horizontal position. It is again seen on the ascent of the left bank,

but a good deal of it is covered up with debris. On descending to

the Wy-yow river on the other side of the ridge, gneiss comes in, i

I did not again observe any stratified rocks all the way to Nongtien

Shiling, and thence v4 Nongkushba, until Landekar is again reached,

The Um Blay at this part of its course, flowed through the mass of

* Native information indicates that the coal here is in large quantity; even

should this be found the case, it is too far into hills to be worked. profitably. =

metamorphic rocks.

1869. ] Geological Notes onthe Khasi Hills. OF

From the preceding notes and sections, it will be observed, that on

this longitude we have no infra-nummulitic coal as at Cherra, that the

seams here occur always below the last named formation, at a very

regular depth below it, and that unlike the coal of Cherra, it is very

persistent over a large area, and often to be found ina series of

deposits one above the other. It is to be traced along the high long

line of bluff that bounds the Um Blay on the south, in its south-east

course to its debouchement near Puna Tith bazar. If this coal ever

be utilized, it must be somewhere in this neighbourhood, or between

longitude 91° 10’ and 91° 20’, and south of latitude 25° 26’. This

small area would well deserve a close inspection, and the results

would be extremely interesting, if continued to the east, the rocks be

followed out into the Cherra sections. Until this be done, it would

be premature to theorise, or draw comparisons, between different beds,

one of which, the limestone, is identical, while the beds both immediate-

. ly below and above differ very much. I have already stated my

opinion that for a long distance, west of Chaudadinga, and the

Rongsiang rivers, but little coal can be expected to be found, from

the presence of tertiary sandstones on that side.

This paper has now reached a size I little contemplated, yet with

its errors, with which no doubt it may abound, in bringing it to

a close, I trust it may prove useful to those, who may at some future

date visit, and plot out the same. sections.

Camp, Cherra Pooujee, October, 1867.

28 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

On THE ANATOMY oF Saqartrta ScuiLtErRtTANA and MEMBRANIPORA

Benaauensis, a new Coral and a Bryozoon living in brackish water

at Port Canning ;—by Furp. Sroniczxa, Esq. Ph. D., &. GS.

Paleontologist of the Geol. Survey of India.

[Received 3rd June, 1868. ]

Special interest is always attached to the study of any organic forms,

found living under unusual and sometimes anomalous conditions,

inasmuch as these forms very often represent peculiar types of organi-

sation, adapted to the peculiar circumstances under which they live.

In a theoretical point of view, there exist, we may say, in each spect-

jic organism a number of forces which, by their harmonious action,

produce a certain stable equilibrium between the organisation of the

animal, and the influences of the medium in which it lives. Should it

now happen that the animal is, either voluntarily or accidentally,

placed, under conditions different from those under which it formerly

existed, and further, should the influence of these external agencies be 3

so great as to overthrow, or be not sufficient to maintain this equili- —

brium, it devolves upon the organism to restore this balance, or to be .

dissolved into various other forces. The latter case need not occupy y

here our attention any further; but as to the former, we may observe

in general that the amount of the changes in the organism, necessita- 4

ted for the purpose of restoring the disturbed or unstable equilibrium,

may in various cases be very different. ;

In some cases an alteration in the colour or in the viscosity of the

animal may suffice; in others it requires a change in the digestive or ¢

the nervous system, and again in others it becomes necessary to change ~

the existing, or to produce new and additional organs of locomotion, —

&c. Thus are clearly by natural selection produced new forms or

types of organisms, designated by naturalist varieties, species, genera, —

ce. Ps

Looking at the same time upon the numerously varied organisation —

of beings in general, it will readily be understood that the less dif-

ferent the organs of a species may be,—that is in other words, the lower

its place is in the natural system,—in the same degree would probably

decrease the necessit for a change in the organs. In any case,

1869.] and Membranipora Bengalensis, 29

this change would not be so easily perceptible, as when the organs are

numerous, various and more highly developed. Expressing, there-

fore, this idea in a more general way, we imply that, within certain

limits,* forms of lower organisation possess a greater faculty of ac-

commodating themselves to different conditions of life, than more

highly organized beings.

In the present communication I shall record a very interesting case

of the persistency of a form under different conditions, relating to a

_ coralline species, a so-called sea-anemone, and to another species

belonging to the Bryozoa, or the lowest organized Molluscs. With

respect to the anatomy and physiology of these two species, I shall state

all the data which I have obtained, for though some of them are not

directly new discoveries, still detailed records of these animals are so

rare, that I must treat the subject somewhat at length, in order to

’

;

‘

be intelligible ; and this, I think, is very necessary as naturalists have

become in late years rather sceptical regarding new species, only

_ characterised by few high sounding,—occasionally unintelligible, —

terms. Besides this, it would be impossible for me to give additional

observations, without bringing them into a systematic connection with

those which are already known on this subject.

Phylum, CauentERATA.+

(Cnidozoa or Actinozoa.)

The name Cnidozoa is derived from the word af «vida, used by

" Aristotles for the designation of this group of animals; the same

_ word is now retained for the name of spécial, defensive aalli which

_ characterize these animals, as will be shown subsequently. For the

extent of the various divisions of the Ca@uenrerata, Leukart and

‘ Kolliker’s works have to be consulted.

* It is very often stated that the more highly organized forms possess a greater

faculty of accommodation; this is, however, I think, a mistaken idea, originate

ing partly in the comparison of the same external influences upon organisms

* of different kind and degree, partly in the difficulty of noticing any changes in

the lower organisms. The comparison must always be atruly relative one; for

in differently organized forms, there is a different amount of forces present to

counteract the influence of external agencies.

_ + The first few principal divisions are noticed according to Heckel’s Generale

Morphologie, 1866, vol. II, p. L.

30 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana. [No. 1,

Sub-phylum, PEtRacaLEPHz.*

(Polypi).

Class, ANTHOZOA.

(Zoophyta.t)

Body fleshy, attached with one end; on the other provided with a

mouth usually surrounded by hollow and perforated tentacles; internal

cavity divided by septa.

Sub-class, HmxacoRAttia.

The original number of septa and tentacles are sia.

Order, Hattrnopa.t

(Zoantheria malacodermata, sea-roses, sea-flowers, or sea-anemones.)

Body soft, septa not forming an external hard skeleton, into which

the animal can retract.

Sub-order, ACTINIACEA.

Body very rarely containing loose, scleroid particles; base adherent

at pleasure, not adapted to forma swimming sac; internal cavity —

instructed with very long, not emissible thread-like organs (eraspeda),§ —

containing the so called nettle-cells, or enzde.

Family, Sagartipz.||

Body pierced with loop-holes (cinclides) for the purpose of emitting” ;

long, retractile threads (acontia) containing cnide, being the defensive —

organs of the animal. ,

This family may be separated into two divisions, the Sagartiine and :

the Bunoding, the latter of which have the column instructed with —

tubercles. q

* From being usually adherent to rocks, the other sub-phylum is called —

Nectacalephe, including the swimming or Oceanic forms. =

+ This name is inconsistent with the usual nomenclature, and could only be

used by reversing it into Phytozoa, but to this the name Anthozoa is preferable. —

{ This name only can imply that the animals live in water, which contains ” hi

a proportion of salt, &c. it must not be understood as pure sea-water, for there —

are numerous brackish species belonging to this order. ie

§ To avoid numerous repetitious, must direct any one, not acquainted ©

with the terminology of the anotomy of corals, and especially of that of the

HawirHopa, to the subsequent detailed description of the various organs. Most

of the terms will be found fully explained in Gosse’s admirable History of British

Sea-anemones. London, 1866, Se

|| The true Actiniide, and several other allied families, do not possess emissible —

threads, or acontia, and are therefore destitute of loop-holes, or cinclides. —

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 31

Sub-family, SAGARTIINA.

(Sagartiade, Grosse.)

The body is, according to Gosse, generally remarkably soft, more or

less pulpy, lubricated on the surface with copious mucus, exteriorly

mostly studded with sucking cavities, which, by forming a vacuum

have the power of adhering to foreign bodies, but the margins of these

cavities do not rise into conspicuous warts; the base is usually broad,

the column moderately high, furrowed longitudinally ; the tentacles

are smooth, simple, generally arranged in uninterrupted circles at the

_ margin of the disk; the enide of the tissue are usually of the stilet

kind, being long oie with a short in itself retractile flagellum, called

by Gosse the ecthoreum.

Gosse distinguishes the following divisions, from the relation of

which the generic classification of our species will become apparent.

aan | ee Ee ee heh

A; Tentacles moderately long, slender,

a; disk perfectly retractile,

a; column soft, destitute of suckers ... Actinoloba,

ps <s - with suckers ......... Sagartia,

y; 3 partly provided with a rough

CPUICIOME cece \ Nes « 2, -Lhellva

b; disk imperfectly retractile, . Adamsia et Gregoria

ae ee oe A eee

en es “s '

B; Tentacles represented by mere warts .. Discosoma.

Genus, Sagartia, Gosse, 1855.

All the species of Sagartia are characterized by a thick, fleshy, con-

- body, adherent by a base which is under ordinary circumstances

wider than the height of the column; the surface is studded with

- Aumerous small suckers, not forming permanent warts, and with many

Comparatively large cinclides ; the peripherical margin of the disk is dis-

_ tinct, but not separately thickened; the tentacles are simple, placed

“near the outer periphery of the disk; they are generally very numerous,

3 but variable in length and arrangement ; the mouth is somewhat ele-

vated, provided with two gonidial grooves, each having a pair of

tubercles on either side ; the acontia are numerous, and are emitted

freely.

32 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

The presence of solid scleroid particles of two kinds, as they will

be described in the present species, may likely be added to the generic

characters of this genus, but this has to be proved by the examination

of other species.

Species. Sagartia Schilleriana, Stoliczka, 1868.

Plates X and XI.

Char. Sagartia corpore pulposo, transparente, virescente pallido,

bast lata, se@pissime rotundata adherente ; columna cylindracea, im

altitudine diamatro basis fere equante, longitudinaliter angustatim sul-

cata, transversaliter minutissime corrugata ; septis ad peripheriam

plerumque 48, distinctis, eqidistantibus, alternatim virescentibus ; ten-

taculis numerosis, prope peripheriam disci sitis, exterioribus brevissimis,

interioribus gradatim longioribus, omninis ad basin inflatis, versus

apicem attenuatis, terminationibus subtruncatis et perforatis mstructis ;

tentaculis seriem primam formantibus senis ceteris conspicue crassiort-

bus, ad basin scepissime rubescentibus, ad terminationes albidis ; apertura

transversaliter ovata, angusta; labio plus minusve prominente, ad

marginem undulato, sub-refleco, tuberculis duodenis instructo ; lenti-

ginibus bipartitis, ad utrumque angulum gonidialem sitis, tuberculis

ceteris minoribus ; canalibus gonidialibus parvis, orificiis rotundatis,

via prominulis, albide marginatis notatis ; radiws gonidialibus via

dignoscendis ; gula sulcis virescentibus furcata.

Ovariis duodenis, bipartitis, folliculis mm utroque latere septorum —

sitis, ceruleo-purpurescentibus ; craspedis numerosis, sordide luteolis, in-—

terne supra ovaria suspensis ; acontjis albis, perlongis ; cinclidibus sub-—

rotundatis, numerosis, paululum vmpressis, im tegumine irregulariter 2

dispersis, nonnullis prope marginem superiorem columne positis latis- i

sims, semper apertis, ceteris minoribus aliquantisper obscuris ; énidis z

ovato-elongatis, stiliformibus,* ecthoreis brevibus prope rectis instruc-

tis; septis mesenterialibus intus ad basin solidulis, albis ; tegumine —

corporibus minutis tabulatis siliceis, ac alteris subcylindraceis et varie

dentatis calcareis instructis. ‘

* Gossein his above quoted Treatise on the British Sea-Anemones distinguishes —

four kinds of cnide, all of which have rather long, spirally coiled ecthorea, except

one globular kind, in which no ecthoreeum was observable. The cnide of the

present species of Sagartia are mostly, short, straight, or very rarely slightly

bent. I shall term this kind of cnide which were also observed formerly by

Blainville, Leukart, and others, stiliform. Gosse says that the chambered form

is the usual one in the Actinwde, though the present variation seems quite as

common. =

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 33

' The principal and characteristic distinctions of this species are,

the very great softness and transparency of the body, having a very

slight greenish tinge, mingled with somewhat of a pale fleshy colour,

a distinct layer of a dark green pigment being deposited near the

external surface, below the outer. muscular layer of each alternate

"septum, and thus producing greenish, longitudinal bands of about

equal width ; further, the prominent lips of the aperture, the great

thickness of the primary tentacles, the blueish purple colouring of

the ovaria, the yellowish craspeda, the purely white acontia, and their

great length.

;. I shall at first speak of the various normal forms of this species,

than of the anatomy of the different organs and of their signification,

and last of the physiology, the habits and modes of life.

;

a. Form.

The general form of the body of Sag. Schilleriana is common to that

of other truly marine species of the same genus, the column being,

however, when the animal is expanded in a normal condition, a little

‘shorter than the diameter of the basis (see pl. X. fig. 1). In conse-

“quence of the softness of the fleshy substance, the base, (which is

“comparatively more solid than any other part), always adapts itself

entirely to the object on which the animal is sessile. Ona smooth

“surface, the circumference of the base is almost circular, only on

account of the projecting septa slightly undulating at the margin;

on a rough surface all cavities* are filled up with the fleshy mass,

‘securing at the same time the attachment of the body, but also alter-

ing the original roundish form into an oval or irregularly polygonal one,

‘The septa are distinctly traceable by the alternate greenish bands.

_ There are three principal forms to be observed, which may be called

the normal ones, being successively adopted by every animal in a

healthy condition. The first is the expanded form (pl. X. fig. 1) from

Which these animals derived their name of sea-flowers. The frequent

bright colouring of the disc, as a rule, increases their resemblance to

| _*Thave seen portions of the body filling such cavities of about half an

inch in depth, and one-fifth of an inch broad. When the animal was carefully

detached, it lasted for several days, till all the protuberances disappeared,

but they were at last assimilated to the regular form of the body.

34 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

an open flower of one of the Composite. The tentacles reach far

beyond the diameter of the column, of which only the lower portion

is visible ; the body is perfectly transparent, allowing all the internal

organs to be traced without difficulty, the lips of the mouth are

slightly prominent; the water is seen moving up and down in the

hollow tentacles, which play about actively in all directions, being

strongly inflated at their roots, and gradually becoming thinner to-

wards their tips.

None of the Actinozoa possess special organs of sensation, though

they are highly sensitive to the touch of any solid body, and even to the

influence of radiating heat, or to the light. The fact is that their entire

body, when soft, and not covered by a thickened epidermis, is almost

throughout equally sensitive and, therefore, makes special organs of

sensation superfluous. Still, I should think, there must be an in-

timate connection of some kind of nervous system through the entire

organism, inasmuch as the slightest touch of the tip of a tentacle is

sometimes momentarily communicated to the whole body, its effect being

exhibited by a change of the whole form of the body.

Thus aslight unusual movement of the surrounding water, or the

coming into contact with a solid object, causes the Sagartia, when

expanded partially, to contract, by which a quantity of the water con-

tained, is always ejected through the existing openings, (cinelides). In

this position, (pl. X. fig. 3) the animal forms a short column, with the ~

upper margin [of which I shall speak as the collar] somewhat thick-—

ened, the aperture hidden, and the tentacles protruding about one-

forth of their length ; the transparency of the body slightly dimin-

ishes ; a few acontia are usually seen to rise from the central portion

of the base, being then forcibly ejected through the cinclides, at or neat

the collar. Sometimes the tentacles are laid down, very slightly protrud-_

ing, forming a sort of a broad cone; and then viewed from above, they aré

seen arranged most regularly : those, belonging to the different circles,

being easily traceable from their thickness, (see pl. X. fig. 2). Any fut

ther disturbance generally induces the Sagartia entirely to contract, its

form resembling in this position ashort, depressed conical heap, (see pl.

X. fig 4), leaving only a small opening in the upper centre, from which

usually the white tips of the primary tentacles slightly project. In con-

sequence of the contraction of the outer muscular layer,- chiefly consisting

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 35

of concentric fibres, - the transverse plication becomes somewhat more

distinct than it was before, and the immediate neighbourhood of the

suckers slightly rises to short, transverse prominences. The greater con-

traction of the pigment layer also makes the greenish bands of the septa

more distinct, though the entire body possesses a slight tinge of the

same colour. The cinclides, especially those placed near or on the collar,

become rather widely open, and others are distinctly traceable; the

acontia are numerously ejected on different places of the body, and the

general transparency has again diminished as compared with the former

position.

Besides these three, so called normal, positions* of a Sagartia, there

are others which the animal assumes under certain abnormal conditions,

generally resulting from ill health, and being produced, either by

excessive heat or light, or by a change in the saline constituents of the

water, &c. Some of the principal forms, as observed on one and the

same specimen, are represented in figures 6 to 9, on plate X; but I will

defer the remarks upon these, until I come to speak of the physiology

’ and the habits of the animal.

b. Anatomical Structure.

In order more easily to understand the general anatomical structure

of the animal, I must direct the reader to the vertical section, as re-

_ presented in figure 8 on plate XI. This section is taken only in half

of the diametral length, being sufficient for our purposes, and the dif-

ferent letters, noted in this figure, have the following significations :—

a, base; b, column; c, collar; d, disc; e, tentacles; g, throat;

h, larynx ; i, stomach, or internal cavity ; k, craspeda; 1, acontia ;

m, ovaria, or the reproductive organs; n, cinclides, or pores in the

integument for the purpose of emitting the acontia. Ishall now

briefly describe these parts as much as possible in the same order, in

which I have just mentioned them.

The entire body of the Sagartia is surrounded by an external,

_ mucous layer, which chiefly consists of numerous, oval cnide, and

sparingly dispersed green pigment cells.

a. The base is, as already stated, a more or less round disk; on

| which the septa are distinctly traceable (pl. X. fig. 5), being of con-

* Being observable in most other HaLikHopa.

36 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

siderable thickness, according to the different series to which they

belong. The twelve ovarian strings, or reproductive organs, can be

seen through the transparent skin ; and equally easily traceable are the

six bundles of the craspeda, in position nearer to the centre of the

axial cavity than are the former.

b. The column represents the peripherical portions of the mesen-

terial folds, grown together, and it will, therefore, be sufficient to give

a detailed statement of the structure of one of the septa. The origin-

al number of these, as represented in the view of the basis (pl. X. fig.

5), is six, radiating from the centre. The second cicle is again six,

the third, fourth, and fifth are each twelve, one septum first appearing

next adjoining the primary septa, then one next to the secondary ones,

than again one between the two last ones. This is a common law in all

Hexacoraita, and I only notice it here, because I will subsequently

draw the attention to the difference, apparently existing between the

increase of the septa and that of the tentacles. The septa of

the first; and usually also of the second, cicle are distinctly traceable

almost up to the centre, those of the 3rd and 4th nearly so, both

being about equal in strength, but those of the 5th are consider-

ably shorter. I have not observed in any of the numerous specimens

which I have examined, a larger number of cicles than five, or 48

septa altogether; small specimens often had only three or four cicles

developed. The various cicles are shematically represented in figure

2 of plate XI.

EKach septum is composed of five distinct layers, as represented in.

the enlarged section, plate XI, figure 3-a B, y, 6, «. The outermost

ais, as formerly noticed, almost only a mucous fluid, composed

of a loose cellular substance, and a very large number of elongated

nettle cells, or cnide, and a few dispersed cells of greenish pigment.

The cnide of this mucous layer are, compared with others, the

shortest, being ovately elongated, slightly curved or kidney-shaped,

having, as a rule, an ecthoreum, shorter than their own length ;

they also appear to be nearly smooth.—Figure 4 of plate XI

represents the appearance of the mucous layer under the micros*

cope, and 4@ three-isolated enide still more enlarged.—The next

layer (8) is strongly muscular, chiefly consisting of concentric or

cross fibres, forming at intervals slightly elevated ridges which

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 37

contain the so-called suckers; these becoming more distinctly ap-

parent in the contracted position of the animal, (see fig. 4, pl. X).

These suckers, however, are-not essentially characteristic, and ap-

pear to vary greatly with the age. Along the dorsal edges of the

septa, there seem to be also some longitudinal fibres present. This

second layer is the same which, in several Acrrnracea, becomes cortace-

ous, taking a principal part in the formation of the evotheca of other

corals. The third layer (y) only consists of thick, transverse fibres,

containing large, dark green pigment cells. Below this follows

a tough muscular tissue (6) consisting of thin longitudinal and much

stronger concentric fibres, gradually passing into a regular carti-

-lagenous skeleton (ec), composed of an intercellular substance, and a

large number of various scleroid particles ; the figures 5, 5a, 5b and 5c,

on plate XI will illustrate this. Figure 5 represents a small portion

of the fourth layer, the three upper ones having previously been

removed by maceration. The muscular fibres are especially strong on

-a portion of the septum; the cinclides are spacious. Fig. 5a repre-

sents the reverse or internal side of the same portion of the integu-

ment, and shews on the surface an irregular distribution of the scleroids.

' The two last layers (6 and ¢) chiefly compose the mesenterial septa,

-extending above to the mouth and at the base up to the centre, but

being on the internal edge along the central axial cavity deeply insinu-

ated. The hardest portions of the septa are those round the larynx and

at the base, evidently on the two places where the strongest muscular

‘actions are required. In figure 38, pl. XI the most cartilaginous

portions are indicated by cross lines.

It is usually stated that the Haztruopa, and especially the

Acriniacza have neither an internal, nor an external solid skeleton,

and this notion gave rise to the name Hew«acorallia malacoder-

mata. There can be, however, no doubt that in the present case

the two internal layers, as represented on plate XI, figures 3 and

9, correspond to those which-in the Asrrmacna for instance -

‘secrete the enthotheca. The scleroid particles are of two kinds;

* someof them are long, with slight lateral appendages, and others

‘simple, sharply angular flat bodies, as shewn in figures 5b and 5c on

‘plate XI. These scleroid particles are only visible when enlarged

to about 500 diameters; and some of them are still extremely

38 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

minute. In the fourth muscular layer, which chiefly consists of cross

fibres, there are at distances small round holes to be observed, which

evidently lead to the cinclides of the outer integument ; these holes are

often rather indistinctly traceable in the scleroid parenchym.

My observation as to the presence of solid scleroid particles in the in-

ternal tissue of the Sagartia has, in the first instance, been made in con-

sequence of a simple process of maceration in water, and weak acid. It be-

came, however, important to test further the true nature of these different

scleroids. I consequently exposed a specimen, placed in a platina

crucible, to a heat sufficient to remove every trace of organic matter, and

was satisfied to find in it the residue of a perfect, solid skeleton of

the Sagartva, on which were seen externally the holes for the cinclides,

and, in being broken up, internally the septa. The external portions

appeared more fibrous, the internal more broadly cellular or reticular,

The character of the substance perfectly resembled the spongy and —

irregularly cellular structure of the corallum of other reef-forming

Anthozoa (see fig. 6, plate XI). A portion of this skeleton was then ~

placed in hydrochloric acid; this operation shewing that the solid —

skeleton mostly consisted of carbonate of lime, which is present in the —

form of the long scleroids (pl. XI. fig. 5b); the flat angular parti--

cles, being of silica, remained unaltered (fig. 5¢c.). The latter formed

a dark, very thin, irregular network, though most of them were loose, #

and apparently irregularly distributed among the calcareous scleroids. —

Besides the two kinds of scleroids, I observed a large number of

extremely fine, often branching threads; but whether these belong to—

the tissue of the coral, or to some species of sponges, I was unable

to ascertain. The proportion of siliceous scleroids to those consist-

ing of lime is not probably more than one to twenty.

This direct proof of the secretion of solid scleroid particles in the

internal tissue of the Sagartia is very important, inasmuch as it will

in time, when more observations of this kind have been made, neces-

sitate a change in the characteristics of the so-called Anthozoa mala-

codermata. It would be premature and unjustifiable to state that all the

Sagartiide, or other AcTINIACEA, possess an internal skeleton, as no other -

observations have been yet made on this point. It is, however, to be

hoped that the present statement will induce stricter and more ace

curate inquiry, especially as Mil. Edward, Blainville, and others, many

1869.] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 89

years ago directed attention to the existence of those solid bodies in-

the internal tissue of some of the species of Zoanthus, Actineria, and

others. In spite of the solid skeleton which I have described, I

must, however, remark that the softness of the body is unusually

great in the present species, and nobody in observing the pulpy

appearance of the same would suspect solid scleroids in it.

e. The collar, or the upper margin of the column, is generally

slightly marked, though always indicated by a slight contraction below

the upper edge. In the abnormal positions of the species, it becomes

occasionally much more prominent, (see figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 in pl. X) ;

the muscular tissue is also much stronger on it, than on the other

parts of the column, and sometimes nearly hardend.. The cinclides on

the collar are generally the largest, often forming a continuous series at

its outer edge, while other loop-holes are irregularly dispersed over the

entire column.

d. The disc, forming the upper part of the body, is very soft and

transparent ; it is only marked by radiating furrows which, strictly

Speaking, are in the present case an essential part of the tentacles.

It probably consists like these only of four layers, the innermost,

containing the scleroids, being wanting, or at least so much reduced,

as to be hardly traceable.

e. The tentacles partially originate, according to the above state-

ment, at the mouth, becoming isolated some distance from it;

towards the periphery they are separated from the collar by a broad

groove.

In the expanded animal, they are roundish, or slightly compress-

ed from front to back, strongly inflated in the middle and at their

roots, becoming after the first half length rapidly thinner. Their

tips are slightly swollen or obtuse, and perforated. Externally the

surface of the tentacles is smooth; but under the glass fine whitish

Spots, indicating the presence of enide@, may be observed (pl. X.

fig.la). Inthe primary tentacles of older specimens the whitish

specks are visible to the naked eye (see pl. X, fig. 10). The anatomical

structure (see pl. X, fig. 1d) of each of the tentacles is similar to that

of the septa, except that they appear to want the scleroid layer.

They are enveloped in a soft and usually very thick, mucous outer

layer, being a little more consistent only at their bases, The enide

40 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

of the outer layer are of the same shape as those of the column, but

slightly longer; the ecthoreum being about the same length as the

cell, or a little shorter and distinctly turned inside; the largest cnide

are not more than ,3,th of an inch in length (pl. XI, fig. 7).

Below the mucous layer, there is a thin muscular, then a pigment,

and below this again a muscular layer (pl. X, fig 1d). When the tenta-

cles shrink in a sickly or a dead specimen, they have the appearance of

thin, undulating threads, with a dark green centre, surrounded by a trans-

parent viscous layer ; the former representing the three inner, the latter

the mucous layer, with a large number of enide, (pl. XI, fig. 1a).

In a full grown specimen there can usually be counted about 160 ten-

tacles, sometimes more ; but I have not been able to trace in a perpendi-

cular section more than five series of them. To illustrate the difference

in the increase of the septa, and in that of the tentacles, as I presume it

to be the case, I must direct attention to pl. XI, fig. 2, in which, on the ~

right half, the disposition of the former, on the left that of the latter

is shewn, The six primary septa meet, as [have formerly stated, in the

centre of the base, but are not traceable on the disc. The six primary

tentacles are seen to originate from each two tubercles of the lip, they —

are distinguished from others by their great thickness, though in length —

usually exceeded by the secondary ones. In the healthy animal they *

often are of a light fleshy colour, especially at their bases,and snow-white

towards the tips ; they are carried in a simple outward curve, generally

with their tips, leisurely moving about between the other tentacles,

which are more actively employed, .as already stated. Observed with ©

a moderately magnifying glass, the greenish and reddish pigment cells

can easily be traced out. The white tint of the tips is, I believe, only ¢

due to a very large accumulation of enzd@, which appear to be arranged

in spiral rows, and become very distinct, when their inter-cellular sub- 3

stance is removed by its more rapid decomposition. On pl. X, fig. le, Sa

a representation is given of the tip of a primary tentacle, largely mag- —

nified. The cide of this portion of the tentacles differ little in form

from others of the integument, except in their larger size, having at the —

same time a proportionately thicker ecthoreum. Their fluid contents ~

is homogeneous, perfectly transparent, and the cell-membrane is rather —

more tough, than in other enide. é: 8

In very young specimens, the white tips at first appear on the —

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 41

three alternate primaries, subsequently and gradually on all six.

In very old specimens, the tips of the next, and even partially of the

third series, become white. Wherever there is alarge accumulation of

enidé on the column, or where the enide are of a larger size, the

white specks in the integument are readily recognised, even with the

naked eye. |

To return to our former statement regarding the position of

the tentacles ; the next, or second series of them, consists of twelve,*

being distinctly traceable by a bipartition of the primary tentacles,

with which they are connected on one side, while on the other, they

extend to thelip. Thus, in position, the secondary tentacles origin-

ate more peripherically, and in pairs alternate with the primary ones;

they often are the longest of all, being in large specimens about 13—2

inches in length, and most of them indicate by their whitish tips the

presence of numerous cnide. This statement, relative to the position

of the two first series of tentacles, is in the present species, based upon

direct observation, but it was impossible to do the same with the

other series; though in the next at least, or the third cicle, a more or

less regular bi-division partially appeared observable. Sometimes I

could notice three tentacles of a next series springing up from one of

the former series ; but this certainly is not the rule. Moreover, judg-

ing from the total number of the tentacles, which appears to be rather

constant in specimens of equal size, and allowing for accidental ir-

regularities, we cannot be far from the truth, when we also accept a

-Tegular bipartition for the third and fourth series, as partially

| Tepresented in fig. 2 of pl. XI. By this bi-division we obtain very

| closely the total number observed in live specimens, being abont 160.

| In the specimen figured on pl. X, the tentacles of the first series had

| alength of 14 inches, those of the second 13, of the third 1}, of the

| fourth 2, and of the fifth 4 of an inch.

|. The mouth is a transversally oval, or more or less linear opening,

| surrounded by prominent lips, which consist of twelve, elongated,

|inflated tubercles, between each pair of which originates one primary

‘tentacle. On the two opposite ends of the longitudinal axis, ter-

‘minate the gonidial canals with small roundish openings, (see ¢

* The second series of the septa is only six, like the first ; thus tentacles and

\septa do not, as already stated, take equal steps in their development.

42 Anatomy of Sagartia Schillervana [No. 1,

in fig. 2, pl. XT). The functions of these internal canals have

not ag yet been traced out; I even failed to observe their ex-

tensions into the internal space. Grosse, and others, suppose that the

eggs and spermatozoa are ejected through them, though I usually

observed these conveyed through the mouth. The tubercles placed

on either side of the gonidial canals, have been called lentigines, they

are smaller than the others, and bipartite, (see / in fig. 2 of pl. XI).

There also often extends a groove from the gonidial canal towards the

periphery, which has been termed gonidial radius, but this is hardly

traceable in our species. The greenish or pale fleshy colours are

occasionally very distinct on the lips, and the internal muscular tissue

of the latter is stronger, than that of the disk and of the tentacles.

g. The throat is the immediate continuation of the lips into the

interior; it is longitudinally sulcated, the furrows being marked by

greenish lines, produced by the contraction of the pigment layer.

The length of the throat from the lip to the Jarynz, is about half an

inch; towards the base it is slightly enlarged, and then forms a

strong projection (the Jaryna) into the inner space.

h. All along the throat the inner muscular layer, with the scleroids,

is rather consistent, and especially so at the larynx, where it is very

tough and nearly cartilaginous, often more so than at the bases of the

septa themselves. This muscular strength of the lips, of the throat,

and especially of the larynx, is of course indispensable for the existence

of the animal, being not only required for the seizure of the prey, in-

tended for food in the stomach, but also for its retention.

i. The stomach, the internal axial cavity, is produced by an

insinuation of the inner margins of the septa, these projecting

to a greater or lesser extent into its space. The stomach extends

from the larynx, which guards its entrance, to the base of the

column. When the animal is expanded, the height of the stomach

measures about 2 of the total height of the column. Gosse states that

in some species, he observed internally on the septa thin, coloured

layers, and is inclined to explain them asa sort of a substitute for _

the liver. Nothing of these layers was observable in any of the

specimens of the present species examined. The stomachial cavity

is the receptaculum of the food, and contains besides several other

organs which are placed peripherically.

1869.] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 43

k. On the internal side of the larynx, and next to the entrance of

the stomach, are suspended the mesenterial-threads, or craspeda,

These are, in the present species, flat bands of one, or one and a half

inch in length, being of a pale greyish yellow colour, and with the

lateral margins partially rolled in, so as to have the appear-

ance of nearly cylindrical tubes. They hang down loosely, and the

greater portion of them lies in small heaps round the centre of the

base. Their more central position as regards the reproductive organs,

is clearly visible in the view of the base, (pl. X, fig. 5). There are

always numerous threads together, but they cannot be easily distin-

guished through the integument of the base.

In figure 1, pl. XI, is given a representation of a specimen, which had

itself turned inside out. In the centre the thickness of the primary me-

senterial septa is clearly traceable, then the pairs of the ovaria, partly at-

tached to the septa, and beyond those towards the periphery, the very

numerous craspeda, and then follow the tentacles, with their shrunken

tips ;—two of the threads extending beyond the periphery representing

the acontia. The craspeda are seen constantly winding up and down, like

worms, contracting and expanding, and thus shewing great vitality, but

_ Ihave not observed in them any rapid motions ; they are never ejected

_ through the cinclides. Examined under the microscope (see figs. 8 and

8a, pl. XL) their ende are seen to be arranged in two marginal rows,

lying with their longer diameter perpendicularly to the length of the

' craspedum, and leaving in the middle a sort of acanal or a string,

which is filled with a cellular substance and a very large number of

pigment cells ; no larger enide being visible in the centre. The cellular

substance probably assists in effecting the muscular motions. The cnide

are distinguished by a considerable length, (the longest about =4>th

of an inch), being rather straight, generally attenuated at one end,

and usually shewing in a slight curve an indistinct central line, indicat-

ing a moderately long but very thin ecthoreeum ; this latter is rarely seen

ejected, but if it is it appears to be about one-third longer than the

nettle-cell itself. The thinner ends of the enide slightly project on

the lateral marginal surface of the craspedal bands, giving them a

very fine ciliated appearance. Numerous pigment cells and others are

also observable between the marginal enide.,

The true nature of the craspeda in the physiological economy

44 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [ No. 1,

of the animal is not known, and various suggestions have been

made as to their signification. It appears to me that most pro-

bably they represent some organs of secretion. It is, however,

likely that they also serve other purposes at the same time. I

shall subsequently relate a case which tends to prove that they

are especially active when the Sagartca takes some food into its

stomach, thus, by their natural central position, they not only guard

the reproductive organs against any injury from hard particles which

are received as food into the internal cavity, but they most probably

also facilitate the maceration and digestion of the food. The ready

nutriment, or chilus, must be absorbed by the entire inner surface of

the body, for no special organs are observable for its distribution.

1, Next in importance, for the existence of the animal, appear to be

the acontia, which are also flat bands consisting of enide ; these being

likewise arranged transversally in two rows on either side, leaving a

narrow space in the centre which is, however, in the present case occu-

pied by large transparent cells, a very small quantity of a fine granular

substance, and by cuide of different size (see figs. 9, 9a, 9b, pl. XI).

The marginal cnzde are projecting at the edges about one-fourth or

one-fifth of their length, and not unusually have their ecthorea ejected.

The cnide of the acontea are distinguished by their great length

(some of them being above zj5th of an inch) ; they are either straight,

or more often slightly curved, and almost equally attenuated on both

ends. The ecthorea, when ejected, often exceed the cnide by one

half of their length, and are sometimes doubly as long; their thickness

is about ;';th of that of the cnzde, being hollow and provided nearly to

the tip with short, reversed cilia (fig. 9a, pl. XI). It is not improba-

ble that the ecthorea of all the other kind of enid@ are also bearded,

but I have not been able to observe their minute cilia. The

cellular substance in the centre of the acontia is transparent, but

the large number of the marginal cnide produces a milky white

colour, which strongly contrasts with the purple colour of the ovaria

and the yellowish craspeda, and thus makes the acontia readily .

discernible.

The acontia are in constant motion, expanding and contracting,

and winding up and down in different directions; their movements

being much quicker, than those of the craspeda. Their length

1869. | and Membranipora Bengalensis. 45

generally amounts to three or four inches, probably sometimes

more. I have seen them ejected on every part of the column,

even at the base, when the animal is forcibly removed from its

place of attachment, in which case the large number of the acontia

forms a regular net. work round the animal. It is, I believe,

principally due to the bearded ecthorea of the cnzde@, that the acontia

stick firmly to every thing which they meet, until the hooks are

forcibly removed, or until the organs themselves relax. For small

animals the acontia are, therefore, formidable weapons, and there can

be little doubt that the fluid of the enzde@ acts as a kind of poison, in

the same way as it does in the Acalephe.

The different modes of emitting the acontia from the body will

be mentioned subsequently, but I must make here some observa-

tions regarding their internal attachment, although it is very

difficult to pronounce a conclusive opinion on this point. I have

dissected several specimens for the sole puxpose of obtaining a clear

idea as to the places where the acontia originate,* and it always

appeared to me that some of them are attached at the larynx, between

the ovaria and the craspeda, but at the same time there seem to be

some of them fixed below, near the centre of the base, between the

muscular thickenings of the mesenterial folds. I am not aware

Whether any thing about the attachment of the acontia has been

_ previously observed, and it is possible that the basal attachment is

only auxiliary to the one at the larynx,. so as to support the mus-

cular power required for their emission.

— mz. Each ovarium consists of two parts, one placed on either side of

the primary septa. The ovarda are long undulating strings, which are

firmly attached with one end on the internal side of the larynx, then

partially all along the internal cavity between the mesenterial folds,

and loosely by some threads to the base. The halves of each pair are

perfectly symmetrical, they run in a slight curve, generally parallel to

the convexity of the column. The colour is a bluish, purple, slightly

Varying in tint in different specimens.

* This operation is indeed not so simple, as it would appear, judging from the

transparency of the animal. As soon as a portion of the Sagartia is cut off, it

immediately contracts to such a degree that it is almost impossible to observe

Separately any of the internal parts.

46 Anatomy of Sagartia Schillervana [No. 1,

Blainville was one of the first who pointed out different sexes in

the Actiniacea, and since then, it has been repeatedly stated, that

some of the species are hermaphrodites, while others appear to be sex-

ually distinct. I have examined a large number of specimens of the

present species, and always found the ovarian strings consisting of

ova only, being connected by thin threads, attached to a conspicuous

median string, and enveloped in a pale purplish coloured mucous

substance, (see pl. XI. figs. 10, 10a, 10b). The eggs usually were

of various sizes, some of them small, evidently in a young stage,

others much larger, those of largest size measuring about 7; of an

inch in diameter, so as to be distinctly visible even without a

glass, (see fig. 10a, pl. XI). The apparantly ripe eggs were perfectly

globular, each attached to the ovarium by a thin string, it possessed a

markedly thickened epidermis, surrounding a finely granular dark

substance, and having a large, usually eccentric transparent spot,

with a minute opaque centre, (see fig. 10b, pl. XI). Besides

these eggs there were always smaller and larger globular masses

of irregular shape visible; they were in a constant rotating motion,

and probably represented earlier stages of ova, or others in a

state of furcation. Boiled in hydrochloric acid, the ova remained

almost unchanged, from which it would seem that their epidermis

partially consists of chéton, which I have reason to believe is also

represented in the integument. In the mucous substance of the

ovarla cnide are sometimes observed of an elongated oval shape,

having a thin remarkably long and strongly bearded ecthoreum, as

represented in fig. 10¢ on pl. XI.

With respect to the sexual difference of our Sagartia, I have to

record the following observations which, when confirmed, may throw

some light upon the generative system of the Actiniacea. After

having kept the specimen, figured on pl. X, and the history of which

I shall relate subsequently, for about 18 days in my aquarium, it be-

gan in small quantities to issue from its mouth a milky white,

viscous substance which, upon examination under a very high power

of the microscope, appeared to consist of small round globules of

different sizes, not however exhibiting any motion. There were only a

few cnid@ interspersed in that mass. Sickly Actinic are said often to

issue a similar white substance, but in the present case I could not —

1869. | and Membranipora Bengalensis. 47

see the slightest distinction between the character and form of those

granules (pl. XI, fig. 11) and early stage of eggs, attached to the

ovaria themselves, except that the former were deprived of the purple

coloured coating, which always surrounded the latter, when connected

with the folicles of the ovaria. In connection with the white viscous

mass, there were occasionally issued pale yellowish, contorted bands.

Kach of these consisted of a thin but tough, almost leathery skin,

with numerous irregular partitions (pl. XI, fig. 12) filled with

extremely minute spermatozoa; on one side the edge of the band

was considerably thickened. The spermatozoa appeared as round

globules, each with a very thin and short tail (pl. XI, fig. 13); their

motions were extremely rapid in all directions, and whenever a few

eggs were introduced into the mass, the spermatzoa were scen

collecting round each (pl. XI, fig. 14), until they formed a regular

coating to it. Hggs observed a few hours afterwards, distinctly

exhibited a motion of their fluid contents, but I have not been able to

trace their further changes and development. It is not at all impro-

bable that the spermatozoa, and in fact the whole of the male folicles,

are developed, as in many other corals, either at a certain season of

the year, or at a certain age of the animals. The act of fructification

may result in the death of the animal, but this is not at all likely to

be always the case. I shall subsequently again recur to this subject

in somewhat more detail, as connected with the existence of the

animal.

c. Physiology.

In tracing out the principal physiological phenomena of the

present Sagartia, I may best attain my object by briefly relating the

history of the specimen figured on pl. X.

The specimen was obtained, on the 22nd March, 1868, in a tank

close to the railway station of Port Canning. I filled my aquarium

With a quantity of the same brackish water, and placed the specimen

With several others of smaller size in it. During the first ten days,

the large specimen exhibited great activity, usually having its

tentacles spread out, attacking every small animal that came in

contact with them. The six primary tentacles, being considerably

thicker than the rest, were bent out in a curve, usually leisurely

48 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

moving about between the bases of the other tentacles. The least ~

touch with a solid object of any part of the body, or even an unusual

movement of the water, or the sudden direction of the sun’s rays

against the animal instantly effected its sensitiveness, the effect being”

a total or partial contraction of the body. “At‘thisaet a quantity of

water was emitted, and generally a few acontia ‘were éjected from the

cinclides of the collar, this being done with such a force, as to make

the acontia rise nearly two inches in a perpendicular direction. ‘They

usually remained for a few moments in the extended position, and

were then gradually rolled up in a closely coiled spiral line and re-

tracted. Seldom were there any acontia seen to issue from any other

part of the column. According to the magnitude of the disturbance,

from one to about five minutes elapsed before the animal, when it

had once entirely closed the disk, expanded again.

After the first ten days, the specimen gradually lost somewhat of

its high sensitiveness ; it almost constantly remained expanded, but

the tentacles were much less active than before, and it required a

rather forcible touch to induce the animal to retract them. Ina

similar manner, the expansion of the body, or the unfolding of the

tentacles was remarkably slow, though the animal would not volun-

tarily remain closed longer than five or six minutes. Other specimens,

however, which also partially lost their original sensitiveness, would

remain closed for several hours; some of them did not expand their

tentacles, even for many days, at least not in the day time.

The acontia were always first discernible to begin their movements

near the centre of the base, -proceeding towards the periphery, then

rising along the wall of the column, till they met a eznelzs, through

which they were ejected ; they did not, however always rise as high as

the collar. When they came in contact with a foreign object, they

attached themselves so firmly, that they had to be removed with force.

This attachment is, as I have already stated, undoubtedly due to the

serrated or bearded ecthorea of their enide which are of consider-

able length. The ejection of the acontia is almost momentanous, but

the retraction sometimes extends over 8 or 10 minutes, or even

longer ;-in a perfectly healthy animal for about three minutes. When

the acontiwm is retracted within the body, it again usually remains”

! lying for sometime along the wall of the column, or is coiled up at the

| 1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 49

periphery of the base, till it wholly disappears towards the centre,

Ihave never seen any acontia issuing from the tentacles, or any part

of the disc; as arule they are emitted only from the sides of the

column, but when the animal has been removed from the place of

its attachment, I have seen them as already stated, to be emitted from

the base near its periphery.

Gosse says that each cinclis is not assigned to a special acontium,

but that at the contraction of the animal, a quantity of water is thrown

out, carrying the acontia with it, and issuing them through any cinclis

which happens to lie nearest. This appears in general to be correct ;

but at the same time it can, I believe, hardly be questioned that

some muscular power is connected with the issue of the acontia, and

perhaps the motion of the water only supports the former principal

action, and directs the acontiwm towards a cinclis. It would be, for

instance, impossible to understand why in the fresh and _ healthy

animal, nearly all acontia issue at the collar; and besides that some

of them are under circumstances issued with great force in a contracted

State of the animal, where extremely little water is given out. More-

over it is very probable that the same muscular power which retracts

the acontia, after they were ejected, is also in operation at the act of

their emission.

_ Regarding the digestive system of which I have previously treat-

ed, I must here record a very interesting observation, inasmuch

as it supports the suggestions previously made. I fed a large

specimen with a small Crustacean,-after it had been slightly press-

ed, so as to reduce its active motions, and prevent its escaping

from the mouth of the animal. The Sagartia kept the Crustacean

for about five minutes between the lips, and then by almost insensibly

Slow movements of the labial muscles gradually swallowed it down.

When this had been done, it remained in a half contracted position

for more than an hour. During this whole time the craspeda were

Seen much more actively moving about, than either before or after

that. The Crustacean was actually so thoroughly enveloped in the

net of the craspeda, that I could not trace its form ; even the next day

the craspeda were seen more approximate and arranged round the

central space, than they were on former occasions. This observa-

tion appears to be in favour of my previous statement, that the

50. | Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

physiological signification of the craspeda is to some extent that

of secretive organs, as liver, gall, panacreas &c., being essential

for the digestion of the food. It would be probably going too far

in stating that the ready chylus is also conveyed through the craspeda

to the body, though the anatomical structure of their central portion

is not directly opposed to this opinion. There can be however, little

doubt that by the numerous marginal enid@, the craspeda have

among others the object of protecting the generative organs from any

injury which could be produced by the objects taken internally as

food. The acontia evidently only serve for external defence, they do

not seem to have any other physiological duties to perform.

Passing these remarks, I may return to the history of ourspecimen. It

remained in the less active state, as previously described, for about 8 or

10 days. After this time it generally somewhat retracted the tentacles

raised the disk and the lips (pl. X, fig. 7), and began to emit from the

mouth a granular substance, the granules appearing, as I have already

noticed, to be eggs in very early stages of development. The white

substance was extremely viscous, and in irregular masses more or

less resembling contorted strings. The next day I observed that,

besides the white substance, there also were pale yellowish strings

issued, containing the very minutest spermatozoa, as above described

(p. 47). This issue of white substance, with eggs (?) and spermatozoen

follicles lasted in intervals for two days, after which the specimen began

to expand and contract its body in various ways, The tentacles were

reduced to about half their usual length, the lips were projecting, the

disc was occasionally produced, then again retracted, the collar more

or less inflated, and at the same time, either the upper or the lower

part of the body attenuated and extended, sometimes to more than

double the usual length, (see pl. X, figs. 6, 8, 9). These various’

transformations of the body were observed for about 8 hours, during

which time the Sagartia left its former place of attachment, (being a

small piece of wood) and was seated at the bottom of the aquarium, -

on a horizontal ground. The next morning the specimen was found

flat, perfectly turned inside out, exhibiting all the internal organs, —

(pl. XI, fig. 1). The acontia, craspeda, and even the tentacles shewed

subsequently signs of vitality for more than 24 hours. Upon examining”

the figured, and another specimen which died under similar conditions,

1869. | and Membranipora Bengalensis. dL

I found that the eggs on the ovaria were rather larger than usually in

other live specimens, and the spermatozoa were accumulated in large

numbers between all the mesenterial folds, and some of the pale

strings which contained them, appeared to be attached irregularly

between the ovaria. In a third instance they almost seemed to me that

they have taken the place of some of the craspeda.

The important question resulting from this observation is, whether

the death of the specimen was an accidental, or a natural one. I

would not in the least deny, that the somewhat different conditions

under which the animals were placed, accelerated the death of two of

the specimens, but it would be strange to affirm that their death was

caused merely by these different conditions,* inasmuch as they had

hardly any influence upon other specimens, living in the same

aquarium, and remaining healthy for a long time. Before those

observations were made and afterwards, I had at different times dissect-

ed several specimens, but I never found a trace of any spermatozoen

follicles, or any spermatozoa between the ovaria, though the ova were

sometimes of large size and highly developed. I have, never observed

internally any young Sagartie. Still it appears very probable that

the present species is like many other Acieniacea viviparous, this

being the ordinary course of propagation. I have likewise not

observed any buds or stolones, or a natural division of any of the

specimens. However, either at certain times of the year or, more likely,

at a certain age the male follicles may be formed and spermatozoa deve-

loped in large numbers. The death of a specimen after the act of

_fructification may be only an accidental one, but this has still to be

confirmed by other observations. In the specimen of which I have

given the history, the eggs remained after its death perfect, only

loosened from the ovarian strings, while the other animal substance

quickly decomposed. Gosse says that he once observed an Actinia issuing

spermatozoa, but he does not state whether the act resulted in the death

of the specimen or not. Blainville’s observations, if I remember rightly,

gave a distinct proof that in some species ovaria and spermatozoa are

| developed in one and the same specimen.

- * Being probably a slight alteration of the percentage of the saline consti-

tuents of the water, caused by evaporation, (though this percentage was

Maintained as much as possible), greater exposure to light and increased

temperature, want of sufficient motion in the water, etc.

52 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

It is usually stated that, when an Actinia is cut into a number of

pieces, each restores itself to a perfect animal. Though this kind of

propagation no doubt has its limit, I may, record, that experiments

made on some specimens of this species in general confirm the great

vitality and reproductive power of the Actiniacea.

With the object of observing some of the ovaria, I once cut a speci-

men in two halves, and left one part of it in water attached to a piece

of wood. In about 24 hours I found the half Sagartia closed again and

alter a few days the animal was perfectly restored, only counting a

smaller number of septa, but even these were in time partially replaced.

The specimen, however did not grow larger, although I fed it with

mosquitoes and various larve for about six months. The other half

which was removed from its place of attachment died shortly afterwards.

d. Habitat.

It is generally stated that all the <Actiniacea are truly marine

animals, and there are indeed very few instances known where

species have for a time been kept in aquaria in which the saline con-

stituents of the water were in proportion considerably less, than repre- 7

sented in pure sea-water. Actinie, and others, are sometimes found

attached to rocks above the low-water mark, or living in small pools

of sea-water, but I am not acquainted with any record of a species’

having been observed living permanently in brackish water.

The present species was found, as I have already stated, in one

of the tanks close to the railway station of Port Canning. It lives

here attached to old trunks of trees.* I have not observed it in any of —

the other tanks, partially on accoant of a difference in the water,

partially on account of the want of any fit places of attachment. The ~

specimens which I collected were of different size, the smallest about

one quarter of an inch in the basal diameter, and the largest measuring

about 14 inches in the same diameter. They usually were seen 3

or 10 inches below the surface of the water but sometimes at the sur-

face itself; sometimes even a part of the animal was above it, and

while the exposed portion became perfectfy dried up under the direct

influence of the sun, the other half remained as usually vital.

Slight progressive movements have often been observed in Actinia

* Heockel’s name Petracalephe would on this account not suit this species, we

had to create a name something like Lignacalephe.

1869.] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 53

and I may mention, that one of my specimens moved in 24 hours by

gradually contracting and expanding its base* four inches on a level

horizontal bottom, and three inches on the perpendicular side of the

glass, so as to reach the surface of the water; in all therefore seven

inches. All the specimens shewed a particular liking to move nearer

to the surface of the water. The above shews that the Sagartia has

the power to move progressively at about the rate of 0.26 of an inch in

one hour, which is comparatively a very quick motion for these usually

sessile animals.

The species is also common all along the banks of the Mutlah river.

During low water the specimens often remain for hours exposed to the

direct influence of the sun, attached to wooden pillars, stems of trees,

&c. Hach specimen always retains a large quantity of water during

the time of exposure, and gives a portion of it up when disturbed.

In conclusion I have only to mention a few words regarding the

chemical constituents of the brackish water, in which the animals

were found living, as compared with those of sea water. Mr. D.

Waldie, who very kindly undertook to make an analysis of the

water, tells me that 1000 grs, contain a total quantity of solids of

12.87 grs., of which are 0.78 sulphuric acid (anhydrous), 0.78

magnesia and 0.23 lime. Mr. Waldie further observes, “ the arrange-

ment of the constituents is arbitrary ; supposing the acids and bases

are combined in accordance with the analyses usually given of sea-

water, it will stand as follows :—

Chloride of Sodium (including potassium), .......... Sonate eee 9.81

- y Caerani yess led, no ack Chey eee Pe Oem 0.46

5 a AYE CREME tere RE Mclcg sevice cc's <oceses see ue ae

I PRP e ic eee estas ee teats tc aleasteccascoccecces, | LADT

Carbonic acid, &., ........ ATS hn Pde AA aA BE So BRO eS 0.50

: 12.87

_ This will be found very nearly the composition of sea-water as to its

principal constituents, but in quantity amounting only to very nearly

one-third of sea-water for the same volume of water.’ Dana in his

Manuel of Mineralogy also states that the amount of solid substances

In sea-water changes between 32 and 37 parts in 1000 pts. of water.

* Measuring about one inch in diameter.

54 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

We may, therefore, say that the brackish water from Port Canning is

composed of very nearly one part of sea, and two parts of river-water.

The occurrence of a species of Sagartia in brackish water, resembling

in nearly all respects of its organisation marine species, is one additional

fact how often an animal has it in its power to select or change the con-

ditionsof its life. It does not apparently depend so much on the quantity

of certain solid constituents, composing sea-water, as it does on their

presence in general; smaller quantities of them may occasionally have

no effect upon the animal life, but the absence of one or the other

of them could likely produce a thorough change in the fauna.

Considering the great disturbances of the atmosphere which have

taken place towards the close of the last year (1867), we could

suppose that these corals may have been transferred from the sea coast

in the tank accidentally. This however is not the case. Although

the water of the river is subject to constant changes of flood and tide,

and contains a large proportion of fine mud and silt, which undoubtedly.

would greatly interfere with the existence of most other corals, the

Sagarti@ live in itin large numbers. I also found them several miles

north of Canning, in the tributaries of the Mutlah river, where the

water is often much less brackish than further south. Besides the

Sagartie there are in the same tanks at Port Canning, and in the

neighbourhood, a large number of most interesting species of Mollusca

living which mostly belong to marme types. Many of the animals may |

die or otherwise become less active, when during the monsoons the

water of the tanks is nearly quite fresh, but some of them certainly must —

survive. Pure fresh water, or even that of the Hooghly obtained at the

height of the flood, acted injuriously on the Sagartia. The animals,

when placed in it were momentarily paralysed, though exhibiting”

vitality for some time afterwards, but they died in about 24 hours; still

I think it very probable that the specimens would gradually and in

time get accustomed to the Hooghly water also and they probably also

occur in this river further south, and nearer the sea. |

I have associated with this extremely interesting species, which gave

me the opportunity of observing so many new points regarding the

anatomy of the Actimzacea, the name of my friend, Ferdinand Schiller,

who has been so actively engaged in the improvements of the locality

where the species was discovered.

1869.] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 59

Phylum, Mouuusca.

Swb-phylum, Himatuca.*

These animals are also.called Moluscoidea,—they are without a

complete nervous system, the heart is wanting and if present it is

without an auricle.

Class, Bryozoa or Criipopa (Polyzoa, auctorum).

. Heart and special organs of sensation wanting.

‘ Sub-class, GyMNoLaEMA.+

_ With a simple row of tentacles.

Order, Cuttostomata.{—(Cellulinea d’ Orb.)

Cells more or less ovate, aperture not produeed, closed by an

operculum or a muscular lappet.

Sub-order, IncRuUsTATA,

' Cells more or less attached by the entire, or a portion of their base.

. Tribe, MEMBRANACEA.

_ Cells above wholly or partially membranaceous, the aperture being

situated in that membrane.

Family, FuustRELLARIID&.

Cells without special pores.

Genus. Murmprantpora, Blainville.

Cells large, depressed, their single layers generally incrusting

different objects; upper portion mostly membraneous; aperture with

simple, entire margins, situated at the anterior end.

| | Species. Membranipora Bengalensis, Stoliczka, 1868.

e Pl, XII.

_ Memb. polyzoario semi-calcareo, simplict, incrustante sew varie

torto ; cellulis depressis, secangularibus, longioribus quam latis, in

seriebus alternantibus positis, supra membranaceis, minutissime porosis,

wmfra ac lateraliter calcareis, in adultis ad marginem superiorem non-

nullis spinis solidulis paulum elevatis instructis ; apertura in adultis

specominibus sub-rotundata, antice ad terminationem sita, marginibus

| Mlegris aliquantum prominentibus circwumdata ; margine posteriori paulo

| Producto atque sepius quatuor spinis postice prolongatibus instructo :

* Heckel, Generelle Morphologie, Berlin, 1866, Vol. II. p. cv.

+ The other sub-class form the PHYLACTOL&ZMA.

ny The other orders are Cyclostomata, Ctenostomata, Paludicellea and Urna-

ellea,

56 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

spinis inequalibus, eaterioribus brevioribus quam interioribus. Animal

virescente album, tentaculis longis, 14-18 instructum.

a. Form of cells.

The polyzoarium of this species is extremely variable, its form be-

ing altogether dependent upon that of the object to which it is attached.

It is either found incrusting stones or wood, or it grows on different

water-plants, being then variously contorted and apparently partially free.

According to this the cells undergo many variations, often so much so

that it is extremely difficult to determine the characters of the species.

As a rule they are hexagonal, slightly elevated, about twice

as long than broad and posteriorly emarginated (pl. XII, fig. 1, f).

The base and the sides are in full grown cells always solid, the

upper portion more or less membranaceous, representing a usually

slightly convex, very thin covering. The upper margins of the solid

portion of the cell,—where the thin membrane is attached—are some-

what raised, and each cell is separated from the next by a slight furrow.

The aperture lies at the anterior end, being roundish and provided

with somewhat thickened, elevated and solid lips. The anterior portion

of each cell with its margin extends into the basal indendation of the

previous one, while the posterior margin of the aperture is much

more prominent, possessing a small thickened projection which is

posteriorly often prolonged into four, radiating spines, the outer pair of

these being much shorter than the inner one (see pl. XII, fig. 2).

In consequence of the greater elevation of the posterior margin the

aperture, when viewed perpendicularly from above, appears almost semi-

circular, but viewed at about an angle of 45 degrees from the front its

round shape* is distinctly perceptible. The posteriorupper portion of the

cellis always convex, thin, finely perforated, and according to the differ-

ent stages more or less solid. The radii or ribs originate at the upper

lateral solid edges and extend ina more or less regular way from

both sides toward the centre. Sometimes, but not usually, they unite

in the median line and form solid cross bars. The length of the

radii also varies with the age of the cells, but their number appears

entirely to depend upon the length of the cells, (see figs. 3, 4, a XII).

* T mention this point here particularly, because the same rowndish form of

the aperture also occurs in many marine Cellepore and Lepraliw, and is usually

stated to be semilunar, though in reality it is not so.

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 5F

In live specimens, the cells are so thoroughly transparent, that

their detailed structure is very difficultly noticed ; but in dead cells the

membranaceous covering generally disappears, and the solid radii or

Spines are seen to project towards the median line. It is, however, not

always the case that they can be observed, even when the cells appear

well preserved. On account of their great tenderness, they not only

become in dried specimens variously contorted, but are often very easily

broken off ; such is the case in almost all the fossil Membranipore. In

some, even very old cells however, they remain rudimentary, or do

not develop at all, with the exception of. one posterior, median spine

which is always present. Again other very old cells become en-

tirely incrusted, even atthe aperture. All these variations of the

form of the cells and the differences in the arrangement of the

“marginal spines are amply exhibited in figures 1-4 of plate XII, and

these will give a better idea of those changes than any lengthened

description. ,

I hardly need to notice the great importance of the study of those

structural differences of the cells in one and the same species. In the

present case, I find that the cells which spread over a large flat surface

usually are short and broad (fig. 3), those which incrust small, thin

stems of water plants, and the like, are much elongated and narrower

(fig. 4). Were these forms not passing one into the other, and had

the animals not in each case been observed, one would certainly may

think to have a good reason for acknowledging these forms as distinct

species, How different would this be in the case of their being fossil

| Lepralie or Membranipore! It is certainly true that we often de-

| Scribe merely fossil forms, and not species.

Only the sides and the base of the cells are, as I have previously stated,

solid ; they are chiefly composed of carbonate of lime, forming a thin po-

rous layer. Each cell communicates through a large pore with each of

the six adjoining cells. Two of those larger pores are found on each

| side and one in front and one behind. Sometimes, however, in younger

} cells the number of large pores is greater. When the polyzoarium is

| partially free, for instance in growing round a quantity of alge, each

cell usually has at the base a long membranaceous tube, through which

a muscle, originating at the lower side of the mantle, is protruded,

\ attaching the cell to the plants, (figs. 7 and 8). The round opening

58 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

of this tube brocken off, with a slightly raised margin, is generally

visible near the centre of the base of each dead cell, when carefully

removed from its place of attachment; it is rarely wanting except in

very old cells (see pl. XII, figs. 5 and 6). When, however, the cells

are firmly attached with their entire base the opening often becomes

closed up, and in time disappears altogether. Viewing the basal

portion of a polyzoarium each cell appears separated from the others

by a raised margin, while their median portions usually are slightly

excavated. The surface is finely porous. The usual colour of the

cell is pure white, occasionally slightly opac or brownish.

b. Animal.

There is little of special interest that I can mention with reference to

the animal of this species. It is enveloped in a perfectly transparent

mantle, which lines the internal, slightly rugous surface of the cell,

and appears to be firmly attached to it posteriorly and at the margins

of the aperture (see fig. 1,/ pl. XII). When the cell is broken and

the animal taken out, the mantle generally remains with the cell;

it is therefore very difficult to trace out the connection of the

animal to its mantle. I have only observed a few very thin muscles

posteriorly, but none anteriorly, though they also may exist. Hqually

difficult is it to observe the animal expanded, because the slightest

motion of the water compels it to remain closed for a long time.

When it protrudes out of its cell, the total length of the tentacles

‘and a portion of the collar is visible. In the retracted position

the V-form twisted viscera can be clearly traced through the cell-

membrane. In the animal, taken out (fig. 1, 2) of its cell, the

length of the retracted tentacles (¢) measures nearly one fourth of

that of the entire body; they are separated by a groove from the-

muscular larynx, in the centre of which lies the mouth; then

follow the viscera, usually somewhat contorted, being thickest im

the middle, and by a sharp twist joining the membrane which

surrounds the tentacles at about one-third distance from their,

base. At the end of the visceral cavity, there is usually seen one,

seldom two or three oval, dark bodies,—probably statoblasts. These

viewed under the microscope, seemed to be filled with a rather

homogenous, granular mass, but sometimes there was a contorted,

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 59

dark string visible, and the rest was filled with a clear fluid

(fig. 17). Whether this difference is due to different stages of growth

I am notin a position to say. I have not observed their develop-

ment in the present species, but’ I hope to recur to this subject at some

future occasion, when treating of the development of some of our fresh-

water Bryozoa.

The microscopical structure of the animal is a granular, or cel-

lular substance in which numerous greenish pigment cells are inter-

spersed. There is no trace of cnide, such as described in the Actiniacea

and Acalephe. The tentacles generally are moved about slowly, not

being usually widely separated from each other, and the move-

ments of each are independent from those of the other, they also

often have the tips bent outward, (see fig. 1, g, pl. XII). It is

generally stated that the tentacles of all the Bryozoa are tubular, but

in the present species it always appeared to me, that they are flat

bands with the lateral edges folded in, so as to leave a broad furrow

in the middle. They consist of about six or seven rows of large

angular cells, being finely ciliated on either side. The cellular

structure is perfectly different from that of the tentacles of the corals,

but remarkably resembling, for instance, that of the tentacles or

eye-pedicles of small Gastropoda (see pl. XII. fig. 1, %).-

ce. Growth of the polyzoariwm.

The progressive growth of the polyzoarium of the present species

‘deserves a short notice, inasmuch as the observations on this point are

as yet rather imperfect.

The terminal end of each fresh polyzoarium (see fig. 1a) is very thin

and membranaceous, being wholly composed of young cells, in different

stages of development. It is in all the incrusting species of this group of

| Bryozoa free, becoming attached only in an advanced age. The first stage

(1b) appears to be that of a small, flat and homogenous cell, filled with

a quantity of a dark granular substance. This cell is produced in the

form of a knosp from the previous cell of the same row. Young cells,

especially seem to have the power of propagating themselves by buds,

but in the old cells this mode is replaced by the formation of stato-

blasts,

60 Anatomy of Sagartia Schilleriana [No. 1,

In a next stage, subsequent to that above mentioned, cells are

observable in which the granular substance is a little reduced, but

generally in the right basal corner a dark spot becomes visible with a

translucent centre. This is the first distinct embroyonal form (fig. Ic).

Subsequent to this the upper edges of the sides of the cell and the

base become more solid, (fig. 1d), then a small spine appears posteriorly,

but no aperture as yet in the upper membrane, though it seems to be

indicated by an opac-line (fig. 1 e). In the transparent centre of the

embryo there are furrows to be observed, radiating from the centre and

indicating the formation of the tentacles ; a few thin muscles are also seen

attaching the young animal to the posterior end of the cell. After

this, the development appears to make more rapid progress ; the body

extends, the twisted viscera become perceptible, the membrane covering

the aperture is absorbed and the basal string which gives the cell a

fixed position developed (fig. 1 #). Thus the animal is seen perfect,

lying in the cavity of the cell, and the mantle becomes attached all round —

the margins of the aperture. At a progressive age, the statobasts

appear in the posterior portion of the visceral cavity, and the upper ;

membrane of the cell gradually attains a greater solidity by a number of

thickened radii or spines. All these stages of cells may often be

observed on only a small terminal portion of a large polyzoarium §

(fig. 1). The basal string is very strong in the young cells, but

becomes obsolete in advanced age, as I have previously mentioned, —

it is therefore only a temporary organ, and not essential to the existence

ef the animal.

I also may notice at this opportunity that I observed on one of the

polyzoria, small membranaceous tubes attached between each two cells, —

near their apertural margins. Out of these tubes an organ was_

voluntarily, and independent of the animals in the cells, projected and—

retracted. It simply consisted of two fleshy flagella; these were”

probably the so called avicularia the true nature of which,—as appre-_

hensive organs,—is as yet little known, but the surface was so much

covered with different Spongille, that I was unable to trace the

immediate condition of these supposed avicularia with the cells

themselves. When the polyzoarium was dried, the membranaceous

_ tubes and naturally also their contents disappeared.

1869.] and. Membranipora Bengalensis. 61

d. Chemical composition of the polyzoarium.

When boiled in hydrochloric acid, the polyzoarium left as re-

sidue a very thin membranaceous skeleton; it was complete as

regards form of the cells. This membranaceous skeleton could

hardly be anything else, than chitin, as distinguished from the

common horny substance by being insoluble in hydrochloric acid.*

Subsequently I burned several portions of the polyzoria in a platina

crucible, until every trace of organic matter disappeared. The cells

_were by this operation not materially affected, but placed in hydro-

chloric acid, they were almost perfectly dissolved, they seem therefore

to a very large proportion to consist of carbonate of lime. There wasa

small residue of siliceous spicule and scleroid particles left, but these

were most probably derived from the numerous Spongille adhering to

the cells.

e. Habitat.

Membranipora Bengalensis was found at Port Canning with Sa-

gartia Schilleriana in the same tank of brackish water; it is, how-

ever, much more widely distributed as the last. It also occurs in

tanks, the water of which contains only about one fifth of sea-water.

I found the species incrusting old trunks of wood on several places

along the Mutlah river, on many points in the salt-lakes and in other

places of the Sanderban. The present species does not, however, occur

in fresh water, where it appears to be replaced by Hislopia, evidently

| belonging to the same family of Chilostomata. There are a large num-

| ber of similar forms found on various places of the coast of the Bengal

| Bay. One of these, with smaller cells, is often seen on shells and

fragments of wood coming from the lower portions of the Sanderban,

but it is difficult to obtain it in good preservation.

A marine species which I lately collected at Ceylon and at Aden is

very like the one here described but it has the cells much more solid,

* The plates at the entrance of the cesophagus, or the so-called theeth,

have been found also to consist of chitin.

62 Anatomy of Sagartia Schillertana No. 1,

Explanation of Plates.

Plate X, (p. 33).

Fig. 1. Unfolded specimen of Sagartia Schilleriana, in natural size (see

p- 33) ; 1 a, a portion of a tentacle of the second series; 1 0, a portion of

a tentacle of the first series, both enlarged twice the natnral size; 1 ¢,

termination of a primary tentacle, with the exid@ arranged in spiral

rows, six times the natural size; 1 d, longitudinal section of one tentacle,

shewing the different layers of which it is composed, (p. 39).

Fig. 2. Top-view of the specimen represented in fig. 1, when in a half

contracted position, (p. 34).

Fig. 3. Side-view of the same, with the ovaria visible through the trans-

parent body, the tentacles half protruding, and several acontia ejected.

Fig. 4. Side-view of the same specimen in a fully contracted position, the

transverse rugations being more distinct than in the former positions,

(p. 34).

Fig. 5. View of the basis; numbers 1-5 shewing the 5 series of the septa ;

the dark spots, each situated on either side of the primary septa,

represent the ovaria, and the striped marks, more centrally situated, the —

bundles of the craspeda, (p. 35.)

Figs. 6—9. Side-views of the various abnormal forms of the same specimen,

(p. 50).

Plate XI, (p. 35).

Fig. 1. View of a specimen turned inside out, the primary septa and the —

ovaria accompaning them being prominent, (p. 50) ; 1 a, represent three

shrunken tentacles, enlarged. .

Fig. 2. Ideal representation of the distribution of the septa and tentacles —

according to the different circles (p. 40). .

Fig. 3. Ideal perpendicular section of a Sagartia, in haif of its basal

diameter, (see explanation of the various letters on p. 35).

Fig. 4. Appearance of the mucous layer, enlarged 200 diameters ; 4 a, a few

isolated cnide, enlarged 500 diameters (see p. 36).

Fig. 5. Upper or outer view of the scleroid tissue; 5 a, the internal view

of the same; 5 0, calcareous scleroids; 5 c, siliceous scleroids, very

much enlarged, (p. 37).

Fig. 6. A portion of the scleroid skeleton, after the specimen was burnt ina —

crucible (see p. 38).

Fig. 7. Cnide of the tentacles (p. 40).

Fig. 8. Longitudinal section of a portion of a craspedum, and 8 a, its cnid@,

more enlarged (p. 48).

1869. ] and Membranipora Bengalensis. 63

Fig. 9. Longitudinal section of a portion of an acontium; 9 a and 9 8, its

cnide (p. 44).

Fig. 10. A portion of an ovarium, 10 a, shewing the distribution of the

eggs in the mass; 10 0, eggs much enlarged; 10 ce, one cnida from

the ovaria (p. 46).

Fig. 11. Appearance of the spermatozoa slightly enlarged.

Fig. 12. Male follicle, (see p. 50).

Fig. 13. Spermatozoa, very much enlarged.

Fig. 14. Eges surrounded by spermatozoa, (p. 47).

Plate XII, (p. 55).

Fig. 1. Natural size, of a portion of the polyzoarium of Membranipora

Bengalensis; 1 a, enlarged, with two supposed avicularia on the left

corner ; 1 6,—1 f, various stages in the development of one cell (see p. 59) ;

1 g,a full grown cell with the animal partially protruding, the body

seen through the transparent cell; 14, the animal taken out (p. 58) ;

1 i, a statoblast ; 1 %, internal view of the terminal portion of a tentacle

(p. 59).

Fig. 2. Front view of a few cells, greatly enlarged, also shewing the spines

attached to the lower lip (p. 57).

Fig. 3. Front view of a number of cells of an oval shape; 3 a, much

enlarged portion of the upper surface, with two transverse, solid radii.

Fig. 4. Much elongated cells which were attached to a stem of a plant.

Figs. 5-6. Back-views of two kinds of cells, corresponding to figures 3 and 4.

Figs. 7-8. Side-views two cells, shewing the lateral pores by which they

communicate with the adjoining cells, and also shewing the lower string

which is well developed in young cells.

soe a

aot

ERED Et nn

Sagartia Schilleriane, Stol. ’

Pl, XH.

Bengal, Vol: X XXVIII. Pu;

: Journal Asiat i Soc

Bengalensis, Stol.

Membranipora

Ls ;

2 Cul

3, “y

Vol -XXXVIIPe:

sub-desjuncla, H. Ad,

ule pucilla, Wey

Seulpta., ,,

7. Broderipu eximiaNew.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

see Ee

Part Il.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. II.—1869.

‘On some new marine Gastropoda from the Southern Province of

Ceylon ;—by Mussrs. G. & H. Nevitn.

(With plate XIII.)

[Received and read 5th August, 1868. |

The seven new species described in this paper, are the first of

aconsiderable number of new shells, found by ourselves in Ceylon,

Up tothe present, we have succeeded in identifying over 1,000

species, and are still obtaining many fresh additions, some of which

re very interesting forms, and of which we trust, before very long, to

jublish as complete a list as possible. Ceylon has been much

n¢ glected in this respect, asregards marine Mollusca, nothing having

been published about them, except the list in Sir EH. Tennant’s

dmirable work which, however, only mentions some of the well-

‘one. Mérch in the “Journal de Conchyliologie” for 1863, Vol. XI,

‘mentions nine species as belonging to this genus, namely —

1. O. olivacea, Raf., Malta.

2. ,, Sieboldii, Krohn, Sicily.

66 On some new marine Gastropoda. [No. 2,

3. O. brachycephalus, Mérch, Loc.? This species would seem

to require confirmation, Morch having merely described it from

H. & A. Adams’ figure, intended for O. Sieboldii, from which, how-

ever, he states it differs too much to be possibly the same species.

4. ,, Krohnu, A. Ad., Sandwich I.

», pellucidus, , . hoc. ?

5, Antillarum, Orst and Morch, St. Thomas.

», viridis, Pease, Sandwich LI.

,, Cumingti, A. Ad., W. Columbia.

5, Vigourouxw Monty. and Souv., N. Caledonia.

There can be no doubt, the two last named species, must be re-

moved to the genus Volvatella, Pease, (see Amer. Journ. of Conch.,

1868, Pt. 2).

We have also here described two species of the rare genus Cylin-—

drobulla, formed by Fischer in the Journ. de Conch. of 1857, for

a species from Guadaloupe, C. Beauwii ; the only other species, as yet

described, is from South Australia, C. Fischerz, Ad. and Ang.

Of Krohn’s genus Lobiger, two species have been described from

the Mediterranean, LZ. Philipit, Krohn, and (a corneus, Mérch ; a third

named is from Guadaloupe, Z. Sowverbir, Fisch., and a fourth from

Polynesia, by H. Pease, LZ. pecta. (Amer. Journ. of Conch. 1868,

PE 2),

Three species of Broderipia are known from the Philippines, B.

iridescens, Brod., B. rosea, Brod., and B. Cumingii, A. Ad. A fourth

was described from Bourbon by Deshayes, B. nitidissima, the same

OO NAS

writer records B. ¢widescens, as occurring at the same locality 5

we have also ourselves found at Ceylon, the rare and pretty species

B. rosea and add a new species under the name of B. eximia.

The only species of the Delphinuline at all closely allied to the

shell here described, Cyclostrema sub-disjuncta, H. Ad., is Delphinula

nivea, Chemn. Indeed we do not feel quite sure, but that the present

is the species originally described under that name, and that the shell

described and figured for it by Kiener and Reeve, may prove to be

a different one, certainly the two figures in Kiister’s Conchylien-

Cabinet, one after Chemnitz, the other after Kiener, belong to per-

fectly distinct species ; the present shell, if not the same, is very close

to the former, but differs essentially from the latter.

1869.] On some new marine Gastropoda. 67

Fam. PHILINEIDA,

VoLvATELLA, Pease, 1860.

Volvatella cincta, n. sp. (Plate XIIT, Fgs. 4. 4a 4b.)

T. ovato-cylindracea, membranacea, involuta, in medio paululum con-

stricta, utrinque producta; postice abrupte contracta, antice lente ro-

tundata atque subdilatata; apertura postice angustissima, in medio

clausa, antice subrotundata, labio paulo reflexo; labro tenui, postice

oblique desinente, in medio sinuoso; epidermide cornea, pallide

fusca, cingulis latis rufescentibus instructa ; striis incrementi minutis,

regulariter flexuosis.

Long. 114 Mil.—Diam. 63 Mil.

Differing from its nearest ally, V. Vigourouwi, in the pecu-

liarity of the epidermis and in the anterior part of its aperture being

more rounded and not nearly so dilated; there is also no callosity

near the margin of the inner lip, the difference in size is equally very

great, V. Vigowrourit being 24 Mil. in length and 143 in breadth.

The animal resembles that of V. fragilis, Pease, (Am. Journ. of

Conch. Pt. 2. 1868), the colour being bright orange with bands of red

ageresrated corpuscles ; it lives in shallow water on reefs among coral-

lines &c.; when molested, exudes a milky fluid.

Fam. OxyYNormwm.

Oxynor, Raf., 1819.

(Syn. Icarus, Forb. 1844. Lophocercus, Krohn, 1847.)

Oxynoe delicatula, n. sp. (Plate XIII, Fgs. 5. 5a. 5b. 5¢.)

T’. ovata, involuta, postice paulo contracta ac truncata, antice rocun-

data, albida, tenuis; apertura postice subcircularis, antice ovata, elon-

gata, dilatata, marginibus prope terminationem posticam approximatis

instructa, labio levi, tenui, labro postice paulo inflexo, ad marginem

acuto.

Long, 6 Mil.—Diam. 33 Mil.—Rare.

The much smaller expansion of the outer lip, &c., at once distin-

guish this species from O. Sieboldii, which it most resembles.

68 On some new marie Gastropoda. [No. 2,

The animal of this species proves it to be a true Oxynoe, it is of a

pale sea green colour spotted with round turquoise blue spots, it is

found on reefs in very shallow water.

CytinpRoBuLLa, Lisch,, 1857.

Cylindrobulla sculpta, n. sp. (Plate XUI, Fgs. 3. 3a. 3b. 3.)

T. cylindracea, tenui, alba, medio angustata, postice sub-gibbosa ;

sutura postice profunde incisa et ad terminationem truncata; labio

incrassato, labro sinuose inflexo; apertura antice subdilatata ac

rotundata; superficie striis incrementi minutis, flexuosis, postice

crassioribus, prope rectis notata,

Long. 6 Mil.—Diam. 4 Mil.—Very rare.

Cylindrobulla pusilla, n. sp. (Plate XIII, Fgs. 2. 2a. 2b. 2e.) —

T. elongato-cylindracea, postice sub-gibbosa, truncatim desinente,

alba,nitida, pellucida, tenuissima ; sutura postica angusta ; labro inflexo; :

apertura antice transversaliter subdilatata, marginibus tenuibus instruc-

ta; superficie striis minutis, postice approximatis notata.

Long. 4 Mil.—Diam. 2 Mil.—Very rare. |

Rather closely allied to C. Beawii, but differmg in the overlapping © ¥

of the outer lip, &c. There also appears to be considerable resem-

blance to a shell described by H. Peace as Volvatella candida, (Amer. ‘

Journ. of Conch. 1868).

Lozigrr, Krohn, 1847.

Lobiger viridis, n. sp. (Plate XIII, Fgs. 6. 6a. 6b.)

T. ovata, involuta, tenuis, virescens, ultimo anfractu postice

valde inflata; apertura oblonga, antice attenuata et rotundata, postice

breviter producta, sub-angustata ; labio tenui, prope recto, levi, lente

elevato ; labro arcuate expanso, ad marginem tenul. a

Loo 34 Mil.—Diam. 53 Mil,—Very rare.

LL. ee differs from the other species of the same genus in being

anteriorly much more gradually rounded, as also by its greater tumidity

near the spire, &.

1869.) On some new marine Gastropoda. 69

Fam. Trocnips.

Cyclostrema (Tubiola) sub-disjuncta. H. Ad.

(Plate XIII, Fgs. 1. 1a. 1b. 1c.)

~~ Delphinula tubulosa, nu. sp. Proceedings Asiatic Society Bengal,

_ August, 1868.

T. tenuis, subturbinata, moderate umbilicata, spira paulo elevata,

_anfractibus quinis, fere tubulosis, rapide crescentibus instructa, ultimo

prope terminationem dissoluto; superficie striis numerosis spiralibus

ornata; apertura transversaliter sub-rotundata, marginibus tenuibus

conjunctis ; labro supra atque ad basin insinuato.

Long. 64 Mil.—Diam. 9 Mil,—Rare.

Since the publication of the Abstract of this paper, where this shell is

“noticed as new, we find Mr. H. Adams has described it under the

above name in the Proc. Zool. Soc. (1868, p. 293) from a specimen we

sent to him some little time ago.

q Fam, SToMAtTIIDz.

Broderipia eximia, ». sp. (Plate XIII, Fgs. 7. 7a. 7b, 7c.)

_ 1. regulariter oblonga, patelliformis; apice excentrice sub-postico

_ paululum incurvo, antice sub-applanato, postice lente convexo ; super-

. ficie costulis radiantibus, longioribus ac brevioribus alternantibus,

prope apicem obsoletis, interstiis fere equidistantibus separatis ornata ;

cente, incrassata.

- Long. 10 Mil.—Diam. 7 Mil.—Alt. 42 Mil.—

70 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [No. 2,

On Pandanophyllum and allied genera, especially those occurring

in the Indian Archipelago; by 8. Kurz, Ese., Curator of the

Calcutta Herbarium.

[Received and read 7th October, 1868. |

The genus Pandanophyllum, established in 1844, by Dr. Hasskarl

in his catalogue of the plants, cultivated in the Botanic gardens at

Buitenzorg (p. 297) remained for a long time but imperfectly known,

until Dr. Thwaites in his Ceylon plants, and Professor Oudemans in

von Mohl and Schlechtendal’s “‘ Botanische Zeitung” directed the

attention of botanists to this interesting genus of tropical plants.

Some time ago I noticed, in Professor Miquel’s supplement to the

flora of Sumatra, several species which that author had placed in the

genus Lepironia, but which doubtless are congeners of Pandano-

phyllum. This circumstance has induced me to examine all the

Indian species belonging to Pandanophyllum and its allies, and at

the same time to describe those species, which occur in the Indian

Archipelago, as far as the materials at my disposal allow it. In

the present communication, I shall briefly state the results which

I have thus obtained, trusting that they will be acceptable to Indian —

botanists. The new genus, Thoracostachyum, of which I shall give —

a detailed characteristic in the course of this paper, forms to a certain

extent a connecting link between Hypolytrum and Lepironia, but it —

is sufficiently distinct from both of them, and deserves to be treated as

an independent genus of CypERACER.

Scirpodendron, established by the late Zippelius in the Herbarium :

of the Botanic gardens at Buitenzorg, is the most gigantic of all

the Cyprracez I am acquainted with and, when destitute of flowers,

it is hardly to be distinguished from stemless screw-pines.

HYPOLYTREA, NW. #.

Spicae compositae squamis undiqué imbricatis sqamulis squamae ~

ut plurimum contrarie instructis; spiculae solitariae, rarius ternae,

squama opposita obtectae, compressae, 1—multiflorae, diclines v. raro

hermaphroditae ; flosculi masculi monandri, uni-squamulati, saepius

ad squamulam solam reducti; flosculus femineus centralis v. excentri-

eae

1869. | On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. ig

cus, nudus v. rarius squamulatus; stylus 2-3—fidus; achenium v.

achenium drupaceum.

I shall at first give a short review of the genera belonging to this

tribe of the natural order CypERAcE®, and then enter in detail upon the

description of the species, as far as this appears necessary.

Conspectus generwm.

A. Pauciflorae. Spiculae 1-3—florae; flosculi hermaphroditi v.

diclines.

1. Hypontytrum : Spicae corymbosae; spiculae 3—florae; fl. masc.

2-3; flosc. femin. nudus, centralis; stylus bifidus; achenia ossea.

B. Multifiorae. Spiculae 6—multiflorae ; flosculc diclines.

* Achenia ossea.

2. TuorAcostacnyum:. Spicae corymbosae; spiculae circiter 6-

florae; flosc. exteriores masculi, sequentes ad squamulas reducti ;

flosculus centralis femineus, nudus; stylus trifidus.

3. Lzprronta: Spica solitaria, sub apice culmi lateralis; spiculae

-multiflorae ; flosc. masc. 1—6, vario modo inter squamulas vacuas

. dispositi; flosc. centralis nudus; stylus bifidus.

* * Achenia drupacea.

_ 4, PanpanopHytium: Spicae capitatae, v. rarius solitariae, termi-

nales ; spiculae 6-8—florae; flosc. 3 exteriores masculi, sequentes ad

squamulas reducti; flosc. femineus excentricus, squamulatus; stylus

; a 3—fidus ; achenia acuminata, non stipitata.

5. Bee ctuoris. Spicae capitatae; spiculae circiter 7-10—

Biorae flosculi 3 exteriores saepius masculi, sequentes ad squamulas

4 Teducti ; flosc. femineus excentricus squamulatus et squamulam vacu-

~am Br tectens : ; achenia longe rostrata et longiuscule stipitata.

6. ScrrropEnpRon : Spicae compacto-paniculatae ; spiculae 8-10—

florae; floscul. centralis femineus nudus; fl. reliqui omnes masculi ;

_ stylus bi—(v. tri?) fidus ; achenium majusculum, sulcato—6 costatum.

t. I.—Hypotytrum, Lich.

Spicae laxe vel compacto-corymbosae, teretes. Squamae arcte

imbricatae, dein deciduae, inferiorum nonnullae vacuae, reliquae

triflorae, androgynae. Flosc. masc. 2—3, monandzri, uni-squamulati ;

Squamulae squama opposita breviores, carinato-compressae ; flose.

femin. nudus, centralis; ovarium oblongum v. sublagenaeforme ;

stylus bifidus. Achenium styli basi conicd spongiosa rostratum,

72 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [No. 2,

compressiuscule ovatum.—Herbae perennes, rhizomate obliquo ramoso

lignescente, foliis trifarie equitantibus, frequentius trinerviis, basi

complicatis, culmis trigonis pauctfoliatis, foliis culmeis ochreaeforme

vaginantibus, corymbis squamosis, spicrs parvis v. pusillis.

1. H. latifolium, L. C. Rich. in Pers. Syn. I. 10; Kth. Enum,

Il. Fl. 1; Steud., Cyper. 1382; Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. Ill. 333 ; Bth. Fl.

Hongk. 389; Kurz in Tydsch. Nat. Vereen. Ned. Ind. deel XVIII.

164; ejusd. in Bot. Ztg. 1865. 204.—Folia lato-linearia v. linearia,

sursum margine costaque apicem versus serrulato-scabra, trinervia,

nervis lateralibus 2 crassis in pagina superiore obtuse prominentibus ;

culmi paucifoliati; corymbus amplus, intricato-ramosus, v. (in var.)

simpliciuscule ramosus, contractus; achenia vix nitentia, in sicco

lacunoso-rugosa v. sublaevia.

Rhizoma crassum, ramosum. Folia subcoriacea v. chartacea,

trifarie equitantia, lato-linearia v. linearia, flaccida, basin versus

parum angustata, complicata, superne explanata, plicato-trinervia, —

margine a medio costaque subtus apicem versus serrulato-scabra, —

2—24 ped. longa, 1$—2 poll. lata. Culmi penn. gallin. crassi

v. graciles, strictiusculi v. debiles, trigoni, laeves, glaucescentes, —

pauci—1l—2 foliati. Folia culmea basi ochreaeforme invagi- —

nantia, fol. superius corymbo saepe valde approximatum et potius —

involucro adnumerandum. Corymbus confertiusculus v. divaricatus, —

nunc simpliciuscule nune intricate ramosus, squarrosus, involu-—

cratus. Involucri phylla solitaria, semiverticillos ramorum susti-

nentia, sursum decrescentim minora et in bracteas transeuntia. Rami

ancipites, laeves, v. acie scabriusculi, basi bulboso incrassati; in=

feriores terni rarius quaterni, semiverticillati, 14—2 poll. longi,

v. abbreviati basi unibracteati, superiores bini v. solitarii, basi

bracteati; ramuli 4 poll. longi, bibracteolati, apice 4—2 spiculas gerentes”

v. iterato ramulosi et bispiculati, basi vix incrassata ochreaeformi-

bracteolati. Ramorum bracteae membranaceae, marginibus chartaceis-

ochreaeformi-vaginatae, 2—3 lin. longae, v. in ramulis superioribus -

bractea inferior carinato-lanceolata acuminata, viridis, bracteola su-

periore obtus& duplo longior, Spicae minimae, elliptico-oblongae,

obtusiusculae v. acutiusculae, castaneae, nitentes. Squamae ovales,

obtusae, infimarum nonnullae vacuae, reliquae 3—florae. Flosculi

laterales masculi, monandri, antheris inclusis, uni-squamulati ; squa-

1869.] On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. 73

mulae carinato-compressae squamd& multo breviores; flosc. centralis

nudus, femineus, cum flosculis masculis quasi flosculum bisquamula-

tum hermaphroditum representans. Ovarium sublagenaeforme, gla-

brum; stylus breviusculus, bifidus, ramis crassis exsertis. Ache-

nium parvum, in sicco frequentius rugoso-lacunulosum, nitidum v.

sub-canescens.

Has.—In hill forests, from Ceylon through Hindoostan to Birma,

Malacca, and the Indian Archipelago, also occurring in the Philip-

pines, Tropical Africa, Mauritius, Fidji islands.

Native names: Harassas lalakki, Sund., according Hassk. ; ielat,

_ Mal., but the same name is applied by the Malays to many other

CYPERACER.

This would appear a very’variable plant, judging from Bentham’s

identification of H. latifolium with H. trinerve. I myself have not met

with the intermediate forms, and I accept here their identity merely on

the authority of that distinguished botanist who, no doubt, had a more

complete series to compare than I have at present at my disposal. The

varieties might be distinguished as follows :—

Var. a. genuinumM,—spicae duplo majores, cire. 2 lin. longae,

fructigerae, ovales, fusco-canescentes ; achenia oblonga, crasse rostrata

praesertim rostro canescente puberulae.—H. latifolium, ZL. C. Rich.,

t. c.; H. Mauritianum, WV. EL. im Linn. LX. 288; Kth. Enum.

Sil. 272; H. giganteum, Wall. Cat. 3404; ™. FE. in Linn.

IX. 288; ejusd. in Wight Contr. 93; H. diandrum, Dietr. Spec.

IL. 865; Albikia scirpoides, Prsl. Relig. Haenk. I, 185, ¢. 35;

Tunga diandra, Rub. Fl. Ind. I. 184; Hypaelyptum nemorum, P.

d. B. Fl. d’ Oware, 11.13 t. 67; H. ensifolium, Willd herb. 1450 ;

Schoenus nemorum, Vhl. Symb. III. 8. (Rheede XII. t. 58) ejusd,

Enum, II. 227.

Hazs.—Sumatra; Singapore: 7. Anderson, No. 204; South Anda-

/ man; Birma, Moulmein and Amherst: Wail. Cat. 3404; Penang on

the hills (rompot ayam incol.): Wall. Cat. 3404; Silhet: Wall. Cat.

3404; Malay Peninsula: Griff. 6271; Fidji islands : Seemann.

- Var. 8. trinerve, spicae minores, fructigerae zlobosae, fuscescentes ;

achaenia laevia, in sicco magis minusve lacunoso-rugata, nitentes,

fuscescentes.—Hypolytrum trinervium, A¢h. Hn. Il. 272; Steud.

Cyp. 132; Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. Wl. 3832; Kurz in Tydsch. Natuurk.

74 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. © [No. 2,

Vereen. Ned. Ind. deel. XVIII. 164; ejusd. in Bot. Ztg. 1865, 204 ;

Albikia schoenoides, Prsl. in Relig. Haenk. I. 185, t. 34? Hypoly-

trum schoenoides, V. #. in Linn. IX, 283; Scirpus anomalus, Retz.

Obs. V.15; Hypolytrum myrianthum, Wig. Fl. Ind. Bot. IIL. 333.

Sub-var. 1, contracta ;—folia ultra poll. lata; culmi penn. gall. crassi ;

corymbi (praecipue fructigeri) contracti, ramosissima ramis inferiori-

bus plerumque quaternatis—Western Java; Sumatra, in Priaman:

Diepenhorst (paro-paro ince.; Herb. Bogor. No. 2888.)

Sub-var. 2, diffusa ;—folia ultra poll. lata, culmi penn. gall. crassi ;

corymbi divaricato-squarrosi, ramosissimi, ramis inferioribus ternatis.

Rather frequent in the hill forests of Western Java, as on the Salak

and Pangerango.

Tt is often difficult to distinguish Sub-var. 1 and 2 from each other,

as there are many transgressions. ’

Sub-var. 3, gracilis ;—folia vix. poll. lata, 3—33 ped. longa; culmi

graciles; corymbi divaricato-squarrosi, ramosi, ramis inferioribus

ternatis.—This form is cultivated in the Botanic gardens, Buitenzorg,

and most probably has come from the hill forests of the Pangerango or

Salak. It is especially marked by the narrow leaves and the slender

habit.

Var. y Minor, folia angustissima, 4 poll. lata v. angustiora ; culmi

graciles; corymbi parvi, ramis abbreviatis vix ramosis; achenilis ut —

in var. B.

Andamans, on Termoklee island’; Ceylon: Thwaites, 3468. :

2. H. Borneense, Kurz.—Folia anguste linearia, apicem versus —

serrulato-scabra, sub-plana, nervis 2 lateralibus in pagina superiore j

impressis, subtus acute prominentibus; culmi nudi; corymbus parvu- —

lus, squarrosus, ramis vix ramosis; achaenia laevissima, nitida, bisul-

cata. @

Rhizoma stoloniferum, horizontaliter repens, squamatum, radices —

crassas demittens. Folia sub-coriacea, trifarie equitantia, e basi sen-

sim angustaté linearia, acuminatissima, trinervia, nervis omnibus

subtus acute prominentibus, supra autem immersis, marginibus costaqut

subtus apicem versus spinuloso-scabra, 1—14 pedalia, 6—8 lin. lata, —

Culmi foliis longiores, trigoni, nudi, laevissimi ; corymbus vix pollicaris

in diametro, contractiusculus, basi phyllis 1—2 culmo ipso triplo

longioribus sustentus; spicae fructigerae subglobosae, iis A. latefe

1869.] On Pandanophylium and allied genera. igi.

_ hae, var. 8. trinervis, simillima; achenia nitida, ovata, atrofusca,

: acuminata, in sicco bisulcata.

Hazs.—Borneo, Labuan: Barber, No. 193.

This species, in general appearance, resembles H. latifoliwm y.

‘minor, but may be readily distinguished by the nervature and the

_ bisulcate achens.

(8.) H. Longirostre, Zhw. Enum. Pl. Zeyl. 346.

Hazs.—Ceylon: Thwaites, No. 3468.

SPECIES DUBIA.

Hypolytrum compactum, WN. #., in Linn. TX. 280; Kth. Enum. II-

| 272; Steud. Cyp. 32; Mig., Fl. Ind. Bat. TI. 338.

_ A Luzon species which by Steudel, and subsequent authors, is

_ compared with Pandanophyllum humile, Hassk.

“

II. THoracostacHyum.

_ Kurz in Tydsch. Nat. Vereen. Ned. Ind., deel. XXVII. (nomen

- nudum).

_ Spicae corymbosae, teretes. Squamae undique imbricatae, dein

deciduae, inferiorum nonnullae vacuae, reliquae spiculam 6—7

: floram androgynam foventes. Flosculi 3 exteriores masculi, sequentes

ad squamulas reducti; flosculus summus femineus, uni-sqamulatus.

“Squamulae squam4 communi breviores et oppositae, carinato-com-

‘pressae. Ovarium compresso-oblongum, utrinque attenuatum ; stylus

trifidus. Achenium osseum, lenticulari-compressum, utrinque attenu-

_ atum, rostratum.—Herbae habitu et vegetatione omnino Hypolytre,

_ sed spicis multo majoribus rigide squamatis insignes.

1. Th.Sumatranum, Kurz. Folia linearia, plicato-3-nervia,

_ Spinuloso-serrulata ; culmi foliis longiores, trigoni, oligophylli; corym-

i" bus polystachyus, involucratus, divaricato-squarrosus; spicae obov-

oideo-ellipticae, parvulae, in sicco stramineae; achenia lenticulari-

compressa, utrinque attenuata, rostrata, laevia. —Lepironia Sumatrana,

Mig., Suppl. Fl. Sumatra, 604.

Rhizoma abbreviatum, verticale, radices crassas demittens. Folia

firma, densa, trifarie equitantia, linearia, acuminata, plicato-trinervia,

| ‘margine costaque subtus a medio spinuloso-serrulata, 2—2} ped.

| Tonga, } poll. lata. Culmi folia longitudine superantes, 3—34 ped,

' longi, trigoni, striati, glabri, basi paucifoliati. Corymbus polysta-

| chyus, divaricato-squarrosus, ramis brevibus triquetris; rami inferi-

76 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [No. 2

ores foliis fere 1—3 ped. longis involucrantibus sustenti, reliqui sen-

sim minora et in bracteas abeuntia. Spiculae 2—5 nae, aggregatae,

oblongo-ovatae v. obovoideo-ellipticae, acutiusculae, majusculae, niten-

tes, in sicco stramineae. Squamae cartilagineo-rigidae, convexius-

culae, sursum deorsumque minores, elliptico-oblongae, obtusae; in-

fimae 4—5 vacuae saepe acutiusculae ; sequentes spiculam 7-floram

androgynam includentes. Flosculi 3 exteriores masculi, monandti,

sequentes 2 neutri ad squamulas reducti; flosc. intimus excentricus,

femineus, uni-squamulatus, squamulam septimam sterilem amplectens.

Squamulae laterales 2 compresso-naviculares, in carina ciliolatae,

reliquae depressae. Ovariume basi constricté compresso-oblongum,

acuminatum; stylus brevis, cum ovario continuus, trifidus, ramis

elongatis exsertis. Achenium compresso-lenticulare, utrinque attenu-

atum, styli basi persistente acuminato-rostratum.

Has.—Sumatra, in the forests of the Lampong district, near Ipil,

Battang lekko: Teysmann (H. Bogor. No. 3932).

Native names: Selingsieng (inc. Lampongensium).

2. Th. Bancanum, Kurz, in Tydsch. Nat. Vereenig. Ned. Ind.

XXVII. 286; ejusd, in Bot. Ztg. 1865. 204. Folia elongato-line-

aria, spinuloso-serrulata; culmi trigoni, aphylli; corymbus involu-

cratus, contractus; spicae breviores, ellipsoideae, obtusae, pauci spi-

culatae, in sicco griseae; achaenia ellipsoideo-trigona, convexa,

apiculata.—Lepironia Bancana, Wig. Suppl. Fl. v. Sumatra, 604.

“Qaulis subnullus ; folia densa,-trifarie equitantia, elongata, line-

aria, marginibus carinaque spinuloso-serrulata; culmus trigonus,

aphyllus, angulis versus apicem scabris ; involucrum inaequaliter 2-4—

phyllum ; corymbus contractus, ramis 6—10—stachyis, pedicellis ad _

angulos serrulato-scabris geminis ternis pluribusve confertis; spiculae

ellipsoideae, obtusae, squamis infimis vacuis subacutis, reliquis ovali-

bus obtusis striulatis griseis cum levi rubore (sub anthesi) ; squamulae

interiores 6 (?), quarum exteriores naviculari-compressae, carina

ciliatae; achaenia in singula spicula circiter 4, reliquis suppressis,

ellipsoideo-trigona, faciebus convexis, sulco interjecto separatis, und —

majore, 2 aequalibus minoribus, crasso-crustacea, styli basi apiculata, —

(Miq. 1. c.) :

Has. Banca, especially on river banks and in swampy places of

the forests ; Singapore, near swamps: Wall. Cat. 3401. é

—~I

1869. | On Pandanophyllum and allied genera.

III. Lerrronia, L. C. Ricu.

Spicae solitariae, infra culmi apice laterales, teretes, multi-spiculatae.

Squamae spiraliter arcte imbricatae, deciduae, inferiorum nonnullae

vacuae, sequentium paucae passim squamulas steriles plurimas cum

flosculo femineo includentes, reliquae multiflorae, androgynae. Flosculi

-masculi monandri 1—6, vario modo interpositi, uni-squamulati,

reliqui ad squamulas reducti; flosculus femineus centralis, nudus.

Squamulae carinato-naviculares. Antherae spurie 4-loculares, mu-

cronatae. Ovarium sublagenaeforme; stylus bifidus. Achaenium

lenticulare, compressum, obovatum, styli basi persistente rostratum,

osseum.—Herba perennis aphylla habitu Juncorum, rhizomate vage

_repente squamato, culmis teretibus bast vagunatis, spicis indole Scirporum

— quorundam., —

_ 1. L. mucronata, L. C. Rich. in Pers. Syn.I. 170; A. Rich,

in Dietr. Class. 297; Kth., Enum. I. 366; Mig., Fl. Ind. Bat. U1.

346 ; Steud., Glum. I. 181.—Scirpus coniferus, Poir., Encycl. 756 ;

Rpt iV 90; Restio articulatus, Retz., Obs. TV. 15; Chondrachne

‘ articulata, FR. ie Prod. 220.

# Has.: Indian Archipelago, Sumatra in Lampongs: Zeysm. Hb.

BBoe. 4249; isl. Banca; Borneo, Banjermassing : Motley, Hb. 1267,

Singapore.

Distris. New Holland; Madagascar. .

Native namzs: Tikooh in Lamp. ; Pooron in Banca.

Planta elegans, 2—3 ped. alta et altior, vegetatione Juncis acce-

. Rhizoma vage repens, hypogaeum, radices crassas perplurimas

mittens, squamis chartaceis testaceis v. brunnescentibus striatis

Culmi pennae scriptoriae crassitudinis v. crassiores, atrovi-

, Striati, intus transverse septati, in sicco ad septa nodosi,

“aphylli, basi pauci-vaginati. Vaginae striatae, marginibus membra-

“Raceis, mucronatae, culmo magis minusve concolores, basin versus

-fusco-purpurascentes, infimae 1-2 ovatae v. ovato-lanceolatae e

‘thizomate orientes ; sequentes magis elongatae amplectentes ; suprema

Usque semipedalis, caeteras longitudine multo excedens. Spica soli-

taria, lateralis, elliptico-ovalis v. oblonga, obtusiuscula v. acutiuscula,

multiflora, basi culmi processu dilatato versus apicem terete spurie

bracteata. Rhachis elongato-conica, confertissime et spiraliter cicatri-

Sata, sublignea, intus medullosa. Squamae spiraliter dispositae, con-

78 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [ No. 2,

fertissimae, post acheniorum maturitatem valde deciduae, inaequali la-

to-oblongae, obtusissimae, concaviusculae, scariosae, ad margines

non raro magis minusve laceratae, fusco-ferrugineae v. badiae, apice

intensius coloratae, inferiores paucissimae, vacuae, reliquae spiculam

squama propria vix longiorem androgynam continentes. Spicula 12—

15 flora, flosculi masc. unisquamulati, 1—6, monandri, reliqui ad

squamulas reducti et sine ordine manifesta circum flosculum femin. —

excentricum nudum dispositi. Squamulae hyalino-albidae, apice

brunnescentes, acuminatae ; laterales carinato-naviculares, carina ele-

ganter ciliatae: staminigerae medianae depressae, marginibus inflexis ;

steriles lineari-lanceolatae, planae. Antherae dein exsertae, spurie

4-loculares, lineares, atropurpureae, mucrone albo terminatae, loculis—

longitudinaliter dehiscentibus, filamenta pilosiuscula, glabrescentia.

Pollinia, irregulari-ovalia, sulfurea. Ovarium compresso-ellipticum

uni-ovulatum, ovulo erecto, glabrum ; stylus bifidus. Achaenia plano-—

convexa, oblonga, utrinque attenuata, marginata, striata, nitentia,

testacea, stylo persistente rostellata ; rostrum dimidium fere longitu- a

dinis achaenii ipsius attingens introrsum curvatum.

IV. Panpanopuyitium, Hassx.

Spicae solitariae v. capitato-compactae, teretiusculae, magnae,

multispiculatae. Squamae undique imbricatae, dein laceratae et

emarcescente-persistentes ; inferiorum plures vacuae, reliquae spicu-

lam 5—8-floram androgynam squamé ips& paullo longiores v. brevi-

ores gerentes. Flosculi exteriores 8 masculi, monandri, uni-squamu

lati; sequentes 2—4 steriles squamulis totitem representati ; flosculus

femineus excentricus unisquamulatus saepius squamulam sequentem

vacuam amplectens, Squamulae laterales carinato-compressae, navi-

culares, squamae contrarie insertae. Ovarium sublagenaeforme vy.

oblongum ; stylus 2—3 bifidus. Achaenium obovattim, styli basi

persistente rostratum, utrinque attenuatum, pericarpio carnescen

indutum, nucleo lapideo, hilo excavato.—Herbae perennes, habitu —

omnino Pandanorum, rhizomate lignescente ; foliis trifartis bast com- t

plicatis sessilibus v. petiolatis trinerviis ; culmis trigonis, € stolonibus —

abbreviatis squamatis ortis, nudis v. squamatis ; spicis solitarus Vv. —

capitatis, bast involucratis v. subnudis. a

1. P. palustre, Hassk. Cat. Bog. 297; ejusd. Dydsch. Wat.

Vereen, X. 118; Steud. Glum. 1.184; Zoll. Cat. 61; Walp. Anm

1869. ] On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. 79

I. 753; Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. TI. 334.—Folia lato-linearia, acumi-

natissima, trinervia, margine costaque spinuloso-serrulata, rigide

coriacea; culmi 1—I14 pedalia, aphylli, obtuse trigoni; capitulum

oligo-v. polystachyum, compactum, magnum, phyllis 3—4 latis

squamaeformibus eo ipso brevioribus v. aequilongis involucratum ;

squamae lanceolatae, obtusae v. apice dilaceratae, sub-enerviae, char-

taceae ; achaenia inaequali-oblonga, styli basi acuminata.

Var.a. Malesica, capitulis saepe pugni infantis magnitudine,

hemisphaericis v. subglobosis, polystachyis; spicis autem duplo vy.

triplo minoribus.

Var. 8. Silhetana, capitulis irregulari oblongis, e 83—9 spicis

_ maximis compositis.

Has.—In damp hill forests in Western Java frequent, as on Pan-

gerango, 3—4000’ ; on the Salak 4—5000’ ; var. 6, between rocks and

tree stumps, Passir Madang, Probakti, 2—4000’; Zollinger. Singa-

pore: Wall. 3541 (young inflorescence) ; Silhet: Wall. Cat. 4474

(var. f). .

‘

| Native names: Bangkonoh or Harassas tjaee im Java.

Rhizoma crassum, obliquum, radices crassas demittens. Folia rigide

" coriacea, trifarie equitantia, lato-linearia, acuminatissima, trinervia,

marginibus rectangulariter deviis spinuloso-serrata, subtus in carina

‘basi retrorse scabra, apicem versus spinuloso-serrulata, 6—9 ped.

pone, 13—2 poll. lata, supra atroviridia, nitida, subtus glaucescenti

Viridia. Culmi 1—1} pedales, deorsum sensim attenuati, obtuse tri-

- goni, basin versus subteretes, glaucescenti-virides, glabri, sublente

albido-punctati. Spicae plurimae elliptico—v. conico-oblongae, 3—l

pollicem paene longae, capitato-conglomeratae, involucratae ; involucri

phylla 3—4 v. 6—8, squamaeformia, coriacea, e basi latissima oblongo-

Bin acutata, planiuscula v. concaviuscula, spicularum longitudine

“equalia v. vix longiora. Squamae lato-lanceolatae v. lanceolatae, apice

| Obtusae v. saepius dilaceratae, sub-enerviae, laeves, chartaceae, e flaves-

cente brunnescentes ; inferiorum nonnullae vacuae ; sequentes spiculam

Squama breviorem 6-floram androgynam includentes. Flosculi omnes

Uni-squamulati; exteriores 8 monandri, interiores 2 ad squamulas

reducti, flosculus intimus excentricus femineus. Squamulae laterales

| Compresso-naviculares, carina ciliatae; squamula flosculi femin. line-

aris, sub-plana, marginibus inflexis. Antherae exsertae, biloculares,

, 3S See Ss

80 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [No. 2,

ab ovario aversae. Ovarium sublagenaeforme, glabrum; stylus lon-

giusculus, bifidus. Achaenium inaequali-oblongum, utrinque attenu-

atum, obsolete trigonum, styli basi persistente acuminatum, pericarpio

tenui carnescente testaceo, nucleo lapideo nigro.

2. P.squamatum, Kurz.—Folia lato-linearia, acuminatissima,

trinervia, margine costaque spinuloso-serrulata, rigide coriacea; culmi

abbreviati, 3—14—pollicares, squamati, trigoni, obscuri; capitula

oligo-rarius mono-stachya, compacta, oblonga; squamae ellipticae,

obtusae v. apice laceratae, in sicco striatae, chartaceae; achaenia

utrinque attenuata, bicarinata, rostrata.

Has. Java, in hilly parts of Buitenzorg : Zippelius (in Hb. Bogor.)

Rhizoma lignescens, verticale v. obliquum, radices crassas demit-

tens. Folia trifarie equitantia, e basi complicata lato-linearia, acu-

minatissima, trinervia, lateribus deviis margine subtusque in costa

apicem versus spinuloso-serrulata, coriacea, 5—6 ped. longa, 1—1}

poll. lata. Culmi e foliorum axillis erumpentes, abbreviati, 3—13

poll. longi, undique, praesertim basi, squamis ovato-oblongis concavis

acutis striatis obtecti, trigoni, striati, glabri. Spicae 2—3, capitato-

conglomeratae, rarissime solitariae, oblongae, obtusae. Squamae un-

dique imbricatae, ellipticae, obtusae v. saepius lacerantes, in sicco”

striulatae, fuscescentes, inferiores 4—5 vacuae saepe involucrantes,

reliquae spiculam 6-floram squama propria paullo longiorem andro-

gynam continentes. Flosculi 3 exteriores masculi, monandri, sequentes-

ad squamulas reducti, flosculus intimus excentricus femineus squamu-

lam vacuam amplectens. Squamulae laterales lineares, curvati)

carinato-naviculares, in carinis minute denticulatae. Achaenium

adhuc (immaturum) oblongum, utrinque acuminatum, bicarinatum,

pericarpio tenui coriaceo, nucleo lapideo cinerascente apiculato.

8. P. Zeylanicum, Thw. Enum. Pl. Ceyl. 345.

Has. Ceylon: Thwaites, C. P. 3029; South Andamans. ?

This species, which is not yet recorded from the Indian Archipela-—

go, differs from the next one, P. Miquelianum, especially by the

more robust and obtuse spikelets, which form a head, when fully

grown, not dissimilar to that of P. palustre. The scales are-

furnished by a broader white (in dried state brown) margin. Dr, -

Thwaites describes his plant as having a clavate style, but the Anda-—

man specimens have them normally two cleft. I saw the Ceylon

1869.) On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. 81

plant in the Herbarium of the Botanic gardens at Buitenzorg, but

unfortunately I have here no specimen to examine. I strongly suspect

that Dr. Thwaites, when describing the plant, has had before him

_ young spikelets only.

4. P. Miquelianum, wrz. Folia elongato-linearia, acu-

minatissima, trinervia, margine cost4que spinuloso-serrulata, flaccida,

_utringue nitentia, saturate v. flavescente viridia; culmi elongati,

13—3 pedales, nudi, trigoni, nitentes; spicae golitariae, squamis laete

viridibus anguste albide (in sicco fuscescente) marginatis ; achenia

oblonga, utringue attenuata, acuminata, vix carinata.

enodis, Miq., Suppl. Fl. v. Sumatra, 603; Lepir. foliosa, Miq. 1. «.

(sprcis adhuc virgineis. )

Lepironia

Has. Sumatra, in the jungles of Danoh-tjaloh, Moesi, Palembang :

eysm. Hb. Bog. 8686 et 4051.

_ Native name: Rumput selingsieng in Palemb.

Rhizoma crassum, obliquum v. subverticale, lignescens, radices

plurimas crassas demittens. Folia trifarie-equitantia, lato-, v. anguste-

linearia, acuminatissima, infra medio paullo angustata, complicata,

basi vix dilatata, 4—5 ped. longa, }—1 poll. lata, margine versus

basin et apicem, v. tota longitudine, remotiuscule spinuloso-serrulata,

costa apicem versus spinulosa, trinervia, marginibus rectangulariter

leviis. Culmi e rhizomate stolonibus abbreviatis squamatis orientes, 13

—34 ped. long., sursum sensim incrassti, obtuse trigoni, striulati,

mitentes. Spicae terminales, solitariae, conico-ellipticae v. clavato-

)blongae, obtusae, dein acuminatae. Squamae undique arcte imbri-

atae, emarcescente persistentes, sursum sensim minores, oblongo-

anceolatae v. lato-oblongae, acutatae ; superiores obtusiusculae, virides,

largine anguste membranaceo albidae (Gn sicco autem fuscescentes),

ub-trinerviae, nervis tenerioribus parallelis percursae ; inferiores 9-~10

acuae, sequentes 5—florac. Flosculi omnes unisexuales, exteriores

masculi, monandri, intimus femineus squamulam sterilem amplec-

ns. Squamulae flosculorum exteriorum compresso-naviculares, carina

dse-ciliolatae, medianae depresso-bicarinatae, in angulis ciliolatae,

amenta dein elongata paullo supra squamulam exserta ; antherae

es filamento dimidio breviores, biloculares, longitudinaliter

hiscentes, flavescente-albidae, apice minute apiculatae. Flosculi

feminei excentrici, squamula depressa, linearis, marginibus inflexis

82 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [No. 2,

squamulam sterilem amplectens. Ovarium sublagenaeforme laeve ;

stylus breviusculus, ovario continuus, emarcescente persistens, tri-

fidus, ramis inclusis. Achaenium obovatum, basi angustatum, apice

styli basi persistente acuminatum, pericarpio tenue carnosulo (in

sicco coriaceo) laevi testaceo, nucleo lapideo nigrescente.

Prof. Miquel, in establishing his Lepironia enodis had only the

full-grown inflorescences before him, which were distributed from the

Botanic gardens, Buitenzorg, under No. 3029, and described therefore

the plant as having no leaves. But the leaves with young inflores-

cences were (by mistake probably) distributed at the same time under ~

No. 4051, coming also from Palembang, and upon these specimens

he founded his Lepironia foliosa. £

5. P. Humile, Hassk., Oat. Bog., 297 ; Steud., Cyp. 134; Zoll., —

Cat 61; Walp., Ann. 1,753 ; Migq., Fl. Ind. Bat. TI, 384; Oudem., im ~

Bot. Ztg. 1866, 193.—Folia petiolata, lamina elongato-elliptica retusa —

abrupte subulato-cuspidata, marginibus apicem versus spinuloso-ser-

rulaté; petioli complicati, basi vaginato-dilatati ; culmi plerumque —

geminati, elongati v. abbreviati, basi squamato-vaginati ; spicae solita- —

riae (rarius binae), squamis fuscescente viridibus plurinerviis; achenia —

oblonga utrinque attenuata, acuminata, obsolete bicarinata.—Lepi-

stachya praemorsa, Zipp. I. 8. ; Lepironia cuspidata, Mig. Suppl. Fl.

v. Sumatra, 603; Pandanophyllum Zippelianum, Kurz in natuurk.

Tydsch. v. Ned. Ind. XXVII. 126; ejusd. Bot. Zig. 1865 204.

Has.: One of the most common grasses in the hill forests of

Western Java, at 3-5000’ ft. elevation; occurs also in Banca

Teysmann ; and in Sumatra: Korthals.

Native naME: Sohlenat, Sunda.

Rhizoma crassum, obliquum v. verticale, lignescens, radices pluri-

mas demittens. Folia trifarie equitantia, subcoriacea, petiolata;

lamina elongato-elliptica, 1—13 ped. longa, 1}—22 poll. lata, bast

in petiolum complicatum longitudine ab 1—2 poll. variantem bast ‘

vaginato-dilatatum decurrens, apice retuso abrupte subulato—(—2

poll.) cuspidata, plicata, 83—nervis, margine apicem versus costaque |

spinuloso-serrulata. Culmi e stolonibus abbreviatis squamato-vagi

natis plerumque geminatim orti, nudi, deorsum attenuati, obtuse ~

trigoni, striati, glabri, 1—4 poll. usque ad pedem longi, intense

virides opaci, sub lente albido-punctati. Spicae oblongae v. ovato-

(1869. ] On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. 33

oblongae, obtusiusculae v. acutiusculae, solitariae, v. passim binae.

Squamae arcte imbricatae, emarcescente persistentes, sursum sensim

minores; inferiores 8—4 vacuae, lanceolatae v. oblongo-lanceolatae,

obtuse carinatae, striatae, opacae, virides, margine membranaceo

brunnescentes; sequentes ecarinatae, nervosae, teneriores, flaves-

cente-testaceae v. brunnescentes, nitentes, spiculam 6 floram andro-

gynam foventes. Flosculi omnes uni-squamulati, 3 exteriores masculi,

monandri ; 2 interiores ad valvulas reducti : flosc. intimus excentricus,

femineus. Squamulae flosculorum laterali compresso-navicuculares, in

carinis eroso-ciliolatae, medianae depressae. Antherae exsertae. Ovari-

um sub-lagenaeforme, laeve; stylus brevis ovario continuus, emar-

cescente persistens, trifidus, ramis elongatis inclusis. Achaenia oblonga,

styli basi apiculata, obsolete bicarinata, pericarpio carnescente (in

sicco coriaceo) brunnescente asperulo, nucleo lapideo nigrescente.

This is a very variable species, not only with regard to the leaves,

which are longer or shorter petioled, but also with reference to the

length of the culms, sometimes attaining nearly the length of the

_ leaves, sometimes reduced so as to let the spike appear almost sessile.

Sometimes these culms are furnished also with a few bracts.

6. P. immersum, Zhw. Enum. Pl. Zeyl. 4338.

Has.: Ceylon: Thwaites C. P. 3819. |

Rhizoma crassum, lignescens, radicosum. Folia trifarie-equitantia,

_ 2—23 pedalia, pollice angustiora, anguste linearia, acuminata, basin

membranaceo-marginatum breviter vaginantem versus angustiora,

_complicato-trinervia, laevia, supra nitida, subtus glaucescentia et

opaca, marginibus costaque basin versus remote et minute serrulata

vy. omnino laevia. Culmi pollicares v. breviores, bracteis sursum

_ majoribus spica ipsa solitaria sublongioribus obtecti. Bracteae cul-

“meae superiores involucrantes, membranceo-marginatae, lineares, acu-

minatae. Spica fructigera cerasi minimi magnitudine, densiuscula,

squamis late-ovatis acuminatis in sicco fuscescentibus striatis. Ach-

aenia ovata, incurvato-rostrata, ecarinata; pericarpio carnosulo.

V. CzxpHatoscirpus, Kurz.

Spicae glomerato-capitatae, multi-spiculatae. Squamae undique im-

bricatae, emarcescente persistentes, inferiorum nonnullae vacuae, reliquae

spiculigerae, Spiculae 7—10 - florae, squama_ propria longiores.

Flosculi omnes uni-squamulati, nunc 3 exteriores, nunc 3 alii masculs,

84 On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. [No. 2,

monandri, reliqui ad squamulas reducti; flosculus intimus femineus

squamulam sterilem amplectens. Squamulae laterales carinato-com-

pressae. Ovarium basi stipitiformi-attenuatum ; stylus trifidus. Ach-

aenium longe stipitatum, rostratum, pericarpio carnosulo, nucleo

lapideo.—Herba perennis habitu omnino Pandanophyllorum, sed phyllis

involucrantibus longissumis etiam adspecta diversa.

1. C. macrocephalus, Awrz.—Hypolytrum macrocephalum;

Gaud. in Freyc. Jt. Bot. 414 ;\Kth. En. II, 273 ; Steud., Cyp. 133.

Has: : Moluccos; Gaudichaud; ib. isl. Batjan; Zeysmann. (in

Hb. Bog.)

Rhizoma......Folia......Culmi trigoni, glabri, pedales, basi pauci-

foliati, Spicae semipollicares, majusculae, plurimae, inaequali-

oblongae, compressiusculae, glomeratae; glomeruli phyllis singulis

sustenti in capitulam involucratum pollicem dein 14 poll. crassum

compacti. Involucri phylla inferiora 3—4, pedalia v. longiora, poll.

Jata, lato-linearia, subulato trigono-acuminata, trinervia, marginibus —

rectangulariter deviis, margine costaque subtus apicem versus spinu-

loso-serrulata, subcoriacea, phylla sequentia mox in bracteas glomerulis

ipsis minores lato-ovatas acuminatas transeuntia. Squamae undique

imbricatae pellucescente-chartaceae, oblongo-lanceolatae, obtusius-

culae, trinerviae, glabrae, nitentes; inferiorum nonnullae vacuae, —

reliquae spiculam 7—10—floram includentes. Spiculae lineares, com-

pressae, squama longiores. Flosculus intimus excentricus femineus

uni-squamulatus, squamulam sterilem amplectens; flosculi sequentes

3 v. 8 alii extimi masculi, monandri, uni-squamulati, reliqui ad squa-

mulas vacuas reducti. Squamulae laterales compresso-naviculares,

carina ciliatae, medianae depressae. Ovarium sublagenaeforme, utrin )

que angustatum, glabrum; stylus longus, persistens, trifidus, ramis

elongatis. Achaenia oblonga, basi in stipitem longum gracilem at-

tenuata, tricarinata, stylo persistente longe acuminato-rostrata (ros :

trum achaenium longitudine paullo superans), pericarpio carnosulo,

(in sicco tenui coriaceo) glabro testaceo, nucleo lapideo nigrescente. F

I have not Gaudichaud’s work above cited for consultation, but I think

Lam correct in quoting his plant from Kunth’s and Steudel’s descriptions.

VI. ScrreopenpRon, Zrppenivs.

Spicae glomerato-paniculatae, compactae, undique squamatae. Squa-

mae emarcescente persistentes, inferiores saepius tri—superiores uni-

1869. | On Pandanophyllum and allied genera. 85

spiculatae, 8—10 florae, androgynae. Flosculus centralis femineus,

nudus; flosculi reliqui masculi omnes monandri, uni-squamulati.

Squamulae squamae contrariae; laterales compresso-naviculares ;

vacuae nullae (ansemper?). Ovarium lagenaeforme ; stylus longius-

culus, bi—(an etiam tri?) fidus. Achaenium magnum, obovatum,

(12?) costatum, pericarpio carnoso (in sicco corticoso rugoso),

nucleo lapideo mucronulato.—Planta perennis habitu Pandanis veris

acaulibus ita similis, ut ab his aegre discernenda nist inflorescentia.

1. Se. costatum, Kurz. Scirpodendron pandaniforme, Zipp.

MS.; Pandanophyllum costatum, Zhw. Hn. Pl. Zeyl. 433? Scleria

macrocarpa, Wall. Cat.

Has.—In the hill jungles of Western Java along the torrents and

in swampy places: Zippelius, fc. ee and Penang: Wall.

3538; Ceylon: Thwaites.

Native names: Harassas in Sunda.

Rhizoma crassum, obliquum, lignescens. Folia coriacea, trifarie

equitantia, lato-linearia, acuminatissima, 6—9 ped. longa, pollicem

lata et latiora, trinervia, lateribus rectangulariter deviis, margine

costaque a medio spinuloso-serrulata. -Culmi 1—13 ped. longi,

trigoni v. triquetri, glabri v. in angulis scabeirimi, aphylli, basi

squamati. Panicula compacta, terminalis, pauci-ramea, ramis brevibus

| crassis simplicibus, inferioribus 83—4 phyllis singulis sustentis in-

yolucrantibus. Involucri phylla longissima, 7—2 ped. longa, foliis

subconformia. Spicae sessiles v. sub-sessiles, compositae, basi bracted

magna chartaced e basi lata oblonga acuta concava sustentae. Squa-

mae oblongae, obtusiusculae, carinatae v. subcarinatae, striatae, mem-

‘branaceae, inieriores saepe spiculas tres, sequentes spiculam unicam

Squamé propria breviorem tegentes. TF losculus centralis nudus femin-

eus. Squamulae laterales lato-carinato-naviculares, carina ciliolatae.

Antherae exserte. Ovarium sublagenaeforme ; stylus longus, bifidus,

ramis brevibus. Achaenia drupacea, magnitudine pisi majoris, in

— ee .

“sicco sulcato—6—costata, rugosa; pericarpium in sicco corticosum;

| nucleus obovatus, obsolete Gecositides apiculatus, lapideus.

Tam in doubt whether Dr. Thwaites’ Pandanophyllum costatwm is

identical with this plant, as his short description does not well coincide

| Buh the above characteristic. According to that author the achenes

| are 6-—12 ribbed, but the Malayan species which I have examined,

have them all 6-ribbed only.

86 | [No. 2,

The Malacology of Lower Bengal and the adjoining provinces ; by

Ferp. StoriczKa, Hsa., Ph. D., F. G. 8., &e., Paleontologist of the

Geological Survey of India.

[Received and read 4th November 1868. |

‘ : =? - gt ‘ -

ee eee SP Ae

_ Under the above title I propose to record a series of papers, the

special object of which is the exposition of the Molluscous fauna of —

Lower Bengal and of the adjoining provinces. It is not my intention

to follow in these papers any systematic arrangement, but simply to

bring the materials, as they are collected, to the notice of Conchologists.

At first sight it may seem that there is hardly a necessity for a {

series of such papers, as the Molluscous fauna of Bengal is pretty well —

known through the valuable researches of H. Benson, W. T. Blanford, —

and others. With regard to our knowledge of the shells, or the solid

parts of Molluscs, this statement would deserve a fair consideration,

but it is marvellous how very ignorant we are of the soft parts of the

respective animals. The course of study pursued in Conchology —

during the last twenty years, has shewn that no systematic arrange- |

ment can be attempted without the due knowledge of the animals, .

even generic and specific determinations are sometimes impossible to

be carried out without them. Comparative anatomy and morphology -

of our Molluscs are equally deficient as the principal elements.

Strictly speaking it is by no means surprising that the anatomy

of our Indian Molluscs is as yet so little known. The shells are easily

preserved and more or less commonly found at all times of the year.

The animals on the contrary are met with only at certain seasons

characterized by a large proportion of moisture in the atmosphere,

which combined with the tropical heat often rapidly decomposes the

animal substance, while under the knife and the needle. Besides few

of our able conchologists had had the opportunity of observing many

live animals, and the examination of specimens, preserved in spirit,

glycerine, &c., are very easily misleading, so as to give various organs

a different interpretation from that to which they are actually destined. —

During the course of my papers I shall, therefore, endeavour to pay q

special attention to the soit parts of the animals, to the anatomic al gy

“a

. 1869.] The Malacology of Lower Bengal. 87

and morphological details. Only the shells of newly discovered

species will be separately figured, but of all species, as far as they can

be procured, representations of the animals, of the dentition, &c., will be

given. I shall feel amply rewarded, if I can see that any of my con-

chological friends appreciate this course of inquiry ; and I will feel

greatly obliged if they would favour me with live specimens of Mol-

luses. During the rains and in the cold weather most of the land

shells will survive for 9 and 10 days in a box with a little moistened

moss, a few holes being made in the box for the purpose of ventila-

tion. If not procurable alive, speciméfis in spirit or glycerine* will be

also thankfully received.

I do not wish to give my papers a more extensive title, than the

one quoted above, because I as yet have only the hopes to procure

those specimens which are within my own reach and that of my

collectors, but I trust that the area of my research and examination

will gradually obtain a wider range. The first paper will be devoted to

the examination of some remarkable Molluscs, for a species of which

Dr. F. Buchannan 70 years ago proposed the name Onchidiwm.t These

animals may be in a certain point regarded as the tropical represent-

ants of the slugs, or Zimaces, which are generally found only in tem-

perate climates. Although I have numerous materials on other groups

of Molluscs collected, I have given preference to this one, because the

characteristics given of the genus are very deficiently known, and par-

tially incorrectly recorded in the present leading works on Conchology.

Dr. Buchannan’s description of the type species, Onchidiwm typhe,

is not very clear, neither is it sufficient, and the general belief was,

that the species has been lost sight altogether. Nevertheless I find

that it was very well known for many years to several of our Indian

Conchologists, and it is actually during the rainy season a very common

Species about Calcutta.

* Glycerine does admirably for these purposes. It is occasionally advantage-

ous to put the animal first in hot water for a few minutes, and after its death in

glycerine or spirit, the animal does not shrink afterwards so much as it would

when put in glycerine alive.

+ An account of the Onchidiwm, anew genus of the class of Vermes, found in

Bengal, by F. Buchannan, M. D., A. L. 8. ;—read June 5th, 1798 ; Transactions

Linn. Society, Vol. V., 1800, p. 182.

88 On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

No. I. On the genus Oncurprum, with descriptions of several new

species; (with plates XIV and XV.)

Order.—PuLMonatTa.

Family.—Oncuipi2.

Genus.—Onchidium, Buchannan, 1800.

Char. Body oblong, entirely covered by a coriaceous, more or less

tuberculated mantle, projecting at the sides and internally fleshy ; foot

long, narrower and little shorter than the mantle; head large, distinct ;

the mouth situated below, forming a longitudinal slit syrrounded by

thickened lips, and two, more or less, prolonged and thickened buccal

appendages, to the upper edge of which are, so to say, the tentacles

soldered on, being represented merely by thickened rims; superior to

these are the long, retractile pedicles bearing on their tips the eyes.

Two cartilaginous plates in the cesophagus are covered with a broad

radula furnished with very numerous, small equally formed teeth, the

central tooth being pointed and equilateral, the laterals usually

somewhat smaller, almost all of equal size, slightly hooked, claw-shaped ;

no special upper jaw is present. Anus situated at the upper basal end

of the foot ; pulmonary orifice posterior to it in the mantle. The sexes

are united, the common sexual opening being placed more or less close

to the right of the anus, in the fold between the inner side of the

mantle and the foot ; a special male organ is besides situated under the

right eyepedicle ; it is thick, long, provided with a short flagellum ;

the propagation is effected by mutual reciprocal impregnation. Shell

none. Habit similar to that of the Limaces, or rather more to that of

sea slugs, as I-shall endeavour to proye hereafter.

Before entering upon a description of the various species, it will be

necessary to give a detailed statement of the most important and charac-

teristic anatomical and morphological points. I select for this purpose q

the type species of the genus ; any differences in the other species from ~

this type can be afterwards much easier recorded, without giving a ~

repetition of those details. In conclusion I shall allude to the genera

Onchideila and Peronia, which have been considered as distinct from

Onchidium. 7 )

The upper part of the body of all the Onchidia is, as stated above, ;

always entirely covered by a more or less coriaceous mantle, the epi-

dermis of which chiefly consists of a chitinous or horny substance, and

1869.j On the genus Onchidium. 89

can be removed from it without producing a change in the colour of the

animal, The surface of the mantle is generally finely granulated, but in

all our species some larger tubercles are besides found, more or less

numerous, and irregularly distributed on it. These larger tubercles

can be protruded or retracted at will. When the animal is in a healthy

state, they are generally very distinct, each of them bearing one

_ to four jet black dots, the functions of which in the economy of the

animal it is difficult to understand, but most likely the pigment which

they contain, when added to the mucus secreted by the entire body,

acts as a kind of defensive fluid against other animals. The mantle is

amply supplied with nerves issuing from the central ganglion, but to

the touch, the tubercles do not appear to be much more or less sensitive

than the rest of the body ; they are always retracted when they come in

contact with a solid object, but soon protruded again. Sickly animals

not only change colour, but the body often shrinks to less than

half the original size, and all the tubercles of the surface are smoothed

down, and assimilated to the mass of the mantle. The mesial portions

of the mantle are usually thin, but the sides are very consistent and

_ fleshy, the muscular tissue being solid, very tough in some of the species

(0. tigrinum), soft, almost pulpy, in others, (O. tenerum). The inter-

if nal fleshy part of the mantle is pure white, but the external parts, to

F a smaller or greater thickness, blackened, and filled with pigment cells,

FE producing the various colours of the animal. Near the edge of the

mantle, there are usually some larger cavities in the tissue, as shewn

in the section of the portion of the mantle (fig. 3, plate xiv), evidently

_ allowing for an easier motion of these extreme edges.

_ The foot is composed of numerous transverse muscles and is always

= and narrower than the mantle ; this varies, however, in the

| Waifforent species. In some the foot is aly one-third, or one-fourth, of

the width of the mantle, in others almost four-fifths of the same, setting

aside, however, those variations which merely depend upon the position

| of the body. When the animal is at rest,—in a sort of contracted

position,—the width of the foot is in proportion smaller, than when the

‘animal moves about, in which case the mantle stretches out longitu-

dinally, while the narrowness of the foot appears to be more limited by

the transverse muscles.

No generic importance can, strictly speaking, be attached either to

90 On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

the number and size of the pustules on the mantle, nor to the relative

narrowness, or width, of the foot. This is a very important statement

as regards the classification of the animals, and I shall endeavour to

prove its correctness by some observations which I shall subsequently

put upon record.

The head is posteriorly on either side connected with the foot by

a thin membrane.

Anatomy of Onchidiwm typhe.

The respective places which the digestive and generative organs

occupy divide, so to say, the entire cavity of the body into two parts.

Figure 2 on plate xiv represents a specimen, opened along the entire

length of the centre of the mantle, the portions of which are removed

a little on the sides. The albuminous string of the penis is also a

little lifted up, and placed from the right to the left side, so as to allow

the ganglion and the penis to become visible. All the other internal —

organs are in their original position; the head with the cesophagus (oe),

salivary glands, (sg) ; alimentary canal (ac), &c. The signification of

the principal other letters is as follows; pe. = pedicle ; p= penis with

the vas deferens twisted round it ; and (ps) the supplementary albumin- ;

ous string ; 2g = principal nervous ganglion ; the digestive organs with —

the liver (1) and the anterior portion of the stomach (st), rectum (r),

&e., are visible ; the generative organs with the ovarium (0), testis (t), —

large albuminous gland (ag), receptaculum seminis (1s), &.; ht = —

heart; = lungs; g and v= the hermaphrodite genital opening, a =

anus; of = pulmonary orifice. The digestive organs, thus roughly —

estimated, occupy the greater portion of the front part, and the {

generative organs that of the hinder part of the body. |

Tn order to understand more clearly the anatomical details, I must

direct the attention to figure 5 of plate xiv. This figure represents a

very large specimen of Onchidiwm typhe ; the foot has been along its”

anterior and posterior, and the entire left basal margin detached from .

the body and folded over to the left side, then the mantle has been

eut in two halves and the left half (d) also removed laterally, so as”

to join the other half only at the pulmonary orifice. The digestive’

organs have been exposed in the figure on the right and the generative

organs on the left side.

.1869.] On the genus Onchidium. 0]

Digestive organs and their appendages.

The food first enters through the mouth which, as already stated,

is surrounded by thickened, soft and grooved lips, with the cesophagus

(oe), a large muscular sack of an oval shape, closed posteriorly.

This sack encloses two cartilaginous plates, which are situated in a

strongly muscular mass, attached to the posterior and inferior sides of

the cesophagus. Sometimes, as in this particular species, these plates

resemble a bivalve shell, being convex externally and concave inter-

nally; they are white, connected by a membrane below and open

above. Their microspcopical structure distinctly shews the formation

of a cartilaginous tissue, many of the cells being of irregular shape,

others granular and hardened. Hxternally they are covered by the

_ tongue membrane, or radula, which is provided in its entire extent

with very numerous teeth.

This radula is thus very differently formed from the narrow and lone

lingual ribbon of the Prosobranchia. Fig. 4 on plate xiv, represents

the relative position of these organs. The cartilaginous plates (cp) ac-

tually only give support to the radula (ra), which is by the muscular

action of the former pushed out of the mouth, scraping the organic

substance in the usual way from below upwards; the food then

passes in the cavity behind the plates where the salivary glands

(sz) enter, At the beginniag of the alimentary canal, ‘immediately

“behind the catilaginous plates, there is a small fleshy tubercle (to)

which appears to act as a tongue, pressing the food down the canal every

time that the esophagus contracts. Hach of the salivary glands (sg)

is represented by a small, whitish, dendritic organ, connected with

~ each other by a thin string, and by numerous threads with the

| hepatic mass, enveloping the anterior part of the intestines. The

wards, then passes through the hole of the principal central ganglion

Ying (ng) to the stomach.’ This consists of two, almost quite se-

pe rate divisions. The first portion (pst) has the form of a double cone, |

pointed on either end and widened in the middle ; it is soft and com-

‘Bh

posed of numerous folds or partitions. On this anterior portion follows a

| being in the middle surrounded and partially divided by a very strong

a . .

| muscular tissue (mst). The extreme end (m) is capped by a separate

92 On the genus Onchidiwm. [No. 2

portion of the liver (1). The intestines (i) issue somewhere at the

muscular bridge which connects the two portions of the stomach,

being from here in their entire length enveloped in the liver

which is readily recognised by the greenish colour of the hepatic cells.

The length of the intestines is from 4—5 inches, the rectum (r) being

much wider, and passing almost in a straight direction to the anus.

Near its termination it is accompanied by two whitish, dendritic organs,

(gp and pa), each of which at their posterior ends is connected with a

small yellowish brown gland. The latter may represent the kidneys,

and the former are probably only albuminous glands, or they may be

an equivalent organ of some of the pyloric appendages or the ceeca.

The anus is situated at the end of the upper base of the foot, it is sur-

rounded by ring muscles, but externally very slightly thickened.

Onchidium typhe, and probably most of the other species live, on

decaying wood and earth, impregnated with organic matter. I have

never seen them feeding on fresh grasses. With the solid excrements —

always a large portion of watery liquid is given out.

Generative organs.

All the species of Onchidia which I have examined are hermaphro- |

dites, not as Buchannan stated in the case of O. typhe, supposing the ~

sexes to be distinct. The generative organ occupies the posterior half

of the internal cavity of the body (see fig. 2, pl. xiv), sometimes even

a little more. The hermaphrodite genital pore (g and v in fig. 5) lies

very close to the right of the anus; in this pore a very strong,

almost cartilaginous tube, the oviduct, (or here the uterus, ov) termi-

nates, and a short distance upwards gives off a short branch, ending in a

flattened large vesicle, which usually is interpreted as the receptaculum

semis (vs). The contents of this organ in numerous specimens

which I examined was a dark yellowish brown, rather watery sub-

stance, containing some solid bodies, resembling the spicule of Spongie

or those peculiar arrows connected with the copulation of Helices. The

uterus which is only a continuation of the oviduct is, as stated above |

a thick, white, doubly twisted string, near the middle it is partially

enveloped in a mucus secreting, foliated, pale orange gland (as in

fig. 2, pl. xiv.)* The contents of this gland is a simple granular

* In figure 5 this gland lies to the right of the testis (t) and to the loft of

the receptaculum seminis (1s). ,

‘ oe 4

9 a val

, y i -

= 4 eo -

2s oe . , ae Oe

4 NS 2 lee Aes

1869.] On the genus Ondhidium. 93

es ---”

substance. It is not clear to what purpose it exists, but probably it is

in some way connected with the ovarium or the testis.

The ovarium (as, in fig. 5, or in fig.2)is of a deep yellowish colour and

contains eggs only ; these being of an oval form and of various sizes,

according to their stages of development ; the whole is attached to the

uterus by a short string.—It is generally stated that in the Putmonata,

the hermaphrodite gland secretes ova and spermatozoa, but in this case I

' am certain that they are secreted in two different glands, the ovarium

’ containing, as I stated, merely eggs. The testis (t) is a distinct

- foliated, or more or less dendritic, purely white gland, which is readily

_ distinguished by its viscous, jelly-like substance. Under the microscope,

the contents of the gland had a granular appearance, mingled with a few

| fat cells,and numerous long thread-like bodies,—spermatozoa. From the

testis a very thin hollow string issues, accompanying the oviduct in its

entire length and terminating by a special minute pore (g) in the

“4 same cavity as the oviduct. This string is evidently the beginning

' of the vas deferens, which continues externally in a grove between

_ the foot and the mantle.

_ The largest portion of the generative organs are occupied by the

~ albuminous gland (ag) which is of a soft purplish colour, consisting

of very numerous folicles attached to short pyolongations of the

uterus. The albuminous substance has a finely granular appearance

under the microscope and is very viscous, adhering to everything that

_ Comes in contact with it. It absorbs water to a large proportion

swelling up readily in it.

| _ The male copulative organ is at the front end of the body, situated

more or less closely to and under the right eye-pedicle. The semen

issues, as stated above, first from the genital pore (g), is then con-

_ ducted in an open canal along the right side between the foot and the

94 On the genus Onchidium. [ No. 2,

specimens the vas deferens was in the terminal half of its length filled

with a similar colouring fluid which I have noticed in the receptaculum

semines ; thus it is not likely that this substance is secreted in the

latter organ, but more likely is formed in the internal portion of the

vas deferens. Close to the opening of the male genital pore, terminates

the supplementary albuminous string (ps), varying from 9 to 10

inches in length. It is much thicker than the vas deferens and the

contents is a purely white granular, moderately viscous substance.

In some other species, this albuminous string is still longer and more

developed.

I have only once (on the 22nd September,) observed two speci-

mens of Onchidiwm typhe in copulation, they were seated one behind

the other, the penis enclosed in the vagina for about the length of one

inch. Reciprocal impregnation at the same time, as known in Limaces,

does apparently not take place. Buchannan’s statement on this point

is not clear; the error as to his believing the sexes to be divided in

two animals is thus readily explained, and would have then been easily

corrected, had he examined the internal organisation. But although

he states that ‘‘ during copulation the distinction of sexes is very

evident, the penis protruding to a great length,’’ it would appear from

his previous statement to the effect that ‘in both, the anus and sexual ~

organs are placed in a perforation in the under part of the tail” as

if he had observed that the copulative organ were also situated

posteriorly. This is undoubtedly an error, and can only be explained

by the fact that the anterior and posterior end were mistaken one for

the other, they being actually undistinguishable in a dorsal view

when the animal is resting quietly, and has the pedicles and the head re-

tracted, which position it actually assumes during copulation. I men-

tion this point in particular, because it appears to have been accepted

by several authors in its integrity, as recorded by Buchannan, though |

its correctness was rightly questioned by others. Undue importance

has been attached to it, so as to support the presumed generic distine-

tions of Onchidium, Onehidella and Peronia.

The Onchidia in general are to all appearance oviparous, laying

their eggs in damp places, either under stones or in holes near the

surface of the ground, where I found in large numbers very young

1869.] On the genus Onchidium. 95°

animals. Direct observations as to the development of the embryos,

_ etc. remain, however, as yet a desideratum.

;

Organs of respiration and circulation. (See fig. 5, pl. xiv).

All the Onchidia are pulmoniferous, the respiratory cavity occupy-

ing about one-fourth of the posterior length of the body. This cavity

is situated dorsally immediately under the mantle, its internal walls

being folded and fitted out with a soft whitish largely cellular and

cavernous epithelium, the lungs; it is anteriorly closed on the left

and open on the right side, and the former half is somewhat smaller

than the latter, The respiratory opening is a round hole, situated

on the lower side at, or near, the end of the mantle; it is surrounded

_by strong concentric muscles and has occasionally a swollen margin,

~ which can be expanded or contracted at will, sometimes also forming a

_retractile tube.

_ The cardial cavity lies on the right side about two-fifths dis-

_ tant from the posterior end, and in front of the respective larger half

B; point, —save that they have lungs,—the Oncurpipm perfectly agree

with the Nupiprancutata of the OprstHoprancuta, with which they

heart issues in front only one thick artery, being at the beginning

‘attached to the wall of the mantle by numerous very thin muscles.

latter branch again divides before entering that system, one portion

being reserved for the digestive organs, and the other supplying the

| head; this portion of the artery, accompanying the alimentary canal,

“passes through the large ganglion. From all the internal organs,

‘Bumerous very thin threads issue, connecting them with the mantle

ar d the foot ; some of these threads are no doubt blood-vessels, and others

of a muscular and nervous character. The venous blood appears to be

| conducted to the lungs by an open capillary system, at least I did not

observe special vessels for that purpose. A very large number of capil-

| lary tubes, connects the upper frontal portion of the pulmonary cavity

“30 On the genus Onchidium. [ No. 2,

with the intestinal and the generative organs. The arterial blood

is white, and the corpuscles very minute and of an oval shape.

Nervous system and organs of sensation. (See fig. 5, pl. xiv.)

The principal ganglion which is a thick white ring, lies immediately

behind the head; a portion of the aorta and the alimentary canal

passing through it. This ganglion gives up numerous branches

laterally to the base of the eye-pedicles, the tentacular rims and buccal

appendages. One thick branch, subsequently dividing, issues below

and supplies the head, some of its small nervous threads uniting into

a small ganglion between the oral appendages. Another very thick

branch also issues from the central ganglion below, and is directed

backwards, accompanying the alimentary canal. It divides at the —

digestive organs in two branches, one supplying these and the other

the generative organs. Besides these, there issue from the central

ganglion five long threads on each side, two giving the requisite

number of nerves to the foot and four (or 8 altogether) to the mantle,

They appear, however, to be connected with the other nervous

branches of the intestines by numerous very fine threads.

From the generic characteristic which I have previously given,

it will be seen that I have made the distinction between eye-

pedicles and tentacles. This verbal distinction is, I believe, in

most of the Gastropods, an essential one and it is, for instance,

not correct to speak in the Hexic of four tentacles, for they do not

all serve the same purposes. Strictly speaking, there is only one pair

of each, two. tentacles and two pedicles. The presence of only one

pair of tentacles,—actually the eye-pedicles,—has been pronounced as

a peculiarity of the Onchzdia and was used as an important distine-

tion from the genus Vaginulus. The Onchidia possess, however.

beside the pair of prolonged pedicles, a pair of true tentacles, whic h

appear as thickened rims on the upper surface of the buccal append-

ages. Thus the distinction from Vaginulus, which has the tenta-

cles free and bilobed, is in this point only a gradual one of develop-

ment. F

When the mantle of an Onchidiuwm is dorsally cut open, and the

internal organs exposed, the dark pedicles are seen to be attached

laterally to the mantle, reaching with their bases beyond the head

1869.) On the genus Onchidium. Q7

(see pe in fig. 5, pl. xiv; and the figure between 1 and 1 a). The base

of each is flattened, white, cartilaginous, intimately connected with the

muscular tissue of the mantle in this place; above the base numerous

nerves enter to it, and the trunk of the pedicle becomes hollow,

more cylindrical and soft. The small, black eye is situated eccentri-

cally near the tip, which is pointed, angularly bent and attached by

a strong muscle to the internal side of the outer skin (g, in fig. 5)

of each pedicle. The muscle then bends backward, and joins the trunk

of the pedicle about one-third or one-fourth of the length distant from

the tip. The external cover of the pedicle, is formed by the soft skin,

in the fold between the head and the mantle.

This organisation of the pedicles fully agrees with that of the

Heticiy# in general, and makes it perfectly clear that the idea

as to the non-retractibility of the pedicles in Onehidiwm cannot

be retained. In all the species of Onchidiwm, of which I have

observed live animals, I found the pedicles to be almost entirely

retractile, but it is not usual that an animal, unless strongly

irritated, does retract them fully, because the mantle which covers

the head gives, as a rule, sufficient protection to them. Whenever

Specimens are, however, put in spirit, it is a common case that the

_ strongly muscular mantle and the disc of the foot shrink more ra-

pidly than the soft skin between them, and the head with its pedicles,

and tentacles and buccal appendages is consequently easily pressed

out. Thus the examination of specimens in spirit, evidently seems

to have given ground to the idea, that the pedicles in Onchidium

are not retractile. This observation appears to have been sup-

| ported by the existence of two indentations, which are formed in

| the edge of the mantle above the pedicles, when the animal moves

about. Occasionally these indentations, or grooves, are traceable

| forsome time even after the death of the animal, but they are

| by no means permanent, and constantly change in live specimens.

Whenever the animal retracts its head, and covers it from above with

the mantle, and from below with the front edge of the foot, the in-

dentations perfectly disappear in each such case.

The true tentacles are, as already noticed, in their entire length

| grown to the upper surface of the buccal appendages, and generally

‘jare with their external terminations connected with the extreme

§8 On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

outer edges of these. Both the tentacles and the front edges of the

appendages are, as a rule, of a yellowish green colour and somewhat

thickened ; the former more so, being provided with numerous nerves,

which issue directly from the anterior edge of the central ganglion,

lying at the base of the head, and are a portion of those nerves which

supply the lips. During the motion of the animal the tentacles

are always moved in front of the edges of the buccal appendages, and

when each of them are successively touched with a solid object, it will

be observed, that the animal much easier responds to the former than

to the latter; the first being the more sensitive organ,

Habits. .

Dr. Buchannan says that he found Onchidium typhe always on

Typha elephantina. This plant is at present not nearly so common

as the allied species, Typha angustifolia. However, that is no proof —

that both the species were formerly not more common than they are at

present. No doubt, seventy years ago, swampy grounds, over- J

grown with vegetation, were more extensive about Calcutta, than they

are now when our worthy municipality takes such good care to clear —

everything away! In places, however, (along the Hastern Bengal ~

and the South Eastern and Calcutta railway lines, and in Alipore) ~

where both species of Typha grow abundantly I have not been suc-—

cessful in procuring any Onchidia onthe plants themselves. Asa rule,

these animals live, like Limaces, in damp places, generally close ~

to. tanks or ditches, especially those which are supplied during high

tide with brackish water. They also seem to be common on the

sea-shore, preferring the damp insular climate to that of large con-

tinents. Sometimes they are found in places which come under the —

influence of high tides. They either crawl about on the high ground

between the vegetation, or on old wood and stones, ete. During the ~

rainy season, they are naturally most numerous. When kept in a

vessel with water, they often go voluntarily into it and remain for |

of breathing. In this point they fully agree with the species of

Scarabus, and other estuary shells. Onchidiwm tigrinum sometimes —

1869.] On the genus Onchidium. 99

does, however, not stand a long immersion in tank water, and in brack-

ish water it dies much sooner. Onchidiwm tenerum burrows in soft

mud, and appears on the surface only in warm weather after the rain.

Lesson says of Ochidium ferruginewm, that it isa truly marine spe-

cies, living as a rule, several feet below the surface of the water.

Relations and probable identity of Onchidium with Onchidella and

Peronia.

I have given the anatomy of the type species, Onchidium typhe,

in detail, because it must form the basis of further comparison with

other species, which have been believed to belong to distinct generic

types. Cuvier, in his admirable ‘‘ Memoires, p. serv. Vhistoire et

Panatomie des Mollusques,’ 1817, gave a very good account* of the

anatomy of Onchidiwm Peroni from Mauritius, and drew attention

to the existence of a small British species, Onch. celticum. Lesson,

described several species in the ‘‘ Voyage de la Coquille ;”” O. granulo-

sum, marmoratum, ater et ferrugineum. A very good general figure and

correct drawings of the different external organs are given by Savigny

of the so-called Peronia verruculata, from the red sea, in the French

Scientific Expedition to Egypt, (Moll. Pl. IIT). Quoy and Gaimard,

in the “ Voyage de l’Astrolabe” (Moll. Pl. XV) figure five species,

but in none of them the position of the genital pores has been noticed.

No details of the anatomy are given. Gray refers the largely tuber-

culated species, like O. punctatum and Tongensis to Peronia, the

granular ones, like O. patelloide and incisum to Onchidella. Several

| other species of the same group of Molluscs were described by other

authors from Mauritius, the Phillipines, etc. Keferstein lately (Zeit-

éehrift fiir wiss. Zoologie, Bd. XV, 1864, p. 76-85) published some

| notes on Janella, Aneitea, and allied forms, but unfortunately I have

| not as yet been able to procure this paper. However, as far as the

| forms which interest us here specially are concerned there is sufficient

| for our purpose extracted in Bronn’s “ Klassen and Ordnungen des

Thierreiches,” Vol. III. On plate 105 a good side view is given

of Peronia verruculata, shewing the correct position of the pulmonary,

_* The figures are reversely drawn, for instance in figures 2 and 5 tho

| external vas deferens appears on the left side, and equally so the heart in

figure 5, which represents an upper view.

100 . On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

anal and genital openings. Figure 2 on the same plate represents

the genital organs, but does not seem to be very correct; in any

case it is not sufficiently clear.

The reason,—that forms which appeared to such exact observers, as

Cuvier, Lesson, Quoy and Gaimard, in all external characters to be

generically identical with Buchannan’s Onchidiwm, but which were by

others separated as distinct genera,—evidently lies in the insufficient,

and partially incorrect account which the last named author gave of

his newly proposed genus, though very probably the desire of man, to

discover new forms, had also something to do with it. The consequence,

in short, was that the name Onchidiwm was reserved for the type species

Onchidiwm typhe, and other forms which were better known, than this,

were separated into distinct genera. Now, when all the anatomical

details of the type species are before us, we shall be able to draw a —

more accurate comparison between the same and other species.

Cuvier, as I have already stated, gave an excellent account of the —

anatomy of a Mauritian species which he called O. Peronii. Blainville

in the 32nd vol. of the Dict. de scienc. nat. p. 280, proposed for this

species the name Peronia Mauritiana,* as the type of a new genus.

When we compare externally the position of the anus, the hermaphro- —

dite and male genital pores, and the pulmonary orifice, then the form of

the head and the eye-pedicles &c., of Cuvier’s original drawings, with

those given of Onchidium typhe, it will be readily seen that no

essential distinction between them can be recorded. Even the granu-—

lation of the mantle is not much stronger, but it is said that the

tubercles form (probably during hfe) short tufts. Referring to the

other anatomical drawings, it must be admitted that they shew a

perfect identity with those of Onchidium typhe, if we set aside some _

minute details which are not perfectly clear in Cuvier’s figure, and which a

only difference being again the presence of tufts in place of simple”

* The rule, that specific names, unless pre-occupied, must not be changed

ought always to be observed. |

1869.] On the genus Onchidium. 101

granules. I had myself no opportunity of examining any of the

forms called Peronia, but from the numerous variations in the external

appearance of the tubercles, which I have observed in our species (as

for instance in O. tenerwm) I cannot perceive how this character

could be considered as of any generic value. Besides that, the authors

who acknowledge, upon this ground, the generic distinction of Peronia,

are far from consistent in dealing with the question, for they refer

to Onchidella species which are either smooth or granular, some of them

being very coarsely granular, and even spinousabove. Surely, the dis-

tinction between a smooth and granular or tubercular surface is greater

than that between the latter and one in which the tubercles bear two or

three points in place of only one. The presence of two or three

black dots on some of the large tubercles of Onchidiwm typhe appears

to me to be fully equivalent to some of the tufts observed in Onchidiwm

Peronu, and very likely in very old specimens these black dots may

become pediculated, for I have myself observed them each raised in-

dependently from the other. I must here specially call attention to

some of the variations in the mantle surface of Onch. tenerwm,

described towards the end of this paper.

Gray proposed for Lesson’s species, Onch. granuloswm, the name

Onchidella, and referred to this presumed genus all the granular or

smooth species, except Onchidiwm typhe. In what the distinction of

Onchidium and Onchidella ought to consist, I entirely fail to perceive.

H. and A. Adams in their “Genera of Shells,” II. p. 232, state that

the latter differs from the former in having the buccal appendages

lobate, but then they say exactly the same of Onchidiwm. I am not

| quite certain about the meaning of the word lobate with regard to the

buccal appendages, but I think it can only refer to the thickened rims,

which I explained as the tentacles and which, with reference to the

front edges of the appendages, may be called lobes. Wherefrom H.

and A, Adams derived the statement regarding the position of the

pulmonary orifice “at the right side under the mantle,” does not

‘appear evident.

Lesson’s figures of the ventral views of Onch. granulosum and

marmoratum do not in the least support any generic distinction

among the species described as Onchidium. In the former the

anal and the respiratory orifices are marked in their proper

102 On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

places, and the correct position of the sexual opening is indicated

by the first portion of the external vas deferens. In the view of O.

marmoratum, the vas deferens begins at the place where the pul-

monary orifice is situated, which is no doubt a small error. None

of the other figured species which have been referred to Onchidella,

appear to me to add anything in support of a generic distinction, and

thus I think that a very strong reason exists to withdraw both the

generic names, Peronia and Onchidella, and refer the respective species

to Onchidiwm.

The only other closely allied genus which belongs to the family

OncurpupH is Vaginulus (Veronicella apud H, and A, Adams). Mr,

W. Theobald, Junr., described one species from Burma, V. Birmanicus,

and my friend, Mr. G. Nevill, lately obtained near Calcutta two

specimens which appear to belong to the same species. I hope to

return to this subject as soon asI am able to procure better live

specimens of our own and the Burmese forms.

Description of Bengal species.

1. Onchidium typhe, Buch., 1800. Pl. xiv, Figs. 1—5.

Body during the motion of the animal much elongated and

narrow, rather convex, anteriorly and posteriorly obtusely round-

ed; mantle above greenish, of various shades, covered with very

numerous smaller and larger tubercles, which are nearly equally

distributed over the whole upper surface. The smaller tubercles vary

a little in their size, but the larger ones have pretty nearly the same

dimensions, those about the centre of the back being slightly higher

than others. These tubercles are at their bases and at the sides some-

what darker than the body, the top being, however, usually paler and

provided with from 1—4 jet-black dots. None of the tubercles are

permanent, they can be, in the live animal, always retracted in the skin —

which is rather tough.

The head is of considerable size, dark greyish, in front covered with |

numerous, rather large whitish warts; the buccal appendages are

blackish, with their front edges and he tentacles yellowish green; a

the pedicles are thick, concentrically roughly wrinkled, slightly bluish, — a |

transparent at their base, greenish for the greater part of their length,

pale near the tips, where the small black eyes are situated. The

1869.] On the genus Onchidium. 103

mantle is below blackish, with a grey or brown tint, pale at the

margins; the foot is greenish yellow, the dark colour of the digestive

and the pale reddish colour of the generative organs shining through

the skin. The width of the foot, which is little shorter than the

mantle, amounts to about ths of the width of the latter, but when

the animal creeps about, it may be estimated at 4th of that width ; it is

truncate in front and rounded posteriorly. The anus lies at the upper

basal end of the foot, the opening being small and not distinct, cover-

ed by the terminal free edge of the foot. The pulmonary orifice is

situated immediately beyond the anus, its internal margin is smooth.

The hermaphrodite genital pore is a longitudinal slit, surrounded by

swollen lips, situated about 4th of an inch distant to the right of the

anus. The external vas deferens, in the fold between the foot and the

mantle, is marked as a white groove, and terminates in a minute pore

below the right buccal appendage. The male genital pore lies in front,

below the right pedicle. The dentition has been described previously (see

p. 91, pl. xiv, fig. 6a).

The length of large specimens is about 22 inches, and the width

varies from one-third to one-fourth of it, when the animal moves about

in its ordinary way. The usual length of pedicles is about half an inch,

Old specimens, when fresh caught, very often secrete from the smooth

lower portion of the mantle, a deep carmine red, gelatinous substance,

of a distinct alkaline character. The substance coagulates in spirit,

_ but is partially dissolved by, or is at least made thinner in, glycerine.

I have already mentioned, that this species is the commonest, and

_as yet the only one which was found near Calcutta. It is seen crawling

_ about on old bricks, in ditches on the maidan, about the fort, along the

-Tollis-nullah (canal), and locally also on the banks of the Hooghly.

2.—Onchidium pallidum, Stol., Pl. xv, Fig. 1.

| Body elongated, moderately elevated, rounded anteriorly and pos-

| teriorly, generally covered with copious mucus. The mantle above

| is pale yellowish white, with a central, blackish, longitudinal stripe,

| commencing above the head, and extending posteriorly to about jth of

| the length of the body. It is accompanied on either side by a pale

yellowish or greyish stripe, and the interspaces between these and the

‘| central stripe, are somewhat darker than the general colour of the

104 On the genus Onchidium. | [Noor Zt

body. The entire surface is almost equally granular, with a small

number of more or less regularly distributed larger tubercles, each

provided with one, seldom two black dots. The larger tubercles were

in one specimen arranged in two longitudinal rows on either side of

the dorsal stripe, but in other specimens, they were irregularly placed.

The black central stripe is widest in the middle, with a pale spot in

the centre in which are situated three black dots; these being only

observable in large specimens. The edges of the mantle are slightly

thickened ; its colour below being of the same, uniform, pale yellowish

white hue, as above. The foot is obtusely pointed posteriorly and

truncate in front; it is greyish yellow, varying in tints according

to its expansion and consequent transparency ; the colour of the internal

organs is traceable through it.

The head and eye-pedicles are dark, with a distinct greenish tinge ;

the mantle and the buccal appendages paler; the front edges of the

latter and the tentacles pale yellowish green. The length of the

pedicles is generally less than half an inch, and they are somewhat

thinner than in the previous species; the eyes are black.

The anus lies at the end of the foot ; the pulmonary orifice just

behind it, being rather small and surrounded by thickened margins.

The hermaphrodite genital pore lies to the right, quite close to the

anus; the external vas deferens enters the body on the side below

the right buccal appendage, and the penis opening is situated in front, —

below the right pedicle. Young specimens are paler in colour than

old ones, and the dorsal stripe becomes occasionally rather indistinct. —

The disposition of the internal’ organs entirely agrees with the —

type species, Onchidiwm typhe. The internal vas deferens is fully —

four inches long; the supplementary albuminous string, near the —

penis, is about 5 inches long, much shorter than in the previous —

species, but thicker in front; the liver at the end of the stomach :

is a large, dendritic gland; the receptaculum seminis is very large

and folded; uterus thick and twisted, and like the small albu-

minous gland and the testis pure white; the large albuminous gland

is purple or rose-coloured, the folicles being filled with a granular

substance, which has the appearance of undeveloped eggs. The ova-

rium is deep yellow, containing large oval eggs. The cardial cavity

extends to nearly half the length of the body, but the heart itself

1869.] On the genus Onchidium. 105

is only about 3th of the length, distant from the posterior end. The

penis is about ,§th of an inch long, thick and strongly constricted

near the end, the flagellum being very short.

The dentition (fig. 1d) is similar to that of the last species, the

lateral teeth are rounded at the base with one large and one small in-

-eurved denticle. I counted about 150 cross series and about 500

teeth in each the formula thus being 250-1-250.

The finely granular mantle with few scattered larger tubercles readily

distinguish this species from the previous, and the large quantity of

mucus which it secretes, has not been observed in any of the other

forms. The narrower form and greater convexity of the body are

i equally characteristic distinctions between the present species and

O. tigrinum, n sp.

_ The species was found at Port Canning, and appears to be rare.

i first obtained two large specimens through my friend G. Nevill.

Both had in front on the right side a small portion of the edge of the

_ foot detached (see fig. la), just on the place where the external vas de-

_ ferens turns towards the buccal appendages. This detached portion had

_ exactly the same structure as the rest of the foot disc, but whether it is

| copulation, I am not in a position to ascertain at the present. In

several small specimens which I subsequently obtained myself on the

| banks of the Mutlah river, that particular detached piece was entirely

i wanting.

3.—Onchidium tigrinum, Stol., Pl. xv, Fig. 2.

7 Body large, ovate, depressed ; mantle strongly coriaceous, hardened,

provided with sharp edges. The upper surface is entirely covered with

small granules, between which more or less numerous large elongated

tubercles are interspersed. Specimens of different sizes vary in this

"point a great deal; when young the tubercles are equally distributed

between the granules, being three or four times as large, and each

Dearing a black dot at the tip, but being pale at the base. Old speci-

| mens have either two or three irregular rows of large elongated tuber-

eles on each side of the back, or the larger tubercles are more numer-

- ons, more equally distributed and spinulose, so as to give the surface

| avery rough appearance. The latter stage is met with only in quite

106 On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

fresh and very large specimens; when they are kept for only a short

time, all the fine spines are retracted in the mantle.

The colour is above pale green with numerous blackish, irregular

spots, which are generally more numerous about the centre of the back

and at the edges of the mantle, than between both. Young specimens

are more uniformly coloured. In the old ones, the green colour is some-

times rather dark, so as to make the spots less conspicuous ; in others

there is a distinct blackish green irregular stripe along the centre of the

back, of about the same length as the foot ; two similar blackish stripes

originate one behind each of the pedicles, running a short distance from

it more or less parallel to the dorsal stripe, till all three join near the

posterior end. Both the central and the lateral stripes are not con-

tinuous, they are moreover formed by the spots becoming more or

less confluent. Young specimens have the mantle below uniform,

light bluish with very numerous and minute white dots; large ones

have occasionally a number of dark green or rusty, more or less con-

fluent spots along the lateral margins, andthe general colour is paler.

The foot is comparatively narrow, about one-third of the width of the

body and when contracted about one-fourth only ; it is of a uniform

dark bluish grey colour, sub-truncate anteriorly and rounded or

obtusely pointed posteriorly, with the edges free and sharpened all

round.

The head and the pedicles are dark green, the latter far apart,

thick at the base, very thin in the middle, with slightly thickened

tips which bear the black eyes at their upper surface. The bue-

cal appendages are of moderate size, blackish, with greenish grey

front edges, and the tentacular rims yellowish green. The male

genital pore is very distinct, situated in front at the base of the right.

pedicle; the anus and the pulmonary orifice are normal, the herma-

phrodite opening about gth of an inch distant to the right of t

anus, elongated, and surrounded with swollen ips; the external v 7

deferens enters the body below the right buccal appendage, but ve y

close to the lips of the mouth, passing obliquely through the tissue

towards the male genital pore. .

All the internal organs agree with the type species. The

ovarium is small, orange yellow; the testis, and its supplemen-

tary gland, white, the albuminous gland and the uterus p

1369.] On the genus Onchidium. — 107

yellowish white. The receptaculum seminis is a comparatively very

small globular capsule, the oviduct being, however, very strong, almost

horny; the portion of the liver covering the end of the stomach is

cup-shaped and small ; the intestines and the rest of the liver normal ;

the penis above an inch long, with a setous flagellum ; the internal vas

deferens is about 5 inches, and its supplementary albuminous string

about 8 inches long, almost equally thin throughout. The pulmonary

cavity is large with numerous cross-folds, the lungs yellowish. The

heart is small, white, the aorta at the beginning not much narrower,

the thicker branch going to the digestive organs.

The radula is particularly narrow in this species, but the teeth are

very similar to those of Onch. typhe, the laterals being only a little

larger.

This species is rather common along the banks of the Mutlah at Port

Canning, it is generally seen creeping about on old wood. It survives

a long immersion in brackish water, but shrinks and soon dies in sweet

_ water. I often found it in holes or at the roots of bushes on the bank

of the river during low water; when the water rose the specimens must

have been fully for 8 hours submerged. The largest specimen, measured,

was two inches long, and about the middle 1,2, of an inch broad.

The broad, depressed form of the body, the narrow foot, thin eye-

pedicles and the solid coriaceous structure of the mantle, readily

| distinguish this species from others.

4,—Onchidium tenerum, Sto/., Pl. xv, Fig. 3.

| The general form of the body is oval, more or less elongated, but

} very high, it is remarkably soft, almost pulpy in fresh caught speci-

“mens, always enveloped in a thin layer of secreted mucus. The

‘ground colour of the upper surface of the mantle is greenish grey,

irregularly mottled and spotted with dark. Two obtusely elevated,

‘somewhat undulating and pale coloured, ridges run from the edges

of the mantle above the eye-pedicles posteriorly near to the end, en-

d osing a central area of the back, in which a number of very large

/ oval tubercles are situated. These are of a greenish colour, covered

with smaller warts, their tips being yellowish, and each of them provid-

ed with from 1—3 black dots. Full grown specimens have besides a row

| of similar large tubercles running externally and parallel to the ridges

108 On the genus Onchidium. [No. 2,

which enclose the central dorsal area. The entire mantle is more or

less finely granular. All the tubercles are much less developed in young

specimens, and even in old ones their form constantly changes, on

account of the softness of the body, in which they can be entirely

retracted, making the mantle to appear uniformly convex. Young

and half grown specimens generally have on the external side of the

dorsal ridges, two or three of the blackish spots larger, separated by

oval pale orange spots which sometimes are partially confluent, form-

ing longitudinal stripes, the orange colour also partially extending

on the ridges themselves.

The mantle below is uniform pale greenish grey, with very minute

and numerous white dots, the same being also traceable on the sides

of the foot. The latter is blackish green, little shorter than the mantle, —

obtuse or slightly rounded in front, pointed at the posterior termi-

nation when free, but when the animal moves about on a flat surface,

it appears rounded. The width of the foot ison an average $th of ~

that of the body, occasionally somewhat less. The head is very large,

greenish, covered in front with numerous ashy warts: the buccal —

appendages laterally widely expanded, with the front edges slightly —

swollen, the tentacular rims above them being very thin, and of an ~

ashy grey colour. The eye-pedicles are stout at the base, when —

extended about half an inch long, slightly warty, concentrically wrin- —

kled, with the tips distinctly swollen, globular, pale yellowish or —

reddish, bearing the black eyes almost centrally situated in a lighter

transverse fold. The lips of the mouth are whitish, strongly thicken-

ed and folded. The anus is as uéually placed at the upper terminal —

base of the foot ; the pulmonary orifice is removed from it and close

to the posterior end of the mantle ; it is large, surrounded by a strong |

swollen margin, internally white, with 8—10 small tubercles, which

continue interiorly as short ridges. The hermaphrodite pore is also

somewhat removed from the anus, about half an inch distant from it .

to the right, but situated as in all other Onchidia in the fold between

the mantle and the foot. The external vas deferens is a distinct narrow

groove, entering the body at the outer base of the right oral append>_

age, although it seems to continue below the mouth, issuing internally

quite close to the penis opening. The penis pore itself is large,

placed laterally below the right eye-pedicle. ¢

1869.] On the genus Onchidiwm. 109

The internal organisation does not essentially differ from the type.

The cesophagus is comparatively small, the alimentary canal rather

long and thick; the liver extensive and deep greenish; stomach

very muscular and large. The internal vas deferens is very thin,

yellow, about three inches long, and twisted round the penis which

is about th of an inch long, very thick, but otherwise not offering

any distinctions. Its supplementary albuminous string is thick,

white, and at least 12 inches long, it almost occupies one-third of the

body cavity just behind the head. The hermaphrodite organ is not very

extensive, the large albuminous gland of a purplish colour; ovarium

deep, yellow ; testis white, small albuminous gland yellowish white ;

the vas deferens, issuing from the testis, is very thin, accompaning

the strong and thick oviduct; the receptaculum seminis is represented

by a small, oval, dark coloured gland, closely attached to the oviduct.

The nervous ganglion behind the cesophagus is particularly large,

sending numerous branches in all directions. The dentition is also

similar to the other species, the centrals have a very small point, and

‘the laterals form distinct hooks with an upright point at the end.

The softness of the body, its great height, the peculiarly formed

tubercles of the mantle, and the situation of .the pulmonary, herma-

_ phrodite and male genital openings, are the characteristic distinctions

of this species.

It has been found, at the end of the rainy season,—in September

and October,—on the banks of the Mutlah river at Port Canning,

but appears to be rare. Its habits are peculiar; it burrows in

mud, sometimes several inches deep, and appears on. the surface

_ merely after, or during, the rain of a warm day. This evidently

_ accounts for the softness of the body. A few specimens which I kept

ina glass instantly burrowed in the soft earth, lying in holes in an

_ oblique or perpendicular position with the posterior tip of the mantle,

where the pulmonary orifice is situated, exposed so as to permit free

4 access of air. They sometimes did not appear onthe surface for many

' days, except when covered up and then placed in the sun.

110 On the genus Onchidium. [N 0. 2,

Explanation of letters in Plates XIV and XV.

a.—cesophagus.

ac.—alimentary canal.

ps.—supplementary albuminous gland of the penis.

l.—liver.

7.— rectum.

t. (or ts) testis.

o. (or as in fig. 5) ovarium.

p-—penis.

pp.—penis opening.

sg.—salivary glands,

pe.—eye-pedicle.

tt.—tentacle, except in fig. la, of Pl. XIV, being = buccal

appendage.

i.—intestine.

pst.—first portion of the stomach.

st-—middle portion of the stomach.

mst.—muscular, middle part of the same.

m.—terminal part of the same.

ag.—albuminous gland of the generative organs.

as.—in fig. 2, albuminous gland of the testis.

ht.—heart.

rs.—receptaculum seminis.

gp. and pa.—supplementary glands (kidneys, &c.?) of the rectum.

g 0. or g v.—hermaphrodite genital opening.

a.—(in figs. 2 and 5) anus.

ol,—pulmonary orifice.

?.—lungs.

7m.—retractile muscle.

2.—Nerves.

ng.—chief ganglion.

dn.—nerve of the digestive organs.

bs.—base.

cp.—cartilaginous plates supporting the radula.

fo.—tongue.

ra,—radula.

Journal Asiat Soc - Bengal, Vol: XXXVI, Pt: I.

oe Se) bh

wnal Asiat: Soc: Bengal, Vol:XXX VIII Pt: I. PL: XV.

1. Onch.poliidum; 2.Onch. tigrimun, 3, Onch. tenerum.

| 1869. ] ) On the genus Onchidiwm. lif

go. (in fig. 1. c) middle genital pore.

f.—toot.

d.—dorsal part of the mantle.

vd.—vas deferens.

vdo.—opening by which the external vas deferens enters the body.

ba, in fig. 5.—buccal appendage.

tp.—external covering of the eye-pedicle.

ov.—oviduct.

Pl REVS

Fig. 1, 1 a, 1 b, 1 c, dorsal, ventral, side and front views of Onch.

typhe ; the figure between I and 1 a, represents the eye-pedicle, iso-

lated and enlarged. 5

: Fig. 2. A large specimen of Onch. typhe, cut open along the centre

of the back, the internal organs being exposed.

Fig. 3. A small portion of the edge of the mantle showing the

internal cavities.

Fig. 4. (sophagus, cut open, with the radula, salivary glands, We.

Fig. 5. Internal organisation of Onch. typhe.

Fig. 6, radula, 6 a, central and a few lateral teeth, 6 b, side view

of the central, and 6c side view of the lateral tooth; all greatly

enlarged.

PLO.

| Fig. 1, and 1a, dorsal, and ventral, views of O. pallidum ; 1 4,

radula, 1 d, central and lateral teeth, 1 e, side view of a lateral tooth ;.

Fig. 2,2 a,2 6, dorsal, side, and ventral, views of O. tegrinum ;

2c, radula; 2 d, central and lateral teeth; 2 e, side view of a central,

2 f, side view of a lateral tooth.

Fig. 8, 3 a, 3 b, 3 g, dorsal, ventral, side, and front, views of O.

tenerum ; 3c, radula, 8d, central and lateral teeth, 3 e, side view

of a central, 3 f, side and front views of a lateral tooth.

N. B.—The figures of the teeth are in all cases enlarged.

112 + - PNer2;

Notes on the Flora of Manbhiim ; by V. Batt, Ese., B. A., Geological

Survey of India. 3

[Read 4th Nov., 1868 ; received 5th Nov., 1868. ]

The district of Manbham which, until comparatively recent times,

formed a portion of those ¢err@ incognita, the jungle mehals, has not

been altogether neglected by naturalists. The fauna, first examined

by Col. (then Lieut.) Tickell, and more recently by Captain Beavan,

is now pretty well known.

The flora of the northern portion of the district in the vicinity of

the grand trunk road, received the attention of several distinguished

botanists, but in the southern portion plants never have before been

collected.

Dr. Hooker, in his introductory essay to the Flora Indica, after no-

ting the character of the flora of the humid Eastern ghats of Orissa,

which, owing to circumstances which he describes, are during both

monsoons, daily affected by moist sea breezes, states that the vegeta-

tion of the interior of the province (which includes the greater portion

of Manbhtim) is quite unknown, except from a few notices in Major

Kittoe’s journey to the Sumbulpur valley.

Dr. T. Anderson’s paper in the journal* is devoted to an account

of the flora of northern Manbhim, (in the vicinity of the trunk road), —

Behar and Parisnath hill, upon which latter, temperate forms, all of

Himalayan species, are found. His list contains most of the species

which I have met with in the lower portions of Manbhum; there

are, however, some important additions.

As it is often equally important in botanical examinations to trace

a resemblance as well! as a difference between the floras of adjoining

areas, I have ventured to give the following account of the portions

of the district which have been visited by me during my geological

Survey.

As on a previous occasion, I must again acknowledge the assistance

which I have ever readily received from Mr. Kurz, who has examined

all my collections, and who also paid me a short visit when I was

encamped near Beharinéth hill. Such assistance is invaluable im

Calcutta where, in order to consult the Herbarium and the Botanical

yi are i ors

| 1869. ] Notes on the Flora of Manbhim. 113

library, it is necessary to undergo so much trouble and expenditure

of time, as is involved in a trip to Seebpur.

The district of Manbhtim forms portions of three of Dr. Hooker’s

provinces, Behar, Bengal and Orissa, the larger portion being included

in Orissa. As I expect to have further opportunity of examining that

province throughout, I shall for the present confine myself toa

description of the more salient features of the flora; reserving the

detailed list of plants to some future time. The physical characters of

the district of Manbhim may be most clearly comprehended by divi-

ding it up into a series of six zones as follows:

1st. A zone in which metamorphic rocks alone prevail, and of

which the general altitude is probably about 4 to 500 feet, and which

is studded with small hills rising 8 to 400 feet higher.

2nd. The Damuda valley in which the two coal fields of Ranigunj

and Jherria are situated. This zone includes the hills of Pachete

and Beharinaéth, formed of the youngest sedimentary rocks and rising

to the heights, respectively, of 1,600 and 1,480 feet.

drd. A zone similar to the first, in which metamorphic rocks only

occur, and which is studded with many hills of which Susinia (1400’),

Rugonathpir and Sindurpér are the principal. It includes the

valleys of the Selye, Dulkissur and Cossye rivers.

4th. A zone upwards of two-thirds of which are in no respect

different from the preceding one, but of which the remaining portion,

the western, is occupied by the Bhaghmuri plateau, one of the most

important spurs running from the highlands of Chota-Nagpur. It is

formed of granitic gneiss which weathers into huge and magnificent

monoliths. The general level of the plateau is probably about 1,500

_ feet above the sea, that of the plain at the base being 720 feet.

_ 5th. Azone similar to No. 3, in which a few unimportant hills

~ occur. The rocks belong to two formations the metamorphic, or gneiss

- series, and the sub-metamorphic, or slate and quartzite series.

i. Gch. Finally Manbhim is separated from Dhalbhim and Singhbhim

on the south by a series of ranges of hills formed of the harder rocks

belonging to the sub-metamorphic series: quartzites, tough schists,

slates, and trap. Between these ranges which rise to various heights

from 1,000 to 3,000 feet, are deep valleys in which the vegetation,

2 —————E——e—EeEEeEeee

114 Notes on the Flora of Manbhii. [No. 2,

owing to the greater amount of moisture, is different from that of the

open plains.

At first sight, there is much in the general aspect presented by the

flora of Manbhim and the adjoining districts, which is most dis-

appointing ; instead of meeting with a realization of one’s ideal of a

tropical jungle, the effect produced by the vegetation is, in many

places, not strikingly different to what we have been accustomed to

in the British Isles.

Dr. Hooker first drew attention to the park-like aspect which pre-

vailes in the drier and clearer portions of these districts.

Bassia, the tamarind, the several species of Ficus, Butea and the

Sal, representing, without any great stretch of the imagination being

necessary, the Oaks, Pines, Sycamores, Maples and Poplars of

temperate climes.

It is only on the hills, and in the valleys of the sixth zone, that one

meets with anything like typical tropical jungle; even in these com-

paratively favourable localities there are no tree-ferns, nor palms, and

but few mosses, orchids or herbaceous ferns.

Contrasting the flora in detail with that of the British Isles, one —

is struck by the absence of plants belonging to such common orders .

as Rosacea, Crucifere, Geraniacee, Violacee and the rareness of ©

species belonging to Ranuneulacee, Umbellifere and Scrophularinee.

On the other hand, many of the pond-weeds, Chara, Nymphea, Poto-

mogeton, Alisma, &c., as well as grasses, Cyperus, ferns, Drosera,

Arums, Oxalis, Mistletoe, some of the smaller Labiate, and both her- |

barceous and arboreal forms of Leguminose, together with a Salix,

vividly recall their European congeners. Lichens might be added to

this list. It is interesting to observe that these are seldom to be

found, except on the northern or sheltered faces of the trees, and rocks |

upon which they grow.

Throughout the jungles both of the plains and hills, the deep glossy :

green of the Sal, Shorea robusta, Roxb., gives a marked character

to the foliage. Inthe early part of the year, the white floral leaves —

of Combretum Roxburyhii, and other species, produce a pleasing con-

trast in the sea of green which meets the eye in every direction. At

the commencement of the hot weather, the greater number of the ©

trees lose their leaves which, in some species, are immediately re- —

1869.) Notes on the Flora of Manbhiim. 115

placed, when lovely contrasts are produced by such varied hues as the

deep purple of the young leaves of Schlerchera trijuga, Willd., with an

infinitude of shades of red, white and green on the surrounding trees.

While the trees remain leafless, the aspect of the jungle is bleak

and wintry, this is intensified by the action of the jungle fires, which

scorch up all the herbage, so that there is often little shade to be

found, when most wanted from the hot sun of April.

The inflorescence, as a general rule, is of a dull and subdued charac-

ter. That of the Sal produces a peculiar hazy appearance over the

green foliage. The most brilliant flowers are those of Bombax Mala-

baricum, Butea frondosa and B. superba; perhaps the most beautiful

are the white and delicately-violet tinted blossoms of a species of

Bauhinia. In the flat portions of the district which constitute the

Ist, 2nd, 3rd, part of 4th and 5th zones, a four-fold division according

to the character of the vegetation may be made.

Friast. Original jungle land in which trees are of large size.

Szconp. Stunted jungle land from which timber is regularly cut,

and where the trees are never allowed to attain respectable dimensions.

Tuirp. Dry, gravelly and raviny or rocky ground incapable of sup-

porting a tree jungle.

Fourta. Land under cultivation, or which has at some former time

been under cultivation.

In the frst division the characteristic trees are the following :

‘Shorea robusta, Roxb.

Terminalia glabra, Roxb.

Buchanania latifolia, Roxb.

Semecarpus anacardium, L.

Grislea tomentosa, Roxb.

Croton oblongifolium, Roxb.

Phyllanthus emblica, L.

-Lagerstreemia parviflora, Roxb.

Symplocos racemosa ?

Conocarpus latifolia, Roxb.

Holarrhena antidysenterica, Wall.

Randia dumetorum, Lam.

R— longispina, DC.

Kugenia jambolana, Lam.

116

Notes on the Flora of Manbhim.

Gardenia latifolia Ait.

G— sp. (lucida ?)

Pavetta Indica, Linn.

P— parviflora, Roxb.

Wendlandia tinctoria, DC.

Cassia fistula, Linn.

Calosanthes Indica, Blume.

Stereospermum suaveolens, DC.

AXigle Marmelos, Corr.

Carissa Carandas, L.

Zizyphus cenoplia, Mill.

Combretum Roxburghu, DC.

Casearia tomentosa, Roxb.

Glochidron Sp.

Nauclea parvifolia, Roxb.

N— cordifolia, Roxb,

[No. 2,

Herbaceous plants are scarce in jungle of the above character, doubt-

less they are more abundant during the rains.

The large scandent creepers are more commonly met with on the

hills, but they also occur in the older jungles, the principal species

are Bauhinia Vahlii and Butea superba.

Parasites and epiphytes are represented by two species of Loranthus,

two of Viscum and a few orchids.

It is often to be observed that some one of the trees, mentioned in ~

the preceding list, occurs in such abundance throughout a limited

area, as almost to exclude all other species; some circumstances, which

it is impossible to detect, giving it pre-eminence in the struggle for

life.

The species so occurring are :

Shorea robusta, Roxb.

Terminalia glabra, W. and A.

Holarrhena antidysenterica, Wall.

Conocarpus latifolia, Roxb.

Eugenia Jambolana, Lam.

Casearia tomentosa, Roxb.

Modification of the character in the vegetation can, however, in

two instances at least be traced to its prime causes, viz. the vicinity

1869.) Notes on the Flora of Manbhiim. 117

either of hills or of rivers. The species which are most lrequently

found at the foot of the hills are :

Combretum Roxburghii, D’C.

Lebidieropsis orbiculata, Mill.

Nyctanthes arbor tristis, L.

Schleichera trijuga, Willd.

Flacourtia sapida, Roxb.

Terminalia chebula, Retz.

Antidesma bunias, Spreng.

A— diandrum, Tul.

Feronia elephantum, Corr.

: Ichnocarpus frutescens, R. Br.

Bauhinia variegata, Lin.

B— purpurea, Lin.

| Ventilago calyculata, Tul.

Rivea ornata, Choisy.

Hoya viridiflora, R. Br.

The species occurring on river banks are :

Terminalia arjuna, W. and A.

Kugenia sp.

Melanthesa rhamnoides, BI.

Salix tetrasperma, Roxb.

Hyptianthera stricta, W. and A.

Erycibe paniculata, Roxb.

Briedelia tomentosa.

Barringtonia acutangula, Gaertn.

Butea parviflora, Roxb.

Olax scandens, Roxb.

Cesalpinia digyna, Rotitl.

Millettia fruticosa ?

Zizyphus cenoplia, Mill.

Vitis sp.

The second division, the stunted jungle, can hardly be said to

‘possess any characteristic vegetation of its own, rather, it may be said

that in it the types of the three others meet. The vegetation of the

118 Notes on the Flora of Manbhiim. [ No. 2,

original jungle is encroached upon by that which accompanies cultiva-

tion, and the absence of large trees and shelter tends to produce the

dry raviny, ground, of the ¢hird division which can only support its —

own spare vegetation, consisting chiefly of—

Phoenix acaulis, Buch.

Calotropis gigantea, R. Br.

Vitex trifolia, L.

Barleria cristata, L.

Lepidagathis cristata, Willd,

with grasses and dwarfed bushes of Zizyphus, Sal and Diospyros.

In the fourth division the influence which clearing and cultivation

exercise upon the flora, is marked and irradicable, and though deserted

village lands often relapse into jungle, such jungle always contains —

trees which, never occurring in the primitive forests, proclaim, by

their presence, the antecedents of that particular spot.

The trees most commonly occurring in cleared or cultivated areas

are :

Bassia latifolia, Roxb.

Butea frondosa, Roxb.

Diospyros exsculpta, Ham. ?

Zizyphus jujuba, Lam.

Ficus Indica, L.

F— religiosa, L.

Alangium deca-petalum, Lan.

Trophis aspera, Retz.

Mimusops elengi, L.

Alstonia scholaris, R. Br.

Terminalia bellerica, Roxb.

Bombax Malabaricum, DC.

Spondias mangifera, Pers.

Odina wodier, Roxb.

Other trees occur, but more sparingly, and they may possibly have

been introduced.

Of herbaceous plants, a long list might be quoted, the ae

alone furnishing a large number. The most common forms met with

in the hedge rows and groves are: |

1869.] — Notes on the Flora of Manbhim. 119

Clerodendron infortunatum, L.

Argemone Mexicana, L.

Hygrophila spinosa, T. Anders.

Aerva lanata, Juss.

Solanum xanthocarpum, Schrad.

Cordia Myxa, L.

Trichodesma Indica, R. Br.

Sida Asiatica, L.

S— cordifolia, L.

S— humilis, Willd.

Jatropha gossypifolia,

J— Curcas, L.

Abrus precatorius, L.

| Cardiospermum Halicacabum, L.

| Bryophyllum calycinum.

The bushes of Zizyphus gujuba are generally covered with a beauti-

ful net-work of dodders, both species Cassytha filifornis and Cuscuta

_ refleca (7) occurring abundantly. .

Besides the above, some of which though not indigenous are per-

q fectly naturalised, there are a number of trees which are regularly

cultivated; they are—

: Mangifera Indica, L.

ie Moringa pterygospermum, Gaertn

Punica granatum, L.

Psidium Guava, L.

Anona squamosa, L.

Ph, FEW. =

Tamarindus Indica, L.

Ricinus communis, L.

Azadirachta Indica, Ad. Juss.

Zizyphus jujuba, Lam (var.)

ele

* = ’

| On the bunds of tanks, the following trees are generally planted.

‘7 Acacia Arabica, Willd.

7 q farnesiana, Willd.

£ - Borassus flabelliformis, L.

: Terminalia Arjuna, W. and A.

120 Notes on the Flora of Manbhim. [ No. -2,.

Plumieria alba, Jacq.

Nerium odorum, Ait.

A very beautiful effect is often produced by the so-called matri-

mony of the species of Ficws with other trees, more especially with the

Tal, Borassus flabelliformis : the seeds of Peepul, dropped by birds into

the angle formed by the leaf stalk of the Tal, produce trees which

ultimately envelope with their roots and stem the whole of their |

foster parent.

The flora of the tanks and jheels is interesting, as it approaches

in character that of the ponds and lakes of Europe. The principal —

species are :

Nymphea lotus, L.

N— stellata, Willd.

Hydrilla verticillata ?

Ottelia alismoides, DC.

Nelumbium speciosum, Willd.

Limnanthemum cristatum, Griseb.

Potamogeton natans, Linn.

Azolla pinnata, R. Br.

Marsilea quadrifoliata, L.

At the edges :

Exacum sulcatum.

Drosera Burmanni, Vahl.

Scirpus mucronatus.

Fuirena ciliaris.

A number of species of Cyperus and grasses.

On all the smaller hills up to 1,000 feet, the greater number

of species occurring on the plains are to be met with, and in addition

to them many species of both trees and herbaceous plants, which are

never found below; on the highest hills the jungle consists almost

exclusively of Danii stricta, with an undergrowth in which the Q |

blue flowers of Sérobilanthes auriculatus and lei pur |

purascens are the most prominent forms. q

The following is a list of the most characteristic trees coon on

the hills: a

Kydia calycina, Roxb.

1869. ] Notes on the Flora of Mandhim. 12}

Cochlospermum gossypium, D’C.

Dillenia pentagyna, Roxb.

Sterculia urens, Roxb.

Chickrassia tabularis, A. Juss.

Zizyphus rugosa, Lam ?

Nauclea parvifolia, Roxb.

Hymenodictyon thyrsiflorum, Wall.

Flacourtia cataphracta, Roxb.

Spermodictyon azurea.,

Nyctanthes arbor tristis L.

Celastrus paniculatus, Willd.

Dalbergia latifolia, Roxb.

Albizzia procera, Bth.

Acacia tomentosa, Willd.

Ficus parasitica, Koen.

Hibiscus vitrifolius, L.

Helicteres Isora, L.

Butea superba, Roxb.

Grewia hirsuta, Vhl.

G— elastica, Royle.

Flemingia strobilifera, R. Br.

nana, Roxb.

Desmodium latifolium, D’C.

The useful plants of Manbhiim may be classified into those yielding :

Food, Drugs, Fibres, Dyes, Lac, Oil, and Timber.

Foop. I have in a previous communication to the Society* shewn

what a large number of jungle products are used as articles of food;

~ and that a considerable portion of the poorer natives derive from them

their principal subsistence during several months of the year.

Drvuas. A large number of the well-known drugs of India occur

“in Manbhim ; of others, some of which are possibly peculiar to that

part of the country, I have made a small collection, but am unable

to say whether they really are equal to their reputed virtues.

In making enquiries on these subjects, I have often been struck

with the curious contrasts of the deep knowledge possessed of the

Specific virtues of certain plants, and the dense ignorance and supersti-

* J. A. 8. B. 1867, Vol. XXXVI: Pt. II. No. IL. p. 73.

195 Notes on the Flora of Manbhim. [No. 2,

tion which attributes fantastical virtues to others. The same man

who may bring you the roots of one plant, which are of known medi-

cinal value, will shew you the seeds of another which he asserts are

of infallible efficacy in certain diseases, when tied round the neck

ona string. Ihave seen a man going about, with a small parcel of

medicine suspended from one of his ears, which he complacently

told me, was for the purpose of killing, what he fancied was a worm

in his tooth. !

Freres. The fibres of many of the large scandent creepers are used

in the manufacture of coarse ropes. I have never been able to ascer- —

tain that the fibre of the Mudar, Calotropis gigantea, is collected,

though it is one of the most valuable in India.

Dyxs. Coloured clothing is scarcely ever worn by the natives of |

Manbhim, so that there are very few dyes in use. On special occasions

when gaudy clothing is required, yellow, which is produced by tur- ~

meric, seems to be the favourite colour. Non-permanent dyes are

sometimes made out of some of the brilliant coloured blossoms of

Butea superba, Grislea tomentosa, &c. ,

Lac. The principal lac yielding trees are Plas, Butea frondosa

and Khistim, Schleichera trijuga : the lac is purchased at a very low

vate by the Mahajtins, and yields them a considerable profit when they _

bring it to markets attended by the regular dealers.

Ort, There are a number of trees yielding a variety of oils, for

some of which medicinal virtues are claimed, others produce inferior

oils, which are used either in their food, by the very poorest classes,

or for burning. It is unnecessary to detail the plants here, as they are

all well-known to yield oil. Were it not that crops of oil-yielding

plants such as Mustard, Guizotia, Sesamum, Castor Oil, &e., a

extensively grown throughout the district, more importance would

attach to the jungle oils than does at present. |

Timpur. The useful timber to be found in Manbhim, is very

limited in quantity, the forests covering but a small portion of the

area. Already contractors, and their agents, have reached the

hills on the Dhalbhitim frontier, and at the rate at which Sal |

is now being eut for Railway sleepers the supply cannot last for many

years.

Although Sal is the only timber cut for exportation, about 30

1869.]

Votes on the Flora of Manbhiim. 123

species of trees, yielding either ornamental, or strong and durable

woods, occur in tolerable abundance.

In the report of the Jury in Section IV, Class IV, of the Madras

Exhibition, 1855, there is a list given of woods with their respective

properties. Many of the species mentioned, are to be found in Man-

bhim. From the information contained in this list, from personal

observation, and other sources, | have drawn up the following enu-

meration of timber trees with their local names and special properties :

Local names

Names. :

Bengali.

fo)

Character of timber.

i t

\es

Acacia Arabica,

A— catechu,

Feronia elephantum,

bea Dab:

..| Koir.

.| Kuth-Bael.

Hard and tough, but small

sized, used for wheels.

Small, produces ku.

AXigle marmelos, -..| Bael. Wood, strong.

Alangium decapetalum, ...} Ankira. Wood, beautiful.

Artocarpus integrifolia, .../ Kantal. Hxcellent, used for furni-

ture.

Azadirachta Indica, ...| Neem. Beautiful, suitable for orna-

mental work.

Bassia latifolia, .| Mhowa. Strong, but tree is too valu-

able to be cut down.

Barringtonia acutangula, | —....... Useless.

Bauhinia variegata, --.| Katchna Little use.

B— malabarica, lee Eentee Said to be hard.

Borassus flabelliformis, Tal. Used for rafters, &e.

Buchanania latifolia, Piél. Useless.

Butea frondosa, | Plas. m

Casearia tomentosa, .| Moun. ve

| Calosanthes Indica, sep | NmOna.. Soft, useless.

| Cochlospermum gossypium,| Gol-gol. Useless.

_ Conocarpus latifolius, .| Dow. Very strong and useful,

i light-coloured.

| Croton oblongifolius, .| Patha. Reddish, cracks.

Dillenia pentagyna, Kurkotta. | Strong and durable wood,

splits easily.

Hard, strong, heavy wood.

Ficus Indica, .| Bur. Branch stems, heavy,

hard, suitable for tent

poles.

», religiosa, nal atl. Useless.

Flacourtia sapida,

.| Benchi Katai

.| Hard, does not warp.

124 Notes on the Flora of Manbhim. [No. 2, —

Names pede Ws Character of timber

: Bengali. ‘

}

Gardenia latifolia, .| Pepero. Close-grained.

Holarrhena antidysenterica/ Kurchi. Useless.

Lagerstroemia parviflora,...| Seed or See-| Wood said to be good.

dhar.

Mangifera Indica, .| Am. Durable, used for making

packing-cases.

Melia azadirach, ...| Bukum ? Durable and handsome.

Nauclea cadamba, .| Kadam. Used for furniture.

N— cordifoha,

.| Petpuria.

Nyctanthes arbor tristis, ...] Seolee.

Odina Wodier, .| Amara.

Pavetta indica, OV 4) wadd

a tomentosa, aise

Phyllanthus emblica, Aura

Rottlera tinctoria,

Schleichera trijuga,

Semecarpus Anacardium,

Shorea robusta,

Sterculia urens,

Stereospermum suaveolens,

Strychnos nux vomica,

Rls

.| Bela.

| Sal.

.| Keonge.

Parul.

.| Kvichila.

Eugenia Jambolana, .| Jam.

Tamarindus Indica, .| Emle.

Trophis aspera, .-.| Soura,

Terminalia glabra, .| Asun.

T— chebula, .| Hurtoki.

T—- bellerica, ««.{ Dhora.

Zizyphus jujuba, .| Bier.

Yellow, used for common

purposes, easily worked.

Hard, but small.

Central wood useful.

Timber small.

Hard, but small.

Hard, valuable.

Wood soft and inferior.

Strong, suitable for spokes,

Ge.

Useless.

Extensively used in India

for rafters, sleepers, &c.

Soft and useless.

Strong and elastic.

Hard,

shares.

Not attacked by white

ants.

Hard, durable.

Only used for fuel.

General work,durableunder

water.

Coarse, but sound and dur-

able.

White and soft.

Hard and useful, but of

small size.

used for plough-—

1869.] 125

Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. X. Descriptions of new species

of Cyclophoridex, of Ennea and Streptaxis from the hills of Southern

and South-western India; by Witttam T. Buayrorp, A. R. S. IL,

Ge S., oc.

[Read 3rd February,—received 18th February, 1869.*

The shells described in the following pages are some very interest-

ing forms discovered by Major Beddome and Mr. Fairbank in South

Canara, the Pulney hills, and the ranges on the frontier of Travancore.

All belong to the Malabar province, a remarkable zoological ‘“ out-

ler” of the Malay fauna.

The first three species, all of which have been discovered by Major

Beddome in the hills of Travancore and the neighbourhood, differ

from any previously described, so much, as to constitute a section or

sub-genus by themselves. Instead of the colouring so generally

characteristic of Cyclophorus and its allies, these species have a pecu-

liar olivaceous epidermis, highly polished in two of the species, much

as in Pupina and the allied genera, while in the third form the shell

has a silky appearance, due to minute striation. Another peculiar

character ig the constant occurrence of two keels, one just at the

periphery, the other at or near the base of the shell, the two being

separated by a smooth space. Other spiral sculpture is found in two

of the species, but these two keels are the most conspicuous; less so,

however, in Cyclophorus Beddomei, than in the other forms. The

operculum in all three species, closely resembles that in the Burmese

_ type of Pterocyclos. It it horny and double, with the edges of the

whorls composing it free, and is surrounded by a marginal groove

- between the free edge of the outermost whorl, and that of the inner

membranaceous lining of the operculum. It differs from the Péero-

cyclos opercula in being concave externally, instead of flat or convex.

- Too much importance, however, must not be assigned to these minute

characters of the operctilum.

The new section appears to me quite as distinct from Oyclophorus,

| as Cyclotus and Leptopoma are, and not quite so well distinguished

| as Pterocyclos; I, therefore, class it as a subgenus of Cyclophorus.

* Printed in this number of the Journal by special order of the Council.

126 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

Drrropts.* Subg. nov.

Testa translucens, subvitrea, epidermide olivaced nitidd instructa,

carvms duabus, vel pluribus, und ad peripheriam, alterd subtus ab

illd interspatio discretd circumdata. Operculum corneum, arctispirum,

duplex, lamind internd membranaced, externd crassiusculd, marginibus

anfractuum liberis, ambabus sulco marginali disjunctis. Animal 1g-

notum.

Shell translucent, almost vitreous, covered with a smooth olivaceous

epidermis, with two or more spiral ribs, one of which is always at

the periphery of the last whorl, and a second below, separated by an

interval from the other. Operculum horny closely wound, composed

of two lamine, separated by a marginal groove, the inner membrana-

cequs, the outer rather thick, and with the edges of the whorls free.

Animal unknown. Type, Cyclophorus planorbis, n. sp.

I have examined the lingual ribbon of one species. It only differs

from that of Cyclophorus in the form of the lateral teeth, and in their

denticulations being shorter and more numerous. In C. (Ditropis)

convexus, the species examined, the central tooth has 7 denticulations,

that in the middle being the largest : all the lateral teeth apparently

had 5 denticulations, but it was very difficult to count those in the

outermost laterals correctly.

1.—Cyclophorus (Ditropis) planorbis, n. sp.

Pl AMI tie. 4h

Testa latissime umbilicata, depressa, discoidea, vitrea, tenuis, oliva-

cea, glabra, obsolete striatula, polita. Spira plana, nucleo non exserto,

sepe eroso, sutura vmpressa, ad anfractum ultimum et supra et in wm-

bilico costd sublaid intus marginata. Anfr. 4d—44, convewi ; wltimus

antice via descendens sub-quadrangularis, supra atque subtus convexus, —

carinis duabus validis cirewmdatus, und ad peripheriam, alterd juata ~

basin ad latus externum. Umbilicus perspectivus, omnes anfractus

exhibens. Apertura obliqua, sub-quadrata intus albido-labiata ; peri-

stoma incrassatum, rectum, non-capansum. Operculum intus convexum, —

extus concavum, marginibus anfractuum externorum laciniatim elongatis.

Lxempli majoris diam. maj. 84, min. 7, alt.. 2, ap. diam. 13, millem,—

0 OMS ox, Ti 4, bk 6 4 dd pp, Geren

fab. “ Calcad hills,” ad fines provincia Travancore in Indid meri

. * Htym. dus, twice ; Tpoms, 2 keel.

1869.] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 127

dionali, haud procul apromontorio meridionalt Indie “ Cape Comorin”?

dicto.

Shell very broadly umbillicated, depressed, discoidal, thin, glassy,

smooth and polished, with obsolete striation. Spire perfectly flat ; the

apex not rising above the surface; suture impressed ; the nucleus is

generally wanting, being apparently remarkably liable to erosion.

Whorls 4 to 43, slightly convex above, the last descending but slightly

near the mouth, and nearly square, with two keels, the one rather high

up, forming the periphery of the shell, the other at the outer side of the

base ; these keels can be traced upon the penultimate and part of the

ante-penultimate whorl, both on the spire and within the umbilicus,

forming a distinct rib inside the suture. Aperture oblique, nearly

Square, with a white internal lip; peristome thickened, all in one

plane and not expanded. Operculum convex and smooth inside, the

margins of the whorls externally much elongated and torn, especially

towards the margin.

Major diameter, from the edge of the peristome to the opposite

margin 0.34 inch, minor diam., at right angles to the other, 0.28,

height 0.08. A smaller specimen measures 0.27 and 0.2 in the two

diameters and 0.5 in height.

Although this shell resembles some Cyclophort in form, it differs

from all species hitherto known in several characters and certainly

forms the type of a distinct section.

2.—Cyclophorus (Ditropis) Beddomei, n. sp.

PL XVI) fie 2:

Testa latissime wnbilicata, depressa, discoridea, tenuis, olivacea, con-

fertissime striata, parum nitida, spiraliter costata. Spira plana, sutura

valde impressa. Anfr. circa 4, (primo im exemplo unico deficienti)

convent, primi fere glabri ; penultimus costis 2—3, supra und, infra in

umbilico juxta suturam ornatus, wltumus antice descendens, teres, guata

suturam et subter peripheriam glaber, T —costatus, costis 4 swperioribus,

quarum extera ad peripheriam, 3 basalibus- ab superis intervallo dis-

junctis. Umbilicus perspectivus. Apertura diagonalis, rotunda ;

peristoma simplex, rectum, breviter adnatum, nigrescens, intus tenwiter

albido-labiatum. Operculum fusco-corneum, intus converum, limbo

tenwissimo circumdatum, exlus concaviusculum, marginibus anfractuun

parum elevatis.

128 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

Diam, ma. 8, Min. 62, axis 24 millem., ap. diam. intus 2.

Hab. Travancore.

Shell very widely umbilicated, depressed, discoidal, thin, olive-

coloured, very closely and minutely striated, less polished than the other

species, and covered with spiral ribbing. The spire is flat, or nearly so,

but the innermost whorls being deficient in the only specimen sent

for description by Major Beddome, it is impossible to say whether the

apex is slightly exserted or not. The suture is much impressed.

Whorls about 4 in number, convex; the last one descending near the

mouth, smooth near the suture, both above and below, with 7 spiral

ribs ; 4 above, the outermost forming the periphery of the shell, and 3

below, separated from the others by a smooth space; 3 of the upper

and 1 of the lower can be traced on the penultimate whorl near the

suture, but become obsolete on the inner whorls. The umbilicus

exposes all the whorls below. Aperture diagonal, round, peristome

only joined for a very short distance to the penultimate whorl,

thickened, all in one plane and not expanded, faintly edged with white

inside, blackish externally.

The operculum differs from that of Cyclophorus planorbis by the

edges of the whorls being less produced externally, and by its being

in consequence less concave. Major diameter 0.31 inch, minor 0.27,

axis 0.9.

This species recently found by Major Beddome in the Travancore

hills, is easily distinguished from the last species by its numerous spiral

ridges, and by the absence of the glassy surface, so characteristic of both

the other species. But two specimens have been found, of which I

have only seen one.

3.—Cyclophorus (Ditropis) convexus, 2. sp.

Pl. XVI, fig. 3.

Testa aperte umbilicata, depresso-convexa, tenuis, nitida, vitrea,

glabra, olivacea, minnutissime et obsolete decussato-striatula. Spira

convexa ; apice obtuso; sutura impressa intus marginata. Anfr. 4, ‘:

convexi ; ultumus versus aperturam paullum descendens, teres, juxta

suturam fascia laté fused pictus, extus pallidior, carind und validd ad

pertpheriam, alterd ad basin circumdatus ; wmbilico perspectivo, omnes —

anfractus eahibens, confertim spiraliter liratus. Apertura obliqua —

rotunda ; peristoma rectum simplex, incrassatum atque continuum. Oper-

1869.] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 129

culum fusco-corneum, per-simile illé Cyclophori planorbis, marginibus

externis anfractuum laciniatim productis.

Diam. maj. 63, min. 53, axis 3} millem, ap, diam, intus 21,

Hab. Cum C. planorbo in montibus Calcad Hills diets,

Shell openly umbilicated, depressly convex, thin, smooth, shining,

glassy, of an olive colour, with minute sub-obsolete decussating striae,

only visible beneath a powerful lens. Spire convex, apex obtuse,

suture impressed and with an internal margination, due to the pro-

longation on the inner whorls of the keel surrounding the shell.

Whaorls 4, convex ; the last descending slightly near the aperture, and

becoming paler in colour in front on the outer half of the surface

only, so that a band of darker colour surrounds the shell close to the

suture. Of the two keels one is at the periphery, and rather lower

in position than usual, owing partly to the raised spire, the other is

at the base, rather towards the umbilicus, which exhibits all the

whorls, and is closely spirally ribbed inside. Aperture round, oblique,

peristome in one plane, simple, thickened. Operculum very similar

to that of Cyclophorus planorbis, with the external edges of the whorls

lengthened, ragged and split up into a fringe-like edge. Major dia-

meter 0.26, minor 0.22, axis 0,14 inch.

This very beautiful little species has much more of the character of

C. (Ditropis) planorbis than of C. Beddomei, having the same glassy

structure and high lustre. The convex form is peculiar and very

unusual amongst the Cyclophoride.

The next two species are at least equally peculiar with the last

three, and I was for some time much puzzled as to their position

amongst the Cyclophoride, until more close examination of the oper-

culum, revealed its peculiar structure and its resemblance to that of

Opisthoporus. Mr. Benson, some years ago, proposed that should other

species be found, resembling Opzsthoporus in the characters of the

operculum, but wanting the sutural tube, they should be classed with

the typical forms under the name Celopoma,* This remark, how-

ever, was especially intended to apply to Cyclotus variegatus and its

allies, with which the types of Opisthoporus had been classed by

Dr. Pieiffer. In point of fact, the sutural tube of Opisthoporus is

* Ann. and Mag Nat. Hist. for 1855, Ser. 2, Vol. XV, p. 15.

130 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

a generic character of higher importance than the structure of the

operculum, so much so, that I believe, as I pointed out in 1864,*

that Opisthoporus can only rank as a sub-genus of Spiraculwm,

Pearson, which has a totally different operculum but a similar sutural

tube. The similar structure of the operculum in the species lately dis-

covered in the hills of Southern India, by no means serves to prove

any very close affinity to Opisthoporus, since the characters of the

shell are totally distinct. With the exception of the absence of the

sutural tube, this is not the case with Cyclotus variegatus and its

allies. Ido not think the present forms would have been classed by

Mr. Benson in the same genus as Opisthoporus, and as I am in-

clined, after a good deal of study of the Cyclophorida@, to consider the

opercula alone as quite insufficient for the foundation of generic

groups, and to attach far less importance to their characters than has

hitherto been done by Mr. Benson and Dr. Pfeiffer, Iam even less

disposed to class together dissimilar shells solely on account of the

opercular structure than those naturalists are.

The operculum of the new genus appears to me, despite its resem-

blance to that of Opisthoporus, to be a modification of a slightly differ-

ent type. That of Opisthoporus is produced by variation of the

typical Cyclotus operculum, but with less closely connected whorls. —

That of the genus now proposed, I consider a modification of the

Cyathopoma operculum, in which the calcareous outer edges of the ~

whorls, instead of being merely slightly curved towards the centre ;

and free, are so much more curved that the outer edge of each joins ;

the next interior one. Another modification of the same occurs in

Jerdonia, in which the same outer edges are lamelliform and flat, —

each overlapping the inner one.

Undoubtedly all these numerous forms of Cyclophoride are very —

puzzling, The types of land Mollusca are after all few compared

with those of most other forms of terrestrial animal life, and the

tendency to variation amongst them is excessive, and in the Cyclo-_

phoride especially, the operculum has evidently become a very variable |

portion of the organism. It is very difficult to determine, in a case

like the present, whether it is wise to found a new group or not. —

Still the two shells now to be described differ so much from all other g

* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 3, Vol. XIII. p. 451,

, 1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 131

known forms in the combination of characters presented, that such

appears the only course open, and as will be seen presently, the

characters of the lingual dentition fully bear out the separation.

Cyclophorus (Ditropis) convexus. Mychopoma limbiferum.

MycuHopoMa™ gen. nov.

Testa in speciebus notes turbinata epidermide fuscd, crassd, hirsutd

induta. Apertura intus corrugata. Operculum simile ei generis

Opisthopori, e duobis discis multispiris, parallelis, interno menbranceo,

externo calcareo compositum ; lamind spiralr erecta mnterpositd, inter-

spatiis vacus.

Shell, in the two species hitherto. known, turbinate, cover-

ed with a thick dark-coloured epidermis, more or less hairy.

Aperture crenulated within. Operculum very similar to that of Opis-

thoporus in structure, composed of an external calcareous and an

internal membranaceous layer, both multispiral and united by a spiral

lamina at right angles to them, the spaces between the whorls of

which are vacant. The operculum is flat or nearly so, rather thick,

and with a marginal sulcation.

Oi this type also I have examined the lingual dentition of one

species, M. limbiferum. The central tooth much resembles that of

. Cyclophorus in form, but it has 7 nearly equal denticulations. The

“inner lateral teeth are much broader, and differently placed from those

in any other Cyclophoride which have been, so far as I know, ex-

amined. They also have 7 denticulations, and the same appears to be

the case in the outermost laterals, on which, however, it is difficult to

count the exact number. These outermost teeth differ greatly in form

and position from the usual type amongst the Cyclophoride, and rather

resemble those of Paludina or Valvata.

* Typus M. hirsutum, Beddome, MS, Htym. wvyos av inner chamber, Topo.

operculum.

132 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

4.—MWychopoma hirsutum, Beddome, MS. Pl. XVI, fig. 5.

Testa mediocriter wmbilicata, depresso-turbinata, solidiuscula, epi-

dermide crassd, fuscd, liris sprralibus sub-confertis et lineis elevatis

confertissimis obliquis decussatim ornatd ; intra suturam, ad peri-

pheriam, atque circa umbilicum pilis longiusculis confertim fimbriata

induta; sub epidermide albida, decussato-costulata, liris spiralibus

plus obliquis, minus validis quam extra epidermidem. Spira eonvexo-

conoidea; apice prominulo, papillart ; sutura profunda, pilis fere obtecta,

Anfr. 5—5k convent, ultimus teres, antice parum descendens. Um-

bilicus perspectivus, omnes anfractus exhibens, fimbrid hirsutd partim

celatus, intus spiralrter liratus. Apertwra diagonalis, rotunda, intus

sublactea atque lineis horizontalibus fuscis signata ; peristoma sinuatum,

duplex, extus expansiusculum crispatum, intus corrugatum, margine

columellart repando, solo, glabro et simplice. Operculum multispirum,

crassum, extus concaviusculum, caleareum, albidum, intus planwm mem-

branaceum. Diam. maj. 84, min. T, axis 5%, ap. diam. intus 34 millem.

Hab. In montibus Calcad atque Myhendra dictis, in regione Tra-

vancorica Indie meridionalis.

Shell umbilicated, depressly turbinate, rather solid, covered with

a thick dark coloured epidermis, which has strong raised decussated

sculpture of spiral ridges and very close oblique costulation: at the —

periphery and around the umbilicus there is a fringe of close, rather .

long hairs, and the outer series continued on the inner whorls forms

a sutural fringe also. Beneath the epidermis the shell is white with ~

decussating lines, the spiral sculpture being more pronounced and the

ribbing corresponding to the lines of growth less so than outside the —

epidermis. Spire convexly conoid, the apex prominent and papillar, |

suture deep, nearly concealed by the hairy fringe within. Whorls ~

5—53, convex, the last cylindrical, descending but very little in —

front. Umbilicus pervious, exhibiting all the whorls, spirally ribbed,

partly covered by the surrounding hairy fringe. Aperture diagonal, q |

round, rather milky inside, with dark horizontal lines corresponding

to the spiral ribs on the shell; the peristome is thick and double, —

curved backwards near the umbilicus, the internal portion with —

minute pearly white denticulations, largest on the outer (dextral) —

margin and gradually decreasing slightly in size on the upper and basal

1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 133

is slightly expanded, the edge cut into minute teeth like those of

_ a saw except on the inner or columellar margin. Operculum externally

slightly concave, white, calcareous ; the spiral sculpture obsolete near

the centre in old specimens ; internally membranaceous. Major diameter

0.34, minor 0.28, axis 0.22, diameter of the aperture 0.14 inch.

This is a very curious and interesting species which, while differing

in many respects from any known form, has marked affinities with

shells belonging to distinct groups. Had the shell been discovered

without the operculum, there could have been very little hesitation

in considering it a large form of Cyathopoma ; the sculpture and

general shape are precisely those of the types of that genus, and in some

species, as Oyathopoma jfilocinctum, there is a thick epidermis, and

also the very singular internal crenulation of the mouth, which is

more marked in the present shell than in any allied species. The

operculum, however, is totally different : instead of the whorls having

the curious raised and incurved edges so characteristic of Cyathopoma

they are flat and almost obsolete near the centre, on the outer surface,

being far less distinct than in typical species of Cyclotus.

The hairy fringe around both the periphery and the umbilicus so

closely resembles that in Cyclophorus (Craspedotropis) cuspidatus,

Bens., that there can be no question of a certain affinity between the

two species, and there is considerable resemblance in their general

form. The apertures, however, differ greatly, and there are marked

distinctions in the operculum.

On the whole, I think it highly probable, that the present generic

type, and perhaps Craspedotropis also, will finally have to be consider-

ed as sub-genera of Cyathopoma.

5.—Mychopoma limbiferum, ». sp. Pl. XVI, fig. 4.

Testa anguste umbilicata, turbinata, tenuis, epidermide decidud, fulva,

strigis fuscis, obliquis spiralibusque notatd, vel wnicolort fuscd, fimbriam

| pilorum brevium circa wmbilicum ferente, induta ; sub epidermide albida,

liris confertis spiralibus ornata. Spira conica ; sutura valde impressa.

Anfr. 55 convext, ultumus teres, antice sub-descendens. Apertura obliqua,

Jere circularis : peristoma duplex ; externum limbo sub-late expanso

eircumdatum, ad angulum aperture antice porrectum ; internum vir dis-

cretum intus sub-distanter corrugatum ; margine columellart amborum

valde repando, glabro, vie expansiusculo. Operculum minus crassum

134 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

guamin M. hirsuto, extus concaviusculum, lamind calcared ad centrum

carente, intus planum.

Exempli majoris diam. maj. 7, min. 6, axis 53, ap. diam. intus 2%, millem.

us minoris 55 53y ia) Aca = , trtus' 2.5

Hab. In summis montibus Pulney dictis ; detexit S. Fairbank.

Shell narrowly umbilicated, turbinate, thin, covered with a thick

deciduous, yellowish brown epidermis, with dark spiral and oblique

stripes, or more frequently perhaps altogether dark brown, with a

fringe of short hairs round the umbilicus: beneath the epidermis, the

shell is white with close spiral sculpture. In some specimens, as in

AM. hirsutum, there are oblique raised lines outside the epidermis, but

they are not always conspicuous. Spire conical, suture deep. Whorls

5% convex, the last cylindrical, scarcely descending towards the aper-

ture which is oblique and nearly circular. The peristome is much

curved back, near the umbilicus, where it is almost simple and scarcely

expanded: elsewhere the outer portion is sharply reversed, forming

a broad rim at right angles to the axis of the whorl on the outer and

basal margins, while near the penultimate whorl, it is produced in

front. The inner portion of the peristome scarcely projects beyond

the outer; it is corrugated within, but not nearly so closely or strongly

as in J. hirsutum, and the corrugation is very faint towards the base, —

and entirely wanting at the angle of the aperture and on the collumellar

margin. Operculum thinner than in the last species, and the calcareous

external portion less developed, and entirely wanting at the centre.

Major diameter in a large specimen (28 inch, minor diameter — 3

0.25, axis 0.22, diameter of the aperture inside 0.11. OF a small

specimen, the respective measurements are 0.21, 0.165, 0.16 and 0.08.

This is a very different shell from the last, being much higher in z

the spire with a broader edge to the mouth. The name is taken from

the last peculiarity. Only a few specimens were found by Mr. Fair-

bank. It appears to inhabit the tops of the Pulneys at a height of

about 7,000 feet.

6.—Pterocyclos ? tristis, n. sp. Pl. XVI, fig. 9.

“7° . . . A . \

Testa late wmbilicata, depressa, tenuis, epidermide crassd, fulvescentt-

brunned induta; sub epidermide albida, striatula. Spira convexad.

Apice parum easerto, per-obtuso, suturd profundd, Anfr. 5 rotundati;

ultimus teres, longe sensim descendens. Apertura obliqua, rotunda; —

1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 185

peristoma brevissime adnatum, duplex ; internum parum porrectum,

superne juxta suturam via sinuatum ; externum leviter expansum,

continuum, a peristomate interno sulco discretum, supra ejus sinum

in alam verticalem parvam, instar tubuli imperfecti, antice spectantem

anfractum penultimum non attingentem, breviter cucullatim produc-

tum. Operc? Diam. maj. 193, min. 16, axis 94, mill. Ap. diam.

antus 63.

Hab. In provincid South Canara; detexit H. Beddome.

Shell widely umbilicated, depressed, thin, covered with a thick, oli-

vaceous brown epidermis ; beneath the epidermis white, faintly striated.

The epidermis is closely rugately striated near the suture. Spire

convex ; apex scarcely exserted, obtuse ; suture deep. Whorls 5, round-

ed, the last cylindrical, descending very gradually for a considerable

distance behind the aperture. Mouth oblique, circular; peristome

double, the two portions divided by a groove; the inner slightly

projecting, with a very small, almost obsolete sinus above, close to

the suture; the outer a little expanded, and produced above into

a short vertical wing, opening in front, and forming an imperfect

tube; it is just above the imperfect sinus in the inner peristome,

and does not touch the penultimate whorl. Operculum unknown.

Major diameter 0.8, minor 0.62, axis 0.86; diameter of the aperture

0.26 inch. — |

In the absence of the operculum, it is not easy to say if this shell

should be classed as Cyclophorus or Pterocyclos. It might even be

a Rhiostoma, and would in that case be another instance of the occur-

rence on the Malabar coast of Burmese and Malay forms, unknown

elsewhere throughout the Indian Peninsula. In the extremely small

wing not touching the penultimate whorl, the absence of a deep

incision in the interior peristome beneath the wing, the large mouth,

and uniform colouring, the species differs from all Indian forms of

Pierocyclos. There can be no question of its being dintinct also from

all known forms of Oyclophorus, but, except for the wing, it approaches

very nearly to C. ravidus, Bens., and C. annulatus, Trosch., both of

which, however, are flatter.

7.—Spiraculum Fairbanki, 2. sp.

Testa late wmbilicata, depressa, sub-discoidea, decussatim striata,

griseo-albida, irrequlariter castaneo-strigata et maculata, fascid wter-

136 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

vyuptd sub-peripherid alidque latd in umbilico castaneis. Spira fere

plana ; apice prominulo papillart ; sutura valde impressa. <Anfr. 5

rotundate ; ultiumus teres, antice sensim descendens, spiraculo brevi

sub-verticalt truncate-conico, cum anfractu penultimo conjuncto, 4

_ mill. pone aperturamsito munitus. Apertura diagonalis, circularis ;

peristoma duplex ; imternum breviter porrectum obtuswm, ad suturam

angulatim sinuatum ; externum continuum expansum, supra sinum

instar ale cuculliformis, anfractui penultime appresse exstans, versus

basin columella processum linguiformem emittens. Operculum corneum,

entus valde concavum, extus convexum, apice planulato, marginibus

anfractuum lamelliferis. Diam. maj. 143, min. 113, axis 6, ap.

diam. intus 4 mill. ?

Hab. Inmontibus Pulney dictis, Indie meridionalis. S. Fairbank.

Shell broadly umbilicated, depressed, nearly discoidal, greyish

white with irregular streaks and spots of chesnut and two bands of

the same colour; one, somewhat interrupted, below the periphery, the |

other, broader, within the umbilicus. Spire almost flat, the apex

prominent and papillar, the suture deeply impressed. Whorls 5

rounded, the last cylindrical, gradually descending in front and fur-

nished, (0.16 inch behind the aperture), with a short nearly vertical

spiracle, in the form of a truncated cone, and joined to the penulti- —

mate whorl. Aperture diagonal, circular, the peristome double, the

internal portion projecting slightly and obtuse, with a rather shallow

angular sinus near the suture: the external peristome is continuous,

expanded, dilated above into a projecting wing which runs forwards

for some distance along the last whorl in front of the aperture, and is

bent downwards at the end. Near the base of the columellar margin

there is a small gutter-shaped projection. The operculum is very —

concave within, externally convex, flattened at the apex, with free —

lamellar edges to the whorls as in the typical species of Pterocyclos.

Major diameter 0.58, minor 0.47, axis 0.23, diameter of the aperture

within 0,16 inch. A rather smaller specimen measures 0.64 by 0.52

in its two diameters.

This species has not been figured as I hope to be able to give illus-

trations of all the known forms of Spiraculwm on one plate. |

The genus Spiraculwm, previously to Mr. Fairbank’s discovery,

was not known to occur in Southern India. Its detection seryes to

‘

D |

1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 137

add another to the Burmese and Malay forms represented in the hill

groups of that region. In 1866, I described another species, Sp.

Beddomei* from the Eastern hills near Vizagapatam (J. A.S. B.

Vol. XXXV. Pl. II. p. 31). The present form differs from Sp.

Beddomei in several characters, the principal being the prominent

apex, the form of the sutural tube and the presence of a small lingui-

form process at the left side of the peristome near its base. The last

character indeed is quite peculiar, and serves alone to distinguish the

present species. In size, and somewhat in form, there is a decided

resemblance to the Burmese Sp. Avanwm, in which, however, there

are not only important distinctions in the form of the peristome, the

recurved sutural tube, &., but the operculum is also very different,

being flat precisely as in the Burmese forms of Pterocyclos, while in

Spiraculum Fairbanks, it is as convex as in Ptercyclos rupestris, or

Pt. bilabiatus.

Mr. Fairbank only obtained 11 specimens of this interesting form.

They were found in ‘a Shola at some distance from Kodai Kanal, the

hill station on the Pulneys, on the road to the Kukal Shola.

8 —Cataulus Calcadensis, Bedd. MS. Pl. XVI, fig. 8.

Testa sub-perforata, fusiformi-turrita, solida, confertim sub-sinuate

costulata. Spira ovato-turrita ; apice acutiusculo ; sutura valde im-

pressa, Anfr. 83, convexti, ultimus parum angustior, demum breviter

solutus, antice porrectus via descendens, carind basal valida, compressa,

costulatd, antice dilatatd munitus ; pertomphalo mediocri, costulato.

Apertura sub-circularis, fere verticalis, canali ad latus simstrum

margins basalis patente, ore subtus dextrorsumque spectante ; peristoma

imerassato-expansum, sub-duplex vel duplex, internum obtusum, eater-

num expansum, revolutum, postice et ad canalem basalem productum,

margine columellari insuper angustrort, cum anfractu penultimo hawd

guncto. Opere ?

Long. 21, diam. 7, apert. diam, intus 34 millem. Apertura cum

_ peristomate incluso canali 64 millem. longa. Exempli minoris long.

16, diam. cum perist. 53, diam. minor 5, apert. intus 3 millem.

Hab. ‘Calcad Hills’ extra fines provincie Travancore.

Shell sub-perforate, fusiformly turrited, solid, closely and rather

* In the habitat of this shell, there is a misprint. Kimery hills should be

Kimety hills.

138 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

sinuously costulated. Spire ovately turrited, apex rather acute, suture

much impressed. Whorls 83, convex, the last a little smaller, quite

free from the other whorls fora short distance behind the mouth,

but not descending much, not nearly so far as C. tortwosus is repre-

sented as doing. The basal keel is strong

ribbed, and becoming larger in front ; the space inside the keel around

, compressed, transversely

the umbilicus is of moderate size and ribbed. Aperture nearly

circular, and almost vertical, the opening of the basal canal being

at the left side and not in the same plane as the aperture, but turned

a little downwards and to the right. Peristome thickened double,

the inner portion obtuse, the outer expanded, turned back, produced

below the canal and above near the suture, narrower on the inner

margin and not touching the penultimate whorl. Operculum un-

known.- Measurements of 3 specimens in decimals of an inch.

Length, Major diameter, minor diameter, width of

peristome included, aperture inside,

0.84 0.28 P 0.14

0.76 0.26 0.23 0.14

0.64 0.23 0.2 0.12.

Length of the aperture and outer peristome in the larger specimen

from the base of the canal to the end of the projection above 0.26 ©

inch.

At first sight, this shell bears a most striking resemblance to C.

tortuosus, Chem., but the last whorl is much less produced, and there

appear, judging from the description and figures of Chemnitz’s species,

to be several slight but not unimportant distinctions in sculpture and

form. Amongst the Ceylonese species, the nearest approach to the

present is made by ©. decorus, Bens., and O. Blanfordi, Dohrn, but —

no Ceylonese kind is known with the last whorl free. The previously

described Cataulus from the base of the Anamullay hills resembles

C'. Calcadensis in the sinistral position of the keel, a character not

noticed by Pfeiffer in his description.

Since finding the present species I learn from Captain Beddome _

that he has met with a third Indian Cataulus in Travancore. |

So far as I am aware, the Nicobar locality of Catawlus tortwosus has % |

not been confirmed. The discovery of so closely allied a form as that

now described, in Southern India tends to make it probable that the —

1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 139

‘species described by Chemnitz may prove to be Indian. Two other

shells attributed by Chemnitz to the Nicobar Islands, Helix hemas-

toma, l.,and H. Nicobarica, Chem., have not since been brought thence.

It is just possible that the former may occur, though I cannot help

thinking it improbable, but as the locality for Heliw Nicobarica is

now distinctly ascertained to be the neighbourhood of Cuddapah, far

inland and amidst a fauna and flora which resembles that of the Cape

of Good Hope nearly as much as it does that of the Nicobar Islands,

I utterly disbelieve in the occurrence of the species in the latter

locality. The fact that both Heliaz Nicobarica and H. hemastoma

are Indian or Ceylonese, tends to increase the probability of Cataulus

tortuosus being also an Indian shell.

9—Opisthostoma macrostoma, Beddome, MS.

Plo XV fig. 7.

Testa perforata, conoideo-ovata, albida vel pallide rubella, sub-

distanter oblique filiformi-costulata, sub lente spiraliter minutissime

et confertissime striata. NSpira elevato-conoidea, laterribus convexis ;

apice acutiusculo ; sutwra valde impressa. Anfr. 54, convext, apicales

normales non-diviantes, penultimus vie major, ulfimus confertius

costulatus, brevissime constrictus, antice sigmoideo-deflecus. Umbili-

cus ab anfractu ultimo non-occultus. Apertura retrorsa sub-rotunda,

fere verticalis ; peristoma brevissime ad anfractos duos, penultimum

et ante-penultimum, adnatum, duplex, internum continuum expansius-

culum, externwm, expansum breviter interruptum. Long. 3, diam.

major 3, min. 2 millem. Ap. diam. cwm perist. 14 millem.

Hab. In montibus Bramagiri dictis, im regione Wynaad, haud

procul a littore Malabarica Indie. H. Beddome detexit.

Shell perforated, conoidly ovate, white or pale reddish in colour

with sub-distant oblique filiform costulation, which becomes closer

on the last whorl: beneath a microscope there is very fine close spiral

striation, very difficult to detect in general, as in other species of

Opisthostoma and many Diplommatine.* Spire elongately conoid

with convex sides, the apex rather acute, suture deep. Whorls 54

convex, the apical ones not excentric as in the other Indian species ;

the penultimate whorl very little larger than those above it. The

last whorl is constricted as usual. In front of the constriction it is

* In a good light it may easily de detected in O. Crespigni, H. Ad.

140 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

deflected inwards, but less sharply so than in O. Fuirbanki, and it

does not conceal the umbilicus, the curve being more as in O. Nilgiri-

cum. Aperture reversed, nearly circular, almost vertical, having

scarcely any inclination upwards. -Peristome attached for a short

distance only, touching both the penultimate and ante-penultimate

whorls, double, both portions expanded, the outer more broadly re-

flexed, and interrupted for a short distance where attached, inner

peristome continuous. Length 0.12, breadth measured across the

peristome 0.12, shorter diameter 0.8, breadth of the aperture includ-

ing the peristome 0.6 inch.

This is the largest form of the genus yet met with, exceeding even

the Labuan species O. Crespigni, H. Ad. It is much more pupa-

shaped than that kind is, but much less so than the two previously

described Indian forms, from both of which it may easily be distin-

guished by the apical whorls not being excentric, as well as by its

much greater size.

As the figure of O. Fairbanki in the Proceedings of the Zoological

Society for 1866, Pl. XXXVIII, is rather too small to give a good —

idea of the form, and the sculpture had been omitted, two figures are |

given in the plate belonging to this paper, figs. 6, 6a. For the |

drawings I am indebted to the kindness of Captain Godwin Austen.

In fig. 6 a, representing the shell from below, the view is a little from

the side ; when seen from beneath in the line of the axis, the umbili-

cus is completely concealed by the last whorl, a character peculiar

to O. Fairbanki.

From the figure just referred to in the Proceedings Zoological Society,

the idea is conveyed that Opisthostoma Kairbanki is a much smoother

species than O. Nalgiricum. This is due to the accident that the

draughtsman had only the former species before him, and copied the

figure of the other. In reality, the sculpture is about equally strong

on both forms, the only difference being, that it is a little closer in

O. Nilgiricum. E

In the 3rd supplement to Dr. Pieiffer’s monograph of the Helicida .

just published, I see with some surprise that he retains H. Adams’

genus Plectostoma. The author of that genus admitted in the Pro- |)

ceedings of the Zoological Society for 1865, p. 755, that it was identi- a

cal with Opisthostoma, and subsequently in the Proceedings Zoological — ; |

1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 141

Society for 1866, p. 447, announced the discovery of the operculum,

as I had anticipated.

10—Ennea sculpta, n. sp. Pl. XVI, fig. 10.

| Testa profunde et flexuose rimata, sub-cylindrica, solidula, cerea,

diaphana, nitida, costis verticalibus sub-flecuosis ornata. Spira turrita

sursum viz attenuata; apice obtuso ; sutura impressa. Anfr. 8, primé

2 levigati, ceteri sub-confertim costulati, ultimus % longitudinis fere

equans, antice sub-ascendens, bast compressus. Apertura verticalis,

truncato-ovata, lamelld und parietali intrante juata angulum, aliis

profundis 4 palatalibus, secunda minori, und columellart valida torta,

in apertura vix conspicud, coarctata. Peristoma undique expansum,

albidum, ad basin late repandum, marginibus callo lamellifert junctis.

Long. 84, diam. 23, millem. Ap. cum perist. 2 mill, longa.

Hab. In montibus Pulney, Indie meridionalis, detexit S. Fairbank.

Shell deeply and flexuously rimate, sub-cylindrical, rather solid,

translucent with a low glossy lustre and of the colour of wax. Spire

turrited and elongate, becoming very little smaller above and bluntly

terminated at the apex; suture impressed, whorls- 8, the first two

smooth, the others with strong vertical sub-flexuous ribs, the last

whorl ascending slightly in front, compressed at the base. Aperture

vertical, truncately oval, with a re-entering parietal plait close to the

angle, a very deep columellar fold, scarcely perceptible from the

aperture, but strong and twisted within, running up till it nearly

joins the parietal plait, and 4 palatal lamelle, the second of which

from above is very small. These, like the columellar fold, are situ-

ated so far back, that they are with difficulty to be made out from

the aperture. Peristome white, expanded, curved back slightly near

the base, margins united by a rather thick callus on which is the

parietal lamella. Length 0.34, diameter 0.1, length of aperture,

peristome included, 0.08 inch.

This form has some slight resemblance to #. Pvrriev, Pir., but has

very much stronger sculpture, and the lamella around the aperture,

are very different.

Ihave another Hnnea from the Nilgiris which I have hitherto

considered a small variety of H. Porriet, but it appears to differ in

the possession of a strong transverse basal plica. In both forms,

young specimens appear to have the lamelle of the aperture quite

142 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 2,

as well developed as adults, so that they must be formed and re-

absorbed, as I have shewn to be the case in the Plectopylis section

of Heliw: Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 38, Vol. VII. p. 244.

Pfeiffer—Mon. Vol. IV. p. 8342,—describes the occurrence of the colu-

mellar plice in the young of H. Pirriez.

11.—Streptaxis Canarica, Beddome, MS. Pl. XVI, fig. 11.

Testa umbilicata, depressa, ovata, cerea, nitidula undique flexuose

capillaceo striata. Spira convexa ; apice obtuso; sutura vix impressa

sub-marginata. Anfr. 53, parum convext, penultimus postice acute

carinatus, ultimus valde antrorsum devians, post aperturam fossiculis

brevibus tribus constrictus, subtus convexus, ad basin circa umbilicum

compressus. Apertwra obliqua, irregulariter semiovata, lamina und

parietali torta valida et dentibus sex in peristomate fere equidistantibus

coarctata. Peristoma albidum, wndique sub-late expansum, ad angulum

sinuatum, marginibus callo lamelliferi junctis. Diam. mq. via 8,

min. 54, alt. 34 mill ; apert. cwm perist fere 3 mill. longa, 2? lata.

Hab. In Provincia South Canara, haud procul a littore occi-

dentali Indie.

Shell umbilicated, depressed, ovate with considerable lustre and

the colour of wax, with close rather irregular and flexuous hair-like ~

striation both above and below. Spire convex, apex obtuse, suture

scarcely impressed, sub-marginate. Whorls 53, very little convex,

the penultimate sharply keeled on the side opposite to the aperture,

last whorl very excenttic, with three distinct depressions behind the

peristome ; compressed beneath, especially near the mouth. Aperture

oblique, irregularly semi ovate, with 7 teeth; 1 lamelliform doubly

curved and re-entering for a short distance on the callus, uniting the

margins of the peristome, and 6 in the peristome itself nearly equi-

distant from each other: of these two are on the outer margin, one

at the curve where the peristome bends round towards the umbilicus,

and 3 along the inner, or columellar, margin. The two lowest of the

latter are the closest together of any. Peristome white, expanded,

curved back considerably close to the junction with the last whorl.

Major diameter 0.32, minor 0.22, cig 0.14 inch, aperture 0.12

inch long, 0.11 broad.

This is the first strongly keeled species which has been met with in

India. In form it much resembles the Molmain 8S. Sankeyz, Bens,

;

Journal Asiat: Soc: Bengal, VolXXX VII, Pl: I.

21.@,

1. Cyclophorus (Ditropis ) plaror bis.

Bac. ( Difropis ) Beddomez. 7. 0.macrostomam.

(3.C.(Ditropis) convexus. 8. Catoulus Calcadeneis.

+. Mygchopoma limbiferum. 9.Pterocyclos tristis.

3. M. hirsutum VEnnen sculipta.

; dl. Streptaxis Canarica

6. Opisthostoma Fairbanks.

1869. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 143

The sculpture is peculiar. Buta single specimen has been obtained

by Major Beddome.

Cyclophorus ravidus, Bens., has been found by Major Beddome,

on the Anamullay hills, and in the Wynaad. In both localities it

attains a considerably larger size than the type. The Annamullay form

is 27 mellimeters by 22, that from the Wynaad, 24 mill. by 191.

The operculum, when in good condition, has raised margins to the

whorls. I am inclined to consider the species identical with the

Ceylon C. annulatus, Troschel.

Auricula nitidula, described in No. VIII of these contributions,

J. A.S. B. Vol. XXXVI, Part II, p. 64, proves to bea variety of

A. Gangetica of Benson, with a thicker and darker coloured epider-

mis, but not otherwise differing. The dark coloured variety occurs

also in the Ganges delta, where it has been found by Dr. Stoliczka.

HixPLaNnation oF Pirate XVI.

Fig. 1, 1 a, 1 b, Cyclophorus (Ditropis) planorbis, W. Blanf., magni-

fied 2 diameters.

2,2a, 2b, C. (Ditropis) Beddomei, W. Blanf., ditto.

2c, Operculum of ditto ditto.

3, 3 a, 3b, C. (Ditropis) convecus, W. Blant., ditto.

» 4,4 a, 4 b, Mychepoma limbiferum, W. Blanf., ditto.

» 40¢,4d, Operculum of ditto ditto.

» 9,9a, Ob, LZ. hirsutum, Beddome, ditto.

» 9 ¢, 5d, Operculum of ditto ditto.

6, 6 a, Opisthostoma Fairbanki, W. Blantf,, magnified 10 dia-

)

”?

)

meters.

7, O. macrostoma Beddome, magnified 4 diameters.

8, Cataulus Calcadensis, Beddome, natural size.

9, 9 a, Pteroryclos tristis, W. Blanf., natural size.

5, 10, Ennea sculpta, W. Blanf., magnified 2 diameters.

» Ll, 11 a, 11 b, Streptavis Canarica, Beddome, ditto.

”

Bian

)

PAI

JOURNAL

OF THE

AolATIC SOCIETY. ©

—@—

Part Il.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. III.—1869.

LONIOOPOPOPOLOPLPIPPLLPLPLVLPPELLLPLLPOPPRAAEA III

temarks on the species of Pandanus; by 8. Kurz, Ese., Curator of

the Calcutta Herbarium.

[Received and read, 4th November, 1868. ]

Since the publication of my revision* of Indian screw-pines, and

their allies, in Seemann’s Journal of Botany, Vol. V. p. 93 etc., I had

the opportunity of consulting Gaudichaud’s work, ‘‘ Voyage autour

du monde sur la Bonite,” and this gives me an opportunity for a few

additional remarks. ,

Although I am at present unable to recognize several of Gaudi-

chaud’s species, the study of the carefully executed plates of this

work have considerably added to my knowledge of screw-pines. From

the analyses of Mreycinetia and Sussea it appears quite clear, that the

Pandanee and Freycinetiee cannot be separated from each other, as

* In this paper some errors and omissions have crept in, which I now take

the opportunity of correcting.

Typha elephantina p. 95, read: folia... basi triquetra lateribus concavis,

supra plana; instead “ excavato-trigona.”

II. Pandaneae, p. 94, add: Ovarium superum.

Ill. Cyclantheae, p. 94, add: Ovarium inferum. The Freycinetieae are to

be transferred to II, Pandaneae.

Pandanus furcatus, var. Indica, p. 102, read: drupae valde convexae, for

* concavae.”’

_ Pandanus laevis, p. 127, read: spadix masc. etc., sed hae laevissimae, in-

stead “ brevissimae.”

146 Remarks on the species of Pandanus. [No. 3,

I have formerly believed, having lain too much stress upon the num-

ber and the position of the ovules. Gaudichaud’s genus Swssea, and

especially Souwleyetia Freycinetioides make it now even difficult, to re-

tain Pandanus and Freycinetia as distinct genera. The only differences

of some value, to distinguish them, seem to rest in the general habit,

and the more or less regular superposition of the pendulous ovules

along the marginal placenta. The ripe seeds in F’reycinetia seem all

to be furnished with a black and hard testa, while in Pandanus, they

are only covered by a white membrane.

In revising Gaudichaud’s species, I am now able to rectify my

sections, formerly proposed, and I do this in recapitulating at the

same time all the legitimate species, but omitting all those dubious

ones, which have been already enumerated in my above quoted

paper. It is impossible to form a correct idea, how far several

of Gaudichaud’s species of Pandanee are really identifications with

Bory St. Vincent’s Mascarhen species, bearing homonymous specific

names, as the plates are accompanied only by an incomplete explana-

tion of the figures. My own idea is, that they are most probably

respective identifications ; Gaudichaud’s Loussinta Indica, |. ¢. t. 2],

at least, isa copy of Rheede’s figures of Perin Kaida (Pandanus —

unipapillatus, Dennst.)

Dr. F. von Miller has recently published some notes on Australian —

Pandanee, mentioning therein two additional species of Pandanus, |

P. aquaticus, and P. monticola, F. Muell. (Hragment. Phyt., V, p. 40).

Unfortunately the names of these species are not accompanied by —

a description.

PANDANUS, Rumph.

Szot. I. Acrostiama. Drupae simplices; stigmata stricta, sim-

plicia, spinescentia, extrorsum vergentes; filamenta libera; antherae ~

acuminate; ovula solitaria. (Asquetia, Gaud., ex parte.)

* Stigmata persistentia (0. e. non nist cum toto pericarpio separanda.) |

1. P. caricosus, Rumph.; Kurz, in Seem. Jour. of Bot., V,

Db 100: ,

2. P. affinis, Kurz, loc. c., p. 101,

3. BP. foetidus, Rxb., Kurz, loc. c., p. 101. Fisquetia macro-

carpa, Gaud,, Bot., Voy. Bonite, t. 4, figs. 2-8.

1869.] Remarks on the species of Pandanus. 147

P. ovatus (Fisquetia ovata, Gaud., loc. ¢., ¢. 4, fig. 1,) seems to

belong to this section.

** Stigmata secedentia, (2. e. md base fragilia.)

_ 4, P.ornatus, (Misquetia ornata, Gaud., loc. c., t. 5, fig.1, 8 et

9; et F. militaris, Gaud., ib. f. 2-7.)

I would have united this species with my P. helicopus, but Gaudi-

chaud’s plant has the peduncle below the syncarpe straight, while

P. helicopus, in a young stage has it always spirally twisted, becom-

ing afterwards lengthened and pendulous; also the serrature of the

leaves are in Gaudichaud’s figure much sharper.

5. §. helicopus. Kurz, loc. c., p. 101.

Of this species the male flowers are still unknown, and it is doubt-

ful, therefore, whether it should be placed in Acrostegma, or rather

form a distinct subsection of Ryckia.

Szor. IL. Ryoxra. Drupae simplices; stigmata introrsum vergen-

tes, secedentia, spinescentia, saepissime furcata, strictiuscula, v. a

dorso depressa; filamenta racemosa, v. palmatim connata; antherae

aristatae, v. apiculatae; ovula solitaria. (Barrotia, Gaud, ex parte.)

* Stigmata brevia, a dorso plano depressa, spinescentia, bi~ rarius

tri- furcata v. simplicia, ossea.

6. P.furcatus, Rxb., Kurz, loc. c., p. 102. .

Barrotia diodon, Gaud., loc. ¢., t. 8, fig. 9-14, apparently belongs to

this species, but Barrotia monodon, ejusd., loc. c., fig. 14-25, can with

equal probability represent very young drupes of P. fwrcatus, or full

grown ones of the two following species.

7. P.labyrinthicus, Kurz, loc. c., p. 103.

8. BP. nitidus, Kurz, loc. c., p. 103.

«xk Stigmata brevissima, a dorso oblique depressa, marginibus rotun-

datis v. crenulatis.

9. P. graminifolius, Kurz, loc. c. 104.

10. P. Ceramicus, Rumph., Kurz, loc. c. 104.

Sect. III. Kervra. Drupae in phalanges connatae, raro una

alterave simplice intermixtae ; stigmata sessilia, v. sub-sessilia, peltata,

y. reniformia; filamenta connata; antherae aristatae ; ovula solitaria,

(Kurz loc. c., cum syn.; Tuckeya, Gaud.; Vinsonia, Gaud. ; Barrotia,

148 Remarks on the species of Pandanus. [No. 3,

Gaud., ex parte ; Hombronia, Gaud. ; Hudouxia, Gaud.? ; Dorystigma,

Gaud. ?)

11. P. Leram, Jones (non Kurz), P. Leram £8. macrocarpa,

Kurz loc. c. 106. }

Pandanus Leram, as represented by Fontana in Asiatic Researches,

ismy var. B. macrocarpa of my supposed P. Leram. The same

variety agrees apparently very well with Hudouxia macrocarpa, Gaud.,

loc. c.,t. XVIII, and perhaps also with H. ? Delesserti, eyusd. loc. ¢. f.

7-8, notwithstanding an apparent slight difference between the stigma-

ta. Both forms, P. Leram, Jones, and P. Andamanensiwm, as I now

shall call the form, described by me erroneously as P. Leram of

Jones, occur on the Andaman islands, but I only could obtain of the

former very old fruits, an account of which the recognition of the real

form of stigmata was very difficult. In the Bot. Gardens, Calcutta,

drupes of true P. Leram (coming from a plant in the gardens, said to

be introduced from the Nicobars) are preserved, but also in a state

unfit for a correct decision. The young plant (the old one having ©

been destroyed by the Cyclone in 1864,) would also differ from

P. Andamanensium, by the form of the leaves which are almost cuspi-

dato-acuminate, and not simply acuminate. This appears to be one

more reason for retaining the two forms as distinct species, until a re-

examination of more complete specimens may enable me to give a

more satisfactory explanation of the point in question.

12. P. Andamanensium, Kurz. P. Leram, Kurz loc. c¢, —

105, excl. var. B. (non Jones). ;

13. P. dubius, Spreng., Kurz loc. c. 127.

Hombronia edulis, Gaud., loc. c. t. XXII, of 17, is not likely distinct —

from P. dubius, and Barrotia tetrodon, Gaud., loc. c., t. XIII, f. 1—8,

has all the appearance of being only a young syncarpe of the same

plant. r

14. P. Kaida, Kurz. P. Candelabrum ? Kurz loc. ¢. 27, excl.

syn. omnibus, excepta citat Rheediana.

15. P. Candelabrum, P. d. B., Fl. d’Oware I. 87, t. 21-22 ;

Kth. Exum. III. 97, (non Kurz) from ae Africa,

I have little doubt that Gaudichaud’s Tuckeya Candelabrum (loc. ¢

t. XX VI, f. 10—12) represents the true P. Candelabrum, and have,

therefore, changed the specific name of the previous species which is”

restricted to Inda.

1869. ] Remarks on the species of Pandanus. 149

16. P. verus, Rumph., Kurz loc. c. 125.

I believe that all the Pandan veri of Gaudichaud have to be re-

garded asidentical with the present species, as Pandanus Linnaei, Gaud.

loc. cit t. XXII, f 1—8; P. Chamissonis, egusd. loc. cit., f. 9; P.

Sragraus, Rumphii, Rheedei, Loureiri, Menziesui, Boryt and Douglasii,

figured loc. cit. plate XXII. The two latter look somewhat similar to

forms of P. Andamanensium, but such elongate drupes are found also

occasionally in Indian forms of P. verws.

17. P. laevis, Rph., Kurz. loc. cit. 126.

18. P. utilis, Bory, Kurz. loc. cit. 131.

Here, as in the case of the former, I cannot agree at all with the

view taken by Mr. Gaudichaud, as regards the definition of species,

and I have good reason to believe that all the following of his pro-

posed species have to be considered as synomyms of P. wtilis.

Vinsonia utilis, Gaud. loc. cit., t. XVII. f. 1—5 e¢ t. XXII, f 1—6

et 9—18 (germinatio) ; Vins. stephanocarpa, ejusd. loc. c. t. XVII, f

2—6 et 7-8 ; Vins. purpurascens, ejusd. loc. c. ¢. XVII, f 6—9; Vins.

humilis, eyusd. loc. c., f. 10-11; and Vins. elegans; ejusd. loc. «., f.

12-13, all figured on plate XVII.

The last three forms are Wallich’s P. lucidus, and are included

loc. cit. under my var. B. lucida.

The drupes of Vinsonia palustris, ejusd. loc. cit. t. XVII. 7 18—23

are undistinguishable from those divided forms of P. wtilis, of which

I have given a few characteristic representations in Dr. Seemann’s

Journal v. t. 64.

19. P. lucidus, (Vinsonia ? lucida, Gaud., loc. c. f. 14-15.)

This species, although very near to P. utilis, var. lucidus, is ap-

parently distinct, differing in the form of the stigmata. A very good

representation of it, exists in the Library of the Bot. Gardens,

Calcutta, under the name of “ Pandanus lucidus,” Wall., but it is not

the species which is now cultivated under that name in the gardens.

20. P. sylvestris, (Vinsonia sylvestris, Gaud., loc. c. t. XVII,

B. 10-17). .

21. P. Pervilleanus, (Vinsonia Pervilleana, Gaud., loc. c., t.

XXXI, f. 1—7; probably including also Vins. drupacea, ejusd., |. ¢. f.

8—13).

150 Remarks on the species of Pandanus. [No. 3,

Besides the above named apparently well-founded species, the fol-—

lowing somewhat dubious forms belong also to the section Kewra.

Dorystigma Madagascariense, Gaud., loc. cit., t. XX XI, f. 12—18,

and D. Mauritianum, ejusd., loc. cit., t. XIII, f. 25—27,

Sect. IV. Mrcrostrema. Drupae simplices; stigmata sessilia,

semilunata, reniformia, hippocrepiformia v. bilobata; filamenta con-

nata; antherae truncatae v. apiculatae; ovula solitaria. (oullioya,

Gaud.; ZLussea, Gaud. ex parte; Jeanneretia, Gaud. ; Heterostigma,

Gaud.?; Bryantia, Gaud. ?).

* Stigmata terminalia, bilobata, lobis integris v. bilobulatis ; fila-

menta connata ; antherae apiculatae. (Foullioya, Gaud.)

22. P. racemosus. (Foullioya racemosa, Gaud., 1. cit. t.

XXVI, f. 1—9, et Foullioya maritima, ejusd,, 1. cit. £. 21—24).

** Stigmata terminalia, renifornua v. hippocrepiformia ; filamenta

racemose connata ; antherae truncatae. (Jeanneretia, Gaud.)

23. P. humilis, Rumph., Kurz loc. cit. 105. Sussea microstig-

ma, Gaud. loc. cit., t. XXV, fi 8—10.

Gaudichaud’s figure represents a polygamous plant, not yet record-

ed in the genus Pandanus. ‘The form of the anthers agree pretty

well with those derived from the male spadices.

23. P.littoralis, (Jeanneretia littoralis, Gaud., loc. ¢., t. XXV,

f. 1—7).

Sussea lageneformis, Gaud., loc. c.,t. XXV, f. 11—14, and Hetero- —

stigma Heudelotianum, ejusd., loc. cit., f. 15—31, I have not as yet

been able to discriminate.

24. Pp. latifolius, Rph., Kurz 1, c. 105.

The position of P. latvfolius must still remain undecided, but it is ;

certainly a very distinct species. The leaves, when recently dried, ©

are scented and used by the Malayan ladies in their toilette cases, like —

the spathes of P. verus and P. laevis, q

25. P. conoideus, (Thouars ?), (Sussea conoidea, Gaud., loc. —

elt.,/ 1. SEXDV9s

This is a very distinct species. °

*e Stigmata lateralia, (Bryantia, Gaud.)

26. P. butyrophorus, (Bryantia butyrophora, Gaud., loc. cit. 3 i

ap o.9) -

_ ——s~ cee

1869.] Notes on the Geology and Physical features &c. 151

This species very much resembles P. Ceramicus in the form of the

syncarpe and of the drupes. The syncarpe of P. Ceramicus, however,

is drooping when ripe, and the stigmata are also differently formed.

Szot. V. Sovuneyetra, Gaudichaud. Drupae simplices; stigmata

semilunata v. subhippocrepiformia, subsessilia; ovula 3 placentae

basilari instructa.

IT — Pp, freycinetioides, (Souwleyetia freycinetioides, Gaud.,

loc. ¢., t. X XTX).

Gaudichaud includes Sowleyetza in the FRuyoinerizasg, but I think

the respective species is more correctly referred to Pandanus.

eee

Notes on the Geology and Physical features of the Jaintia hills ;—

by Captain H. H. Gopwin-Austen, F. R. G. 8., Lopographical

Survey of India.

[Received 16th December, 1868, read 3rd Feb, 1869.]

The western boundary of the district of the Jaintia hills, is the

river Mangat, crossed on the direct road from MLailangkot to Jawai;

the valley is deep and extremely picturesque; the hills rising from

the narrow strip of rice land at the bottom in steep slopes of grass and

wooded ravines and close under the crest into precipitous scarps.

Among others the Nongjerong hill presents very conspicuous features.

The geological formation is here of metamorphic rocks, a well strati-

fied gneiss, and in the bed of the river the boulders are almost entirely

of that rock, mixed with quartzitic sandstone, and a few boulders are

of a dark green trap.

Ascending from the river to the top of the slopes of the left

bank, and passing the village of Simunting on the right, a short

distance, the first patches of a stratified rock are seen, a coarse

gritty sandstone of light colour, forming the tops of the little

eminences and never exceeding here perhaps 20 feet in thickness.

They are lost sight of as soon as the descent into the Mantadu com-

-mences, where the metamorphic rocks, dipping at high angle and with a

EK. N, EE. strike, are seen again: the sandstone series reappearing when

the opposite ascent is crowned. A strong interbedded conglomerate

is very noticeable here, always lying at the base of this formation.

152 Notes on the Geology and Physical , [No. 3,

Its chief peculiarity now consists in the beds of dark purple hue, in

others so fine, white or chalky in appearance, that they might almost

be mistaken for the latter rock. Broken up and mixed with water it

is used largely as a whitewash for native huts. Sandstone now

forms the mass of all the elevated points in Jawai, and is conspicuous

near the dak bungalow, resting horizontally on the highly tilted

older rocks. On the hill mass of Chirmang, south of Jawai and the

Mantadu, its thickness has greatly increased, bringing in above the

conglomerate thinner and finer beds, and less sandy in composition.

Here we find traces of the carbonaceous shales and in places a dark,

hard, earthy coal, invariably thin-bedded and altogether very local

in its distribution. To the east of Latuber the same features may

be seen all the way to Satunga, the metamorphics appearing on the

higher parts of the plateaux, where the sandstone only occurs in isola-

ted thin patches.

But at Satunga, we are introduced to a new series altogether,

viz. the limestone (mwmmulitic), of which an outlier forms a

mass with low perpendicular and jagged sides to the right of the

road, and on the very edge of the southern depression of the level

of the country. ‘To the south-west one or two wooded isolated

knolls shew the limits of the northern extension of that rock. It

rests in this locality on the sandstones also associated with coal beds ;

and there is no doubt that these last are of secondary age, the proto-

types of rocks better developed under Cherra Poonjee and thinning

out at Maobelarkar, on the road to Shillong. There is also an appear-

ance of a break in the succession between these secondary strata and

the nummulitics, pointing to a long lapse of time, and to very differ-

ent conditions of the surface, before the deposition of the limestone ©

began. Here we are I think also near the confines of the tertiary

sea in which those rocks were formed, as shown by the thinning out —

northwards of the limestone beds.

Proceeding south to the low range of hills of which War Hill Station _

forms the highest point, the limestone has greatly increased in thick- ‘ :

ness, and is superimposed at the same time by beds of quitea different

mineralogical character, being nodular, ferruginous and highly fossi- — *:

liferous. Above this well marked horizon no limestone with Num- —

mulites was seen; local unconformity of these last is noticeable, and

1869. | Seatures of the Jaintia hills. 153

either due to a falling in of the limestone, or, as I am more inclined to

think, to a prior denudation of the limestone surface. The fossils are

minute with an occasional Gastropod of larger size. This ridge, on

the north of which lies Nongkli, well known as one of the last strong-

holds of the Jaintias during the rebellion of 1861-62, is succeeded

on the south by the main ridge and the watershed of the hills, the

stream at Nongkli being a feeder of the Kopili. Crossing a low pass

at the head of the last mentioned stream, the view that suddenly

opens out, is almost Himalayan; below lies the deep valley of the

Umsnat, backed on the east by the high mass of Marangksi, its

precipitous cliffs shewing out grandly against the noble forest that

covers all else. In this great section, everything above the Nummu-

litics is exposed, this last forming the bottom beds in the valley

succeeded by the fossiliferous ferruginous strata, and again above by

an enormous thickness of soft, thick-bedded sandstone of light ochre

tint ;~-this higher mass is the universal rock of all the higher forest-

clad hills running thence due east to Asalu. In the bed of the

Umsnat, the limestone is almost horizontal, but lower down has a very

slight dip southward. It also thickens in this direction very rapidly

with interstratified beds of sandstone.

The whole mags preserves its horizontality, and there is nothing very

noticeable over a large and broad band, save that with the deepening

valley lower beds of the limestone are exposed, but in no spot did I see

sandstone of secondary age, or one that could be mistaken for it. The

Umsnat joins the Simleng, and the united streams become the Lubah,

which forms a junction with the Barak near Molagul. ‘The Simleng

and Lubah form a deep valley with an east and west strike, and the

mass of the upper nummulitic or tertiary sandstone rises precipitously

on the south, forming a ridge parallel with it. Upon this line, the first

bending over to the south commences. The best section for observing

this peculiar formation is near Katom, where the Lubah turns south ina

gorge, cutting diagonally right across the whole mountain mass. The

solid limestone of great thickness, perhaps 1,000 feet, and the higher

sandstones all have the same great incline, becoming afterwards perpen-

dicular and being succeeded at this above mentioned point by a thin-

bedded series of newer rocks, clays and sandstones, of various colours

and hardness. The angles of dip vary slightly north and south

154 Notes on the Geology and Physical [No. 3,

of the perpendicular, they shew a great crushing, perhaps folding of the

beds.

As we leave the higher hills for the low eminences (Tilas) the sand-

stones become coarser, having scattered through them strings of small

pebbles, as also large lumps of lignite. In one place the whole of the

roots and part of the trunk of a large tree were seen in the perpendi-

cular strata of the river bank. These last mentioned rocks evidently

are of lower Sewalik age, and are capped unconformably further into

the plains, by masses of irregularly bedded clays and conglomerates,

which pass under the present alluvial surface.

Before closing my remarks on the geology of the Jaintia Hills,

the nummulitic coal should be alluded to. This has long been

known to exist at Lakadong, and was there, I believe, once work-

ed. The same formation occurs at many points further east, par-

ticularly near Narpo, at no great distance from the Lubah river,

navigable for small boats; its value has yet to be made known and

perhaps established. There is no reason why beds of considerable

extent should not, with proper search, be discovered. Its position,

high in the nummulitic limestone, is precisely the same as that at

Cherra Poonjee. This coal is no where met with east of the Lubah

and Umsnat rivers.

The most striking feature of this part of the Khasia range of hills, —

is the extremely even height of the central mass. Nowhere is this

so well seen as from the peaks of the north Cachar range Marangksi,

&c., the dead level line of the whole mass as far east as Timang —

Hill Station, is from here most noticeable; even the Shillong peaks

make hardly any shew inthe distance. This central mass or high

table land is all of gneiss associated with granite, generally ata high

angle with a W.S. W. to EH. N.E. strike, and the denudation it has been

subjected to must have been enormous prior to the secondary epoch.

It falls very gradually to the south.for a long distance, with a last :

sudden dip over Jaintiapur. On the north the lower levels are |

successively reached by a series of steps, that can be followed for a

many miles, the last descent being the greatest, corresponding to g

the like sudden depression at Nunklow, &. Timang and Saranthu ‘

1869. ] features of the Jaintia hills. 155

the trap rock comes in with the fallin the country, and the high

isolated peaks to the south of the Mangkhen are found to be a con-

-tinuation of the quartzitic sandstones of the Shillong peak, &c., almost

perpendicular, but lying up against an amygdaloid trap, associated

with a true granite which comes in with an east and west run on

the north, and forms the remarkable rounded bosses, such as Billu

Kongor, &c. Granite also occurs contiguous to the gneiss north of

Nartiang, and thence in an easterly direction immediately north

of Nongjinghi which is almost the highest point of the Jaintia hills,

4,563 feet above sea level. The Nongjinghi ridge is gneiss, resting

against the granite. As at Lailangkote in the Khasia hills, the trap

is closely associated with the granite, and in such situations the

titaniferous iron sand is found in great quantity, and smelting fur-

naces are seen in all the adjacent villages. This dark green trap

appears to have been injected between the granite and gneiss, or be-

tween the former and the quartzitic sandstones at or about the period

of the great disturbance and change in the metamorphic series. The

parallelism of the drainage lines south-east of Jawai, is very remark-

able, and with the cross-drainage at right angles breaks the country

up into irregular parallelograms, which probably display a monster

jointing of these metamorphic rocks.

The most remarkable lines taken up in succession by different great

valleys and ravines are—Ilst, a main line, rather irregular, but to which

all lines to the south conform, commencing on the west at Karpentér

village on the Mangat; that river carries it to Jarain, H. N. E., up to

the junction of the Kawa Manvi with the Mantadu, north-westerly

by the Keremontha ravine past Waptng into the Umpa-ai and by the

Mirin into the Kopili near Thelgasi; this last river continuing on for

many miles with a north-east course, altogether constituting a great

physical feature extending from west to east for 55 miles. The 2nd

line, at an average distance on the south of 6 miles, can be traced

- from Pomtadong, past Thangbuli, to the. Mantadu river at the june-

tion of the Baliang, on the left bank, following this last named river,

over the watershed into the Lonnang river, and in succession by the

Umkorpong to the north of Satunga, where this river turns sharp

at right angles to the south. Yet the same direction can be carried

onto Umthnong, and is lost in the sudden W. 8S. W. bend of the

Trucs -

Kopili.

156 Notes on the Geology and Physical features, dc. [No. 3,

The third line can be taken up at the base of the hills near

Jaintiapur, by the river Rangpani, into the Umchaliang, 8. W. to

N. E., crossing the Mantadu, on again to the Lama river, past Tham-

pianai G. T. §., into the Pamesken, and by a succession of ravines to

the north-west of Khleriat, where the last stream, the Shashem, turns

to the S. 8S. E. The same run, but with a more east and west course,

is taken up in succession on the north by the Muntang and Munriang

rivers, tributaries of the Kopili, and lastly by the Mankhen.

These great lines of continuous depression are again displayed

further on the south and east and shew there a decided curvature.

I may note the Lubah, Simleng and Artan into the head waters of

the Kopili, north of Sherfaisip, and again further south the deep

depression marked by the valleys of the Kimra Larang, Kayeng into

the Jatinga and, taken upon the north of the main watershed at

Asalu, by the valley of the Dhansiri. To the south of this the strata

are found tilted high in that direction giving the more pointed shape

to the peaks of the south-west Burail range. The line is intimately

connected with the original elevation of the whole mountain mass, and

the parallel continuous lines, already noticed, are doubtless due to the

same parallel forces of elevation. As might be expected the geo-

logical formations all coincide with these great natural flexures,

carrying the nummulitic series with its limestones, and the cretaceous

rocks, far north on the Kopili, and thus into the valley of Assam.

Camp, North Cachar, December, 1868.

“ene 2 O02 OES OEE

Pl: XVI.

{

SaEee ieee aca

Fareed meng ”

fa)

17.

. Gibbula (?) sub-plicata i. Solaruum unpressum

: 3. Stolicx kana 472. Emarguwla papiionacen

| Pisulina Adamsiana 43. Fissurella canaliter w

Tallorbis. rosecla _ 14. Macroéh.scutiformis

Rapana bella 15. Fissurella(?) scrobiculata

Clanculus Ceylanicus 16, —— capuloidea

Gibbula Dupontiana 17. Sub-emarg. Oldhemiana

Blanfordiana 18. Recellaria corditormis

Euchelus Seychellarum

157

Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, Sc. ;—

by Messrs. G. anp H. Nevitt.

[Received and read 3rd February, 1869. |

This paper is a continuation of the one we had the honour of

placing before the Society at the August meeting of last year (1868).

These new species, as likewise those previously described, were, with

one exception, collected in the Southern Province of Ceylon, mostly

near Balapiti; the Rapana, one of us had previously also found at La

Réunion (Bourbon). We have also seen several of the small species

_ of TRocumps from Bombay and Arakan, probably all of them are to

be met with along our coasts, though the small and interesting

little species, we have here named Huchelus Seychellarum, we have

never met with anywhere in these seas, except at the Island of Mahé,

one of the Seychelle group.

Clanculus Ceylonicus—N. 8., Pl. XVII, Fig. 7.

T. parva, turbinata ; anfractibus senis, convexiusculis, albescentibus,

prope suturam posteriorem maculis fuscis transversaliter prolongatis

notatis, ad suturam anteriorem puncturatis ; costulis spiralibus quinis

in quogue anfractu granulosis ; sutura subprofunda ; ultimo anfractu ad

peripheriam subrotundato ; bast leviter convexiuscula, granulato-costu-

lata, umbilicata : wmbilico margine incrassato ac denticulato circum-

scripto ; apertura quadrangulari, labro intus crasse costulato, labvo

_ calloso, recto, ad medium obsolete, antice erasse dentato.

Alt. 7 Mil.—Diam. maj. T Mil.

Abundant.—S. Prov. Ceylon ;—also occurs at Bombay.

Euchelus Seychellarum—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 10.

T. parva, depresso-conica, sub-globulosa, alba, solidula ; anfractibus

quaternis, convexiusculis, suturd impressd junctis, costulis spiralibus

minute sed confertim granulatis ornatis ; ultimo anfractu ad peripheriam

_rotundato; basi convexd, spiraliter granulato-costulata, anguste

wmbilicata ; apertura subrotundata : labro uniforme arcuato, ad mar-

genem obtusiusculo, intus sulcato ; labio recto, oblique decurrente, antice

i denticulo parvo instructo.

Alt. 24 Mil.— Diam. maj. 3 Mil.

Scarce.—Island of Mahé (one of the Seychelle group).

—

158 Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, Jc. [No. 3,

Gibbula Dupontiana—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 8.

T. parva, trochiformis, pallida, transversaliter maculis vrregulart-

bus fuscis notata; anfractibus costulis senis spiralibus, crassis

circumdatis, prope suturam angustioribus, transversaliter liners subtilis-

simes obliquis ornatis ; ultimo anfractu ad peripheriam angulato, ad

basin applanate, profunde wmbilicato ; apertura sub-quadrangulari,

labro ad marginem acuto, intus sub-incrassato ; labio tenwi, svmplict,

leviter arcuato.

Alt. 7 Mil.—Diam. maj. 6 Mil.

Common on sea-weed at low water, S. Prov. Ceylon.

This species is named after M. Dupont, of Mauritius, whose in-

defatigable zeal has so greatly increased our knowledge of the interesting

fauna of that Island. The nearest shell, I know of, to the above is

one described by Reeve as Ziziphinus vexillum (G. Nevill).

Gibbula Blanfordiana—N. &., Pl. XVII, Fig. 9.

T. parva, turbinata, depresso-globulosa, solida, alba, rubide variegata

et marmorata ; spira ad apicem sub-obtusa ; anfractibus quinis, postice

sensim angustioribus, ad medium sub-angulatis, spiraliter costulatis :

costulis senis, crasstusculis tenutoribus alternantibus ; ultimo anfractu

ad peripheriam rotundato ; basi convexiuscula, wmb-ilicata : umbilico

callositate albida, paulo incrassata, cireumscripto ; apertura sub-rotun- —

data, labro crassiusculo, intus striato, ad marginem eleganter crenulato,

postice paulo deflexo ; labvo prope recto, oblique decurrente, levi, ad

medium paululum inerassato.

Alt. 53 Mil._— Diam. maj. 64 Mil.

Not uncommon ;—S. Prov. Ceylon ; found on sea-weed at low water.

A somewhat allied species to the above was described by Deshayes

in his work on the shells of Bourbon, as Turbo (/) filifer, the differ-

ences in the umbilicus, the columellar margin, &c., however, distin-

guish it at the first glance. I have also seen this species from Arakan,

in Mr. H. F. Blanford’s fine collection ; like the following, it probably

has some considerable range in these seas. (G. Nevill).

Gibbula Stcliczkana—N. S., Pl. XVII, Figs. 2-3.

T. conoidea, parva, solidula, olivacea seu rufescens, maculis trans-

versalibus pallidis notata, aut minute variegata, epidermide fulvescente

enduta ; anfractibus senis, sub-planis, suturd impressd sejunctis, spira-

1869.] Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, Xe. 159

liter minute sulcatis : sulcis iris depressis latioribus, equi-distantibus

separatis ; ultumo anfractu maximo, ad peripheriam angqulato ; bast

leviter convexa, spiraliter striata, profunde et anguste umbilicata, in

excavatione umbilict albida; apertura oblique quadrangulari, intus

callositate moderata ac levi instructa ; labro ad marginem sub-obtuso,

labio prope recto, albido, antice truncatim desinente.

Alt. 64 Mil.— Diam. may. 5 Mil.

Not uncommon, in the same places as the preceding.

This pretty little species varies immensely, not only in colour and

size, but also as regards the convexity of the whorls and the angle of

‘the spire. There are specimens from Arakan and from the Anda-

mans, in the collection of Dr. Stoliczka, after whom the species is

named, and who kindly assisted us in drawing up the descriptions of

the species noticed in this paper.

Gibbula ? sub-plicata—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 1.

T. turbinata, tenuis, semipellucida, alba ; anfractibus quinis, tubulo-

sis, ad suturam applanatis, spiraliter costulatis : costulis in anfractu

_ penultimo tribus, omnibus valde prominentibus, interstiis profundis,

distantioribus separatis, in anfractibus superioribus transversaliter

cancellatis sew scrobiculatis, im ultimo spiraliter subtilissime striatis ;

_ anfractibus omninis ad suturam transversaliter plicatis ; basi sub-

convexa, anguste umbilicata, quatuor costulis spiralibus ornata, interstiis

- duobus, prope umbilicum sitis, transversaliter costulatis ; apertura fere

circulari, margine simplict circumdata, labio moderate insinuato ;

: superficie interna paululum margaritacea.

Alt. 5 Mil.— Diam. maj. 4 Ail.

Rare ;—S. Prov. Ceylon.

There is some difficulty in determining in what genus, or sub-genus

to place this curious little species, the thinness of shell and the peculiar

sculpture of the body-whorl, as well as the slightness of the. internal

pearly layer, make its position, as long as the animal and operculum

~ are unknown, somewhat doubtful.

Tallorbis—N. Sub-G.

T. sub-orbiculata, subconica, columelld solidd, antice applanatd,

transversaliter plicata et abrupte termiata instructa ; habitu genert,

Thalotia dicto, affinis.

E _ We experience some considerable difficulty in determining the exact

160 Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, Fe. (No. 3,

position of the above sub-genus. Thalotia appears to be the one to

which it is next allied, though the general form, sculpture and sub-

stance are very far removed from any species of that genus with which

we are acquainted.

Tallorbis roseola—N. S., Pl., XVII, Fig. 5.

T. depresso-conica ; anfractibus quinis, in latitudine rapide crescen-

tibus, suturis profundis sejunctis, spiraliter distanter costulatis : costulis

in anfractu penultimo tribus ; omninis distantibus, tuberculis numerosis,

roseis eleganter ornatis, interstiis latis, wna stria spirali in medio divisis,

transversaliter cancellatis ; basi convexa, similariter ornata ; apertura

ampla, subrotundata, margaritacea, intus im adultis speciminibus levi,

in gunioribus sulcata : labro haud werassato, ad marginem crenulato,

labio tenui ; columella antice incrassata, subrefleaa, plicis tribus, tortis

enstructa.

Alt. 114 Mhl.—Diam. mg.11 Mil.

Very rare;—S. Prov. Ceylon.

Pisulina—N. G.

T. crassiuscula, polita, semi-globosa, neritiformis, spird brevi, apertura

sub-orbiculari, integra, haud umbilicatd instructa ; labio colwmellari

applanato, calloso, in medio dentiforme dilatato, labro simplict. :

This genus approximates so closely to Calceolina of A. Adams, that

we entertained doubts, as to whether it was desirable to separate it, the

remarkable protuberance of the inner columellar lip, however, decided

us on doing so, though, until the animals and opercula (if any ?)

have been carefully examined, we shall feel some doubts, as to whether

both of them are not mere sections of Tevnostoma.

Pisulina Adamsiana—N. &., Pl. XVII, Fig. 4.

T. parva, alba, levis, solida; spira obtusa ; anfractibus quaternis,

superis interne, sicut in speciminibus Neritarum, evanidis ; sutura

indistincta ; labio columellart calloso, polito, levi, denticulo lato,

depresso ad medium munito ; labro intus paululum incrassato, polito,

ad margunem. acuto.

Alt. 44 Mil.— Diam. ma. 4 MMi.

Dead, on the sands ; 8. Prov. Ceylon.

We have named the above interesting little species after Mr. Henry 7

Adams, who has most kindly given us much valuable assistance and —

aid, besides describing many of our new Mascarene shells.

1869.] Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, Se. 161

Rapana bella—N. $., Pl. XVII, Fig. 6.

T. pyriformis, tenuis ; anfractibus quinis, convexis, suturd impressd

— junctis,ultimo anfractu valde inflato ; spira brevi, obtusiuscula ; superficie

alba, fasciis ac striis roseolis, transversaliter elongatis notata, ac striis

spiralibus, postice sub-obsoletis, antice ad basin crassis, lamellatis, seu cris-

preulatis ornata; apertura lata, arcuata, postice sub-angulata antice multo

angustiort ; labro simplict, tenut ad marginem undulato ; labio levi.

emprums antice calloso ; bast producta, antice canali brevi recurvato, ter-

minata, umbilicata : umbilico carind rugatd seu lamellosd evreumscripto,

Alt, 21 Mil.— Diam. maj. 22 Mil,

Very rare. Bourbon and Ceylon.

Wood in his “‘ Catalogue of Shells” (pl. 18, fig. 81b) figures a shell

apparently belonging, to this species, under the name of Bulla rapa,

Lin., from China. Hanley, however, in his ‘‘ Ipsa Linnei Conchylia”

states that Linnxus’ Bulla rapa is identical with Lamarck’s Pyrula

papyracea, a quite different species from the present one.

Emarginula papilionacea—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 12.

T. ovato elongata, subconica, moderate elevata, tenuis, alba ; apice sub-

centralt postico, acuminato ac incurvo ; superficie, costulis radiantibus

guindecimis fortioribus, swb-tuberculatis ac scrobiculatis, liners alteris

numerosis tenuroribus, rugulatis interpositis ornata ; jfissura antica

moderate iecisa, subangusta, postece elevata ac rugulosa ; superficie

interiori nitida, radiatim leviter sulcata, impressione musculart quadri-

partita, partibus duabus anterioribus multo minoribus quam posteribus,

omnibus triangularibus convergentibus, *

Long. 124 Mil—Diam. 9 Mil.

Very rare,—S. Prov. Ceylon.

There is no species at all resembling this handsome shell ; the inter-

nal impression bears a rather striking resemblance to a butterfly, the

shell is sufficiently transparent for it to be clearly discernible from

the exterior.

Emarginula capuloidea—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 16.

T. parva; regulariter ovata, capuloidea, tenuis, pellucida, apice

postico, arcutatim incurvato, instructa ; superficie costulis per-numerosis

aculis, equidistantibus, tenwioribus aliernantibus notata, iterspatics

162 Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, &c. [No. 3,

profunde ac rude scrobiculatis ; aperture marginibus valde crenulatis ;

jissurd central, antica, anguste et moderate incisd ; tmpressione

palliali postice rotundata, prope apicem lateraliter profunde insinuata,

antice prolongata ac gradatim latiorr, ad terminationem truncata.

Long. 5 Mil. —Diam. 4 Mil.—Alt. 3 Mil. :

Very rare,—S. Prov. Ceylon.

The nearest allied species to the above, that we know of, is #. crassi-

costata, Sow., it is, however, smaller, more elevated, not narrowed

anteriorly and the sculpture is somewhat different.

Sub-emarginula Oldhamiana—N. §., Pl. XVII, Fig. 17.

T. oblonga, conico-elevata, solida ; apice fees sub-centrali, sinis-

trorse incurvato ; superficie externa virescenti, in parte anteriort 5-6—

costata : costd medid maxima, ad marginem aperture valde prominent,

intus profunde canaliculata, in parte posteriori costis senis radiantibus

instructa ; omninis plus minusve rugatis, atque costulis et strvis nwmerosis

interpositis, versus apicem obsoletis notata ; superficie interna albida ;

ampressione palliali magna, prope marginem anteriorem profunde

imsinuata.

Long. 12 Mil.— Diam. 74 Mil.— Alt. 9 Mil.

S. Prov. Ceylon, Scarce.

The shell approaching nearest to the present speciesis S. Panhiensis, —

Q. and G., from which it differs by the peculiar sinistral bend of the

apex, which is likewise more decidedly central by the greater pro-

duction of the anterior rib, forming a far more prominent canal, by the

great inequality of the radiating ribs, &e.

Solarium impressum—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 11.

T. late-conica, depressiuscula, solidula, rufuld seu radiatim fusco

strigatd ; anfractibus guinis, depressis, suturd profunda junctis, ~

spiraliter quatuor seu quinque striis minute granulosis notata, striis m=

crementi obliquis sub-distincte decussatis ; suturis impressis earumque

marginibus paulo incrassatis ac granulatis ; ultimo anfractu ad peri-

pheriam sub-carinato, ad basin convexo, profunde umbilicato ; wmbilict —

margine incrassato granulatoque : granulis albidis, mediocriter promi-

nentibus ; apertura oblique quadrangulary marginibus simplicibus in-

structa.

Alt. 3 Mil.— Diam. 54 Mit.

S. Prov. Ceylon.

1869.] Descriptions of marine Gastropoda from Ceylon, Sc. 163

Though possessed of no very distinctive characteristics, there is no

species, I know of, with which the preceding can be confounded.

Fissurella (?) Scrobiculata—N. S., Pl. XVI, Fig. 15.

T. parva, depressa, fere regulariter ovalis, lateraliter prope medium

paululum angustata, antice ac postice rotundata, alba, fasciis radian-

tibus haud distinctis fulvescentibus notata ; superficie omnina supra

minute scrobiculata, ac striis radiantibus subobsoletis ornata ; foramene

late ovato, swb-postico, margine elevato circumdato; margine aperture

attenuato, minute crenulato ; superficie interna alba.

Long. 94 Mil.— Diam. 52 Mil.— Alt. 24 Mil.

Scarce, 8. Prov. Ceylon.

The sculpture of this interesting shell is very peculiar, the surface

being covered with rough, diamond-shaped scrobiculations, perhaps

caused by its being covered by the mantle of the animal, in which

case, this species will have to be removed to Macrochisma.

Fissurella canalifera—N. 8., Pl. XVII, Fig. 13.

TI’. ovato-elongata, antice angustata et ad terminationem retrorse

elevata, solidula, concentrice lamellose rugata et striis inequalibus

radiantibus ornata, rufescente pallida, nonnullis maculis elongatis ob-

scuris radiantibus notata ; foramine longo, sub-centrali, antice ac postice

rotundato ; superficie interna albida ; margine aperture obtusiusculo,

fere simplici, minute crenulato, antice insinuato; margine foraminis

paulo incrassato, obtusiusculo.

Long. 14 Mil.—Diam, 74 Mil.—Alt. 44 Mil.

S. Prov. Ceylon.

Hasily distinguished from any other species of Fissurella, by the

curious way in which the shell, at the anterior end is turned up and

contracted, thus forming interiorly a sort of canal; the black stripes

in position, also, seem tolerably constant, there being two broad ones

radiating from the posterior end of the foramen and the same number,

but narrower and more indistinct, from the anterior end.

Macrochisma scutiformis—N. 8., Pl. XVII, Fig. 14.

T. ovato-elongata, lateraliter compressiuscula et paulo insinuata, mo-

derate elevata, solidula, striis radiantibus ac concentrices minutis ornata,

sordide albida, fasciis nonnullis radiantibus fuscis notata; foramine longo,

excentrico fere tertiam partem diametri longitudinalis occupantn, postice

angustato ; margine aperture obtusiusculo, simplici ; margine forami-

mis mntus incrassato.

164 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3

Long. 122 Mil.—64 Mil.— Alt. 2 Mil.

Rare,—S. Prov. Ceylon.

We know of no other species of the genus with a similarly formed

foramen ; it differs from MW. hiantula, Swains., not only in the above

respect, but also in colour and in being laterally more compressed.

Rocellaria cordiformis—N. S., Pl. XVII, Fig. 18.

T. parva, fragilis, longitudinaliter oblonga, albida, antice obtuse

acuminata, postice producta, sub-rotundata ; wmbonibus twmescentibus,

paulo prominentibus, incurvatis ; hiatu cordiformi, parvo, via dimidiam

partem teste occupante ; superficie striis subtilibus, antice fortioribus,

undique acutis ac confertis ornata, et sulca levi ab wmbone utriusque

valvule oblique ad marginem ventralem medianum decurrente notata.

Long. 64 Mit.— Diam. 34 Mil.

S. Prov. Ceylon. In coral.

The smallness of size and the peculiar heart-shaped form of the

hiatus, easily distinguish this species from others,

Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds of Central, Western and

Southern India ; by Wiut1am T. Buanrorp, F.G.8.,0.M.Z.8., &e.

[Read and received 3rd March, 1869. ]

The following are a few notes on collections of birds made Ist, in Nag-

pir, Chanda, and on the upper Godavery; 2nd, at and near Khandalla FE

on the Western Ghats near Bombay ; 8rd, on the Nilgiri hills in Sou-

thern India. The first alone was large, and was made during the cold i

and hot seasons of 1866-67; the other two during short visits to the —

places named. By far the greater portion of the ensuing pages refer — 4

to the first collection alone. Several of the birds observed and collects

ed are very rare: one, Salpornis spilonotus, Franklin, had only been

previously procured by the describer and by Mr. Hodgson, and no

specimen of the bird was ever seen “by Mr. Blyth or by Dr. Jerdon,

until very recently. Hirundo fluvicoia had not, so far as I am 2

aware, ever been found again in Central India, since Dr. Jerdon first —

described it, and Cyornis Tickellie@, Blyth, has equally escaped observa-

tion since first collected by the excellent ornithologist after whose :

wife it was named, while the range of several species noted below, was

not previously known to extend into the countries mentioned. 4

Oe eee

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 165

I have, in every case, given the number of the species in Jerdon’s

work, but I have preferred following a somewhat different classification.

Although deficient in some respects, as for instance in associating

Saxicola and Muscicapa in one instance, and Phylloscopus and Tyran-

mus in another in the same sub-family. Mr. Blyth’s classification in

the catalogue of the birds, belonging to the Museum of the Asiatic So-

ciety of Bengal, published as long ago as 1849, is, in many respects,

more in accordance with our present knowledge of the affinities of

birds, than that adopted in Gray’s and Horsfield’s catalogues. The clas-

sification, I have followed is, in the main, identical with that of Prof,

A. Newton, as employed in the Zoological Record, but I have followed

Jerdon in classing together the bulbuls and orioles, and have followed

neither Jerdon nor Newton with regard to the Sylviide.

In the present notes, I have not attempted to mention all the

birds met with. I have merely noticed those concerning which I

have observed some interesting particulars connected with their dis-

tribution, habits, nidification, &c. The natural history of the com-

mon Indian species is pretty well known, though-there is still some-

thing to be learned very often concerning the range of allied forms,

as for instance amongst the JZotacille.

I believe the most interesting part of my observations is, that which

relates to the relative distribution of some of the migratory birds. It

has been for some time known that Hastern and Western forms of

these meet in India in several cases, and in the following pages some

additional instances will be found.

Order RAPTORES.

Tribe Diurnz&.

Family Vuuturip#.

Sub-family Meophronine.

6. Neophron Ginginianus, Daud. (N. perenopterus, L.

apud Jerdon). Jerdon does not mention the breeding season, which

varies much. I found a nest with two young ones considerably grown

and probably a month old on April 14th. The nest was on a cliff at

the side of the river Warda. Later than this, on May 2nd, I found

another nest containing a single egg, well incubated with a fully

formed chick inside. This was on a tree.

166 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

The relative ranges of Neophron percnopterus and N. Ginginianus

require to be ascertained. Specimens from Western India should be

carefully examined.

Family Fauconrp.

Sub-family Fulconine.

18? Tinnunculus Cenchris ? Naum. I shot a female

Kestril on the Pem Gunga river, west of Chanda, differing from the

common species in size, being smaller than the male of 7. alaudarius,

and having dull yellow legs instead of the usual pale clear yellow.

The wing measures 9.75, tail 6.5, tarsus 1.7 inches. The tail is much

more richly barred than in 7. alawdarius, and the bars extend com-

pletely across the feathers. ‘The back is much browner and less

rufous. I am inclined to think this possibly a young Z. cenchris, a

bird never before recorded from Central India. It differs, however, in

having much coarser legs, as coarse asin 7’. alaudarius, and in the

colour being much duller and browner than in the specimens in the ~

Indian Museum.

Sub-family Agquiline.

29. Aquila fulvescens, Gray. The most abundant eagle in

the Nagpur and Chanda country. I have lately obtained several

specimens of the nearly allied A. nevioides, Cuv., from Abyssinia,

which fully bear out the distinctions pointed out by Mr. Blyth and

Dr. Jerdon. The bill and legs are constantly larger in the African

species. The plumage is very similar.

The only other Eagles of which I obtained specimens in the neigh-

bourhood of Chanda were Spilornés cheela and Pandion halietus.

Sub-family Buteonine (7)

50. Circus cyaneus, L. I obtained a fine female and a

young male of this species near Chanda, on the 1st and 13th of March

respectively. I do not think there can be any reasonable doubt of

the identification, as I noted that the birds agreed with the descrip- —

tion of C. cyaneus at the time, and I subsequently compared them

with Huropean specimens in the Museum at Calcutta. This is the

first instance, I believe in which the occurrence of this bird so far

south as the Central Provinces has been noticed, specimens, if seen,

having not probably been distinguished from C. cineraceus. I see,

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 167

however, that Dr. King has obtained it from Goona,—J. A. S. B., 1868,

Part II, p. 218. Dr. Jerdon was not aware of its occurrence south

of the Punjab.

g 58. Circus melanoleucos, Gmel. I certainly did not once

see this bird in the Central Provinces, and I never remember having

met with it in Western India. It has been found by Radde breeding

on the Amoor, and may very possibly be one of those Hastern Asiatic

species, the range of which only extends partly across Hindustan, like

Motacilla luzonmensis. Itis not included in Sykes’s Deccan list.

Sub-family Dhilvine.

Milvus sp. I shot near Woon, North West of Chanda, a kite

considerably exceeding the common JZ. Govinda in size, but otherwise

undistinguishable. It is*a male, and measures—closed wing 20

inches, bill from the gape 1.7, tarsus 2.5, tail 13. The bird is evident-

ly young, but the inner portions of the feathers are rich brown; for the

feathers of the head and neck are rich brown with dark centres, not

whitish as usually in a young Milvus Govinda, and the abdomen and

lower tail coverts are pale rufous. .

I obtained also near Chanda Pernis cristata and Elanus melano-

pterus, both assigned to the subfamily of the kites by Dr. Jerdon, though

_ their position is somewhat doubtful. Blyth makes each the type of a

distinct subfamily.

Tribe Nocturna”.

Family Srriaipz.

65. Syrnium ocellatum, Less. (S. sinense, Lath., apud Jer-

don). This bird appears not to be rare south of Nagptr, inhabiting

-mangoe topes. I see also that Dr. King mentions it in his Goona list.

Owls, and indeed all the larger raptores, require to be watched for, and

they are not generally obtained by any one passing through a district

and unacquainted with their local haunts, so easily as the Jnsessores.

The only other owls I obtained in the Central Provinces were the

common species Urrua Bengalensis, Ketupa Ceylonensis and Athene

Brama.

Order ALTRICKS.

Family Psrrracip2.

148. Paleornis torquatus, Bodd. I have lately shot the

168 Ormthological Notes chiefly on some birds [ No. 3,

African race (P. cubicularis, Hasselquist) in Northern Abyssinia. The

only distinction I can detect from the common Indian P. torguatus

is, that the former bird has a larger bill.

I thought, I saw P. Alevandri once or twice in the great forests

south east of Chanda, but I am not sure. It is certainly rare in

Central India.

Order INSESSORES.

Suborder Picz.

Family Piciom.

160. Picus Mahraitensis, Latham. Chanda jungles, local.

The closely allied race which Mr. Blyth did me the honor to name

after me; was found, not abundantly, at Thayet Myo, and again above

Ava. It probably is peculiar to the dry country of upper Burma.

164. P. (Yungipicus) Hardwickii, Jerdon; not rare in

the Chanda jungles. It usually occurs in small companies of 3 or 4,

hunting about the upper branches of trees. My specimens were rather

smaller than the dimensions given by Dr. Jerdon.

166. Chrysocolaptes festivus, Bodd. I shot one speci-

men near Chanda, the wing measures only 6 inches.

The only other woodpecker killed in the Central provinces was the

very common Brachypternus aurantius.

Family Cucutipz. q

199. Cuculus canorus, L. I killed a male on the 24th — .

April on the Pranhita river north of Sironcha. On the 4th May, —

near Sironcha, I shot another, and heard others calling then and on

subsequent days. I did not observe any females, but I had no time

to look for them.

212. Conystes melanoleucos, Gmel., shot at Khandalla 3

on the western ghats near Bombay. I obtained a bird in Abyssinia |

which I cannot distinguish from this species.

222. Tacconia affinis, Blyth. Two or three specimens from

the neighbourhood of Nagpur agree best with this race in dimensions, J

but one of them has rather the colouring of 7. Leschenaultii, Lesson.

I much doubt if these races should be distinguished. JZ. Sirkee,

Gray, appears rather more distinct. i

1869. |] of Central, Western and Southern India. 169

Family CaprimuLoip 2.

The only species met with in the Nagpur country were C. asiaticus

and C. monticolus. In the great forests about Sironcha, in the begin-

‘ning of May, the noise made towards morning, just before day-break,

by the nightjars, was incessant. The cry is most singular, and is well

described by Jerdon as resembling that made by a stone bounding

over ice and gradually striking at shorter intervals than at first. Iam

not quite certain which species it was which made the noise, but I

suspect O. monticolus, which appears to be more common in those

forests than any other species.

Family Cypsenipa.

100. Cypselus Abyssinicus, Ehr., of which I obtained

several specimens in Abyssinia, is unquestionably identical with the

Indian species, and Ehrenberg’s name is said by Tristram to have

priority. Blyth, Ibis, IL. 339, places C. abyssinicus, Streubel, as a

synonym of C. afinis, but I am inclined to believe Mr. Tristram is

right.

104. Dendrochelidon coronata, Tickell. This fine swift

_ is far from rare about Chanda, and I can fully confirm Jerdon’s ex-

cellent account of its habits. Though it has a rapid flight, it is not

z by any means equal in this respect to the Alpine swift, much less to

the Acanthylis group; I almost doubt if it equals Cypselus apus. In-

deed it always appeared to me to afford an easy shot for a swift.

95. Acanthylis sylvatica, Tickell. Although I was on the

look out for this rare swift, I never had the good fortune to secure a

- Specimen, and I doubt if its range extends to Nagptr or Chanday I

once saw a small swift flying past a hill near Ahiri on the Pranhita

which may have been this species, but it did not come within shot.

In the Ibis for 1866, Vol. II. p. 73—Mr. Tristram seems to doubt

Dr, Jerdon’s assertion that the flight of Cypselus melba, though ele-

‘gant and rapid, is not nearly so powerful as that of the two spine-

tailed species. “If so,” says Mr. Tristram ‘the speed of the latter

Ba.

“Opinion, as I never saw any greased lightning, but it is equally cer-

tain that Mr. Tristram never saw the flight of Acanthylis. Tt is some

’ 22

t -

| American imagination.’’ On the latter point I cannot pronounce an

170 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

years now since I made their acquaintance in Pegu, I cannot say to

which species the birds belonged, for I could never get a gun to my

shoulder before they were out of shot, but the impression remaining

upon my mind is, that their speed exceeded that of C. melba, which I

shot in 1867 at Coimbatore, just as the Alpine swift excels the common

swallow.

Suborder Passmrgs.

Family Pirripz.

345. Pitta Bengalensis. In the forests around Chanda and

on the Pranhita, I did not once see this species; near Sironcha I

seemed to come suddenly into its range, and found it abundant there

and on the Godavery. One specimen which I shot had been feeding

partly on the common large black ant of the Indian jungles, but the

principal food appeared to have been termites with a few coleoptera.

Family MeLureHacip&. .

631. Zosterops palpebrosus, Temm. Rare in the Central

Provinces, I only came across 3 or 4 specimens. The Nilgiri race is

a little larger and appears to be a little darker in colour. I have only

one specimen to compare, in that the beak is 0.4 in., wing 2.2, tail 1.75,

tarsus 0.7 in. In a specimen from Manbhim, the beak is 0.35,

wing 2.15, tail 1.55, tarsus 0.6. The bill appears a little variable. —

The black lores appear rather more developed in the Nilgiri bird, I

doubt whether it is wise to propose a distinctive name upon such —

slight differences, as intermediate forms may be found.

Family Nectarinip&.

934. Arachnechthra Asiatica, Lath. I can quite con.

firm Jerdon’s account of the female of this bird retaining her dull

colours in the breeding season. |

Family Certain.

246. Salpornis spilonota, Franklin. Ibis, 1867, p. 461,

and Gould’s birds of Asia, Part XX. My

This very rare bird appears also to have been noticed lately by other |

observers and ranges as far as Oude. My specimens were obtained in

the great forests on the Pranhita south of Chanda, where I used to see

the bird nearly every day.

1869. ] of Oentral, Western and Southern India. 171

The following is a complete description taken from a comparison of

freshly killed specimens.

Colour above brownish black, spotted with white, feathers of the

_ crown with a more or less narrow central white stripe, supercilium

white and beneath it a dark stripe passing through each eye to the

nape. ‘The sides of the neck chiefly white, with slight dusky marks,

while the back of the neck has only very few and small white spots. Two

central tail feathers dull grey brown in the centre, edged with alter-

nating dusky and white spots, the former larger ; outer tail feathers

dusky, each with 4 more or less interrupted white bands and tipped

with white. Throat white, occasionally with a few dusky marks,

remainder of lower plumage mixed white and dusky, darker on the

sides and lighter on the breast. Beak blackish above, flesh-coloured

below, legs dark horny inclining to plumbeous, irides brown. Sexes

alike. Measurements, taken before skinning ;—Length 51 to 53, extent

94, closed wing 34 to 33, tail 24, beak at front 2 to 1, tarsus 3, foot

13. The bill in the male is shorter than in the female, in the former

it is generally 3 inch, in the latter ~ to 1 inch.

The birds keep to the largest trees, running round the stems in all

directions, and flying with a steady flight, not unlike that of a wood-

pecker, but swifter and more elegant. They have a whistling note.

They evidently breed about the end of April, as birds killed at that

_ time had the generative organs greatly enlarged, and I constantly saw

them in pairs. On one occasion I came upon two pairs together. |

found Coleoptera in the stomachs of those I examined.

Family Hrrunprinip2.

84. Hirundo ruficeps, Licht. (A. filifera Stephens apud

Jerdon). In November, December and January these birds are in

small flocks generally, not exceeding 15 to 20, and have a particular

fancy for perching on telegraph wires, on which all establish them-

Selves close together, a few flying off and playing about, chasing in-

‘sects, &c. Ifancy they keep to one spot very much, and do not move

_ about greatly. They build in February and March, and perhaps also

later, always, so far as I have seen, near water, and very frequently on

‘the banks of rivers. I found several nests on the Warda river, near

~ Chanda, invariably beneath overhanging ledges of rock; 3 eggs ap-

172 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

pear to be the regular number. There is a peculiarity in all the nests —

’ IT examined which I do not’ think has been noticed. They all are

formed of mud and shaped like a saucer, open above. In the centre

of the bottom there is invariably a small hole left. Whatis the object

of this ? Can it be cleanliness ?

During the breeding season, these birds hunt up and down the

stream keeping over the water or in its immediate neighbourhood.

85. H. erythropygia, Sykes. (H. daurica, L. apud Jer-

don). On February 23rd, close to Win, in southeast Berar, I saw an

immense flock of these swallows flying about one spot on the ground

and constantly alighting. There was no flight of winged ants or

(

{

termites to attract them, and they might have been preparing to

migrate or resting during migration. I frequently met with this

species near Nagpur.

86. H. fluvicola, Jerdon. I met with this bird Ist, at the

marble rocks near Jabalpir, 2nd, on the banks of the Kolar, at

Saonair, a few miles north-west of Nagptir, 3rd, close to the village

of Gugts, west of Chanda, on the river Warda. I gave an account of ~

the nests, eggs and habits, in the [bis for 1867, Vol. III. p. 462, and

as this has since been copied by Mr. Gould in his “ Birds of Asia,” it

is scarcely necessary to repeat it. The most curious point is, that the |

birds evidently return to the same spot every year to build, and this

place is invariably beneath an overhanging bank over deep water. — }

Mr. Gould represents them as breeding against a high cliff. This iy

may occasionally happen, but is unusual. |

I found in one place on the Pem Gunga a deserted colony. Several Zi

nests had been half built and abandoned. The cause was evident, the —

place which 1 in former years had been a deep pool had partially silted 4

up, and the nests were accessible, and doubtless no longer secure from |

predaceous animals. Nevertheless a pair of Cotyle concolor had bred |

in one of the deserted nests, which’ contained two of their young,

90. Cotyle (Ptionoprogne) concolor, Sykes. I have :

just mentioned this bird breeding in a deserted nest of Hirundo fluvi- .

cola. The shape of the nest was unmistakable, it was only. half

finished and open above. I obtained the eggs on two or three occa

sions. They were more oval and more closely spotted than those of

H. fluvicola and H. ruficeps. -

1869. ] of Central, Western and Southern India. 173

The nests were so precisely similar to those just described, made by

H, ruficeps, that as they are in exactly the same situation, it is

possible they might have been built by that bird, and only occupied

by the Ootyle. They had the usual hole at the base. It would be

interesting to know if anybody else has observed parasitic nidification

in this bird.

91. Cotyle (Ptionoprogne) rupestris, Scop.

On the 4th of February I saw two distinct species of crag martin

flying about the lofty cliffs around a hill near Perzagad, about half

way between Chanda and Nagptir. One was C. concolor, the other

conspicuously larger. The next day I saw the latter again, consort-

ing with Hirundo erythropygia, and succeeded in shooting a speci-

men which proved to be C. rupestris. I again found this bird far

from rare at Khandala, Karli, and the neighbourhood between

Poona and Bombay, at the end of October. It is evident, therefore,

that its range in the peninsula of India is not confined to the higher

hills.

This species abounds in Abyssinia, and I have seen it as low down

as about 2000 feet above the sea, much asin India. It always keeps

very much to craggy hill sides,

Family Musctcaripz.

293. Leucocerca leucogaster, Cuv. (L. pectoralis, Jerdon).

I shot this bird near Chanda in forest. It appears in Dr. King’s

Goona list, while the much more widely distributed L. awreola, Vieill.,

(L. albofrontata, Frankl.) does not. My specimens are dusky on the

back and rather rufous on the abdomen.

295. Cryptolopha cinereocapilla, Vieill., common in

every mango tope and grove of large trees about Nagpur.

297. Alseonax latirostris, Raffles. Specimens from near

Chanda appear to agree but with this race. It is scarce. I cannot see

_.the smallest difference between the specimens collected by me and one

sent from Amoy by Mr. Swinhoe as Muscicapa cinereo-alba, Temm.

306. Cyornis Tickellie, Blyth. I obtained 2 specimens of

this rare bird, one at Seoni between Jabalptir and Nagpur, the other

174 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

near Chanda. The first was a female,* but the plumage was precise-

ly similar to that of the male.

310. Muscicapula superciliaris, Jerdon. A solitary speci-

men was shot by the Museum Collector who was with me about half

way between Nagpir and Chanda. |

311. KErythrosterna acornaus, Hodgson. I obtained a

solitary specimen of this bird also. It has not, I believe, before been

recorded from the plains. My specimen, a female, was killed at Seoni

on the road from Jabalptr to Nagptr in a mango tope. It is identical

with the type specimens received from Mr. Hodgson in the Indian

Museum, but it does not agree well with Jerdon’s description, the

back being bluish cinereous, sides of breast cinereous grey, middle of

breast, throat, and belly white with a pale rufous tinge. The head

and neck are dark ashy, forehead rufous close to the bill, wing 23

inches, tail 12.

323. Erythrosterna parva, Bechst. Common about Nag-

pir. Idid not obtain a single specimen of L. lewcewra, which is pro-

bably only found in Bengal and Orissa, like some other migratory birds.

In EL. parva the buff feathers round the orbits are peculiarly con-

Spicuous. : i”

Males shot as early as the end of November had the red breast, so

that except in birds of the year, I doubt if the male ever has the -

plumage of the female.

Family CAMPEPHAGID.

268. WVolvocivora Sykesii, Strickland. Not rare in some of

the woods near Sironcha, but I saw it nowhere else. The clear

whistle mentioned by Jerdon is most peculiar. I heard it several

times in the beginning of May.

277. Pericrocotus erythropygius, Jerdon. Not very rare

in the open country about Nagpar.

The representation of this bird by P. albifrons, Jerdon, in Upper

Burma, is a parallel case to the replacement of the Malacocerci by

Chattarhea gularis and of Francolinus vulgaris and F. pictus by

* I did not unfortunately myself examine the specimen, and its sex was

determined by the native skinner who was with me, but as I repeatedly tested

his determinations, and always found them correct, I see no reason to doubt its

accuracy.

TROCHALOPTERON FAIRBANKI.

<<.

~ me

= a

a =

: ao

r ae] =

: = &

E s=.

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 175

F, Phayret, There are other cases of the representation in Upper

Burmaalone of Hindustan species, not found in the intervening country.

Family Dicrurips.

281. Dicrurus cerulescens, L. This bird is not rare

about Nagpur.

Family Lantap.

257. Lanius erythronotus, Vigors. This bird varies great-

ly in size and somewhat in plumage within the same district, and at

one time I thought I had two distinct races, but I subsequently shot

intermediate forms. In some the black frontal band is as broad as in

Himalayan specimens, in others it is completely wanting. The wing

varies from 3.4 to 3.7, tail from 4 inches to 5, and the amount of

rufous on the lower back is scarcely the same in any 2 specimens,

Family Crateropip2 (Limalude.)

Subfamily Zimaliine.

Unquestionably Jerdon is correct in raising Zvmalia and its allies

to the rank of a family, but I confess that I cannot see why the very

closely allied Drymoicine should not be included, as has been done

by Blyth. Jerdon’s main objection,—their less social habits—is not by

any means a universal criterion. Megalurus palustris, for instance, is a

solitary bird, and so, very often, is Zimalia pileata, while I found

Prinia gracilis in small families just like Malacocerci and a small

Drymoica which I shot on the coast of the Red Sea occurred in pre-

cisely the same manner. I cannot understand why Crateropus is

removed from this family by Newton.

397. Dumetia hyperythra, Franklin. Shot near Chanda

in bushes beside a river.

423. Trochalopteron cachinnans, Jerdon. By some

mistake, Jerdon has assigned white lores and chin to this bird; they

should be black. It is extremely common on the Nilgiri hills,

4230. T. Fairbanki, u. sp.* Persimile T. Jerdoni, sed capite in-

super fusco, haud coerulescente coloris margine distincto ; dorso olivaceo,

mento, gula, collo, pectore griseis, lateribus colli cinereis, medii pectoris

* The author has arranged, at his own expense, fora coloured drawing

of this interesting species, to be executed at home, and it is to be hoped that

the plate can be issued withthe next number of this year’s Journal, should

it not arrive in time for issue with the present number. [p. |

176 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

pennis fusco centratis, abdomine subcaudalibusque ferrugmers. Statura

ab illd T. Serdoni non discrepante.

Habitat in montibus Pulney, Indie meridionalis. Detexit S. Fair-

bank.

Head above dark brown, the margin of the colour distinct and not

passing into anything else on the nape, but distinctly contrasting

with the olive colouring of the back; lores, which are small, and a

narrow, streak running back from the eye dusky ; supercilia and orbi-

tal feathers white; back olive, rather highter towards the rump, wings

and tail rather darker. Beneath the chin and throat with the sides of

the head below the eyes rather pale grey, the feathers of middle of

the breast the same but with dark stripes in the centre; sides of the

neck ashy, this colour passing far back close to the dark brown of the

head; whole abdomen and lower tail coverts ferruginous, flanks

and thigh coverts olivaceous.

Beak dusky, legs dark plumbeous. Dimensions the same as those

of TZ. Jerdoni, wing 3.4, tail 3.7, bill at front 0.7 inch.

In Proc. Z. 8. for 1867, p. 834, I mentioned my impression that the

grey-breasted Z'rochalopteron of the Pulney hills collected by Mr.

Fairbank was distinct from 7. Jerdoni from the Wynaad. This im-

pression was due to some slight differences from the description in

Jerdon’s Birds of India, and also to the a priori probability that two

birds living on isolated hill ranges would prove distinct, since the

intervening range of the Nilgiris in which neither are found, is in-

habited by the very different 7. cachinnans. Unfortunately the

specimen of 7’. Jerdoni which formerly existed in the Asiatic Society’s

Museum has disappeared, and I am unable to make a direct compari-

son, but in a drawing which Dr. Jerdon shewed me the other day,

LI. Jerdoni is represented with a distinct black chin like cachinnans,

of which there is not a trace in 7. Furbanki. The other differences

to which I alluded are the head being dusky above instead of bluish,

and distinctly separated from the olivaceous back instead of passing

into dull ashy on the nape ; the centre of the breast being paler in the

Pulney species, and the rufous colouring of the parts extending to the

under tail coverts, which, in 7. Jerdoni, are olivaceous like the flanks.

Another distinction appears to be indicated by the drawing, viz. that

in Z’. Jerdoni, the grey extends much further down the breast, and

1869. ] of Central, Western and Southern India. 177

the rufous colour of the abdomen is paler. In 7. Fairbanki the latter

is of the same colour as in Z’. Cachinnans, but such differences as these

might be due to bad stuffing or incorrect drawing. No native artist?

however, would have put in a black chin.

The habits are doubtless precisely similar to those of 7. Cachinnans.

T learn from Mr. Fairbank that the bird abounds on the Pulney hills.

I suspect the Anamullay and Travancore ranges may yet yield several

interesting novelties when closely searched. They are at present less

known than any other part of the Indian peninsula, and judging from

the comparatively large number of animals already known to be pecu-

liar to them and to the Malabar coast, they are well deserving of clese

examination.

435. Malacocircus Somervillei, Sykes. Abundant at

Khandalla on the top of the Bhore Ghat, and therefore at the edge of

the Deccan. Further inland it is replaced by MW. Malabaricus, Jerd.

In the course of 1867, I shot every species of Malacocircus known ;

_ WM. terricolor in Calcutta, WM. griseus at Coimbatoor, IZ. Malabaricus

_ and IL, Malacolmi about Nagptr and Chanda, -and WM. Somervillei

at Khandalla.

Sub-family Drymoicine.

530. Orthotomus longicauda, Gm. I shot a specimen of

this tailor bird, with a paler grey breast, in Chanda forest. It does not

appear to differ from the common form in any other respect, and may;

_ therefore, not improbably be an individual peculiarity.

533. Prinia Adamsi, Jerd. Mr. Fairbank informs me that

he has procured this species near Ahmednuggur in the Deccan.

534. Prinia sonalis, Sykes. Pem Ganga valley near Chanda.

I believe it was this race which I killed, it seems a little larger than

P. Stewarti, but the two forms are not easy to distinguish. This

species and the next are included in Dr. King’s list of Goona birds.

536. BP. gracilis, Franklin. Forest close to Chanda. I found

this bird in small flocks of 5 or 6, like Malacocirci, hunting about

amongst the branches of trees, and flying consecutively from tree

to tree, just as the restricted Zimaliine do. I see Captain Beavan,

Ibis for 1867, p. 454, has also noticed the occurrence of this bird in

flocks and its habits.

178 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [ No. 3,

Family Bracnypopipm.

In the classification I have mainly followed that of Newton, the

Oriolideé are classed as a distinct family, while the bulbuls are asgo-

ciated with the true thrushes. As Phyllornis is unquestionably a

link between the bulbuls and orioles, while there does not appear to be

any equivalent link between them and the thrushes, I believe that,

with respect to the birds of India at all events, Dr. Jerdon’s classifica-

tion is as sound as it is convenient.

452. Ixos luteolus, Less. Occasionally seen, and one or two

specimens obtained near Chanda.

460. Otocampsa fuscicaudata, Gould. This race extends

northwards along the Western Ghats, like many other Malabar forms,

and I shot it at Khandalla. I never saw an O¢ocampsa in Central

India. ©

One of the forms with yellow lower tail coverts, perhaps Ivos xan-

thopygius H. and Ehr., occurs at Lahej near Aden.

467. Tora zeylanica, Gm. I found this common bird near

Chanda. Between Chanda and Nagpir I killed a specimen perfectly

intermediate between J. zeylanica and I. typhia.

470. Oriolus Kundoo, Sykes. I obtained a nest from the

topmost branches of a banyan on the 29th April, with some fragments

of egg shells in it, the eggs had been broken in securing the nest. It

was a very neat cup-shaped structure, almost entirely formed of

hairy sheep’s wool, but with a snake’s cast-skin interwoven, as is

so commonly the case in Thamnodva nests.

473. Oriolus Ceylonensis, Bon. A specimen of this bird

was obtained by my friend, Dr. Bihler, at Nasik, and I have quite re-

cently heard from Mr. Fairbank, that he has shot it a few miles north-

west of Ahmednugegur in the Deccan. Like other Malabar forms, it

doubtless ranges for a considerable distance to the northward along

the Western Ghats, and thence occasionally wanders into the Western

part of the Deccan.

Family Turpin.

I include the Saacoline and Ruticilling in this family, as some of

the older writers did and as was done by Mr. Blyth. It appears to.

me that woodland forms, like Janthia, come very close to Callene

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 179

Brachypteryx, &c. The African Thamnolea is quite as much like a

thrush as a Sawicola, while on the other hand there is a complete break

between both the subfamilies mentioned and the typical Sylviade.

If Grandala is not athrush, it should be put with the Starlings as the

very closely allied Lamprotornis lewcogaster of Africa is.

303. Oreocetes cinclorhynchus, Vigors. I saw this

bird for two consecutive days, 4th and 5th April in high forest about

20 miles south-east of Chanda, and I shot one specimen. I suppose

all that I saw were migrating, as I met with none afterwards. Jer-

don says it feeds on fruits and berries. The bird shot by me had

coleoptera and large black ants in its stomach.

304. Geocichla cyanotus, J. and 8. This bird is occasion-

ally met with in the forests around Chanda. At Khandalla between

Bombay and Poona, I shot a speciman with an olive green back. In

the Indian Museum I find specimens of G. citrina similarly

coloured. Jerdon says, the female of cyanotus is less purely coloured

than the male, and that of Crtrina is olivaceous. The olive green

colour is certainly not sexual in the former and I doubt its being

so in the latter. Jam inclined to think that the olive coloured birds

are young. I did not meet with G. citrina in the Central Provinces.

356. Geocichla unicolor, Tickell. I shot this species also

at Khandalla, but did not meet with it in Central India.

342. Myiophonus Horsfieldii, Vigors. Not rare on the

erest of the Western Ghats as far north as Bombay. I shot only one

specimen, but I saw others at Khandalla, Mr. Fairbank told me that

he had obtained the nest on the Pulney hills close beside a deep pool

in a stream, just like the one described by Jerdon.

It is rather surprising that this bird does not occur in Sykes’s list

which, however, is far from complete.

342a. Callene albiventris, Fairbank, Pulney hills figured in

P. Z. S. for 1867, p. 832, Pl. XX XIX. and again by Gould, Birds of

Asia, Pt. XX. The egg evidently resembles that of C. frontalis de-

scribed by Blyth from Hodgson’s drawings. Ibis for 1866 II. 378.

Blyth describes the females of both, Callene rufiventris and C.

frontalis, as dull coloured. The specimen of the female of C. albiven-

tis was so little paler than the male that I was inclined to consider

— 180 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

the difference due merely to the state of the plumage. The sex had

been ascertained by Mr. Fairbank by dissection.

488. Saxicola opistholeuca, Strickland (S. lewcuroides,

Guer. apud Jerdon.) I shot a single male bird close to Nagpur. It

has not I believe previously been found south of the Nerbudda. The

same remark applies to the next species.

492. Saxicola atrogularis, Blyth. Of this bird I killed

3 specimens, 2 males and a female within a few miles of Nagpur on

open waste ground.

Saxicola, sp. I shot a female Saxicola close to Nagpiir which I

could not identify with any known Indian species. It was much less

rufous than S. atragularis. I cannot find the specimen now,

479. Thamnobia fulicata, L. I found a curious nest made

by this bird, and in a singular position, v7z., inside the bamboo of a

dhooly in the veranda of Captain Glasfurd’s house at Sironcha, The

principal material of which the nest had been composed, was a number

of short fragments of string, with these were grass, horse-hair and a

snake’s skin. The nest contained 3 eggs as usual.

Saxicola melena of Riippell has very much the appearance and

habits of the Indian Thamnobia, and has precisely the same trick of

jerking its tail.

Family Syivrap#.

After separating from this group the Drymoicine which I believe

should be placed in the Z’malide, and removing the Sawicoline and

Ruticilline to the Turdide there still remain the Motacilline which

have even less affinity with the true Sylvians than the wren warblers

and stone chats shew, and which are classed separately by most orni-

thologists. The Calamoherpine, Sylviine and Phylloscopine form a

thoroughly natural family, similar both in form and habits.

515. Acrocephalus brunnescens, Jerd. This prince of

skulkers is as difficult a bird to secure as any I know of. One when

badly wounded got away from mein a small open bush on the banks

of a river, where, so far as I could see, its only possible plan of dis~

appearing was by diving amongst the roots. I only obtained one

specimen in the Central Provinces, though I frequently heard the

sharp single call from bushes beside water,—a favorite resort.

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 18t

The specimen I obtained, a female, has the first long primary only

7 inch shorter than the second, otherwise it agrees pretty well with

Jerdon’s description. It, however, differs from the Calcutta specimens

' inthe Asiatic Society’s Museum, not only in the proportions of the

wing, but also in being much whiter below, and in having a distinctly

defined whitish eyebrow, with a strong white line extending to the

base of the upper mandible. The rump too in the Chanda speci-

men is distinctly paler than the back, not so in those from Bengal.*

516. Acrocephalus dumetorum, Blyth. Not very rare

about Chanda, in bushes. I also shot it at Khandalla on the top of the

Western Ghats. I never saw it near water.

568. Phylloscopus indicus, Jerdon. I obtained two or

three specimens of this bird, and saw it frequently in the low scattered

jungle between Nagpir and Chanda, but not in the forests south and

east of the latter place. It is a most active little bird, clinging to

stems, and running up and down them in all directions like a Scztta.

The other Phylloscopine which I obtained about Nagptr and

Chanda were Phyllopneuste rama, Phylloscopus viridanus, P. nitidus,

P. lugubris ? and Reguloides superciliosus. Of Sylviine I shot Sylvia

orphea and S. eurruca.

Family Paripz.

645. Parus cinereus, Vieillot. The specimens of this bird

which I shot in Central India differed so much from Jerdon’s measure-

ments and description that I could not but believe, that they belonged

to a distinct species. On comparing them, however, with Himalayan

specimens, I found them perfectly identical, and there was no per-

ceptible difference between them, and Gould’s figures in the Birds of

Asia. It struck me, as this bird is very abundant on the Nilgiris,

that Jerdon might have taken his measurements from the race occur-

ring there, which would consequently be much larger than the plains

Species, and on obtaining the Nilgiri form, I found that this was the

case, except that the lengths given for the beak and tarsus must be

_ misprints.

* Other specimens from the neighbourhood of Calcutta, which I have seen

since this was written, exactly resemble that from the Central Provinces, and I

find that in that specimen, the proportions of the primaries in one wing differ

slightly from those in the other,

182 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

Jerdon omits to mention the white nuchal spot and the white on

the outer tail feathers. The black line below is continuous through-

out from the beak to the point of the tail. I append the measure-

ments of the two races.

Chanda. Nilgiri,

Whole dome tle, tecsie wnasiennn cat Barely 5 inches. Nearly 6 inches.

AY tg Pisces a va iba be elemereas ‘ 24 2,5,

sald et Point | os Aad ok divmanbarae a 0.37

(TERRES oe Spr eeees 3 iatpadiedtee ‘ a ws

eiskear scat Muka RK Ste Sf 91 23

The size of the Nilgiri race, however, is somewhat variable, some

specimens are smaller and appear to form a passage into the plains

race, so I can see no need for proposing a new name, although the

difference appears quite as great as in the case of Pratincola caprata

and P. atrata. The bill especially in the Nilgiri variety appears to

vary in size.

P. cinereus is not very rare in the forests on the Pranhita and

around Chanda, I found insects in their stomachs. In April the

sexes were in pairs, playing about on the trees with a peculiar low

whistling note. They could scarcely have been breeding, for many

of them, although paired, were moulting, but doubtless they do breed in

the plains. I saw them, still in pairs, as late as the middle of May.

648. Machlolophus Jerdoni, Blyth. I shot this bird at

Jabalpur, and again near Nagpir, and saw it at rare intervals on the

Pranhita and Godavery, everywhere very rare.

Family Ataupips.

I cannot see why the MMotacilline should form a distinct family,

unless the pipits be excluded, for which there is no good reason. In form,

plumage and habits there is less difference between Alauda and Cory-

dalla or Agrodroma than between Saaicola and Pratincola, or Falco

and <Accipiter. The bill is extremely variable amongst the typical

Alaudide, varying from the finch-like form of Pyrrhulauda to the

long bill of Certhilauda, and in flight these two forms differ more from

each other than do the skylarks and titlarks. The long hind claw of

Budytes can scarcely be an adaptive modification, for the species in

which it is most developed is less similar in its habits to the larks

than other species which have shorter hind claws.

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 183

591. Motacilla personata, Gould and M. dukhunensis,

vera Sykes (not of Jerdon). I obtained both these races in the Cen-

tral Provinces. The former I only shot, at and near Nagpitir, in

December and January, the latter both near Nagptir and also near

Chanda in March. As I was then on the look out for specimens in

breeding plumage, and shot those with most black about the head, I

should not, I think, have overlooked Jf. personata, had it occurred.

The two are not very difficult to distinguish even in winter plumage.

In Bombay and at Khandalla, in October and November, I only

met with JZ. dukhunensis. In this race, the black cap in the male is

persistent.

I am unable to distinguish birds shot in Abyssinia from IZ. dukhu-

nensis,

Captain Beavan’s Umballa and Simla Motacilla luzoniensis, Ibis,

1868, pp. 76, 77, is probably JZ. personata.

The distribution of these races of MMotacilla is very singular and

deserves most careful observation. In some cases the migratory forms

of Bengal are the same as those of Burmah and China, and distinct

from those of Western and Southern India, as in the two forms of

Hrythrosterna and probably in some other instances, but here is the

apparent case of a third race intervening, for hitherto MMotacilla per-

sonata does not appear to have been detected either in Bengal or

Bombay.

602. Agrodroma campestris, L.

604. A. sordida, Riippell.

I obtained both of these large pipits near Nagpir. The last named

appeared to be the commoner, and I frequently saw it in stubble fields

of “ Thar” or “ arhar” (Cajanus indicus) and similar places.

768. Alauda Malabarica? Scop. This bird is very im-

perfectly described. I found a crested lark abundant at Khandalla,

which [ at first thought was Galerida Boysii of Blyth, as the measure-

ments agreed, although the coloration is different from that of G. c77s-

tata. But I find the type of G@. Boysii is still in the Asiatic

Society’s collection, and that it has precisely the plumage and bill of

G. cristata.

On shewing the Khandalla lark to Dr. Jerdon, he immediately re-

cognised it as the bird he had identified with Sonnerat’s alonette

184 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds | No. 3,

huppée de la cote de Malabar (A. Malabarica of Scopoli). On turning

to Sonnerat’s Voyage, pl. 111 (not 113 as quoted in Jerdon’s Birds of

India) I find the chief peculiarity of the lark there figured, is the very

broad pale edges to all the feathers, and in the accompanying descrip-

tion, it is stated that the crest is tipped white, and the feathers of the

back and wing coverts are broadly tipped with rufous. I cannot find

a copy of Scopoli’s work: Latham merely copied from Sonnerat, even

translating cing pouces, neuf lignes by 52 inches which, considering

that the French pouce is not the English inch, is of course not quite

accurate.

Now the Khandalla bird has neither white tips to the crest feathers

nor broad rufous edges on the back and wing coverts. In size, bill

and colouring it closely resembles 4. gulgula, the principal differences

being that it has a pointed erectile crest on the top of the head as in

Galerida, and that it has precisely the proportions of the wing primaries

of that genus. The plumage above is scarcely distinguishable from

that of A. gulgula, below the breast spots are larger and more numer-

ous and the abdomen is paler. Jerdon says Alauda Malabarica is

somewhat smaller than A. gulgula, and the general tone of colouring

much more rufous. Now the Khandalla bird is, if anything, less

rufous, certainly less so than the Nilgiri race of A. gulgula.

Again Mr. Blyth in his commentary on Dr. Jerdon’s birds of India

in the Ibis for 1867 says that Alauda ccelivox of Swinhoe is nearer to

A. Malabarica than to A. gulqula. There is a specimen of A. ceelivox

in the Indian Museum sent, I believe, by Mr. Swinhoe himself, and

whilst it so clearly resembles A. gulgula that I am unable to appre-

ciate the difference, it is not in the least like the Khandalla lark.

The very imperfect specimen in the Indian Museum, labelled A. W/a- ~

labarica by Mr. Blyth and presented by Dr. Jerdon, is in so bad con-

dition that I can only say, it is not the Khandalla bird. It may be

A. guigula, the Nilgiri variety.

I have in one or two cases shewn that Malabar birds range north

along the Western Ghats, so that it is by no means improbable that this

lark also inhabits Malabar. If we suppose, which is probable, that

Sonnerat’s figure is simply a caricature, as the adjoining print on the

same page of Pyrrhulauda grisea most certainly is, and that the de-

scription was taken from the picture, and not from the bird, (the only

a> dt

ve aare”

+ Sag

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 185

difficulty concerning which is the measurements,) it appears highly

probable that Dr. Jerdon was perfectly right, and that this bird is really

the Malabar lark. I think this is a more satisfactory view than to

propose a new name forthe Khandalla bird on the chance of its being

distinct, though I fear the latter is the usual practice with some orni-

thologists. I grant that Sonnerat’s figure resembles Spizalauda deva

andthe Nilgiri variety of Alauda guigula quite as much as it does the

present species, but until it has been clearly proved which of the three

is the common crested lark of Malabar, it is best not to alter the

existing nomenclature on the chance of its being wrong. I according-

ly give a description of the Khandalla bird, which may stand as

| A. Malabarica, until it is proved that that bird is a distinct species.

Se SS

Top of head with lengthened pointed crest very dark brown, the

feathers very narrowly edged but not tipped with fulvous. Sides of

head and back of neck much lighter in colour than the cap, rather pale

fulvous supercilium, lores rather darker, and ear coverts also. Back

and sides of neck rufescent fulvous with rather broad median dusky

streaks, and the feathers not broader near the base than towards the

point. Back and wing coverts deep brown with very narrow greyish

edgings, some of the greater coverts more broadly margined. Quills

dusky brown, primaries and secondaries rufous on the inner edge and

more narrowly externally, under wing coverts also rufous. Tail

middle feathers dusky with pale margins, the remainder deep blackish

brown, all narrowly tipped fulvous, the outermost but one with a broad

fulvous margin and the outermost almost entirely fulvous. Beneath,

chin and upper throat dirty white, breast pale fulvous with broadish

dusky streaks forming the centre of each feather, a dark patch on each

side of the neck just where the streaks begin ; abdomen and under tail

coverts fulvescent.

Length (taken in the flesh) 6 4 inches, wing 3 2, tail 2, tarsus ,

bill at front =9,, hind toe 0.3, claw 0.4. In other specimens the wing

is only 3 $ to 3 @.

765. Spizalauda deva, Sykes. This bird must be rare about

Nagpur and Chanda, for I only once obtained a specimen which was

shot near Hdlabad, west of Chanda.

756. Mirafra erythroptera, Jerdon. I met with this

bird not unfrequently in low jungle and on the skirts of the forest

186 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

country near Chanda. Jerdon’s description of its habits, as usual, is

excellent.

757. ML. cantillans, Jerdon. I only came upon this bird

once in a wild tract of grass with scattered bushes, about 50 miles

west of Chanda. Over a small tract of country extending for a few

miles along the road it abounded, but no where else. I did not

observe any other Mrafra besides these two.

758. Ammomanes phoenicura, Franklin. Extremely

abundant in the open country about Nagptrand Chanda. I have occa-

sionally seen it perch.

Family Pioceips.

Dr. Jerdon refers to the occurrence of Ploceus hypoxanthus at Ran-

goon and Thayet Myo. I also shot it at Mandelay (Ava).

765. Estrelda formosa, Lath. I met with this rather scarce

bird in the Chanda forest and again on the Pranhita near Ahiri, always

in or near forest.

The only other Hstreldine collected in Central India were the com-

mon #. amandava, Munia undulata and M. Malabarica.

Family Frinei1ip2.

716. Emberiza Huttoni, Blyth. I obtained this bird both

at Chanda and Nagpur, and Mr. Fairbank informs me that it is com-

mon on rocky hill sides near Ahmednuggur. It is highly probable

that it has been mistaken for HL. hortulana.

Dr. Jerdon, Birds of India, p. 880, mentions my having shot Hmbe-

riza rutila, Pallas, in Upper Burma. This is a mistake. I shot the

only specimen obtained in Pegu at the base of the Arracan hills, west

of Henzada.

721. Euspiza melanocephala, Gm. I found this bird

much less common about Nagptir than the next species. Jerdon does

not describe the female. Jt has the head above including the ear-

coverts and back brownish grey with dark mesial streaks to the fea- —

thers, very faint on the head; rump grey, mixed with yellow, wing-

coverts, quills and tail feathers dusky, edged with fawn colour, the

tertiaries and greater coverts very broadly so; chin, throat and breast

pale fawn colour, abdomen yellowish white, under tail coverts bright

yellow. Bill horny, paler beneath, feet brown.

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 187

722. KBuspizaluteola, Sparrman. Very common about Nag-

pur, less so further south. ‘The female is dull coloured, like that of

EE. melanocephata.

711. Passer (Gymmnoris) flavicollis, Franklin. About

small villages in the jungle this species very often entirely replaces the

common sparrow, but it is also found in the wildest jungles far from

any human habitation, I entirely fail to see any good grounds for

its separation as a distinct genus from Passer.

Family Corvip&.

660. Corvus culminatus, Sykes. This bird is said fre-

quently to point out where tigers and leopards are lying by perching

on the trees over them, and cawing. I have never seen an instance

myself, except when the tiger has killed an animal, and the crows are

attracted by the carrion. The birds are, however, very watchful and

often perch above men ; and I have been annoyed by them when trying

to shoot birds, so they may very possibly follow tigers at times,

somewhat as the Presbytis monkeys do.

Order GEMITORKS.

Family Treronip2.

772. Crocopus pheenicopterus, Lath.

773. C. chlorigaster, Blyth.

Birds shot at Nagpur were perfectly intermediate between these

two races; one has the green forehead and the green of the tail of

C. phoenicopterus, another the green forehead only and both have the

yellowish green belly of chlorigaster. There are also intermediate

forms, killed by Captain Beavan in Manbhim, in the Indian Museum.

Birds procured at Chanda were pure chlorigaster.

I am inclined to look upon Dr. Jerdon as right in considering all

these intermediate forms as fertile hybrids; they are always found

where the two races meet, and where the two differ so little as in the

green pigeons, the rollers and Kallij pheasants, they doubtless breed

together freely.

I found the nest and two very young birds of Crocopus chlorigaster

near Sironcha on May 11th. The nest was exceedingly small, a little

platform, of sticks very loosely put together on the branch of a per-

fectly bare tree.

188 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

780. Carpophaga sylvatica, Tickell. I am obliged to dis-

sent from Dr. Jerdun’s account of the distribution of this bird. He

says—it inhabits the whole of India in forest countries. Now this is

constantly asserted of Malay forms, and I am persuaded that in many

cases it is a mistake. I have been all through the immense forests of

the lower Nerbudda and Taptee valleys, and I never saw an imperial

pigeon in them, nor did I ever meet with the bird near Chanda. I

first came upon it near Sironcha and thence it occurred down the

Godavery, and I have shot it in Orissa. My belief is, that its range is

rigidly restricted to the great forest country inhabited by Gallus

Serrugineus and Rucervus Duvaucelii, and that it does not occur in the

woods of Central* or Western India. This makes it the more probable

that Mr. Blyth’s C. puszlla is a really distinct race, confined to Malabar,

or perhaps like other Malabar forms ranging northwards along the

Western Ghats. It may also occur on the hill plateaus about Salem

and Trichinopoly. In the same manner I have scarcely a doubt but

that Jerdon’s C. cuprea will prove, when compared, distinct from C’

emsignis, Hodgson.

I also never yet saw an Osmotreron nor a Chalcophaps in the

country west of Nagpur, or in the Nerbudda valley. I much regret

now that I did not collect birds in the Nerbudda and Taptee

valleys, as I might have noted several interesting points regarding their

distribution.

Order RASORES.

Family Prrrociip2z.

803. Pterocles fasciatus, Scopoli. I can confirm Dr. Jer-

don’s account of the crepuscular habits of this bird. For two or three

years I noticed occasionally, when camped beside streams in jungle,

that some bird frequently flew along the course of the stream with a

most peculiar tri-syllabic ery, after dark in the evening, or before it was

light inthe morning. At last I caught sight of the bird one morning,

and recognised it by its flight as a Pferocles, and as Pt. exustus is

never found in forest, it must have been Pt. fasciatus. The closely

allied Pt. Lichtensteini occurs in immense numbers near the Abyssinian

coast, and this also flies to water in the dusk of the morning and even-

* When Jerdon speaks of this bird’s breeding in Central India, I believe he

means Basta, not Nagpir, and still less Malwa,

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 189

ing, not in the day, as other sand-grouse invariably do, though I did

not notice it as early in the morning, as I did Pt. fasecatus.

I occasionally met with Pé. fasciatus about Nagpir and Chanda, but

it is much less common there than in Guzerat.

802. Pterocles exustus, Temm. I obtained the eggs close

to Nagpir on December 27th, and again not far from Woon, north-

west of Chanda on February 21st, 3 in each case. Jerdon says the

central rectrices in the female are not elongated. It should be, are

less elongated than in the male. The whole description of the female

must have been taken from some other bird by mistake. The abdo-

men is quite different from that in the male being closely barred, the

chin and throat are orange buff, breast isabelline with black spots, an

imperfect blackish gorget, then a broad unspotted space, and then the

closely barred abdomen.

Family Puastanips.

803. Pavo cristatus, L. The train is rarely full grown

before April. Peacocks not unfrequently shew the presence of a tiger

by flying up one after the other from a particular spot in the jungle.

In the hot part of the day, both animals resort greatly to the thickets

of jhow or “ bastard cypress” (Tamariz indica) in the beds of rivers.

* 812. Gallus ferrugineus, Gm.

813. G. Sonneratii, Temm.

For the relative distribution of these birds see J. A. S. B. for 1867,

Wool. XXXVI. p. 199.

Family Trerraonips.

814. Galloperdix spadicea, Gm.

Common in the Taptee and Lower Nerbudda valleys, and in the

jungles around Chota Oodipir.

815. G. lunulosa, Valenc.

I have shot this bird a little west of Nagptr near Hllichpir, but I

never noticed it further west.

Precisely on the same grounds as Jerdon, viz. Geographical distri-

bution, I come to exactly the reverse conclusion, viz. that Galloperdia

is a form with African affinities allied to Pternistes, but it would take

too long to give all my reasons here.

818. Francolinus vulgaris, Steph.

190 Ornithological Notes, chiefly on some birds [No. 3,

819. EF. pictus, Jard. and Selby.

For relative geographical distribution, see J. A. 8S. B. for 1867,

p. 200. I have since been assured by Captain St. John, that he has

shot J. vulgaris close to Khandalla. I cannot help thinking he must

be mistaken, though I believe he knows the two forms well.

In the Transactions of the Literary Society of Bombay, Vol. I1,p. 216,

Captain McMurdo asserts that there is a third partridge inhabiting the

Wagur district of Cutch, distinct from both the painted and black par-

tridges, but resembling the former. What can this be? Dr. Adams

says the bird in the hills below Kashmir, differs from that in the plains.

Lieutenant St. John assures me, that the Persian black partridge

differs from the Indian. Are the two species confused under £. vwl-

gars ?

828. Perdicula erythrorhyncha, Sykes. This bird has

the habits of a Perdicula and not of a quail. Its range is wider

than stated by Jerdon, I shot it to my surprise in high jungle between

Chanda and Sironcha. I also obtained it at Khandalla close to Col.

Sykes’s locality.

Family Turnicip2.

I only shot one species near Chanda and Nagpur, Turnia taigoor,

Sykes. ‘

Order GRALLATORES.

Family CHARADRIIDE.

841. Rhinoptilus bitorquatus, Jerdon. I mentioned

my having seen this bird near Sironcha in the Ibis for 1867, p. 462.

I did not obtain a specimen. The locality was in very wild open

forest jungle about 15 miles east of Sironcha.

852. Chettusia gregaria, Pallas. I killed a specimen about |

40 miles south of Nagpur. JI also saw this bird, or another species of

Chettusia, near Nagpur.

859. Cidicnemus crepitans, Temm. I have seen this

bird in considerable numbers in Upper Burma, near Pagan. Jerdon

does not mention its occurrence east of the Bay of Bengal. I think —

there must be a Burmese specimen in the British Museum from my

collections, but I am not sure. It probably does not occur in Lower

Pegu, in Arracan, or in the Malay peninsula.

1869. | of Central, Western and Southern India. 191

Family Sconapacipa. ;

870. Gallinago stenura, Temm. I have never met with this

bird in Western or Central India, though for two or three years I

examined every bird Ishot, and I doubt if it occurs there. It is not in

Sykes’s list nor in that of Dr. King. Beavan, Ibis 1868, noticed the

early arrival of the snipe in Burma which I can confirm from my own

knowledge. At Poona it never appears before the middle of October,

and then the birds are all G. scolapacina so far as I know. I believe

it will be found that the birds are almost as late on the Western

coast about Bombay, at all events sportsmen do not go out to shoot

them before October, and generally not before November, whilst

around Calcutta very fair sport may be had in September. This is

strongly in favour of G. stenwra not occurring in Western India, for

it certainly is the earliest to arrive in any numbers in Bengal. About

Calcutta, G. stenwra seems to disappear in December and January,

doubtless migrating further to the south-east: I have lately in those

months examined bags of 30 to 50 birds, without finding one speci-

men. It abounds again, I believe, in February and March.

Family Ratu.

Podica personata, Gray. I suspect I saw this bird on the

river at Beypur. It is likely enough that this Malay form might

occur in Malabar, and unless this were the bird, I cannot conceive

what it could have been. It swam and looked something like a grebe,

but flew away when approached. It was certainly neither grebe nor

duck, and I suspect it was a Podvca.

192 [ No. 3,

Descriptions of two new species, belonging to the genera V aranvs, and

FeEranioiwEs respectively, from near Agra; by A. C. L. Carteyte,

Ksq., Curator, Riddell Museum at Agra.

[Received 22nd February, read 3rd March, 1869. ]

Order.—_SAURIA.

Family —V ARANID A.

Genus.—VARANUS.

Species.—T. ornatus, Carlleyle.* (vide p. 196).

Habitat.—Neighbourhood of Sikandra, near Agra.

Specific character.—Ventral shields, from gular fold to loin, in 116

transverse series. Total length of specimen, 29} inches. Length of

body alone, from end of snout to root of tail, 143 inches. Length of

tail 153 inches. Length of head, from end of snout to nape, 2 inches.

Breadth of head above, from ear to ear, 2 inches. Circumference of

body, at thickest part, 6? inches. Length of fore leg 33 inches.

Length of middle toe with claw {th of an inch. Length of hind leg

4 inches. Length of second posterior toe with claw, (which is the

longest,) l inch. The body of this specimen is longer, in proportion,

than in either V. dracana or V. lunatus. ,

Description.—Scales of the greater portion of the back oval and

slightly, or obtusely, keeled. Scales on the rear of the neck round, very

prominent—almost tubercular, pretty sharply keeled, and raised, in

their centres, almost toa point. Scales of back between the shoulders.

also pretty sharply keeled. The small shields of the abdomen and

under side of tail, are of an oblong oval shape, with a slightly

raised, gently rounded, boss, or convexity, in the centre of each,

surrounded by a narrow depressed border. These convexities are

* Mr. Carlleyle suggests that a new generic name be introduced for the land-

Varani with a round tail. These have beén already called by Fitzinger Psammo-

saurus, but the distinctions, as likewise those pointed out in some other forms

of Varani, have not been by other naturalists considered sufficient to justify a

generic separation. A thorough review ofall the various species from different

parts of the world would, no doubt, be very desirable, for it is at present difficult

to accept several of the numerous generic names suggested, because they are

generally adapted to certain type species only, and a discrimination between

what is to be called a variation of a genus, or a section, or a sub-genus &c. is by

no means easy. It seems rather certain that these limits vary in different

Species, and that they have to be determined in each instance according to the

characters of the group of animals to which they refer. (ED.)

1869. ] Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles, 193

easily depressed by force, so as to form little shallow hollows

instead; but the narrow border, surrounding each of them, still re-

mains marked and unmistakable. Small shields of the breast and

throat hexagonal, also with a central convexity and narrow depressed

border. Shields- of under side of hind legs, pentagonal, in other

respects similar to the last. Shields of under side of fore legs the

same, but much smaller than the scutes of the under sides of- the

hind legs.

Anterior frontal scales of head slightly keeled, transversely. Pos-

terior frontal scales larger, but not keeled. Vertical scales,—a small

circle of eight scales, with one in the middle of the circle,—in the centre

of the vertex. Superciliary scales small and granular.

Seales in centre of chin long-shaped, but very small and granular,

and arranged in regular longitudinal series, anteriorly converging.

There is a slight shallow, longitudinal groove in the centre of the

upper surface of the snout,—which mesial, supra-rostral groove, though

common to and peculiarly characteristic of all the Varani, is not

noticed at all by Giinther, in any of his descriptions, although it ap-

pears plainly enough in his plate showing an upper view of the heads

of V. dracena, V. lunatus and V. nebulosus.

The nostrils, in the present species, form an elongated, curved, and

rather narrow slit, situated, on either side, about + of an inch in front

of the eyes, and a little over 4 an inch from the end of the snout; or

much nearer to the eye, than to the end of the snout.

The eyes are situated further forward, or nearer to the snout, than

in either V. dunatus, or V. dracena.

The ears are situated about # of an inch behind the eye.

Ooloration and markings.—These are very peculiar, and the colours

very bright and beautiful, when the animal is alive, or only recently

dead; but the bright colours fade away very much, after the skin is

stuffed and dried,—a change which gradually took place in the stuffed

skin of the present specimen, little remaining but the black markings,

the original yellow ground colour much faded, and some slight traces

of the formerly existing orange tints, which towt ensemble of conspicu-

ous hues, gave the animal quite a gaudy appearance, when it came

first into my possession, quite fresh, or, indeed, then still half alive.

194 Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. | No. 3,

The upper surface of the snout is marked with some black dashes.

Vertex and occiput of head black. Another line runs from below

the eye to the ear. Another black line, or stripe runs from behind

each eye, on either side, to a point above the ear, and then continues

backwards, on each side of the nape, to the middle of the back of the

neck, where it stops. These two lines, or stripes, thus converge, and

nearly meet on the back of the neck. The ground colour on either

side of the black stripe which runs from behind the eye is of a bright

gamboge yellow, forming two longitudinal bands of yellow behind the

eye, with the black stripe in the midst. A black stripe also runs, on

either side, from the back of the ear to a point between the shoulders,

where these two lines unite, forming an acute angle of which the apex

is directed posteriorly. A single black stripe runs from the centre of

the occiput backwards, to the centre of the angle formed by junction

of the two black stripes which run from the ear to a point between

the shoulders, and unites with these lines there, dividing the receding

angle in the midst. Rudiments of smaller black lines, converging

towards the same point, and pale inky, or ashy-black, shadings, appear

between the larger converging stripes. From the apex of this pos-

teriorly directed angle of black, between the shoulders, a norrow lon-

gitudinal black stripe runs backwards along the centre of the back, to

near the root of the tail—but not quite reaching it,—tapering off

more and more finely in a posterior direction, until it disappears

above the lumbar region. Ground colour of the back of the neck,

between the black stripes, a bright orange, when the animal is living,

or but recently killed, (fading after the skin is stuffed). The sides of

the neck and shoulders gamboge yellow, and marked with several

round, blackish ashy coloured blotches, or oced/z,—two on the shoulders

being the most conspicuous. Sides of body, and sides of back, marked

with round gamboge yellow spots, or blotches, with ashy coloured

cloudings between them. General ground colour of back, pale

greenish ashy, mixed with bright yellow. No rings, or marks, on the

under side of the throat, which is of a dirty white colour. Belly

white.

Tail round, with not the slightest sign of any longitudinal ridge,

keel, or crest,— 2nd more thin and tapering than in either V. dracena

or V. lunatus. ;

ae Fl) eel a

‘

1869.] Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. 195

Legs short; toes rather slender, and shorter, in proportion, than

those of V. dunatus.

Head much flattened, or depressed.*

Teeth 10 in upper, ant 10 in lower jaw, short, conical, and slightly

recurved.

This is a true dry-land Varanus: the only two individuals of this

species which I have seen, having been found in the most dry, and

dusty places possible, far removed from water; and both were found

in the neighbourhood of Sikandra, not far from the high road from

Agra to that place.

I would here take the opportunity of observing, with regard to

Varanus dracena, and V. lunatus, that I cannot imagine why Giin-

ther has called them “ Water Lizards,” as they have nothing to do

with water, and are always found in the driest places !

I would also remark that Varanus flavescens has nothing in

common with the above species, and should, I think, form the

type of a separate genus, or sub-genus, as a link between the

true land Varant, and the Hydro-saurt. For, being a decidedly

aquatic species, Varanus jlavescens has a strong and deep longitudinal

ridge or “crest,” on the upper side of the tail, almost like that

of a Hydro-saurus. The head also is higher and more triangular

than that of the true land Varani; and the scales of the body are

larger, and so strongly and sharply keeled and pointed, as to form a

most marked distinction. The dentition also is different.

And V, flavescens, besides, has not the ‘ central—supra-rostral

_ groove,’ which I before mentioned as distinguishing the true dry-

land Varant. Both Varanus dracena and V. lunatus are very com-

mon about Agra; I have, therefore, had full opportunity of comparing

my new Varanus with numerous specimens of those two common

species. V. nebulosus is not found here. |

I think Giinther is mistaken in ascribing only “ ninety” transverse

series of scutes, from the gular fold to the loin, to V. dracena ; for

all the specimens of that species which I have obtained here, have not

* The photograph from which the sketch on p. 196 is taken shews the head

to be remarkably broad and the snout short, what principally distinguishes this

Species when compared with V. lwnatus, and other known Indian forms. Un-

fortunately the photograph is not clear and is was impossible to give much

more than a correct outline of the head. (Hp.)

196 Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. [No. 3,

less than 95 transverse series! While in a specimen of Varanus

flavescens, in my possession, on the other hand, I find only 67 trans-

verse series (at most) instead of ‘‘ 70,” as given by Giinther! I find,

also, that V. Junatus has, more commonly, less than “105” series ;

or, generally, about 103. The longest specimen of Varanus lunatus

in my possession, measures 2 feet, 9 inches; and the longest specimen

of V. dracena, 3 feet 6 inches.

It appears to be a law of nature, that the more terrestrial any

species of Varanus is, the greater in number, and the smaller in size,

are the transverse series of scutes, on the under side of the body; and

the more aquatic any species of Varanus is, the lesser in number and

larger in size these series of scutes are. .

LS .

a. eR

he % “” a

veg tee iter

A LRENG NTT SEN

AN Lee eet esata

owe , 8 Oo

OOO HAI VOY OP cow

Fos. 12 aoe SE orreaus. Figs.3-4 Ferq7aatdes SOTOURLLE.

Order.—OPHIDIA,

Sub-Order—COLUBRINI INNOCUI.

Family —HOMALOPSID &.

Genus.—FERANIOIDES (Gen. Nov.)

Species.—F", Jamnetica, Carlleyle.

Habitat.— River Jamna, near Agra.

Date of capture.—March, 1868.

Specrfic character.—Scales in 29 series. Entire length of snake, from

1869. ] Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. 197

snout to end of tail, 2 feet, 1 inch. Length of tail 8h inches. Circum-

ference of body, at thickest part, 24 inches. Length of head, from

end of snout to nape, $th of an inch. Greatest breadth of head across,

4th of an inch.

Description.*—Body thick, for the size of the snake. Head thick,

broad, somewhat Cerberine in appearance, and distinct from the neck.

Tail short, rather quickly but evenly tapering, and slightly compress-

ed laterally, so as to form a sort of ridge on the back of that part.

Plates on top of head (posterior to nasals, and above eye) large

posteriorly, and small anteriorly, |

2 | |

Beiby |

and arranged as 3 or | | |. Anterior frontal plates 2, triangular,

2 ob Apel

with the two outer sides rounded. Posterior-frontal plates of a

curved, diagonally elongated, or oblong, irregular pentagonal shape,

situated (with regard to their greater axis) in a somewhat diagonal

position to the central longitudinal line that divides the frontal

plates in the midst. The anterior side of these post-frontal plates

is concave. Vertical plate pentagonal, longer than broad, shaped

like an elongated heraldic shield of which the lower point of

the shield runs posteriorly, for about one quarter distance, be-

tween the two occipitals. Supraciliary plates (one over each eye)

smaller than the vertical, of a sub-conic form, or semi-elliptical

shape, curved over the eye, and truncated posteriorly, of which

the broad base abuts posteriorly, against the advance of the two large

occipital plates. These are very large, each an irregular sided hexagon

(the two posterior sides of the irregular hexagon being very small,

the other sides long,—especially the outer). No plates towards the

nape; the nape being covered with multi-angular, pentagonal, quadri-

* This interesting new species was pointed out to the author of this paper by

Dr. T. C, Jerdon who, as stated in the Proceedings of this Society for March,

p. 105, contemplated to describe the same in his forthcoming work on the ‘“‘ Rep-

tiles of India,’ but who was so courteous as to disclaim the priority of publica-

tion, when requested for his opinion on the matter.—The snake principally differs

from Ferania by its round pupil, and is in this respect one of the rare instances

recorded among the Homatorsip#, most of which have a narrow vertical pupil

of the eye. The dentition would also appear to be peculiar, but on this point

our information is as yet very deficient regarding a large number of our Indian

snakes, (HD.)

198 Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. [No. 3,

lateral, and ovoid scales, of which the three most anterior and central

ones are the largest and most conspicuous; the first central scale of

the nape. of the neck, which fits in at the posterior angle of the

junction of the two occipitals, is pentagonal, snd the largest. In

reality, the occipital plates do not cover the whole of the back of the

occiput proper, or do not reach to the nape; so that, the first dorsal

(or rather cervical) scales are, in fact, situated on the occiput: and

hence the head of this snake looks as if only the anterior half of its

upper surface, were covered with plates, and the posterior half with

scales. This is a strongly marked peculiarity which at once serves

to distinguish this snake.

Nasal orifices narrow-shaped and curved, partially covered with a

valve (capable of being closed over the orifice, when the snake is

under water), the nasal slit being situated, in part, between two

plates, z. e. the pre-nasal, and post-nasal; the pre-nasal plates (one

on each side) being large, situated straight in front of the anterior

frontals, and are shaped somewhat like an uneven dise of which a

portion, posteriorly, has been cut out, leaving a sort of receding angle

in the posterior margin of the plate. And each pre-nasal plate is

also cleft posteriorly, from near its centre, by the nasal slit,

thence making a short curve backwards to the line which separates the

pre-nasals from the post-nasals. The latter are situated rather laterally,

being small and oblong shaped. The rostral plate is pentagonal, shaped

like a triangle rising from a parallelogramic base of equal breadth

with the base of the triangle, and the apex of the triangle extends

nearly half way back between the two pre-nasals. Upper labials, on

right side 6, on left side 5; the third labial entering the orbit.

The most posterior upper labial plates (the 6th labial plate on one

side, the 5th on the other) very large. Posterior to the proper lateral

upper labial plates on each side there is a largish sub-temporal plate

placed above two small plates. Temporal plates, proper 4, small.

Post-ocular plates 2, situated one above the other. Ante-ocular 1,

curved, long transversely. Loreal 1, smaller, of an irregular shaped,

quadrilateral figure. Median lower labials 2, very small, and situated

one behind the other. Lateral lower labials 6, on each side, the two

anterior lateral lower labials, on each side of the median lower labials,

very long. Chin shields 2, very large.

1869. | Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. 199

Hyes, rather small, round; dark ash coloured, with a round white

pupil.

Scales, smooth, not keeled, generally oval-shaped, and in 29 series.

Ventral plates proper, (irom the throat to the anals and including

throat plates,) 153. Pra-nasal plates 4, in pairs,—or in other words,

two bifid plates. Post-nasal plates 7, in a transverse series of 4 and

8. Sub-caudal plates proper 100, in pairs. Total lower plates of

under-part of body, 264.

Colouring and markings—Markings on plates on the top of the

head of a sort of puce, or olivaceous mouse-brown, or a muddy

olive chocolate colour. A narrow yellowish white curved line runs

longitudinally along the centre of each of the occipital plates, and

extends to the nape. Anterior upper labials marked with dark

blotches. A broad, dark olivaceous brown, narrowly-black-edged,

stripe, runs along the cheeks, from the posterior upper labials, to

beyond the gape, backwards, as far as the side of the neck. A yel-

lowish-white stripe runs from the back of the eye to beyond the

occipitals, as far as the back of the neck, on each side, posteriorly,

and is again produced anteriorly as a narrow streak in front of the

eye, then running round across the pre-frontals, (just behind the nasals)

to meet the corresponding line on the other side; the angular curve

of the streak as it crosses the front of the head, becoming lineally

attenuated. There is a muddy olive chocolate coloured, longitudinal

stripe on each side of the nape of the neck, on the scales which lie

immediately at the back of each of the occipital plates, which unites

anteriorly with the dark colouring of the head plates. A longitudinal

broad stripe of the same dark colour, occupies the centre of the nape,

which unites anteriorly with the dark colouring of the central head

plates, and blends posteriorly with a large broad, oblong shaped,

centrically narrowed, muddy olive-brown coloured, and narrowly

black-edged blotch, occupying the whole of the back of the neck. A

transverse, irregularly shaped, narrow, yellowish space, or band, runs

off transversely, laterally on the neck, from each side of the dark nape

mark, and divides the large dark blotch on the back of the neck,—on

each side,—from the dark cheek stripe, and unites below with the

yellow of the sides of the neck. A dark line runs longitudinally

through the pre-oculars and nasals. Vertical shield of the same dark

200 Descriptions of two new species of Reptiles. [No. 3,

colour. The whole of the dark markings on the top of the head, and

centre of the nape, form a united figure resembling a barbed arrow-

head, of which the shaft is broken off a little behind the posterior ends

of the barb; the point of the arrow-head being directed bOrAEDe and

terminating on the pre-frontals.

Whole of back marked with large, broad, round, or oval-shaped, oli-

vaceous mouse-brown or dark schistaceous olivaceous blotches, edged

with black; these blotches are sometimes separate, or distinct from one

another, and sometimes confluent,—and in the latter case they resemble

some kinds of chintz pattern. The dorsal blotches become much darker

towards the tail,— and, at length, become quite black cross-bands on the

tailitself. Between each of these broad dark coloured blotches, there is

a narrowish, greenish-yellow transverse band, which unites below with

the bright yellow colour of the sides. Ground colour of sides, bright

yellow, but marked with a double line of lateral dark, lozenge-shaped

and irregular shaped spots, large and small, of the same colour as the

transverse blotches of the back. The larger of the lateral lozenge-

shaped spots sometimes alternate with the lateral extensions of the

dorsal blotches,— being sometimes situated in the midst of the yellow

lateral interspaces. Ground colour of ventral plates yellow, marked,

in irregular alternation, with square-shaped black spots, which generally

go in pairs, or alternately 1 and 2, and sometimes singly, with alter-

nate yellow interspaces.

Teeth very small, apparently 22, in upper maxillary : 5th tooth, on

each side bifid :—hindmost tooth broad, short and thick, or tubercular.

There appear to be (as far as I can see) either 14, or 16 teeth in the

lower maxillary: hindmost tooth longer than the others, sharp and

recurved : second hind tooth also sharp and recurved.

While at Allahabad, the year before last, I bought four living snakes

from a snake-catcher, which I think I might find reason to class in

my new Genus Feraniordes,—if not actually identical as to species

with the individual above described.

In colouring, they somewhat resembled certain snakes which I re-

member seeing in the Calcutta Museum collection, named by Blyth

“ Pythonella,”’ and by Giinther ‘‘ Homalopsis,” the Homalopside

being the family to which the Genus Ferania and Feranioides

belong.

wey

reba & it wakrece re

Monthly Means of the princi / rologi vali

principal Meteorological Blements and actual Rain fall recorded at the Calcutta Observatory for twelve years, from 1856 to 1867 ; by G

, 856 to 5 O

3 by GOPEDNAUTH Sn, im charge of th

; e Observatory.

Tupruary.

Marcu.

APRIL,

ANNUAL.

JANUARY.

]

| ermometers.| S Thermometers. qd 5 Thermomet E

———— ee directii = ; revaili i i ag Be oe é ee

: on ps ion| 5 a 5 aa Prevailing direction Za 5 = |Preyailing directio: = g a sia - ee

: Et Oe E eae E Be AGE ie) | Da [Wee | cs of Wind. Years. | fall of 2 Thermometers. iS

! / § Mean. | Mean. | a Me. a Me % 4 a z Shut | eet * ie : :

F = an. | ean. a ; , 5 ‘ i 2

1856) 1.06) 3 63. é3.| 0.7 i is Inches.| 0 Tachas 0 - [ z eae : a st :

an Se 72) N el ad 0.70] NW & W 2,93) 29.860| 80.2 74.9] 0.77] § B, 8 & § 2736] S58) 7 ye

38) 0.07): : 2. |/29'887] 75.0 .68| 8 & W 0.96) : 74.9) 0.77) S B, S&S W 0.62) 29.726) 85.8) 79.3) 0.7 ache luck

Fre | reece oe ee wa ane 5 i 69 $& sw 1:80|29'760| 83.2] 762 of s &SE 1856 6423 | 29.789 | 791 | 744

0 | o| 74.6) 718, W & N 4 3) 72.7] 66) S&S 0.97/29.772| 86.2) 77.8] ar | 6807 | 29.778 2| om

| | i : 23/30, Bis) 72) OHS Blraeah coe a as 97 | 99.778] 78.9 | 73.2

él 5.8 & Fryer meee een ere ecg 7 He 28-808 p é n

: yo a eae Pee Lee Ae ey eeengew |e ae ais) ae al

63 0 d -. |29.995| 73. TS & "i 80.8] 72.7} .68]/S SW 0.31) 29.71 Fy pleeate eae oo 261 | 29.7 142 a6

| et 0 ea 130 20.040 71.6 “al vNGE 1 84) 60.8) G6) 8, NS W melon Gaal Gaal alee 1 | 8040 | ae7m| iso | tae | tr

65 -0) -66 47 29.939) 72.7 ‘671s % 82.9) 73-1] .58)8 & S W 2.43) 2 : : ay ‘i a ie a

65 Ha) 67) Sin oe (2-1 67,5 GW 4 70.8 4 EEG te en 83 bits | 307 :

: 0a 20,050) 72-7 iT 79.1] 70:8) .63|S & 8 W | 162] sols | ets | 90 | tad

66 0! 72 Ls 13-1 -67| NW & W 99.990] 7 7 SW poaloe Sebel: bk re i

| if : | ta) foal ses iE a eee 6 15 | 29.763] 79.0 | 734

| 67 0 70) 3.74 29.956] 70.3 69) B, N & W 2 : as WesW Tall: eal aa np | bias | ang :

31120) oy Be een 9] teal we Wea 428/29.795) 845) 77.7] 60) 8 & SW 65 22) 99.798) 791 | 731 2

May. Fa 2] NEO CBS NY er | va7e | aosea| aoe | tao | 44

4 JUNE | : : = a

, JULY.

~ a : Augus

i . a 0 Inches ae

S56 8.18)29.650/ 85.0] 79.6) 0.77) S & SE | | sal 8 Tnchest 7

: ce eee 12.67 29.94 S&S W 10.94/29.499) 33.2) so2los7|$ aS H sae Seale

58) D 86.0 80.0) 75) S&SE 8.99. 99.530 ois 8 82.9] 79.5|| 88 30) 29.642) 82.4) 79.7) 0.88] S & S E First heavy or conti

a. : . eu a 28 : - op m5 ope ie Be ee ee 5 vy or continuous falls of Rain from and after the

: . | 61 73, 2 : 33 3 1 OU. 5, & 29 F A ts * a

Bl 610| § B14) “| S «SE Shes 9) 29. 854| S814] 83) S&S B ab erelucee ele eat meee leaeree oe ae call

2} 38020684 834} 790] 148 a| 8 & SW 17.92|29.532] $8.9] 80.7] 86] 8 & SB 29.605 836 805] SEE” 58 | ath May ra) rea

Basha : nhl 3 ye Bi 10.93) 29.534 83.1 79.8) 85) S, H & 8 W 29. fel Gag) cael Sage 30 | _Gik Mey 85 i

(ano) 33 Ba ys ess SeSE 1931/29.515 $32 802) 87 SSE cate Gaal oul cueea Bo | 16th Jan ip |B aay

55) 15 29 $4.6) 77.5 68S & S&S E .22/29.519| 83.4| 79.8) .82| 8, SB 20.555] 828| 797| sg, 80 all 8 | ats Je

: pele 115) 03/868 E aletseta SAE 33 79.8) .82 S,SHGE 10} 29. 5) sel th June 66} 9th

66 2.56/29.646) 87.0] 80.7) 73'S SSW&SSE S&SW 12 20.6% 83.4 79.9) .83] § 34) 29 al nae ine eee ee er] aun uy

! | | sone Me 58 3. J] 85/8, SSH&SE : 2, 9] (86!

| WV &8 | 1544/29.557/ 37/807] 85/S'SW,8W& S| 18.50129.607 Bae Sot a sea e eeaa

Sepremper. - —. = |

= Re : No continuous or heavy falls of Rain after the

| pI ioe anos 1856 | 18th Oct. Gale May 14th and $

miles aa : ze ) " 517 | 1th Oct. Gale M ‘Yy and Sept. did

00) 85) HESE AG Le ea Na 29.965 7521 69.10.76 NW &N Genel Gaal 2h oot

30.5 85 S,SE& J i JNGNY < -|29.969) 75.2) 69.7/0.76) N Wi & =. 80.025) 6 2 0H

Mere ee NE es 7 NW. We N esr 20888) 218-01) Go a eo NEW &N = Joost] eral oral aN W GN mo] ayn ga Se

| S04 Sew i NW WEN |. [80.017] a8] 67.8) 75) W, NWN i.o8|30.034| 667/619] 18] N, NW eae

7| 80.1] 841s. eae 7 S&N «1 |29.955] 743) 68.4) .75 NNW&SW Sgnardl Gael Gaal cae R ee 2 | 240 Ov

8] 79.6] 86\3,&SE ch 77.3| .83)N & 8 "PR Seoeg ea Re NeENW.. ee eee) Odea pe il ENS Nana B | | Tth Oct.

7| 796| 85 S,SE & 2 3. TT s Boo aaa a5 Meso PSO) Nt Niw dizg|30.008| Goal Gal vN a WwW G4 |22nd Oot, _ Cyclone October

8) 801] 828682 6. Nos 126 291048 752| os min uz0)z06 b00) M08) NG ih | 2h Oa pats

3] 810] 84SSHGS | 20: 848] 84.4 77.4) .68) W & S 2.89) 30.033] 75.6] 69.3) 71) N & NW SOREN Ceo aot etee uae mf Os Gal

1) 30.3] 86 SW& 7.83) 29.838| 81.9] 77-7| .80|NN W& N (20.090) 76.4) 60.1) “67 N & NW 2 [Boos m0) Gay] s)N, Wes TE ——_,

L lice oA SSE 845|20.860| 812 769 79NHGUNG | Yeslsoois| Mil Goel “NENN Do § S000) dra thal aN NSAy

PACRGET Ga) Cae) uA w+ [30.079] 67-1] 60-7] -68| N, NNW & N

GNNE “ |30.077| 67.9) 61-7] .69| Ne NNW My

JOURNAL

OF THE

ok LC OB OCTE TY.

—o——

Part I.—PHYSICAL SCIENCH.

No. IV.—1869.

LLLP LLL ELL

Contribution towards the knowledge of Indian Arachnoidea ;

by F. Sroniczxa, Ese., Ph. D., F. G. 8. &e.

(With plates X VIII—XX.)

Received 7th April, read 5th May, 1869. ]

With the exception of the Canmnrerata, and probably the Crusra-

ceA, few other branches of Indian Zoology have received so little

attention as the AracunorpEa. It is really surprising to see, how

very few species of Indian Arachnoids there are recorded in the

leading works on the subject by Walkenaer (Aptéres) and Koch

(Die Arachniden &c.), when compared with the great number from

other foreign countries, which one would suppose to be in this respect

much less known than India, Walkenaer’s descriptions of the Indian

new species are, besides, often insufficient, to be of much use; they are

generally too short for the purpose of specific identification. A good

number of Ceylon and some Indian Aracunorpza have been, however,

carefully described by Koch. Those of the Indian Dutch possessions

were, to a large extent, worked out by Dr. Doleschall :nd the Mauritius

and Madagascar species have been monographed by Vinson. Several

additions to this fauna were also lately made by Count Keyserling,

Blackwall, and others.

: 26

202 Indian Arachnoidea. [No. 4,

One of the most important works for the study of Indian Arach-

noidea is Savigny’s excellent figures in the ‘“ Descript. Scient.

de l’ Egypte,” although his number of new species will have to be

greatly reduced, if Walkenaer’s identifications prove to be correct.

With the very wide geographical range, which many species of spiders

are known to possess, I expect Western India will have a great

~ number of identical species with Arabia and Egypt, the Southern

portions of the Peninsula with Ceylon and partially also with Mauri-

tius, the Southern Burmese and Malacca country with the Philippine

and other islands of the Indian Archipelago. There are undoubtedly

some Western Indian species the same as the Arabian, and probably

Kuropean, but I have as yet so very few materials from that part

of the country, that I abstain at present from quoting specific

names ; a list of them will be given in due time. Of the Arachnoid

fauna of Bengal and the North Eastern provinces we scarcely know

anything, for only very few species appear to have as yet found

access into European collections. I may here remark that the dis-

tinction of the faunas which have been pointed out in the verbebrate

animals between Western and Eastern India,—the one with an admix-

ture of African, the other with that of Malayan types,—appears to

be fully confirmed through the study of the Aracunorsga. It is

really remarkable that in examining a collection of spiders from our

Eastern frontier, together with another made in Western India, often

scarcely a single species will be found to be identical to both parts.

Bengal has a strong admixture of Malayan types, and several species

are common to it and Assam and Burma. The Western Hymalaya

mountains possess in the Arachnoid fauna a prominently Huropean

character, as their general climate would lead us to expect, the

Hastern Hymalaya probably contain some Chinese or Malayan types,

but of this we know exceedingly little.

It is strange that not only dislike, but a real enmity and ill-feeling

against Arachnoids, seems to have taken hold of men’s minds. ‘“ Un-

heeded, or regarded with repulsive loathing by the ‘ cuz bono’

people of the present generation” says an able writer* who did

observe many a magnificent tropical Arachnoid! No doubt, the few —

species which secrete a poisonous fluid in special glands, and through —

* Dr. A. Adams, in Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1847, XX, p. 289.

OO —_—— ee SSS Ue Ur ee

1869.] Indian Arachnoidea. 203

its use occasionally become dangerous, are the source of all this ill-

feeling which has been extended to the most useful animals. Harmless

they are certainly on the whole, and as regards usefulness scarcely

surpassed by any other class of animals. They wholly live on

insects and destroy a very large number of those which often

create great damage to either animal and vegetable life. Thus

they are important agents in sustaining a proper balance in’ the

economy of nature, and their usefulness actually increases, 8, by their

not being dangerous in such a way, as insects often are.

These are, however, not the only reasons which entitle the ARracu-

NoIDEA to a fair share of attention on the part of every observer of

nature. Their instinct is often higher developed, than we find it in

insects. This instinct not only shews itself in the way in which they

obtain their living, but also in the art of weaving in which they may

be said to have been the teachers of man. Actually almost their

whole life is nothing but a carrying out of clever arrangements,

resulting from a certain amount of thought and deliberation. The

beauties of colour, the curiosities of form, &c. which they exhibit, are

equally remarkable and interesting. It is, therefore, only natural that

some of our oldest classic writers have expressed their admiration of the

works and the talent, exhibited by Arachnoids, in the most inspiring

language, and many a beautiful idea in the mythology of the Greeks

and Romans is interwoven with their manners and their mode of life.

It is unnecessary for me to go here into those historical and other

accounts, to excite interest and attention to the study of the Arach-

noids,—they speak for themselves. At the same time, I believe,

I am justified in saying that there are very few branches of zoology,

which would reward the zeal of the student with greater success, as

regards new forms of animals, than the Arachnoids. Almost every-

thing that we see and observe about us is a novelty to science ; for

if it is not actually so as to mere form, it is pretty certain to be so as

to the real value in the study of geographical distribution, &e.

Several years elapsed since that I began to collect materials for a

Monograph of the Indian Scorrronrpa#, having in view to initiate

the study of the Arachnoids in this country by the description ofa

group, the animals of which are more generally and better known than

common spiders. I found, however, that it would be probably many

204 Indian Arachnoidea. 3 [No. 4,

years, before I should be able to go on with this work ; but meanwhile

[have collected a large number of species from various orders of the

class, and out of these I have on this occasion selected a few charac-

teristic species of each family. I have only omitted the aquatic

(Pycnogonripm and Cotopopa) and the parasitic forms (AcaRma).

They are too minute to be observed with ease, though of the AcARINA

some such species, for instance as those which in very large quantities

destroy the leaves of the tea plant, will be worthy of examination.

Of the other orders, the Prprparpr, (including PsruposcorPronEs)

Sontirua#, Puatanaipea and Aranerpna, I shall of each describe one

or more species. One of the chief objects of this selection of various

species, of all of which illustrations* are here given is, as I said, to

attract the attention and at the same time also to facilitate the study

of the Indian Aracunorpga. I hope that, with the assistance of friends,

who will collect those species which they find in their neighbourhood,

we may obtain the materials for a work which may form a parallel to

that magnificent publication of the Ray Society, ‘‘ the English spiders”

by Mr. Blackwall. The Indian Museum is a safe custody for all these

objects, and Ishall have already to mention in the present paper

a few species, for which I am indebted to Dr. J. Anderson, the Cura-

tor of the Indian Museum; they are species collected by Messrs.

Peel, Gregory and Haughton in Assam and adjoining districts.

Central India is also very rich and will, I hope, furnish many species

of spiders and scorpions.

Order, PEDIPALPI.

This order includes those ArAacHNompEA in which the palpi are

prolonged, often strongly thickened, and terminating with moveable

claws or cheliceres, The scorpions may be called the typical forms of

the order. One of the most important recent essays on the classifica-

tion of Pedipalpi is by Dr. Peters, printed in the Monathsberichte of

the Berlin Academy for 1861.

TELYPHONUS, Laér.

The Telyphont externally very much resemble the scorpions, but

they have, in place of a segmented tail with a sting at end, a simple

* The measurements are always given in millimeters, so as to avoid differ.

ences which may result from the use of a geographical and an English inch.

—_—— —« =

1869.] Indian Arachnoidea. 205

multi-articulated seta, and are therefore harmless. They also have

the feet much longer than the palpi, while in the scorpions the

contrary is the case. Lucas published, 1835, a monograph of the genus

- in Guerins “ Magasin de Zoologie,” which is simply copied by Gervais

in Walkenaer’s “‘ Aptéres,’’ vol. iii. Koch ‘‘ Die Arachniden” &e.

vol. x, and other authors, have since described several other species.

The North American ScorrtionipH have been monographed in 1863 by

Mr. Wood (see Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc., Phil., 2nd ser., vol. ii, p. 358).

The species of Telyphoni are all remarkably like each other, and it

is very difficult to find any striking distinctions between them. In

habits they are quite similar to the scorpions, living in damp places

under stones &c.; not unusually they are met with in houses.

Telyphonus Assamensis, Séo/. Pl. XIX, Fig. 1.

Body depressed, all over finely granulated; general colour above

dark brown, blackish on the thorax and palpi, paler on the abdomen

and feet; below, the same parts respectively still paler and more dis-

tinctly reddish.

The thorax is much longer than broad, surrounded with a thin,

raised margin ; its front part is sub-triangular, somewhat higher than

the rest. The anterior angle, near which the two central eyes are

situated is obtuse; the central eyes themselves are slightly prominent

and separated from each other by a round smooth tubercle. The region

of the lateral eyes is also slightly prominent, two eyes, of which the

lower is much the larger, being contiguous, and situated on the front

side of the prominence, while the third is the smallest and somewhat

more distant. The posterior part of the thorax which is nearly double

as long as the anterior has, on the surface, numerous depressions of

which a central longitudinal groove is the most conspicuous.

The palpi are about as long as the abdomen, they are very stout.

The first moveable segment has 4 spines on the upper inner edge,

the last two have a common base and the outer one is the stronger ;

the upper anterior edge has only onespine, and the lower two subequal

ones on a common base, The second segment which is very obliquely

_ articulated to the first has one small spine on the lower front edge ; the

third has anteriorly one inner long process, and the fourth a smaller

internal one, but a much larger external, articulated and slightly

curved,

206 Indian Arachnoidea. [No. 4,

The maxille are very short, pointed, horizontal. The feet of the

first pair are the thinnest and longest, the metatarsi, { or should these be

considered as the tibiz ?] are one long segment, the tarsi are made up of

8 short points and terminate without claws. The other feet are much

more robust, the fourth is longer than the third and the third longer

than the second, the last two being sub-equal. Hach of the feet has only

a very short thick metatarsus, and the tarsi consist of four joints, the

last of which terminates with two strong claws; on the fourth pair

of feet there is usually a fifth segment well defined.

Below, the front part is occupied by the immoveable base or the

basal segment of the palpi which forms a broad triangle, separated

longitudinally by a groove next to which in front there is a very

strong slightly curved spine. The coxe of the three last pair of feet,

(the first being articulated much higher) are broad, almost contiguous,

leaving behind the last only a small triangle as the rudiment of the

sternum.

The abdomen is much elongated with sub-parallel sides ; it consists

of aminute first and 8 other larger segments, each of which has about

the centre a pair of rounded depressions. Below, the first segment is

the longest and the two subsequent ones, are very short ; in the centre

of the first the sexual opening is situated.

The seta is very slender, longer than the abdomen, attenuated

towards the end, and consists of from 35 to 40 short segments, gradually

becoming smaller toward, the tip; occasionally some of the middle

ones are a little longer than others. The base of the seta is formed

of three segments, the last being the longest and cylindrical, the two

previous more flattened and very short.

The size of this species varies very much. Young specimens are

often found scarcely half an inch long, and others more fully grown

which exceed two inches; the last are the largest I have observed;

the former also differ in colour, being usually more reddish brown,

while older ones are dark or blackish brown.

*Length of the thorax 16-4 m.m.; its width about the middle 10 m.m.

11 m.m.

abdomen 22 m.m. ;

* The nomenclature of the different parts of the body will be fully under-

stood by a reference to the explanation accompanying the plates.

1869. ] Indian Arachnoidea. : 207

Length of the abdominal seta (including the base) 31.5 m.m.

Bm ERS CHEMICCTOS Cd. iinoc tee se rece sccocccece 29.0; 5 a

Pol one joot Of thefirst pairs ses.case..-ceee 7:0) Same

a —— 2nd -—. ..... POR See 50:0) Ga

a ——————_ ——. 3rd —— .......0.00.... 84.0 ,, ,,

~ Ath ea UN shee AGIO ss

What distinguishes the present species in particular are the

Various depressions on the thorax, the entirely vertical position

of the posterior lateral eyes, the thin raised margin which surrounds

the thorax and abdomen, and the long seta with very numerous small

segments. TZelyph. spinimanus, Lucas, of unknown habitat, is very

closely allied to our species, but the feet and palpi are in proportion

_ to those of ours shorter, and the tarsi of the first pair of feet not

so numerous. Another still more closely allied species is described

by Mr. H. C. Wood from China as Telyph. Stimpsonii (Proc. Acad.

Nat. Sci., Phil., 1861, p. 312); however the palpi, or cheliceres,

of this species are described as somewhat different, the denticulation

of the first moveable segment being very similar, but the third is

larger than the others, which is not exactly the case in our species.

The third segment has in 7’. Stimpsonii two minute spines above

and the terminal internal process is bifid, and the processes of the

fourth point are strongly serrated, while in the Assam species the

process is not divided, and the upper spines on the third, as well as

the strong serration of the fourth are absent.

Loc. Assam. A large number of specimens of this species has been

sent by Messrs. Peel, Haughton and Gregory. These specimens vary

in size from half an inch to two inches, but they evidently are only

different stages of age of one andthe same species. The young speci-

mens are sometimes of a quite uniform reddish brown colour and

have comparatively a longer tail than the old ones, while the spines

on the second (externally the 1st) segment of the palpi are not perfectly

developed. The species lives in damp places under stones, and is also

often met with in bath-rooms of houses, in company with true scorpions.

My colleague Mr. V. Ball informs me that he also procured a species

of a Lelyphonus in Western Bengal, it may be the same as the present,

but more likely another species which Koch describes from the Hast

Indies. Several specimens of this species also exist in the old collec-

tion of the Asiatic Society, but no record of localities exists,

208 Indian Arachnoidea, [ No. 4,

Order, SOLIFUG AK.

Family, GALEODIDAE.

The animals, forming this division of the Ar ines, have the

general form of true spiders, the abdomen being distinct from the

thorax, it is, however, distinctly annulated and not provided at its

end with any kind of spinners ; the palpi are of a somewhat similar

form and length, asthe feet. The peculiarity of the abdomen and

the palpi has caused the separation of this single family of the

GaLEopIDz into a separate order. The animals are, besides, characterised

by the horizontal form of the falces, terminating with an upper fixed

and a lower immoveable claw; they only have two eyes, like the

Phalangia, placed on a common tubercle on the thorax; all of them

also appear to have a number of wing-like appendages on the lower

side of the anterior portion of the last pair of feet; the physiological

functions of these appendages is however, I believe, still unknown ;

they only live in warm climates.

Koch published a monograph of the family in vol. viii of the ‘ Archiv

fiir Naturgeschichte” 1842, p. 350. The author suggests a division,

according to the number of segments of the tarsi, in Solpuga, Lich-

tenstein, Galeodes, Olivier, Aellopus, Koch, hax, Hermann and

Gluvia, Koch. A few additional species are recorded by Gervais in

Walkenaer’s “‘ Aptéres,” vol iii, p. 90, but very few other species

appear to have been described since. The Indian species mostly seem

to belong to the genus

GALEODES, Oliv.

These have the tarsi of the 2nd and 3rd pair of feet with 2, and

those of the 4th with 8 segments. There have been, I think,

three species named from India. The most common, said to have

been already known to Aristoteles, is the Bengal species Gal.

faialis, Herbst. (Ungefliigelte Jns. p. 32, pl. I, fig. 1), which has the

cephalothorax nearly triangular, considerably depressed and channeled |

in front, the appendages of the fourth feet nearly sessile, and these

last more hairy than the others. A second species was named by

Gervais, G. brevipes, and is said to be from Nepaul (Walkenaer,

Aptéres, vol. iii, p. 87). It is stated to have a short and stout body,

athin lamina in front of the head (cephalothorax) which is nearly |

‘

1869.] Indian Arachnoidea. 209

smooth and brownish, the abdomen elongated oval, the feet short and

pale reddish, the tarsi brown, and the falces strongly denticulated,

blackish. With neither of the species can the one here described

' from Western Bengal be identified, but a fourth species, apparently,

from Central and Northern India, was named by Capt. Hutton, Gal.

(vorax 7?) (see Journal Asiatic Society Beng., vol. xi, pt. IT, 1842,

p. 857). Capt. Hutton gives there a very full and interesting account of

the habits and manners of a large species of Galeodes. It is said to

occur in Northern India, the Punjab and Afghanistan. The usual size

is 24—22 inch., and the abdomen is equal to a thrush’s egg. Capt.

Hutton’s description is in other respects so general, that it would be

impossible to identify any species with it; I can only say that neither

the form nor the size of the body of the new species, here described,

appear to coincide with the account given of G. (vorax 2), while the

common Indian species, Gal. fatalis, is often said to reach the same .

size as the last, and I rather think it doubtful if they are distinct

species.

The Galeodes appear to be common all over India, but especially

in the South. Mr. H. F. Blanford tells me that he observed them

in large numbers and of great size inthe Trichinopoly and Arcot

districts. It would be especially interesting to observe these, and

also those occurring in Western India, and to compare them with the

Persian, Arabian, and Egyptain species, from which countries many

are known.

Galeodes orientalis, Sol. Pl. XVIII, Figs. 4—5.

Q. General colour above yellowish brown ; the terminations of the

falces dark brown; eyes black; abdomen blackish grey, pale at the

sides ; feet yellowish, brown in the middle; the last ante-terminal

segments of the palpi brown; below, uniform whitish or yellowish.

The cephalothorax is sub-quadrangular, broader in front than

. behind, the antérior part is considerably higher than the posterior,

sloping in front towards a sharpened, dark brown edge, deeply indented

just before the projecting corners ; along the whole of the posterior (and

partially lateral) edge there is a very deep groove present ; the surface

is finely granular, and like the median segments covered with longish

hairs, those of the abdomen being, however, much more numerous and

210 Indian Arachnoidea, [No. 4,

shorter than others. The falces are a little longer than the thorax, the

two segments being strongly inflated, thickly set with moderately long

stiff hairs; and two dark brown longitudinal stripes on the upper side of

each are distinct. Their claws are attenuated, slightly incurved; the

upper isfinely serrated inside, the lower moveable joint being the strong-

ger one ; they are unequal, the left pairof the falces being distinctly longer

than the right one, and each of them has, above near the claws, one long

horny appendage, something of the form of a plume. The palpi are

much longer than the entire body from the tip of the falces to the anus,

they are very stout; the last or terminal joint is the shortest, inflated

at the end, internally supplied with a brownish lamina, which has on

the inner side a circular rather prominent field, and next to it on the

outer side are two small tubercles, one below the other.

The three segments forming the thorax are distinctly separated and

. become gradually smaller towards the abdomen; the last pair of feet is

by far the longest, then come the third and the first which are nearly

of the same size, each of them being about equal to the length of the

whole body. The first pair is without claws, the other pairs each

possess two slender claws. All the feet are covered with numerous

long and very thin hairs, unequal in size; on the first pair and on the

palpi some of them are particularly elongated.

The abdomen is eliptical, composed of 9 segments, thickly covered

with short hairs, equally narrow in front and behind, where it is

slightly raised; in fresh specimens it is somewhat inflated, but in

dried ones it becomes more flattened ; the ventral side, at the beginning

of which the stigmata and the genital opening are situated, has central-

ly a deep longitudinal groove; the anus is terminal, situated in an

almost perpendicular slit; the abdomen is, as stated before, blackish

grey above, yellowish on the sides and below.

g. Themaleis perfectly similar to the female in form and coloura-

tion, but very much smaller; it has'the left falces also a little longer

than the right ones, and both with similar plume-like appendages ; the

palpi appear to be in proportion a little longer than they are in the

female, (though not so well expressed in the figure, the body having

been made a little too long); the penultimate segment is dark brown,

the last one has at the end a white skin, slightly emarginated and

folded at the terminal edge.

o.™

. 1869.] Indian Arachnoidea. 211

9 3

_ Length of the cephalothorax, .........ss0+6. 6 m.m. 4 mm.

PET ALONE, Ou lileccialevlap cheeevekeadeweces ite A.Bralpey,

‘Length of the three awe segments, ... 9,4, 5, 315) Aa,

Length of the abdomen, ..........ccsceseeees WD 5) 54 8.5 Soa

Madth: ,, ,, 3) 4 in the-thiddle,./::!. Blin de Dit 2 ae

Bemenion ohne pal pis elo Welle ee Pe || ea eg

Length of one of the first pair of feet, 33 ,,,, 18.5 ,, ,,

——— —__—___—_ 2d ........ ee DT ee ons Lal WT ai

—_——- St) nae oad BB. je A

—— Aah Decides SOD S. Hllay BBs ia

This species most Bowell resembles the one figured by Savigny (in

the Exped. de l’Egypt, &c.) as G. arenoides. Koch (Archiv fiir

Naturgeschichte, viii, 1842, p. 353) considers it distinct from the

Kuropean G. arenoides of Pallas, and names it G. Arabs. This

Species is, according to Koch, pale yellowish, with two brown stripes

on the falces, two large spots on the cephalothorax, and a longi-

tudinal stripe on the body. The present species differs from it

by the want of any spots on the cephalothorax and by having in both

sexes the palpi much longer in proportion to the body.

Loc. The two figured specimens were obtained by Mr. T. H.

Hughes in the Birbhtim district of Western Bengal; I have also

obtained lately some specimens from the neighbourhood of Delhi

through Mr. R. Mitchell; the species appears to be common there.

Order, PHALANGIDEA.

Family, PHALANGIDZ.

The Puataneip# belong to a small division of Arachnoidea, which

have the cephalothorax not distinctly separated from the abdomen,

but, in other respects, greatly approach true spiders; they have the

feet usually very long and slender in proportion to the body, and

the thorax bears on a prominence two large eyes ; in some species two

other small accessory eyes are said to exist ; the falces consist of

two segments the second of which is didactylone at the oat possessing

~ amoveable short claw.

The vitality of the feet of the Phalangia has been often noticed,

and I would call the attention of any one interested in the subject to

212 Indian Arachnoidea. [No. 4,

a very interesting paper of Mr. Lindemann in the Bull. Soc. Moscau

vol. xxxvii, pt. Il, (p. 537). The author describes here the mus-

cular system with some detail, and points out how the Phalangia use

their two alternate pairs of feet when moving about. The paper is

important because this mode of muscular actions as well applies to

the largest number of other Avrachnoidea.

Koch in his “ Uebersicht des Arachnidensystems,’’ Niirnberg, 1839,

pt. I, referred the Gatzop1ipmand Puataneipz tothe order SoLirues,

and the genera allied to the Poa.aneip# he separated into 5 families

TroguLips, Srtronip#, GonyLerTipm, CosMEeTIDm™ and Opinion,

the last named being equivalent to the present family PHaLANGIDz,

which have the last pair of feet similar to the others, the cheliceres

or palpi without spines, &c.

The distinction of genera in this family is now sadiaksesbly based

upon the form of the thorax and the spines surrounding the eyes.

Strictly speaking they are to a great extent merely convenient

sections, for those characters pass so gradually one into the other,

that a strict generic definition, in the manner proposed by Koch, is

quite impossible. Koch’s previous divisions of 12 generais onthe

contrary based upon the number of tarsal segments, and seems in some

respects preferable; but it is scarcely necessary to say that no single

characters alone ought to be taken as leading in such cases.

The English species of this family were monographed by Mr. R. H.

Meade (Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist., 1855, vol. xv, p. 893, with additions in

vol. vii, 1861, of the same Annals). Koch (Arachniden, vols. ii and

viii) described a large number of European and foreign species, but

only very few Asiatic, and hardly any Indian ones.

GAGRELLA, Nov. gen.

Koch has proposed the genus Le1osunum to include those species

which have the edges of the eyes smooth, no processes on the palpi and

a short body with very long legs. To some other, apparently Asiatic

species with one horn on the abdomen and 25 segments of the Ist, 3rd

and 4th pair of feet, Koch gave (Arachniden vol. xvi) the name Acan-

thonotus, (see Koch’s Uebers, d. Arach., pt. II, 1839), but this name has

already been applied in 1835 by Owen to an Amphipoden Crustacean.

It seems to me, however, that there issufficient ground for a new generic

separation of the species with a spiny abdomen from Levobunum, for in

1869. ] Indian Arachnoidea. 213

this genus the segments of the body are distinctly traceable above, while

in Gagrella the upper surface is almost uniformly coriaceous, only the

terminal portion consisting of distinct segments. As regards the position

of the eyes with their smooth margins, and also as regards the form of the

palpi, falces, feet, &c., both genera aremuch alike. In Gagrella the meta-

_ tarsal and tarsal segments are very numerous, differing with the length

of the feet ; the former vary from 5-8 on the Ist and 3rd _ pair of feet,

and from 7-15 on the 2nd and 4th pair, the latter vary from 20-30 on

the Ist and 8rd and from 30 to about 100 on the others; all the joints

of the tarsi become very gradually shorter towards their terminations,

and each of the tarsal and metatarsal parts is provided at its end with a mi-

nute spine. Herbst described from the Hast Indies a brownPhalangium

monocanthum which has the thorax posteriorly truncated. Koch describ-

ed from Bombay an Acanthonotus niger (Arach. xvi, p. 61, p. 159, p.

1541) which also differs from the next species in the form of the body.

Gagrella atrata, Stol. Pl. XVIII, Fig. 2, Pl. XX, Fig. 11.*

The whole body is finely granular, above entirely black, below ashy or

brownish ; the falces or cheliceres, the two terminal segments of the

palpi, the anterior small portions of the femora and the tarsi yellowish

or pale brown, the rest of the feet, &c. blackish brown.

The cephalothorax is somewhat semilunar, convex, in front

provided with two short spines, at the lateral edges emarginated

opposite each coxa; posteriorly it isconcave, witha double raised margin ;

the tubercle, bearing the eyes laterally, is situated somewhat below the

middle: it is narrow at the base and furrowed along the middle. In

front and at the sides of the ocular tubercle there are, besides, some

indistinct depressions on the surface of the thorax observable.

The falces are thin, equal to about two-thirds of the length of the

palpi, with the terminal claws brown. The palpi are also slender and a

little shorter than the body, terminating with a single strong claw.—

The lip is very small, the so-called maxille rather long, and in

common with the projecting bases of the palpi provided with short

soft papille. The sternum is long, broader posteriorly, slightly

concave at the sides and with the front edge, under which the sexual

opening is situated, somewhat raised. The coxe are long, depressed,

__* This represents a more common variety with a shorter body, than the one

shewn in Fig. 2, Pl. XVIII.

214 Indian Arachnoidea, [No. 4,

with serrated edges; the feet are long and slender, the second is the

longest, a little more than ten times as long as the body, then come

the 4th, 3rd, and Ast, the last two being subequal, and a little more

than half the length of the first. The single claws are distinct only

on the two last pairs of feet. The abdomen is about one-third longer

than the thorax, with subparallel sides, and very obtusely pointed

posteriorly ; the surface is slightly convex, coriaceous, with the seg-

ments,—except the last three which are situated low down,—very

indistinctly marked; a little before the centre it has a solid almost

perpendicular spine. On the lower side there are only five segments

very distinctly marked; below the base of the sternum there is on

each side a small trachean opening.

Length of the thorax 2-2; mm.; its width 4.5—5 m.m.,,

--- abdomen 4.7— 5.38 m.m.; ————-- 4.5—5 ,, ,,

aa one foot of the first pair, .........s00008 22 m.m,

2nd — ot eee

8rd nn, BO 3)

4th —— ooo. 5 te |

Loc. Neighbourhood of Calcutta; I obtained a few specimens in

an old native hut, and some others among old branches of wood. The

animals are very quick in their movements.

Gagrella signata, Stol. Pl. XX, Fig. 10.

The entire body is finely granular, a yellow line begins at the front

end of the thorax, divides just before the ocular tubercle, each branch

becoming widened and extending along the lateral margins of the

abdomen posteriorly ; the middle part of the abdomen is purely black,

the rest of the thorax and the feet brown with the joints darker, the

palpi and falces on the lower surface rather pale, the sternum and

abdomen partially ashy. |

Tkis species which in general form resembles the former, differs

considerably in colouring. The body is rather short, or broadly oval;

the cephalothorax has no spines in front, it has, however, a double

ridge posteriorly, but the margin is moderately concave. The abdomen

has one high and nearly perpendicular spine placed beforethe centre. The

under surface is also quite similar to that of the last species, the coxe

being flattenedand serrated on theedges&c., (see fig. 10a). The most

1869. ] Indian Arachnoidea. 215

important distinction consists in the length of the feet ; those of the se-

cond pair being the longest, nearly 18 times longer than the body, the

tarsi are equal in length to the each preceding segment respectively ;

the first pair of feet is scarcely longer than one half of the second, and

is the strongest ; the 4th comes next to the second but is much shorter,

while the 8rd is only little shorter than the first.

Length of the thorax 2.7 m.m.; its width posteriorly 6 m.m.

ae abdomen 5.2 m.m.; —————— — 5.95555

ccna one of the first pair of feet ......... 50 m. m.

See 2nd —————. ........ 95 ,, ,,

—— 8rd —————........... AEE erat

4th -——-——.......... Coie wees

Loc. This species was sent by Mr. Peel to the Indian Museum, from

Sibsaugur in Assam; it appears to be very rare; I have not observed

it anywhere about Calcutta.

Order, ARANACEA.

Family, LINYPHIIDZ.

HERSILIA, Savigny.

This genus was established for a species, H. caudata, from Egypt,

eollected during Napoleon’s expedition to that country. Lucas

published in 1836 in Guerins ‘‘ Magasin de Zoologie” some valuable

notes on the genus, pointing out its peculiarities as regards the position

of the eyes, the great length of the slender feet and that of the two

posterior appendages of the spinners. Lucas also described two species

from the Malabar coast, H. indica and Savignyi, but Walkenaer

(Apteres, I, p. 372,) considers the latter to be a young specimen of the

former, though (1. cit., vol. 111, p. 433) he again does not seem to be

certain of his former suggestion. The same author separates here

Hersilia into two groups which he calls ‘‘ Heteropodes” and ‘‘ Ortho-

podes,” in the former the third pair of feet being very short, in the

latter subequal to the others. The species which I shall here describe

belongs to the former group; it is quite distinct from either of

the two forms noticed by Lucas, but it is rather similar to a species

described by Blackwall from one of the Cape de Verde Islands

(St. Jago); I shall, however, point out the distinction of both (see Ann.

and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1863, 3rd ser., vol. xvi, p. 80).

216 Indian Avrachnoidea. [No. 4,

It is difficult to find an appropriate position for the genus, but from

the general appearance of the body and the distribution of the eyes, it

seems to me that Hersilia has a great relation to Linyphia. Its habits

are, however, very similar to those of Phdlodromus, and the same is

the case as regards the proportionate length of the feet; it may, .

therefore, be also correctly placed near, or in, the family THomisipa.

There are several species found all through India, Burma and the

Malacca straits. I have observed them mostly on palm-trees, the bark

of which they much resemble in colouring; they are sometimes also

called mangoe spiders.

Hersilia Calcuttensis, Stol. Pl. XX., Fig. 9.

9. Cephalothorax scarcely broader than long, the ocular region

narrow and strongly elevated, the posterior region with the lateral

margins strongly curved, with one longitudinal central and two

transverse fine grooves; the anterior part is the smaller. The grooves

and the margins are partially dark brownish, the rest is yellowish,

thickly covered with short white hairs.

The eyes are in exactly the same position as in the type species ; the

two anterior on each side form with the posterior laterals an ascending

triangle, and the atiterior laterals are very small, situated in front and

below the posterior laterals; of all the eyes the anterior centrals are

the largest. The immediate region round each eye is dark brown.

The falces are shorter than the sternum, sub-cylindrical, at the base

rather contracted, pale brown with moderate dark brown claws.

The lip is broadly semicircular, short; the maxilla semewhat

higher, thick at the base, attenuated towards their ends and strongly

converging. The palpi are thin, more than double the length of the

falces; they are yellowish with black tips; the lip and maxille are a

little darker than the other organs.

The sternum is almost broader than long, flat, greyish brown,

thickly set with hairs, anteriorly emarginated, posteriorly obtuse,

The feet are slender and very long, the first being the longest, then

the second, which is only a little shorter than the fourth, and then comes

the third which is about equal to one-half of one of the second pair.

The colour is pale yellowish with dark terminations to the joint.

No bands are traceable.

1869. ] Indian Arachnoidea. pS te